P.P.S.T. SCIENCE SERIES NO.

PANCASIDDHANTIKA
OF VARAHAMIHIRA
WITH TRANSLATION AND NOTES

BY

T.S. KUPPANNA SASTRY

C R I T I C A L L Y EDITED

WITH INTRODUCTION AND APPENDICES

BY

K.V. SARMA
Adyar Library and Research Centre, Madras

P.P.S.T. F O U N D A T I O N
ADYAR, MADRAS
1993
Published by :
P P S T Foundation,
P O B 2080,
Adyar,
Madras 600 020
(India)

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

First Edition 1993

Printed i n India

By V i p i n Sachdev, Printers Plates,

, Royapettah H i g h Road, Madras 600 014
 PREFACE
T h e Pancasiddhantika of the sixth century astronomer Varahamihira is a major work on
mathematical/astronomy of early India. T h e work is particularly significant for the fact that,
besides providing an insight into the level of contemporary development i n the discipline, it forms
also a resume, though uneven, of five astronomical schools, to wit, the Vasistha, Paitdmaha, Romaka,
Paulisa and Saura, that were i n vogue i n India d u r i n g the early centuries of the ChrisUan era, but
whose original texts have not came down to us and are lost on account of improved astronomical
systems having been developed in course of time.

There have appeared two earlier edidons of this cryptic technical text, the first by G . Thibaut and
Sudhakar Dvivedi (Banaras, 1889) and second by O . Neugebauer and D . Pingree (Copenhagen,
1970-71). But both these editions have limitations and imperfections, even as their editors themselves
have indicated in their Introductions to the said editions. T h e main difficulty in gaining a proper
understanding, let alone producing a correct edition, of the Pancasiddhantika has been confounded
on account of all the available manuscripts having descended from a single corrupt archetype. This
aspect of the matter cannot be better expressed than i n the words of G . Thibaut i n the Preface (p.v.)
to his edition of that work. H e says :

" I m p e r f e c t a n d f r a g m e n t a r y as (the) text a n d (the) t r a n s l a t i o n are, we m a y

assert, at a n y rate, that i n o u r e n d e a v o u r s to o v e r c o m e the q u i t e u n u s u a l obs-
tacles w h i c h the c o r r u p t a n d b a r e text o f the P a n c a s i d d h a n t i k a o p p o s e s to the
i n t e r p r e t e r , we have s p a r e d n o t r o u b l e . T h e t i m e a n d t h o u g h t d e v o t e d to the
present v o l u m e w o u l d , I m a y say w i t h o u t e x a g g e r a t i o n , have a m p l y sufficed
f o r the e d i t i n g a n d e x p l a i n i n g o f twenty times the a m o u n t o f text p r e s e n t i n g
o n l y n o r m a l difficulties."

Hence the need for a further attempt for a better edition and interpretation o f this important text
on early Indian astronomy.

T h e present edition which is based o n all the available manuscripts of the text and also external
testimonia and which takes into consideration the work o f interpretation attempted i n the two pre-
vious editions, presents as critical and readable a text as is possible on the basis of the above-said
material. T o this is added a literal translation with explanatory words added as necessary. This is
followed by detailed explanatory notes i n terms inclusive of modern mathematics, and adumbrated
with tables and diagrams. Whenever computations are involved, illustrative examples are given
and worked out. T h e r e again, most of the chapters are provided with explanatory introductions
indicating the general contents and method o f approach of the matter contained i n the chapters.

T h e above work has been a labour of love pursued by the late P r o f T . S . K u p p a n n a Sastry, for-
merly Professor i n the Sanskrit College, Madras. A scholar i n Sanskrit, a student of modern
mathematics and one fully conversant with Jyotissastra, Prof. Sastry was an ideal combination of
Indian and Western schools o f astronomy. A n d , as such, he was best fitted for the task of expoun-
ding a difficult text on Indian astronomy like the Pancasiddhantika.
VI PREKAC.E

When Prof. Sastry passed away in 1982, he left behind his handwritten manuscript which was in
different states of perfection. While the earlier chapters were in their final form, chapter X I V had
been left untouched and so also were verses 35 to 55 of chapter X V I I l . T h e later chapters, portions
of which had been issued in the form of articles, were in their rough draft form.

T h e above-said material was placed in my hands by Dr. T . K . Balasubramanian, Scientist, Bhabha

Atomic Research Centre, Bombay, Prof. Sastry's son, with the suggestion that the same might be
duly processed and perfected and made pressworthy and placed before the world of scholars in
printed form. As an academic associate of Prof. Sastry for nearly three decades, I accepted the chal-
lenge and set to work on it without delay. In this matter I had the cooperation of two eminent scho-
lars in astronomy. Prof. K . S . Shukla of Lu( know and Shri. S. Hariharan of Bangalore.

Work on Prof. Sastry's manuscript was twofold. T h e first related to the perfection of the existing
Translation and Notes and the supply of the same for the sections which were left out by Prof.
Sastry. Prof. Shukla translated C h . X I V with notes and diagrams and Shri. Hariharan supplied the
Translation and Notes for the verses left out i n C h . X V I I I . While the above was done at Lucknow
and Bangalore, respectively, in Madras, the end chapters were put in proper form. Alongside, the
endre manuscript, r u n n i n g to about 500 pages, was duly perfected. T h i s revision work included
also such matters as the crosschecking of entries, supply of diacritical marks to Sanskrit expressions,
marking off of paragraphs, making the presentation uniform, and several other allied matters. The
manuscript, revised as above, had also to be typed out and checked again. The large number of
diagrams occurring in the work were also drawn to scale with the use of geometrical instruments
and added at appropriate places.

T h e second task related to the critical editing of the textual verses. A draft press copy was pre-
pared on the basis of the readings adopted by Prof. Sastry. Copies of all manuscripts of Ponca-
siddhdntikd available at different repositories were procured and collated with the draft press copy.
T h e text in the two printed editions and in the external tcstimonia, which had also been assembled,
was collated similarly and the variants recorded. A n d , on the basis of the above, the final press copy
of the critical text was prepared. Varied typograph) for the half a dozen different items of the edi-
tion was also selected to setoff the same distinctly in print.

T h e resultant edition, provided with an Introduction and necessary Appendices including a Sub-
ject Index, is now placed before scholars. It is to be hoped that this edition of Pancasiddhantika will
contribute, in some measure, to the furtherance of the study and appraisal of early Indian
mathematics and astronomy.

T h e publication of this volume had been made possible by the generous contribution of friends
and patrons of academic studies. T h e Birlas made a gracious donation of Rs. 20,000/- and Dr.
T . K . Balasubramanian, of Rs. 5,000/-. T h e Rashtriya Veda Vidya Pratishthan, New Delhi, has
extended the major financial assistance in the form of purchasing copies of the book amounting
to about rupees one lakh. T h e most profound thanks are due to the above named patrons for
their kind gesture. Thanks are due to the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona,
Oriental Institute, Baroda, and National Library, Calcutta, for their kind cooperation
 \

PREFACE VII

by supplying copies of the manuscripts of Pancasiddhantika available with them. For the beautiful
printing and nice get-up, thanks are due to Ms. Printers Plates, one of the leading presses of Madras.
T h e P P S T Foundation, Madras, an organisation set up for the popularisation of Indian sciences,
has kindly undertaken the responsibility for the distribution of this publication. Last but not least,
my grateful thanks are due to Prof. K . S . Shukla and Shri. S. Hariharan, who, besides making their
personal contribution to the volume, had been available for reference and advice at all stages of the
work on the present edition of the Pancasiddhantika.

Madras,
January 4, 1993 K.V. S A R M A
 i

CONTENTS Page

PREFACE V

CONTENTS IX
INTRODUCTION XIII

Introductory - Source Material - Presentation o f the Text - Translation - Notes - Division of

Paricasiddhandka - C h . X V I I I of Paiicasiddhantika - T h e Five Siddhantas in PS ; T h e i r distribu-
tion - Content analysis of the Pancasiddhantika - Depiction of the Siddhantas in the PS - Compara-
tive study of the Siddhantas - Varahamihira : His life and works.

Page Page
Ch.I. I N T R O D U C T I O N Local Sunset time (15) 53
OF T H E W O R K Naksatra computation (16) 54
Sun's daily motion (17) 56
Aim of the Work (verses 1-2) 1
Karanas (18-19) 57
The Five Schools of Astronomy (3-4) 4
Vyatlpata and Vaidhrta (20-22) 58
Contents of the Work (5-7) 5
Sadasiti-punyakala (23-24) 64
Days from Epoch : Romaka (8-10) 6
Solstices (25) 65
Days from E p o c h : Paulisa (11-13) 11
Sankranti-kala (26) 65
Yuga of the Sun and the M o o n : Romaka
Tridinasprg-yoga (27) 66
and Saura (14-16) 15
R a h u (Node) (28-29) 67
Lordoftheyear(17-18) 18
Moon's latitude (30-31) 69
L o r d of the M o n t h (19) 20
Defect i n Bhadravisnu (32) 71
L o r d o f the H o r a etc. (20-25) 20
Defect i n Padaditya (33) 71
Names of the 30 days of the Parsi months 24
Defect in Romaka (34-37) 71
Ch.II. VASISTHA-SIDDHANTA:
PLANETARY COMPUTATIONS ETC. Ch.IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S : T I M E ,
PLACE A N D DIRECTION
Introductory 25
T r u e Sun (1) 25 Introductory 76
T r u e M o o n (2-4) 27 Table o f R Sines (1-15) 76
NaksatraandTithi(7) 33 Declinadon of the Sun and the
Day-dme (8) 34 M o o n (16-18) 87
Gnomonic Shadow (9-10) 35 Gnomonic shadow (19) 90
Lagnafrom shadow and vice versa (11-13) 37 Latitude from Shadow (20-21) 91
Sine zenith distance (22) 95
Ch.III. FAULISA-SIDDHANTA:
Sine Co-latitude and Day-diameter
PLANETARY COMPUTATION ETC,
(23-25) 96
Introductory 40 Cara or Oblique Ascension (26) 98
T r u e Sun (1-3) 40 Latitude from Cara (27-28) 100
T r u e Motion of M o o n (5) 45 Rt. ascensional difference (29-30) 102
Equation of the centre (5-9) 47 Rising Signs (31) 104
Cara or Oblique ascension (10) 48 T i m e to reach the Prime vertical (32-34) 106
Day-time (11-12) 50 Great gnomon (Sama-sartku) and its
Desantara (13-14) 51 shadow (35) 110
X c:oNrEN'rs

Page Page
Astronomer's qualifications (36-37) 112 T r u e Sun (I-3) 181
Gnomonic sfiadow and the prime T r u e M o o n (4-6) 183
vertical (38) 113 Daily motion of the Sun and the Moon (7) 185
Agra : Sine amplitude (39) 113 Rahu (8) 186
Latitude from Agra (40) 114 Parallax in longitude (9) 187
Shadow at desirea time (41 -44) 115 Declination of the Nonagesimal (10-12) 187
Timeafter sunrise (45-47) 118 Parallax correction and orbital
T i m e for Sunset (48) 121 diameter (13-14) 189
Shadow from time (49) 122 T r u e diameterofthe orbs (15) 191
Moon's shadow (50-51) 123 Moment of the eclipse (16) 192
Directions from shadow (52-54) 126 Eclipse diagram (17-18) 192
Sun from shadow (55-56) 132

Ch.V. PAULISA-SIDDHANTA: Ch.IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A :

MOON'S CUSPS SOLAR ECLIPSE

Introductory 137 Introductory 197

T i m e o f Moon's visibility (1-3) 137 M e a n Sun (1) 197
Diagram of the Moon's cusps (4-7) 143 Mean M o o n (2-4) 198
Daily rising and setting of the R a h u : M a x i m u m latitude (5-6) 201
M o o n (8-10) 147 T r u e Sun and M o o n (7-9) 203
Epicyclic theory 206
Ch,VL (VASITHA-) PAULISA-
Bhujantara correction 209
SIDDHANTA: LUNAR ECLIPSE
Udayantara correction 209
Introductory 152 Desantara correction (10) 209
Sun and M o o n of equal longitude (1) 152 MeanmotionoftheSunandtheMoon(lI) 210
Probability o f a n eclipse (2) 154 M o t i o n o f Moon's anomaly (12) 211
Duration ofthe eclipse (3-4) 156 T r u e motion of Sun and M o o n (13-14) 211
Total obscuration (5) 160 Kaksa of the Sun and the M o o n (15) 214
Direction of the eclipse (6-8) 162 Measure of the orbs (16) 215
Moment ofthe eclipse and its Sin Zenith Distance of Meridian
colour(8-10) 165 point(17-18) 216
Diagrammatic representation (11-13) 168 Drksepa ofthe Sun (19-20) 219
L u n a r and Solar eclipses G n o m o n (21) 220
Differences (14) 171 Parallax-corrected New M o o n (22-23) 221
Parallax in latitude (24-25) 223
Ch.VII. ( P A U L i : A - S I D D H A N T A ) :
Duration of the eclipse (26-27) 225
SOLAR ECLIPSE

Introductory 172
Ch.X. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A :
Parallax of longitude (1) 172
L U N A R ECLIPSE
Parallax in latitude (2-4) 176
Eclipse computation (5-6) 178 Introduction 228
Diameter of the Shadow (1-2a) 228
Ch.VIII. R O M A K A - S I D D H A N T A :
Duration ofthe Eclipse (2b-4) 230
SOLAR ECLIPSE
Obscuration at any desired moment (5-6) 232
Introductory 181 T i m e oftotal obscuration (7) 235
 CONTENTS XI

Page Page
Ch.XI. ECLIPSE D I A G R A M T h e Celestial Spfiere( 17-18) 270
Hemispherical B o v l and its use (19-20) 271
Introduction 236
H o o p and its use (21-22) 272
Marking the ecliptic etc. (1-3) 236
ArmiUary Sphere (23-25) 273
Markingof'p(jints of contact etc. (4-5) 238
Sun's northward and southward
Conversion olminutes into angles (6) 240
journeys (26) 273
Ch.XII. P A I T A M A H A S I D D H A N T A Instruments for measuring time (27-28) 274
Local longitude i n terms of time (29-30) 274
Introducuon 241
TheNadiorGhati(31-32) 275
Days from Epoch (1-2) 241
Conjunction ofthe M o o n w'th a Star (33) 276
T i t h i , Naksatra etc. (3) 243
Positions of certain Junction-
Vyatipata (4) 244
Stars (34-37) 277
Duration of a day (5) 246
Digits between the M o o n and a Star
Ch.XIII. S I T U A T I O N O F T H E in Conjunction and T i m e of
EARTH: COSMOGONY Conjunction (38) 277
Heliacal Rising of Canopus (39-41) 278
Situation of the earth (1-4) 248
Rotation of the earth (5-8) 249 Ch.XV. SECRETS O F A S T R O N O M Y
Situation of the Gods and Asuras (9-13) 250
Eclipses (1-10) 282
SignsandYojanas(14-16) 252
Situationatthe Poles (11-16) 286
Position of Lartka and L'jjayinI (17) 253
Weekday (17-18) 288
Measures of the earth etc. (18-19) 253
Day-reckoning (19-29) 289
Visibility ofthe Sun (20-29) 253
Astronomical observation (30-34) 258 Ch.XVI.SAURA SIDDHANTA:
Moon's visibility (35-38) 258 MEAN PLANETS
T h e Planets and their situation (39-41) 259
Introductory 292
Lords of the Months, Days and Year (42) 260
Mean positions of the Star-planets (1-19) 293
Ch.XIV. G R A P H I C A L M E T H O D S V M ' s B I j a corrections (10-11) 298
AND ASTRONOMICAL Ch.XVII. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A :
INSTRUMENTS T R U E PLANETS
Introductory 261 Epicycles ofthe planets (1-3) 300
Ascensional differences o f the zodiacal T r u e planets (4-9) 301
signs (1-4) 261 Special work for Mercury
R sine ofthe Sun's zenith distance for and Venus (10-11 a) ' 307
the given time (5-6) 264 Retrograde motion ( l i b ) 309
Right ascensions ofthe signs (7) 266 Heliacal rising (12) 309
Gnomon (8) 267 Latitudes of planets (13-14) 310
Local latitude (from the equinoctial
Ch.XVIII. V A S . - P A U . SIDDH.:
midday shadow) (9-1 Oa) 267
RISING A N D S E T T I N G O F P L A N E T S
Sun's longitude (lOb-11) 268
V-Shapedyasti(12) 269 Venus (1-5) 312
Moon's longitude (13) 269 Jupiter (6-13) 316
Cardinal directions (by means of a Saturn (14-20) 322
gnomon (14-16) 270 Mars (21-35) 339
XII CONTENTS

Page Page
Mercury (35-36) 341 T r u e Saturn (79-81) 363
Hints (57-60) 351
General (61-63) 353 APPENDICES

SPURIOUS S U P P L E M E N T : I. Verse Index 367

T R U E PLANETS II. Index o f P S verses quoted by later
astronomers 371
Introduction (64-66) 355 III. Bhutasaiikhya used i n the PS 372
T r u e Mars (67-69) 357 I V . Index o f Places, Persons and Texts
T r u e Mercury (70-72) 359 quoted in the PS 373
T r u e Jupiter (73-75) 361 V . Bibliography 374
T r u e Venus (76-78) 362 V I . Subject Index 377
 INTRODUCTION
1. Introductory

T h e Pancassiddhdntikd (PS) o f Varahamihira ( V M ) , (6th cent. A . D . ) , occupies an important place

in the history of early Indian astronomy, for, herein we have been given certain aspects of five sys-
tems of Indian astronomy current d u r i n g the first centuries of the Christian era. T h e work supplies
also considerable additional material on the astronomical concepts, computational methods and
instruments used d u r i n g the dmes o f the author. V M makes mention ofthe objectives ofthe work
towards its commencement:

purvdcdryamatebhyo yad yad srestham laghu sphutam bijam \

tat tad ihdvihalam ahum rahasyam udyato vaktum 11 1.1 |
Paulisa-Romaka-Vdsistha-Saura-Paitdmahds tuparkasiddhdntdh || 2 |
'Here, I shall state i n full the best of the secret lore o f astronomy extracted from the different
schools of the ancient teachers so as to be easy and clear.

'The five siddhdnta-s, of which this work is a compendium, are the Paulisa, the Romaka, the
Vasistha, the Saura and the Paitdmaha.

Following the above statement, V M specifies also how he is intending to deal with the said five
astronomical schools :

yat tatparam rahasyam bhavati matiryatra tantrakdrdridm \

tad aham apahdya matsaram asmin vaksye graham bhdnoh \ \
dik-sthiti-virmrda-karna-prarndna-veld grahdgrahdv indoh
tdrdgrahasarnyogam desdntarasddhanam cd 'smin 11
sarmmandala-candrodaya-yantra-cchedydni sdhhavacchdyd \
upakaranddy aksajyd-'valambakd-'pakrarriddydni \ \ 1.5-7 |

'I shall tell i n this work, avoiding all jealousy, the computation o f the solar eclipse which is
guarded as a great secret and i n which the m i n d of the astronomer reels. I shall also tell the occurr-
ence or non-occurrence of the lunar eclipse, the directions of the first and last contacts, the dura-
tion, the total phase, the 'hypotenuse' at any moment with related quantity of obscuration and time,
and also the mutual conjunctions of the stars and the planets and the computation of difference i n
longitude as also the prime vertical, moonrise, astronomical instruments and other requirements,
graphical representations, the gnomonic shadow, the sines of latitude, co-latitude and declinations
and such other matters.'

While the importance of the work i n the reconstruction of early Indian astronomy would be
apparent from the above statement, the paucity of reliable manuscripts of the work makes the pre-
paration of a correct edition o f the work a formidable task, affecting, i n its turn, a proper under-
standing, translation and interpretation of the work. T h e gravity o f the problem could be gauged
from what G . Thibaut has stated in the Preface to the first edition ofthe work (TS), issued in 1889.
He says:

1. The Pancasiddhantika, the astronomical work of Varaha Mihira. The Text edited with an original commentary in
Sanskrit and an English translation, by G . Thibaut and Mm Sudhakara Dvivedi, Leipzig : Varanasi, 1889; Rep. Lahore,
1930; Rep. Varanasi, 1968. (Page references made are to this reprint.)
XIV PANCASIDDHANTIKA

"There is some reason to fear that the feeling of any one who may examine in detail this edi-
tion and translation of Varaha Mihira's astronomical work will, in the first place, be wonder
at the boldness of the editors. I am fully conscious that on the imperfect materials at our dis-
posal an edition i n the strict sense of the word cannot be based, and that what we are able to
offer at present deserves no other name but that of a first attempt to give a general idea of the
contents ofthe Paiicasiddhantika. It would, in these circumstances, possibly have been wiser
to delay an edition o f the work u n d l more correct Manuscripts have been discovered. T w o
consideradons, however, i n the end, influenced us no longer to keep back the results, how-
ever imperfect, of our long continued endeavours to restore and elucidate the text of the
Paiicasiddhantika. I n the first place, we were encouraged by the consideration that texts of
purely mathematical or astronomical contents may, without great disadvantages, be submit-
ted to a much rougher and bolder treatment than texts of other kinds. What interests us in
these works is almost exclusively their matter, not either their general style or the particular
words employed, and the peculiar nature of the subject often enables us to restore with nearly
absolute certainty the general meaning of passages the single words of which are past
trustworthy emendation. A n d , i n the second place, we feel convinced that even from that part
of the Paiicasiddhantika which we are able to explain more is to be learned about the early his-
tory of Sanskrit Astronomy than from any other work which has come down to our time."
(p.v.).

About the manuscript material available to h i m and the editorial criteria adopted by him Thibaut
says in his Introduction to the edition:

" T h e present edition o f the Pancasiddhantika is founded on two Manuscripts, belonging to

the Bombay Government. T h e text ofthe better one o f those two Manuscripts is reproduced
in the left hand columns of our edition, while the foot notes give all the more important different
readings from the other Manuscript. A comparison o f the traditional text with the emended
one, as given i n the right hand columns of the edition, will show that the former had, in many
cases, to be treated with great liberty. Not unfrequendy, the emended text is merely meant as
an equivalent in sense of what we suppose Varaha M i h i r a to have aimed at expressing, while
we attach no importance to the words actually employed i n the emendadon." (p.lx).

T h e Pancasiddhantika has again been edited recently by O . Naugebauer and D . Pingree, (NP)^.
A n d Pingree too observes, on the state of the manuscript material: "The present edition of the
Pancasiddhantika does not solve all the remaining problems connected with this text. We suspect
that much will never be understood unless better manuscripts material becomes available." (Vol. I,
Intro., p. 19)

It, however, so happens that d u r i n g the hundred years that have passed by since the publication
of its first edition i n 1889 no 'really' new manuscript of the work has come to light. A few manus-
cripts that have become available,^ all go back to the two manuscripts used i n the first edition, as
shown by the commonality in them of omissions and corruptions which occur in the newly available
manuscripts.

2. The Pancasiddhantika of Varahamihira. Pt. I. Text and Translation by D. Pingree; Pt. II. Notes by O. Neugebauer,
Cobenhavn, Munksgaard, 1970.

3. For details. See below under 'Manuscript material'.

 INTRODUCTION XV

T h e edition of Pancasiddhantika which is now issued is also based on the manuscripts used for the
two above-said editions. T h e question that would naturally arise here would be: W h y then is the
need for another edition when no new source material is to be had? T h e answer is threefold:

i. First, it was felt that in reconstructing the text from the corrupt manuscripts, which alone are
available, both T S and N P have subscribed to an editorial principle voiced by Thibaut when he says:
"What, i n the attempt to reconstitute the text of an astronomical or mathematical work, has chiefly
to be kept i n view, is of course to arrive at rules which are capable of being proved mathematically.
This consideration has, i n more than one place, led us to introduce changes even where such
appeared hardly to be required by the external form o f the traditional text." (Introduction, p.lxi).
A n d , this they have done to an extent which seems to be hardly justified i n editing a classical text.
T h e n again, such emendations are often inserted without specific indication, especially i n the
edited text of N P , with the result that the reader takes the emended text as the 'real' manuscript
text. T h e translation and interpretations that follow are, primarily, based o n the emended text and
not on the 'real' text. In fact, an editorial principle which has to be applied with the utmost caution
and i n as limited a manner as possible, seems to have been used rather extensively.

In the present edition of Pancasiddhantika, the principle oisthitasya gatis cintaniyd, justification of
the extant reading should be thought o f , has been primarily adhered to, alongside the correction
of the copyist's errors by visualising the psychology of the scribe who is illiterate with reference both
to the language and the subject of the text. 'Real' emendations have been comparatively small and
far between. In all cases, however, when changes had to be made to the manuscripts readings, they
have been specifically indicated by their being placed within curved brackets i n the case of scribal
errors and i n square brackets i n the case of editorial supplementation. A n d , whenever there has
been an emendation, the reasons for suggesting the emendation have been given in the Notes that
follow each verse.

ii. Secondly, i n a number of places, T S nor N P do not seem to have caught the correct import
of the text and this has affected their Translation and Notes. A l l these have been attempted to be
rectified. In many places, the untenability o f the T S and N P readings, translations and notes have
also been pointed out.

iii. Thirdly, and what is most important, special effort has been made to digest the textual verses
fully, and offer, i n the case of knotty places and apparently vague passages, detailed interpretations
and elucidations, adumbrated with tables and illustrations. Moreover, a number of examples have
also been worked out to illustrate the rules enunciated by Varahamihira.
U n d e r the circumstances, it is to be hoped that the present publication will form another step
towards understanding and evaluating the principles and practices o f early Indian astronomy.

2. Source Material
A-B. T h e available manuscripts of Pancasiddhantika, of which five have been collated for prepar-
ing the present edition, fall into two recensions which have been designated as A and B . C o m m o n
corruptions and omissions indicate that even these two recensions go back to a common original
which too should have been far from perfect i n the matter of accuracy. T h e technical nature of the
work, brizzling with unusual terminology, have made the scribes commit all types of imaginable
errors except i n the case of well-known words and expressions. These errors include, as a reference
to the footnotes recorded in the edition would show, wrong spellings, etrauc sandhi-s and splitting
XVI PANCASIDDHANTIKA

of words, omission of vowel signs, verses made to stop short in the middle or to r u n into another,
numbering of verses i n the wrong places and so on. In several cases some of these corruptions are
common to all the manuscripts, confirming that these errors have to be traced back to a common
archetype of both the recensions.

T h e said five manuscripts have been designated A l , A 2 and B l , B 2 , B 3 , according to the twc
recensions and reladve reliability ofthe manuscripts. A l l the manuscripts are in paper, written in
Devanagari script.

A , . Ms. N o . 338/1879-80 of the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Pune, described i n A

Catalogue of Collections of Mss. deposited in the Deccan College by S.R. Bhandarkar (Bombay,
143. It has 22 folios with 11 lines per page. It is complete and has been copied at Stambhatirtha
(modern Cambay i n Gujarat) i n Sam. 1673,Saka 1538(AD. 1616),bySaAkarasonofGovinda.This
manuscript is the 'better of the two manuscripts' used i n the T S . edition o f the PS. T h e manuscript
is far from perfect and exhibits numerous scribal errors and some transposidons, but it is definitely
better than the B manuscripts.

A j . M s . N o . 49, currently preserved i n the National Library, Calcutta, but it originally belonged
to the erstwhile Imperial Library, Calcutta. It is i n 24 folios with 9 lines a page. It is incomplete and
extends to a pordon of X V I I I . 90 d. T h e writing is very readable but is very much error-ridden. The
readings are closely associated to A , .

Pingree suspects that it "agrees almost entirely with A (our A , ) of which it is most probably a
copy." (see his edition of PS, Introducuon, p. 20). T h i s cannot be a copy of A , for the reason that
there occur differences between the two, for which see I. 3c, 7d, 10a, 12a and a number of other
contexts.

Pingree doubts also that is "perhaps the copy utilized by Thibaut and Dvivedin" (Introduc-
tion, p.20). T h i s goes against Thibaut's statement that his "edition of PS is founded on two Manus-
cripts belonging to the Bombay Government" (T's Introduction, p. L X ) . It is also to be noted that
while A j is complete, is incomplete. It is again to be noted that minor over-writings and correc-
tions above the lines occur i n A^ at several places obviously having been added by a modern user of
the manuscript. These latter, being modern, have not been noted as variants i n the footnotes to the
present edidon.
B, . M s . N o . 37/1874-75 of the Bhandarkar O r i . Res. Inst., Pune, described in A Catalogue of Co
lections of Mss. deposited in the Deccan College (Bombay, 1888). C o p i e d i n modern "Universal fo
paper, with a dde page i n Devanagari reading "number 37-Satra 1872 [A.D.] Pancasiddhandka,
patrani 49-15-1930", it is i n 49 pages, with 15 to 17 lines a page. T h i s is the second of the two man-
uscripts used by T S , from which they have documented only some of the variants, as recorded i n
the footnotes of their edition.

Pingree states (Intro., p.20), that i n the edition he has documented only those variants recorded
by T S i n their footnotes. I n the present edidon, however, the manuscript has been fully collated
and all the variants therein recorded. T h i s manuscript carries, through its entire length, correc-
tions, obviously made by Thibaut.

B^. Ms. N o . 64 of the National Library, Calcutta. It contains 108 pages numbered 7 to 114, and is
incomplete, commencing only from 1.22, the previous verses having been written on the folios 1-6,
now lost. T h e manuscript is shapely and the writing readable, but the matter contained is extremely
 INTRODUCTION XVII

corrupt. T h e numbering of the verses is also erratic. Several verses are broken i n their middle and
verse numbers are interposed. A t times the last line of a verse is continued with the beginning let-
ters of the next verse, entailing at times, the beginnings and ends being half-words, (see III. 1 and
2). T h e manuscript seems to be the handiwork of a good-handed scribe from a highly corrupt orig-
inal. Corrections by a modern hand i n lighter ink is seen at places.
Pingree suspects that "this manuscript seems to be a copy of B - perhaps that used by Thibaut
and Dvivedin." (Introduction, p.20).

B. . Ms. N o . 7165 of the Oriental Institute, Baroda. T h i s manuscript i n 33 folios contains the
complete work. A post-colophonic statement says that it was copied i n Sarti,. 1928/saka 1793 ( A . D .
1872) by Uttamarama Durlabharama, a resident of Amadavada (Ahmedabad). T h e wridngis read-
able but corrupt readings persist. Verse numbers are written for the first chapter, but not for the
later chapters. Numbers expressed i n the verses are written also i n digits i n many places.

A few more manuscripts of Pafkasiddhdntika are known to exist (or to have existed) but could not
be used for the present edition. T h e y are :
1. Ms. N o . 288 of the Bombay University. T h i s is at present missing i n the Library. Pingree has
rsed this manuscript. In 32 folios it contains the full text of PS. It was copied i n Saih. 1928, corres-
Donding to A D . 1871, by Nathurama Parika.
2. Ms. N o . 6288 of the India Office, L o n d o n , (Buhler 268) described i n the A Catalogue of Skt. and
kt. Mss. in the India Office Library, vol. II by A . B . Keith. T h i s is a copy of our Ms. A , , copied i n Sath
1936, Saka 1802 ( A . D . 1879). We have not used it nor has Pingree.

About still other manuscripts, Pingree states : "Besides these seven manuscripts, there existed i n
1890 the manuscript belonging to J . B . M o d a k of T h a n a which was copied from B (our B,), and we
enow of a manuscript (no. 6674) of the Pancasiddhantika i n the Anandasrama i n Poona. T h e man- .
iscripts, recorded as the property of Sjt. Pushpachandra Sarma Daloi o f Helach i n Assam and of
he Arsha Library i n Vijayanagara (no. 506), probably contain the Bhdsvati of Satananda, which is
lometimes confused with o u r text." (Introduction, p. 21).
C. T h e emended text of Thibaut-Sudhakara Dvivedi, as printed i n the right hand columns of
heir edition. O n this Thibaut says (Introduction, pp. Ix-lxi):

"The present edition o f the Paiicasiddhantika is founded on two manuscripts belonging to

the Bombay Government. T h e text of the better one of these two Manuscripts is reproduced
in the left hand columns of our edidon, while the foot notes give all the more important diffe-
rent readings from the other Manuscript... the emended one as given i n the right hand col-
umns ofthe edition.

"What, in the attempt to reconstruct the text of an astronomical or mathemadcal work, has
chiefly to be kept i n view, is of course, to arrive at rules which are capable of being proved
mathematically. T h i s consideration has, i n more than one place, led us to introduce changes
even where such appeared hardly to be required by the external form of the traditional text."

Jotwithstanding the wild emendations which Thibaut-Sudhakar Dvivedi have made, at times,
heir emended readings have been recorded as C i n the footnotes o f the present edition.
D. T h e edition, Translation and Notes of TS by O . Neugebauer and D . Pingree, (2 vols.,
Copenhagen, 1970). Pingree edits and translates the PS, while Neugebauer offers the Notes. A l l
XVIII PANCASIDDHANTIKA

our manuscripts are used i n this edidon too. H e r e i n occur a number of emendations which are
sometimes put within brackets, but sometimes without brackets. Often the emendations are wilder
than those of Thibaut-Sudhakar Dvivedi.
E. External testimonia. About 125 Pancasiddhantika verses have been identified as quoted in
later texts, the largest number thereof, 117 being in the commentary of Utpala of Kashmir {A.D.
966) on the Brhatsamhita of Varahamihira. Other authors who quote from the PS are Prthiidaka-
svamin ( A . D . 854), Makldbhatta (14th cent.), Parame^vara of Kerala (1360-1460), Nilakantha
Somayaji, (b. 1443), 9'^ain of Kerala, and Siiryadevayajvan (b. 1191) of T a m i l n a d u , i n South India.
These PS quotations are taken as External Testimonia and the variants found i n such readings
have been noticed in the footnotes with ' E ' prefixed to the abbreviations o f authors/works which
quote the verses. These sources are :

E. Jy. Jyotirmimdmsd of Nilakantha Somayaji.

E.M. Makkibhatta's C o m . on the Siddhdntasekhara o f Sripati.
E.N. Nilakantha Somayaji's Bhasya on the Aryabhatiya.
E.Pa. Paramesvara's com. on the Aryabhatiya.
E.Pr. Prthudakasvamin's com. on the Brdhmasphutasiddhdnta of Brahmagupta.
E.S. Suryadevayajvan's com. on the Aryabhatiya.
E.U. Utpala's com. on the Brhatsamhitd of Varahamihira.
Pingree has adopted this method of referring to external testimonia, and we have followed him
in the matter. In fact, we have been much benefitted by his identifications and our labour relates
only to texts which have not been noticed by h i m .
O n the provenance of PS, Pingree states that:

"So far there is no indisputable evidence that the Paiicasiddhantika was known outside of
an area roughly corresponding to the modern states of Madhya Pradesh, Gujarat, Rajasthan,
the Punjab, Kashmir, and West Pakistan.

"However, some verses from the text are quoted by fifteenth century Kerala astronomers
of the drgganita school i n their commentaries o n the Aryabhatiya. T h u s Paramesvara (c.
1380-1460) cites a verse, and Nilakantha (b. 1443) several others. It is noteworthy that all four
verses that they quote are also found i n Utpala's commentary on the Brhatsrtihita, which was
known in Kerala; it is not proved, then that they had a copy o f the Pancasiddhantika." (Intro-
duction p. 17).

Pingree's assertion as above is not correct for the reason that Kerala and South Indian astronom-
ers quote not only the said four verses occurring i n Utpala's commentary, but five more PS verses
which do not occur i n Utpala's commentary, they being PS, 1.3, 4 by Nilakantha in his Jyotir-
mimdmsd, the verses safikhyd tu tesdm andydny atahprati again by Nilakantha i n his Aryabhatiya-
I V . 10 and PS X I I I . 3 6 by Siiryadevayajvan i n his Aryabhattyavydkhyd. (See below A p p . II: Index o
PS verses quoted by later astronomers). This would mean that PS should have been prevalent in
South India also.

Recording of Variant readings

Textual variants recorded i n footnotes i n the present edition are restricted to be above-said mate-
rial listed under A , B , C , D and E . Some o f the PS verses have, indeed been studied by scholars
but emendations and variants occurring in these studies have not been recorded here mainly for the
 INTRODUCTION XIX

reason that they have mostly been docitmented by Pingree i n his edition of the PS and so can be
referred to therefrom.'
3. Presentotionof theText

While the generally accepted conventions of critical editing o f Indie texts are duly followed i n the
present edition, attention might be drawn to certain methodologies which are stressed herein, in
view of the technical nature o f the text, the defective nature o f the manuscripts and the tentative-
ness of many of the emendations and textual changes effected i n the two earlier editions.

i. O n account o f the inadequacies o f the copyists o f the parent manuscripts a n d also due to
deficiencies i n the parent manuscripts themselves, some emendations have to be done i n the edited
text. However special care has been taken i n this edition to indicate such emendations by placing
them within curved brackets; square brackets are used to enclose fillings of apparent omissions or
newly suggested readings. Doubtful suggestions are marked by an interrogation mark.

1. Studies mentioned in this footnote have mostly been identified by Pingree and on pages 18-19 of his edition of PS and
variants.

i. G. Thibaut, 'Notes from Varaha Mihira's Pancasiddhantika',//. of Asiatic Society of Bengal, 53 (1884) 259-93.

ii. S.B. Dikshit, 'The Original Surya-siddhanta', Indian Antiquary, 19 (1890) 45-54.

iii. S.B. Dikshit, 'The Romaka Siddhanta', Indian Antiquary, 19 (1890), 133-42.

iv. S.B. Dikshit, 'The Paiicasiddhantika', Indian Antiquary, 19 (1890) 439-40.

V. J . Burgess, 'The Romaka Siddhanta', Indian Antiquary, 19 (1890) 284-85.

vi. J . Burgess, 'The sines and arcs in the Pancasiddhantika', Indian Antiquary, 20 (1891) 228.

vii. M.P. Kharegat, 'On the interpretation of certain passages in the Pancha Siddhantika of Varahamihira, an old his-
torical work'//, of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society. 19 (1895-97) 109-41.

viii. K.S. Shukla, 'On three stanzas from Pancasiddhantika,' Ganita, 5 (1954) 129-36.

T.S. Kuppanna Sastri

ix. 'The Vasistha Sun and Moon in Varahamihira's Paiicasiddhantika', Jl. of Or. Research, Madras, 25 (1955-56)
19-41.

X. 'Some misinterpretations and omissions in Thibaut and Sudhakara Dvivedi in the PS of V M ' , Vishveshvaranand
IndologUal Journal, 11 (1973) 107-18.

xi. 'The epoch of the Romaka Siddhanta in the PS and the epoch longitudes of the Sun and Moon the Vasistha
Siddhanu', Indian Jl. of Hist, of Science, 13 (1978) 151-58.

xii. 'The Vasistha-Paulisa Venus in the PS of V M ' , Collected Papers of T.S. Kuppanna Sastry, Tirupati, 1989, pp. 141-47.

xiii. 'The Vasistha-PauliSa Jupiter and Saturn in the PS', Collected Papers, pp. 148-68.

xiv. 'The Vasistha-PauliSa Mars in the PS of V M ' , ColUcted Papers, pp. 169-87.

XV. 'The epoch-constants ofthe Vasistha-Paulisa star-planets', Collected Papers, pp. 201-5.

xvi. 'Saurasiddhanta of PS : Planetary constants and computation', Collected Papers, pp. 206-40.

xvii. 'Paiicasiddhantika XVIII. 68-81 : A n interpolation", ColUcted Papers, pp. 241-54.

XX PANCASIDDHANTIKA

ii. Thibaut and Dvivedi who print their emended text i n the right hand column of their edition
do not specifically indicate their emendations and one has to identify the emendations oneself Pin-
gree indicates his emendations in many places by angular brackets but i n many other places prints
the emended text without any indication. In the present edition, all their emendations are iden-
dfied and nodced i n the footnotes denoting them by the sigla C and D . W h e n these emendations
are accepted i n the present edition also, they are not separately marked as above. This procedure
is expected to enable the comparison between the emendations of T S and N P and those made in
this edition and evaluate the merit and appropriateness between the two. In fact, it is felt that many
of the emendations of T S and N P , especially of the latter, are often far-fetched, ungrammadcal,
offending the metre or failing to give a cogent sense. See, for example, the T S / N P emendations in
1.23; I X . 5 ; X I . 2 , 4, 5; XII.5a, 5d; X I I I . 3 8 d , 4 I d : X V I I . I , 12; X V I I I . 2 d , 3, 19, 24, 25.

iii. In order that a discernmg student ofthe text shall have before him, i n full, what occurs in the
several manuscripts, an attempt has been made to record all variants, right or wrong. T h i s has been
done for three reasons : (a) Correct forms of corrupt passages can be visualized only i f all the rea-
dings, as found i n the manuscripts, are before one's eyes; (b) T h e n alone would it be possible for
an editor to vindicate the emendations suggested by h i m ; (c) T h e corrupt and apparently meaning-
less readings i n the manuscripts which the editor could not correct or has wrongly emended can be
corrected or better emendations suggested by other scholars i f all the variants are given.

However, obvious errors of a purely scribal nature, like separate words written jointly, using
anusvdra for anundsika and vice versa, using double consonants for single consonants and vice
versa, giving the benefit of doubt for a letter that could be read rightly or wrongly, have been cor-
rected silently and not noticed i n the footnotes.

4. Translation

T h e translation provided i n the edition is as literal as possible without sacrificing readability and
not going against the English idiom. Elucidatory expressions and words which are understood i n
the context are added within brackets, the ultimate aim being to make the matter dealt with clear
and fully understood. Topical headings have been provided to verses or groups of verses with the
same objective, again, towards the above-said objective.

5. Notes
T h e notes added are generally detailed and self-contained. There again, they seek to elucidate
the verses and the underlying ideas, primarily from the Indian standpoint. Tables and geometrical
diagrams are provided wherever warranted. Quite often, the need for the emendations suggested
in the text is explained. T h e emendations made by T S and N P are also examined and observations
offered. A n aspect of the Notes which deserves special mention is the addition of self-suggested
mathematical or astronomical problems and working them out according to methods enunciated
in the verses, and also by employing modern methods. Introductions are prefixed for several chap-
ters, towards setting out the significance ofthe contents ofthe respective chapters.

6. Division of Pancasiddhantika
T h e colophons ofthe several Sections of P S , as found i n the manuscripts, which all go back to a
defective archetype, are uneven. Some of the colophons merely mention the topic treated in the
respective sections but some others designate the sections as adhydya-s (chapters) and also indicate
the numbers thereof. T h e several colophons read :
 INIRODUCTION XXI

1. Karanavatarah
2. Naksatradicchedah
3. Iti Paulisasiddhantah
4. Id Karanadhyayas caturthah
5. Id Sasidarsanam
6. Candragrahane sasthodhyayah
7. Paulisasiddhante ravigrahanam
8. Id Romakasiddhante 'rkagrahanam astamo 'dhyayah
9. Id Suryasiddhante 'rkagrahanam navamo 'dhyayah
10. Candragrahanam dasamo'dhyayah
11. A(nu)varnanam ekadaso 'dhyayah
12. Id Paitamahasiddhante dvadaso 'dhyayah
13. Trailokyadarsanam nama trayodaso 'dhyayah
14. Iti Chedyakayantrani caturdaso 'dhyayah
15. Jyotisopanisat paiicadaso 'dhyayah
16. Siiryasiddhante madhyagatih
17. Taragrahasphutikaranam sodaso (? saptadaso) 'dhyayah
18. Paulisasiddhante taragrahah
However, whether there be full chapter headings and chapter numbers or there be only the men-
tion of the topics in the colophons, the commencement of a new subject helps to ascertain the
beginnings of the chapters. T h e omission of the specification of the chapter headings and numbers
has to be ascribed to the imperfections i n the original archetype.
This helps us to correct Pingree's edition where Chs. X V I and X V I I are taken as a single chapter,
which he numbers as X V I . N o w , after eleven verses, here, there occurs the colophon 'Suryasid-
dhante madhyagatih', which is the subject of those eleven verses. After still another fourteen verses
occurs i n the colophon 'Tdrdgrahasphutikaranam sodaso 'dhyayah', and an entirely different subject is
treated in those fourteen verses. Ignoring the radical difference i n the subjects dealt with in the two
sets of verses and the colophon after the first set of verses and guided merely by the colophon at
the end ofthe second set of verses, Pingree combines the two sets of verses, 11 plus 14 = 25, to con-
stitute ch. X V I and takes ch. X V I I I of TS and ofthe present edition as ch. X V I I .

7. Chapter XVIII of Pancasiddhantika

T h e theme of C h . X V I I I is the heliacal rising and setting o f the star-planets according to the
Vasistha and Paulisa schools. Venus, Jupiter, Saturn, Mars and Mercury are treated, in that order,
in verses 1-56, and certain allied matters in verses 57-60. In verse 61 the author states that he, Var-
ahamihira, hailing from Avanti, has composed the PS for the benefit of students. In the next verse,
62, he asks astronomers dissatisfied with Pradyumna and Vijayanandi, to resort to his work. H a v i n g
thus completed his treatise, couched entirely i n the Arya metre, following a convention, adopted by
Sanskrit writers, of concluding works by a closing colophonic verse couched i n a different metre,
V M breaks into a different metre, the Vasantatilaka, for the purpose :

dvantyahah samdsdc chisyahitdrtham sphutdnkasamam

cakre Vardhamihiras tdrdgrahakdrikdtantram || 61 |
Pradyumna-bhumitanaye jive saure 'tha Vijayanandikrte \
budhe ca bhagnotsahah sphutam idam karanam bhajatdm 11 62 11
XXII PANCASIDDHANTIKA

drstam Vardhamihirena sukhaprabodham \

II 63 II

T h e manuscripts are defective here, omitting the next three lines of the concluding verse, some
exhibidng also a gap.

In continuation of the above, the manuscripts commence another short work with a mahgala-
sloka ('verse of salutation') and then a second verse expressing a pratijnd ('resolve') to compose a
'better work' by 'Varahamihira himself.'
prastdve 'pi na dosan jdnann api vakti yah paroksasya \
prathayati gundrhs ca tasmai sujandya namah parahitdya \

astddasabhir baddhdny d tdrdgraham etad drydbhih \

varam iti Vardhamihiro daddti nirmatsarah karanam \ \
These verses end abruptly without any closing colophonic verse, as might be expected.
Not taking into consideration the fact that V M had closed the PS most formally with all attendant
paraphernalia, with verse 63, both T S and N P treat this short work, as the concluding part of Pan-
casiddhantika and as a work of Varahamihira himself, and translate it and explain it as such. It is no
noticed by T S and N P that computation according to these verses can give only rough results since
the equation of the centre has been dispensed with, which makes them valueless. Further, there are
mistakes i n the computation of Venus and Mercury, which one cannot expect to be committed by
VM.

T h e prose colophon 'Paulisasiddhante taragrahah evam' ('Thus the star-planets of the

Paulisasiddhanta') does not have any reality behind it since the computations therefrom do not
accord with those o f the Paulisasiddhanta elucidated earlier. These points have been discussed in
detail in the Notes, below, to these verses. Obviously, these verses are apocryphal and are the handi-
work o f a n inferior astronomer who has ascribed them to V M . F o r this reason, in the present edi-
tion, Pancasiddhdntikd is formally closed with verse 63 and the verses following given as'-a praksepa
(interpoladon) by someone else who has moreover blacked out in the original archetype the three
lines in verse 63, being the concluding verse of PS.
8. The Five Siddhantas in PS : Their Distribution

It had been mentioned earlier that V M ' s treatment of the five siddhantas in the PS are uneven.
It is not that each Siddhanta is taken u p one by one and a resume of the same given fully or sys-
tematically. Select topics are taken up, apparently arbitrarily, and are dealt with individually or
jointly when the enunciations o f two schools are similar. Alongside, chapters are devoted also to
general astronomical topics which are applicable to all the schools. T h e assortment of the treatment
of the subjects i n the several chapters are as indicated below.

9. Content Analysis of the Pancasiddhantika

C h . I . 1-7 General Introducuon

8-10 Romaka Days from epoch (Ahargana)
11-13 Paulisa Days from epoch (Ahargana)
14-16 Saura-Romaka Yuga o f S u n and Moon, Lords ofthe year,
month, and hora.
 INTRODUCTION XXIII

C h . I . 17-25 Romaka Lords of the days of the month

Ch.II 1-13 Vasistha

//
1 T r u e Sun (Ravi-sphuta)
n
2-6 T r u e M o o n (Candra-sphuta)
It
7 Naksatra computation
If
7 T i t h i computation
II
8 Day-time (Aharmana)
11
9-10 Gnomonic shadow (Saiikucchaya)
ti
11-13 Lagna

Ch.III 1-37 Paulisa

11
1-3 T r u e Sun (Ravi-sphuta)
11
4 T r u e motion of M o o n (Candragati)
II
5 Equation of the centre (Mandaphala)
It
6-9 Sense obscure
It
10 Cara
It
11-12 Day-time (Aharmana)
11
13-14 Desantara
II
15 Local time (Istadesakala)
II
16 Naksatra computation
If
17 Sun's daily modon (Ravi-gati)
11
18-19 Karana-s
11
20-22 Vyatipata and V a i d h r t i
11
23-24 Sadasiti-kala
11
25 Solsdces (Ayana)
II
26 Saiikrand-kala
II
27 Tridinasprk-yoga
II
28-29 Rahu (Node)
II
30-31 Moon's latitude (Candra-viksepa)
11
32 Bhadravisnu, defect i n
II
33 Padaditya, defect i n
11
34-35 Romaka, defect i n
36-37 General Astronomy, importance of

C h . I V 1-58 General Problems of Time, Space and DirecUon

(Triprasna)
11
1-15 Table of R sines (Jyah)
11
16-18 Declination of Sun and M o o n (Krand)
11
19-22 Gnomonic shadow and derivatives
(saAkucchaya)
II
23-25 Sine colatitude and Day-diameter
(Lambajya and Dinamana)
11
26-28 Cara and derivatives
XXIV PANCASIDDHANTl K A

C h . I V . 29-30 " Rt. ascensional difference

(Lartkodaya-rasimana)
31-34 " Rising of signs (Rasyudaya)
35-36 " Gnomonic shadow (Sartkucchaya)
37-38 " Astronomer's qualifications
39-40 " Sine amplitude (Agra)
41-49 " Gnomonic shadow at required time
(Istacchaya)
50-51 " Moon's shadow (Candracchaya)
52-54 " Directions from shadow (Diksadhana)
55-58 " Sun from gnomonic shadow
(chayatah ravih)

C h . V 1-10 Paulisa Moon's horns (Candrasrngonnati)

Ch.VIl-14 Vasistha and L u n a r eclipse (Candragrahanam)

Paulisa

C h . V I I 1-6 Paulisa Solar eclipse (Ravi-grahana)

C h . V I I I 1-18 Romaka Solar Eclipse (Ravi-grahana)

C h . I X 1-27 Saura Solar eclipse (Ravi-grahana)

C h . X 1-7 Saura L u n a r eclipse (Candra-grahana)

C h . X I 1-6 General Eclipse diagram (Grahanaparilekha)

C h . X I I 1-6 Paitamaha
1-2 " Days from epoch (Ahargana)
3-4 T i t h i , Naksatra etc.
4 Vyatipata
5 " Day-time (Aharmana)

C h . X I I I 1-42 General Situadon of ther worlds

(Trailokyasathsthanam)

C h . X I V 1-41 General Astronomical instruments

(Chedyaka-yantrani)

C h . X V 1-29 General Jyotisopanisat

Ch.XVII-II Saura Mean planets

1-9 " Mean planets (Graha-madhya)
10-11 " Bija correction by V M
 INTRODUCTION XXV

C h . X V I I . 1-14 Saura True planets

1 -11 a " True planets (Graha-sphuta)
lib " Retrograde motion (Vakragati)
12 " Heliacal rising (Grahastodaya)
13- 14 " Planetary latitudes (Graha-viksepa)

C h . X V I I I 1-60 Vasistha-Paulisa Heliacal rising and setting of planets

(Grahastodaya)
1-5 " Venus (Sukra)
6-13 " Jupiter (Guru)
14- 20 " Samm(Sani)
21-35 " Mars(Kuja)
36-56 " Mercury (Budha)
57-60 " Hints
61-63 General Conclusion of PS
64-81 Spurious
Supplement True planets
64-66 " Introduction
67-69 " True Mars
70-72 " True Mercury
73-75 " Truejupiter
76-78 " True Venus
79-81 " True Saturn

10. Depiction of the Siddhantas in PS

The above Content Analysis of the PS would enable the identification ofthe extent of selective depicuon
of the different siddhantas by V M in the work, as shown below.

PAULISA-SIDDHANTA Sadasltikala III.23-24

Candra-viksepa III.30-3I
Ahargana I.1I-13 III.28-29
Rahu
Naksatra H I . 16
Candra-grahana V I . 1-I4
Mandaphala III.5 V I I . 1-6
Ravi-grahana
Ravigati III.17 V.1-10
CandrasrAgonnati
Raviphuta III.1-3 Grahastodaya X V I I I . 1-60
Candra-sphuta III.4
Ayana III.25
SaAkranti III.26
ROMAKA-SIDDHANTA
Tridinasprkyoga III.27
Desantara in.I3-14 Ahargana 1.8-10
Cara III. 10 Yuga 1.14-16
Aharmana III.I1-12 Lordoftheyear 1.17-18,21
Istadesakala HI.15 L o r d ofthe month 1.19,21
Karana III.18-19 L o r d ofthe H o r a 1.20,21
Vyatipata III.20-22 L o r d ofthe Days 1.23-25
Vaidhrti III.20-22 Ravi-grahana V I I I . 1-18
XXVI PANCASIDDHANTIKA

SAURA-SIDDHANTA II.2-6
II.7
Yuga 1.14-16
II.7
L o r d of the year 1.17-18,21
II.8
L o r d of the month 1.19,21 II.9-10
L o r d of the H o r a 1.20,21
ILIl-13
Graha-madhya X V I . 1-11
VI.I-I4
Graha-sphuta XVII.1-11
X V I I I . 1-60
Graha-viksepa XVn.l3-I4
Candra-grahana X.I-7
Ravi-grahana I X . 1-27
XII.I-2
Grahastodaya X V I I . I 1-12
XII.3
XII.3
VASITHA-SIDDHANTA
XII.4
Ravi-sphuta II. I XII.5

With regard to the Chapters and verses not included i n the above table, some, like chapters X I
to X V , and several verses, are o f a general nature, applicable to all the siddhantas and i n the case
of the others it is difficult to identify positively the siddhantas to which they pertain.
11. Comparative Study of the Siddhantas

It can be seen from the above Table that several of the topics selected by V M from the different
siddhantas for depiction in the PS are common. T h i s should enable a comparative study of the
common topics, the more important o f which are noticed i n the Table below.

In this connection it is necessary to point out, an erroneous view current, to the effect, that the
Paulisa siddhdnta is accurate, the Romaka is equally accurate, the Saura is still more accurate and tha
the Vasistha and Paitdmaha highly inaccurate. T h i s view has been brought into vogue through two
unwarranted emendations introduced by T S and N P into the text of the following verse i n the PS:

Paulisatithis sphuto 'sau tasydsannas tu Romaka-proktah \

spastatarah sdvitrah parisesau duravibhrastau \ \ PS. 1.4
'The tithi resulting from Paulisa is tolerably accurate and that o f the Romaka approximate
to that. T h e tithi of the Saura is very accurate. B u t that of the remaining two (viz., die Vasistha
and the Paitamaha) have slipped far away (from the real).'
H e r e V M speaks only about the tithi, (lunar day), as computed d u r i n g his time according to the
different siddhantas; H e is not making a relative estimate ofthe siddhantas as such or i n respect of
the various other computations. As elucidated i n the Note to this verse i n the body of this book (p.5):
"The five Siddhantas are compared here with reference to their tithi alone because that is the
chief of the five afigas, viz., tithi, vara, naksatra, yoga and harana; that is most useful not only
religous purposes but also for civil purposes; that is independent of the origin o f reference in
the ecliptic and can be examined for correctness by observation of eclipses and heliacal rising;
and that is used i n finding the days from Epoch, ihesine qua non of all astronomical computation.

"This being the case, the change o f tithi into krta by the late D r . G . Thibaut and M . M .
Sudhakara Dvivedi (TS for short), especially when the manuscripts read only tithi or titha, is
unwarranted, to say the least. D o i n g this, they have condemned the Vdsistha Siddhdnta beyond
 INTRODUCTION XXVII

the author's intention and become blind to its merits and peculiarities, which otherwise they
could have easily seen. Equally off the mark is the emendation of tithi into stvatha by
Neugebauer and Pingree ( N P for short). See below. Explanatory Notes, for die real reason
for this 'slipping away frm the real'."
O n this subject might be advanUgeiously referred to the section 'The place of the Vasistha i n the his-
tory of H i n d u astronomy' i n T . S . K . Sastry's paper T h e Vasistha Sun and M o o n ' i n the/Z. of Or.
Research, Madras, 25 (1955-56) 19-41, reprinted i n his Collected Papers on Jyotisa (Tirupati, 1989,
pp.I-28)

Table of Common topics

Ahargana
Vasistha n.8
Paulisa I.I1-13 Paitamaha xn.5
Romaka 1.8-10
Vyatipata-Vaidhfti
Paitamaha XII.1-2
Paulisa III.20-22
Naksatra-Tithi
Paitamaha X1I.4
Paulisa III.16
Candra-grahana
Vasistha II.7
Vasistha-Paulisa VI.1-14
Ravi-sphuta
Saura X.I-7
Paulisa ni.1-3
Ravi-grahana
Vasistha n.i
Paulisa V I I . 1-6
Candra-sphuta
Romaka vni.1-18
Paulisa III.4 Saura I X . 1-27
Vasistha II.2-6
Grahastodaya
Aharmana
Vasistha-Paulisa xvni.i-60
Paulina III.11-12 Saura X V I I . I 1-12

12. Varahamihira: His l i f e and Works

One ofthe foremost early Indian astronomer and astrologer, Varahamihira belongs to the sixth
century A . D . I n the PancasiddhdntUtd (1.8) he takes the cut-off date or epoch for computations using
the Paulisa Siddhdnta as Saka 427, which corresponds to A . D . 505. Since the practice i n Indian
astronomical manuals (Karatia-grantha-s) is to take a contemporary date, as near to the composition
of work, answering to certain specifications, as the cut-off date, it is reasonable to presume that P S
was composed some time after A . D . 505. Regarding his demise there is a statement by Amaraja i n
his commentary on Brahmagupta's Brdhmasphutasiddhdnta, which reads : navddhika-pancasarhkJiyd-
sake Vardhamihirdcdryo divamgatah."In saka 509 Varahamihira attained to the heavens.' This would
mean that V M passed away i n A . D . 587. T h i s date is corroborated by V M ' s mention i n P S X V . 10,
of Aryabhata who composed his Aryabhatiya i n A . D . 499, which work should have become well
known by the time that V M composed his P S .
XXVIII PANCASIDDHANTIKA

Personal details about V M are forthcoming from his own writings as also from those of others.
Towards the close of his Brhajjdtaka, V M says:
Adityaddsa-tanayas tadavdptabodhah
Kdpittakah savitrlabdhavaraprasddah |
Avantiko munimatdny avahkya samyag
Hordm Vardhamihiro ruciram cakdra \ \
(Br.J. 26.1 (Edn. Triv. Skt. Ser., No.91)

T h u s V M was the son of Adityadasa; he learnt the sastra from his own father; his native place was
Kapitthaka; he was blessed by L o r d Sun (at Kapitthaka). H e (later) resided at A v a n d (Ujjain)
where he composed his v/ork Hord (Brhajjdtaka). O n Kapitthaka V M ' s commentator Utpala says :
Kdpitthdkhye grdmeyo 'sau bhagavdn savitd suryah, tasmdt labdhah prdpto varah prasddo yena
lage of Kapittha where he received the blessing of G o d Sun'). Kapitthaka, the nadve village of V M ,
has been idenufied by Ajay M i t r a Shastri (vide his India as seen by Varahamihira, ( M L B D , Delhi,
1969, p. 19) o n the basis ofthe mention thereof by 7th century Chinese traveller Y u a n Chwang with
Kapittha populary known as "Sartkasya (modern Sankisa) i n the Farrukhabad district o f Uttar
Pradesh...."

Utpala states in his commentary on V M ' s Brhatsarhhitd (1.1) that V M was a 'Magadhadvija' : tad
ayam apy Avantyakdcdryo MagadhMvija-Vardhamihiraharkahbdhavaraprasddojyotissdstrasungra
(Ed. Sarasvati Bhavana Granthamala, Varanasi, 1968, p.2). Utpala makes such a statement also in
his commentary on V M ' s Yogaydtrd. T h i s and the surname 'Mihira' which is borne by many Saka-
dvipa brahmanas, who are worshippers ofthe Sun, would indicate that V M belonged to this clan
of Brahmanas whose forefathers migrated to India from the Maga country in Persia and settled in
the village of Kapitthaka whence V M came to the city of Ujjain where he wrote his works.

By all accounts, Varahamihira had the Sun as his tutelary deity. T o quote A . M . Shastri (op. cit.,
pp. 20-21):
'That Varahamihira was a devotee of the Sun admits of no doubt. H i s father's name was
Adityadasa, his own name-ending ' M i h i r a ' , derived from 'Mithra', the Iranian Sun-god, his
obtaining a boon from the Sun, his obeisance to the Sun i n all his works except the
Vivdhapatala, (which, appropriately enough, opens with an invocation to Kama, the Indian
god o f love), and his devoting a comparatively larger number o f verses to the description of
Surya icons, all indicate that the sun was his family deity. H i s son Prthuyasas also invokes the
Sun i n the opening verse o f his SatpancdJikd. A s we have seen, Varahamihira was regarded as
an incarnation of the Sun.'

T h e fame of V M has given rise to several legends about his birth and incidents i n his life, includ-
ing his being a courtier o f K i n g V i k r a m a and one of the nine gems (nava-ratnas) i n his court. A l l
these have to be considered as more fable and eological, not based on facts.

Varahamihira was an astute astronomer and astrologer and wrote extensively on all the three
branches of the science, viz., Tantra or mathematical astronomy, Hord (Jdtaka) or horoscopy, and
Sarhhitd or mundane or natural astrology. It is interesting that for all his major works. V M has
prepared abridged versions also for the benefit o f those who desist from works which are too
lengthy, who, as Utpala says, are vistaragrantha-bhiru-s.
 INTRODUCTION XXIX

O n Tantra the major work o f V M is the Pancasiddhdntikd i n eighteen chapters. It would seem
from a statement of Utpala towards the beginning of his commentary on VM's Laghujdtaka that V M
had prepared on abridgement also o f that work Cf. Vardhamihira jyotissdstrasangraham krtvd
tadeva vistara-granthn-bhtrunarh krte' 'sanksiptam ganitasdstram' krtvd hordsdstram vaktukdmah e
O n horoscopy V M has produced two works, the Brhajjdtaka, called also Hordsdstra i n 26 chapters,
and its abridged version, the Laghujdtaka, called also Svalpa-jdtaka and Sdksmajdtaka, i n thirteen
chapters.

O n natural or mundane astrology also V M has two works, the Brhatsamhitd called also Vdrdhi-
sarhhitd in 106 chapters and Samdsasamhitd, known also as Laghu-samhitd and Svalpa-sarhhitd known
through quotations. These are works of an encyclopaedic nature, dealing with astrological and
many other subjects of human interest, such as architecture and iconography, water divining,
omens, cosmetics, horticulture, characteristics of animals, gemmology, weapons, species of men
and women and their qualities and the like. A wide range of information on the geography of India
and its people is also to be round in the Brhatsamhitd. Vatakanikd, which exists only i n the form of
quotations, is a work of V M on omens.

O n military astrology, three works of V M are available; (i) Mahdydtrd, known also as Brhadydtrd,
Brhadyogaydtrd, Yaksyesvamedhikdh-yatrd (based i n the commencing expression yaksye 'svamedhe
vijitya i n the second verse of the work), (ii) Svalpaydtrd or Tikanikdydtrd, and (iii) Yogaydtrd.

O n marital horoscopy, V M has written a work endtled Vivdhapatala, a n d according to Utpala,

there is also a Svalpavivdhapatala (vide, his com. on Brhajjdtaka X X . 10). M o r e than 30 more texts are
mentioned, i n manuscripts and elsewhere, to have been composed by V M (Cf. A . M . Shastri, op. cit.,
pp. 29-31) but these lack authenticity i n their ascription.
Alongside his wide range of scholarship, V M ' s writings are also characterised by chaste language,
brevity and linguistic elegance. H e is a master not only of expression but also of metre. In illustra-
tion of his poetic talents one might refer to the figures of speech expressed through verses X I X . 13-15
of the Brhatsarhhitd describing Agastyodaya, the rising of the star Agastya. In the same work,
Brhatsamhitd, he utilises the entire chapter 104, containing 64 verses, the Gocarddhydya ('Transits
of planets'), to illustrate the metres, including the dandaka-s, alongside depicting the subject
proper. It is also instructive that the names ofthe several metres are also deftly incorporated i n the
verses by means of slesa or double entandre. Utpala is not, perhaps off the mark when he says, towards
the commencement of his commentary on Brhatsamhitd, extolling V M as an incarnation ofthe S u n :

Yac cdstram savitd cakdra vipulam skandhatrayair jyautisam

tasyocchittibhaydt punah kaliyuge sarhsrjyayo bhdtalam \
bhuyah svalpataram Vardhamihira-vydjena sarvam vyadhdd
ittham yam pravadanti moksakusalds tasmai namo bhdsvate
'The science of Jyautisa i n its triple aspects (oi Tantra, Jdtaka, and Sarhhitd) was propounded at
length by G o d Sun. Fearing that it would be lost i n the K a l i age, G o d Sun incarnated i n the world
in the form of Varahamihira and expounded all (the said three aspects) again i n shorter form. So
say about the Sun those who are knowledgeable about salvation. Obeisance to that Sun.'
Madras
January 4,1993 K.V. SARMA
PANCASIDDHANTIKA
 Chapter One

INTRODUCTION OF THE WORK

cb<uilc|dl<:

Aim of the Work

1-2. A f t e r s a l u t i n g , at the outset, w i t h great d e v o t i o n , the v a r i o u s great sages
like S u r y a , V a s i s t h a , a n d others, a n d m y father a n d teacher w h o t a u g h t m e
this sastra, I s h a l l state i n f u l l the best o f the secret l o r e o f a s t r o n o m y extracted
f r o m the d i f f e r e n t schools o f the a n c i e n t teachers so as to be easy a n d clear.

Mss used Pr. Quotations in Prthudaka's C o m . o n

the Brdhmasphutasiddhdnta
A , . B O R I , Poona, Ms N o . 338/1879-80; A ^ .
S. Quotations in Siiryadevayajvan's C o m . on
National Library, Calcutta, M s N o . 49. B , .
the Aryabhatiya
B O R I , M s N o . 37/1874-75; B^. O r . Inst.,
U. Quotations i n Utpala's C o m . o n the
Baroda, Ms N o . 7165; B , . National Library, Ms
Brhatsamhitd. (BS).
No. 64. C . Readings/Emendations in the edn. of
PS by Thibaut-Sudhakara Dvivedi, Varanasi, A 1 . 2 . Begin with: ?ft <JM-^W
1889; Rep. 1938, 1968. D. Readings/Emendations B l . Begins:M4l(^^l(Ti<*l I ; B2. Begins:
in the edition o f PS by Naugebauer - Pingree,
Munksgaard, 1970.
B 3 . Beginning lost.
C . Begins: l^: I 3TT Mafe^lFrl*!
External Testimonia (E)

Jy. PS Quotations in theJyotirmimdmsd of D. Begins: [?ilc|<|^ftI^<(S)<ri|dl M4lRl^lRlcbi

Nilakantha Somayaji I ] ?ftTRg[^]FI-TO: I
M. Quotations i n Makkibhatta's C o m . o n the
1. Quoted by Utpala on BS 2.2
Siddhdntasekhara ofSrTpati
l a . Bl.^lf?I5; B2.^lf?IS
N. Quotations in Nilakantha Somayaji's
C o m . o n the Aryabhatiya b. B l . ^ g f ^ ; U.^5friirafcT:il"l<Kl
Pa. Quotations i n Paramesvara's C o m . o n 2b. A 1 . 2 . B . 1 . 3 ^ ' ^ c T ^
the Aryabhatiya c. A i . . 2 . ^ R f i ^ ? i f ^ ^ ; Bi.2.craf^?ifer?wt

J
4 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 1.2

In the second verse, the letter ka has been added to supply the one syllable wanting and in keeping
with the sense. T h e Sun being the Atman of the Universe and also the chief of the grahas, all the gods
and all the grahas are propitiated by His worship. By the expression 'various great sages' the author
means the eighteen primary authors of the Siddhantas on astronomy, viz. Surya, Soma, Pitamaha,
Vasistha, A t r i , Parasara, Kasyapa, Narada, Gargya, Marici, M a n u , Aiigiras, Romasa, Paurukutsa,
Cyavana, Yavana, B h r g u and Saunaka and, by saluting these, the author salutes all ancient authors
who follow these Siddhantas.

The Five Schools of Astronomy

3. T h e five Siddhantas, o f w h i c h this w o r k is a c o m p e n d i u m , are the Paulisa,

the Romaka, the Vdsistha, the Saura a n d the Paitdmaha. O f these five, the first
two, v i z . , the Paulisa a n d the Romaka have b e e n c o m m e n t e d u p o n by
Latadeva.

O f the Siddhantas here mentioned, B r a h m a is the author of the Paitdmaha; Vasistha, that o
Vdsistha; Paulisa that of Paulisa; Romaka that of Romaka; and Surya, that of Saura. From a dialog
between Surya and A r u n a , it can be learnt how these five Siddhantas were given to their respective
recipients. According to tradition, at the first instance, Brahma saw this lore of astronomy embedded in
the Vedas and extracted it i n the form of the Paitdmaha. H e taught this to his son, Vasistha at the
behest of V i s n u and again to Surya who was created with the express purpose of giving T i m e to the
Universe. Vasistha gave this lore to his son, Parasara who, in turn gave the Parasara Siddhanta to th
sages. O n e sage, Paulisa taught this to the sages Garga etc. and this is the Paulisa Siddhdnta. Surya
himself, being born among the Yavanas by the curse of Brahma, taught the science :o Romaka and
Duryavana in the city of Romaka, and Romaka propounded it as the Romaka Siddhdnta. T h u s thes
five Siddhantas are the most ancient.

It is to be noted here that the five Siddhdntas used by the author in his work are all different from
works of the same name current at present and it seems they have been lost to us. T h e Paulisa
used by the author is different from the Paulisa quoted by Bhattotpala in his commentary on the
Brhatsamhitd which latter agrees with the Saura o f our author and disagrees with his Paulisa. T h
Romaka and Vdsistha now extant are different from those o f V M , agreeing as they do with the now
well-known SUrya Siddhdnta, (called by scholars as the 'Modern' or 'Later' Sdrya Siddhdnta to
guish it from the ancient Saura Siddhdnta). T h e author's Saura does not agree with the 'Mode
Surya Siddhdnta, though one would expect agreement from the similarity in name, but it agrees wit
a work of the ancient Aryabhata, now lost to us, and called by his commentator Bhaskara I as the
Ardharatra-Paksa, which again is the basis of the Khanda-khddyaka-karana o f Brahmagupta. As

3. Quoted in the JyodrmimamsaQy) BI.2.^5[ifw; A1.2.^lft!5

of Nilakantha, p.7. b. AI.'^fliH?!*?^
a. A l . ^ ^ c. Bl.2.^^
Bl.^Jy.tim AI.Ararat; A 2 . ? [ I % f t ; J y . ? I ^
1.3 I. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 5

the Paitdmaha, there are several works now extant claiming Pitamaha or B r a h m a for their author.
One is the Brahma Siddhdnta given by B r a h m a to Narada, which follows the 'Modem' SUrya Siddhdnta
in its constants. Another is the Pitamaha Siddhdnta, forming a part o f Visnudharmottara, which has
been taken by Brahmagupta as the basis o f his Brdhma-Sphuta Siddhdnta. A third one, now lost, is
the basis of the Aryabhatiya. But the Paitdmaha o f our author is different from all these.

As for the Latadeva mentioned here, he is the Latacarya referred to i n X V . 18 o f this work, for,
there, the author says that this Acarya has taken sunset at Yavanapura as the beginning o f the day
and from 1.8. we understand that the Paulisa and Romaka do the same and here it is mentioned that
Latadeva is the commentator o f these two Siddhdntas.

iftlciVl(rlIl: ^ ^ 5 ^ d^lfl?!^ <ii4ch5ft^;

?^g;cR: ^RlfgiaT; qRviql ^^rfsT^ \\^ \\

4. T h e tithi r e s u l t i n g f r o m the Paulisa is tolerably accurate a n d that o f the

Romaka a p p r o x i m a t e to that. T h e tithi o f the Saura is very accurate. B u t that
o f the r e m a i n i n g two (viz. the Vdsistha a n d the Paitdmaha) have s l i p p e d far
away ( f r o m the real).
T h e five Siddhdntas are compared here with reference to their tithi alone because that is the chief
of the five angas, viz. tithi, vdra, naksatra, yoga and kararia, that is most useful not only for religious
but also civil purposes, that is independent o f the origin o f reference i n the eclipdc and can be
examined for correctness by observation o f eclipses and heliacal rising and that is used i n finding
the days from Epoch, the sine qua non o f all astronomical computation. T h i s being the case, the
change of 'tithi' into 'krta' by the late D r . G . Thitbaut and M . M . Sudhakara Dvivedi (TS for short),
especially when the manuscripts read only tithi or tithah, is unwaranted, to say the least. D o i n g this,
they have condemned the Vdsistha Siddhdnta beyond the author's intention and become blind to its
merits and peculiarities, which otherwise they could easily have seen. Equally off the mark is the
emendation of tithi intostvatha by Neugebauer and Pingree (NP, for short). See below, explanatory
Notes, for the real reason for this 'slipping far away from the real'.

4. Quoted i n theJyotirmimarnsa(Jy)P.7. b. Al.^35l^

a. A1.2.ii%?1JlrfsJ15; B L 2 . i f e ^ ^ A1.2.tpqi:; Jy.%??I:
C. ^(^ [f?T]; c. B1.2. o ^ n ^ : ; D . "cR: Tflfe:
D. ' ^ ^ [ ^ f ] ; J y . M J i d V I d . Al.^
A.2.'^i^ A1.2.1^^
6 PANCASIDDHANTl KA 1.7

Contents of the Work

5-7. I s h a l l tell i n this w o r k , a v o i d i n g a l l j e a l o u s y , the c o m p u t a t i o n o f the solar

eclipse, w h i c h is g u a r d e d as a great secret a n d i n w h i c h the m i n d o f the
a s t r o n o m e r reels. I s h a l l also tell the o c c u r r e n c e o r n o n - o c c u r r e n c e o f the
l u n a r eclipse, the d i r e c d o n s o f the first a n d last contacts, the d u r a t i o n , the
total phase, the 'hypotenuse' at any m o m e n t w i t h related quantity o f obscuration
a n d t i m e a n d also the m u t u a l c o n j u n c t i o n s o f the stars a n d the planets a n d the
c o m p u t a t i o n o f differences i n l o n g i t u d e as also the p r i m e v e r t i c a l , m o o n r i s e ,
a s t r o n o m i c a l i n s t r u m e n t s a n d o t h e r requirements, g r a p h i c a l representations,
the g n o m o n i c s h a d o w , the sines o f l a t i t u d e , co-latitude a n d d e c l i n a d o n s a n d
s u c h o t h e r matters.

T h e textual recording tddavacchdya is emended as sankavacchdyah because (i) tddava is meanin

less, and it may be a corruption o f sdnkava meaning relating to the sanku or gnomon which is
suggested by the juxtaposition with chdya meaning 'shadow' and (ii) chdya must be chdyah because
grammer requires the accusative case of the word. T S , N P take the word as sdnkavacchdyd, without the
final visarga.

As for the mention of the computation o f the solar eclipse as a 'great secret' it is because o f the
diffKulty ofthe computation which, therefore, would bring honour to a person who can do it and for that
reason not given to all. From the contents we can see the importance of the work for religious purposes.

T h e technical words that occur here like prime vertical etc. will be explained in their respective
contexts.

Hi^^d1i(fe|*4I^R8iVI<y(w(l^d1 fig: II I
7b. B l . ^ ; B 2 . ^
5a. B 1 . ^ ; B 2 . ^ A2.^
c Bl W Al.cira^RI; A2.B2.^n5e|OTT;
d". A l ' . ^ ; B 1 . 2 . ^ Bl.^irB^;C.D.?nf^
6a. B l . f ^ ^ l l ^ ; B 2 . ^ ^ e. 61.2.3!"
c. A 2 . c i r a ^ # a D.niPT!5R?r
d. A\.2.Tm^ d . B1.2.oc(^MM*i1l<=
 1.10 I. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 7

Days from E p o c h according to Romaka

8-10. D e d u c t 4 2 7 f r o m the S a k a y e a r (elapsed) o f the t i m e t a k e n . M u l t i p l y

the r e m a i n d e r by 12. A d d the m o n t h s g o n e , c o u n d n g f r o m C a i t r a . P u t this
result i n two places. I n o n e place, m u l d p l y it by 7, d i v i d e by 228 a n d take the
q u o t i e n t w h i c h constitute the i n t e r c a l a r y m o n t h s . A d d this to the result k e p t
i n the s e c o n d place. ( T h e total are the s y n o d i c m o n t h s gone.) M u l t i p l y this by
30 a n d a d d the tithis c o u n t e d f r o m sukla-pratipad to the c u r r e n t tithi. P u t the
s u m i n two places. I n o n e place m u l d p l y by 11, a d d 5 1 4 , d i v i d e by 703 a n d
take the q u o t i e n t , ( w h i c h constitute the e l i d e d days o r avamas). D e d u c t this
f r o m the s u m p u t i n the o t h e r place. T h e r e m a i n d e r are the ' D a y s f r o m
E p o c h ' (dyugana), the m o m e n t o f E p o c h b e i n g m i d - s u n s e t at Y a v a n a p u r a ,
b e g i n n i n g M o n d a y w h e n the first tithi o f C a i t r a was a b o u t to b e g i n .
T h i s r u l e is a c c o r d i n g to the Romaka. It c a n be t a k e n as the Paulisa r u l e also,
p r o v i d e d the t i m e t a k e n f o r c o m p u t a t i o n is n o t v e r y far f r o m the E p o c h , (or
the p a r t o f the r u l e f o r avama m a y be u s e d f o r the Paulisa also, p r o v i d e d the
t a k e n date is n o t v e r y far f r o m the E p o c h ; or i n the Paulisa too the m o v e m e n t
o f E p o c h is m i d - s u n s e t at Y a v a n a p u r a , b e g i n n i n g M o n d a y . )
Example 1 . Find the Days from Epoch for Tuesday the sixth day of the dark fortnight of Asddha, Sa
(elapsed).

Saka year (elapsed) of date is 499. 499 - 427 = 72 years gone. Months gone = 72 x 12-1- months
counted from Caitra upto Asadha = 72 X 12 -I- 3 = 867.

867 X 7 - 228 = 6069 -r- 228 = 26

867
141
(=Q)+ (=Rem)
228 A d d i n g the quotient 26
Synodic months gone 893
T h e tithis = 893 X 30 -I- tithis i n the current month = 893 X 30 -I- 21 = 26,811
(26,811 X 1 H - 5 1 4 ) ^ 7 0 3 = 4 2 0 ( = Q ) - H 175/703 (= Rem) 26,811
Deducting the quotient 420

Days from Epoch gone 26,391

8-I0.QuotedbyUtpalaonBS2.(p.30) c. B 1 . ^ 1 ? R I ^ : ; B 2 . 1 3 r f ^ :
Sc. A2.3r55! d. Al.2.11?:; B 1.2.fOT:; U.r:^:
d. A I . 2 . ^ ; B 1 . 2 . ^ ; D . ^ A1.W
A1.2.C.D.U.^5rait lOb. BI.2.<rl<^'t4)H) B I . ^ *
9a. A 2 . W ^ A 2 . W ^ c. AI.2.Rl.^idl^ A2.^?i^
b. AI.2.fl[&; B I . 2 . t l ^ A 1.2.^^; B 1.3.^^:
8 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 1.10

Dividing 26,391 out by 7, the remainder got is I, i.e. Monday has gone and Tuesday has begun.
(This agrees with the data given and therefore 26,391 are the required days from Epoch.)
T h e rule is thus explained: According to the Romaka, in a.yuga containing 2850 solar years, there
are 1050 intercalary months and 16,547 elided days (vide 1.15). From this we can compute that in
the yuga there are 34,200 solar months, 35,250 synodic months (i.e. months), 10,57,500 tithis and
10,40,953 civil days (vide 1.17). N o w , because the Epoch is 427 Saka (elapsed), by deducting 427
from the Saka year (elapsed) of the time taken, the years gone at the taken time from the Epoch is
got. As there are 12 solar months in a year, the years gone X 12 + the months gone upto the time
taken = the solar months gone from Epoch to the end of the solar month falling in the current
month. T h e intercalary months d u r i n g this period is obtained by proportion from the solar months
and the intercalary months o f theyw^a, viz. 34,200: 1050 :: the solar months gone: the intercalary
months during the period. T h u s we have the equation, the intercalary months = the solar months
gone X 1050 ^ 34,200. T h e fraction 1050/34,200 reduces to 7/228 which represents the author's
instruction to multiply by 7 and divide by 228 to get the intercalary months. It should be noted that
we are finding the intercalary months not upto the taken time but upto the end of the solar months
falling in the current month, for, logically, the third member of the proportion should be solar
months as the first member is the solar months o f the yuga. T h e number o f months gone frotn
Caitra upto the time taken is the same as the solar months ending in or before the current month,
and therefore, we use it for adding to years gone X 12, to get the solar months gone. From this we
can understand that in counting the months from Caitra we should not reckon any intercalary
month that has fallen. Note also that the fraction of intercalary month obtained from the proportion
is the part of the current synodic month from pratipad upto the end of the solar month and by
omitting it, we have found the intercalary months gone before the taken time which is the thing
wanted.

T h e rule for 'Days from Epoch' does not mention any constant {ksepa) to be added to the intercalary
month obtained because at the time of Epoch there is practically no fraction of intercalary month.
We shall now show how it is practically zero. Even though we do not know the time when the
Romaka Y u g a began, wherefrom the fraction required can be obtained, still from the constant for
the mean Sun and M o o n in Chapter V I I I we can obtain this, in the following manner. There, in
the first verse giving the rule for the mean Sun, 150 is mentioned as the multiplier for the Days
from Epoch, and 65 is given as the subtractive constant. F r o m this we learn that 65/150 days,
(i.e. 26 nadikas) after Epoch, the mean solar month ends and therefore at Epoch the mean Sun is
1 F 29 34 ' 30 ". Again, from the constants in the fourth verse giving the mean M o o n , we can learn
that the mean M o o n at E p o c h is 11' 26 12'. F r o m these, it can be computed that the mean new
moon occurs about 16 '/2 nddikds after Epoch. As the interval from new moon to the end of the solar
month is the fraction of intercalary month, we get 26 - 1 6 V2 = 9V2 nadikas, as the fraction. As for
one intercalary month consisting of about 29 Vz days there are 228 parts as constant, for 9 '/a nddikds
we get 1 as constant. T h i s is omitted as being negligible, because, after all, we are going to use in
the rule not the mean Caitra, etc. but the true Caitra etc. which can differ from the mean upto 36
nddikds. That is why i f an intercalary month has actually fallen i n the current year before the taken
time, we take the fraction of the computed intercalary month as whole and add one, and i f no inter-
calary month has fallen we omit one from the computed months when the fraction left over is small.

T o continue, adding the intercalary months to the solar, the synodic months gone are got, for the
intercalary months are the synodic months omitted in the one to one correspondence of the
synodic months with the solar. Multiplying the total synodic months by 30 and adding the tithis in
1.10 I. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 9

the current month, the total tilhis are obtained. These lessened by the number of elided days in the
period between the Epoch and the time taken gives the Days from Epoch, for the elided days are
the tithis left out of reckoning in one to one correspondence between the tithis and the days. Here
the elided days are obtained by the proportion, i f for the tithis in the yuga numbering 10,57,500
there are 16,547 elided days, how many elided days are there for the tithis from the Epoch to the
taken time; i.e. 10,57,500 : 16,547 :: the intervening the intervening elided days. So, we have
the equation, the intervening m/jM X 16,547 -r 10,57,500 = the elided days. Here the multiplier for
the tithh, viz., the fraction 16,547/10,57,500 can be expressed as a continued fraction to find a
suitable smaller fraction for easy work, thus:

1 16547 1057500 63
1 1508 15039 9
1 41 1467 35
1 9 32 3
4 4 5 1
0 1
i.e. 16,547/10,57,500 = J _ i l l J _ l l i l
63+ 1+ 9+ 1+ 35+ 1+ 3+ 1+ 4+

The successive convergents obtained from this are: 1/63,1/64,10/639, 11/703,395/25244 etc. O f
these the author has taken 11/703 as being simple and, at the same time, sufficientiy accurate for
the purposes of this work, for even d u r i n g a period as large as xheyuga, the difference in the elided
days will be only 10,57,500 (1654/10,57,500 - 11/703) = 1/17, and this is small in comparison with
the difference caused by actually using the true tithi in the formula, which we are constrained to use,
in the place of the mean tithi which, according to theory we must use.
Now, at the time of Epoch there was a fraction of elided day equal to 514/703, and, as this has also
to be added, the additive constant 514 is given. As done in the case ofthe intercalary month, here
also we can examine the correctness of the constant, 514, thus: the fraction of elided day is the part
of the current tithi gone before the time of beginning of the new day, as in the present case, viz., the
Romaka before sunset at Yavanapura. W e have seen before that at Epoch there remains 16'/2
nddikds for the mean new moon to end, i.e. about 43 nddikds have ended in mean Amavasya tithi.
The constant 514 means that 514/703 part o f the Amavasya has gone and this is equal to about 43
nddikds and thus the constant is practically correct. It is because of the existence of this constant that
we have interpreted, caitra-suklddau as 'when the first tithi of Caitra was about to begin'. Further, we
have seen that at Epoch Amavasya is current and Caturdasi is gone. But, taking the Amavasya as
gone, the tithis to be used i n the formula are asked to be reckoned from the first tithi of the month.
That is why we gave the instruction to add the tithis from Sukla-Pratipad to the current tithi, though
the usual instruction would be to add only the tithis gone. It must be noted that the author's instruc-
tion is simpler and at the same time not incorrect. Also, there is the usual practice of comparing the
week day for the obtained Days from Epoch, with the actual week day of the taken time, and adding
or subtracting a day from the days got, i f necessary, which will take care of everything. T h u s the
whole thing is explained.

The Saka year is the year of the Saka era which began at 3179 Kali (elapsed), for the Siddhdntas
instruct that 3179 should be added to the Saka year to get the K a l i year. T h e purpose of mentioning
that Caitra Sukla Pratipad occurred near the Epoch is to indicate that the months gone must be
10 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 1.10

counted from Caitra and the tithis from Sukla Pratipad. T h e moment of Epoch is given as mid-
sunset at Yavanapura, because the Sun has an angular diameter of about 32', and the time between
the beginning and end of its immersion below the horizon is considerable. T h e practice of beginning
the day at sunset was, in those days, prevalent in the countries near Yavanapura, which practice is
still followed by Jews and Muslims, as in India certain Siddhdntas like the Surya Siddhdnta begin the
day at midnight, which is used for certain injunctions of the Dharma-sdstras, while certain other
works like the Aryabhatiya etc. begin the day at sunrise which is used for certain other injunctions
of the Dharma-sdstras.

Yavanapura is Alexandria in Egypt, the ancient capital of the country, where Ptolemy II, the
famous astronomer and author of the Almagest, ruled and which was well known to the astronomers
of India. H o w do we know that it is Alexandria and no other city? In III. 13 the dme-difference
between Yavanapura and Ujjain due to their difference in longitude is given as seven nddis and
twenty vinddis and sunset at Yavanapura is later. F r o m this we can see that it must be a well known
place 44 west of Ujjain in longitude and its position agrees with that of Alexandria.
We have said that the moment o f Epoch begins Monday, somadivasddye. T h i s reading is that of
Bhattotpala, quoting the verse i n his commentary ofthe Brhatsamhitd and we have adopted it as the
correct one. It does not matter i f we adopt another reading, saumyadivasddye, for we can interpret
this as 'the day pertaining to the M o o n ' , i.e. Monday, because the word saumya can be interpreted
as 'belonging or pertaining to the M o o n ' . It cannot mean Wednesday, as it might appear at first
sight, (the word saumya being a name for Mercury), for it must be Monday because the L o r d of that
day as computed from 1.20 is the M o o n and not Mercury. W e shall show how. I n 1.17 it is instructed
that 2227 should be added to the Days from E p o c h to get the lords of the year, month, day andhord.
Because the Days from Epoch gone is patendy zero at the Epoch itself, we have 2227 + 0 = 2227,
from which to get the L o r d o f the day. T h e instruction is to divide this out by seven, and take the
remainder, which gives the L o r d o f the day gone counting from the Sun, in the order Sun, M o o n ,
Mars etc. Now we want the L o r d ofthe 2228th day, and dividing 2228 by 7, the remainder is 2, i.e.
M o o n is the L o r d of the day and it must be Monday. T h i s can be shown in other ways also but this
is enough here. W h e n there is this fact of a Monday and the reading somadivasddye to support it, the
interpretation by some as 'at the beginning o f Wednesday' has to be discarded. There is another
reading, bhaumadivasa which has been accepted by the two scholars, S.B. Dikshit and B h a u Daji,
and also by N P , not remembering that the formula has been and can be constructed only on the
basis of the mean constants and not of the true constants and not understanding the purpose ofthe
statement caitrasuklddau, as such that reading has also to be discarded. Note also that the Romaka
ahargana mentioned i n verse 17 below, viz. 2227, works out only to Monday, not Tuesday, since the
cycle commences from Sunday.

We have given as one interpretation oindticire Paulise 'pyevam, 'It can be taken as the Paulisa rule
also, provided the time taken for computation is not very far from the Epoch'. Strictly speaking, in
the rule given by a particular Siddhdnta, only the synodic month and the tithi of that Siddhdnta must
be used to get the Days from Epoch. B u t as given i n 1.4, the tithi o f the Romaka was near that of
Paulisa at the time of E p o c h and so the Romaka rule could be used for the Paulisa for some time,
especially because there is the check by comparing the week-days. A n o t h e r thing to be noted is this:
Whatever Siddhdnta is used to compute the days from Epoch, the result must be the same. That is
why no separate rule has been given either for the Vdsistha or for the Saura, for we can use days of
the Romaka or Paulisa for these also, mutatis mutandis.

T S interpret ndticire Paulise'py evam as 'the rule is the same for also the Paulisa Siddhdnta which w
1.10 1. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 11

written not long ago'. But the time of a work is irrelevant to a manual of the sort the author is
writing and he is not interested in giving it. As a result of this interpretation, they have taken that
the Paulisa rule is the same as the Romaka rule, with the result that they have not been able to see
that the following verses 11-13 give the rule of the Paulisa, though they are quite capable of under-
standing and interpredng them. N P translate, 'It is not very different in the Paulisa', without
explaining ndticire.

Days from E p o c h according to Paulisa

11. ( T h e f o r m u l a f o r D a y s f r o m E p o c h a c c o r d i n g to the Paulisa, is as follows:)

A s i n R o m a k a (1.8-10), d e d u c t 4 2 7 f r o m the S a k a year (elapsed). M u l d p l y by
12 a n d a d d the m o n t h s g o n e f r o m C a i t r a . M u l t i p l y by 3 0 . T h e ' S o l a r days'
(S-days) to the e n d o f the c u r r e n t solar m o n t h are got.

M u l t i p l y the S-days by 10, a d d 6 9 8 , a n d d i v i d e by 9 7 6 1 . T h e q u o t i e n t are

the i n t e r c a l a r y m o n t h s . ( A g a i n , as i n R o m a k a ) , m u l t i p l y the m o n t h s got by 30
a n d a d d to the S-days, a n d a d d also the tithis f r o m s u k l a - p r a t i p a d , inclusive o f
the c u r r e n t tithi. T h e s u m is the tithis g o n e f r o m E p o c h . M u l t i p l y this by 11,
a d d 4 4 4 {tri-krta) and divide by 703. T h e quotient are the elided days. Deduct this
from the tithh gone. T h e remainder are the Days from Epoch.
Here the word divasdh is interpreted as ravi-divasdh, i.e. 'solar days', because it comes i n the place
of 'solar months' in the formula. T h e number of 'solar days' is equal the number of degrees
traversed by the Sun, the time taken for moving one degree being taken as one 'solar day' by Indian
astronomers. It is not what is meant i n modern astronomy, the time interval taken by the Sun for
the successive crossing of the meridian.

T o avoid error of syntax, 'sdstdnavarasa' is emended into 'sdstanavarasd'. Following the sense, in
the place o f kurtu and rutu, the reading ekartu is substituted. N P editorially add before divasdh the
word saura, which is not necessary, as it can be inferred. NP's translation gives the number 9761
with an emended reading kvrtusaptanava. A g a i n , the ms. reading tri-krta has been changed to tri-sat,
with the translation, 'there is an omitted dthi every 63 days', missing to see thattri-krta (444) is the
Paulisa ksepa in place of the Romaka ksepa 514 of the previous verse, to be used i n the Paulisa
calculation.

lla. AI.2.D.fe(I:;C.f^ A1.2.f| B l . 2 . ^ D . [fg]

A1.2.B1.2.W c. C.1^Rt3;D.1?r[^]
AI.2.C.^1^; D . ^ T ^ : [^]f^ d. B2.Hli^c|H
b. AI.2.B1.2.om.tT A1.2.tf^
12 PANCASIDDHANTIKA
1.13

f?rf8I^(W) 'WTi3|W^:

^ 5 g ^ ^ ' w c ) ^ t d ( ^ ( ^ < a ^ A ' ^ 1 1 ^ ^ II

12-13. ( F o r g r e a t e r a c c u r a c y i n finding the i n t e r c a l a r y m o n t h s by the above

f o r m u l a , ) a d d 1/10 S-day to the S-days f o r every 107 years a n d f o r still greater
accuracy, a d d a n e x t r a 1/10 S-day f o r every 5 5 0 s u c h 1/10 S-days a d d e d , (i.e.,
f o r 55 S-days a d d e d ) . I n the same way, i n g e t t i n g the e l i d e d days, f o r every
2 4 5 years a d d 1/11 tithi to the tithis g o n e a n d f o r every 2 , 0 3 , 2 7 9 such a d d i t i o n s
omit one addition.

What is the purpose of the author in aiming at such accuracy? T h e author intends that the Paulisa
should be used by people for a very long time as can be seen by his giving it fully i n this work. (He
gives the Saura also fully with the same view.) So he wishes to secure greater accuracy for the Days
from Epoch got by the Paulisa.

Example 2 . The day taken is Monday, Mdrgasirsa Amdvdsyd, Saka 1821 (elapsed). Find the
Epoch, for the moment of the beginning of the day.

T h e S-days to the end o f the Solar month in the current synodic month = {(1821 - 427) 12 -I-
8} X 30 = 5,02,080. T h e tenths of solar days to be added to this for computing the intercalary
months accurately = (1821 - 427)-h 1 0 7 = 13. A d d i n g 5,02,080-f 1 3/10 = 5,02,081 3/10. Multi-
plying by 10, adding 698 and dividing by 9761, the intercalary months got are: (5,02,0813 -I- 698)
-^9761 = 514 4357/9761. T a k i n g the full months, multiplying by 30, adding the tithis inclusive of
Amavasya and adding to the S-days, the tithis gone are 514 X 30 -I- 30 -f 5,02,080 = 5,17,530. T h e
elevenths o f tithis to be added to this for accurately computing the elided days = (1821 - 427)
245 = 5. A d d i n g to the tithis gone, multiplying by 11, adding 444 and dividing by 703, the elided
days obtained are {(5,17,530 -I- 5/11) X 11 -I- 444 } -r- 703 = 8098 3857703. Deducting the full
elided days from the tithis gone, the Days from Epoch gone = 5,17,530 - 8098 = 5,09,432. Dividing
out by 7, the remainder is 0, i.e. Monday is beginning. This agrees with the weekday of the taken
time, viz. Monday, and therefore the Days from Epoch are 5,09,432.
Now, for the explanation ofthe Paulisa rule. Before proceeding, the following things should be
noted: (1) T h e text here is badly vitiated, (2) the original Paulisa has been lost, and no Siddhdnta with

I2a. A I . ^ S T ^ " ; A 2 . ^ - g a p J 7 ?
BI.2.<!JI<^W!il; C.^?r?R; D . ^ ? i m [ ^ ] ^
b. BI.2.^^RraT^ d. A1.2.f?M^9g:; B1.2.C.D.f?raTfl9g;
A1.2.13^:^:;B1.2.W^:^: 13a. B1.3tfRra% B2.3rfwra%
c. B1.2.3TSRT8T b. D . [ c ^ ^ t g O W ] ;
Al.BI.C.-qFEIfai; A 2 . n B1.2.%l%;^ D . ^ f ^ q i ^
c-d. A l . f l f f ^ ; A 2 . f ^ ; B I . 2 . f l ; ^ ; c. BI.2.^
1.13 1. I N T R O D U C U O N O F T H E WORK 13

the constants of the original Paulisa is extant so that the constants here given cannot be verified
directly; (3) the condensed Paulisa of our author does not give the mean M o o n . But as the Vdsistha
and the Paulisa are found mixed together in this work and as some peculiar technical terms are
found common to both, we can assume that they are connected in some way and the Vdsistha M o o n
is intended for the Paulisa also. N o w we can explain the rule.

From l l l . l we learn that there are 43,831 days in 120 Solar years. F r o m 11.3 we learn that in a
period of 3031 days, called a Ghana, the mean M o o n moves through 110 full revolutions 11 signs,
7 degrees and 32 minutes. Assuming that no fraction of a minute has been added or left out, the
modon for tlie period in revolutions is 110+ 11/12 + 7/12 X 30 + 32/12 X 30 X 60 = 110 5063/5400 =
5,99,063/5400. T h e days for 5,99,063 revolutions are, 5,99,063 X 3031 ^ (5,99,063/5400) = 5400
X 3031 =1,63,67,400. For 1,63,67,400 x 43,831 = 7,17,39,95,09,400 days, the Moon's revolutions
are 5,99,063 x 43,831 = 26,25,75,30,353. In the same way, the mean Sun's revolutions in the
period of 7,17,39,95,09,400 days are 120 x 1,63,67,400 = 1,96,40,88,000. Therefore, using 1.16,
in a period of 7,17,39,95,09,400 days,
there are 26,25,75,30,353 revolutions ofthe M o o n ,
and there are 1,96,40,88,000 revolutions ofthe Sun.
Subtracting, there 24,29,34,42,353 synodic months,
Multiplying Sun's rev. by 12 there are 23,56,90,56,000 solar months,
Subtracting, there are 72,43,86,353 intercalary months.
Multiplying synodic months by 30 there are 7,28,80,32,70,590 tithis.
Now, the days are, as above 7,17,39,95,09,400.
Subtracting the days, there are 11,40,37,61,190 elided days.

From this we can see that in a period of 23,56,90,56,000 solar months, i.e. for 7,07,07,16,80,000
'solar days' there are 72,43,86,353 intercalary months. So, by proportion we find the intercalary
months for the given solar days by 7,07,07,16,80,000 : 72,43,86,353 :: S-days : intercalary months,
i.e. intercalary months = S-days X 72,43,86,353/7.07,07,16,80,000. T h e multiplying fraction here,
viz., 72,43,86,353/7,07,07,16,80,000, can be expressed as a continued fraction thus =

10 724386353 707071680000 976

1 18391633 70599472 3
5 2967080 15424553 5
21315 589153

72,43,86,353/7,07,07,16,80,000 = _ L - L _ L _1 _L
976+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 5+ 5+
T h e successive convergents are 1/976, 10/9761, 31/30,259,41/40,020 etc. O f these, our author has
taken 10/9761, as being sufficiently simple and accurate. (Incidentally, this gives the justification
for giving the corrected reading ekartusaptanava). By taking this fraction for use, for every S-day,
72,43,86,353/70,70,71,68,0000 - 10/9761 = 1,83,91,633/(7,07,07,16,80,000 x 9761) intercalary
month is lost, i.e. in every period of 107 solar years, containing 107 x 360 S-days, the above fraction
multiplied by 107 x 360 is lost, which reduces to (1 + 1214/6,54,696)/9761 = (1 + l/550)/9761 very
nearly (or exactly, i f possibly 32' given above is a correction to the nearest minute). So this also
14 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 1.13

should be included for greater accuracy and it can be done by an appropriate addition in the S-days,
by the proportion: If 10/9761 intercalary month is got for one S-day, by how many S-days is (1 -t-
l/550)/9761 intercalary month got? T h u s we get S-days equal to, (1 -t- l/550)/9761 10/9761 =

(1 + l/550)/10 = | p - f - | ^ x L _ . This is for every 107 years, and so, for every 107 years, 1/lOS-day

has to be added for greater accuracy in getting the intercalary months and for every 550 such addi-
tions one more tenth is to be added, which is the instrucdon given. (This is the reason for our giving
as the correct reading, 'tilhidasamdmsam where tithi according to the context means S-day).

Now we proceed to explain the part of the formula relating to the elided days. We got before that
there are 11,40,37,61,190 elided days in a period of 7,28,80,32,70,590 lunar tithis or simply tithis.
Cancelling out a factor 30, we have 38,01,25,373 elided days for 24,29,34,42,353 tithis. So, to obtain
the elided days for tithis gone we have the propordon, 24,29,34,42,353: 38,01,25,373 :: tithis gone;
elided days d u r i n g the period, i.e. elided days = tithis gone X 38,01,25,373 ^ 24,29,34,42,353. T h e
muldplying fraction 38,01,25,373/24,29,34,42,353 can be expressed as a condnued fraction thus:

1 38,01,25,373 24,29,34,42,353 63
1 3,45,81,519 34,55,43,854 9
2,71,336 3,43,10,183 126

38,01,25,373/24,29,34,42,353 = ^ ^ ^ ^
63+ 1+ 9+ 1+ 126+

T h e successive convergents are 1/63, 1/64, 10/639, 11/703, 1396/89217 etc. O f these, our author
has taken 11/703 (note that this is the same as that of the Romaka) as being enough for a first approx-
imation. By taking this, 38,01,25,373/24,29,34,42,353 - 11/703 = 2,71,336/(24,29,34,42,353 x
703) elided day is left out for every tithi. In the period of 245 years, given i n the rule, there are, from
the constants given before, 7,28,80,32,70,590 X 245 + 1,96,40,88,000 tithis. So in this period the
left out elided day is {2,71,336/24,29,34,42,353 x 703} X {72,88,03,70,590 x 245 ^
1,96,40,88,000} = 16,61,933/(16,36,740 x 703). This can be included i n the formula by making a
proportionate change i n the tithi thus: T o get 11 elided days we have to take 703 tithis, to get the
elided days left out i n 245 years, we must take tithis equal to 703 x 16,61,933 (16,36,740 x 703

25 193
X 11)= 1 6 , 6 1 , 9 3 3 ( 1 6 , 3 6 , 7 4 0 x II) = (1 + IQ^Q^J^QV^^ = 1/11 + 25,193/(16,36,740 x 11). In
this the first term 1/11 is given by the instruction to add an eleventh oi a tithi every 245 years. T h e
second term does not agree with the instruction to omit adding one eleventh for every addition of
2,03,279 elevenths. This may be due to several reasons. It may be that the mean modon for 3031
days is given to the nearest minute, and small as this is, it can affect the value of the correction which
itself is very very small. O r the Paulisa M o o n is slightly different from the Vdsistha M o o n , which we
have assumed for the Paulisa. O r there is some error i n the text here. We must be satisfied with the
other and more important items of agreement. It must be remembered here that T S have omitted
even the translation of these two verses, as a hopeless task.
1.16 1. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 15

Now we proceed to examine the hsepas used in the formula. A t the time of Epoch, the Vdsistha
mean Moon is 11' 25 6' (vide II.3). As done before, we assume this for the PaM&'o also. The Paulisa
mean ('mean' here is the assumed mean) Sun is 1 V 29 44' (vide III. I). F r o m these we can see that
the mean new moon will occur after 23 nddikds. F r o m the ksepa for elided day given, 444, we can
see that the end of the Amavasya occurs, before the beginning of the next day by 444 X 59/703 =
37 nddikds, i.e. 23 nddikds after the Epoch, and thus there is agreement. (This shows that the reading
'trikrtadindny avamasanksepah' is correct).
We shall examine the ksepa for the intercalary month. T h e ksepa given is 698. Dividing by the
given divisor, 9761, we see that at the time of Epoch there is a fraction of 698/9761 intercalary
month left. As the fraction of intercalary month is the interval from new moon to the next ending
moment of the solar month, we get that 698/9761 synodic month = 2 days and 6 V2 nddikds after
new moon, the Sun enters the next rdsi, here Mesa. We have seen that the mean new moon itself
falls 23 nddikds after Epoch. Therefore we get that the Sun enters Mesa 2 days 6 V 2 nddikds + 23
nddikds - 2 days 29 V2 nddikds after Epoch. T h e proper mean Sun computed for Epoch is 1 T 27
33' (vide III. 1-3), i.e. after traversing 2 27', i.e. after 2 days 29'/2 nat/i^ds, the Sun will enter Mesa.
This is the same as what we have computed from the ksepa 698, and thus it is verified.

Perhaps the reader has noted here that in the verification of the ksepa for elided day we have used
the assumed mean Sun (written 'mean' Sun) at Epoch and of the ksepa for intercalary month, the
proper-mean-Sun a l Epoch. Is it proper, he may ask? Logically it is not. But, after all, what we want
is to get the Days from Epoch correctly. If, by this shift, the rule is simplified, without sacrificing
accuracy, then there is no harm i n having recourse to it, thinks the author. We have already said
that the mean Sun and M o o n can alone be taken i n framing the rule here. What we have called
above, the 'proper-mean' is really the mean and so that part is all right. I f here the assumed mean
Sun is used, which is practically the true Sun at Epoch, an intercalary Vaisakha will be falling
immediately which will necessitate giving a ksepa almost equal to the divisor 9761 and cause a lot of
trouble. So the author has done what is only proper here. T h e n why not use the mean Sun to get
the elided day ksepa also? T h e Paulisa, in giving its peculiar method, has assumed the beginning of
the true Solar year as that of the mean Solar year, so that the true Sun at that point is assumed as
the mean Sun. O u r author has taken it as it is given and computed the ksepa for the elided day
accordingly, for, as we have already said, there must be the check by comparing the weekday and
that will take care of everything. O r , some astronomer, unaware ofthe illogicality, has handled the
ksepa. While T S omit to translate the verses 11-13, merely stating that the details are obscure (Tr.
p.5), N P change several ms. readings, dasamdrnsa to dasdrnsa, pancakrtadvisammitdh topaiicatanudvid-
vimitdh, ekikartum to eka rtu, without getting anywhere near the correct sense.
 16 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 1.16

Yuga of the Sun and the Moon (Romaka and Saura)

14. I n the Saura Siddhdnta, a p e r i o d (actually the minor yuga) o f 1,80,000

solar years c o n t a i n s 6 6 , 3 8 9 i n t e r c a l a r y m o n t h s a n d 10,4.5,095 e l i d e d days.

15. T h e l u n i - s o l a r yug^a o f the Romaka Siddhdnta consists o f 2 8 5 0 solar years.

In this p e r i o d , t h e r e are 1050 i n t e r c a l a r y m o n t h s a n d 16,547 e l i d e d days.

16. T h e solar years i n xheyuga m u l t i p H e d by 12 gives the solar m o n t h s i n the

yuga. T h e solar m o n t h s p l u s the i n t e r c a l a r y m o n t h s are the s y n o d i c m o n t h s i n
xheyuga. T h e tithis got by m u l t i p l y i n g the s y n o d i c m o n t h s by 30 r e d u c e d by
the e l i d e d days, are the c i v i l days, (i.e. days) i n xheyuga. T h e civil days plus the
solar years are the s i d e r e a l days i n the yuga (or the s y n o d i c m o n t h s plus the
solar years are the M o o n ' s r e v o l u t i o n s i n Xheyuga).

Example 5. Give the revolutions of the Sun and the Moon, the civil days etc. in a yuga (minor) of the S
Siddhdnta.

There are 1,80,000 solar years in the Saura m i n o r yuga, and as a solar year is the period of revolu-
tion of the Sun, there are 1,80,000 solar revolutions i n xheyuga. M u l t i p l y i n g the solar years by 12,
the solar months in a yuga are 12 x 1 , 8 0 , 0 0 0 = 21,60,000. T h e synodic months are solar months
plus intercalary months = 21,60,000 + 66,389 = 22,26,389. T h e tithis are 30 x 22,26,389 =
6,67,91,670. T h e (civil) days a r e , / M w - e l i d e d days = 6,67,91,670 - 10,45,095 = 6,57,46,575. T h e
sidereal days are, civil days plus solar years = 6,57,46,575 -I- 1,80,000 = 6,59,26,575. T h e lunar
revolutions are, synodic months + solar years = 22,26,389 -I- 1,80,000 = 24,06,389.
Example 4. Give the revolutions of the Sun and the Moon, the civil days etc. in the Romaka yuga and
time of revolution of each, etc.

Sun's revolutions = solar years = 2850. T h e solar months are, 12 X 2850 = 34,200. T h e synodic
months are, 34,200 -I- 105o' = 35,250. T h e tithis are, 30 X 35,250 = 10,57,500. T h e civil days are,
10,57,500 - 16,547 = 10,40,953. T h e lunar revolutions are, 35,250 -I- 2850 = 38,100. Dividing the
days i n Xheyuga by the solar revolution, the time taken for the one revolution, i.e. the solar year is,
in days etc. 10,40,953 2850 = 365-14-48. Dividing the days by the synodic months, the period
of synodic revolution (month) got is i n days, etc. 10,40,953 ^ 35,250 = 29-31 -50-5-37. Dividing the
days by the lunar revolutions, the dme for one revolution got is, in days etc. 10,40,953 38,100 =
27-19-17-46.

T h e following points should be noted. The Romaka Siddhdnta, now extant, agrees with xhe Modem
Sdrya Siddhdnta i n its constants like the period of xheyuga, the number of revolutions of the planets
in the Yuga etc. But the Romaka Siddhdnta condensed by our author is quite different and seems to

14a. B 1 . ^ ; B 2 . ^
b. A2.Tr^'' d. A l . 2 . ^ ; B l . W ^ ; B2.-P?fcl
c. Al.M<=il^ll:; D . hciipR<4i] B 1 . 2 . i R W ^ : A l . - g ^ ; A.2.'CT5r
c-d. B1.2.^!ife!iT-gap?nferI 16. Q u o t e d b y U l p a t a o n B S 2 , p . 2 9
15a. B 2 . ^ f o r ^ a. B1.2.^gT^^lft^
B1.2.^Rti=^; b. A1.2.^!#mra*
b. B 1 . 2 . W ^ ( B 2 . ^ ) W : d. A1.2.C.D.^^B1.2.W^
1.16 I. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 17

be lost. Therefore we cannot determine whether the period of 2850 years mentioned here is the
actual yuga ofthe original Siddhdnta or a m i n o r yuga (i.e. a fraction of it in whole years) given for
convenience. Patently, the solar year given here is tropical and agrees with the value given to it by
the ancient Greeks, like Ptolemy II and Herodotus. It is so with the duration of the synodic month
also. Reducing the number o f solar years and intercalary months in the yuga by the factor, 150, we
see that there are 7 intercalary months i n a period of 19 years or 228 solar months, which is the
wellknown Metonic cycle. F r o m all this we can conclude that this Siddhdnta is from a Greek source.

In the case o f the Saura, the period o f 1,80,000 years given here is certainly a minor yug^a of the
original Saura, for by multiplying this by 24 we get the number o f years in the yuga o f the original,
viz., 43,20,000 years. F r o m this we can infer that i n theyuga o f the original there are 1,80,000 X 24
= 43,20,000 solar revolutions, 6,57,46,575 x 24 = 1,57,79,17,800 civil days and 24,06,389 x 24 =
5,77,53,336 lunar revolutions. W e have already mentioned that all these agree with the Ardhard-
trapaksa o f Aryabhata given in the Mahdbhaskariya, with the Kharidakhddyaka which is based on
Ardhardtrapaksa and with the Paulisa quoted by Bhattotpala i n his commentary on the Brhatsarnh
but not with the M o d e r n and well-known Sdrya Siddhdnta.

Now what is the purpose of our author i n giving theyuga-elements of these two Siddhdntas alone?
Our author expects that, like the Paulisa, the Saura also would be used for a long time. So, if the time
taken is far from the Epoch, he expects the reader to make his own rule, taking the elements given
here, following the method of the Romaka. In the case o f the Romaka itself, the accumulation o
error in the rule can be prevented by deducting multiplies of 2850 years from the years gone from
Epoch and doing the work with the small number of years left. Also, in the case of both, we can use
the elements given here to check the constants given in later work, for mistakes.
We shall now explain the rules o f verse 16, indicating the Sun's revolution as R, the Moon's r, the
synodic months m, the intercalary months i, the elided days e, the Tithis t, the civil days d, and the
sidereal days n.
(i) We shall explain the synodic month and derive the relation between the synodic months and
lunar revolutions in theyuga. T h e synodic month is the interval between two consecutive conjunc-
tions of the Sun and the M o o n . In the Yuga the M o o n makes r revolutions and, therefore, in one
day makes rid revolution. In the same way, the Sun makes Rid revolution. In one day they move
r R

apart by g revolution. W h e n the separation equals one revolution they are in the next con-

junction. T h e period o f separation equal to one revolution, i n days = 1/^^^^ = f_ , which

is the length in days, of the synodic month (1)

For dlir - R) days, there is one synodic month; for d days (i.e. the days of theyuga) there are
di {d/(r - R)} = r - R synodic months, i.e. r-R = m, r=m + R (2); i.e. adding the Sun's
revolutions to the synodic months, the lunar revolutions are obtained.
(ii) The explanation of the intercalary month and its relation to the synodic month: T h e synodic
months, Caitra etc. are those that end in the solar months Mesa etc., and there is normally one to one
correspondence between the two sets. B u t as the synodic month is shorter than the solar it succes-
sively ends earlier and earlier in the solar and when it happens that the synodic month ends so early
in the solar that another synodic month also ends within the same solar, obviously it has to be left
out of reckoning i f the correspondence between the set Caitra etc. with the set Mesa etc. has to be
maintained. T h i s is the Adhikamdsa or intercalary month.
18 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 1.18

Now, in one solar year there are 12 R solar months. As there are R years in the yuga, there are
12 R solar months in theyuga. Therefore the length of a solar month in days = dll2R. T h e length
in days of a synodic month, already derived, = dl(r R). Therefore i n every solar month the end of
the synodic month (i.e. the new moon) occurs earlier hyd/l2R - d/(r R) = d(r - \SR )/l2R (r -
R). W h e n this is equal to one synodic month and gets immersed in the solar, then one intercalary
month happens, and the time for this to happen is, i n terms of solar months, d/{r - R)^ {d{r - 13/?)/
12R(r - R)} = 12R/(r 13R). Therefore, i n the yuga containing 12R solar months the number of
intercalary months i = \2RI {\2RI{r - 13/?)} = r - \m{r - R) - \2R=m -\2R. Therefore 12R
+ i= m (3), i.e. the solar months + the intercalary months give the synodic months.

(iii) W e shall explain the occurrence of elided days and derive their number: T h e length of a
tithi is a little less than a day and so every day the tithi occurs earlier and earlier in the day, u n d l the
time so accumulated becomes equal to one tithi and gets immersed i n the day, with the result that
the correspondence, one tithi to one day, is broken. Such tithis are left out by reckoning and are cal-
led 'submerged tithis' or 'elided days'. N o w , as there are i n theyuga d days and t tithis, the duration
of one tithi = dit. In one day, the tithi falls earlier by I - dit day. T h i s accumulates to one tithi i n dit
(1 dit) =dl{t - d) days, which is the time for one elided day to happen. Therefore, the number
of elided days happening in a Yuga = e = dl{dl(t -d))=t-d. Thereforerf = t-e (4), i.e. deducting
the elided days from the tithis we get the days.

(iv) W e shall explain the sidereal day and derive the number of sidereal days i n theyuga. T h e
time taken by the stellar sphere to move (apparently) one round, is the sidereal day. But the day,
i.e. the civil day, is related to the apparent diurnal movement of the Sun, from sunset to sunset,
from sunrise to sunrise, from midnight to midnight etc. A s there are n sidereal days and d days i n
theyuga, i n one sidereal day the Sun makes din revolution. Therefore i n one sidereal day he lags
behind by \ din = {n - d)ln, revolution. T h i s lagging behind is due to the Sun's eastward motion
in the Sky and its magnitude is the Sun's motion i n terms of revolutions d u r i n g a sidereal day. This
is equal to RIn. Therefore, (u d)ln = RIn. Therefore, (n d) = R. Therefore n = R + d (5), i.e.
adding the solar years to the days, we get the sidereal days. Thus all the rules of verse 16 have been
explained.

Lord of die year

17. A d d 2227 to the days from Epoch, divide out by 2520 and take the
remainder. Set this in 3 places. In one place divide the remainder by 360 and
take the quotient.
18. A d d 1, multiply by 3, deduct 2 and divide out by 7. T h e remainder
counted in the order Sun (Ravi), (Moon, Bhauma, Budha, G u r u , Sukra and
1.18 I. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 19

M a n d a ) is the L o r d o f the y e a r ( i n w h i c h the t a k e n day falls) (i.e. I f Q is the

q u o t i e n t t a k e n , the n u m b e r to be d i v i d e d o u t by 7 is e q u a l to ( Q + 1) x 3 - 2).
Example 5. The days from Epoch is 3479. Give the Lord of the year.
A d d i n g the ksepa to the days given, 3479 + 2227 = 5706. Dividing out by 2520, the remainder
is 666. Dividing this by 360, the quotient obtained is 1. (1 + 1)3 2 = 4. T h e fourth from the Sun,
B u d h a is the L o r d of the year.

The processes mentioned here are explained thus: A t the moment 2227 days before Epoch,
beginning Sunday, the days for calculating the L o r d of the year etc. began and, as for the first day
from that point of time, for the first month and the first year also beginning from that moment, the
L o r d was the Sun. T o find these Lords for any dme, the days from this point must be found and as
the Epoch is 2227 days from this point, the days required are got by adding 2227 to the days from
Epoch. For the purpose o f calculating the L o r d of the Year, the sdvana year comprising 360 days
is used by our author and the L o r d o f the first day of the sdvana year is the L o r d of the year. In the
same way, to calculate the L o r d of the month, i\\e sdvana month of 30 days is used, the L o r d of the
first day of the month being the L o r d of the month also. Now, as 2520 is the least common multiple
of 360,30 and 7, after each period of 2520 days, these Lords are repeated i n the same order. Hence
the instruction to divide the days out by 2520 and take the remainder alone. T h i s remainder is set
in 3 places to find the Lords ofthe year, the month and the day. T a k i n g the remainder of the days,
the L o r d of the first year is that o f the first day, the L o r d o f the second year is that of the first day
in the next year, i.e. ofthe 361st day, i.e. that o f the (358 + 3)th day, i.e. that o f the day three days
after; the L o r d ofthe year next to that is that ofthe day 6 days after that of the first and so on. T h u s ,
the L o r d of the nth year is that o f (n - 1)3 + I, i.e. that of n X 3 - 2. If Q is the number of years
gone, then n = Q + 1, and the L o r d is that of ( Q + 1)3 2, which is the rule given. A s the same
L o r d is repeated by the addition o f multiples of 7, by casting out 7 we get the same and hence the
instruction to cast out seven and take the remainder alone.

Dividing the days into sdvana years and giving the L o r d of the first day ofthe year as the L o r d of
the year is peculiar to o u r author. F o r others the L o r d o f the first day oi xhe saura year and for yet
others that of Caitra Sukla Pratipad is the L o r d o f the year. Some give two Lords.

There is a flaw in the derivation of this rule by M . M . Sudhakara Dwivedi (vide page 6 of his C o m -
mentary). It has been hidden by another mistake made by h i m , viz., adopting the reading 'anghri'
(= 2) but using the reading 'abdhi' (= 4) i n the derivation. T h e reading pratirdsca is really pratirdsya.
Both N P and T S take the readingpratirdsi and moreover, S gives it the incorrect meaning5e5aw, 're-
mainder'.

17-18. Quoted by Utpala on BS 2.2, pp. 30-31. 18b. A1.2.11"l'-^fa; Bl.il"IMlf^; B2.U"lwri<;
17a. B2.-3F'^ D.U.TFTRfe
c. A 1.2.'5fcRra; B 1 . 2 . ^ 9 ; C.D.3lRraf?I A1.2.^f%?^
A1.2.cJ?^eT c. e.-?1^
d. A1.2.^TRnfcT d. AI.^<?rfr#:; A2.g^lfnRT:;
B1.2.rf*IMld3;

4
20 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 1.20

Lord of the Month

19. Take the remainder set apart (as mentioned in verses 17-18), divide by 30
and take the quotient. A d d 1, multiply by 2 and deduct 1. T h e remainder,
after dividing out by 7, is the L o r d of the month, counted from the Sun.

T h e rule is ( Q + 1)2 1, where Q is the quotient taken.

Here i n the place ofthe reading 'kdrydh' accepted both by T S and N P , we have adopted the read-
ing vyekdh, given by Bhattotpala in his Br. Sam. commentary, as being the correct one and as neces-
sary here. Also i n the place of prapanna Bhattotpala readspratipada. Whatever be the reading here,
we want the meaning T.

T h e rule is derived thus: As mentioned before for the L o r d of the year, to get the L o r d of the
month the days are divided into sdvana month o f 30 days duration and the L o r d of the first day of
the month is the L o r d of the M o n t h . T h u s the L o r d o f the very first day, viz. the Sun is the L o r d of
the first month. As the days i n the month, 30, divided out by 7 leaves the remainder 2, the Lords
of the successive months are those o f 2, 4, 6 etc. days after that of the first month, i.e. the L o r d of
the nth month is given by (n - 1 )2 + 1 = n X 2 - 1. A s n is the current month, it is equal to ( Q +
1). Therefore n x 2 - l = ( Q - f - l ) 2 - 1, which is divided out by 7 gives the L o r d ofthe month.

Here too the derivation of M . M . Sudhakara Dwivedi is wrong (vide his commentary on the verse,
p. 6). T h e translation of both T S and N P are incorrect for having taken the reading Aarya/^ for vyekdh
('deduct 1'), not realising which N P complain: " T h e text's (1.19) 'increase the (resulting) months by
the current one' should be replaced by 'discard the fractional part o f the current (month)' (Pt. II,
p. 13, footnote). O n verses 17-19, K . S . Shukla has a detailed note i n his paper, 'The PS o f V M (2)'
Ganita, 28(1977) 9 9 f f "

Example 6. Far the same day as given in Ex. 5 give the Lord of the month.

T h e remainder set apart (in the Ex. 5) is 666. Dividing by 30, the Quotient, Q , obtained is 22. (22
-I- 1)2 - I = 45. Dividing out by 7, the remainder is 3. Hence, the third from the Sun, viz. B h a u m a
is the L o r d o f the month.

Cm^) cbM^^VI: II ?o ||

19. Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a o n B S 2 . p . 3 I . c. B I . 2 . ^ ? r # ^
19a. B I . 2 . 3 m ^ : ; U.3lRP?c?ri|<lT:
b. A I . 2 . B 1 . 2 . C . D . ^ : f o r 3 | ^ : d. BI.^sj^
1.21 I. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 21

Lord of the Hora

20. Take the remainder set apart in verses 17-18. Divide out by 7 and the
remainder is the Lord of the Day, counting from the Sun. Take this remainder,
multiply by 3, add 1, and add also the number of hords (i.e. the hours) counted
from the beginning of the day, (i.e. the previous sunset) inclusive of the hord
in which the taken moment falls. Multiply by 5 and divide out by 7. T h e
remainder, counted from the Sun, gives the L o r d ofthe H o r a .
If the L o r d of the day is dth from the Sun and the time taken falls i n the hth hord, then the number
for the L o r d of the H o r a is {M + I + h) x 5.
It should be noted here that the hord, h, is counted from sunset, because the time of Epoch is sun-
set and the day is said to commence there.
T h e derivation of the two rules: T h e rule for the L o r d of the Day is obvious for the order of the
Lords, Sun M o o n , Bhauma, etc. is meant to be the order of the Lords of the weekdays, Sunday,
Monday, etc. T h e rule for the L o r d of the hord is derived thus: F r o m the Sdstra we learn that the
L o r d of the hord beginning at sunrise is the same as the L o r d of that day. T h e L o r d ofthe hord begin-
ning Sunday, i.e. ofthe hord']\xst after sunset of Saturday, (i.e. Mandavara), is B u d h a , since the L o r d
of the hord after sunrise on Mandavara is M a n d a and the successive Lords of the hords are the fifth
after each, i.e. the sixth counting from each, (vide the next verse, 21). B u d h a is the 4th i n order.
After this if {n - I) hords are gone, the L o r d of the nth hord is given by (n - 1)5 -I- 4. Let us find the
L o r d of the/jora for the A-th/lora of the d-th d a y . T h i s is {(d 1)24 -I-A}thAorfl. Therefore the L o r d
of the hord is, substituting this for n in the above formula, {{d - I )24 -l-h - l } 5 - l - 4 = (24rf -I- h -
25)5 + 4 = {2ld + 3d +h + I- 26)5 + 4 = {3d + I +h)5 +4 +5 x2ld-5 X26 = {M +I +
h)5-l- 105<Z- 126 = (3</-H -l-h)5-l- 15<f x 7 - 18 X 7. As no change i n the L o r d happens by adding
or deleting multiples of 7, this reduces to {Sd + I + h)5, which is the rule given. (Here too the deri-
vation of M . M . Sudh. is wrong. Let the readers examine his commentary.) T h e acceptance ofthe
expression vyeka i n place of the ms. reading 'dhyeka both by T S and N P has rendered their trans-
lations incorrect.

Example 7. (a) Who is the Lord of the Day, for the day given in Ex. 5? (b) On the same day, who is the Lo
of the Hora, fifth after sunrise?

(a) T h e remainder set apart according to verses 17-18 is 666. Dividing out by 7, the remainder
left is 1, i.e. the L o r d of the Day is the Sun.
(b) In the example, d = l,h = 5 + 12 = 17 (because h is counted from the beginning of the day,
i.e. the previous sunset). Substituting, (1 X 3 -I- 1 + 17)5 = 105. Casting out 7, the remainder is 0
or 7 and the 7th from the Sun, M a n d a is the L o r d of the hord.

20. Quoted by Utpala on BS 2, p.34. C. C D . U.^11I?T;

20a, BI.2.^T<^ Bl.WWrf; B2.^?r<l^;C.D.U.^H'<!l^
b. A 1 . 2 . B I . 2 . ' " ^ 5 r a ? t ^ : ; C.D.U.BPfnt d. Al.2.^^; Bl.ft^
AI.2.*M^1\VII:; BI.*W^Tlq:; B2.^R^??ft?T:
22 PANC:ASIDDHANTIKA 1.22

21. T h e f o u r t h c o u n t e d from the L o r d o f any year is the L o r d o f the year next

to that. T h e t h i r d from the L o r d o f a n y m o n t h is the L o r d o f the m o n t h next.
T h e s i x t h from the L o r d o f any hord is that o f the n e x t hord. T h e L o r d s o f the
day c o m e c o n s e c u t i v e l y , i n the o r d e r g i v e n .

This the explanation: It has been said that the L o r d of the year is that of the sdvana year of 360
days, coming one after another. T h e L o r d of the first day of the year is the L o r d of the year and
the L o r d of the 358th day is the same. T h e L o r d of the next year is that of the 361st day, which is
the fourth counting from 358. T h u s the L o r d o f the next year is the fourth counting from that of
the previous year. In the same way, the L o r d of the next (sdvana) month is that of the 31st day,
counted from the first day o f the previous month. T h e L o r d o f the 29th day is the same as that of
the first. T h e 31st day is the 3rd counting from the 29th. Therefore, the L o r d of the 31st day, i.e.
the L o r d of the next month, is the third from that o f the previous month. T h e Lords of the hords
come in the order, Manda, G u r u , B h a u m a , Ravi, Sukra, B u d h a and Soma, which is the descending
order of the distances of their orbits. T h e planet next in this series, who is the L o r d of the next hord,
is the 6th in the series given by our author, and hence the statement that the sixth from the previous
is the L o r d of the next hord. T h a t the Lords of the day come consecutively is obvious, for the series
Ravi, Soma, Bhauma, etc. is given i n the very order o f the Lords o f the day.

One thing must be said here. T h e author has taken the Lords i n the arbitrary order Ravi, Soma
etc. as it is well known by means of the week-days we are using in o u r day-to-day affairs. But the
order o f the Lords of the hord, viz. Manda, G u r u , etc. based on their distances is fundamental and
given by the Sdstras, which give the L o r d of the week-day itself as being the same as the L o r d of the
first hord after sunrise on that day, taking the L o r d o f the hord as known. T a k i n g this order we can
make the following statements: T h e L o r d of the next day is the 4th as counted from that ofthe cur-
rent day, the L o r d of the next month is the 7th counted from that of the current month (or, which
is the same, the one previous to that of the current month) and the L o r d ofthe next year is the third
counted from that of the current year.

22. C o n s u l t i n g the w o r k s o f Sages, I s h a l l tell i n m y f u t u r e w o r k f o l l o w i n g the

Hord-Tantra, the p r e d i c t i o n s , v i z . w h i c h results w i l l flow d u r i n g the r e i g n o f
w h i c h L o r d o f the year o r L o r d o f the m o n t h .

There is a gap in this verse in every manuscript, tattadvrttaih being missing. So we have adopted
the reading of Bhattotpala in his Br. Sam. commentary which is full.

21. Quoted by Utpala on B S 2, p.35. 22a B 3 . Commences with this verse.

21a. A 1 . 2 . B 1 . ^ ^ B1.2.3.^W
b. A1.2.^lfireTTFrat; B1.2.^lfcrRTir?ml; b. B 2 . ^ ^
c. A . B . o n . c R T ^ : ; C . [dt1ct>d^]
A1.2.BI.2.^%
c. B1.2.?fafr#?ir. A 1 . 2 . B 1 . 2 . ^ d B1 and B 2 . # a for#n
d. A l . f ^ i a ; U.f^^Rni?:"Fn^ A1.T#II^:; B2.cTf^?A;
B. f%n^
1.25 I. I N T R O D U C T I O N O F T H E W O R K 23

Rvi.^^ <iv4vi^'s^iuini II9^ II

( ^ ) (^^) (^:) ^ : jj

2 3 - 2 5 . A d d 1 to the D a y s f r o m E p o c h , d i v i d e by 3 6 5 , take the r e m a i n d e r a n d

d i v i d e this by 3 0 . T h e q u o t i e n t are the m o n t h s g o n e . T h e r e m a i n d e r gives the
L o r d s o f the c u r r e n t d e g r e e i n the c u r r e n t m o n t h . T h e y are, c o r r e s p o n d i n g
to each d e g r e e , K a m a l o d b h a v a ( B r a h m a ) , P r a j a p a t i , S v a r g a ( H e a v e n ) ,
W e a p o n , Tree, A n n a (Food), Residence, K a l a (Time), A g n i , A b h r a (Cloud),
S u n , M o o n , I n d r a , C o w s , N i y a t i (Fate), H a r a , B h a v a , G u h a , M a n e s , V a r u n a ,
B a l a d e v a , V a y u , Y a m a (the r u l e r o f the W o r l d o f the m a n e s ) , V a k ( G o d d e s s
o f S p e e c h ) , S r i (the G o d d e s s o f W e a l t h ) , K u b e r a , H e l l , E a r t h , V e d a s a n d the
Supreme Being.

This matter must have been taken from the ancient Samhitas by o u r author and given here.
For the purpose of giving the L o r d of the degrees they must have divided the days into years of 365
days (why not the exact duration o f the solar year, we cannot say) and the years into months o f 30
days as can be inferred from the instruction. B u t then it comes to giving the L o r d of not the degrees
of the rasi but that of each o f the savana days i n the sdvana month. For the 5 days left over at the
end of the year it must be taken that the first 5 Lords are repeated.
Example 8. Give the Lord of the Degree of the rdsi for Daysfrom Epoch 3479.
A d d i n g one and dividing by 365, the remainder is 195. Dividing by 30, the remainder is 15.
Therefore the fifteenth i n the list, Niyati (Fate) is the L o r d required.
Ed. Note: N P have identified verses 23-25 as relating to the Magas, emending the expression
mdsds syuh i n verse 23 to magdbddh syuh and have correlated the 30 names enumerated i n the verses
with the lords of the 30 days i n the month according to the Magan calendar. K . S . Shukla has studied
these three verses i n detail, noted that these names are enumerated also i n the Vatesvara Siddhdnta
(ch. I, sn.v, TO. 117 c-d, 118) and has traced the names to their Zoroastrian (Parsi) originals, as per
the following Table, i n his paper ' T h e PS o f V M (2)', Ganita, 28 (1977) 99-116.

23a. A 2 . ^ ; B l - 3 ^ A1.2.^55?1PI; 8 1 . 2 . ^ ^ ; B3.*sltlM<>

b. A 2 . W ! i i . A I . 2 . ^ ; B I . 3 . H | ^ . c. A 1 . 2 . B 1 . 2 . C . D . W I R ^ I R R g q : (B2.<*9^:)
AI.2.'Rrai^:; D . [tPHS^:] ^ : d. C.D.'llFi^d'M:. B.m^
d. AI.2.^f55mt;BL2.^^=?a^ 25a. A I . 2 . ^ ^ ^ ; B I . ^ ; B 3 . ^ ;
24a. A L ^ ' W i k d l ; BI-3.'H<HKci; C.D.'Wdk'=l: D . [m^] ftg
AI.2.-51^;B1-3.C.D.3I^: b. A I . ^ c l ^ ; A.2.^^el|^ AI.2.'HHlcWufl
b. AI.2.^;B3.^:;C.^;D.^ c. B1.3.3nf ?ftR^ I A I . 2 . B 1 . 3 . C . D . P n ? l l
d. A I . 2 . ^ ; BI.3. C . D . ^ : A . 2 . ^ . A I . 2 . ^ :
24 PANCASIDDHANTIKA

Names of the 30 days of the Parsi months

Name i n V M Name i n Vatesvara Siddhdnta Zoroastrian (Parsi) name

1. Kamalodbhava Brahma A h u r m a z d ( L o r d God)

(Lotus-born)
2. Prajesa (Protector of Prajapati (Protector o f B a h m a n (Protector of creatures.
creatures) creatures) Brahman)
3. Svarga (Heaven) Dyauh (Heaven) Ardibahesht (Holder ofthe keys of
heaven)
4. Sastra (Weapon) Sastra (Weapon) Shahrivar (Lord of pure metal)
5. Druma(Tree) T a r u (Tree) Spandarmad (Charitable)
6. A n n a (Food) A n n a (Food) K h u r d a d (Lord of festivals)
7. Vasa (Residence) Vasa (Residence) Amordad
8. Kala (Yama) Kala (Yama) Depadar (Associate of Ahurmazd)
9. Anala(Fire) A g n i (Fire) A d a r (Fire)
10. A b h r a (Filled with K h a (Same as Abhra) A v a n (Waters)
water, Cloud)
11. Ravi (Sun) Ravi (Sun) Khurshed (Sun)
12. Sasi(Moon) Sasi (Moon) M a h (Moon)
13. Indra (God of rain) Indra (God of rain) T i r (Distributor of water)
14. G o (Cow) G o (Cow) Gosh (Cow)
15. Niyati (Destiny) Niyati (Destiny) Depmehr (Ahurmazd's associate)
16. H a r a (Mihira, Sun) Savitr (Sun) Meher(Sun)
17. Bhava (Siva) G u h a (Son of Siva) Sarosh (Protector of the living and the
dead)
18. Guha Aja ( U n b o r n God) Rashna
19. Pitr (Manes) Pitr (Manes) Farwardin (Farohars of the dead)
20. Varuna Varuna B e h r a m (or Varenes)
21. Baladeva (Balarama) H a l i (Balarama) Ram
22. Samlrana(Wind) V a y u (Wind) Govad (Wind)
23. Yama Yama D e p d i n (Ahurmazd's associate)
24. V a k (Speech) V a k (Speech) Din
25. Sri (Righteousness) Sri (Righteousness) Ashisvang (Righteousness)
26. Dhanada (Kubera) Dhanada (Kubera) Ashtad (Aingel created by Mazda)
27. Niraya(Hell) Niraya(Hell) A s m a n (Sky)
28. Dhatri (Earth) B h u m i (Earth) Zamvad (Earth)
29. Veda Veda Marespand (Zarathustrian law and
religion)
30. ParahPurusah Parapurusa A n e r a n (Endless lights of shining
(Supreme Being) (Supreme Beipg) heaven)

1. A.B.C.D.*<U||e|dR:
Thus ends Chapter One, entitled 'Introduction of the Work',
in the Pancasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
 Chapter Two

VASISTHA-SIDDHANTAPLANETARY COMPUTATIONS ETC.

Introductory
Now follow the five Siddhdntas. O f these the Vdsistha is given first, as being the most primitive
among the Siddhdntas that distinguish between true and mean motions, unlike the Paitdmaha which
gives only the mean motion. For a detailed exposition of some of the verses see T . S . K . Sastry, ' T h e
Vasistha Sun and M o o n ' , / O P 25 (1955-56) 19-41 and K . S . Shukla, ' T h e PS o f VM(2)', Ganita
28(1977)99-116.

True Sun

1. M u l t i p l y the D a y s f r o m E p o c h by 4 a n d a d d 6. D i v i d e this by 1461 ( a n d

take the r e m a i n d e r ) . T a k e f r o m this, successively, the q u a n t i t y 126, r e d u c e d
by 1, 0, 0, 0, 2, 4, 7, 9, 9, 8, 6, 5 (i.e., the twelve quantities 125, 126, 126, 126,
124,122, 119, 117,117,118,120, 121). ( T h e S u n ' s rdiw. M e s a etc. are succes-
sively got.)

T h e direction is: Multiply the days by 4, add 6, divide by 1461 and take the remainder. F r o m this
first take off 125, and consider that Mesa is gone. T h e n from what remains deduct 126 and consider
Rsabha is gone, and so on. T h e Sun is i n the rdsi corresponding to the number which cannot be
deducted on account o f its being less than what is left over. Multiply what is left over by 30 and
divide by what cannot be deducted. T h e position o f the S u n i n that rdsi is got, i n degrees.

It is to be noted that even 'Days from Epoch' is not mentioned here but we take it as understood
because every work of this sort requires it. It is not specifically mentioned that this rule is for com-
puting the true Sun but we can infer it from the quantities here given and the work asked to be
done. Even the work is not clearly and completely given. B u t knowing what the author is about, we
can see what is wanted to be done. T S have refrained from interpreting this, as an impossible task.

la. A l . f c r p i q i ^ A 2 . w r W W g ;
BC.^Knpjra^ b. D.1^1^
a-b. A 3 . ^ ^ c-d. A.B.C.^IsRfKT f o r f ^
26 PANCASIDDHANTIKA

T h e text here svarakrta has been changed into krtasvara by interchanging the words, as the nature
of the work requires it and as this kind of transposition is somedmes found in manuscripts. It is
impossible that the Siddhdnta itself has made this mistake, not noticing the ascending nature of the
series i n this part.

Next, we are in doubt here about the time o f the day (like sunrise, sunset, noon or midnight) for
which the Sun is here given. O n e may think that because no time is mentioned here, not even the
instrucdon to take the 'Days from Epoch', one is expected to take the Days of the Romaka or the
Paulisa and with its own time of sunset at Yavanapura, i.e. thirty-seven nddis twenty vinddis from
sunrise at Ujjain. B u t later, in dealing with the Romaka itself and with the Saura, the author gives
different times of day for different computations (vide V I I I . 5 , I X . I, X V I . 1) and hence this doubt.
It is likely that the Vdsistha Sun and Moon are given for sunrise at Ujjain, as we shall show while dealing
with the M o o n .

Another point to be noted is this. T h e rule gives the ' T r u e ' Sun direcdy, without giving the
'Mean' Sun. This is possible because this Siddhdnta, like the other Siddhdntas of the period like the
Aryabhatiya, has taken the apogee ofthe Sun as fixed and, so, for a given day in the solar year there,
is a given anomaly with a given equadon ofthe centre, which means a given true Sun. (It is so with
the Vdkyakarana also, which follows the Mahdbhaskariya based on the Aryabhatiya, with this diffe
ence that here the days for fixed intervals ofthe true Sun is given, while in the Vdkyakaraija the days
for the Sun and the Sun for the days, both are given.)

T h e rule is explained thus: In this Siddhdnta the solar year consists of 365 '/4 days, (like the Julian
year), i.e. o f 1461 quarter-days. For convenience of computation, the Days from Epoch are also
converted into quarter-days. According to this Siddhdnta the true solar year began, i.e. the true Sun
was at the first point of Mesa, 1 V 2 days, i.e. 6 quarter-days, before Epoch. So 6 is added to the quarter-
days from Epoch to give the true Sun from the beginning of Mesa. As after periods of 365 V4 days,
i.e. 1461 quarter-days, the Sun returns to the first point of Mesa, we can divide the quarter-days
out by 1461 and take the remainder alone to find the Sun, i.e. its position from the beginning of
Mesa. N o w this Siddhdnta has found empirically that the true Sun traverses Mesarasi i n 31 ' A days,
i.e. 125 quarter-days, Rsabha-rasi i n S P . ^ days, i.e. i n 126 quarter-days and so on. T h u s i n 125 -t-
126 -I- 126 + 126 + 124 -I- 122 4- 119 -(- 117 + 117 -I- 118 -I- 120 -I- 121 = 1461 quarter-days the
Sun traverses all the twelve rdsis and reaches Mesa again. T h a t these numbers add upto 1461, and
1461/4 = 365V4, the days ofthe year, is proof of the correctness of our interpretation ofthe rule.
T h u s we see that the solar months Mesa etc. contain each 31 ' / i , 31 V2, 31 '/2,31 ' / 2 , 3 1 , 3 0 ' / 2 , 2 9 % ,
29'/4, 29'/4, 29'/2, 30 and 30'/4 days, respectively. It can be seen that these fairly agree with what
is given by the other Siddhdntas.

T h u s i f 125 quarter-days are left over in the year the Sun has traversed Mesa, i f 125 -I- 126 are
left over, it has traversed Mesa, Rsabha etc. It is obvious that its position within a rdsi is to be found
by the propordon: If 30 are for the quarter-days of the rdsi, how many degrees for the quarter-days
ultimately left over.

Example l.(a). Days from Epoch 4246. Find the true Sun. (b) Find the true Sun for zero day.

(a) Days converted into quarter-days = 4 X 4246 = 16,984. A d d i n g 6 we get 16,990. Dividing out
by 1461, the remainder is 919. Deducting 125, 794 is left over; Mesa is gone. Deducting 126, 668
is left over; Rsabha is gone. Deducting 126 again, 542 is left over; M i t h u n a is gone. Deducting 126
for Karkata, 416 is left over. Deducting 124 for Simha 292 is left over. Deducting 122 for Kanya,
II.4 II. V A S I S T H A - S I D D H A N T A 27

170 is left over. Deducting 119 for T u l a , 51 is left over, in Vrscika, i.e. 5 1 1 1 7 o f Vrscika is gone,
i.e. 30 X 51/117 degrees = 13 5'. Therefore the true S u n = T 13 5 ' .

(b) For 0 day, 0-1-6 = 6, quarter-days. 30 x 6/125 = 1 26' gone i n Mesa. Therefore the true
Sun = 0 M 2 6 ' .

f e ^ ^ q r r a t ' 7 T i ? ! ? n ^ ( ^ ) 8 i v i ^ t H d l : -Bern: StrTJT:

True Moon

2. A d d 1936 to the Days from Epoch, and divide the Sun by 3031. T h e quo-
tient are called ghanas. Multiply the remainder by 9 and divide by 248. T h e
quotient are called gatis and the remainder are called padas.

3. Divide the ghanas out by 16 and take remainder alone. Multiply this by 3,
divide by 4 and take the result as rdsi etc. Subtract this from 12 rdsi and take
the remainder. A d d to this, minutes equal to twice the total ghanas. A d d also
r 7 29'. (The mean M o o n at the end oi the ghanas is got).

4. Multiply the gatis by 185, subtract a tenth o f the gatis and add these also,
taken as minutes. (The mean Moon at the end of the gatis is got.) If the
number oi padas is less than 124, they are called ph\%-padas. If 124 or more,
124padas are taken and set apart as a hali-gati. T h e remaining/>a<te are called
minus-/)a<ia5. (The three technical terms here, hali-gati, plus-pada and minus-
pada are for use in verses 5 and 6 below.)

The reading here, gatisastdmsa is wrong, it must be either gatikdsthdmsa or gatyastdmsa. If, as we
have said, two minutes are added per ghana, 'added', because addidon is normally implied when

2a. A(=AI.2.)^';B(BI.2.3.)^ B.^;c!f5I0IRt(B2.^)

b. B . ^ ^ d. A . ^ a ^ ; D . o m ? ^ C . W W
A.'SRH f o r R F 4a. B l . T p f i r a T W " ; B2.3.-nf!lfII'raT

d. B.TR b. Al.^T^lf^"; D.-nRmt''. B1.2."?W5rai:

3a. A l . m i ^ f l ^ ; A2.B2.?R'fe?I^?t^ B2.'atTf5i
BI.?^^ c. B.^Ra#K. D.<2i)MMS
b. A.-atspiraf^; B.2.sil^iJfei; c.sil^mfei c-d. B1.2.^^'M4
c. C.tll^AI.tl^preRr; A2.RI; d.
28 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 11.4

nothing is said, then the emendadon gatikdsthdmsa is the proper one, which we have given. (TS also
give this). If, o n the other hand, we take it that the instruction is to subtract 2 minutes per ghana,
taking the word projjhya in the previous instruction to be understood here also, then the emenda-
tion gatyastdmsa will be the proper one. In this case we would also have to keep the letter ta of the
original as it is, without changing it into tha. B u t the addition o f 2 minutes per ghana alone would
agree with the correct mean motion for the period of our author which is i n cycles etc. 110-11 -7-32-
15 for 3031 days, the Vasistha mean morion being 110-11-7-32. NP have emended the word as sasthdmsa
which would not give the correct result.

Example 2. Find the mean Moon for the end of the gatijust before Days from Epoch, 3,06,131.

A d d i n g 1936 to Days from Epoch, the days for computation got is, 1936 + 3,06,131 = 3,08,067.
Dividing by 3031, the quotient 101 got zreghanas. T h e remainder is 1936. Multiplying 1936 by 9
and dividing by 248, the quotient 70 are gatis. T h e remainder, 64, are padas. These being less than
124, are plus-jbo<io5, to be used i n the formula o f verse 6.

Dividing out the ghanas by 16, the remainder is 5. T h i s muldplied by 3 and divided by 4 gives rdsis
etc., 3' 22 30'. Subtracting this from 12 rdsis,

the remainder to be taken = 8"^ 7 30'

A d d minutes equal to twice the g-Zioruw = 101 x 2 minutes = 0 3 22
AMtheksepa = I 7 29
A.dA gatis X (185 - 1/10) minutes = 70 x 184 9/10 min. = 7 5 43

T h e mean M o o n at the end o f the last gati 4 24 4

5. If a ha\{-gati has been obtained, for the sake of that hali-gati, add rdsis, etc.
6-0-4. A d d also degrees equal in number to the plus-padas or minm-padas.
Using the plus-padas or minus-padas, respectively, in the two following for-
mulae, find the value, which is in minutes and add that also. (The true M o o n
is got).

6. Deduct one from the plus-padas or minus-/a</as and multiply by 5. If

plus-pada, add the product to 1094, multiply this sum by the plus-padas and
divide by 63. These are the minutes to be added. If xninus-pada, subtract the
product from 2414, muldply the remainder by the minus-padas and divide by
63. These are the minutes to be added.

5b. A.tRqiags^ A.Sr^ B.-^ I

c. A I . W ^ : ; A 2 . W ? E i m - . 6a. BI.3.fe^
d. AI.tTSI; A 2 . B . C . D . ^ b. B 3 . ^ . B . f g ^
A . R 4 ^ B.Fl'irfgPra(B2<'^<') d. A . B . 1.151^^1^; A.%<1I
[.6 II. V A S I S T H A - S I D D H A N T A 29

T h e two formulae can be written down thus:

(i) If P is the number of plus-padas, {1094 -I- 5(P - 1)} P/63.
(ii) If P' is the number o f minus-padas, {2414 - 5(P' - 1)} PV63.

Example 3. Continue Ex.2 and compute the true Moon for the days given.
The mean Moon got in Ex. 2 to the end ofthe gati = 4^ 24 4'
The padas obtained are 64, plus-padas (P)
Adding degrees equal to P = 64, + 2 4 0
Using formula (i) intended for plus-padas, {1094 -I- 5 (64 - I)} 64/63 =
1431 minutes + 0 23 51

The true M o o n 7 21 55

Example 4. The Days from Epoch are 1219. Find the True Moon.

1219 + 1936 = 3155 (= days for computation). Dividing by 3031, g/wna got is 1, remainder 124.
M u l d p l y i n g 124 by 9 and dividing by 248, the g-ato got are 4. T h e remainder 124 are padas. T h i s is
just one hali-gati and no pada is left over.
r O
Ghana 1 x 3 / 4 = 0' 22 30'. Deducting from 12 rdsis = 11 7 30
A d d i n g minutes 1 x 2 -1- 0 0 2
Ksepa -f- I 7 29
Gatis 4, X 184 9/10 = 740 (minutes) -(- 0 12 20
For the hali-gati, add -1- 6 0 4

True Moon 6 27 25

Example 5. Find the true Moon for Days from Epoch, 1228.

1228 + 1936 = 3164 (= days for computation). D i v i d i n g by 3031, gAonos got 1, remainder 133.
Multiplying by 9 and dividing by 248, the quotient 4 are the gatis got, and the remainder 205 are
padas left over. A half-ga<i ( = 124 padas) can be taken from this, and the remaining 81 are minus-
padas.

ghana 1 X W = 0^22 30'. Deducting from I2rdsij II 7 30

A d d i n g 1 X 2 minutes + 0 0 2
Adding -1- I 7 29
Gatis, 4, X 184 9/10 = 740 (minutes) -1- 0 12 20
For the half-gofo' + 6 0 4
Degrees equal to P ' = 8 1 ' 2 21 0
U s i n g formula (ii) (as the left over are minus-padas = P'), 2414 - 5 (81 1)
81/63 = 2589 mts. + I 13 9

True Moon 11 I 34

T h e following is the explanation of the processes: T h e true M o o n at a given time t is: (i) the mean
M o o n at t plus (ii) the equation o f the centre for t. (i) is given here i n five parts. W e shall call them
(a), (b), (c), (d), (e) which are to be a d d e d u p to get the total mean M o o n .
30 PANICASIDDHANTIKA II.6

(a) (Usually called the MiUa-dhruva or Ksepa) is the mean M o o n at a point of dme 1936 days
before the E p o c h , when the Moon's apogee a n d the mean M o o n exacdy coincided according to this
Siddhdnta. T h i s is given as sasi-muni-navayamds ca rdiyddydh, i.e. V 7 29'.

(b) is the mean motion d u r i n g whole numbers of cycles of 3031 days from the point of time 1936
before E p o c h , each cycle equal to 110 anomalisdc revoludons of the M o o n . T h i s (b) is found by
muldplying the mean m o d o n per cycle (110 revoludons, 11 rdsis, 7 degrees, 32 minutes) by the
number of cycles, called ghanas, obtained as quotient, by dividing the Days from E p o c h plus 1936,
by 3031. A s full revolutions can be neglected, it is enough i f we m u l d p l y the ghanas by 11 rdsis
7 degrees 32 minutes, which may be done as ghanas X 2' + ghanas X 1 r 7 30'. Ghanas X 2 is given
by dvigunaghandh kaldh (yojydh). Because 16 ghanas X I T 730' equals 15 full revolutions, it
enough i f we divide out the ghanas by 16 and take the remainder alone for multiplication (for we
shall be neglecdng only full revoludons), which we are asked to do by ghanasodasahrta-sesam. A s 1 T
7 30' is % rdsi less than a full revoludon, we can multiply the remainingg/winas by % rdsi and take
this as subtractive, which we are instructed to do by projjhyddhas trigumtam caturbhaktam bhddi (rd
T h u s b is disposed of.

(c) is the mean motion d u r i n g the subsequent full anomalistic revolutions called gatis, which form
the quotient got by dividing the remaining days by the anomalistic period, 248/9 days, (i.e. multi-
plying the days left over by 9 and dividing by 248). F o r each gati the mean motion is I revolution
and 184 9/10 minutes (which can be obtained by dividing the motion per ghana, viz. 110 rev. 1 T 7
32' by thenumberofg-a<ijinag-Aa?i, viz. 3031 X 9/248). Hence the rule to multiply t h e b y 185'
and deduct minutes equal to I/IO o f the gatis. T h i s is given by visayadhrtayo gatighnd gatikdsthd
sonitdh kaldh yojydh.

(d) What are now left o f the days are ninths o f days called padas (and these obviously would be
209 209'
less than 248). T h e mean motion per pada is 1 degree 27 minutes, and sopadas X 1 27

should be added to complete the mean motion till t. O f this, the Siddhdnta asks us to add 1 per pada
first, which is given by sesapadasamdscdmsdJi (yojydh). T h i s forms d.
209
(e) T h e residue 27 minutes per pada, f o r m i n g (e), is combined with the equation o f the
centre (ii) and given by the two formulae o f II.6. I f the/wdos contain a half-gaft" (i.e. 124 padas) the
value of (d) + (e) + (ii) for the half-gati part is combined together and given as 180 4'. T h i s is got
as follows. A s the hali-gati is equal to 124padas, d = 124. (e) + (ii) given by the first formula of II.6
is: { 1 0 9 4 - 1 - 5 ( 1 2 4 - 1 ) } 124/63 = 3 3 6 4 ' = 5 6 4 ' ; 1 2 4 - I - 5 6 4 ' = 1 8 0 4 ' = 6 r d s 4 m i n u t e s , which
is given by gatyardhe bhagandrdham deyam Uptdcatuskasamyuktam a n d which instruction
much puzzled T S . But, o f course, this is incorrect a n d the defect lies i n the equation o f the centre-
part o f the formulae i n II.6, which give zero-value for the equation of the centre not at 124 padas,
but at 133 padas, as we shall show presently.

We shall first explain II.6 by showing how the formulae here combine the residual mean motion,
viz. padas X 27 209/248 minutes (= e) with what is identifiable with the equation o f t h e centre (=
ii). T h e equation o f the centre o f the Vdsistha is peculiar. Usually i n the Siddhdntas the equation of
the centre varies as the sine ofthe anomaly, and therefore is zero at zero degree anomaly, g o i n ^ to
a m i n i m u m at 90, again rising to zero at 180, then going to a m a x i m u m at 270, and then falhng
to 0 to 360, i.e. zero. T h u s it is negative i n the first two quadrants a n d positive i n the third and
fourth quadrants and of the form, ' - a sin 0, where ' a ' is the m a x i m u m or m i n i m u m numerical
II.6 II. V A S I S T H A - S I D D H A N T A 31

value, and 0 is the anomaly. Note that this is the first term o f the series for the equation of the
centre in modern astronomy, with its sign reversed, and the reversing is necessary because the ano-
maly was reckoned by the ancients from the apogee, not perigee. B u t i n the Vdsistha it is ofthe form
- (665 - 5P) P/63 for the first two quadrants and -I- (665 - 5P') P763 for the last two. These are
derivable from the equation for the Moon's daily true motion given i n III.4, (as we shall show
there), which assumes the increase or decrease o f motion as uniform. Here we shall assume them
and derive the two formulae o f II.6.

As said before, (e) -I- (ii) is given by the formulae and (ii) is - (665 - 5P) P/63, for the first formula.
Therefore (e) -I- (ii) = 27 209/248 P - (665 - 5P) P/63
= (63 X 27 209/248 - 665 + 5P) P/63
= (1754 - 6 6 5 - f 5 P ) P/63
= (1089+ 5P) P/63
= 11094 + 5(F- 1)1 P/63. which is the first formula.
For the second formula (ii) is 4- (665 - 5P') P763.
.-. (e) + (ii) = 27 209/248 P ' -I- (665 - 5P') P763
= (27 209/248 P ' x 63 + 655 - 5P') P763 = (1754 + 665 - 5P') P763
= (2419 - 5P') P763 = {2414 - 5 (P' - I)} P763 which is the second formula.
We have already shown how for the half-gati 6"^ 0 4 ' is got instead of the mean motion 6"^ 1 32 Va'.
This means that there is i n this an equation o f the centre equal to 88 Va', combined with it. So,
when the equation of the centre given by -t- (665 - 5P') P763 = -I- 88 Va, then it is actually zero
according to this Siddhdnta. Solving this equation, we get P ' = 9 or P ' = 124. A s P ' is minus-pada,
which is the original padas got less 124, we get that the equation ofthe centre actually becomes zero
at original padas, P = 133, and P = 248. A s P = 248, is the end of the gati, this is what we expect, as
the anomaly has again become zero.

Also, by computation or examinadon we can get from the equation o f the cyclic part o f the for-
mula for the first hali-gati, (665 5P) P/63, the numerically greatest value o f the negative equa-
tion of the centre, which is - 351', for P = 66 Va. In the same way, from that the formula for the
second hali-gati, + (665 - 5P') P'/63 we can get the m a x i m u m -f- 351', for P ' = 66 Va; but as there
is a residue of 88 Va' i n the second hali-gati, 351' 88 Va' = 262 Va' is the actual m a x i m u m . T h e
numerical mean is 307' which, we see, is very nearly equal to that of the other H i n d u Siddhdntas.

It is not that V M does not know that zero equation o f the centre must occur at P = 124, and not
at 133, for in his own Romaka and Saura it is so. N o r is it difficult for V M , a master i n the science,
to give the two formulae so as to have the equation of the centre zero at P = 124, (so that for a half-
gait we get the correct 6' 1 32 Va'), retaining, at the same time, the equation o f the centre desired
by h i m . If he had given the two formulae i n the form (1134 -I- 5P) P/63, and (2374 - 5P') P'/63, he
could have secured this. B u t adherence to the Siddhdnta has prevented h i m from doing this. So
closely does he follow the original that he does not even give the two formulae i n the more
simplified forms, (1089 - 5P) P/63, and (2419 - 5P') P'/63.

T h e following things are to be noted i n connection with this Siddhdnta. O f both the Sun and the
M o o n , the mean motion and the equadon o f the centre is mixed i n a peculiar manner and thereby
the true motion is given. We shall see that it is the same i n the case o f the Paulisa also.

T h e period of 3031 days called ghana here is the same as what is called kdldnala in the Vdk-
yakarana, which gives for this period, the mean motion, I F 7 3 1 ' , neglecting full revolutions. T h e
number 248 given here is there mentioned as devara.
32 PANCASIDDHANTIKA II.6

We can see that the remark i n 1.4 about the tithi of the Vdsistha being very incorrect is appropriate
but it can be shown that it is not due to the error i n the M o o n , but i n the Sun, whose sidereal year
is taken as 365-15-0 days. T h e Moon's motion for 3031 days is i n cycles etc. 110-11-7-32 = 110
5063/5400 cycles. In one day the motion is 110 5063/5400+3031 = 5,99,063/ (5400 x 3031) cycle.
In one day the Sun's motion is 1/365 V4 = 4/1461 cycle. T h e relative motion, i.e. their separation
per day is 5,99,063/(5400 x 3031) - 4/1461 cycle. T h e dme taken for a separation of one cycle, i.e.
the synodic month, is i n days, 1/(59,90,63/(5400 X 3031) - 4/1461} = 1461 x 3031 x 5400 ^
(I46I X 5,99,063 - 4 X 5400 x 3031) = 7,97,09,23,800 H- 26,99,20,481 = 29 - 31 - 50 - 17 - 38.
But the correct synodic month computed for the time near that of o u r author is 29 - 31 - 50 - 7 -
47. Therefore i n successive synodic months the tithi comes later by days etc. 0-0-0-9-51, according
to Vdsistha. In about 29 V 2 years this will accumulate to one nddikd. T h i s is bad indeed, and meri
V M ' s remark i n 1.4 taditarau duravibhrastau (i.e., ' T h e tithis o f the other two have slipped
away from the real'.)

Now, we have seen that according to this Siddhdnta the mean M o o n moves revs. 110-11-7-32-0,
while the real motion for the period is revs. 110-11-7-32-15. Therefore i n 3031 days the Vdsistha
naksatra is delayed by a little more than one vinddi. So a delay of one nddi is caused in 440 years only
So the delay of one nddi in the tithi per 29 V2 years mentioned above, must be due almost wholly to
the error in the Sun, the result o f giving the time per cycle as 365-15-0 days.

A g a i n , i n every 3031 days, the Vdsistha M o o n lags behind the correct one by 15". A lagging behind
by one degree will take place i n 3031 x 60 X 60 -H 15 days, i.e. in about 2000 years, a very long period
indeed. Bearing this i n m i n d , we shall try to answer the question already raised, viz. whether the
Vdsistha Sun and M o o n are given for sunrise at Ujjain or sunset at Yavanapura; and, incidentally,
we shall show that the ksepa, T 7 29' given hy sasi-muninavayamdsca rdsyddydh and obliterated b
by their drasdc emendation asyanm-hrtds ca is necessary i n II.3.
Thefollowing is the mean Moonfor Epoch (viz. Saka 427 elapsed, i.e. in A.D. 505), sunset, at Yava
beginning Monday, Caitra Sukla being about to begin.
i. Computed for the period according to modern astronomy, assuming theayandijisa to be practically
0 for the time 35448'
i i . According to Saura 355 6'
iii. According to Siddhdnta Siromani 35541'
iv. According to Romaka 35612'
V. According to Vasistha, assuming that the mean M o o n is given
for Ujjain sunrise 355 6'
-do- -do- for sunset at Yavanapura 346 54'
-do- Ujjain sunrise, without Ksepa 317 37'
-do- sunset at Yavanapura without Ksepa 309 25'

(For use by anyone interested i n making the calculations himself, the Kalidina etc. o f Epoch is
13,17,122-37-20. Also, the E p o c h is 5,09,432-22-40 days before mean sunrise at Ujjain ofthe first
January 1900).

A n examination of the table will show that the Vdsistha M o o n agrees with that of every other fairly
well, taking it as being given for Ujjain sunrise, and taking that the ksepa is given. If, o n the other
hand, it is assumed that it is given for sunset at Yavanapura, there is Si difference of about 8, which
can happen only i n 1600 years, which is very very unlikely; for this to happen the Vdsistha should
II.6 II. V A S I S T H A - S I D D H A N T A 33

have been written 1600 years earlier. I f there is not the ksepa, the difference is 37, an impossible
thing, not to speak of the assumption that it is for Yavanapura sunset and there is no ksepa, both
together which will make the difference 45 and worse. Hence the Vasistha epoch is definitely at
sunrise at Ujjain and not at sunset at Yavanapura (Alexandria).

We have shown the ksepa necessary. B u t T S have emended kalah dvigunaghandh, sasi-muni-
navayamds ca rdsyddydh (verse 3) into phalarh dvigunaghandh sasi-muni-yama-hrtds ca rdsyddydh a
spoiled the already correct reading and introduced two extra syllables i n the last foot, which spoils
the arya metre too. (It must be noted that already there are 16 mdtrds i n the last foot, i.e. one mdtrd
extra, which can be explained away or corrected by reading rdsyddydh as rdsyddi.)

One another point: T S have expressed their inability either to interpret 11.6 or to explain why 6'
0 4' is to be added for a half-gati (vide C o m , page 9). B u t sdll thinking 11.6 gives the pure equation
of the centre, the commentary goes on: arthdt veddrkdlpa-padesu rnam, adhikesu dhanam iti buddhimad
bhih svayam eva dhyam, i.e. "It goes without saying that when the padas are less than 124, the result
is subtractive, and when more it is addidve", which is wrong for we have seen that the result of both
the formulae are additive. Moreover, the failure, both by T S and N P , to realise that the expression
'rdsyddydh' specifically instructs that the digits i n sas'imuninavayama are to be taken as 'beginning
from rdsi', i.e. as F 7 29' and not as a whole number 2971 (TS) or as " 2 ' 9;7, I" (NP) have led to
incorrect interpretations by them; also, the Notes of N P (vol. II, pp. 16-19) and the deductions made
(p. 19) have to be revised i n the light o f all that has been stated above.

Naksatra and Tithi

7. D i v i d e the T r u e M o o n by 4 a n d m u l t i p l y b y 9. W h a t we get i n the rdsi
c o l u m n is the naksatra. W h a t is got i n the d e g r e e c o l u m n are the muhurtas.
D e d u c t the t r u e S u n f r o m the t r u e M o o n , d i v i d e the result by 2 a n d m u l t i p l y
by 5. Tithis are got i n the rdsi c o l u m n a n d thirtieths of tithis i n the degree c o l u m n .
As the 27 nafoafra-segments are divided into the 12 rdsi - segments, there are 2 V4 = 9/4 ruiksatras
per rdsi. Hence the instruction to divide the rdsis by 4 and multiply by 9 to get the naksatras. As
degrees are thirtieths o f rdsis, the resulting numbers i n the degree column are thirtieths of
naksatras, called muhurtas by this Siddhdnta. It must be noted that the word muhurta originally meant
the 30th part o f a naksatra, but later came to be applied to the 30th part o f a day as well, because
both are practically the same i n duration.

T h e interval of longitude between the Sun and the M o o n is the tithi, 12 forming one tithi, i.e.
there are 2 V2 = 5/2 tithis per rdsi. Hence the instruction to divide the rdsis by 2 and multiply by 5
to get the tithis.

7a. A . mW; B.J^IVIWHPH

b. A.^i^lPHJcll; B . ^ ^ ( B 3 . ^ ^ - ^ W l f k m
d. A.fMra5
34 PANt:ASIDDHANTIKA II.7

Example 6. The true Sun is 10' 18, and the true Moon is 5' 22. Find the naksatra and the tithi.

Naksatra: T h e M o o n is 5' 22. D i v i d i n g by 4, (5^ 22)/4 = T 13. M u l d p l y i n g by 9, 9x T 13 = 12

- 27, i.e. twelve naksatras have gone and i n the 13th, (Hasta), 27 muhdrtas have gone.
Tithi: M o o n - Sun = 5'22 - 10TS = Dividing by 2, (7^4)/2 = 3 ^ 7 . Multiplying by 5,
3 M 7 X 5 = 1 7 - 2 5 . Seventeen tithis are gone and in the eighteenth (Bahula Trtlya) 25/30 parts
have gone.

Day-time

8. W h e n the S u n is i n t h e 3 rdsis, M a k a r a etc., the S u n m e a s u r e d i n rdsis p l u s

t h r e e is the d u r a t i o n o f d a y - t i m e i n muhurtas. W h e n it is i n the 3 rdsis. M e s a
etc., the S u n p l u s fifteen is the d u r a t i o n o f d a y - d m e . W h e n i n the 6 rasis,
K a r k a t a k a etc., the S u n p l u s n i n e is the d u r a t i o n o f t h e n i g h t - t i m e . ( T o get the
d u r a t i o n o f the d a y - t i m e , this s h o u l d be s u b t r a c t e d f r o m 30).

T h o u g h no measure o f time is mentioned here, we can infer that it is the muhurta (2 nddis)
because by adding the shortest day, 12, and the longest, 18, we get 30 which must be equal to the
whole day, i.e. 60 nddikds.

T h u s , for the S u n at the beginning of each rdsi. Mesa etc., the day-dme in muhHrtas is 15, 16, 17
18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, 12, 13, 14. T h e longest day is 18 muhurtas when the Sun is at the first point
of Karkataka (Cancer) at Summer solstice and the shortest 12 muhdrtas when at the first point of
Makara (Capricorn) at W i n t e r solstice. T h e day and night are equal at the first points of Mesa
(Aries) and T i i l a (Libra), i.e. at the equinoxes. T h e daily increase or decrease i n day-light is 4 vinddis
per day. In essence, the same formula for day-light is found in the VeddngaJyotisa and the Paitdmaha
Siddhdnta (PS, XII.5),with th' difference that here the true Sun is used, but there, because they
have no true Sun but only f' le mean Sun, the day which is proportionate to the mean Sun, is used.

Evidentiy not understanding what is given here, T S have made a drastic change in the text, writing
bhusvarga-tithimito for mesddau tithiyuto, intending to make this agree with the next verse giving
noon-day shadow. But, even within that verse, there is contradiction and this need not have been
attempted, at such cost. T o crown all their interpretation with their emendation is full of contradiction
within itself, which has been set out i n detail by me in a paper entitled 'Vasistha Sun and Moon' in the
Journal of Oriental Research, 25 (1955-56) 19 - 4 1 .

T h e uniform increase and decrease i n day-time given here is wrong, of course, and it varies with
the position of the S u n , being greatest at the equinoxes and falling to zero at the solstices. T h e
m a x i m u m or m i n i m u m day-time itself varies with the latitude of the place (depending on tan.

8b. A.*1<sii<^. C.\'(q'iRif)fHdl<^[5c|y: c. B2.^:;C.D.^

A.B.C.^:. A 2 . f ^ I d. E.mPl
11.10 II. V A S I S T H A - S I D D H A N T A 35

latitude), what is given here being for some place having a N o r t h latitude of 35 45'. (This matter
is dealt with i n the text in III. 10 and IV.26).

T h e rules for day-time is explained thus: F r o m the beginning o f Makara to the end o f M i n a
the Sun i n rdsis increases from 9 to 12. T h e day-dme also increases following it, from 12 muhdrtas
at winter solstice to 15 at Equinox. A s (9 to 12) -1- 3 = (12 to 15), the instruction to add 3 for
the Sun i n this quadrant follows. I n the same way, from the beginning o f Mesa to the end of
Mithuna, the Sun i n rdsis increases from 0 to 3. T h e day-time increases from 15 at Equinox to 18
at summer solstice. (0 to 3) -I- 15 = (15 to 18), and this explains the addition o f 15. As there is the
maximum day of 18 muhdrtas at summer solstice, there is the m i n i m u m night there, of 12 muhdrtas.
This increases to m a x i m u m night, 18 muhdrtas for Sun at the beginning of Makara, 6 months after.
As a result, as the Sun's rdsi increases from 3 to 9, the night increases from 12 to 18. (3 to 9) -f 9 =
(12 to 18) and this explains the addition of 9 (three times three).

Example 7. Give the day-time for the Sun at the beginning of: (i) Rsabha, (ii) Kumbha and (iii) Kanyd.

(i) T h e Sun is in the quadrant 0 to 3 rdsis. T h e beginning of Rsabha is one rd.si. Therefore 1 -I-
15 = 16, muhdrtas, is the day-time.

(ii) T h e Sun at the beginning of K u m b h a is 10 rdsis. T h i s is in the quadrant 9 to 12. Therefore

10 -I- 3 = 13, muhurtas, is the day-time.

(iii) T h e Sun at the beginning of Kanya is 5 rdsis and is i n the 6 rdsis 3 to 9. Therefore 5 + 9 =
14, muhurtas, is the night-time. Deducdng from 30, 30 - 14 = 16, muhurtas, is the day-time.

<i^*m^ whm M * i < v i i t i l ^ ^ c j f d II I

Gnomonic Shadow
9. When the Sun is in the six rdsis beginning with Karkataka, the number of
rdsis traversed from the beginning of Karkataka, multiplied by 2, is the mid-
day shadow (of the twelve-digit gnomon) in digits. When the Sun is in the six
rdsis beginning with Makara, find the distance in rdsis traversed by the Sun
from the beginning of Makara, and muldply by 2. Subtract this from 12, to
find the mid-day shadow.

10. When the Sun is in its southward-course, (i.e., in the six rdsis from
Karkataka), half the mid-day shadow plus three is the longitude ofthe Sun in
rdsis. When in the northward course in the six rdsis from Makara, half the
noon-shadow subtracted from fifteen is the Sun in rdsis.
d. A.B.C.D.i^-^lfW-1. A.^to5cTr#zil^
9a. A 1 . ^ F 5 ; B 2 % B . ^ B.T?5^HII
b. A . B l . ^ R e q ^ . A . ' l ^ 10a. A l . ^ W n t
c. A l . ^ ; A 2 . ^ d. B . W ^

5
36 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 11.10

Example 8. (a) On a certain day the Sun's longitude is 5 rdsis. (b) On another day it is tdsis 11-15
casesfindthe mid-day shadow.

(a) T h e Sun is 5 rdsis and is within the six rdsis from Karkataka, being 2 rdsis from the beginning
of the first point o f Karkataka (i.e. 3 rdsis). So, 2 X 2 = 4 digits is the shadow.

(b) T h e Sun's longitude is rdsis 11-15. T h i s is within the six rdsis from the first point of Makara
(9 rdsis), the Sun's posidon being 1 n 5 - 9'^ 0 = 2' 15 = 2 V 2 rdsis from that point. 12 - (2 V 2 X
2) = 7 digits is the noon-shadow.

Example 9. (a) The Sun is in its southward course and the shadow is 4 digits. Find the longitude oft
(b) The Sun is in its northward course and the noon-shadow is 7 digits. Find the Sun.
(a) H a l f the shadow = 4/2 = 2. As the course is southward add 3 rdsis; the Sun's longitude is
5 rdsis.

(b) H a l f the shadow = 7/2 = 3 V 2 . As the Sun's course is northward, deduct from 15. 15 - 3 V 2
= 1 1 V 2 rdsis. T h i s is the longitude o f the Sun.

F r o m the two sets of examples it can be seen that the two formulae are the inverse of each other.
T h e formulae are explained thus: T h i s Siddhdnta assumes that the noon-shadow is zero when, at
the end of its northward course, it reaches the first point of Cancer. T h e n as it moves southward,
the shadow increases to 12 digits at the end ofthe course, i.e. after 6 months, when the Sun reaches
the first point of Capricorn. A s s u m i n g the increase to be uniform, there is an increase of 2 digits
per rdsi. As the shadow is zero for the first point o f Cancer, the longitude i n rdsis measured from
this point, multiplied by 2 gives the shadow. T h u s , i f c is the Sun in rdsis measured from the first
point of Cancer and s is the shadow i n digits, s = 2c for the 6 months till the Sun reaches Capricorn,
where the shadow is 6 X 2 = 12 digits. T h e n the shadow decreases at the same rate to zero at the
first point of Cancer, i n the course o f 6 months. Therefore i f c is the Sun measured from the first
point of Capricorn, when the shadow is 12, and i the shadow, then s = 12 - 2c.

Now for the longitude of the Sun from the noon-shadow. W e have seen that for the six rdsis from
Cancer,.? = 2c. Thereforec = 5/2. But c is counted from the first p o i n t o f Cancer, i.e. 3rdsis. There-
fore the Sun's longitude in rdsis is 3 -I- c = 3 -(- s/2, which is the same as the instruction to divide the
shadow by 2 and add three rdsis. For the six rdsis from Capricorn, we have seen that ,s = 12 2c
Therefore c = (12 s)/2. B u t c is counted from the first point of Capricorn, i.e. 9 rdsis. Therefore
the Sun = 9-t-c = 9 + ( 1 2 - s)/2 = 15 - s/2, which is the instruction given.

It must be noted here that both the formulae are very rough. A t summer solstice, when the Sun
is at the first point of Cancer, its north declination is m a x i m u m and given by H i n d u astronomy as
24. A t that time, the mid-day Sun is at the zenith at places on 24 north latitude (like the region of
Ujijain) and so it is only in this region that the shadow is zero at this time. W h e n the Sun reaches its
southernmost point at winter solstice, i.e. the first point of Capricorn, its south declination is 24.
Therefore the zenith distance o f t h e noon-Sun as seen from latitude 24 N o r t h at that time must
be 48 towards the South, and the shadow at that time must be greater than 13 digits and not 12.
(All this will be shown in Chapter IV). If the shadow is to be 12 digits, the Sun's zenith-distance must
be 45 and the region where the Sun is seen at this zenith-distance is 21 N o r t h latitude. T h u s there
is contradiction even here. In verse 8, we showed that the rule is intended for a region having about
36 N o r t h latitude, neither 24 nor 21. T h u s , so far as these things are concerned, the Siddhdnta
seems to be a hotch-potch.
 11.11 II. V A S I S T H A - S I D D H A N T A 37

[BTSTRft cTO WIT g ]

Lagna from shadow and vice versa

11. A d d 12 to the s h a d o w ( o f the t w e l v e - d i g i t - g n o m o n , m e a s u r e d i n digits) at

a n y t i m e o f the d a y , a n d d e d u c t f r o m it the m i d - d a y s h a d o w f o r the d a y .
D i v i d e 36 by this a n d take the result. T h i s r e s u l t t a k e n as rasis, p l u s the S u n i n
r a i i s is the lagna at the m o m e n t , i f it is f o r e n o o n . I f a f t e r n o o n , d e d u c t this
f r o m the S u n p l u s s i x r o i t s a n d t h e lagna is got.

T h e formulae (a) for the forenoon and (b) afternoon respectively can be expressed thus:
(a) Lagna = S u n -I- 36/(12 + shadow - n o o n shadow), (b) Lagna = S u n + 6 - 36/(12 + shadow -
noon shadow).

What is called lagna is the Orient Eclipdc Point, i.e. the point o f the ecliptic rising o n the eastern
horizon.

Example 10. (a) On a certain day, the Sun is 9 rdsis and the mid-day shadow 12. At a time in the mornin
the gnomonic shadow is 36. Find the lagna for the moment, (b) On a certain day, the longitude of the Sun is
rdsis and the noon-shadow 6 digits. At a time in the evening the gnomonic shadow is 24 digits, find the la
for that moment.

(a) F r o m f o r m u l a ( a ) , L a g T i a = 9 + 36/(I2 + 3 6 - I2) = 9-(- I = 10, rojw. Hence the first point o f
K u m b h a is rising i n the east.
6 24
(b) F r o m formula (b), Lagna = 6 6 - 36/(12 -f 2 4 - 6 ) = 1 2 - 1 ^ = IQ^rdsis. Hence
the 25th degree o f K u m b h a is rising i n the east.
These rules are r o u g h and there is no question of strictly proving them. B u t we can explain them
thus. F r o m sunrise to noon, as the aldtude o f the S u n increases, the lagna goes on increasing and
the shadow decreasing, till it is shortest at noon. Therefore the increase i n lagna can be roughly
expressed as, ^/(shadow -I- b), where a and b are constants to be determined. N o w , i f the place is
supposed to be situated o n the equator, and the ecliptic o n which the Sun moves is supposed to
coincide with the celestial equator, then at noon the shadow will be zero. A t that dme the increase
in lagna (after sunrise) would be 3 rdsis, as the S u n has reached an altitude o f 90. Therefore 3 =
fl/(0 -I- b). A g a i n , seven and a half nddis after sunrise, the S u n would have risen to an altitude of 45.
So the increase i n lagna now is I rdsis and the shadow is 12 tan 45 = 1 2 digits. Therefore, I Va
= a/(I2 + b). Solving these two equations for a and b we get a = 36, * = 12. Therefore the increase
in lagna is 36/(shadow -I- 12), o f course, o n the given two assumptions. B u t the place may not be on
the equator and the ecliptic does not coincide with the celestial equator and the S u n moving on it
has a varying declination, with the result that generally the noon-shadow is not zero. According to
the length o f the noon-shadow at other times also there will be an increase i n the shadow over what

l l a . Al.SWf^:; A2.?Kf^:. A . ^
b. B.^Rn#. B.i?ii?n:. Ai.5W5Rim; c. A.B.^-J^l4<J,
38 PANCASIDDHAMIKA Il.li

it would otherwise be, for which the rule has been formulated. As the deduction of the noon-
shadow for the day of observation from the shadow would, to some extent, remove this extra length
of shadow and bring about an approximation to the ideal condition, the noon-shadow is asked to
be deducted from the shadow in the formula. Therefore the increase in lagna is given by 36/
(shadow - noon shadow -f 12). As at sunrise the Sun is the lagna, adding the increase to the Sun
we get the lagna, i.e. lagna = Sun -I- 36/(12 -I- shadow - noon-shadow). This is for the forenoon.

In the afternoon, what happens in the forenoon with reference to the shadow is reversed, and
therefore the rule gives the part of the lagna to increase from the dme of observing the shadow to
sunset. So, it is less than the lagna at sunset by what is got from the formula. But the lagna at sunset
is the Sun plus six rdsis. Therefore the formula for the afternoon becomes: Sun -I- 6 36/(12 -l-
shadow - noon-shadow). Again let it be remembered that the rules are rough.

cw4v^<: 'VH'*^<l8Hc|ui^<M<cbHIH' II

12-13. D e d u c t the S u n f r o m the lagna a n d c o n v e r t the r e m a i n d e r into

m i n u t e s o f arc, i f f o r e n o o n . I f a f t e r n o o n , d e d u c t the m i n u t e s f r o m a h a l f
circle, (i.e. f r o m 10,800 m i n u t e s ) , a n d take these as m i n u t e s . D i v i d e 64,800 by
the i n i n u t e s got. A d d the result to the n o o n - s h a d o w o f date a n d d e d u c t 12
f r o m this. T h i s is the s h a d o w at the t i m e o f the g i v e n lagna. T h i s is a c c o r d i n g
to the succinct Vasistha Siddhdnta.

The formula (a) for the forenoon, and (b) for the afternoon, respectively, are: (a) shadow =
{64,800 {lagna - Sun, in minutes) + noon-shadow - 12}. (b) shadow = 64,800 4- {10,800 -
(lagna Sun, in minutes)} -I- noon-shadow 12.

Example 11. (a) On a certain day at a time in the forenoon, the Sun is 9 rdsis and the lagna 10 rds
the noon-shadow of date is 12 digits. Find the shadow for the time, (b) On another day, for a time in
noon, the sun is 6 rdsis and the lagna 10 rdsis 25 degrees and the noon shadow of dale is 6 digits. Find the
shadow.
a] Using formula (a), shadow = 64,800 - {(10 - 9) X 1800} - 12 + 12 = 36 digits.
b] Using formula (b), shadow = 64,800 ^ {10,800 - (10 5/6 - 6) X 1800} - 12 -I- 6 = 64,800 -r-
(10,800 - 8640) - 12 + 6 = 64,800 + 2160 - 12 + 6 = 30 - 12 + 6 = 24 digits.

These formulae (a) and (b) can be derived from the previous formulae (a) and (b) of verse 11, for
these are only the inverse ofthe previous operations.

12a. B3.f^
b. A . ^ W T A.?5lfM^ B.iJtrsraig 13. A l . c ^ ; A 2 . c ^ . B3.t?^
b. A . B . ^ l i S m . B.yni^Tbl
Bl.^^gJT^:; B 3 . ^ ? i ^ I
d. A2.^;B1.2.^lfOT;B3.gif?TS
C. A.B.^Rra#^: ( B 3 . ^ : ^ : )
II.13 II. V A S I S T H A - S I D D H A N T A 39

The previous (a), is: lagna = Sun + 36/(12 + shadow noon-shadow). Therefore, lagna Sun = 36/
(12-1- shadow - noon-shadow). Therefore S6/{lagna Sun) =12-1- shadow - noon-shadow. There-
fore, shadow = 36/{lagna Sun) -f noon-shadow 12, where it is to be noted that (lagna Sun)
is i n rdsis. If it is to be expressed i n minutes, we have, shadow = S6/{lagna Sun) X 1800 + 1800
+ noon-shadow - 12 = 36 x 1800/{lagna Sun) in minutes + noon-shadow - 1 2 = 64800/{lagna
- Sun) in minutes -I- noon - shadow - 12, which is (a) here.

The previous (b) is: lagna = Sun + 6 36/(shadow -I- 12 noon-shadow). Therefore 36/(shadow
+ 12 noon-shadow)= Sun -I- 6 lagna = 6 (lagna Sun). Therefore 36/{6 (lagna Sun)}
= shadow -f- 12 - noon-shadow. Therefore shadow = 36/(6 - (lagna - Sun)} + noon-shadow - 12,
where (lagna Sun) is in rdsis. If it is to be expressed in minutes, we have, shadow = 36/6 { 6 (lagna
- Sun) X 1800 ^ 1800} + noon-shadow - 12 = 36 x 1800/{6 X 1800 - (lagna - Sun) in minutes}
-I- noon-shadow 12 = 64,800/(10,800 (lagna Sun) i n minutes} -I- noon-shadow 12, which
is (b) here.

The concluding words, Vdsistha-samdsa-siddhdnte, though forming a part of the sentence giving
the rules of verses 12-13, may be detached from it and taken to refer to the whole chapter II and
mean ' A l l this is given as i n the succinct Vdsistha Siddhdnta'.
The word, naksatrddicchedah is found at the conclusion i n the manuscripts. Perhaps it is, naksatrd-
dhicchedah, meaning 'Naksatra section' and the title is appropriate because this is the chief thing
given here and other things depend on it.
T h u s i n this chapter the true Sun and M o o n are given according to the Vdsistha and also other
matters depending on them like the naksatra, the tithi, day-time shadow and lagna. (The star planets
i.e. the regular planets, of this Siddhdnta will be given i n X V I I I . )

T S have professedly not understood verses 1, 5 and 6 and gone wrong in verses 3 (and 8), which
means they have practically not understood the Siddhdnta at all. Thibaut even thinks that verse 1
may be dealing with the M o o n . But this professed ignorance d i d not prevent him from making the
unwarranted remark i n the Introduction (vide p. X X X V I I I ) "the methods are so crude and so
completely omit to distinguish between mean and true astronomical quantities, that the Vasistha
Siddhanta can hardly be included within Scientific H i n d u Astronomy."

A . B . have as C o l o p h o n , C D . ^^^l(<^<: |

Thus ends Chapter Two entitled 'Vasistha-Siddhanta: Planetary

Computations etc' in the Pancasiddhantika composed by
Varahamihira
 Chapter Three

PAULI^A-SIDDHANTA PLANTERY COMPUTATIONS ETC.

Introductory
This chapter is a compendium o f the part o f the Paulisa Siddhdnta dealing with the Sun, M o o n
and Rahu. It has already been mendoned that the original Paulisa is now lost, perhaps for ever.
This and the Saura are the only Siddhdntas dealt with by the author i n full, the others being scrappy.
For some reason not known to us, at present the Paulisa is mixed up with the Vdsistha, for, the mean
M o o n , together with its peculiar technical terms pada, gati and ghana are used here, without
mentioning how they are got. T h e formula for the Moon's daily true motion, which patently
belongs to Vdsistha has strayed into this chapter, another evidence of their being mixed up. In this
chapter the Sun, the M o o n and Rahu, the methods of computing the dzily naksatra, tithi dndkararm,
the two yogas vyatipdta and vaidhrti, the day-light in any given place in India, and certain holy days
necessary for religious observations are dealt with.

True Sun

1. Multiply the days from Epoch by 120, deduct 33 and divide by 43,831.
T h e mean Sun in revolutions, rdsis etc. is obtained. A d d 2 0 to this mean Sun.
What is called kendram is got.

2-3. For the first six rdsis of kendra there are the following six quantities: 11,
48, 69, 70, 54 and 26, all deductive and in minutes. For the next six rdsis are
the following: 10, 48, 70, 71, 54 and 25, all additive and in minutes. (If these
are taken one after another according to rdsis of the kendra gone and) applied
to the mean Sun, it becomes true Sun.
 III.3 III. P A U U S A - S I D D H A N T A 41

In short, these twelve quantities are intervals of the equation of the centre for every rdsi of the
kendra, the word being used i n a peculiar sense here, and not the usual one o f mean anomaly. T h e
faulty readintrs, munyahti, mupta.krjta is corrected as mutkrti, meaning 26, and thereby the excess of one
syllable in the foot also gets corrected. T S and N P have emended it as maksakrti, meaning 25, which,
by its form, seems to be less likely to be the original, and which keeps the defect of the excess of one
syllable.

Example 1. (a) Find the true Sun for days from Epoch 690. (b) Compute the true Sun at Epoch.

(a) Multiplying the days 690 by 120 and deducting .33, we have, 690 x 120 - 33 = 82,767. Dividing
by 43,831, the revoludon got is 1 and remainder 38,936. Multiplying this by 12 and dividing by
43,831, the rdsis got is 10. T h e remainder is 28 9/22, which multiplied by 30 and divided by the same
divisor, gives degrees 19. T h e remainder 34,871 multiplied by 60 and divided by the same divisor
gives 48 minutes. T h u s the mean Sun is, omitting revolutions, ra. 10-19-48. Kendra = Mean Sun -I-
20 = rd. 10-19-48 -f- 20 = rd. 11-9-48. F o r ' l l full rdsis oi kendra and 9 48 ' of the 12th,
the minutes to be applied are, - 1 1 . - 4 8 , - 6 9 , - 7 0 , - 5 4 , -26,-1-10, -f48, -1-70, -1-71, --54, -t-25 X
9 48730, which added together is - 1 7 . A p p l y i n g this to the mean Sun, the true Sun is 10' 19 48'
- 1 7 ' = 10M931'.

(b) A t Epoch the days are zero. Therefore 0 X 120 - 33' = - 3 3 . Mean Sun = -33/43,831 revolu-
tions = - 3 3 X 12 X 30 X 60/43,831 minutes = - 1 6 ' = 1 T 29 44', (since cycles of 12 rdsu can be
added or omitted). Kendram = 1V 29 44' -f 20 = 0' 19 44'. A s no full ran orkendram is gone and
there are 19 44' in the first rdsi, the minutes to be applied are: - 1 1 ' x 19 44'/30 = - 7 ' . T h e true
Sun = 1 r 2 9 4 4 ' - 7' = 1 T 29 37'.

It is to be noted that the word kendram here is not used i n its usual sense i n later astronomical
works, as the mean anomaly (counted from the H i g h e r Apsis) which is obtained by deducting the
longitude o f the higher apsis from the mean planet. I n fact, the use of the expression in modern
western astronomy itself is different i n the sense that the anomaly is obtained by subtracting the
lower apsis or perigee from the mean planet. T h e Surya Siddhdnta instructs that the kendram is to be
obtained by deducting the mean planet from the higher apsis which is equal to the kendram given
by others, subtracted from 12 rdiis. T h u s the common characterisdc of these different kendras is
that it is used as the argument for the equation o f the centre and in this sense its use is appropriate
here also. So we can take it that the mean Sun itself is used as the argument i n the table, the values
being given for the intervals 340 - 1 0 , 10 - 40, 40 - 70, 70 - 100etc. instead of 0 - 30,
30 - 60, 60 - 9 0 , 90 - 120 etc. (vide Table)

3. Quoted by Utpala on B S 2, p.40. b. B . - ^ ' T ^ ^

l a . A.fcTrm c. Al.-g=^?fRTa; A 2 . g : ^ a . ; B . ^ 5 < T f c i a ;
b. A.'Tsn^. A l . ^ l c i m C.D.^^Jf^a
c. A . f c ^ ; B 1 . 2 . f ^ ; 63.1^1. A.*Hir<cl5!ll; d. A . W
B3.*Ml(<^^l! 3a. A l . W . A l . D . - ? ^ ^ :
d. B l . ^ # ? i m ; D.^?##?T: c. B . haplographical omission of"<iRi.
2a. B 2 . ^ W A.B.fil^
42 PASICASIDDHANTIKA III.3

Kendra 0 30 60 90 120 150

Mean Sun 340 10 40 70 100 130

Values for intervals -11' -48' -69' -70' -54' -26'

Real Anomaly 264 294 324 354 24 54

Values taking 140'

as maximum -12.9' -45.6' -67.7' -71.6' -56.3' -26.0'

180 210 240 270 300 330 360

160 190 220 250 280 310 340

+ 10' + 48' + 70' + 71' + 54' + 25'

84 114 144 174 204 234 264

+ 12.9' + 45.6' + 67.7' + 71.6' + 56.3' + 26.0'

T h e procedure is explained thus: A c c o r d i n g to the Paulisa Siddhdnta there are 120 solar revolu-
tions i n 43,831 days. So,in any desired number of days, the Sun's mean motion is days X 120
43,831 revolutions, which multiplied by 12,30 and 60 successively gives rdsis, degrees and minutes.
T h e mean solar year begins 16V^ nddikds after Epoch. Therefore to reckon days from the beginning
ofthe year, 16 V 2 nddikds or 33/120 days must be subtracted from the days from Epoch. A s the days
have already been multiplied by 120 and converted into one h u n d r e d and twentieth parts, we have
to deduct 33 parts in order to deduct 33/120 days, which is the instruction.

But what is called mean Sun here is not the real mean Sun. It is the real mean Sun plus the equa-
tion o f the centre for the beginning o f the year (this makes it the true Sun) plus 7 minutes of arc.
T h a t it is so can be seen thus: A t the beginning o f the year the so-called mean S u n is zero, the S u n
having made full revolutions, starting from the zero point 16 V 2 nddikds from E p o c h . T h e Kendram
at that time is 0 + 20 = 20. F o r this we have the difference or interval o f equation o f the centre,
- 1 1 X 2 0 / 3 0 = - 6 ' . 6 7 . D e d u c t i n g t h i s from r a 0-0-0, we have die true Sun ra. II-29-53.Deducting
the equadon ofthe centre from this, the real mean S u n is got, for the true S u n is obtained by adding
the equation ofthe centre to the real mean Sun. T h u s the so-called mean S u n = the real mean S u n
+ the equation o f the centre + 7 minutes = the real mean S u n -I- 142' (135'.8 -I- 6'.67), the equation
of the centre at this point being 135 '.8 (which we shall show presently). Thus, the so<alled mean Sun is
pracdcally the true Sun at the beginning of the year (the difference being only 7') and the beginning
of the mean year is therefore pracdcally the beginning o f the true year. T h i s , we have alluded to
already i n verses 1.11-13. Now, as this mean S u n has the same rate o f motion as the real mean Sun,
everywhere the difference o f 142' between them is maintained.

Now we shall verify the intervals, i.e. differences o f equation o f the centre. Let us assume that the
longitude ofthe higher apsis is rd. 2-16-0, according to this Siddhdnta. (As the original Siddhdnta is
lost, we cannot assert that it is so. B u t i f the assumption works, i.e. explains everything to be
explained, without leading to contradictions, then we have to take that it is correct.) T h i s is very
likely because according to the Romaka it is at rd. 2-15-0 (see V I I I . 2 , where the instrucdon, "subtract
(from the mean Sun) rd. 2-15-0 to get the kendra of the S u n " is given.) T h e Surya Siddhdnta,
Aryabhatiya etc. give ra.2-I8-0 for the same; and the earlier Paulisa may correctly give ra.2-16-0.

Now, as the intervals are for mean Sun 340 to 10, 10 to 40 etc., we can say deducting 76, they
are for anomaly 264 to 294, 294 to 324, 324 to 354 etc. (See table above). Assuming die maximum
III.3 III. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 43

to be 140', if the equation of the centre is computed for these anomalies, and the intervals tabulated,
we get - 12.9, - 45.6, - 67.7, - 71.6, - 56.3, - 26.0, + 12.9, + 45.6, +67.7, + 71.6, + 56.3,
+ 26.0, i n minutes. As these are not much different from the series - 11, - 48, - 69 etc., we see
that our assumption about the apsis is correct and the series 11, 48, are derivable from it. I n the
two series, the constants are the same i n some places, differ by 1' i n some, by 2' i n some, the differ-
ence being 3' only i n one place. Even this small difference may be due to the constants ofthe given
series being empirical, the values having been discovered by repeated observations only. I n this
connection it may be mendoned that the tabular values ofthe Romaka differ far more than this does
from the same values obtained from formula. O r it may be that the formula used for the derived
series may not be full, some terms being omitted. Actually, there are such additional terms, omitted
by the ancients, and works like the Surya Siddhdnta give a certain correction to the epicycles which
can give the equivalent of such additional terms. T h u s even the small difference is explained.

Now for the additive or subtractive nature of the tabular values. T h e y are the equivalents of what
is obtained by computing the equation o f the centre for the anomalies 294, 324, 354, etc. and
deducting the previous from the next successively. A t the beginning o f the year the anomaly is
284 = rd.9-14-0. T h e n the anomaly increases to 12 rdsis, when the Sun reaches the higher apsis,
ra.2-16-0. As d u r i n g this interval the anomaly is i n the fourth quadrant, the positive equation ofthe
centre is decreasing. Therefore the tabular values obtained by subtracting the previous from the
next are negative, and given as - 11, - 48, - 69. W h e n the Sun has crossed the higher apsis and
moves 90 farther, the anomaly is i n the first quadrant. H e r e the negative equation o f the centre
increases. Therefore the tabular values are again negative, and we have - 7 0 , - 5 4 , - 2 6 . T h e n the
anomaly moves i n the second quadrant, where the negative equation ofthe centre decreases. So the
tabular differences are positive and given as -I- 10,-1- 48, -I- 70. After this the anomaly moves i n the
third quadrant, where the positive equation o f the centre increases. So the intervals are again
positive and given as + 71, + 54, + 25. T h u s , by giving the true Sun increased by 7' as the mean
and applying the two series, the first negative and the next positive, i n the place ofthe equation of
the centre, the true Sun is computed by this Siddhdnta.

We shall now show that the equation o f the centre for the beginning of the year is 135.8 minutes.
T h e mean anomaly for the beginning o f the year is 0 - 76 = 284. Its tabular sine (see Chapter
IV) 116' 25", multiplied by the m a x i m u m 140' and divided by the radius 120', gives 135.8'. Itis this
we used to show that the mean Sun mentioned i n this Siddhdnta is the real mean Sun plus 142'. W e
shall show that this is^so i n another way. W e have seen that the mean Sun, when equal to 76, is at
the higher apsis. As the equatior of the centre must be zero here, the mean anomaly being zero,
the true Sun must be equal to the real mean S u n . T h e tabular values to be applied are, - I I ' (for
mean Sun interval 340 to 10, - 48 (for interval 10 to 40), - 69 (for 40 to 70) and - 7 0 x 6/
30 (for 6 i n the next internal) = - 142'. Deducting this from the mean Sun 76 we get true Sun =
73 38'. which is also the real mean Sun. T h u s we see the real mean S u n is indeed 142' less than
the so called mean Sun.

But a doubt arises: T h e real mean Sun ofthe Paulisa at E p o c h is ra. 11-27-22. B u t this does not
agree with those of other Siddhdntas, as for e.g., Saura rd. 11-29-49, Romaka rd. 11-29-34, Siddhdnta
Siromani, rd 0-0-42. H o w is this difference o f more than two degrees to be explained? This is the
answer: Even though the Siddhdntas are generally agreed that longitudes are to be reckoned from
the beginning o f the stellar segment Asvini (called the first point), they differ with regard to
the actual point where the segment begins. So, reckoned from different points, the longitudes
44 PANCASrODHANTIKA III.3

naturally differ. Secondly, even i f all Siddhdntas had started reckoning from the same point origi-
nally, the difference in the duration of their solar years would, in course of time, cause differences
in longitude when computed for a particular moment of time, causing apparently a shift of the first
point. T h u s as the first point of the Paulisa is about 2 east of that ofthe Saura or Romaka. the mean
Sun is less, as in the case of the Siddhdnta Siromani, which is one degree more because its first point
is one degree west of that of the Saura or Romnka. It is also well-known that there is a difference of
three degrees between the first point of the Caitra and Raivata Paksas.

Now we shall explain why 20 is added to the mean Sun to form a peculiar type of Kmdram to give
the values. W h y have the values not been given directly for intervals of mean Sun. 0 to 30, 30 to
60 etc. T h e reason must be that the author has taken these values from the original Pan.lisa. or the
original Paulisa itself from its source, where they would have been given for intervals of mean Sun,
0 to 30, 30 to 60 etc. But the source or original Paulisa's first point might have been 10 east of
that o f the Paulisa here given, and it might have been shifted west in course of time to the present
first point adopted, (there is evidence i n the Vedas o f this kind of shift being made, as evident, for
instance, i n the case of the beginning of the year from the Sun at Mrgasira to the Sun at Krttika
and so on) with the result that what was originally 0 had become 10, what had been 30 had
become 40 and so on reckoned from the new point. So the values are as i f they are given for 340
to 10 etc. and to make them full rdsis for convenience, 20 are asked to be added and the name
kendram given to it. T h u s everything is properly explained.

T S have not understood the method given here. So far as the explanation o f the part referring
to the mean Sun goes, what they say is correct. B u t after that what they say is all wrong. There is
the express instrucdon after giving the first series 11, 48 etc. that the values should be subtracted
from the mean Sun. T h e second series 10,48 etc. come after that in a separate sentence and a separate
verse, with the instruction that the values should be added. B u t somehow T S have understood the
two instructions to mean that the two series should first be added one to one and then the resulting
new series, which they think is the equation of the centre it.self, should be applied to the mean Sun.
If this is done, the instruction where to add and where to subtract is lost, which they have not noted.
They have failed to see that the Siddhdnta gives differences of values for every 30 intervals of
kendram. T h e y have never considered why i f the equation o f the centre itself is given, it is given in
two series which are almost identical. A g a i n , the new series of theirs only appears to be the equadon
of the centre, which is because the differences of a sine-function-series is a cosine function series,
which is again a sine-function-series with a lateral shift of 90 in the argument. In verifying the
series they have formed by comparing it with the actual, which they have computed, they have
found a difference of 6' and 7' in two terms, but waived them aside as negligible. B u t 6' or 7' are
too large to be negligible. Further, they have failed to see that the word kendram is used here in a
peculiar sense as we have already said. T h e y have taken it to mean the regular anomaly. B u t the
mean anomaly can be found only i f the longitude ofthe higher apsis is given, which is nowhere to
be found. T h e y explain this by saying that the longitude o f the apsis was well known and therefore
not given! Different SiddMntas give different values for the longitudes o f the apsis; the Romaka
gives 75, the Saura gives 80, a n d the Aryabhatiya and Surya Siddhdnta give 78. Which of these are
we to take? Certain things and operations, we can understand from the context and nature of the
work, but this is not a thing which can be learnt without being told, as also the instruction when to
add o r when to subtract the values, which, according to them, has also to be learnt otherwise. If they
had only tried to work out some examples, as for instance, taking the mean S u n as 80, using their
interpretation ofthe rules, then they would have discovered their mistake.
II.4 III. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 45

True Motion of Moon

4. If the padas obtained (by II.2) are phis-padas, (i.e., in the first half-gaft)
subtract 9 from the padas, multiply by 10 and divide by 7. A d d the result to
702. T h e Moon's daily true motion in minutes is got. In the second half-g-ai!i,
(i.e., if the padas are m'mus-padas), deduct 9, muldply by 10 and divide by 7
and subtract the result from 879. T h e resulting minutes are the daily true
motion of the Moon.

Example 2. Find the Moon's daily true motion for plus padas 9,18, 27, 36, 63, 71, 72, 81,117,124 and
mmus-padas 9, 63, 71, 72,117, 124.
P = 9 daily motion = 10 (9 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 minutes
P = 18 " = 10(18 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 12 6/7 = 714 6/7 minutes
P = 27 " = 10 (27 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 2 X 12 6/7 = 727 5/7 minutes
P = 36 " = 10 (36 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 3 X 12 6/7 = 740 4/7 minutes
P = 63 " = 10 (63 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 6 X 12 6/7 = 779 1/7 minutes
P = 71 " = 10(71 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 88 4/7 = 790 4/7 minutes
P = 72 " = 10 (72 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 7 x 12 6/7 = 792 minutes
P = 81 " = 10 (81 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 8 x 12 6/7 = 804 6/7 minutes
P=117 " = 10 (117 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 12 X 12 6/7 = 856 2/7 minutes
P = 124 " = 10(124 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 164 2/7 = 866 2/7 minutes
P = 133 " = 10 (133 - 9)/7 + 702 = 702 + 177 1/7 = 879 1/7 minutes
P' = 9 " = 879 - 10 (9 - 9)/7 = 879 - 0 = 879 minutes
P ' = 63 " = 879 - 10 (63 - 9)/7 = 879 - 6 X 12 6/7 = 801 6/7 minutes
P ' = 71 " = 879 - 10(71 - 9)/7 = 879 - 88 4/7 = 790 3/7 minutes
P ' = 72 " = 879 - 10(72 - 9)/7 = 879 - 7 X 12 6/7 = 789 minutes
P'=117 " = 879 - 10 (117 - 9)/7 = 8 7 9 - 12 X 12 6/7 = 724 5/7 minutes
P'=I24 " = 8 7 9 - 10 (124 - 9)/7 = 879 - 164 2/7 = 714.5/7 minutes

T h e daily modon when the pada is less than 9 cannot be found from the formula as it is, but we
can frame a rule by considering the nature o f the variation o f motion. M'mus-padas 1 to 8 are the
successive padas after p\us-padas 124 and previous to mmus-padas 9. Therefore the m o d o n must lie
between 866 2/7 and 879, increasing from 866 2/7 (vide example). Therefore, mmus-padas 1 to 8,
muldplied by 10 and divided by 7, added to 866 2/7 will give the motion. In the same way, plus-
padas 1 to 8 are successive padas after minus-padas 124, and before p\us-padas 9. Therefore the
modon lies between ll^bll and 702, decreasing gradually. Therefore p\us-padas 1 to 8, muldplied
by 10 and divided by 7 must be deducted from 714 5/7 to get the motion.

4a., A.B.C.H'II^M^I^. B1.3.^?Trara

b. A . B . B f w M ; C . ^ [ W ^ ]
B1.3.^I^:; B2.^7^^:
46 PANCASIDDHANTIKA II1.4

T h e two rules for the true daily modon can be shown to be connected with the two rules for finding
the true motion in II.6, by deriving these from those, and the exact derivation itself is a proof of
the correctness of the rules. T h e rule for plus-padas (i.e. applicable to the first hali-gati) is,
{1094 + 5(P - 1)} P/63. If m is the mean motion at the end of the last iullgati, then the true M o o n
= m. + P + {1094 + 5(P - I)} P/63 minutes. T h e daily motion of the current day is got by subtracting
the true M o o n at the end of the previous day from that at the end of the current day and if the pada
is P at the end of the current day, it is P - 9 at the end of the previous day. Therefore the motion for
the current day = [m + 9 + {1094 + 5(P - I)} X P/63] - [m + (P - 9) + {1094 + 5 (P - 9 - 1)} (P - 9)/
63]' = (m - m) + P - (P - 9) + {1089 + 5P)} P/63 minutes - {1089 + 5(P - 9)} (P - 9)/63 minutes
= i n minutes, 540 + 1089 P/63 + 5 P % 3 - 1089 (P - 9)/63 - 5(P - 9)%3 = 540 + 1089 x 9/63
+ 5 X 9V63 + 90 (P - 9)/63 = 540 + 1134/7 + 10 (P - 9)/7 = 540 + 162 + 10 (P - 9)/7 = 702 +
10 (P 9)/7. which is the rule here given.

In the same way, taking the rule for the true M o o n i n the second half-ga/, i.e. for minus-padas,
we have, the daily motion = [m + rd. 6-0-4 -I- P -)- {2414 - 5 (P' - 1)} P'/63 minutes] - [m + rd.
6-0-4 + (P' - 9) + {2414 - 5 (P' - 9 - 1)} (P' - l)/63 minutes] = in minutes, 504 + {2419 - 5P'}
P'/63 - {2419 - 5(P' - 9)} (P' - 9)/63 = 540 -t- 2419 P'/63 - 5 P ' % 3 - 2419 (P' - 9)/63 5 (P'
- 9)^/63 = 540 -h 2419/7 - 45/7 - 10(P' - 9)/7 = 540 + 339 1/7 - 10 (P' - 9)/7 = 879 1/7 - 10
(P' 9)/7, which is the rule for daily motion i n the second hali-gati, omitting the small fraction of
minutes 1/7. (Note that in the example we actually got this 879 1/7 as the maximum).

T r o m the relationship between these two sets of rules shown here, we can understand that the
rules for daily motion, though they have strayed into the chapter dealing with the Paulisa, actually
belongs to the Vdsistha. If they are to be used for the Paulisa also, it is because they are interconnected
and mixed up, as the use of the same technical terms, and the absence of the method to find the
mean M o o n , show. W e can even say that the author does not intend this for the Paulisa because
another set of rules is given for this i n III.9.

Because the daily increase in padas is 9, the daily increase or decrease in the true motion is 10 X
9/7 = 12 6/7 minutes. By integrating the motions and deducting the mean motion d u r i n g the days
for which the integration is done, we can find the equation of the centre implied in the rules: For
convenience let us take padas 9, 18, etc. and work out for plus-padasfirst.T h e total true motion in
minutes for P/9 days, i.e. to the end oiPpadas is:702 + 10 (9 - 9)/7 -I- 702 -I- 10 (18 - 9)/7 -I- 702
-I- 1 0 ( 2 7 - 9)/7 + 702-^ 10 (P - 9)/7 = 702 x P/9 + 9 x 10 {1 2 + 3-I- (P - 9)/9}/7 = 702
P/9-1-9 X 10 {i/2(P - 9)/9} P/(9 X 7) = 702 x P / 9 + 5 P ( P - 9)/63 = 702 x 7P/63-h5PV63 - 45P/63
= 4869P/63-f-5PV63.

T h e mean motion per day can be found from 11.2-4 to be 790' 35" and for P/9 days, the mean
motion is 790' 35" x P/9 = 5534 P/63 minutes. Subtracting this from the true motion found, the
equation ofthe centre obtained is 4869 P/63 + 5 P % 3 - 5534 P/63 = 5P%3 - 665 P/63 = (5P - 665) P/63.

In the same way, we can find the equation o f the centre connected with the second half-gaft, i.e.
minuspadas. The total true motion = 879 1/7 x P79 - { 5 P ' % 3 - 45 P'/63}= 6154 P'/63+45 P'/63 -
5 P ' % 3 . Deducting the total mean motion, the equation ofthe centre = (6154 -t- 45 - 5534) P'/63
- 5 P ' % 3 = 665 P'/63 - 5 P ' % 3 = P(665 - 5P)/63.

It is these two rules for the equation o f the centre that we used in II.6, to derive the rules there.
From inspection we see that P(5P - 665)/63 is negative for all values of P, as it ought to be i n the first
half-gati. P ' (665 - 5P')/63 is positive, as it ought to be i n the second hali-gati for all the values of
111.4 III. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 47

P'. T h e numerical m a x i m u m is for P o r P' = 66'/2. For P = 124, the value is 88 V 2 minutes which
is cancelled by + 88'/2 minutes for P ' = 124, withtheresultthatattheendoftheg-a<?theequationof
the centre is zero and the true moon is equal to the mean M o o n .

Itis mainly because ofthe relationship between the rules of II.6 and those in this verse, established
by using the corrected reading vinavdt for nagdt that we have made that correction. Also if we take
nagdt, then there will be a deficiency of one syllable. T h e adoption ofthe other reading, ndgdt has
not the fault of the defective syllable, but 9 is required in the proof and not 8. T h e reading sdsvisdmvaro
is corrected as sdsvikhasvaro, to mean 702, which is the m i n i m u m daily motion, derivable from the
rules. T S also have intended 702 minutes to be the m i n i m u m daily motion by their emendation
sdsvikhdcald, but theirs is not likely to be the original reading with such changes in the letters. We
have corrected vasumuninavahhyah into navamunivasubhyah because from the establishment of the
relationship, which we did, 879 minutes is the m a x i m u m daily motion and we require this. Further,
the maximum must be as far above the mean value 790'/2 minutes, as the m i n i m u m is below. T h e
minimum 702' is 88'/2 below 790 V 2 . So the maximum must be 790 V 2 ' + 88 V 2 ' = 879'. B u t T S have
not touched this, for, by their own words, they have not been able to interpret this verse.

Equation of the centre

5. Reduce the plus or rmnns padas by one and multiply by 40. Subtract this
from 5261. Multiply the result by the padas and divide by 729. T h e resulting
minutes are equation of the centre.

T h e formula is: T h e equation ofthe centre = {5261 -40 {pada - I)] padan29, where pada is any
pada, plus or minus, without distinction.
Example 3. (a) Pada = 63. Find the equation of the centre, (b) Pada = 9. Find the equation ofthe centre.

(a) . (5261 - 40 (63 - 1)} 63/729 = (5261 - 2480) 63/729 = 2781 x 7/81 = 240 1/3 minutes.

(b) . {5261 - 40 (9 -- 1)} 9/729 = (5261 - 320) 9/729 = 4941 x 1/81 = 61 minutes.

5a. B.M<ii<+)H c. A . ^ t ^ ; B1.3.-!?l'2Tr; B 2 . ' ^

b. A . B . 5 t ^ g ^ ^ (A2.3'TS^) d. B 2 . ^
48 PANCASIDDHANTIKA III.10

6-9. (Translation and Commentary later).

[^:]
' 1 ^ : 9 1 % ' - ' T f g : W ^ : ' * q # T T : W ' TMM>ie<fu|IH |

Cara or Oblique ascension

10. Multiply the constants, 20,16 Va and 6% by the equinoctial shadow. T h e

results are oblique ascensional differences (carakhandas) in vinddis, first in the
given order, then in the reverse order for the first six months (solar) and again
the given and reverse orders for the second half of the ecliptic, the second six
months.

T h e differences are for the solar months Mesa etc. i n vinddis: 20, 16 Va, 6 % , 6 % , 16 Va, 20, 20,
16 Va, 6 4 , 63/4, 16 Va, 20) x equinoctial shadow.

T h e formula for Cara is given i n IV.26. thus: Sine Cara = sin latitude X sin Sun's declination X
the diameter -r- sin (90 latitude) x the day-diameter. T h e sines used here are tabular sines, the

6a. BS-yrf^* 7b. A1.MW

b. B.^lfeTtarr Bl.^?RlfiT-fiTa^. Al.B2.3.^rd*w<
C.^:^:"?T^ft?n^. B.ft?P3; c. A.^R^cff:; C."^^:. A . B . ^ ^ ; C.<=h<Ma^g
d. A . T I c q ^ ; B.^IcJTS^ d. A . B . R T ^ ; C.RH'4>ld'q%

8a. Al.fI*^ 9a. C . ^

A . ^ J T ^ : ; B.^!R3fW a-b. C . ^ c f T I ^ a [ ^ ] ^ ^ % i ^ I
c. C.TOf^ b-c. A . % q t : ; B.T^1cHHM^'ld<H.-'TOgt:
d. C . T l f e ^ . A . C . W : ; B.^CcT:
Bi.s.^^rarg; B2.^^irai^

10. Quoted by Utpala on BS 2, p.60.

10a. A . f R l f ^ : . C . W a - b . U . ^ * n ^ : c. Bl.-jl&RTr
b. B.4l<l?lHI:. Bl-tdfRuiiJ^ d. A . ^ ; B.a?ira:. A . C . ^ ^ ^ ; B . 1 | : T P %
111.10 III. 1 ' A U L I ! ^ A - S I D D H A N T A 49

unit or radius being 120', and the diameter 240'. T h e day-diameter is twice the tabular cosine of
the Sun's declination. T h u s this formula reduces to the modern form: sin cara k tan latitude x
tan declination. T h e degrees of cara got from the formula, converted into minutes and divided by
3 gives the whole cara. fhe cara-kharidas or differences are got deducting the whole cara of the
beginning of a rdsi from that of the end of the rd.ii.

We shall not dciivc this foimula now. We shall restrict ourselves to deriving the given cara-
khandas from the l o n u u l a . The diameter', as we have said, is 240' (vide IV. 1). The tabular sines of
declination at the ends ofthe three rdsis Mesa, etc. is 24' 24", 42' 15", 48' 48" (from 1V.24). T h e day-
diameters for the same are 235', 224' 40", 219' 15" (from IV.25). Sin lauiude ^ sin (90 - latitude)
= equinoctial shadow -H12. (This will be shown when dealing with IV). Therefore; successively,
sine cara = equinoctial shadow x {(240 X 24 2/5) (235 X 12), (240 x 4 2 ' A ) H- (224 2/3 x 12), (240
x 48 4/5) -^(219'/4 X 12)} = E q . shadow X (2'.08,3'.78,4'.45). T h e arcs of these cannot be found
in terms of the Eq. Shadow unless it is known. But as the author intends this rule only for North
India, where the eq. shadow may be taken as 6 digits oh the average, we shall frame the rule for 6
and then use it for other places by the rule of proportion. So, multiplying the numbers 2'.08,3'.78,
4'.45 by 6, we get sine cara = 12' 29", 22' 41", 26' 42". Using the tabular sines, the arcs o f these =
5 58'.3, 10 53'.6, 12 51 '.6 = 358'.3,653'.6, 771 '.6. Dividing by 3, we get the whole cara invinddis,
119.4, 217.9, 257.2. Dividing these by 6 and multiplying by E q . shadow, we get the whole cara
vinddis for any E q . shadow, viz., E q . shadow X (19.9, 36.3, 42.9). Deducting the next from the
previous, and because the cara is zero for the beginning of Mesa, as declination is zero, the cara
differences (khandas) got are, E q . shadow X (19.9, 16.4, 6.6). T h i s is practically the same as E q .
shadow X (20, 16'/a, 6%) given by the author. In the Vdkyakarana, Mahdbhdskariya and Siddhdnta
Siromarii, the same method is given.

As we have said, the cara-vmdclis are zero for the beginning of Mesa when day-light is 30 nddis.
T h e n at the end of each rd.si, they increase by a quantity equal to the differences, reaching a
maximum at the end of Mithuna, the day-light then being a m a x i m u m also, as the declination has
reached a maximum. After that the declination decreases in the same manner in which it has
increased, and the day-light decreases from m a x i m u m and the cara also decreases. A t the end of
Kanya the declination becomes zero again, the day-light equals 30 nddikds again, and the cara
becomes zero again. So the differences have to be used in the reverse order for Karkataka, Siinha,
and Kanya. After this the South declination increases and decreases just like the N o r t h declination
and corresponding to this the night-time increases from 30 nddikds to a m a x i m u m and decreases
again to 30 nddikds at the end of the next six months; and the cara also increases from zero to a
maximum and then decreases to zero, repeating what it is for North declination. Hence the instruc-
tion to repeat for the next six months ofthe solar year. If the cara is required for any day within the
month, it is to be got by interpolation, which is well known and therefore not mentioned.

Example 4. (a). In a place the Eij. shadow is 5 digits. Find the cara-vinddis when the Sun is rd.2-10-0. (b)
The Eq. shadow is 7. the Sun is at the end of Tula, find the cara-vinddis.
(a) T h e constant for Mesa is 20, for Vrsabha i O V a a n d f o r 10 of Mithuna, 6 % X 10/30= 2V4.
Adding, the U)tal cara is 20+ 16'/i; + 2'/4 = 3 8 % . M u l d p l i e d by Eq. shadow, the wmac^w are 5 X 3 8 %
= 193%.

(b) T h e Sun is m.7-0-0 and therefore 1 rdsi has gone in the second half of the zodiac. Therefore
liw cara-vinddis = 7 X 20 = 140.
50 PANCASIDDHANTIKA III.l

Day-time

11-12. T o find the day-time in Mesa, Vrsabha and Mithuna, add the cara
differences one by one, in the order given, to 30 nddikds, and in the next three,
subtract in the reverse order. In the next three rdsis, T u l a , etc. subtract from
30 nddis in the given order, and for Makara etc. add in the reverse order. This
will give the day-time fairly accurately for places in Northern (whole?) India.
I shall give the method to find the day-time accurately in other places (in the
IV chapter) when dealing with spherical astronomy.

Thus, when the Sun is i n the six rdsis, Mesa, etc. 30 nddikds cara-vinddis = day-time. W h e n in t
six rasis, T u l a etc. 30 nddikds cara-vinddis = day time. T h e increase over 30 nddikds and the decrea
to 30 is by E q . shadow X {20, I 6 V 2 , 6 % , 6 V 4 , 1 6 V 2 , 20}vinddis. This is repeated in the decrease
from 30 nddis and the increase to 30, i n the six rdsis from T u l a . W e shall explain all this in the I V
chapter.

T h e cara-vinddis computed i n the above manner and the day-time got by them will be accurate
only in Northern (whole?) India it has been said. T h e reason for this is as follows: F r o m the expla-
nation ofthe method o f computing the cara-vinddis, it can be noted that sine cara is proportionate
to the E q . shadow, and the cara-vinddis are proportionate to the arc obtained from sine cara. It is
well known that when the sines are small they are proportionate to their arcs. Therefore when sine
cara is fairly small, i.e. when the E q . shadow is small, the arcs are proportionate to the Eq. shadow,
i.e. the cara-vinddis are proportionate to the E q . shadow. In India the Eq. shadow is fairly small, and
therefore the cara-vinddis for different places in India can be formed by proportion, using the E q .
shadow. In higher latitudes like places N o r t h of the Himalayas, the shadow increasingly becomes
greater, and the inaccuracy of using the given method will gradually increase.

Example 5. (a) Eq. Shadow 5, Sun rd. 2-10-0. Find the day-time, (b) The Eq. shadow is 7, the S
7. Find the day light.

(a) T h e cara-vinddis are 5(20 -I- I 6 1 / 2 -I- 2 ' A ) = 5 X 3 8 % = 194. As the Sun is i n the 6rdsis, Mesa
etc., the day-time is greater than 30 nddis, and, therefore, the day-time is 30 nddis + 194 vinddis =
33-14 nddis.

l l a . A.B.iimRtl^Ml^d ( B 2 . ^ ; B 2 . M ) 12a. Al.f|Hrqftft; A 2 . B l . C . f | i n f 5 ; q M ;

b. A . B . ^ ^ f e ^ . C . ^ [ ^ ] ^ . A . ' g ^ l f t ^ B2.3.f|Rf5^^
c. A.B.^Hlt^; C.V^ c-d. A2.^^cnnt; B2.3.W0cl^
d. B.gcTI%f. A . C . D . 3 % ^ ; B . g % ^ d. Al.rld?J%
III.12 III, P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 51

(b) T h e cara-vinddis are 7 X 20 = 140. T h e Sun being within the 6 rdsis from T u l a , the day-time
is less than 30 nddis. Therefore the day-time is 30 nddis 140 vinddis = nddis 27-40.

Desantara

13. T h e c o r r e c t i o n to the t i m e o f the l o n g i t u d e o f Y a v a n a p u r a to get the t i m e

o f the l o n g i t u d e o f U j j a i n is seven nddikds, 2 0 vinddikds a n d that o f B a n a r a s
( V a r a n a s i ) is n i n e nddikds. H o w to find the c o r r e c t i o n f o r o t h e r l o n g i t u d e s w i l l
be g i v e n ( i n the n e x t verse).

In short, what is here given is the difference i n time due to difference i n longitude alone from
Yavanapura of Ujjain and Banaras, Desdntara-nddis, being difference i n dme o f the occurrence of
any event due to longitude, the occurrence being earlier by this dme i f the place is East, and later
if West. Actually the time difference due to longitude for Ujjain from Yavanapura is nddis 7-38, and
for Banaras, nddis 8-50. T h e Greenwich East Longitude of Yavanapura, Ujjain and Banaras are 30,
75 50' and 83. F r o m this we can find the actual dme difference: (75 50' - 30)/6 nddis = 7-38,
(83 - 30)/6 nddis = 8-50. B u t considering the difficulty o f d o i n g this faced by the ancients for
want of facilities, the achievement of the Siddhdnta is commendable.

3T^g.^(^c<j>(d ipTT; N^chic^dl ^ T l ^ ; || \

14. T a k e the distance myojanas b e t w e e n the t w o places b e t w e e n w h i c h the

t i m e d i f f e r e n c e f o r l o n g i t u d e has to be f o u n d . M u l t i p l y this by 9 a n d d i v i d e by
8Q. ( T h e result is t h e i r distance i n degrees). S q u a r e the result. F r o m this
d e d u c t the s q u a r e o f the d i f f e r e n c e i n l a t i t u d e b e t w e e n the t w o places. F i n d
the s q u a r e r o o t o f the r e m a i n d e r . ( T h i s is the E a s t - W e s t d i f f e r e n c e i n
degrees). T h i s d i v i d e d by 6 is the t i m e d i f f e r e n c e i n nddikds.

T h e purpose of finding this time difference is uldmately to find the time difference for longitude
from Yavanapura, so that it may be used i n the reduction of the planet found for Yavanapura mean
sunset to the local sunset. If by this rule, the time difference from Ujjain or Banaras is found, then

I4a. A.ft'+ldWHslcl^
b. A.ftSig; B1.2.ft'i5rac!I; B3.ft5cr
13a. A.^1<^HW<v^l; B1.3.^=IHM<HI^: A.B.^^5ip^(B3.^3llI^)
b. A.B1.2.<=lTA|lfel'*M c. A.B.f^=<^*rd
c. B2.=ll"IKi d. A.B.2.^:;B1.3.^:;C.-^
d. Al.^nFRJJf: A2.'?ntHHW A I . B . ^ P ; D.^^f5|rr

6
52 PANCASIDDHANTIKA III.14

by adding or subtracdng this, according as the place is East or West, to or from nadis 7-20 (for
Ujjain) or 9-0 (for Banaras), respectively, the time difference for longitude from Yavanapura can
be got.

Example 6. The latitude of a place west of Ujjain is 27 and the distance between them is 44 4l9y
Assuming the latitude of Ujjain to be 24,findthe time differencefor longitude of the placefrom Yavanap

T h e distance in degrees = 9 X 44 4/9 = 5. T h e difference in latitude in degrees is 27 - 24 =

3. V 5'"^ - 3^ = 4 = the east-west difference in degrees. 4/6 nddikds = 40 vinddikds is the time differ-
ence. A s the place is West of Ujjain, deducting this from 7-20, the time difference from Yavanapura
is nddikds 6-40.
T h e rule is explained thus: It is well known that i n a plane right-angled triangle the square ofthe
hypotenuse is equal to the sum ofthe squares ofthe sides containing the right angle. Now, let the
places be P, and Pj. Let the point where the line of longitude passing through one of the places, say
P,, cuts the latitude passing through the other say P2, be C . T h e n C is practically a right angle of
which C P , is one arm and C P ^ the other, and PjPj is the hypotenuse of the right angled triangle
P j C P j . If P1P2 is not too great, then this triangle, though on the surface of a sphere, may be treated
as practically a plane triangle. P | C is the difference i n latitude ofthe places. P j C is the difference
in longitude, which is wanted. P i P j is the distance between them. We are going to find the differ-
ence i n longitude P j C i n degrees. T h e difference i n latitude P . C is also in degrees. So P i P j also must
be found i n degrees. So the distance myojanas is converted into distance i n degrees by multiplying
Xheyojanas by 9 and dividing by 80, because according to this Siddhdnta there are 9 for 80yojanas
on the Earth, i.e. the circumference ofthe Earth (360 i f given in degrees) is 3200yo7owa,$. T h u s we
have the difference in longitude in degrees =CP2^ = V PiP2^ CP,^. T h e degrees are converted
into dme by the proportion, i f there are 60 nddikds for 360 of longitude, how much for the degrees
got. Therefore degrees got x 60/360 = degrees got/6, are the nddikds of difference in longitude.

In view of the right angled triangle not being exactly plane, a better result will be got if the nddikds
obtained are muldplied by the circumference of the earth and divided by the circumference of the
line of latitude midway between the places. But the author has not mentioned this because this
method is intended for India and in India the two circumference do not differ much and therefore
the difference between the two methods will be negligible. Sdrya Siddhdnta etc. give the correct
method. T h e author's method is given by the Mahdbhdskariya with the name Adhvd (Tath') and by
the Vatesvara Siddhdnta with the name 'Adhvavaha' ('Marching on the Path'), only to be condemned
as inaccurate. In the Vdkyakarana, which is also satisfied with rough results, the distance along the
latitude (CPg in the explanation) is taken as found and a rule given. T h e method of determining the
latitude of a place is given i n IV. 20-21 and the author expects us to get it by using that method and
use it in the formula.

Another thing must be mentioned here. If the two places are distant from each other or inter-
vened by a sea or mountain or some such obstacle, as for instance Yavanapura and Ujjain,
Yavanapura and Banaras, or Ujjain and Banaras, then by observation, from the two places, of celes-
tial phenomena that are visible everywhere at the same moment, like the circumstances of a lunar
eclipse, the time difference for longitude can be obtained. (All Siddhdntas give methods based on
this principle, and the Mahdbhdskariya i n Chapter II, which is, devoted exclusively to Desdntara,
gives two methods.) T h e following is the method: Let us assume that the meridian of Ujjain as the
prime meridian (generally given i n all Siddhdntas do) and by computation it has been found that
at 5 nddis after midnight the total obscuration o f the moon begins. (The beginning or end of the
III.14 HI. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 53

total phase can be observed well aind therefore specially chosen by the Surya Siddhdnta). In anotner
place, say in Banaras, the beginning o f the total phase is observed to be at nadikas 6-12, (of course
by its own time, i.e. local time). T h e time difference for longitude must be patently the difference
between the two times, i.e. nddis 6-12 minus nddis 5, i.e. na. 1-12. A s the local dme must increase as
we go east, we can also say that Banaras is east o f Ujjain.

[^a^VIIWchlH:]

Local Sunset time

15. If the Sun is in the sixrdsis Mesa etc., subtract half the carat^ma& from the
time difference for longitude. If the Sun is in the six rdsis T u l a etc. add half
the cara-vinddis to the time difference for longitude. Find the motion of the
planet (the Sun or Moon, in this context) during this dme. Subtract this from
the longitude of the planet computed. (The planet for the beginning of the
local day, i.e. for local sunset, is obtained).

Example 7. The time differencefor longitude at a place (in India) with reference to Yavanapura is 10
The Sun is rd. 9-0-0 and the cara for that day at the place is 4 nddis. The Moon computed is rd. 4-8-0 and it
daily motion 840'. Find the Moon at the beginning of the local day, i.e. at local sunset of the place.

Longitude time difference = 10 nddis. H a l f cara = 4/2 = 2, nddis. A s the Sun is within the six rdsis
from T u l a , adding 10 and 2, we get 12 nddis. T h e motion per day is 840'. T h e motion for 12 nddis
is, 840' X 12/60 = 168' - 2 48'. Subtracdng from the computed M o o n , the M o o n at local sunset
is, ra. 4-8-0 - 2" 48' = ra. 4-5-12.

T h e explanation o f the procedure is as follows: A s the days from E p o c h are from mean sunset
at Yavanapura, the planets computed for the days from E p o c h are for mean sunset at Yavanapura
and i f they are required for any time i n the day, they have to be found by adding the motion d u r i n g
the time. Therefore i f the planets are required for local sunset at any other place, the time interval
between the local sunset and Yavanapura mean sunset has to be found first, and the motion for the
interval applied to the planet computed. T h i s motion is subtractive i f local sunset is earlier, and
additive i f later.

Now, the author intends the procedure for India alone, and at places in India the local sunset is
always earlier than Yavanapura mean sunset. This is because nowhere in India (including Afghanistan)
is the difference for longitude from Yavanapura less than 4 Vs nddis, and the half cara greater than
this. Because India is east o f Yavanapura i n the local mean sunset is earlier by the time difference
for longitude. T h e actual sunset is earlier than the mean sunset or later by half the cara-nddis. It is
later i f the S u n is i n the six rdsis. Mesa etc., because the day-time is longer. It is earlier i f the Sun is
in the six rdsis, T u l a etc. Therefore the local actual sunset is earlier than Yavanapura mean sunset
by the time difference for longitude minus half the nddis o f cara when the daytime is greater. B u t

15a. A . ^ : ^ ! ^ ; B.'RlStRT c. B.(S|*WI-I

b. C.^^ni5If^. B . ' ^ f ^ d. B . ^ . B.'kRpT; D.(FF?f^
54 PANCASIDDHANTIKA III. 15

as the half cara is always less, there is always a remainder when this subtraction is made by which
time, therefore, local sunset is always earlier. W h e n the Sun is i n the 6 rasis, T u l a etc., the local
sunset is earlier by the time difference for longitude and still earlier by the half cara. Therefore it
is earlier by the sum of the two. T h u s , i n all cases, with regard to places in India, the sunset is earlier
than the mean sunset at Yavanapura and therefore the motion for the dme is always to be subtracted;
and, that is the instruction.

If the place is north of India or west, it may happen that the half cara is greater than the dme
difference for longitude. T h e n when the Sun is in the six rasis from Mesa, the sunset may be later
and the motion for the later time will have to be added to the planet. Further, there are two other
corrections, Bhujantara (correction for the Equation o f the centre) and Udayantara (Reduction to
the Equator), the equivalent o f the equation of time which have got to be made, but not given by this
Siddhdnta either because these are very small or because this Siddhdnta is not aware of its existence.
T h e Vdkyakarana omits to give the Udaydntara alone because it is not found even in its source,
Bhdskariya. T h e Sdrya Siddhdnta omits the cara and Udaydntara corrections, the former because
begins the day at midnight which is not affected by cara and the latter because it is not aware of its
existence. Sripati is the first to give the Udayantara.

T S are unaware that the two corrections mentioned above are given here, which can be seen from
the commentary pp. 12-13, and English notes pp. 16-17. They also seem to think that the instrucdon
to subtract or add is for places i n the northern and southern hemispheres, respectively, (cf. Skt.
com., p. 13). N P , too, have not got the sense fully, for they observe on this verse; " A fragmentary
passage which i n the present form makes no sense, e.g., because one cannot add longitudinal
differences and ascensional differences." (Ch. II, p. 31).

Naksatra computation

16. For every 800 minutes of arc in the Moon's longitude there is one naksatra
(asterismal segment). Deduct the Sun's longitude from the Moon's. For every
twelve degrees of the remainder there is one tithi. T h e time of the ending
moment of the naksatra should be found by proportion using the Moon's daily
motion. T h e time ofthe ending moment ofthe tithi should be found by pro-
portion, using the difference in the daily motions of the Sun and the Moon.

T h e idea is this: Compute the Moon's longitude for the end of the day on which the naksatra is
to be found, and also the motion for the day. Convert the longitude into minutes and divide by 800.
T h e quotient are the naksatras gone, and the last o f them is the naksatra ending i n the day, before
the incomplete one began. Multiply the remainder by 60 and divide by the daily motion i n minutes.

16a. B l . 3 . ? ^ ; B2.?%. A . f ^ s # ; B.f^RllTrat c. Bl.S.^JtJMT

b. A.tcTfsrfS"; B1.2.^s^=5[fMTf5 d. B.^n#5
III.16 III. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 55

T h e result are nddis of the incomplete naksatra gone i n that day. Deduct it from 60. T h e ending
moment of the naksatra gone or last gone on that day is got in nddis from the beginning ofthe day.
T o get the tithi, subtract the Sun's longitude from the Moon's and convert it into minutes. Divide
by 720. T h e quotient are full tithis gone after new moon. T h e last tithi gone is the tithi ending before
the incomplete one begins. M u l d p l y the remainder by 60 and divide by the difference of the Sun's
and Moon's motions i n minutes, for that day. T h e result are nndis ofthe incomplete tithi on that day.
Deduct the nddis from 60. T h e remaining nddis are the ending moment of the tithi ending or last
ending on that day. If the total tithis got are more than 15, count again from one, i.e. Prathamd.

Example 8. At the end of a certain day the Sun is rd. 2-15-10 and its daily motion 57'. The moon is rd.
10-18-30 and its daily motion 827'. Find the naksatras etc. for the day.

T h e M o o n = rd. 10-18-30 = 318 30' = 19,110'. Dividing this by 800 the quotient, i.e. full
naksatras gone is 23, and the remainder 710' has gone i n the 24th. Multiplying by 60 and dividing
by the daily motion, 710 x 60 827 = 51-31, nddis, belong to the 24th. Therefore the 23rd, i.e.
Sravistha ends 60.0 - 51.31 = 8.29 nddis, after the beginning of the day.
T h e Tithi: M o o n - Sun = rd. 10-18-30 - rd. 2-15-10 = rd. 8-3-20 = 243 20' = 14,600'. Dividing
by 720, the full tithis gone are 20, and the remainder 200' has gone i n the nexttithi. Multiplying this
by 60 and dividing by the difference of the daily motions, the nddis got are 200 X 60 (827 - 57)
= 200 X 60/770 = 15-35, which is the time occupied by the 2lst tithi. Therefore the 20th tithi, i.e.
Bahula PancamI ends at 60 nddikds-15.35 nddikds, i.e. 44.25 nddikds after the beginning of the day.
T h e length of a naksatra is 800' and the Moon's mean daily motion 791', is not much different
from it. T h e length of a tithi is 720' and its mean daily passage 732 is not very much different from
it. Therefore generally there is one naksatra or one tithi ending i n a day. B u t it may happen that the
remainder is so small and the motion or passage for the day so great, that, remainder -I- length of
a naksatra or tithi < the daily motion or passage. In this case, two naksatras or two tithis end on the
same day. In the case of the tithi this is called avama, the second ending tithi being immersed i n the
day and not counted for reckoning days. O n the other hand, the remainder may be greater than the
motion or passage for the day, with the result that no naksatra or tithi ends on that day, i.e. they
begin at close ofthe previous day, extend throughout the day and end at the beginning of the next
day. W h e n this happens in the case of a dthi it is called Tridina-sprk, literally 'touching three days'.

T h e explanation o f t h e rules is as follows: T h e Zodiac consists of 12 rdsis, i.e. 12 X 30 X 60 =

21,600 minutes. It is divided into 27 equal segments called naksatras and so there are 21600 ^ 27
= 800 minutes for each segment. What is called naksatra i n the verse and sought to be found, is the
segment in which the M o o n is situated. Therefore the Moon's longitude i n minutes is divided by 800
and the quotient are the segments passed. T h e remainder is the position of the M o o n i n the next
segment. T h e time taken by the M o o n to pass that portion is found by the proportion; If the daily
motion takes 60 nadikas to pass, how long will the remainder take? Therefore the time when the
M o o n has been at the end of the segment just passed, i.e. the end of the naksatra passed, falls before
the end of the day by the obtained nddikds.
Now for Tithi: W h e n after new moon the M o o n leaves the Sun behind for every 12 one tithi is
gone. Therefore by subtracting the Sun from the M o o n , the total degrees left behind is found, and
dividing this by 12 or 720' the tithis gone is found. Everyday, i.e. i n every 60 nddikds, the Sun is left
behind by the difference of their motions. Therefore the time taken for leaving behind the remainder
is: remainder X 60 difference o f t h e motions. A s the remainder is of the incomplete tithi, the
completed tithi ends before the end o f the day, by a time equal to the nddikds found.
56 PANCASIDDHANTIKA III.17

' Iml - f ? l f e - T p T T - 5 f j r - W ^ ' - * " f ^ ^ ^cBT ^ - C F T '

Sun's daily motion

17. T h e d a i l y m o d o n o f the S u n i n m i n u t e s d u r i n g each o f the twelve

m o n t h s , M e s a etc. is 58, 57, 57, 57, 58, 5 9 , 6 1 , 6 1 , 6 1 , 6 1 , 60, 5 9 .
T h e daily motion for the month is found thus: D u r i n g every solar month, the Sun moves one rdsi,
i.e. 1800'. Dividing this by the days of the month the daily motion is got. O r , according to the length
of the month, take 31,30 or 29 days of the month, almost covering it. Find the modon for these days
and divide by the number of days taken, the daily motion for the month is got. Because the daily
motion thus found is very near sixty minutes, the author enumerates their difference from sixty,
for the sake of convenience.

T h e mean daily motion is 59' 8", which can be got dividing the minutes in 12 rdsis, i.e. 21,600, by
the days i n the solar year. Because the higher apsis, i.e. the apogee of the Sun, is about the middle
of M i t h u n a , the Sun's motion in Vrshabha, M i t h u n a and Karkataka is very slow, and the daily
motion, 57' given for these is proper. Because the lower apsis, i.e. the perigee, is about the middle
of Dhanus, the Sun's motion i n Vrscika, Dhanus and Makara is very quick, and the daily motion,
61' given for these is proper.

We shall h^re derive the motion for Mesa and T u l a . Let us begin with the moment on the first
day of Mesa, when the mean Sun is zero. B y III. 1, the kendram is 20 and the correction for making
the Sun true is - 11' x 20/30 = - 7'. T h e true Sun is 0 - 7 ' = rd. 1 1 - 2 9 - 5 3 . 31 days after
this moment, the mean Sun is, 31 X 120 + 43831 X 360 = 30 33'. T h e kendram is 30 33' + 20
= 50 33'. T h e true Sun is 30 33' - 11' - 48' x 20 33'/30 = ra, 0-29-49. T h e motion ofthe Sun
for 31 days is i?a. 0 - 2 9 - 4 9 - r a . 11-29-53 = ra.0-29-56. T h e motion per dayis 29 56'/31 = 1736'/31
= 58'. Therefore 58' is the correct motion for Mesa and not what is mentioned i n the given verse,
and that is why we have suggested the emendation yama for guna in the text.

We shall examine the daily motion for the T u l a . We shall begin work from the first day of T u l a
when the mean Sun is 185. The kendram for that is 185 + 20 = 205. T h e true Sun is 185 - 11'
- 48' - 69' - 7 0 ' - 54' - 25' + 10' x 25/30 = 180 3 1 ' . N o w we shall take a dme 30 days later.
T h e mean Sun then is 185 -t- 30 X 120 x 360/43831 = 214 34'. T h e kendram is 214 34' + 20 =
234 34' . T h e true Sun is 214 34' - 11! - 48' - 69' - 70' - 54' - 48' - 25' + 10' + 48' X 24
34'/30 = 210 4 6 ' . T h e motion for 30 days i s 2 1 0 4 6 ' - 1 8 0 3 r = 30 1 5 ' . T h e motion per day is
30 15' 30 = 6 O V 2 ' . T h e author gives this as a whole number, 6 1 ' ; so it is all right.

17a. A . B . C . D . ^ c. C.TFIT

b. B . f ^ d. C.SJIl^
A.C.^ for^
III.19 III. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 57

[ch<U|llH]

Karanas

18. In the bright fortnight take the M o o n minus Sun and subtract from it 6.
For the dark fortnight (take the M o o n minus Sun from the beginning of the
dark fortnight, i.e.) take the M o o n minus Sun with 6 rdsis subtracted from it,
and add 6. Convert it into minutes and divide by 360'. What are obtained are
the (Cara) kararms (Bava etc. coming one after another repeatedly). (Take the
remainder and treat it as) the remainder in calculating the tithi, (i.e., multiply
by 60, and divide by the difference of the daily motions of the Sun and Moon in
minutes etc.) (and thus get the ending moment of the last kararia. In each tithi
the first half is one kararia and the second half another).

19. From the middle of the fourteenth tithi of the dark fortnight (are the four
half tithis, viz., the second half of Bahula-Caturdasi, the two halves of
Amavasya, and the first half of Sukla-pratipad, which) are the Sthira-kararms,
Sakuni, Catus-pdda, Ndga and Kimstughna, respectively. (The other Kararias
are) movable. A kararia is half a tithi.

T h e n from the remaining half o f sukla-pratipad the Cara-karanas come i n the order Bava,
Balava, Kaulava, T a i d l a , Gara, Vanijya (Vanija) a n d Visti (Bhadra), (repeating eight times).

As said before, there are two karanas i n a tithi, the first ending at the middle o f the tithi, and the
second ending with the tithi. Therefore, the ending moment o f the second need not be computed
separately. Even that of the first is not computed by almanac-makers, the m i d - p o i r o f the tithi
being taken for this. A n o t h e r thing is to be mentioned: Just as two tithis can end o n the same day,
three karanas can end o n the same day.

Example 9. Calculate the kararia from the data supplied in Example 8.

M o o n - S u n got there is rd. 8-3-20, a n d the difference o f daily motion 770'. As it is Bahula-paksa,
deducting 6 rdsis and adding 6, rd. 8-3-20 - rd. 6-0-0 -t- 6 = rd. 2-9-20 = 4160'. D i v i d i n g by 360',
the quotient got is 11, and remainder 200'. A s i n the case ofthe tithi, the ending moment is : 200
X 60 -r 770 = na. 15-35 before the end o f the day, i.e. the karana ends nd. 44-25 after the beginning

18a. A.(de|ld^:; Bl.fefSFJI^:; c. A . w i P # ; B.?nftm

B2.3.l^d=)jc^gl: c-d, A . B . C . W ^ f ; D . ^ g ^ r ^
b. A.B.MHllfa<(^. A.%TPI, d. A.B.^K"IIlPlcf^'5I^#%;
19a-B. B1.3. 4f*l "=llf"I; C . *<"I1IH ilc|<?Tl;
B2.^i|5T^^<ni?T^nf'i D . ^B^fcTsr:3ra#%
b. Al."?^?^; B.1^-^J1M<
58 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 111.19

of the day, and the karana that has ended, being the 11 th, is Taitila. (Note that this is also the ending
moment of the tithi).
In the place of vajjaladhoh (in verse 18) the reading bahulayoh is suggested, following the meaning
and keeping to the letters. O r , it can be corrected as kajjalayoh which will give the same meaning,
'dark fortnight'. Secondly, to avoid splitting the word ardhe between the third and fourth feet (in
verse 19), cardni and karandni have been interchanged, as possibly the scribe has interchanged them
by the similarity of letters. T h e word, ca is interposed in the third foot, to make up the deficiency
of one syllable, as an original ca cardni might possibly have been written as cardni. T h e extra syllable
in the fourth foot can be explained in the manner we did earlier.

3 i ^ ^ 4 ) J N ^ % ? T ^ ^ y r ^ H f | ^ (^)
^ r r ( ^ ) oqfdMidl^TJ^ (^^^:) || |
Vyatipata and Vaidhf ta

20. W h e n the sum of the true longitudes ofthe Sun and the M o o n equals one
complete revolution, (i.e., twelve rdsis) there is theyog-a called Vaidhrta. When
this sum plus ten naksatras (i.e., rdsis 4-13-20) equals a complete revoludon,
(i.e., twelve rdsis or twenty-four raiis), then is the yoga called Vyatipdta. Their
dme is to be found by using the sum of the daily motions of the Sun and the
Moon.
T h e yogas are found thus: T h e true Sun and M o o n are computed for the ending moment of every
day. W h e n the sum of these is a little over 12 rdsis, d u r i n g that day the end ofthe Vaidhrta will occur.
('A litde over' means, not more than the sum of their daily modons). W h e n the sum plus ra. 4-13-20
is, in the same way, a litde over 12 rdsis or 24 rdsis, the ending moment ofthe Vyatipdta will occur
d u r i n g that day. T h e ending moments must be found like the ending moments of naksatras men-
tioned already, using, i n the place of the daily motion of the M o o n , the sum of the daily motions
of the Sun and the M o o n .

Example 10. (a) At the ending-moment of a day the true Sun is 2' 20 and the true Moon 9' 15. Their da
motions for the day are 57 and 783' respectively. Show that Vaidhrta unit occur on that day, andfind it
moment.

T h e sum of the true longitudes is 12*^5. T h i s is a little, i.e. 5, over 12 rasis, (5 being less than 57'
+ 783'). Therefore Vaidhrta will end on that date. T h e ending moment is when the sum is exactly
12 rdsis, i.e. the sum is less by 5 or 300'. Therefore, the ending moment is 300 X 60 + (57' -I- 783')
= nd. 21-26 earlier than the end ofthe day, i.e. nd. 38-34 from the beginning ofthe day.
(b) At the ending moment ofa day, the true Sun and Moon are: 9' 15 20' and Iff 7 20', respectively, a
their daily motions 61' and 749'. Show that Vyatipdta ends on that day andfind the moment.
T h e sum ofthe true Sun and M o o n = 19"^ 22" 40'. T h e sum plus 4^ 13 20' = 24' 6 0'. This is more
than a full revoludon by 6 which is less than the sum o f the daily modons, 6 1 ' -I- 749' = 13 30'.
Therefore Vyatipdta ends on the day. T h e ending moment is: 360' X 60 ^ (61' -I- 749') = nd. 26-40,
before the end o f the day, i.e. nd. 33-20 from the beginning o f the day.
20a. C.4|J|H<^ c. A l . ^ ; B . C . D . ^ . D.^dlmdl
b. A . ^ ^ . A . B . C . ^ ^ l f l ^ D.'^lflf!^ d. A . B . f ^ l q ^ : ; C ^ ' ^ ' l ^ : ; D . i f j l ^ q ^ :
III.20 III. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 59

The author here gives the computation of two of the twenty-seven yogas, Viskambha, etc., of which
Vyatipdta is the seventeenth and Vaidhrta is the twenty-seventh. These have to be known because
offerings are made to the manes and other deeds of merit are performed at these times, as at
Visuva, Ayana, Sartkrama, etc. (which also are going to be given), these being two well-known days
among the ninety-six Sraddha-days. A l l astronomers know that the twenty-seven yogas are com-
puted like the twenty-seven naksatras, using the sum of the true Sun and M o o n i n the place of the
true M o o n and the sum of the daily motions i n the place of the Moon's daily motion, because the
yoga and the naksatra have equal extent, viz. 800 minutes. Vaidhrta, the twenty-seventh of the
Viskambha series, and theVaidhrta here given are identical because the one ends at twenty-seven
naksatra segments, i.e. one full revolution, and the other also ends at a full revolution, the duration
of both being the same. In the same way, the Vyatipdta given by the author is the same as the seven-
teenth yoga of the same name i n the Viskambha series because, true S u n -I- true M o o n -I- 10 naksatra-
lengths = one revolution = 27 naksatra-lengths. Therefore true Sun -I- true M o o n = 27 - 10 = 17
naksatra-lengths, given for Vyatipdta of the Viskambha series.

For the sake of syntax sahitesu has been corrected as sahite tu. For the sake of grammar cakrah is
corrected as cakram, for the neuter gender alone means a cycle or revolution, viz. 12 rdsis. O r let it
be the masculine cakrah itself, meaning collection which ultimately can yield the idea of a collection
of 12 rdsis. yitair bhdgaih is corrected as yutair bhdgaih, i.e. 'the sum o f the daily motions', which is
necessary. Gatairbhdgaih or sthitair bhdgaih can satisfy the context, but will not be sufficient, for divi-
sion by the sum ofthe daily motions cannot ordinarily be understood without being told. B u t the
correction, of cakre, which is quite all right, as satke by T S is unwarranted and due to ignorance of
what is wanted here.

Another thing must be mentioned. If the twenty-sevenyogas, Viskambha etc., are computed, as i n
the later-day works like the Surya Siddhdnta, then there would be no need to take the trouble of com-
puting these two, viz. the seventeenth and the twenty-seventh, alone separately. I f we are
instructed to do these two separately, it is because the Paulisa d i d not have the twenty-seven yogas.
We have reason to believe that even d u r i n g the time of the V M these d i d not exist, for i n the Brhat-
sarnhitd, while naksatra, tithi and karana are taken up for astrological predictionsyoga is not so taken.

T h e following is the history of the yoga. T h e yoga is not mentioned i n the Vedas, and the Veddfiga
Jyotisa does not give it. F r o m the Paitdmaha condensed by our author we can infer that the original
Paitdmaha Siddhdnta gave the Vyatipdta for the first time, for this condensed Paitdmaha gives the rule
for Vyatipdta: "Multiply the days from Epoch, (this E p o c h is different), by 12, and divide by 305"
(XII. 8). In the B a u d d h a and J a i n astronomical works, like Sdryaprajnapti and Kdlalokaprakdsa, too,
the Vyatipdta alone is mentioned. Because the author gives both Vyatipdta and Vaidhrta here, we can
guess that the original Paulisa had Vaidhrta also. Aryabhata, a contemporary of V M , mentions
Vyatipdta alone i n the sdtra, "The Sun's cycles plus the Moon's cycles are the number o f Vyatlpdtas"
{ABh, Kdla. 3,), but commentators take h i m to mean Vaidhrta also by implication, for, the Mahdbhds-
kariya, which is practically a commentary on the Aryabhatiya says, "When the Sun plus the M o o n equals
six signs it is the Vyatipdta, when it is twelve signs it is Vaidhrta, and when it is equal to the distance of
A n u r a d h a it is the yoga Sdrpamastaka" (IV. 35). H e r e the sum being equal to twelve signs, gives the
Vaidhrta mentioned i n the context, which is patent. T h e distance o f A n u r a d h a being equal to
seventeen naksatra segments, Sdrpamastaka is to be identified with the Vyatipdta of the Paulisa,
which, as we have shown, is the seventeenth o f the Viskambha series. Govindasvami too, in his
Mahdbhdskariya-Bhdsya on this verse quotes the original Aryahhatiya-Sutra and explains that Bhaskara
here gives both Vyatipdta and Vaidhrta. (As for the Vyatipdta given by the sum equal to six signs, that
60 PANCASIDDHANTIKA III.2C

is the Mahdvyatipdta, distinct from the seventeenth of the Viskambha series, which is not what we are
talking about here.)

Prabhakara, generally mendoned as a disciple oi Aryabhata, has mentioned sevenyog-os, which he

called Mahddosah ('the great Inauspicious'). This information we have from two slokas quoted by
Sankarandrdyana i n his commentary on the Laghubhdskariya as Prabhakara's. T h e slokas say, "F
Sun plus M o o n , in terms of naksatra-segments. W h e n they are equal to twenty-seven (i.e. a full
revoludon), when 14, 8, 12, 5, 17, 18 and 10 are added, there are the Mahddosas Nirodha, Parigha
Vajra, Danda, Ganda Sula and Vyatipdta, respectively. In this group, all excepting Danda, can
identified i n the Viskambha series. Prabhakara has not included Vaidhrta i n the group, perhaps
because he does not consider it as zMahddosa. Because these are computed individually, by a special
rule, we can conclude that the twenty-seven yogas, Viskambha etc., were not i n vogue in the days of
Prabhakara. We have mentioned that i n the days of Bhaskara a senior contemporary of
Brahmagupta, also the twenty-seven yogas d i d not exist. T h o u g h it may be supposed that the
twenty-seven yogas had come into vogue by Brahmagupta's days from the statement, "The minutes
of the sum o f the longitudes of the Sun and the M o o n , divided by 800 are the yogas", {Br. SpSi.,
Spasta. 63) and on the strength o f this we ourselves have written that Brahmagupta knew the
twenty-seven yogas, i n o u r Introduction to the Mahdbhdskariya, it is now learnt that the statement is
an interpolation because this is not taken up and commented upon by Prthudakasvdmi in \v\sBhdsya
of the Brdhmasphutasiddhdnta and also because in giving the computation oipunyakdlas at the ends
of tithis, naksatras, etc. according to custom, like Vatesvara and Sripati, Brahmagupta omits yoga
while the others includeyoga as well. In the Sdrya-Siddhdnta etc. which are later, the Viskambha serie
find a place. T h u s of the five angas, the yoga was the last to develop.

We said that the Vyatipdta was the first yoga born and next Vaidhrta. W e shall consider thei
nature and how they arose. T h e Vedic priests and astronomers were i n the habit of observing the
sky looking for celestial occurrences like the rising and setting o f the Sun and the M o o n , because of
the need of this kind of knowledge for the performance oiyajnas and out of thirst for knowledge.
It is said that the Gavdm-ayana Satra was designed for this very purpose. T h e following facts were
observed by them. A t one time the Sun rises farthest south o f the East point, that is the end of
Daksindyana and beginning of Uttardyana. (This is the winter solstice). After that, the Sun rises more
and more north every day and, at the end o f six months, rises farthest north. T h e n is the end of
Uttardyana and the beginning of Daksindyana. (This is the summer solstice). F r o m that time it begins
to rise more and more to the south, until after six months again it is farthest south. This is the end
of Daksindyana and the beginning o f Uttardyana again. T h u s i n a year there are the two courses of the
Suri, northward and southward. In a given place, the exact point north or south where the Sun rises
depends o n its declination north or south. Like the Sun, the M o o n too, according to its declination,
rises north or south o f the east-point and has its Uttardyana i n about fourteen days and its
Daksindyana in about the same period, the total taking a little more than twenty-seven days. Now,
the day o n which the Sun and the M o o n rise almost at the point, one moving south-ward, and the
other moving north-ward, coming to meet each other as it were, that day is the Vyatipdta. Because
they cross each other moving i n different directions, the phenomenon is called Vyatipdta or Vyatipdt

Now, how can the time of the phenomenon be computed? Because they must rise nearly at the
same point, their declinations must be nearly equal. That they must be moving in opposite directions,
i.e. their respective ayanas should be different, has been mentioned. These two conditions can be
approximately secured i f the position of one is as far away on one side of the junction o f Uttardyana
and Daksindyana, as that of the other is on the other side of the junction. Let us take it that the
III.20 III. PAULISA-SIDDHANTA 61

longitudes are reckoned from the starting point of the Uttarayana (winter solstice), as i n the Veddnga
Jyotisa and the Paitdmaha from Sravisthd. T h e two being at equal distances on both sides of the zero
point means that the sum of their longitudes is equal to one full revolution, i.e. twelve rdsis. It is this
that the Paitdmaha gives by its rule, 'Multiply the days by twelve and divide by 305.' But, because the
true declination of the M o o n will generally differ from that of the Sun at this dme, on account of
its latitude, the time given is only approximate and the Paitdmaha intends that the actual time
should be found by observation.

If we reckon the longitude not from Sravisthd as the zero point but from Asvini, then the longitudes
will each be five naksatras less, because Asvini is five naksatras forward, and the sum will be ten
naksatras less. Therefore, i f ten naksatras are added to the sum o f the longitudes (as the author asks
us to do) we have the condition fulfilled, and therefore the Vyatipdta. But in course o f time, on
account of the precession of the equinoxes, the winter solstice had moved to the beginning o f
Makara at the dme of the author, and now still more backward so that conformity to definition is
growing less and less. But on account of respect for the o l d Sdstras, the 17th continued and still
continues to be the Vyatipdta, just as we continue to observe Uttarayana rites still when the Sun
enters Makara because Uttardyana was once there, though now it has come down into M u l a . A new
type of Vyatipdta called the Mahdvyatipdta came into existence to satisfy the definition. T h i s is
mentioned by the author i n the next two verses.
T h e memory of a sacred day at the sum being a full revolution resulted i n the creation of a new
sacred day, even when reckoned from Asvini, and it was called Vaidhrta, because the old Vyatipdta
was 'sustained' (dhrta), as it were, by this. Because it has grown in the place o f the Vyatipdta, this
Vaidhrta itself is sometimes called Vyatipdta. F o r e.g. the Sary a-Siddhdnta says, "This is another well
known Vyatipdta, called by die different name of Vaidhrti" (XI. 8) and " T h e three fearsome Vyatipdtas"
(XI. 22). Govindasvami also says this: "When the sun plus M o o n is equal to six signs, there is Vyatipdta.
When it is equal to twelve signs it is Vaidhrta and this is also called Vyatipdta; for it is said ' T h e sum
of the revolutions of the Sun and those of the M o o n are the Vyatipdtas (in the yuga)' (ABh. Kala, 3)."
How does this mean that? T h i s is how: T h e sUtra primarily gives only the Vaidhrtas that come at the
end of full revolutions, which are called Vyatipdtas because both have the same characterisdcs. T h e
effect of both being the same, Vaidhrta is called Vyatipdta. So the vyatipdtas characterised by full
revolutions and half revolutions are both given by the sutra. (Govindasvami's Bhdsya, Mahabhas-
kariya IV.35). Sankaranarayaiia too, by saying "Aryabhata mennons the two types oi vyatipdtas", i n
his commentary on Laghubhdskariya, II. 29, understands Vaidhrta also by the word Vyatipdta.

21. W h e n the S u n b e g a n to t u r n s o u t h , i.e. w h e n the s u m m e r solstice was at

the m i d d l e o f the asterism, A s l e s a , the r e q u i r e m e n t o f the d e f i n i t i o n that the
S u n a n d the M o o n s h o u l d be i n d i f f e r e n t ayanas was satisfied. B u t n o w the
t u r n i n g s o u t h takes place at t h r e e q u a r t e r s o f P u n a r v a s u . T h e r e f o r e the
d e f i n i t i o n has b e c o m e faulty.

F r o m this we can infer that the author knew the precession of the equinoxes. In the Brhatsamhitd
also he says the same thing, "Certainly at one time, the summer and winter solsdces were at the
middle of Aslesd and the beginning of Dhanisthd, respectively, because such has been mentioned in
62 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A III.21

the ancient lore. But now the summer solstice is at the beginning of Cancer and the other one at
the beginning of Capricorn. If at any time this is not conformed to, then there is a further change,
which can be seen and measured by observation and examination." (fir. Sam. III. 1-2). It is from this
that we have interpreted Punarvasu as "the point at three quarters of Punarvasu". T h e ancient lore
mentioned here includes Vedanga-Jyotisa and Paitdmaha Siddhdnta. T h e Ydjusa-Jyotisa says, " A t the
beginning of ^ravistha the Sun and the M o o n turn northward and at the middle of Aslesa they turn
southward, with the Sun always i n the Magha and Sravana months, respectively" (verse 7). "When
the Sun and the M o o n rise i n the sky together, with Sravistha with them, the Yuga begins then as also
the month o f Magha, the seasonal month Tapas, the bright fortnight, and the turning northward "
(verse 6). As the Paitdmaha too counts the naksatras of longitudes from Sravisthd and says that it is
Vyatipdtd when the sum o f their longitudes is a whole revolution, we can infer that the turning
northward is at Sravisthd.

22. W i t h the M o o n a p p r o a c h i n g to m e e t the S u n , m o v i n g i n a d i r e c t i o n

opposite to that o f the S u n , v^'hen its true d e c l i n a t i o n (i.e. the m e a n declination
p l u s its latitude) b e c o m e s e q u a l to the S u n ' s a n d w h e n the s u m o f t h e i r l o n g i -
tudes is n e a r l y six signs, t h e n is the Vyatipdta c o n f o r m i n g to the d e f i n i t i o n , (i.e.
the Mahdvyatipdta).
T h e m i n i m u m and sufficient conditions for the Mahdvyatipata are that the Sun and M o o n should
have different southward or northward courses and that their true declinations must be equal, both
being north or both being south. T h e second part o f the second condition, though not mentioned
by the verse, is implied i n the requirement that the sum should be nearly six signs. Because the
northward or southward courses and the declinations depend on the tropical longitudes, we can
understand that the sum also is of the tropical longitudes (i.e. the sdyana longitudes) of the Sun and
the M o o n . I f this is not stated it is because d u r i n g the time o f the author the Ayandihsa, i.e. the
difference between the tropical and sidereal longitudes, was pracdcally zero and the author
intended the work as a karana not to be used for a very long time when the ayandmsa would become
considerable.

We have interpreted "half revolution as approximately six signs" because when the M o o n has a
ladtude as generally it would have, the equality i n declination will happen not exacdy at the sum
being six signs. O n l y the mean declination o f the M o o n will be equal to that of the Sun when the
sum is exactly six signs, as Bhaskara I says i n his commentary o n the Aryabhatiya, (Kdla, 3), "Vyatipdta

21. Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a o n B S 2 , p . 4 0 . 22a. A.B.D.^'q^nratC.oWTFTl

2Ia. Al.B1.2.3RetWsrf b. B.'RI^A.B.VlfilWft^:
b. B.I+dltf*<"IW B.+iKlviR)!; c . D . ^ r o m M f t i ^ ^ :
c. A . ^ R c. B . ? ^
d. A.<mR d. A.RHsMfti
III.22 III. PAULISA-SIDDHANTA 63

occurs when the declinations are the same and the courses are different. T h e expression half-
revolution i n that connection is only meant to be approximate, because by the latitude of the M o o n
it may be a little more or less." Therefore we should examine whether a Vyatipdta would occur at
the neighbourhood of the sum being six signs, because it can occur only there. But sometimes it
may not occur at all, because the definition is not satisfied ( A l l this is expounded clearly i n works
like the Siddhdnta Siromani and we stop with this).

One may think that we are making contradictory statements by saying in the history of the origin
of the Vyatipdta, that it occurs at the sum being full revolutions and here that it occurs at half revolu-
tions. There is no contradiction because the origin from which the longitudes are measured is
different in the two cases. In the former the winter solstice was taken as the origin, and, i n the latter,
the spring equinox. T h e r e is a difference o f three signs between the origins, which causes the same
difference in each of the two longitudes, with the result that there is a difference of six signs i n the
sum. That they are the same can be shown thus: T h e Sun measured from winter solstice, (say, a)
= the Sun measured from spring equinox (say, 6) + 3 signs. T h e M o o n measured from winter
solstice, (say, a) = the M o o n measured from spring equinox (say, b) 3 signs. Therefore a -I- a' =
b -t- b' -I- 6 signs. If a -I- a' = full revolution, b -I- b' -I- 6 signs = full revolution, therefore b 4- b' =
full revolution 6 signs = half revolution, which proves the sameness. Spring equinox is not men-
tioned because at the author's time it was situated at the beginning of Asvini and longitudes are
reckoned from there.

Example 11. The Sun and the Maori, at the end of the day are rd. 1-10-0 and rd. 4-23-30, and their daily
motion 57' and 783'. Taking the spring equinox to be at the beginning of Asvini, i.e. the winter solstice at the
beginning of Capricorn, examine the possibility of Vyatipdta, in both ways.
Because the longitudes are from zero Asvini, they are the same as reckoned from spring equinox
also, both points being the same i n the problem. Therefore sum of longitudes = ra. 1-10-0- -I- ra.
4-23-30 = rd. 6-3-30. T h i s is 3 30', i.e. 210', over a half revolution. T h e sum of the daily motions
= 57' -I- 783' = 840'. Therefore at 210 x 60 840 = 15, nddis before the end of the day, the sum
is equal to a half revoludon or 6 signs, and so Vyatipdta may occur i n its neighbourhood.

Otherwise, i f the longitudes as measured from winter solstice, the Sun = rd. 1-10-0 - rd. 9-0-0
= rd. 4-10-0. T h e M o o n = rd. 4-23-30 - rd. 9-0-0 = rd. 7-23-30. T h e i r sum = rd. 4-10-0 + rd. 7-23-
30 = rd. 12-3-30, and this is 210' over a full revolution. Therefore 210' X 60 H- 840 = 15, nd4is
before the end of the day. T h e sum is a full revolution and the Vyatipdta may occur as its neighbour-
hood. (Note that worked in both ways, the time is the same).
Now for the readings. In the place ofpdto we have tskenydto because the scribe may easily mistake
pd ioryd. But the correction bhdgo o f T S does not agree with the second case i n arkakasthdm and
deserves to be rejected. T h e wrong reading, sasi-saviksepah has been corrected by us into sasi
saviksepah, by a simple lengthening of. B u t T S and N P have made itsasiraviksepah which is incorrect
and also does not agree with kdsthdm. T h e meaning which they have taken for this verse itself is
wrong. T h e i r interpretation of kdstha into 'maximum dechnation' i.e. 24 (or 23 20') is not proper,
for, in his work (see C h a p . IV), kdsthdnta is used for m a x i m u m declinadon and kasthd is taken to
mean only declinauon. Let us concede it is m a x i m u m declinadon and therefore means 24. Even
this does not agree with the meaning given by them because they want and imply 23 20' only there.
If 24 is given roughly for 23 20', why not 23 which is nearer. T h e y do not seem to have under-
stood at all what is sought to be conveyed by the author.
 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A
III.24
64

^t^irfg[?t^ET^f^ Chijch-wiv) II

l^a^asiti-pu^yakala
23-24. A t t h e first p o i n t o f M e s a (Aries) a n d T u l a ( L i b r a ) a r e the s p r i n g a n d
a u t u m n a l e q u i n o x e s ( a n d the sacred days t h e r e o f are w h e n t h e S u n is there.)
T h e c o m m e n c e m e n t s o f t h e sacred days c a l l e d Sadasttis are at p e r i o d s o f 86
solar degrees c o m m e n c i n g w i t h Tula-zero p o i n t . T h e days i n t h e solar m o n t h s
after t h e respective c o m m e n c e m e n t o f t h e Sadasttis a r e sacred as c o n n e c t e d
w i t h t h e manes. T h e c o m m e n c e m e n t o f t h e Sadasttis a r e after 14 degrees o f
K a n y a , ( V i r g o ) , after 18 degrees o f M i t h u n a ( G e m i n i ) , after 2 2 degrees o f
M i n a , (Pisces) a n d after 2 6 degrees o f D h a n u s (Sagittarius).
The main purpose o f the author i n giving the equinoxes here is to indicate the sacred days con-
nected with them as can be gathered from the context. T h e equinoxes, i.e. the points of intersection
between the ecliptic and the celestial equator, though moving westward slowly along the ecliptic,
(this is the precession of the equinoxes), were at the first points o f Mesa and T u l a only at the period
of the author. A t the present day the equinoxes have moved far into Uttara-Bhadrapada and
Uttara-PhalgunI, but the sacred days are still observed with the Sun entering Mesa and T u l a by
blind routine.

T h e time taken by the Sun to move one degree is a 'solar day' according to H i n d u astronomers.
(We have put it within inverted commas, because i n English it means the ordinary day caused by
the Sun and therefore quite different). So i n a solar year there are 360 'solar days', and i n each solar
month 30 'solar days'. As for counting from zero-Tula, this is enjoined by the Dharma-sdstras. T h e
commencements of the Sadasltimukha-s are, 1 X 86 = 86, 2 X 86 = 172, 3 x 86 = 258 and 4 X
86 = 344. from zero-Tula, i.e. from rd. 6-0-0. Therefore they are rd. 6 -I- 86, rd. 6 -I- 172, rd. 6
-f- 258 and ra. 6 -I- 344, and these are, respectively, 26 degrees of Sagittarius, 22 degrees of Pisces,
18 degrees o f G e m i n i and 14 degrees o f Virgo. These sacred days are not observed i n these days
and it would be interesting to know when a n d how they went out of vogue. W h e n the Sun enters
Sagittarius, Pisces, Gemini and V i r g o , we observe the sacred day, calling it Sadastti; and in the place
of the last sixteen 'solar days' of V i r g o , (these seem to have secured importance at the time of SUrya
Siddhdnta) the dark fortnight o f Bhadrapada is dedicated to the Manes, with the name of Mahdlaya-
paksa. T h e dark fortnight o f Asvina also is observed as a secondary Mahdlaya-paksa and it is the
belief that the Manes are sent back to their world on Naraka-Caturdasi. Now, what is the speciality
about 86 solar days, it may be asked. T h i s period is three synodic months less one day. It may be

23a. A.iNd<j,dl<l A.l^ip; B . 1 . 2 . C . D . i 5 i ^ B 3 J ^

b. A.^SHtRr d. A.B.f^^:
c. A.B.f^arait 24b. A . W ^
III.24 III. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A 65

that a section of people observed a sacred day for the manes once i n three synodic months, and then
this came i n its place.

Solstices

25. T h e Sun's t u r n i n g n o r t h w a r d is w h e n it reaches the zero-point o f M a k a r a ,

( C a p r i c o r n ) , i.e. at w i n t e r solstice, a n d its t u r n i n g s o u t h w a r d is at the z e r o
p o i n t o f K a r k a t a k a ( C a n c e r ) i.e. at s u m m e r solstice, w i t h the a t t e n d a n t sacred
days. T h e seasons ^isira etc. c o m m e n c e w i t h the w i n t e r solstice a n d e a c h
season lasts two t r o p i c a l solar m o n t h s .

T h e precession of the equinoxes implies the precession o f the solstices as well and therefore the
solsdces at the zero-points of Karkataka and Makara is true only for the period of the author. If the
sacred days are observed still when the Sun enters these signs, it is again blind custom.

As the seasons depend upon the position o f the mid-day Sun in the sky and the length o f day
dme, and these depend on the Sun's declination depending on tropical (sdyana) longitude o f the
Sun, the seasonal months are different from either the solar sidereal months Mesa etc. or the
synodic months Caitra etc., and these cannot correctly represent the seasons. That is why the Vedas
give a new set of months, (actually tropical months) for the seasons: M a d h u and Madhava are the
months constituting the Vasanta (spring) season, Sukra and Suci are the months constituting the
Grisma (summer season), Nabha and Nabhasya are the months constituting the Varsa (rainy)
season, Isa and Urja are the months constituting the Sarad (post-rainy season); Sahas and Sahasya
constituting the Hemanta (pre-winter) season; and Tapas and Tapasya constituting the Sisira
(winter) season. (Suklayajurveda, 13.25). Even i n the Veddnga Jyotisa we have the information that
the Sisira season begins with the Uttardyana (winter solstice). T h e Ydjusa-Jyotisa (verse 6) says,
"When the Sun and the M o o n rise together, with Sravistha, from then commence the yuga, the
month o f Magha, the seasonal month Tapas, the light fortnight of the month, and Uttardyana". As
Tapas is the first month o f Sis'ira we understand Sisira begins with Uttardyana. B y mentioning
Magha and Tapas distinctly, we understand that the Vedas wish us not to confuse the two. But con-
fusion there has been, and still continues, with the result that people call Mesa and even Vrsabha
spring months, though patently we have summer then, K u m b h a and M i n a being practically the
spring months now. T h i s confusion has resulted i n M a d h u , Madhava etc. and Caitra, Vaisakha etc.
as synonyms. People who know are amused, when i n the sankalpa recited for H i n d u rituals the
month of Vrsabha, which is advanced summer, is mentioned as spring.

25. Quoted by Utpala on BS 2, p.23. b. A.-^tlcbP^lR!!; B1.2.<^<^d*!i!lR!l

25a. A.Bl.WI^ c. u.wn
66 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A III.27

SaAkranti-kala
26. T h e a n g u l a r d i a m e t e r o f the S u n i n m i n u t e s , m u l t i p l i e d by sixty a n d
d i v i d e d by the d a i l y m o t i o n o f the S u n , are total sacred nddis o f Safikranti
(literally 'crossing'). H a l f this t i m e before a n d after the S u n e n t e r i n g a rdsi, is
sacred.

T h e Paulisa does not give the angular diameter of the Sun, so it must be the intention of the
author to use the angular diameter given by the Romaka or the Saura.

Example 12. The angular diameter of Sun is 31' and its daily motion 57'. The Safikramana is 19 nadis afte
sunrise. Find the sacred nadis.

A n g u l a r diameter X 60 ^ daily motion = 3 1 ' X 60 57' =raa.32-38. H a l f this is 32-38/2 = nd.

16-19. Therefore nd. 19-0 - nd. 16-19 = nd. 2-41 to nd. 19-0 -h 16 - 19 = n a . 35-19 is the sacred
period.
T h e rule is proved thus: T h e time of the centre of the Sun's orb crossing to the next sign is the
dme of Safikramana. A t this time half the orb is i n the previous sign and half in the next. T h e period
when parts o f the orb are i n both signs is the sacred period. So it begins when the east point of the
orb just enters the next sign and ends when the west point just leaves the previous sign. So, d u r i n g
the interval the S u n moves a distance equal to its own diameter. This time is got by the propordon:
daily motion: angular diameter :: 60 nddikds: the required dme. Therefore aAg. diameter X 60
-H 60 is the time i n nddikds. As half this time is required for the mid-point to reach the junction of
the signs, half this period placed on either side o f the time o f the mid-point crossing over gives the
beginning and end of sacred period.

It must be noted that if the angular diameter is computed according to the old H i n d u astronomical
works and used, the sacred period would be constant whatever be the daily motion, and the sacred
period can easily be given as so imny nddikds before and a.ix.er safikramana. How? Let x be the mean
angular diameter in minutes. According to H i n d u astronomy the angular diameter is propordonate
to the daily modon, (because the m o d o n is taken inversely proportionate to the distance and the
angular diameter also is inversely propordonate to the distance) (See V I I I . 15, I X 14-16). Therefore
the angular diameter = x multiplied by daily motion mean daily motion. T h e period = angular
diameter x 60 -H daily motion = xX daily motion X 60 - i - (daily motion X mean daily motion) = x
X 60 - i - mean daily motion which is constant. I f to avoid this we assume that the mean diameter is
intended to be used i n the rule, then the rule is unreasonable. O r we have to accept it on the injunc-
tion of the Dharmasdstras, throwing the burden o n them. W e said, "according to the old H i n d u
astronomical works", because actually the angular diameter is not exactly proportional to the daily
motion.

26a. Bl.^^:B2.'^^;B3.^83fcn d. B1.2.!i"^dl4H

b. A 1 . T ^ ; B.f^H<+.*<?n For^^Rrai^ B 1 . 2 . ^ ^ f f c l : ; B 2 . ^ ^ n ^
111.27 III. HAUI.ISA-SIDDHANTA 67

Tridinaspfg-yoga
27. W h e n a tithi e x t e n d s t h r o u g h o u t a day, c o i n c i d i n g w i t h a part o f the
p r e v i o u s day a n d the next day, the o c c u r r e n c e is c a l l e d Tridinasprg, (literally
'touch o f three days'). (If, besides a w h o l e tithi, parts o f the previous a n d next tithis
fall o n the same day, the occurrence is called avatm, literally, ' u n c o u n t e d tithi').

T h e only thing we have done to the reading in the first half of the verse is to change sd into sd,
which is quite warranted. But T S have changed de into di and introduced a new word, anya. Still
their reading of the text cannot yield the meaning. T o agree with tithitraya-sparsanat, we corrected
ahnah into avamah, because avama alone results by contact with three tithis. T h e word ahnah is neces-
sary also, but can be understood from the context, though not mentioned, but not so, avamah. If
this part is left uncorrected as T S have left, the expression would be non-sensical like Sudhakara's
meaning: "Because the day touches three tithis, it is called 'Three-day touching'. B u t Thibaut has
grasped the idea here, though calling it "the conjunction touching three Tithis". N P too, have
caught the idea, but since the relevant emendation to avama d i d not strike them, they merely say
'(there is a yoga)'."

[TT|:]

Rahu (Node)

28. M u l t i p l y the days f r o m E p o c h by 8 a n d d i v i d e by 151. R a h u ' s m o t i o n is

got i n degrees etc. A d d m i n u t e s e q u a l to r e v o l u t i o n s . ( T h e m o t i o n becomes
exact.)

29. D e d u c t the m o t i o n f r o m 7' 25 5 9 ' . T h e r e m a i n d e r is R a h u ' s H e a d (what

is c a l l e d D r a g o n ' s H e a d , a p o p u l a r n a m e f o r the A s c e n d i n g N o d e ) . A d d 6 rdsis
to R a h u ' s H e a d , ( D r a g o n ' s T a i l o r D e s c e n d i n g N o d e ) , is got.

Example 13. (a) Days from Epoch, 75,500; find Rdhu's Head and Tail, (b) Find the Head of Rdhu at
Epoch, i.e. for Zero day.

27b.

c. A2.'^m. B.ijim
c
d. A2.r^l^>iW<TT:; B1 .f^^fo:<k<l:
d. A . B . C . D . ^ : II
29b. A.f5R#. C.D.gprr
28a. A2.B."3DTt. B."3TOT?ft c. B.aqifew. B 1.2.311^; D.-a)^. B.gs
b. d. A2.'3^1. B 2 . 5 ^ ^

7
6 I'ANC:ASIODHANTIKA 111.29

(a). Rahu's motion for 75,500 days = 8 x 75,500 divided by 151, degrees = rev. 11-1-10-0. T h e
exact motion = rev. 11-1-10-0 + 11 minutes = rev. 11-1-10-11 = rd. 1-10-11, omitdng full revolu-
tions. Rahu's Head = rd. 7-25-59 - ra. 1-10-11 = ra. 6-15-48. T a i l = rd. 6-15-48 - rd. 6-0-0 = rd.
0-15-48.

As the m o d o n of R a h u is zero, the H e a d of R a h u is the constant itself, viz. rd. 7-25-59.

As the motion is 8 in 151 days, according to this Siddhdnta, to move 360, i.e. one revoludon, it
takes 360 X 151 H- 8 = 6795 days. But d u r i n g this period it moves one minute more, i.e. the exact
motion is 360 1' i n 6795 days, i.e. one revolution takes 360 X 6795 360 1' i.e. 6794 days, 19
nddis.

We have seen that the H e a d of R a h u for the Epoch, according to the Paulisa is the constant itself,
viz. rd. 7-25-59. According to the Saura (condensed by the author) it is rd. 7-26-6. According to the
Vdkyakarana it is ra. 7-26-11. According to modern astronomy, taking the ayandmsa as being zero for
the period it is rd. 7-26-0. According to the Siddhdnta Siromani it is ra. 7-27.13. We see that all except
the value of Siromani agree closely, verifying the Paulisa value for the Epoch. T h e disagreement of
the Siromani value is only apparent, for the zero point of the Siromani zodiac is about one degree
behind that of the rest, (as may be seen by comparing with its co-ordinates of the stars or from its
Sun being one degree more than that of the rest) and i f the same point is taken as the origin, the
Siromarii too gives about rd. 7-26-13.
T h u s the value at epoch is necessary to get the R a h u at any moment, and it is this that is given
by Vrscikabhdgd Rdhoh etc. B u t T S have not understood this need (as they did not understand
the need for the ksepa i n the case of the M o o n (see II.3) and gave a wrong interpretation of
sasimuninava-yamdsca rdsyddydh) and give the following laughable explanation: "The measurement
of the Umbs of R a h u having the form o f a scorpion is 25 minutes. Deducting this from the motion
of Rahu obtained from (28), the head or face o f R a h u is to be found. This plus six rdsis is the tail.
We have to rely only on the words of the ancients to know that the scorpion-like limbs of Rahu mea-
sure 25 minutes, there is no other reason." N o w we ask: Let it be that they have not understood the
need for the ksepa. H o w d i d it not occur to them that R a h u can be got only by deducUng the motion
from something, whether it is a cycle or some other constant, because the motion is retrograde (as
they themselves have said i n other places: "Rahu deducted from a full revolution is the Head, this
plus six rasis is the tail", I X . 6, "deducted from the end of Pisces is the head", V I I I . 8). It also appears
here that Thibaut is not sadsfied with Sudhakara's explanation. Further, how did it not occur to
them that ekaUptikdluptdhsadxnmsativrsciakabhdgdh, means rd. 7-25-59, when they have correctly inter-
preted simhasya vasuyamdrnsdh as ( X V I . a) rd. 4-2S-0, sdrdhdhpancdlino ( X V I I I . 1) asra. 7-5-30, nai^a
sdrdhdhkanydrnsdh ( X V I I I . 11) asra. 5-9-SO,sodmavrsabhasydmsdhnavaliptikdvarjitdh ( X V I I I . 18) as
rd. 1-15-51? It is really astounding what tricks the m i n d can play!

Incidentally, the following should be mentioned here for general information. Following the
nomenclature of the ancient Samhitds, the author calls the ascending node Rahu's head, and the
descending node 'Rahu's T a i l ' , both being Rahu, though generally i n later astronomical works the
word Pdta is used. In recent times, somehow the term Ketu has come to be applied to the descending
node, Rahu being retained for the ascending node, though there is no authority in astronomical
works or Purdnas to bring in Ketu here. T h e ancient Samhitds use the term Ketu for the
DhQmaketus or comets and, as deities they are generally referred to i n the plural. T h e y are also
characterised by unpredictable motions and in the Brhatsamhitd too the author says so. (This is the
view of the ancients though we now know that a number of them are periodic, and their positions
can be predicted with tolerable accuracy). T h e y are worshipped i n the collective, as seated on doves.
III.29 III. P A U U S A - S I D D H A N T A 69

with the expression, "Salutation to the Ketus." F r o m the singular i n the mantra of their invocation,
Ketum krnvannaketave, one may think that Ketu is referred to i n the singular also. It is not so. Here
the word does not mean the 'Comet' Ketu at all. T h e mantra itself is i n praise o f the Sun arid Ketu
here means the activity caused by the Sun i n the sleeping inactive world. H o w then is this mantra
used to invoke the Ketus? T h e utterance of the word Ketu here is sufficient, as the utterance of the
m a n y i a sounds i n the Ma.ntr?i sarnrwdevth etc. (Rgveda 10.9.4) is sufficient to propitiate Sanaiscara.
though the mantra itself refers to the water-deities, or the utterance o f the word mayura i n the
mantra, dmandrair intra haribhih etc. (Rgveda 3.45.1) is sufficient to propitiate Subrahmanya,
though the mantra refers to Indra, as also words like, Om, atha kalyana etc. cause auspiciousness by
their mere utterance. So, according to the Sdstras, Ketu refers only to the Dhumaketus, and Rahu
is both the nodes, the recent application of the term Ketu to the descending node being un-
warranted. Therefore, when the Dharmasdstras enjoin the eclipses caused by Rahu as sacred
periods, they take in both the ascending and the descending nodes, and the suggestion by some that
they do not take i n the descending node on the score of some un-informed people calling it Ketu
is wrong because what they call Ketu is really R a h u .

Moon's latitude

30. I f the M o o n lies b e t w e e n the H e a d a n d the T a i l it is n o r t h o f the ecliptic,

(i.e. its latitude is n o r t h ) . I f it lies b e t w e e n the T a i l a n d the H e a d it is s o u t h o f
the ecliptic, (i.e., l a t i t u d e is south).

3 1 . T h e latitude is a m a x i m u m e q u a l to 2 8 0 m i n u t e s w h e n the M o o n is 90
degrees distant f r o m e i t h e r H e a d o r T a i l . T h e latitude is to be f o u n d by p r o -
p o r t i o n , at o t h e r places, u s i n g the distance i n degrees f r o m H e a d o r T a i l ,
w h i c h e v e r is n e a r e r .

Example 14. The true Moon is rd. 2-7-0. Rdhu's Head is rd. 5-3-0. Find the latitude of the Moon.
The T a i l is H e a d rd. 6-0-0- = rd. 11-3-0. T h e M o o n is between T a i l and Head. Therefore the
latitude is south. T h e distance o f the M o o n from the nearer limb. H e a d is rd. 5-3-0 - rd. 2-7-0 =
rd. 2-26-0 - 86 degrees. For 90 the latitude is 280'. For 86 latitude is 86 x 280' -r 90 = 267 V 2 ' ,
South, as seen.

30a. B.^g^JKl^ 31b. B.^tfwf?T

b. A . B l . ' J ^ i l ^ . B . ^ c-d. A.%^q?ftfeqyiral^ 1;
c. A i . B i . ^ ; C . ^ ^ ^ : ^ i ^ B.?[^cq#af^qral^ I;
d. A . B . o f t % r a # ; C.f^Sgcrai%; C.^t<ct,^kird<:i1Mdl-!<:< I ;
70 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A 111.31

T h e rule is explained thus: T h e M o o n moves i n its own orbit, inclined to the ecliptic at an angle
equal to the m a x i m u m latitude. H i n d u astronomy assumes this motion to be on the ecliptic itself
and gives the Moon's longitude, because there is only a m a x i m u m difference of 7'. Between the
ascending and the descending nodes the orbit is north of the ecliptic and therefore the ladtude
measured on the great circle perpendicular to the ecliptic and passing through the M o o n , is north.
Between the descending node and the ascending, the orbit is south and the latitude is south. T h e
distance between the node and the M o o n , the latitude and the angle of inclination forming a spherical
triangle, we have : sin latitude = sin interval X sin m a x i m u m latitude. T h e m a x i m u m being small
and the latitude being generally less than this, sin latitude and sin m a x i m u m latitude are propor-
tional to the latitude and m a x i m u m latitude, and we have the formula, lat = max. lat X sin interval.
But the Paulisa takes the latitude proportionate to the interval itself and gives the rule.

We have to consider here whether the author intends that the latitude is to be found in propor-
tion to the actual degrees of the interval or the sine of the interval i n degrees. T h e triangle being
spherical, the correct thing would be to use the sine. B u t we have reason to think that the degrees
themselves are intended to be used i n the proportion, for i f the sine is to be used it must be men-
tioned. Also, this Siddhdnta uses only the proportion by degrees i n other places also, where propor-
tion by sines alone would be correct, as for e.g. in the solar eclipse, in correcting Rahu and in
calculating valana, i.e. transformation of direction (see V I . 2-4, 8). Therefore the original Paulisa
itself has instructed proportion by degrees, as being sufficiendy accurate, which the author reiterates
here. B u t i n computing the parallax (in time) i n the case of the solar eclipse the sine is used either
by the Paulisa itself, to avoid too much inaccuracy, or by the author V M to save the Siddhdnta from
ridicule. As for T S they say that the author intends here proportion only by sine, that being the
proper thing to do.

Another thing should be mentioned here. In using proportion by degrees, the m a x i m u m error
will be i n the neighbourhood of the nodes. W i t h the m a x i m u m latitude 280', the latitude for 13
interval would be 40 V 2 minutes, which would be incompatible with the formula for eclipses (vide
V I I . 5-6). Therefore it seems that the Siddhdnta, though knowing that proportion by sine is the
correct thing for latitudes, gives proportion by degrees for the sake o f ease of computation. O r by
taking liptdsatatrayendsitiih as the correct reading, which would make the m a x i m u m 380', the
incompatibility can be avoided. It may be argued that the error i n the latitude would be great in the
neighbourhood of the m a x i m u m . B u t this is only erring one side while some others err on the
other. T h e mean m a x i m u m latitude is 309'. If some like Ptolemy give 240', which is less by 70',
what is wrong i n taking that the Paulisa gives 380', which is greater by the same amount?

Now for the readings: In the fourth foot of verse 30, mu is corrected into su because murdt is
meaningless. In the third foot of the 31st verse two syllables are wanting and nd is added for pur-
poses of syntax. For the same reason, st-tama-nupd i n the fourth foot is corrected into si-tyd-nupd.
T h e correction of asiti into saptati by T S here is unwarranted, because it is not known what it was
in the original Paulisa. If this is done i n conformity with the Saura, why not i n conformity with the
Romaka, which gives 280', (see V I I I . 11), and which is nearer to the Paulisa?

Now follow six verses devoted to criticising the views of the Romaka, and an astronomer by name
Bhadravisnu, the intention o f the author being to create faith in his own work. (This was a custom
in those days, vide for instance the Brahma-Sphuta-Siddhdnta, Dusanddhydya and the Vatesvara
Siddhdnta, Madhyamd-dhikdra, Chapter X ) . In several places o f the text the readings are not clear
and we cannot be sure of what exactly the author intends to say, though the gist is clear, the matter
111.31 111. P A U U S A - S I D D H A N T A 71

not being scientific and amenable to intelligent guess. Still, as there is much to say here too, we are
dealing with these, unlike T S who have refrained from doing so.

Defect in Bhadravi^pu

32. I f the tithis a n d naksatras as seen f r o m o b s e r v a t i o n o f the sky agree w i t h

those c o m p u t e d a c c o r d i n g to the Nostra, t h e n the Nostra is c o r r e c t a n d fit to be
a c c e p t e d . It is n o t so i n the case o f B h a d r a v i s n u ' s w o r k ; still p e o p l e d o n o t t u r n
away f r o m that a n d f o l l o w the c o r r e c t Sdstras.

(This remark about the nature o f people is true even today).

For the sake of syntax the long dd has been shortened by us. Consistent with the idea intended,
the negative particle na has been added i n the fourth foot.

Defect in Padaditya

33. S u n r i s e o r sunset is n o t at the same m o m e n t i n a l l places o n the e a r t h ; (so

the place m u s t be m e n t i o n e d w h o s e s u n r i s e o r sunset is t a k e n as the e p o c h f o r
finding the days a n d d o i n g the c o m p u t a t i o n ) . B u t P a d a d i t y a , w h o has p l a c e d
the e p o c h at sunset, has n o t m e n t i o n e d the sunset o f w h i c h place he refers to.
(So his w o r k is faulty.)

There seems to be some error i n the last foot and we are not sure whether Padaditya is a person
as we have interpreted, or something else or whether the word is the same at all and not an nth
incarnation of the original.

32a. A.B.C.D.^ 33a. A.B.ng:

b. A . B l . T ^ ' ^ P l ^ ; B 2 . ' S l f c N i ^ . c. D.5WPT:
B . ^ d. B.MKIMH; D.wf^-T
c. B.^s^i^s^l A.^feiq^; B.^rtrfift^:; C . ^ r p f t ^
d. A.B.C.D.om.
 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A III.34
72

Defect in Romaka

34. T h i s ganita w o r k h a d d e v i a t e d f r o m the r i g h t p a t h h a n d e d d o w n by a

h i e r a r c h y o f g o o d teachers a n d the day o f its e x p o s u r e is n o t far distant.
W i t n e s s its d o w n f a l l i n 6 8 , 5 5 0 years!

T o agree with the fifth case in mdrgdt we have corrected upeta into apeta.
It may appear strange that the author calls 68,550 years as a not far distant date. B u t that
depends on the outlook of people, and the H i n d u mind, especially the old H i n d u mind may con-
sider even this as a comparatively short period.

O r this verse may belong to the criticism of the Romaka following immediately, strayed to this
place by the mistake of the scribe. In that case the first letter kha i n khavisayabhutdstarasaih should
be corrected as sva and the expression taken to mean "6855 years, by its own measure", in which
case the following is the meaning:-

" T h i s R o m a k a has not c o m e d o w n t h r o u g h a h i e r a r c h y o f g o o d teachers

because i t follows the T r o p i c a l y e a r i n s t e a d o f the t r a d i t i o n a l sidereal year. It
w i l l be e x p o s e d i n a p e r i o d o f 6 8 5 5 o f its o w n t r o p i c a l years, a n d p e o p l e w i l l
a b a n d o n it."

H o w this will happen and how the number 6855 can be arrived at almost exactly, will be shown
in explaining the next verse.

35. I f we a d o p t the days f r o m e p o c h r e s u l t i n g f r o m the t r o p i c a l year as

a d o p t e d by the Romaka a n d the S u n o r M o o n r e s u l t i n g t h e r e f r o m , we m u s t
accept P u n a r v a s u as the naksatra o f the f u l l m o o n o f the m o n t h o f C a i t r a ,
i n s t e a d o f the e x p e c t e d H a s t a o r C i t r a , P u n a r v a s u w h i c h is the naksatra o f
Caitra-Sukla-navami.

T h i s connection has been strongly established i n people's m i n d by the observance on Caifra-

navami as the birthday of L o r d Rama, hero of the Rdmdyana, well known as born i n the asterism
Punarvasu.

This is how this will happen: T h e months Caitra, Vaiksakha etc. are so called because the M o o n
at new moon i n these months is i n the vicinity of Citra, Visakha etc. T h u s , in a given month, the full
moon, i.e. the M o o n of the 15th tithi, is i n a given naksatra or nearby, so that the other tithis also are

34a. A.B.C.D.^RFrf^ a.b. A . B 1 . ^ ^ ^ ; B2.3. C . D . ^ W ^ *

b. B.^^31^^ A.o^citW; B . ^ W : C.^WT;
c. A . ^ f ^ j B . o m ^ D. AIdl
c. B2.MVWI^1

35a. A.B.C.D.Ttq^ d. D .
III.35 III. P./VULISA-SIDDHANTA 73

connected with particular wafoa/ra^. For e.g. as the M o o n of the fifteenth WA? i n Caitra is near Hasta
or Citra, the M o o n of navami, six days before, is near Punarvasu or Pusya, because the tithi, the day
and the naksatra, have approximately the same duration. In the same way, as the M o o n of the 15th
tithi of Sravana is near Sravana, the M o o n at Sravana Bahula Astami, eight days after that, is near
Rohini, which is also a thing well known. Now, when the months (synodic) are 'tied' to the naksatras
as mendoned, there will be this conformity. B u t the months are kept tied to the naksatras if the solar
year is sidereal, and not tropical like that of the Romaka, i.e. i f the solar year begins as in all other
Siddhdntas with a fixed point on the ecliptic like the first point of Mesa, and not the movable vernal
equinox, the so called First Point o f Aries, as i n the Romaka or the new Indian Rashtriya Panchang.
As the difference between the two points (i.e. the ayandmsa) increases, the above mentioned con-
formity will gradually decrease and when the ayandrnsa accumulates to 30 the full moon of the first
month will fall i n the Phalgunis instead o f near Citra and though called Caitra the first month will
really be 'Phalguna'. This non-conformity has already happened i n the Rashtriya Panchang, with the
ayandmsa more than twenty degrees now. If it accumulates to 6 naksatras, (i.e. 80) the full moon of
the first month, sdll called Caitra, will be i n the naksatras Punarvasu or Pusya, though the month
will really be Pausha. T h u s Punarvasu connected with the N a v a m i of the real Caitra will occur at
the full moon of the so called Caitra of the Romaka (or the Rashtriya Panchang). T h e Navami of the
new Caitra, occurring 6 days before the full moon day, will occur in Apabharani, 6 naksatras earlier.
When a situation thus arises contradictory to their belief, people will realise that the sidereal year
is the proper thing and discard the Romaka.

Incidentally we may mention that the same confusion will arise i n following the Rashtriya
Panchang also. O n e thing we want to say here. W e do not deny that the tropical year best suits civil
purposes, but a luni-solar calendar based on the sidereal year also will suit our religious purposes
best. Therefore they have to be kept apart. (A civil calendar based on the tropical year, we already
have i n the Christian Calendar we have been following, which is pracdcally worldwide. As for the
defects in it, the 'Calendar Reform' will take care of it, while i n making this reform we have taken
a step in isolating ourselves.) O n e thing could have prevented the confusion. If they had adopted
the seasonal-month-names like M a d h u , Madhava etc. preserved for us in the Vedas (vide III. 25)
instead of trying to fit in the sidereal luni-solar-calendar months, Caitra, Vaisakha, etc., this confusion
would have been avoided and they would not have simply added one more to the one hundred
contradictory Panchangs already extant.

T o continue: W e shall compute after how many years the exposure of the Romaka, as mentioned
by the author, would happen. T h e ayandrnsa was zero at the author's time, as we have shown on
several occasions. We must calculate when it accumulates to 6 naksatras. T h e Siddhdntas of the
author's time use a sidereal year of days, 365-15-31 nearly, and the tropical year of the Romaka is
days 365-14-48 (See V I I I . 1). Therefore, the Romaka year begins earlier by 43 vinddis, every year,
and this is equivalent to the rate of ayandmsa per annum, 42", nearly. l( ayandmsa to become 42"
takes one year, to become 6 naksatras it will take, 6 X 800 X 60 divided by 42 = 6857 years nearly.
It is this that is given by the author as 6855 in the previous verse explained.

36. A l l the i n j u n c t i o n s o f the V e d a s a n d Smrtis are based on the proper dme,

and by not performing the rites at those times the performer, especially a twice-born.
74 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A 111.36

acquires sin which is to be expiated. Therefore, a study o f this Romaka itself is to be

expiated.

How is that sin may accrue by not performing a rite at the dme enjoined by the Sdstras. But by
simply studying the Romaka, we cannot say one would also perform the rite at the improper time.
T h e Romaka may give the dme wrongly, but one may study it not for the sake o f using its time, but
for other purposes, as for instance to understand where it goes wrong, and expose its weakness to
others and save them, for which the man who studies even deserves merit. Let us understand that
these things, sin and merit, are subtle and cannot be known without a deep study of the Sdstras, and
if the author steeped in the Dharma Sdstras says a thing, let us accept it. T h e Vedas promise svarga
not only to the performer o f the yajna but also to one who knows how to perform it properly. We
frequently meet i n the Vedas the expression ya u cainam evam veda. T h e Veddnga Jyotisa says that
people who know astronomy know as it were the correct performance o f the sacrifices themselves,
yojyotisam veda sa veda yajndn and they go to svarga after establishing a long line o f progeny i n this
world.

Now, it stands to reason that i f the mere study o f a good thing gives merit, the mere study of a
bad thing brings sin. It is said that even association with bad characters and sinners bring sin, as also
doing sinful things even i n dreams. A s for the argument that the person even deserves merit for
intending to keep off people from the i m p r o p e r times, he does deserve it and will get it. B u t that
does not mean expiation is not called for. Contact with craftsmen may be necessary to keep the
temple idols i n form, but that does not mean that purificatory ceremonies need not be performed
for the idols o n that account. W e can say this m u c h that i n these cases the expiadon is light, like the
utterances of the Lord's N a m e , like ' K r s n a K r s n a , Siva Siva! W e should also take into consideration
the spirit i f the times i n which these statements were made.

37. T h e p e r s o n h a v i n g c o r r e c t k n o w l e d g e o f the S u n , M o o n , etc. gets

Dharma, w h i c h w i l l take care o f his f u t u r e w o r l d , Artha w h i c h w i l l e n s u r e his
p r o s p e r i t y i n this w o r l d a n d f a m e , w h i c h w i l l p e r p e t u a t e his m e m o r y . B u t the
b a d a s t r o n o m e r w h o m i s l e a d s p e o p l e by his w r i t i n g s w i l l c e r t a i n l y h a v e to go
to h e l l a n d d w e l l t h e r e .

36a. A . t ^ c-d. A . $*<irc|<l % ^ * l T ^ ^ < i ^*<"I*K:

b. B.?ildl Wl (A2.^:)
c. B 1 . 2 . ' S I R M . Al.^Tsrat

C. ^<MU|(^<lfe-4l %^Sl<lT<J^i
37. In A and B , ' ^ etc. occurs as the ^1fcf^H<^^de|iyi: I
second half o f the verse. It is put here as D . ^ ^ i ^ " ! ! ^ fesfl ^ ^>*pr?R52 [IT] ^
the first half to suit the sense,
a. D.'cTSSciT ^<u|-+K+l(^ iW^] %sMH<^^de<WI: ||
111.37 III. PAULIJ^A-SIDDHANTA 7.5

It must be noted here that when even the person with correct knowledge gets so much, the writer
will get more. It must also be noted that only the writer of bad astronomy goes to hell, not the
reader, whose sin is small.
In this verse there is a j u m b l i n g of words and phrases and induction into the text extraneous
words intended as commentary. T h e words, sphutaganitavid etc. seem to be the first half of the verse
because i n the first foot there are twelve and i n the second eighteen syllables. Therefore what
comes before that is the second half. In that, there are may syllables more than the required twenty-
seven. Selecting the required words alone, we have reconstructed the third and fourth foot.

For the observations o f K S. Shukla on 32-37 vis-a-vis N P , see his paper ' T h e PS o f V M (lyjIHS
9(1974) 62-76.

1. A.B.MlPeli^lRi^lTl:; C.D.?f^i

Thus ends Chapter Three entitled Taulisa-Siddhanta: Planetary

Computations etc' in the Paiicasiddhantika composed
by Varahamihira
 Chapter Four

THREE PROBLEMS TIME, PLACE AND DIRECTION

Introductory
Problems on T i m e , Place and Direction, involving spherical trigonometry, are dealt with in this
chapter. T h e first fifteen verses are devoted to the construction o f a table of sines. As this kind of
matter does not involve constants specific to any siddhdnta and is commfjnly found in all siddhdntas,
we cannot say which Siddhdnta this belongs to, Paulisa or Saura, the only two siddhdntas meant to be
expounded in detail by the author. Probably it is the author's own, meant for both, or taken from
both. T w o things point to this conclusion: In the part of the work dealing with the Saura, xiiz., chs.
I X , X , X I , X I I I , X I V , X V , X V I , and X V I I , no space is given to the sine tables, though required, and
to the problems dealt with here, and therefore i f these are not meant for Saura, it would be imperfect
though almost full. O n the other hand, certain redundant and crude rules point to this chapter's
connection with the Paulisa, as also its position i n the chapter distribution in the PS text.

Table of R Sines
1. T a k e the c i r c u m f e r e n c e as m e a s u r e d i n 360 units, square it, take the tenth
p a r t o f the square, a n d f i n d its square root. T h e result is the d i a m e t e r o f the
circle i n the units t a k e n . W e assume the d i a m e t e r to be 4 , (i.e., 2 4 0 ' ) a n d
h e r e u n d e r give the t a b u l a r sines o f angles f o r 3 4 5 ' i n t e r v a l .

T h e rule is: diameter = Vcircumference^/10. It comes to this: d = c/V 10. T h e formula, d = c/n is
w e l l k n o w n , a n d t h e a u t h o r h a s t a k e n V 10 as an approximation for n which is incommensurable
and usuallyrepresented by the approximate values, 22/7, 355/133, 3.1416 etc. Vhe Surya Siddhdnta
toogivesVlO as the value of n in its instruction to find the circumference of the earth from its
diameter (1.59.): "The earth's diameter is \&00yojanas. Square this, multiply by 10, and find the
square root. This is the earth's circumference." By thus taking VTO for n, an error of about 0.0067%
results, and for a circumference of 21,600', we get the radius 3415', instead of the well-known
34-38'. B u t it must be mentioned here that this error does not affect the computation of the sines

la-b. A.B.^^Pf c. A . B . dR^Wliag^ ( B . '^)

b. A.l5r^T: d. A.'H*<?<-M; B.y+cl. A.B.^nW5
IV.2 IV, T H R E E P R O B L E M S 77

mentioned in the succeeding verses, because it can be shown that the author derives the sines from
a correct formula, (not dependent on this wrong ratio of the diameter to the circumference), based
on 120' as the radius of the circle. If he had depended on the wrong value, the first tabular sine,
i.e. sin 3 45' would be 7' 54", (being the 96th part of the circumference, where the sine is indistin-
guishable from the arc), and not the correct 7' 51" as given by the author.

Taking the diameter as 4, and thereby the m a x i m u m sine (i.e. the radius) as 120', is arbitrary.
In general, the Siddhdntas give the m a x i m u m sine, 3438', as arrived at from taking the circumfer-
ence as 360 or 21600'. T h e Vdkyakarana makes it 43. In actual work, the sines enter only as a ratio
to the maximum sine, and therefore no harm, will result by taking these different m a x i m u m sines.

T S and N P have not understood the meaning of the second half of the verse, and mis-interpret
armacatuskam as quadrant.

gjc|ch<ui) A"4l-n || ^

2. T h e square o f the r a d i u s , (i.e. 14,400), is called dhruva (karani), (literally,

T i x e d I r r a t i o n a l ' ) . T h e f o u r t h p a r t o f it, (i.e. 3600), is the karani (Irrational)
related to the first s i g n , (or 3 0 ) . Dhruvakaranl minus the karani o f M e s a , (i.e.
14,400 - 3 6 0 0 = 10,800), is the kararii o f t w o signs, (or 60). T h e square r o o t
o f a karani is the t a b u l a r sine.

Being square of tabular sines given in minutes, the karanis are squares of minutes, which is their
peculiarity as given by the author, though this is not mentioned explicitly. T h e other well-known
characteristic of a karani, viz. irrationality, is found i n all karanis except 14,400 and 3600, though
the author calls these also karanis i n a general way.

In modern terminology the word sine used i n connection with the angle is defined thus:

Fig. IV. l-a

In the right angled triangle, (fig. l-a), sine Z. B = A C / A B , o r s i n e Z_ A = B C / A B , i.e. as the ratio of
the opposite side to the hypotenuse. In tabulating the sines, the hypotenuse is taken as unity, and
the ratio expressed as a decimal fraction.

2a. A . B . f ^ ^ o ; C . D . f f i T ^ " c. B 1 . 3 . % * n ; B 3 . ^
b. A.B.offcn. A . B . f ? l t W : m . A.B.^?l?tTO d. A . ^ ^ B . ^ 1
78 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV.2

T h e ancients however expressed the sines in minutes-length or, more accurately, in minutes and
seconds-lengths, the m a x i m u m sine called Trijya (meaning 'the sine of three signs', i.e. 90), occur-
ring separately in the work to make up the ratio. T h i s is the way in which they conceived the sine
(meaning 'bow-string' from its Sanskrit equivalent imjmj, synonymous with731a).

In Fig. 1-b. A3 E F3 D is the circumference of the circle, centre B . A part of the circumference like
A D F , A , D F , , etc. is called dhanus (literally, 'bow') or arc.

Fig, IV. I-b

T h e straight lines A C F , A , C | F , , etc. forming the 'bow-strings' o f the respective 'bows' are thejyds
or full sines. B u t i n actual practice, the halves of the full sines A C , A | C | , etc. above are used with
the name of 'sines', with respect to the half-bows or arcs, A D , A , D , , etc. Because the arcs A D etc.
are as the angles A B D etc., the sines A C etc. are spoken of with respect to the angles A B D (= A B C )
etc. also. Thus, A C is the sine of L A B D o r a r c A D , AiC, is the sine of L A , B D o r a r c A | D | a n d s o o n . l t
is this connection of the sine with the arc that has given it the nature of a length, which is expressed
in minutes and seconds on account of the connection of the arc with the angle at the centre. It may
be mentioned here that C D , C , D , CgD etc., appearing like the arrows on the respective bow-strings,
are called iara (meaning 'arrow').

If A j B D is a right angle, i.e. three signs, then, obviously, A3B is the sign of this angle, i.e. it is the
sine o f three signs, and therefore called trijya. Its length is clearly half the diameter A 3 B F 3 , i.e. the
radius, equal to 120'.

Now, let the angle A B D be equal to one sign, i.e. 30. A B D = D B F = 30..-. L A B F = 60. A B = B E ,
being radii..-. L B A F = L B F A = 60. Thus A B F is an equilateral triangle, and AF = A B = 120'..-. A C
= A F / 2 = 60'. T h u s sine 30 = 60'. Its, karani is its square, viz. (60')^ = 3600, the fozranf of Mesa as
mentioned by the text.
T h e n , let L AgBD be equal two signs, or 60. A , B D = DBF., = 60. .-. C^ is a right angle. So the
karani of 2 signs = A ^ C / = AjB^ - B C / = A.,B' - A C ^ (. A A^B Cj = A B A G ) , = 120' - 6 0 ' =
10,800, A j B being the radius. T h i s also agrees with what the text says. (The square root of 10800
minutes, i.e. 103' 55", is the sine of 2 signs, which agrees with the value given in the table.)
 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 79

Incidentally, we shall derive the karani and sine of one and a half signs, i.e. 45, mentioned in
verse 4. Let A , B D be equal to 45. A = 45, and Z_ C is a right angle. .-. A , C = C , B . But, A , B '
= A , C / + C | B - = 2 A , C / . . - . A | C r ' = I20'/2 = 14400/2 = 7200 = they^aram of one and a half signs
as mentioned in the text. Its root, 84'51", is sine 45, agreeing with what is given in the tables.

3-5. T h e other tabular sines, (i.e. sine 3 45', sin 7 30' etc. other than the four
mentioned of the total 24) are formed successively in the following manner:
Let the angle or arc for which the sine is required be 0.

I. Sin'0 = iA[sin'20 + (120 - sin(90 - 20)}']

II. Sin'0 = 60 X {120' - sin (90 - 20)}, where the sines are i n minutes etc. O f the
24 sines, the^aranf o f the nth sine = 14400 - the Aaranf o f the (24 - n)th sine. 7200
is the karani o f one and a half signs, i.e. 45.

Thus, as karanis 8, 12, and 16 are known, those o f their halves etc. and (24 - halves) etc. can be
found successively. T h u s all the sines from 1 to 24 can be found. O f the two formulae, the first is
suited to geometrical representation, and the second to computadon.

Example 1. Given the 8th kararii (i.e. of 30) 3600 and its sine 60', the 16th karani (i.e. of 60) 10800, and
its sine 103' 53".33,find the 4th and 20th karanis and sines, using each of the two formulae.

The desired sine is the 4th, i.e. o f 4 X 3 4 5 ' = 15. 20 = 30, 90 - 20 = 60.

4a. A.m^; B.^; CD.

3a. A.?3ll. A.B.C.D.^gDm
A.B.C.D.fW3qi
b. A . M<l4l^^; B . M < M ^ ^ ; C.D.^WtrT"
b. A.cI5^. B . 1 ^
A.C.D.^!pr#n; B.^uil^lwi
d. A.-^;B1.2.^?^;B3.^W
c. A . B . ^ ^ T R N T O M ; ( B . o m ^ ; B2.<"!);
C . D . ^ a | l ^ 3 ^ 3 . A.farf^jgrP:
C D . [t5r5qTci^^i5PTf] f l
5a. A.C^^iJ^lfe'JuH ( C . ^ )
d. A.TO^; B . ^ ^
b. B 3 . ^ A.B.^RF5!n
c. A.^^nrnft; B . ^ ^
C f e ' j U M I ' f e y ' l l ^ : ; D.fl^CT^S] ^55[oft
d. B . m A.B.^RTiT7tTO
80 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 5

I. T h e 4th karani = V4 [sin' 30 + (120 - sin 60)']

= 1/4 [60' + (120 - 103' 55".33)']
= i/4[3600 + (I6'4".67)']
= 1/4 (3600 + 258 97/144)
= 1/4 (3858 97/144) = 964 385/576
.-.the fourth sine, i.e. sine 15 = V964 385/576 = 3 1 ' 4"

II. T h e 4th karani = 60 (120 - sin 60)

= 6 0 ' ( 1 2 0 ' - 103'55".33)
= 60' X 16' 4".67 = 964 385/576
F r o m this, sin 15 = V964 385/576 as before = 3 1 ' 4"
We shall prove the first formula geometrically, and
derive the second from the first.

Fig. IV. 2

In Fig. 2, F B D = 0, and D F is its arc of which the sine wanted is D E .

D E ' = the wanted karani (i.e. sine' 0). D F A = 2 D F .

.-. D E = V 2 D A . . - . s i n ' 0 = D E ' = 1 / 4 D A ' = V 4 ( A C ' + C D ' ) .
Now, . A C = sine 2 arc F D = sin 20, A C ' = s i n ' 20; and . C D ' = ( B D - B C ) ' = ( B D - A G ) ' =
[120' - sin (90 - 20)', sin'0 = V4 ( A C ' + C D ' )
= 1/4 [sin' 20 + {120' - sin (90 - 20)}']

F r o m this, sin0 = Vsin'0.

F r o m I, we can derive II thus:

1/4 [sin' 20 + {120' - sin (90 - 20)}']
= 1/4 {sin' 20 + 120' + s i n ' (90 - 20) - 2 X 120 X sin (90 - 20)}
= 1/4 {120' + 120' - 2 X 120 X sin (90 - 20)}

(. s i n ' 20 + s i n ' (90 - 20) = s i n ' 20 + C o s ' 20 = radius')

9 V 1 90'

= ^ {120' - sin (90 - 20)}

= 60' {120' - sin (90 - 20)}

Now, of T S , Thibaut alone proves the formula, while Sud. Dvivedi uses it. T h e form of the first
formula given by them differs from that given by us, and is as foUows:-
sin'0 = (1/2 sin'20) + [1/2 {120' - sin (90 - 20)}']
T h o u g h their formula is correct, it entails more work, and to give the formula in this form they have
made many unwarranted changes i n the already correct readings. We have made only one correc-
tion, and that grammatical, for the sake of syntax, viz. dhanurdvigunapaddt into dhanurdvigunam
paddt, which entails the occurrence o f an extra syllable, which can be explained, as before, by rules
of prosody. O r , let the reading hesese tviste dhanurdvi-gunam paddt projjhya etc.

Now follow six verses giving the sines, computed by the author himself.
IV. 9 IV. I H R E E PROBLEMS 81

' w r g * ' ' w ^ ' f ^ '

6-7. T h e o t h e r sines are the f o l l o w i n g : I n the first s i g n , the m i n u t e s parts are

successively 7, 15, 20 + 3, 20 + 11, 20 + 18, 5 X 9,50 + 3, a n d 60. T h e seconds,
respectively, are: 50 + 1, 5 X 8, 25, 4, 30 + 4, 56, 5 a n d 0.

T h u s we have for the first sign

Sine no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Arc or
3 45' 7 30' iri5' 150' 18 15' 2230' 2615' 30 0'
angle

Sine 7'51" 15'40" 23'25" 31'4" 38'34" 45'56" 53'5" 60' 0"

^'^-M^^c)l(1?riT)TTf?ffir'R4fldchl II 6

8-9. Of the sines i n the s e c o n d s i g n , the m i n u t e s parts t a k i n g the i n c r e m e n t s

i n the c u r r e n t s i g n a l o n e , are, successively, 6, 13, 20 1, 3 X 8, 30 -I- 0, 30 -I-
5, 30 -I- 9, a n d 30 + 13. T h e respective seconds are: 40, 3, 7, 50 + 1, 13, 12,
60 - 14, a n d 60 - 5.

6a. A . B . ? 1 ^ ; C . D . ^ ^ ^ : . B . ^ H ^ c. A.!^i<^N<
b. A.f^att?lRT:; B.of^ait^:. B.^afl?TT: c-d. A . B . ^ ^ C B . H ) WTfPT: ( A . o m f ^ : )
c. A.B.-?Rnt
7a. B . ^ ^ ^ d. B.f?R1TSBT(B3.ft)
b. B.c.D.^raiwra 9a. B 2 . ^ ^ . B1.2.?W
c. B.-^cjI^i^'*! b. A l . g r i M . A.B.'^+filid 'ifrl; C.'S**lld^'ldl;
d. A.^HsrarosTT:
c. A.B.C.^ffetTI; C.ts#lK?rafe
8a. B.^lS3Rl. A.B.^?ter1^; c.D.?;;^Nfil^
d. A . B . ^ ; C.^i^Hlt:
b. B . f ^ . C . ' J I S ^ S ^ : . A . t ^
82 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 11

A d d i n g the minutes and seconds, and 60' for the end o f the first sign, the sines are:-

Sine no. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Arc or
3345' 37 30' 41 15' 45 0' 4845' 52 30' 56 15' 60 Of
angle
It.

Sine 66' 40" 73'3" 79' 7" 84' 5:1" 90' 13" 95'12" 99' 46" 103'55"

10-11. O f the sine i n c r e m e n t s g o n e i n the t h i r d sign, above the second, the

m i n u t e s are: 3, 6 , 9 , 10 + 2, 10 + 3 , 1 0 + 5, 10 -1-5, a n d 10 -I- 6. T h e respective
seconds are: 6 0 - 18, 6 0 - 3, 6 0 - 1 8 , 0 , 5 0 - 3 , 4 , 5 0 - 1, a n d 5. N e x t f o l l o w
the sine i n t e r v a l s .

A d d i n g the given minutes and seconds to 103' 55" the sine o f 2 signs, we have:

Sine no. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

A r c or
6345' 67 30' 7ri5' 75 0' 7845' 8230' 8615' 90 0'
angle

Sine 107'37" 110'52" 113'37" 115'55" 117'42" 118-59" 119'44" 120'0"

In one or two places we have corrected the corrupt readings, having in view what exactly should
be the number as found by computation. B u t T S have made corrections that give wrong values for
the already correct values. For e.g. the fourteenth sine, 95' 12" given by the text is correct, while
they make it 95' 13" by an unwarranted change, giving it an unlikely form. T h e 16th sine, 103' 55"
given by the text is correct, but they make it 103' 56" so that i n every sine of the third sign, 17-24,

10a. A.B.C.D.iJ,"H<i<^'hK!<l c. D.^lR^kll:. A . B . D . f t ^ s q ; C . f t ' ^

a-b. A . B . ^ a 1 | ; C . o ^ ^ l | { ^ . D . o ^ ^ r i d. B.ilSflWdl; C.<IV<lTld1
lib. A.^fg^. B.iR#^|
b. A.B.^35P35ni<^^d<til; C . D . ^ M N M I : | d. B l . 2 . ^ ; B 3 . ^ . A . ^ ^ :
IV. 14 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 83

there is one second more. B y this mistake the 24th, i.e. the radius, has become 120' 1", and even
this obvious mistake they have failed to note.
T h e promised sine-mtervals are here given:

(ir)ravi(dfe(c)4; II

'^jlliu|<j,d[u!c(^i^^c|ehf^^s^fvlfolc^^t; ||

12. O f the intervals the minute parts are, in the first sign, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, 7,6;
in the second sign: 6 , 6 , 6 , 5 , 5 , 4 , 4 , 4 ; and in the third sign, 3 , 3 , 2 , 2 , 1 , 1,0,0.
13-14. T h e seconds in the first sign are, 50 + 1, 50 - 1, 50 - 5, 50 - 11, 30,
22, 9, (and here is a break resulting in the loss of the 4th foot of the 13th
verse and the first two feet with 4 mdtrds of the 3rd foot of the 14th verse. From
the values of the sines we can compute that the seconds in the 8th interval must
be 55, which must have been given in the missing part. By examining the
remaining part we can construct the meaning of this verse thus). T h e seconds
of the intervals in the second sign are, respectively 10 x (4, 2, 0, 4, 2, 5, 3, 0)
+ (0, 3, 4, 4, 2, 9, 4, 9), added each to each.
T S have not been able to see that i n what is left o f the 14th verse, the digits i n the unit places o f
the eight numbers giving the seconds of the intervals o f the second sign are given. This is because
they have made mistakes in the 14th and 16th sines resulting in an error o f -f- 1" i n the 14th interval,
1" i n the 15th and -1-1" again i n the 16th. This has prevented them from finding the correct
values by comparison, so that they make many changes i n the readings here, saying that the text is
very corrupt, here. It may be seen that not a single word is wrong here.

12a. A.-i^H^lv^; B.-^rql^

to 14c. D suggests for 13d [trai^^qq:^^?pn]
b. A.^PT^; B . W r a ^ ; . C . ^ i^:) W
C. indicates the gap by dots as done by
us. D suggests for 14:
D.faifrisif^
^ W ] ! F [<5f^=]
c. A . f t l f e q f c l ^ : ; B.WR^
f?pfe [f|[] ^TO^r [1^] <i^*j^rviRsiwi1[?n:]
d. C.^lfsPr^. A - B . ^ | ; C . ^ D . ^ [ 1 ]
13a. A.rc|-dl|vid
d. A . ^
b. B l . - ^ ; B 2 . ^ ;
Bl.2.^; B 2 . ^
Al.BI.'fe^^
c. A l . B 2 . f l l ^
13d. A . B . U n i n d i c a t e d g a p o f ISd.upto^^JT of 14c.

t
84 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A IV. 15

15. T h e seconds of the intervals in the third sign, are, 3 x 14, 3 x 5, 3 x 15,
3 X 6,5 X 8 + 7, 17,9 X 5 and 16.

T h e intervals can be got by deducting the previous sines from the succeeding ones, and com-
pared with the author's concern for correctness, they are correct. It is to be noted that the intervals
of T S also come correct i n the third sign, because there is a uniform error of 1" in all sines. T h e
intervals are as tabulated:

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Int. 7'51" 7'49" 7'45" 7'39" 7' 30" 7' 22" 7'9"

No. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Int. 6' 55" 6' 40" 6' 23" 6'4" 5' 44" 5'22" 4' 59" 4' 34"

No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Int. 4'9" 3'42" 3' 15" 2'45" 2' 18" I'47" 1'17" 0' 45"

N o . 24
Int.O' 16"

These intervals are useful for interpolation. T h e method of interpolation has not been given by
the author, as being obvious. T h e intervals being increments in the series for successive increments
in the arcs (or angles) o f 3 45', we can find the value for what is left over after taking the tabular
value, by proportion, and adding it to the tabular value find the value wanted, whether it is arc for
sine, or sine for arc.

Further, the author has given the sines o f arcs upto 3 signs, as usually given in tables. B u t the
method to compute the sines of arcs greater than three signs, has not been mendoned by him.
We shall find a method. T h e circle is divided into four quadrants (Fig. 3), A O B , B O C , C O D and
D O A , each quadrant being three signs. Arcs A E = H C = C K = O A , from which their sines, E F =
H J = J K = G F . But, since the sines increase i n the first quadrant from O at A to B O (= 120') and
then decrease i n the second quadrant from 120' to O at C and again increase i n the third quadrant
to D O (= 120') and then again decrease in the fourth quadrant to O at A , sine A E = sine A H = sine

15a. B.ylH(=(N<4. A.om'?5 c. B.<5)HM^+^

b. B.f'I'j'JII M^na"* d. A . (i.e. on 5)
 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 85

o\ D

Fig. IV. 3

A K = sine A G (neglecting the first sign) because, E F , H J , J K , G F , are all equal, as already men-
doned. Therefore, for an arc or angle in the second quadrant, (3 to 6 signs), deduct it from six
signs and get the sine of the remainder. For that i n the third quadrant, (6 to 9 signs), deduct six
signs and find the sine of the remainder. F o r that i n the fourth quadrant, deduct it from twelve
signs and find the sine of the remainder.
Example 2 (a). Find the sine of the arc or angle equal to 4 signs.
It is in the second quadrant. Therefore, sine 4 signs = sine 6 signs - 4 signs = sine 2 signs = 1 0 3 '
55".

Example 2 (b). Find the sine of signs 7-11-15.

This is in the third quadrant. Therefore sine of sign 7-11-15 = sine (7-11-15 - 6-0-0) = sine 1-11-
15 - 79' 7".

Example 2 (c). Find the sine of signs 9-15-0.

This is in the 4th quadrant. Therefore sine of signs 9-15-0 = sine (12 signs sign 9-15-0) = sine
2-15-0= 115'55".

Declination
From here to the end of the chapter, problems based on the solution of spherical triangles are
dealt with, being problems involving position, time and direction. A s a preliminary, the declina-
tion of the Sun and the M o o n are required, which are given first.

Stellar sphere (Bhagola)

T h e ancient astronomers speak of three spheres, the Terrestrial sphere or Earth sphere on
which we live, the Stellar sphere or the Sphere o f the stars, and the Sky sphere or the Sphere of the
sky. We shall describe the terrestrial sphere i n connection with the Saura chap. X I I I - X V . O f the
other two, we shall now describe the stellar sphere, a knowledge of which is immediately required.
It is the apparent sphere on which the stars appear to be fixed, and form a frame of reference for
86 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 15

the motion o f bodies like the Sun, M o o n , planets etc. Actually the stars are at widely different dis-
tances from us and are moving i n various directions at speeds of several miles per hour. But with
all this they appear to be, and can be represented, as being fixed on a sphere, because of their
enormous distances from us, so much so that we are pracdcally viewing the same sphere as people
several generations ago did. But the ancients believed that the stars were luminous bodies fixed on
the under-surface of a sphere of radius only sixty times that o f the orbit of the Sun (actually the
earth) r o u n d the earth, with the centre o f the sphere at the earth's centre. T h i s sphere seems to be
rotating about once a day, by the actual rotation of the earth, about once a day.

NP

/ S

A
o

SP
Fig. IV. 4

O n this sphere (Fig. 4) there is an important great-circle called the ecliptic {Krdnti-vrtta) (EC),
marked by the twenty-seven asterisms, Asvini etc., on which the Sun (S) moves, (actually appears
to move on account o f the motion o f the earth), completing a revolution once a year. T h e M o o n
and the planets move in orbits inclined to the ecliptic at small angles. T h e i r longitudes are reckoned
along the eclipdc from a fixed point called the first point of Mesa or A s v i n i . Latitudes are measured
on secondaries to the great circle, meeting at a point called the pole of the ecliptic {Kadamba).
Another great circle called the Celestial Equator ( A O B ) cuts the ecliptic at r, called the First point
of Aries or Vernal Equinox point, which, instead of being fixed, has a slow westward motion on the
ecliptic. A t the period of the authors of the first Siddhdntas, this point coincided with the first point
of Mesa, this being the reason why that particular point was taken by them for reckoning from. T h e
angle between the two great circles (SrR) is called the Obliquity of the echptic. It was about 24 at
the time of Varahamihira, and now it is about 23 27'. T h e declination (SR,) {Krdnti) of a body like
the Sun, is measured along the secondary passing through the body, (NPSRSP,) called the Declina-
tion circle, all the secondaries meeting at the celestial poles, the poles o f the stellar sphere, (SPNP),
on the axis j o i n i n g which the sphere apparently rotates.

T h e declination is found by solving the spherical right angled triangle SrR. Spherical triangles
were in general solved by the H i n d u astronomers using the properties of plane right angled triangles
formed by the sections o f the sphere along the great circle arcs forming the spherical triangle (The
IV. 16 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 87

Greeks solved them by an extension o f Manelau's T h e o r e m to figures on the sphere.) W e shall con-
tent ourselves with giving the formulae for solution and refer to them whenever necessary by way
of proof.

Let A B C (fig. 5) be a spherical triangle, right angled at C , and R the radius of the sphere.
I. Cos A B = Cos A C X Cos B C ^ R
II. sin B C = sin A B x sin A R
III. Cos A = R X Cos A B . sin A C / s i n A B . Cos A C
IV. Cos A = Cos B C X sin B ^ R
V. C o s A B = R. Cos A X C o s B / ( s i n A X s i n B )

These, together with the general identides, cos0 = sin

(90 - 0), s i n ' 0 + C o s ' 0 = 1 , will suffice for explaining the
formulae occurring i n the text.
^ Fig. IV. 5

Declination of the Sun and the M o o n

16. T h e sine o f S u n ' s d e c l i n a t i o n is f o u n d b y m u l t i p l y i n g the sine o f its

l o n g i t u d e b y 61 a n d d i v i d i n g by 150. Its arc is the d e c l i n a t i o n . T h e d e c l i n a t i o n
o f the M o o n f o u n d t h u s is the m e a n d e c l i n a t i o n . Its t r u e d e c l i n a t i o n is the
m e a n d e c l i n a t i o n plus l a t i t u d e . T h e intervals o f d e c l i n a t i o n s f o r intervals o f
q u a r t e r signs are g i v e n ( i n the n e x t t w o verses, 17-18).

T h i s is the formula: sin dec. = sin sayana long, x 61/150. F r o m this the arc forming the declina-
don is found by using the tables, and then the true declination o f the M o o n , using this. It must be
noted that when the longitude reckoned from r (i.e. sayana long.) is within 6 signs, the declination
is N o r t h , and when more than 6 signs it is South. I n the case of the M o o n , if the declination and the
latitude are o f the same direction they should be added to get the true declination. If they are of
different directions, their difference is the true declinadon, its direction being that o f the greater.
T h e author has not mentioned this because it is obvious.

Example 3 (a). Find the maximum declination of the Sun.

Obviously, the m a x i m u m sine o f the Sun's longitude (i.e. when the S u n is 3 signs or 9 signs) will
give the m a x i m u m declinadon. It is therefore given by sin dec. = 120' X 61 ^ 150 =48' 48". Its arc,
24 is the m a x i m u m declination.

I6a. A.^ft^IHJl^o; B . # ^ a n - ^ ; C . ^ a n s s i ^ D . [yi^rdkll]. A.B.^5rara:; C.^frora:;

B.Hms^. B.^mm; A.c.D.^ramr.-
b. A . ^ l ^ : ^ ; B . ^ ^ ^ ; C . ^ i ^ i f e ; d. A . B . C . D . d<q*M. A . C . ^ # ^ :
88 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 17

Example 3 (b). Sdyana Sun is rdsi 4-7-30. Find its declination.

Sin 4' 7 30' = Sin (6^-0-0 - 4^-7-30) = sin r-22-30 = 95' 12".
Sin Declination = 95' 12" X (60 + 1) -r 150 = 95' 12" X (2/5 + 2/5 x 60) = 38' 5" + 38" = 38' 43".
Its arc, 18 50', is the declination. Since the sdyana Sun is within 6 rdsis, the declination is north.
Example 3 (c). The sdyana Moon is 9'00'. Its latitude is 4N. Find its declination.
Thesdyana longitude being 9'^0 0', the mean declination is the m a x i m u m , south, i.e. 24S. Its lat.
is 4N, i.e. of opposite direction..-. the true declination is 24 - 4 = 20 S. South because South is
greater.
The author uses the word kdsthd to signify declination, which is uncommon. Sometimes this word
itself is used to mean sine declination.
The rule for sin declination is explained thus: Our siddhdntas take the m a x i m u m declination to
be 24. As the m a x i m u n declination occurs when thesdyana longitude is 3 signs, the angle between
the ecliptic and the celestial equator (i.e. the obliquity o f the ecliptic) also is 24. In Fig. 5, take A B
and A C as parts of the ecliptic and celestial equator. T h e n , A = 24 and A B is thesdyana longitude.
B C is the declination wanted. B y formula II under the present verse, sin dec. = long, x sin 24 -H
120'. B u t sin 24 -f- 120' = 48' 4 8 " 120' = 61/150. Hence,sindec = sin long X (60 ^ 1)/150, which
is the given rule.

Now for the direction: See F i g . 4. A t r the Sun moving along the ecliptic crosses the celesdal
equator, and passes from South to N o r t h . A s great circles bisect one another, till the longitude is 6
sings it moves north o f the celestial equator, for which declinations are reckoned, and then moves
south o f it. Therefore for longitude 0 to 6 rdsis, the declination is N o r t h , and for longitude 6 to 12
rdsis, it is South.

As the M o o n and other planets move i n their own orbits inclined to the ecliptic, the declinadons
computed from their longitudes reckoned along the ecliptic are only approximate. T o get correct
declinations, their distances north or south from the ecliptic points, called their 'latitudes', should
be combined i n the proper manner as instructed. But the result by thus adding or subtracting will
be only approximate, because the latitudes are directed towards the pole o f the eclipdc (Kadamba),
while the declinations are directed towards the Celestial Pole. T h e m a x i m u m error that can occur
thus is about 24'. C o m b i n e d with the error i n latitude due to other factors like proportion by
degrees of the argument o f latitude (advocated by the Paulisa) instead of the sine etc., the error will
be considerable.

Now, for the readings. F o r syntactical purposes, and getting the proper meaning, satdrmsdssaikd
has been corrected as satdmsaghnaikd, sastidinesa as sastirdinesa, kdsthdnta as kdsthd jyd, apakramardsi
as apakramo rdsi andpddenyah as pddebhyah. As for T S , they have not touched this verse and the next
two, saying, i n so many words, that they cannot interpret them. NP's interpretation of the three
verses has also been affected by the highly corrupt text.
I V . 18 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 89

17-18. T h e ( p r o m i s e d ) intervals o f d e c l i n a t i o n s i n m i n u t e s for intervals o f

quarter-signs, are, i n S a y a n a M e s a : 180 -I- 3, 180 + 0, 180 - 5, 180 - 14, i n
S a y a n a V r s a b h a , 100 + 4 x 14, 100 + 4 x 11, 100 -I- 4 X 7, 100 + 4 x l , a n d
i n S a y a n a M i t h u n a , 9 0 , 6 3 , 4 0 a n d 11. ( T h u s the intervals are 183, 180, 175,
166, 156, 144, 128, 1 0 4 , 9 0 , 6 3 , 4 0 , 11.) T h e s e are to be a d d e d successively to
get the d e c l i n a t i o n s f r o m M e s a (Aries) to M i t h u n a ( G e m i n i ) . T h e n f r o m K a r -
kataka ( C a n c e r ) to K a n y a ( V i r g o ) , these s h o u l d be d e d u c t e d i n the reverse
o r d e r , u n t i l at the e n d o f K a n y a , the d e c l i n a t i o n is z e r o . T h e s e d e c l i n a t i o n s
f r o m M e s a to the e n d o f K a n y a are n o r t h . T h e n f r o m T u l a ( L i b r a ) to the e n d
o f D h a n u s (Sagittarius), the s o u t h d e c l i n a t i o n s increase i n the g i v e n o r d e r ,
a n d f r o m M a k a r a ( C a p r i c o r n ) to M i n a (Pisces) the s o u t h d e c l i n a t i o n s
decrease i n the reverse o r d e r , u n t i l at the e n d o f M i n a the d e c l i n a t i o n is z e r o
again.)

Example 4. Find the declination of the ecliptic point ending (Sdyana) Capricorn.
T h e end of Capricorn is rdsi lO-O-O. T h i s falls between rdsis 6 and 12..-. T h e declinauon is south.
T h e declination ending Sagittarius (i.e. beginning Capricorn) is 24 S. T h e dechnation at the end
of Capricorn is 24 - 11' - 40' - 63' - 90' = 24 - 3 24' = 20 36'S.
T h e author has perhaps computed the declination by applying the formula of verses 16 and got
the intervals by deducting the previous from the next. O r , these verses are taken in toto from the
original Paulisa and given here, for there are small differences from the computed values. O r , the
differences are scribal errors. Both are given hereunder for comparison:

Degrees 0 7V2 15 22'/^ 30 371/2 45

Decli-
nations by 0 183 363 537 704 860 1003
formula

Intervals 183 180 174 167 156 143 127

Given
183 180 175 166 156 144 128
intervals

Decli-
0 183 363 538 704 860 1004
nations

17a. A.B.C.-?l?W#a;D.TTOtf^
b. A.^?lf^W^f)ftfSPmfli; 18a. B . ^
B . <;vifeiJ^iiy*i(iik-!i ( B l . T ) b. B . H a p l o g r a p h i c a l o m . ^ a
C. ^feraH?Pfqf^?TR^ I [om. t d ' ^ a i n verse 19]
D . <5lBl<i*liHRi|M-JH|JJ, I <llilTR*i<5; C.ftflRft
c. A.B.c."nf^^q3*ragpr-; D . - n f ^ n i g q ^ c. D.*^'<lfedl 'ld<J<i'|
d. A . B . C . ^ ^ a ^ : ; D . ^ M 1^:. B . ^ d. c.g^nf^q^
 90 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 19

Degrees 52>/2 60 67'/2 75 821/2 90

Decli-
nations by 1130 1237 1324 1388 1427 1440
formula

Intervals 107 87 64 39 13

Given
104 90 63 40 11
intervals

Decli-
1132 1236 1326 1389 1429 1440
nations

Bearing the need for agreement in mind, the syllables ka, tu have been inserted in verse 17 to
make up for deficiency i n syllables; dsit ta has been corrected into asityd for the sake of sense, as also
desastrisa into mese trikha, manundm into manunam, and gavise into gavi; and ntare has been corrected
into nte to delete one syllable, and also make the word sensible.

In the manuscripts, aher catvdrimsacchivdsca in the 18th verse, the end of the 19th, ydmyottare kdrye
and the beginning of the 20th, Visuvaddina(? va)samadhye have strayed. O n l y after these is found the
end of the 18th, mithundntare(? nte). T h e portion from here, upto na divdnisi in V . 9 , is missing in one
set of manuscripts.

Gnomonic shadow
19. (Plant a g n o m o n at the c e n t r e of) a circle h a v i n g a d i a m e t e r e q u a l to f o u r
times the g n o m o n . M a r k the two p o i n t s w h e r e the s h a d o w o f the g n o m o n
enters the circle a n d e m e r g e s f r o m it. T h e l i n e j o i n i n g the p o i n t s is the east-
west l i n e . T h e l i n e d r a w n p e r p e n d i c u l a r to this by m e a n s o f e q u a l i n t e r s e c t i n g
circles, is the n o r t h - s o u t h l i n e .

T h o u g h the east-west line is first asked to be drawn and the north-south next, as perpendicular
bisector to the east-west, it will be better i f the north-south line is first drawn by means of equal
intersecdng circles with the two points as centres. T h e n using the points of intersection of the
north-south line and the original circle as centres, by the same means, the perpendicular bisector
forming the east-west line can be drawn, which will pass through the centre as required. O n the
other hand, i f the east-west line is first drawn by j o i n i n g the first two points, another line parallel
to it and passing through the centre is to be drawn as the desired east-west line.

I9a. A.%g<^R<4dl>; C. S^J^-ft^-'Jclfa^ft in V . 9c. as noted by the scribes.

c. A . 3 i q ^ ; c.D.aqqHl Thus, B I addsinthemargin,^'?^'?^;
d. A.^ajC.D.^g B 2 . adds,3lfimt3^, and B 3 . adds^lfift
B . A f t e r ^ one leaf missing uptof^^ TlfftJ^. Andalladdsnil'Rlfef I
IV. 21 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 91

The gnomon should be twelve units in length, not necessarily digits; no harm will result, pro-
vided all measurements are given i n the same units. T h e circle also can be of any desired diameter,
not exactly four gnomons in length. We are not sure whether the word for 'four' occurs at all i n the
text, it is so corrupt in that part. W e can only say it cannot be sahkvangula as corrected by T S ; the
letters are so different.
Finding the directions in the manner described is explained thus: T h e N o r t h is directed towards
the north pole of the earth. Corresponding to this is the celestial north pole, (from which we can
find the north, i f we can only observe it correctly, and therefrom the other directions). A t mid-day
the Sun is o n the meridian, and at equal times before and after, its altitudes and directions are
equal, provided its declination does not change. As the Sun's position is thus symmetrical, before
and after noon, with the meridian as the line of symmetry, the gnomonic shadow is symmetrical
with the north-south Hue (which corresponds to t h g ^ e r i d i a n ) as the line of symmetry. Therefore
if two gnomonic shadows, one in the m o r n i n g and one i n the evening, of equal lengths, are marked
on a horizontal surface, the bisector of the angle between the two shadows is the line of symmetry,
and therefore the north-south line. F r o m this the east-west line, which is its perpendicular bisector,
is drawn. T h e circle, asked to be drawn, serves the purpose of marking the equal shadows. By the
same symmetry, the ends of the shadows are at equal distances from the east-west line, and so the
line drawn between them is also east-west, being parallel to the east-west line drawn. Therefore the
author asks us to draw the east-west line formed by j o i n i n g the two points first, and proceed. W e
have said that the Sun's declination must be the same, i.e. does not change during the interval. B u t
actually it changes. So if we do the work at a dme o f the year when the change in declinadon is very
litde, then the direcdons found will be nearly accurate. T h i s happens near the solstices, and there-
fore the work should be done when the sun is near the solstices. Methods to find the directions accu-
rately even when the declinations are changing rapidly, are given by writers like Vatesvara,
Paramesvara etc., and also explained by Govindasvamin i n his commentary on the Mahabhaskariya,
III.l.

Tg^TRTlg?! fa^elx:^NI^d fo^ldl II II

Latitude from Shadow

20. Measure the mid-day shadow on the day when the Sun is at the equinoxes
(the equinoctial shadow), square it, add 144, and find the square root. By this
divide the product of the shadow into 120.

21. T h e result is the sine of the latitude of the place, called Visuvajjtvd (or
Visuvajyd). Its arc is the latitude. O r , do this work on any day and get the arc.
If the Sun is in the six signs from sdyana-Mesa, i.e. if the Sun's declination is
north, add the declination to the arc, the latitude is got. If the Sun is in the six
92 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 21

signs from sdyana-Tula, i.e. if the declination is south, subtract the declina-
tion from the arc, the latitude is got.
That is:

i. Sine latitude = 120' X equinoctial s h a d o w V 1 4 4 + equinoctial shadow'. T h e arc from this

is the latitude.

ii. Sine south zenith distance of the Sun, (SZD) = 120' X mid-day shadow V144 -I- midday-shadow'.
T h e arc of this is the SZD.

U s i n g SZD, Latitude = S Z D d e c l i n a t i o n ('plus' should be used i f the declinadon is north, and

minus i f south.)

Example 5 (a). At a certain place the equinoctial shadow is 5 units. Find the latitude of the place.
Sin. lat. = 5 X 120' ^ V5' + 144 = 600' - M 3 = 46' 9".
A r c of 46' 9" ^ 22 37'. T h e ladtude is 22 37'.

Example 5(b). At a place when the Sun is at the end ofsdyana Tula, the mid-day shadow isfound to be 9 units.
Find the latitude of the place.

F r o m the formula, (themid-day-Sun's) sin SZD = 9 X 120' V 9 ' -f- 144 = 1080'/15 = 72'.

SZD = a r c o f 7 2 ' = 3 6 5 3 ' .

T h e declination o f the Sun at the end o f L i b r a is 11 44'S (from 16-18). T a k i n g the minus sign,
since the declinadon is south, the latitude = 36 53' - 11 44' = 25 9'.

Note: Rule (i) can be used everywhere, while rule (ii) should be used only i f the midday sun is
south o f the zenith. I f it is north, having north zenith distance, (NZD), declination = N Z D =
ladtude. B u t the work being a Karana, the author intends it to be used only i n N o r t h India, where
the midday zenith distance is always south, and hence this has not been mentioned by him. Further
the author envisages only north latitudes by his formulae.

Sky-sphere (Khagola)
H e r e onwards, explanations require a knowledge o f the sky-sphere (khagola) with the stellar
sphere imposed o n it. Therefore we shall describe the sky sphere. H i n d u astronomers describe it
as the 'Casket Boundary of our universe' (Brahmdnda-katdha-sampula), and marked by the penetration
of sunlight. Beyond that there is no sunlight. T h e measure of a great circle on the sky-sphere is said
to be the number ofyojanas the M o o n , or the Sun or any planet moves i n a kalpa (yuga according to
the followers of Aryabhata), though, really, the sphere is only illusory and supposed to have an
indefinite radius. A s the stellar sphere also is enormous, we can take the surfaces of the two spheres
sliding o n each other, and forming spherical triangles by arcs o n each intersecting those on the
other. T h e problems will entail the solution o f these triangles. (The formulae for solution have
already been given). This will be understood by examining Fig. 6.

20-21. Quoted by Utpala onBS 2. pp. 59-60.

20a. A . W T ^ ; C.I^'RSJIfJ d. A . C . D . ^
b. A . om^^'im-om. 12b. A.^^FT^^. A.C.D.8rai'T^B^
c. A . - ? R r . A . D . ^ d. A.^fS:
I V . 21 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 93

S
Fig. IV. 6

N E S W Z is the sky-sphere. It is the sky as seen by an observer on the earth who fancies himself
stationary, though taking part i n the rotation o f the earth, and thinks that the stellar sphere is
rotating on the axis j o i n i n g the celestial poles, N P , SP. N E S W is the horizon marked by the cardinal
points. N o r t h , East, South, West. (Note that the east and west points are interchanged so as to
appear as we see them when looking up at the sky.) Z is the zenith, corresponding i n the sky to the
observer's position on the earth, and is the point where the line from the centre of the earth,
through the observer, joins the sky-sphere. N N P Z O S is the meridian. E Z W is called the prime
vertical. E N P is part o f what is called unmandalam. Z S H is part of the vertical circle from the zenith
to the horizon passing through the sun, moon, etc. (Note that the prime vertical is the vertical circle
passing through the east and west points, and that the meridian itself can be considered as a vertical
circle passing through the N o r t h and South points.) ZS is the zenith distance of S, and H S is the
altitude. SjSSj is the diurnal circle, the apparent path o f S daily, due to earth's rotation.

T h e stellar sphere (Fig.4) can be recognised here by the celestial equator E r R O W , by the ecliptic
EcrSC, by the north celestial pole N P , by the position of the Sun S, etc. and by the declination circle.
N P S R , of which SR is the arc of declination. Because o f the position of the observer o n the earth
with reference to the terrestrial N o r t h pole, the celestial N o r t h pole (NP) seems lifted up along the
meridian from the north-point (N) so that its altitude is equal to the latitude of the place, and by
this the celestial equator is depressed southward by the same amount from the prime vertical.
94 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 21

Therefore the latitude of the place = N N P = Z O . (What we have said is for places in the northern
hemisphere, i.e. north latitudes. In the southern hemisphere, i.e. at places of south latitudes, SP is
lifted up from S, and the celestial equator is depressed northward by the same amount.) T h e
complement of Z O , O S , is called the co-latitude (Lamba). T h u s in triangles formed by great-circle-
arcs of the stellar sphere and the sky-sphere, the latitude is involved directly or indirectly. T h e for-
mulae for the solution o f these triangles have been already given.

Now, the two formulae for ladtude can be proved by using the meridian, thus: see Fig.7

O b : observer
N : north point
S: south point
NS.^ZSiOSoS,: T h e meridian
Z: zenith
O : point of intersecdon of meri-
dian and celestial equator.
S = So, S,, S^, S3,: four positions
of the mid-day sun.
O S : Sun's declination
Fig. IV. 7

As already described, O Z = ladtude.

O n the equinoctial days at mid-day the Sun, S^ is at O .
.-. ZS,, (the south zenith distance of the Sun) = Z O = ladtude (first formula).
O n other days, the Sun may be (i) south of O , (S3), or (ii) north of O but south of Z, (S,), (iii) north
of O and north of Z, (S^).
i. Here, the latitude = O Z = S3Z - S3O = the south zenith distance of the Sun the declina-
tion, (second part o f second formula).

ii. Here the ladtude = O Z = ZS, + S , 0 = the south zenith distance of the sun -I- the declination
(first part of the second formula).
UI. Here the latitude = Z O = S2O - S^Z = the declination - the north
zenith distance of the Sun. (This case is not given by the author).
T h e zenith distance o f the midday Sun used i n the
formulae is to be found thus: see Fig.8.
E G = gnomon o f 12 units
E T = T h e midday shadow,
T G = T h e shadow hypotenuse,
ZGS = the zenith distance = angle T G E .

Sin zenith distance (ZD) = sin Z G S = sin T G E = T E X 120' TG

= Shadow X 120' Shadow hypotenuse
= Shadow X 120' Vshadow' -f- gnomon^
= Shadow X 120' -^ Vshadow' + 144.,
(where shadow is i n the units taken).

F r o m sin Z D , arc Z D is found.

Fig. IV. 8
 I V . 22 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 9.5

Sine zenith distance

22. S u b t r a c t the S u n ' s d e c l i n a t i o n f r o m the l a t i t u d e (of the place), i f the d e c l i -

n a d o n is n o r t h , a n d a d d i f it is s o u t h . T h e m i d d a y S u n ' s Z . D . is got. F i n d its
sine a n d m u l t i p l y by twelve. D i v i d e this b y the r o o t o f the d i f f e r e n c e o f the
squares o f the r a d i u s a n d sine Z D . T h e m i d - d a y s h a d o w is o b t a i n e d i n afigulas.
T h e following are the rules:

i . Degrees of zenith distance = Latitude + Sun's declination (the upper sign being used for
north declination and the lower for the south.)

ii. Mid-day shadow = 12 X sin Z D -f- V I 2 0 ' - s i n ' Z D (where 120 is written for radius).

It must be noted that the incompleteness mentioned i n connection with the second formula if the
previous work is found here too.

Example 6. The latitude of a place is 25 9'. The Sun's declination is 11 44', south, (the Sun being in the
part of the ecliptic beginningfrom Libra). Find the mid-day shadow.

T h e declinadon being south, Z D = 25 9' -I- 11 44' = 36 52'. Sin Z D = 72'.

.-. Middayshadow = 12 X 72 - V 1 2 0 ' - 7 2 ' = 12 x 72 ^ 96 = 9angulas.

T h e rules are explained thus:

F r o m the previous rule. Latitude = zenith distance declination, (-1- for north declination, and
- for south declinadon), we have, zenith distance = latitude + declination, (for north and south
declinations, respectively).

From this sine zenith distance is got. U s i n g this, the shadow is obtained from the previous rule,
sin Z D = shadow X 120 H- V shadow' -f 144.

Squaring both sides, s i n ' Z D = shadow' X 120' H- (shadow' -I- 144).

sin' Z D X (shadow' -t- 144) = shadow' X 120'
sin' Z D X shadow' 4- 144 s i n ' Z D = shadow' X 120'
120'. shadow' - s i n ' Z D . shadow' = 144 s i n ' Z D
shadow' = 144 s i n ' Z D ( 1 2 0 ' - s i n ' ZD)
shadow = 12 sin Z D ^ V 1 2 0 ' - s i n ' Z D .

22. Quoted by Utpala o n B S 2, p.61.

22a. A . D . 3 1 ^ . A . C . D . U . ^ c. A.C.D.i|&mi
b. A.c#35fiT; C D . U.dfci^ltPcl. A . ' ^ d. A.'RISOII;^
96 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 23

Sine Co-latitude and Day-diameter

23. Square the sine of latitude and deduct from the square of the radius. Its
square root is the 'sine of co-latitude', (its arc being the 'co-latitude'). Square
the sine of declination, deduct from the square of the radius and find its root.
Twice the result is the 'day diameter'.

Now, we have
(i) sine co-latitude = V radius' s i n ' latitude
(ii) Day-diameter = 2 x V radius' - s i n ' declination

Example 7 (a), sin lat. = 72. Find sin co-lat, and its arc, viz. the co-lat.

sin co-lat. = V 1 2 0 ' - 7 2 ' = 96'.

A r c 96' = 53 8' = co-latitude.

Example 7 (b). The Sun is at the end of the sign Aries. Find the day-diameter.
T h e Sun's longitude = rdsi. I-O-O. Sineraii. 1-0-0 = 60'.
.-. sin declination = 60' (60-H)/I50 = 24' 24".
Theday-diameter = 2 X V 1 2 0 ' - 24' 24"^ = 2 x 1 1 7 ' 30" = 235'.
In the right angled triangle having the radius as the hypotenuse and the sine of ladtude as the
base, the sine of the co-latitude stands as the perpendicular or lamba. Therefore it is called lambajyd.
By the analogy with co-sine for sine, co-tangent for tangent, and co-secant for secant, the term co-
latitude for latitude, has been invented for 9 0 ' - l a t i t u d e , for convenience of expression. Therefore:
(since base' + perpendicular' = hypotenuse'), sin'lat -I- s i n ' co-lat = radius'.
F r o m this, s i n ' co-lat = radius' s i n ' lat. Np
.. sin co-lat = Vradius' s i n ' lat. ^"-"I

As for the day-diameter, by the diurnal rotation of the

earth on its axis, the Sun apparently moves r o u n d the earth
every day i n a circular path, at a distance from the celestial
c Q
equator equal to the latitude, with the axis of the earth
perpendicular to the plane of the circle. T h i s circle is called
the diurnal circle or day-circle and its diameter, the day-
diameter. (See this shown i n Fig.6.) T h e diameter can be
measured thus: see Fig.9.

Fig. IV. 9 SP

23. Quoted by Utpala on 2, p. 60. c-d. A.rf>irTl'^lRl'^ls^Wt1<1<; C-D.tc^Tl<l<^

23a. A . ^ ^ ^ S R W R q i ^ ^ f S R a r o : (D.M<feRHi|W:)
b. A . T J c R F f ^ : ; C . i J e T ^ ^ : d. A . t l ^
I V . 25 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 97

N P C S P Q i s the stellar sphere, with centre E , C Q i s the celestial equator, SC is the declination of
the Sun S, S E C = degrees of declination, SB is the diurnal circle, with the straight line SB as its dia-
meter, and S A as its radius.
Suppose the sphere is cut into equal halves, with the cross section N P C SP Q E exposed to view
and the axis N P E SP forming a diameter.
SE is the radius, and SD (= A E ) = sin declination. T h e n , S A = V S E ' - S D ' .
But S A = half day-diameter.
.-. day-diameter = 2 S A
= 2 V radius' - s i n ' declination.

^'1?rftr' ^ l ^ ( l ^ ) i 5 R F c n 5 r f R F T [ : ] x r f ^ : II

24. T h e sines o f d e c l i n a t i o n s o f the p o i n t s o f the ecliptic e n d i n g A r i e s ,

T a u r u s a n d G e m i n i are 24' 24", 42' 15", a n d 48' 48".

We shall show these to be correct by computing them. T h e sine declination of the end of Aries,
i.e. rd. 1-0-0 has been derived i n example 7(b) to be 24' 24". T h e sine of declination of the end o f
Gemini, i.e. rdsi 3-0-0, has been shown to be 48' 48", (the maximum) in the example above. So we
shall derive here only sine declination o f the end o f Taurus, i.e. rdsi 2-0-0. Sine rdsi. 2-0-0 = 103'
55" (from tables). T h e sine o f its declination by I V . 16 is, 103' 55" X (60 -l-I)/150 = 4 1 ' 34" -f- 41"
34"' = 42' 15"34"'. Here, though 34"' is greater than half a second, the author has omitted it and
given 42' 15", to the nearest quarter minute.

25. T h e respective d a y - d i a m e t e r s are, i n the m i n u t e s parts: 200 -i- 35, 200 -I-
24, a n d 200 -1- 19, w i t h 40" a n d 15" a d d e d to the s e c o n d a n d t h i r d , (i.e. the day-
d i a m e t e r s are, 235', 204' 40" a n d 219' 15").
O f these, the day-diameter o f the end o f Aries has been worked out i n Example 7 (b). W e shall
derive the other two.
T h e day-diameter for the Sun at the end of Taurus = 2 \^I20' sin' declinadon of the end of Taurus,
= 2 V 1 2 0 ' - 4 2 ' 15"- = 224' 38".

24b. A.C.D.^I^SPg 25a. A . omMafel^

c. A.q<<m<.; D . q ^ [ ^ ] t 5 t ^ b. A . o ^ a w . C . D . t l w l
d. A.fJ^TT d. A . f ^ . A . ^ R R ^
98 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 26

But the author gives 224' 40" as being more convenient to use. T h e day-diameter at the end of
G e m i n i = 2 V 1 2 0 ' - 48' 48"' = 219' 15", which is the same as given by the author.

T h e missing part of the text, (pancatrirhsat), has been found out by computation, (tisamyu) has
been guessed as being necessary to supply the meaning, which is clear.

Cara

26. Multiply the sine of latitude by 240' and by the sine of declination. Divide
by the sine of co-latitude and by the day-diameter. Find the arc of the sine
obtained in minutes (This arc is called half-cara)-and divide by 3. T h e result
are the accurate minutes of cara, (which might be called 'day-difference').
From the cara we can obtain the cara-intervats, (or cara differences).

This is the formula:

(i) Sine half-cara = 240' X sine latitude X sine declination (sine co-latitude x day-diameter)

F r o m this the half-cara arc is got. T h e n ,

(ii) Cara, i.e. day-difference i n vinddis = minutes o f half-cara ^ 3.

In III. 12 the author gave a rule for the cara-vinddis to be used i n North-India and its neighbour-
hood and said that he would give the general rule later i n the Chedyaka section. T h i s is it. Further,
in the rule o f III. 10, the interval o f the vinddis were given for long intervals i n degrees, like whole
signs, and the value obtained can only be rough. T h i s rule can give accurate values.

T h e reading perhaps is 'cara-pinda' for which the scribe has written 'cara-khanda' by mistake.
Example 8. The sine of latitude of a place is 72', and the sine of co-latitude 96'. The Sun is at the end of
Mithuna, with the sine of its declination 48' 48". The day-diameter for the day is 219' 15". Find the cara-
vinddis.

By the formula, sine half-cara = 240' X 72' x 48' 48" ^ (96' x 219' 15") =40' 4".

A r c 40' 4" = half-cara = 19 3 1 ' = 19 X 60'-H 3 1 ' = 1171'.

Cara-vinddis = 1171/3 = 390, i.e. nddis 6-30.

T h e work is thus explained: (See fig. 10)

26a. A.aTRT:a#3
b. A.^sqra^
 I V . 26 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 99

NP

Fig. IV. 10

In the stellar sphere C E C is the celestial equator, N P and SP being the north and south poles.
N E S P is the Unmandala or horizon of a place on the equator. Z is the zenith o f the place, N and S
being the north and south points and E is the east point.

DsD is the day-diameter of the Sun, (s), i n the northern hemisphere, making the declination sd.
D|S,D, is the day-diameter of the Sun, (s,), i n the southern hemisphere, making the declination
sd. D S D is the day-diameter of the Sun (s,), in the southern hemisphere, making the declination
s,d,. s and s, are the rising points of the Sun as seen from the place, NsEs,S being its horizon. T h e
altitude o f the N o r t h Pole. N N P = angle N E N P , is the latitude, which is equal to SE SP, from which
it is seen that for places in the northern hemisphere, the Unmandala is raised from the horizon by
this angle i n the north, and depressed by this angle i n the south. A s the Sun, in its diurnal circuit,
takes exactly half a day to move from the eastern Unmandala to the western, the day-time is longer
when the Sun's declinadon is north, for it has to travel, after rising, an arc i n the d i u r n a l circle
(equivalent to the great circle arc dE) to reach the Unmandala and an equal time while setting. T h e
time is less when the declination is south, because before rising it has to travel less by an arc equiva-
lent to E d , to reach the horizon from the unmandala (and an equal time less while setdng). d E and
E d , are the arcs o f half-cara. Therefore when the declinadon is north, the time corresponding to 2
D E i n the day-difference, (the day time being greater than 30 nddikds by this amount,) and when it
is south the dme equivalent of 2 E d , is the day-difference, (the day-time being less than 30 nddikds
by this amount). So we have to calculate d E , and E d , .

In A dEs, right angled at d, by fundamental formula III, sin d E = Radius X sin S d X Cos sEd -r-
(Cos sd X sin sEd).
But, sd is the declination and sEd = 90 - N E N P = 90 - ladtude.
.-. sin half-cara = 120' x sin dec X cos ( 9 0 - lat.) -^{(Cos dec X sin (90 - lat)}]

9
100 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A IV. 28

= 120' sin dec x sin lat ^ ((Cos dec X sin (90 - lat)}
= 120' sin dec X sin lat (day-radius X sin co-ladtude)
= 240' sin dec X sin lat H- (day-diameter x sin co-latitude).
F r o m this the arc d E is got.
E d , for south declination is got i n the same way, from A s,E d,.

F r o m d E or E d , , the cara-vinddis are got thus: F o r the whole circle of 360 or 21600 minutes o f
arc, there are 60 X 60 = 3600 vinddis..-. F o r the arc of half cara i n minutes there are 3600 X arc of
half-cora 21600 = arc of half cara/6 vinddis. T h e whole cara-vinddis are twice this, and equal to 2 X
minutes (rf'half-cara/6 = minutes of half-cara/3.

As we have said, these are added to 30 nddikds to find the day-time, when the declination is north,
i.e. when the Sun is i n six signs from Aries. Those vinddis are subtracted when the Sun is in the
south, i.e. i n the six signs L i b r a etc.
T h e part of the formula, sin declination x sin-ladtude sin co-ladtude, is called 'Earth sine',
(ksitijyd), i n H i n d u astronomical works, which is required to be multiplied by the radius and
divided by the day-diameter to get sin half-cara. In certain works the half-cara itself is called cara.

Latitude from Cara

27. Divide the vinddis of cara by tv\renty and find the sine of the resulting
degrees. Multiply the day-diameter by this, and divide by 240. Put the result
in two places. In one place square it and add the square of the sine of declination
and find its root.

28. Multiply the result kept in the other place by the radius, and divide by this
root. T h e result is the sine of latitude. Its arc is the latitude. 90' minus latitude
is the co-latitude, and its sine, sine co-latitude.

T h e following is the work to be done:

i. T h e vinddis oicara -i- 20 = degree o f half-cara. F i n d its sine.

ii. Sine half-cara X day-diameter ^ 240 = sine x. (This is earth-sine or ksitijyd).

27-28. Quoted by Utpala onBS, 2, p.60.

27b. A.JT5^
C. A.o4l<^fe<+>C<:||; C . \ ^ V l ^ C c | l c l ^ 28a. A.Mf3IT; C.D.r^lfcl^. A . ^ ^
d. A . ^ c. A.^^1^^1^"1HI<HI
I V . 28 IV, T H R E E P R O B L E M S 101

iii. Earth-sine x 120 Vsin' earth-sine + s i n ' dec = sin lat. F r o m this the latitude is found

iv. 90 latitude = co-latitude. Its sine, co-lat.

Example 9. At a certain place on a certain day, the vinddis of cara are 390 113. The day-diameter is 219'
15". Find the latitude of the place, and sine co-latitude.

T h e sine ofdeclination required for the formulae is, by (IV.23),V 120' - (219' 1572)' = 48' 48".

i . Degree o f half-cara = 390 1/3 20 = 1171/(3 X 20) = 19 3 1 ' . F r o m this, sine half-cara = 40'
4".

i i . (Earth)-sme = 40' 4" X 219' 15" 240' = 36' 36".

iii. Sinlat.= 36' 36" x 120' ^ V36'36'"-I-48'48"' = 120 ^ V I -1-16/9 = 120' x 3/5 = 72'.

F r o m this, lat = 36 52'.

iv. Co-latitude = 90 - 36 52' = 53 8'. F r o m this sine co-latitude = 96'.

T h e rules are thus derived:

a. F r o m the rule, vinddikds of cara = minutes o f half-cara -H'3. B y transposing, we have:

Minutes of half-cara = vinddikds of cara X 3.

Degrees of half-cara = vinddikds of cara X 3/60 = vinddikds o f cara/20, which is (i).

b. From the rule, sine half-cara = sin lat.X 240 X sin dec -r- (sin co-lat x day-diarneter), we get;

Sin dec = sin half-cara X sin co-lat . X day-diameter -H (240 X sin lat)

= sin co-lat X earth-sine -r- sin lat.

Using this i n (iii) above, we have:

Sin lat = earth-sine X 120' Vearth-sine' + s i n ' co-lat X earth-sine' ^ sin'lat.

120' H- Vsin'lat -I- sin'co-lat -^ sin'lat.

= earth-sine X 120' ^ (earth-sine) V I -H s i n ' co-lat

= 120' H- Vsin' lat + s i n ' co-lat ^ sin'lat.
= 120' ^ Vl/sin'lat = V sin'lat = sin lat, thus proving (iii).

From this the latitude is got. T h e n ,

-. ladtude + co-latitude = 90,

Co-ladtude = 90 - latitude.

It should be noted that o f the sin declination and the day-diameter required i n the rules, one is
sufficient, because the other can be got from that. A s for the word kharida, meaning 'interval' or 'dif-
ference', we have already said that it is pinda ('the whole') we get first, and thence the khanda.

As for the reading, we have corrected, carathanakapaksdrma, into carakhandakhapaksdmsa, making

ka into kha, because 'twenty' is required here as the divisor. T h i s is the only correction we have
made. B u t T S , followed by N P , have made several corrections, not realising that i f Bhattotpala's
reading is adopted no other correction would be required.
102 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 30

'g^gpR^' 'HT^^RfsRT 'l5rf53Jra^' [STfl] (^)

Rt. ascensional difference

29. Square the sine of the longitude of a point on the ecliptic, and deduct
from it the square of the sine of the declination of the point. Find its root,
multiply it by the diameter and divide by the day-diameter. Find the arc of the
resulting sine in degrees. Multiply the degrees by 10. T h e Right ascension of
the point is obtained in vinddis. deducting the right ascension of the next rdsi
from that of the previous, the right ascentional difference of the rdsis are
obtained.

30. T h e vinddis of right ascentional difference for the three signs from Mesa
are 278, 299 and 323. In the next quadrant they are the same in the reversed
order, viz. 323, 299 and 278. In the half of echptic beginning from Libra, the
difference are those of the first half, taken in the reverse order.
T h e formula is:
Sin Right ascension = 240' x Vsin'longitude - s i n ' dec day-diameter.

T h e degrees of right ascension multiplied by 10, are the vinddis o f right ascension.

T h e differences as calculated, are, for Aries etc. 2 7 8 , 2 9 9 , 3 2 3 , 3 2 3 , 2 9 9 , 2 7 8 , 2 7 8 , 2 9 9 , 3 2 3 , 3 2 3 ,

299, 278.
Now, what is the meaning of saying that i n the second half the differences are in the reverse order
of those in the first half, when reversing the order does not make any difference? T r u e . But the
author must have meant this statement for ascensional difference i n general, for, then, owing to
the subtraction and addition of half day-differences (cardrdha) in the first and second quadrants,
the reverse order becomes different.

Further, the vinddis mentioned here are sidereal and not mean solar, because the vinddis per
degree are obtained by dividing the time of a full revolution by 360, and the time of a full revolution
of the stellar sphere is a sidereal day, and not a mean solar day which is the time o f the diurnal
revolution of the mean Sun.
30. Quoted by Utpala on B S 2, p.61.
29a. A . W W s q i ; C.il<iem*H^^I; D . ^ ^ I W M I
I V . 30 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 103

Example 10. Find the right ascensions of the points of the ecliptic ending Aries, Taurus, and Gemini, i.e.
longitudes 30, 60 and 90. From them find their respective differences.

Sin 30 = 60', sin 60 = 103'55" and sin 90 = 120'.

Sin dec. of the points ending Aries etc. are, respecdvely, 24'24", 42' 15" and 48'48". T h e respec-
tive day-diameters are 235', 2244'38", and 219'15".

(a) For the point 30, sin Rt. asc = V 6 0 " - 24' 24"' X 240 H- 235 = 54' 49" X 240 235 = 55' 59".
Its arc = 27 49'. M u l d p l y i n g by 10, the vinddis o f Rt. asc. are 27 49' x 10 = 278.

(b) For the point 60, sin Rt. asc. = \ ^ 3 ' 55"' - 42' 15"' X 240 - 224' 38" = 94' 57" x 240' ^
224' 38"= 101' 26". Its arc = 57 42'. T h e wna^is of Rt. asc. = 57 42' x 10 = 577.
(c) For the point 90, sin Rt. asc. = V 1 2 0 " - 48' 48"' X 240' ^ 219' 15" = 109' 37".5 x 240' -4-
219' 15" = 120'. Its arc = 90. T h e vinddis of Rt. asc. arc. 90 X 10 = 900.

T h e difference for G e m i n i = Rt. asc. for 90 - Rt. asc for 60 = 900 - 577 = 323

T h e difference for Taurus = Rt. asc. for 60 - Rt. asc. for 30 = 577 - 278 = 299.
As the Rt. asc. o f the first point of Aries is zero, the difference for Aries = Rt. asc. for 30 - Rt.
asc. for 0 = 278 - 0 = 278.
A l l these are the same as given by the author.

This is how the formula is arrived at: T h e dme taken by each sign of the ecliptic, beginning from
Aries, to rise above the eastern horizon, for an observer on the equator, is i n vinddis 278, 299, etc.,
and their total is the time taken by any point to rise, after the rising o f the First point of Aries. T h i s
is represented by the arc o f the celestial equator (called the Rt. asc.) measured from the First point
of Aries, and we have to find this arc.
In Fig. 11, r is the First point o f Aries. P is the point on the ecliptic of which the time o f rising is
required, and P d is the declination o f the point, equal to the arc of the horizon from the east point
to the rising point, d r is the arc o n the celestial equator, called the Right-ascension of the point P,
which is required to be found.

F r o m the fundamental formula iv.

Sin Rt. asc. = sin dr = sin Pd X cos P r d X Radius (Cos P d X sin Prd)

= sin Pr X cos P r d cos P d (. by the fundamental formula i i , sin P r d

= sin P d X radius sin Pr.)
= sin Pr X V Radius' - Radius^ sin'Pd -H sin'' Pr ^ cos P d

= sin Pr X Radius Vsin' Pr - s i n ' P d ^ (sin Pr X cos Pd)

= Radius X Vsin' Pr - sin'' P d COS P d

= 120' X Vsin' long. - sin'dec. -^ Vz day-diameter

= 240' X Vsin' long. - sin"' dec. day-diameter.

T h e arc of this is the Rt. asc. As there are 3600 vinddis for a Rt. asc. of 360, for the Rt. asc. got,
the time is, Rt. asc. x 3600 ^ 360 = Rt. asc. x 10. T h e n by subtracting the vinddis pertaining to the
Rt. asc. of the beginning o f the sign from that o f the end o f the sign, the differences are got.
104 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A IV.31

Because the sine of the longitude and the sine of the declination (which itself varies as the sine
of the longitude) decrease in the second quadrant i n the reverse order of the increase in the first,
and this increase and decrease are repeated i n the third and fourth quadrants, the differences of
vinddis follow the same course.

Rising Signs
3 1 . T a k e the differences o f R t . asc. o f three signs at a t i m e . F r o m the first
t r i p l e t subtract the differences o f half-cara,s, o n e by o n e , t a k e n i n the g i v e n
o r d e r . A d d the half-cara differences o n e by o n e , t a k e n i n the reverse o r d e r , to
the s e c o n d triplets. T o the t h i r d t r i p l e t a d d the half-cara differences t a k e n i n
the g i v e n o r d e r . F r o m the f o u r t h t r i p l e t subtract the half-cara differences o n e
by o n e , i n the reverse o r d e r . T h e vinddis o f the r i s i n g signs, called the ascen-
s i o n a l differences, as seen f r o m any place, are o b t a i n e d . T h e seventh f r o m
the r i s i n g signs set d u r i n g the same t i m e as the signs themselves rise.

T h e ascensional differences for the several signs are as follows:

Aries 278 - half-cara difference for Aries
Taurus 299 - half-cara difference for Taurus
Gemini 323 - half-cara difference for Gemini
Cancer 323 + half-cara difference for Gemini
Leo 299 + half-cara difference for Taurus
Virgo 278 + half-cara difference for Aries
Libra 278 + half-cara difference for Aries
Scorpio 299 + half-mra difference for Taurus
Sagittarius 323 + half-rara difference for Gemini
Capricorn 323 - half-cara difference for Gemini
Aquarius 299 - half-cara difference for Taurus
Pisces 278 - half-cara difference for Aries

It can be noted that the ascensional differences for the six signs. Libra etc., are those of the six
signs Aries etc. taken in the reverse order, as mentioned by us earlier. It should also be noted that
signs Aries etc. mentioned here are sdyana. For nirayana mesa etc. (reckoned from the first point of
Asvini) the differences, obviously, will be different, and there will not be this symmetry about the
first point of Mesa or T u l a . Also, we have already said that the vinddis are sidereal. Note also, that
for places on the equator, the ascensional differences are those given in IV.30 itself because the

31. Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a B S , 2 , p . 6 1 . b. A . ' s m i ^
31a. A.C.D.r+M<!i!l#ilI; ( C . D . ^ ) d. A.^Plf%. B.^re!I^
IV. 31 IV. T H R E E PROBLEMS 105

cara is zero there, the day-time being always 30 nddis there. T h e Sanskrit name 'Lankodaya itself
suggests this, Lanka representing a place on the equator.

Exaynple 11. At a certain place the equinoctial shadow of a twelve-unit gnomon is 5 units. Find the ascen-
sional differences of the twelve dsis. (sdyana).

By 111.10 the cara-wr7ac?w differences for the place, pertaining to Aries, Taurus and G e m i n i , are
5 X (20, 16'/2, 6%) = 100, 82'/2, 3 3 % . T h e half-cara differences are, respecdvely, 50, 41, 17 vinddis.
in the southern hemisphere it is the other way. It is called Unmandala because it is raised in one's

Aries : 278 - 50 = 228 Libra : 278 + 50 = 328

Taurus : 299-41 = 258 Scorpio : 299 -f 41 = 340
Gemini : 3 2 3 - 17 = 306 Sagittarius: 323 -1- 17 = 340
Cancer :323-M7 = 340 Capricorn : 323 - 17 = 306
Leo :299-f-41 = 340 Aquarius : 299 - 41 = 258
Virgo :278 + 50 = 328 Pisces : 278 - 50 = 228

The procedure is thus explained: T h e horizon o f a place on the etjuator (i.e. zero latitude)
appears raised towards the north pole to a person in the northern hemisphere on account of the
elevation of the pole as we go north and submerged towards the submerged south-pole. T o a person
in the southern hemisphere it is the other way. It is czWedUnmandala because it is raised in one's
own hemisphere. T h e Right ascensional differences having reference to the horizon o f zero
latitude, i.e. the unmandala. B u t what we want are the ascensions, i.e. risings from the horizon o f
the place. Therefore the risings are earlier when the declination o f the rdsi is north, (for places in
the northern hemisphere), by the time the Sun takes to move from the horizon to the unmandala
along the diurnal circle, and later by the same time when the declination is south. It has been
explained that this time is equal to the half-cara vinddis. So, with reference to the points o f the triplet
Aries, Taurus and G e m i n i , whose declination is north, the half-cara has to be deducted. A s the
declination increases, rdsi by rdsi, the differences o f half-cara have to be subtracted one by one, until
the maximum half-rara is reached. There the declination decreases as it has increased, still being
north, and the half-cara which has to be deducted decreases in the same manner. So the differences
are added in the reverse order in the second triplet, i.e. Cancer, L e o and Virgo. In the next triplet,
viz. Libra, Scorpio and Sagittarius, the south declination increases, i.e. the additive half-ca?a
increases, and to the half-cara differences are again added, in the regular order, because in the
third triplet the south declinadon increases in the same manner as the north declination in the first
triplet, r h e n in the fourth triplet, i.e. Capricorn, Aquarius and Pisces, the south declination
decreases, i.e. the additive cara decreases, and so the differences have to be deducted. (All this can
be seen clearly on a globe). F r o m the explanation it can be seen that for places in the southern
hemisphere, the risings of the rdsis are those of their seventh in the northern hemisphere.

As great circles intersect one another, the part o f the ecliptic above the horizon is always half a
great circle, and therefore the distance between the rising point and the setting point o f the eclipdc
is always six signs, as also that o f the celestial equator. Therefore the change in the Rt. asc. o f the
setting point o f the ecliptic is equal to that o f the rising point, with the result that the time of the
setting of a sign seventh from the rising point is that of the rising point.
106 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A
IV. 33

[dsldeblH:]

T i m e to reach the Prime vertical

32. W h e n the S u n is w i t h i n 6 signs f r o m A r i e s , (i.e. w h e n the Sun's d e c l i n a -

t i o n is n o r t h ) , m u l d p l y the sine o f the d e c l i n a t i o n b y 120' a n d d i v i d e by the
sine o f the latitude, (the place b e i n g p r e s u m e d to be n o r t h o f the e q u a t o r
also). T h e sine o f the Sun's a l t i t u d e at P r i m e v e r d c a l , (sama-sanku), is got. F i n d
its arc. T r e a t this arc as p a r t o f the ecliptic, a n d find its R t . ascension i n vinddis.

33. T h i s is the t i m e t a k e n by the S u n to r e a c h the P r i m e v e r t i c a l i n the fore-

n o o n after c r o s s i n g the wnmandc/fl,and the t i m e r e m a i n i n g to r e a c h it after
r e a c h i n g the P r i m e v e r d c a l , i n the a f t e r n o o n . T h e S u n does not t o u c h the
P r i m e v e r t i c a l w h e n it is i n the six signs b e g i n n i n g f r o m L i b r a , (i.e. w h e n the
d e c l i n a t i o n is south), (as seen f r o m places i n the n o r t h e r n h e m i s p h e r e ) .

T h e following is the work asked to be done:

(i) Sin altitude at Prime vertical = 120' x sin dec sin lat.

(ii) Sin rt. asc. = Vsin' alt - sin" dec x 240' day - diameter.
Find the arc of this.

(iii) A r c in degrees X 10 = time in vinddis to reach the prime vertical from the unmandala (or vice
versa in the afternoon)

(iv) A d d the total half-cara vinddis if the time from sunrise, (or to set, if afternoon) is wanted.
Here, the author has not mentioned the work of ii-iv explicitly, intending to give it subsequently.
But it is clear that he is giving the time connected with the prime vertical, and that too, not the time
before noon or afternoon, but the time from sunrise or to sunset. But it is not mentioned whether
the rising or setting is with reference to the horizon o f the place or to the unmandala. But as the rt.
ascension in the manner of computing the Lankodaya is clearly meant, rising or setting with refer-
ence to the unmandala alone seems to be in the author's mind, for the time with reference to
that alone can be got. So to get the dme from actual sunrise or sunset, the half-cara has got to be
added, (secdon iv of the work), though this is not mentioned by the author. T h e half-cara has
already been given, and need not be computed afresh.

32-33 Quoted by Utpala o n B S . 2,p.41.

b. A . ^ . A.cI^Rcli; D . ^ l l ^ M W i
c. A.fcIT^. A . # ^ 33b. A . W n . Al.t^RI?!^; A 2 . i ^ ^ U . 1 ^ ^
d. C . ^ q ^ ^ : d. Al.^vl
IV. 33 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 107

It may be mentioned in this connection that T S understand here only the work upto finding the
sine of altitude at Prime vertical. As for the time, they say it is equal to the time taken by the Sun to
reach the altitude found out, when the question is how to find this very time.

It should also be noted that the work upto finding the sine of rt. ascension mentioned in (i) and
(ii-) can be done easily, thus: Work (iv) presupposes the knowledge of sin half-cara. Using that, sin
rt. ascension mentioned in (ii)

= sin half-cara X s i n ' colat -f- s i n ' lat.

= sin half-cara X 144 -r- square of equinoctial shadow.

If the sin rt. ascension obtained is greater than 120', then, even when the Sun's declination is
north, the Sun does not touch the prime vertical. We shall explain this later.

Example 12. On a certain day, the longitude of the Sun is rdsi 1-15. The latitude of the place (north of
equator) is 30. (The equinoctial shadow is 6 angulas 55.7 vyangulas). When, after sunrise, does the Sun cross
the prime vertical at that place, on that day.

We require the sine of declination and sine half-cara for the given time and place.
Sin dec = sin T 15 X 61/150 = sin 45 X 61/150 =
= 84' 51" X 61/150 = 34' 30".3.
Theday-diameter = 2 X V 120' - 34' 30".3' = 229' 51".4
Sin half-cara = 240' X sin lat X sin dec -H (sin co.lat. X day-diameter)
= 240' X 60' X 34' 30".3 ^ (103' 55" x 2 2 9 ' 51".4)
= 20' 48".
Half-cara = arc of 20' 48" = 9 59'.
Half-cara vinddis arc 9 59' x 10 = 100 = na.1-40.
A l l this is supposed to be known already.

Now for the computation of the time:

(i) sin altitude = 34' 30".3 x 120' - 60' = 69' 1".

(ii) sinrt. asc = V69' 1 " ' - 3 4 ' 3 0 " . 3 ' X 240' -r- 229' 51".4 = 62' 24". Its arc is 31 2 1 ' .

(iii) T h e corresponding time = 31 2 1 ' x 10 = SlSvinddis = nd. 5-13.

(iv) T h e time of crossing the prime vertical after sunrise = nd. 5-13 4- nd. 1-40 = nd. 6-53.
This is for the forenoon. For the afternoon, deducting this time from the time o f sunset, nd. 33-
20, the time of crossing is nd. 33-20 - nd. 6-53 = nd. 26-27.

Now, according to the short-cut in the place of (i) and (ii). Sin rt. asc. = sin half-cara x s i n ' co.lat
-i- s i n ' lat.
= 20' 48" X 103' 55"' ^ 6 0 " = 20' 48" x 3.
= 62' 24". (See this obtained by the regular rule).
O r , sin rt. asc. = sin half-cara X 144 equinoctial shadow
= 20' 48" X 144 -i-iGang. 55.7 vyang.f
= 20' 48" X 3 62' 24", as already obtained.

T h e rules are explained as follows, supposing the place to be north of the equator. (For places
south of the equator also the same can be used, interchanging the directions north and south,
wherever they occur.) See Fig. 12.
108 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 33

Fig. IV. 12 S

In this figure of the sky-sphere, Z is the zenith, and N P is the north pole. D , D , , D D , etc. are four
diurnal circles, o n which four positions of the sun, S,, S, etc are indicated.

D2M2D2 is a part of the unmandala, visible.

In all the diurnal circles, the Sun S, etc. rising at D , etc. moving westward, moves a little south,
little by little, until it reaches the meridian point M , etc., where the 'southing' is equal to the latitude,
N N P , and then proceeds to move westward, moving north little by little, setting i n the west at a
point having the same amplitude as the rising point, (assuming that the declination does not
change). O n the two equinoxes, the Sun rises due east (D2) and sets due west (Dj) southing on the
meridian by Z M j (= N N P = ladtude), and thus is always south o f the prime vertical. So, when the
declination is south, the diurnal circle (DjDj) is always south of the prime vertical and so the Sun
(S3) never touches the prime vertical. Even when the declination 8,82 (= M|M2)is greater than the
ladtude (ZMj) then the Sun is always north of the prime vertical, the diurnal circle D , S ; M | D | being
north of it. It is this that was referred to by us as the case not mentioned by the author, viz. the case
of the declination being north, but still not crossing the prime vertical, the case that is possible in
the southern part o f India. T h e r e is only one case left, that of the Sun's dechnation being north, but
less than the latitude, (e.g. the Sun moving on the diurnal circle D U S M D ) , in which alone the Sun
crosses the prime verdcal as at S.

T h e time by which the S u n rising at D describes the part of the diurnal circle, DS, is to be found.
H e r e there are two parts, the time from D to U which is the half-cara, and the time from U to S, i.e.
the dme after crossing the unmandala, which alone, we have said, has been mendoned explicidy by
the author, and for which alone the rules o f computation have been given by h i m . T h a t is why we
have said that the two dmes should be combined to get the dme after sunrise. O f these, the method
for computing the half-cara has been explained already. Therefore we shall explain the second part
alone.

T h e time to move from U to S i n the d i u r n a l circle is clearly the time to move from D2 to S2 on
the celestial equator, and given by the arc Da Sj which is to be got by solving the spherical triangle
I V . 34 IV. T H R E E PROBLEMS 109

SS2D2, right angled at Sj. SSg is the declination. A n g l e S2D2S = ZM2 = ladtude. Therefore, from the
fundamental formula I V ,

sin D2S2 = Cos S2D2S X sin SS2 X radius 4- (sin S2D2S.COS SSj)
= Cos lat X sin dec X radius -r- (sin lat.X cos dec.)
= sin colat X sin dec X radius H- (sin latx day-diameter/2)
= sin colat X sin dec x 240' X (sin lat.x day-diameter)

(From sin DgS, arc D2S2is found and converted into time at 10 vinddis per degree, as mentioned
before.)

We shall prove the author's method by showing that his formula is equal to this. T h e author's
formula is:

Sin D2S2 = V s i n ' alt, at prime-vertical - s i n ' dec X 240 ^ day-diameter

= Vsin' dec X 120' -r- s i n ' lat - s i n ' dec x 240 ^ day-diameter
(. sin D2S = sin SS; sin S2D2S, by fundamental formula II)
= V (sin' dec (120' -- s i n ' lat) ^ s i n ' lat X 240 ^ day-diameter.
= V sin' dec. s i n ' colat -r- s i n ' lat X 240 -4- day-diameter).
= sin dec x si 1 colat X 240 (sin lat x day-diameter)

This is identical with the formula derived by us. (The author himself will be giving this form i n
the next verse.)

We shall now show how the formula for the condensed work is got. T h e formula for half-cara is:

Sin half-cara = sin dec X sin lat X 240' (sin colat X day-diameter)

Multiplying the numerator and the denominator of the formula arrived at by (sin lat X sin colat),
we have.
Sin Rt. asc. = sin declination X sin lat X s i n ' colat X 240 -r- (sin' lat X day-diameter X sin colat)
sin half-cara X s i n ' colat -r- sin'lat, given by us.
Again, s i n ' colat -j- s i n ' lat.
= 120' X 12 -i- equinoctial hypotenuse' -r- (120' X equinoctial shadow -H equinocdal hypotenuse)'
= 12'/equinoctial shadow'
= 144 square o f equinoctial shadow.
So this can be substituted for s i n ' colat s i n ' lat.

It must be noted that i f the declination is greater than ladtude, i.e. i f sin dec > sin lat, then sin
colat > day-diameter. Therefore sin rt. asc. > 120', for which there is no arc, which means that at
no aldtude, or at no time does the Sun cross the prime verdcal. T h i s is what was referred to earlier
and here shown mathematically.

34. Multiply sine declination by 240 and again by sin co-latitude and divide by
the product of the sine of latitude and day-diameter. F i n d its arc in
degrees and divide by six. (The time in nadis, taken by the Sun to move from
110 PANC;ASIDDHA.\TIkA IV. 35

the unmandala to the p r i m e v e r t i c a l is got.) A d d to it the t i m e o f half-cara. T h i s

is the t i m e f r o m sunrise for the S u n to r e a c h the p r i m e v e r t i c a l .
T h e following is the work:

(i) Sin (arc corresponding to time from unmandala to prime vertical) = 240 ' X sin dec X colat
(sin lat X day-diameter)
(ii) T h e arc in degrees of (i) is to be got. Dividing by 6, the time in nddis is got.
(iii) T h e time got by (ii) -I- the half-cara is the time after sunrise, for the Sun to cross the prime
vertical.

Note that the formula here given is what we arrived at earlier, as what the author's formula
reduces to in verses 32-33. T h e n , why is this repetition? In the previous two verses, the work was
not given clearly and fully. Here it is clear and full.
Now for the reading: F r o m the words khajinaghni krdntijyd lambaghni, it is clear that the produc
of two sines must be the divisor. Therefore, we have corrected dhruvaguna dyudairghyahrtd into
dhnivaguna-dyudairghya-hatd, which is otherwise also a better reading. Other small corrections have
been made according to the idea intended to be expressed, and according'to syntax. T h u s it is
clearly seen that in the work sin colat appears as part of the numerator, and sin lat. as part of the
denominator, from which it can be seen clearly that the formula is concerned with finding the dme
of the Sun's rise from unmandala to the prime vertical, and not the half-cara. T h e mention of the
half-cara here is just to say that it should be added to find the whole dme.

However, both T S and N P have been misled by the mention of the expression 'half-cara' into
thinking that the formula itself is to find the half-cara, with the result that they take the numerator
as the denominator, and the denominator as the numerator, not realising that by their interpreta-
tion the rule for half-cara would be a repedtion, because in I V . 26 also the same has been given, and
in the same form, which N P , too, have, noticed and observe: "This in fact, is only a repetition of I V .
26. It is here out of place." (pt.II, p.43). But it may be asked whether the work according to our
interpretation is not a repetition of the work of the previous two verses. We say the work as given
here is clear, succinct and full. B u t when what is the use of the two previous verses? T h e work there
given is easy to explain on the basis of the rule for the Rt. ascension o f the ecliptic point, gone
before. O r , that method perhaps is that of the Paulisa, the author giving the same in a better form
here.

T h e example on this has already been worked out i n Example 12.

34a. A l . ^ % r a t ; A 2 . ^ i ^ d. C . D . ^ ? 1 ^
b. C D . (HM^dl ^'^''W. A.ffcng^ A.f^^l^^HI^:; C f ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ K ^ : ;

c. A.d^lMi^l D.f^[fsr]^^^:
I V . 35 IV. IHRF.K I'ROBI.K.MS 111

Great gnomon (Sama-saftku) and its shadow

3 5 . W h e n the S u n is i n the n o r t h e r n h e m i s p h e r e , (i.e. i n the six signs, A r i e s
etc.), m u l t i p l y the sine o f the l o n g i t u d e o f the S u n by the sine o f the m a x i m u m
d e c l i n a t i o n , (i.e. by 4 8 ' 48"), a n d d i v i d e by the sine o f l a t i t u d e . T h e m i n u t e s
so o b t a i n e d are c a l l e d the m i n u t e s o f the ' G r e a t g n o m o n ' o r $anku, (i.e. sine o f
a l d t u d e ) , ( a n d i n this case, the sine o f P r i m e v e r d c a l altitude). F r o m this the
s h a d o w o f the S u n o n the p r i m e v e r t i c a l m u s t be c a l c u l a t e d .

(i) Sin prime vertical altitude = sin Sun's long x 48' 48"-^ sin latitude.
T h i s is the Great gnomon, and the radius is the Great hypotenuse. T h e square root of the square
of the hypotenuse lessened by the square o f the gnomon is the shadow. Therefore the Great shadow
= Vradius' sin ' prime vertical alt.

Therefore, by the similarity between the Great shadow and the shadow triangles, we have the
proportion. Great gnomon: Great shadow :: Twelve unit gnomon: shadow. F r o m this, the
required,
(ii) Shadow = 12 x V 120' - s i n ' prime vertical alt. sin prime vertical aldtude.

Example 13. The longitude of the Sun is rdsi 1-0. The latitude is 30. Find the Great gnomon of the Sun at
prime vertical, and thereby the gnomonic shadow at that time.

(i) T h e Great gnomon = sin prime vertical altitude

= Sin Sun's longitude X 48' 48" sin ladtude
= 60' X 48' 48" 4- 60' = 48' 48".

(ii) Shadow = 12 X V120' - 48' 48"' ^ 48' 48"

= 12 X 109' 38" H - 4 8 ' 4 8 "
= 12 X 109 19/30 4- (61/L50) = 1644 - 30 ^ 61
= 26 units and 58 parts, angulas and vyangulas

T h e equation (i) can be written as.

Sin prime vertical alt. = sin Sun's l o n g . X sin max. dec. sin lat. ' *^
= sin Sun's long. X sin max. dec x radius ^ (sin lat x radius) Kig. IV. Vi
= (sin Sun's long. X sin max. dec -H radius) x (radius X sin lat)

Here, it can be shown that sin Sun's long x sin max. dec radius = d e c , thus:

Sin Sun's l o n g . X sin max. dec radius

= sin Sun's l o n g . X 48' 48" ^ 120'
= sin Sun's long^x 61/150
= sindc. (by I V . 16).
O r , from Fig. 13, thus:
In the triangle right-angled at R, rS is the Sun's long, and SR is the declination o f the Sun. SrR
is the m a x i m u m declination. B y fundamental formula II,
sin rS x sin SrR 4- radius = sin SR.
.-.sin Sun's long x sin max. dec ^ radius = sin dec.

35. Quotedby Utpala o n B S 2, p.42

35b. A.+ISlTli'Juil d. A.*liy<rlsJ|A||; U . ^ t T o g ^ ^
112 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 37

N o w we shall show that sin prime vertical alt = sin dec X radius ^ sin lat. In Fig. 12, SZD., is the
prime vertical, and the part DgS is the altitude of the Sun S, and the sine of the altitude is to be
found. But, sin D2S = Cos SZ, since DgZ = 90', and SZ = 90 - D2S. Observe the triangle S Z N P ,
right angled at Z. Here, Z N P is the co-latitude. S N P = 90 - SS,,, (. N P S, = 90).
Now, from fundamental formula i ,
cos SZ = cos S N P X radius ^ cos Z N P .
.-.sin Pv alt = cos (90 - dec) X radius ^ cos co-lat
= sin dec X radius sin (90 - colat)
= sin dec x radius sin lat.
As stated earUer, the Sun crossing the prime vertical can occur, i f at all, only when it is in the
northern hemisphere, (of course for north-latitudes) and this is mentioned in the verse by uttara-
gole.
It should be noted that it is this sin pv. alt that is asked to be derived i n I V . 32 by the statement:
istottaragoldpakramamsakajydm khabhaskarabhystam hrtvdksajivaya, which can be seen by comparing
the work. Only, the namd Sama-sanku (i.e. sin pv.alt.) is not mendoned there. So, the arrangement
would have been better i f the author had first given the formula for sin pv.alt, and then given the
dme o f crossing the prime vertical by either I V . 34 or I V . 32-33, and, last of all, the shadow of the
Sun on prime verdcal. B u t the great transcend all restricdon! O r , there is plenty of all sorts of errors
committed by scribes in this part of the text, as we have reason to think.

Astronomer's qualifications
36. Only he is fit to be called an expert astronomer knowing the problems
dealing with the Sun, who can compute the time of the Sun crossing the prime
vertical, and prove his method mathematically and graphically.

37. Even a person with very little knowledge can, by using pieces of pot-
sherds, and strokes tackle (by means of computation) problems like finding
the Sun's motion in a desired number of days, given the motion is twelve rdsis
per year.

T h e idea is that anybody can tackle problems depending on mere proportion. O n l y an expert can
understand how to solve difficult problems Hke computing the time of the Sun's crossing the prime
vertical, and prove the soundness o f his method by means of graphical representations.

36. Quoted by Utpala on i3S 2, p.42 b. A.%?II; P. U . M . A.*<ird4f<*

a. A . e R I # 37b. A.cRt
I V . 39 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 113

Gnomonic shadow and the prime vertical

38. O n a circle w i t h the east-west l i n e d r a w n , a n d the d i r e c t i o n s m a r k e d ,
( a c c o r d i n g to I V . 19), the t i m e w h e n the g n o m o n i c s h a d o w perfectly c o i n -
cides w i t h the east-west l i n e is the t i m e o f the S u n c r o s s i n g the p r i m e v e r t i c a l .

T h e idea is that i f this time is found by measuring instruments, compared with the computed
time and the agreement shown, people will acquire faith in the method.

It can be shown that when the Sun is on the prime vertical, the gnomonic shadow must be along
the east-west line. T h e prime vertical is the vertical great circle of the sky-sphere, passing through
the east-west points and the zenith, and therefore the east-west line forms the intersecdon of this
vertical plane and the plane of the horizon which is horizontal. As the gnomon standing vertical
and also the Sun on the prime vertical lie i n the vertical plane, the shadow (intercepted by the hori-
zontal plane) must also lie on the vertical plane, and therefore must fall on the east-west line, which
is the intersection of the two planes.

Agra : Sine amplitude

39. M u l t i p l y the S u n ' s d e c l i n a t i o n by the r a d i u s a n d d i v i d e by the sine o f co-
l a d t u d e , a n d find the sine (of the a m p H t u d e o f the r i s i n g o r setting p o i n t ,
c a l l e d Agra). A t a p o i n t distant by this a m o u n t f r o m the east-west l i n e (accord-
i n g to the d e c l i n a t i o n , n o r t h o r south) the S u n rises o r sets.

Agra, (i.e. sine amplitude) = sin dec X radius sin colat. F i n d the arc of this sine. By an angle
equal to this from the east to west point does the Sun rise or set on the horizon.
Example 14. The latitude of a place is 60. The longitude of the Sun is rdsi 4-0. Find the direction of rising
or setting of the Sun.
First, sin declination is to be found. As the Sun is in the second quadrant. Sin rdsi 4-0 = Sin rdsi
2-0 = 103' 55". Sin dec = 103' 55" X 61/150 = 42' 15", and this declination is north.
Sin amplitude = 42' 15" x 120' -f- sin (90 - 60)
= 42' 15" X 120' X 60' = 84' 30".
= 84' 30".
38. Quoted by Utpala o n B S 2, p.41. 39a. A.^^qM; D . ^
38a. A . f f c l f ^ l ^ b. A . ^ T O ^ ; D.5ziimw(^) el^*ixt)*iiii^j,:
c. A . ? l f : d. Al.'fralcqi; A2.'f#T^correctedto^THl^ I
114 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 40

T h e arc o f 84' 30" is 44 4 6 ' . Therefore the Sun rises at a point 44 46' north o f the east point,
and sets at a point 44 46" north of the west point, (assuming that the declinauon has not changed).

T h e formula for amplitude is got thus: See Fig. 12. T a k e S, as the Sun on the diurnal circle north
of equator. T h e n SjSg is the declination o f the Sun, D,D2 is the amplitude o f sunrise. F r o m the
figure it can be seen, D i D j = 90 N D , Therefore sin D j D j = Cos N D , . F r o m the right angled
triangle N D N P i n the figure, Cos N D can be got thus: By the fundamental formula I,

Cos N D , = 120' X Cos D , N P Cos N N P .

But, Cos D , N P = Cos S, N P = Cos (90 - 8,8^) = sin S,S2
= sin 8,82
Cos N N P = sin (90 - N N P ) = sin colat.
.-. Sin amplitude = 120' X sin dec ^ sin colat.

W h e n the Sun is south o f the celestial equator, (e.g. S3 i n the figure), D , is the rising point, and
D2D3 is the amplitude. Its sine is got thus, from the triangle, DzDjE, right-angled at E. By the funda-
mental formula II,

Sin D2D3 = sin ED3 x radius 4- sin angle D j D j E ,

Here, ED3 is the declination.
DjDsE = 90 - ED2Z = 90 - lat.
.-.sin amplitude = sin declination X radius 4- sin (90 lat)
= sin dec X radius ^ sin co-lat., which is the formula given.

^ItTT 'iSl^'Ht thlV^^l d M c h 1 ^ [ ^ ] (m) Wl I

^ ^ c l f d f ^ ^ H I ('^%^) % 5 ^ W r n T : ^ : \\>io II

Latitude from A g r a
40. Multiply sine declination by 120 and divide by the sine of amplitude. T h e
sine of co-latitude is got. Find its arc in degrees. Deduct the degrees from 90.
T h e remainder are the degrees of latitude.

Now, sin co-lat = 120' X sin dec. -r- sin amplitude.

F r o m this, the arc, co-lat is got. 90 colatitude = latitude, as already stated i n (IV. 28).

F r o m the formula o f the previous verse.

Sin amp = radius X sin dec sin co-lat.
Sin colat = radius X sin dec -j- sin amp. = 120' X sin dec -^ sin amp.

F r o m the amplitude of the setting Sun also, the latitude can thus be found. T h e amplitude can
be marked o n a circle with the directions already marked by the observation o f sunrise or sunset.

40a. A.W- A.m^

b. A 1 . ^ ( A 2 . ^ corrected to ^ )
c-d. A . # 1 T ^ ^ W T I :
IV. 43 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 115

The sine o f amplitude to be used i n the formula can be got by measuring the arc of amplitude, or
the distance o f the point, from the east-west line.
Example 15. Sine declination is 42' 15". Sine amplitude is 84' 3ff'. Find the latitude.

From the formula, sin. colat = 120' x 4 2 ' 15" H- 84' 30" = 6 0 ' . Coladtude arc o f this, i.e. 30,
ladtude = 90 - 30 = 60.

Shadow at desired time

41. T o find the gnomonic shadow caused by the Sun at any time: Take the
cara in vinddis and divide by 20. Degrees of half-cara are obtained. Place the
degrees in two places. Convert the time from sunrise in nddis into degrees by
multiplying by 6. From these degrees, deduct or add the half-cara degrees
according as the sun is in the six signs beginning with Mesa or in the six signs
beginning with T u l a , respectively.

42. Find the sine of the resulting degrees, and add or subtract this from the
sine of the half-cara kept apart in the second place, according as the Sun is in
the 6 signs Mesa etc., or in the six signs T u l a etc. (The result is a sine. If the
half-cara degrees cannot be deducted from the time converted into degrees,
then simply find the sine of the degrees of sine, and take it for further work.)

43. Multiply this sine by the sine of colatitude and the day-diameter and
divide by 28,800. T h e result is sine altitude of the Sun.

41-44. Quoted by Utpala o n B S 2, p.61.

41b. A.^El^?it?ltfePR 43a. A.*--^! ^-^1
c. A.m^ b. A.^!l)t^H|c|; U.^T^

42a. A. fl^i A . Haplographical omission of

b. A . 4 l ( ^ d l ^ ^ C.D.4irHdNj<?ti^a 43 c-d, 44 and 45a-b:
c. A . ^ ^ ; C-D. U.%^^ [... ci<s(<^>l'i] RJaiq^ Hence they are added
d. A.MWWIAM+T^OMI ( A 2 . ^ f ^ ) here from Utpala's quotaton thereof.
10
116 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 44

44. S q u a r e this a n d d e d u c t f r o m 14,400. T a k e its square r o o t , m u l d p l y this

by twelve, a n d d i v i d e by sine a l t i t u d e . T h e result is the l e n g t h o f the shadow
o f the t w e l v e - d i g i t g n o m o n .

T h e following are the steps i n the work:

(i) Sine altitude = {sine (degrees of the + degrees of half-cara) sine half-cara} X sin colat X
day-diameter -r 28,800. (Here, of + or , the upper sign should be taken for the 6 signs Mesa ^ t c ,
and the lower for the 6 signs T u l a etc.)

(ii) T h e shadow = 12 X V 14,400 - s i n ' a l t i t u d e sin altitude

Example 16(a). At a certain place where the sine of the co-latitude (i.e. cos. lat.) is 103' 55", when the Sun
is in the 6 signs from Mesa on a particular day, the cara is 200 vinddis, and the day-diameter is 229' 51'. Find
the length of the shadow at 8 nddis from Sunrise.

(i) Degrees of half-cara = 200 ^ 20 = 10.

Degrees of time = 8 x 6 = 48.
As the Sun is i n the six signs from Mesa, deducting 10 from 48, we get 38. Sine 38 = 73' 35".
The sine o f the half-cara, i.e. sin 10 = 20' 50". A d d i n g the two signs, (since the Sun is from Mesa),
73' 35" + 20' 50" = 94' 25".
Sine altitude = 94' 25" x 229' 51" x 103' 55" ^ 28,800 = 78' 19"

(ii) T h e shadow = 12 x V 1 4 , 4 0 0 - 78' 19"^ 78' 19" = 13 ang 56 vya^.

Example 16 (b). At the same place, on the same day, find the shadow at one nddi after sunrise.

(i) T h e degrees o f half-cara (already found) = 10. T h e degrees of time = 1 x 6 = 6. T h e half-

cara degrees have to be deducted, but cannot be deducted, being greater. Therefore, taking the
sine of the 6 alone, we have 12' 32". Sin altitude = 12' 32" X 229' 51" X 103' 55" ^ 22,800 = 10'
24".

(ii) shadow X 12 x V 1 4 , 4 0 0 - 10' 24"' ^ 10' 24" = 137 angulas 57 vyangulas.

But it should be mentioned here, that the author's instruction for the case when the degrees of
half-cara cannot be deducted from the degrees of time, will give only a rough result. This will not
matter m u c h i n places where the degrees of half-cara is small, as i n India, and therefore given by
the author.

For correctness, the following instruction is to be followed. If the degrees of half-cara cannot be
deducted from the degrees of time, deduct the degrees of time from the degrees of half-cara, find
its sine, and deduct this from the sine o f half-cara. T h i s sine should be multiplied by sin colat. etc.
and sine altitude is to be got. Because this will not produce m u c h differences in our country, the
author has not given this detail. (Even if the cara is 5 nddis the difference in sin alt. will be only 15'.)
Further, the measurement of long shadows cannot be accurate, and any inaccuracy caused by the
author's rough work will be submerged i n the inaccuracy of measurement.

44a. C.D.ft^TRlf^
I V . 44 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 117

We have mentioned that the author's rough procedure is indicated only when the S u n is i n the
six signs from Mesa, because only then have we to deduct the degrees o f half-cara, and the question,
what is to be done when the half-cora is greater, arises. A s for the subtraction o f sine half-caro i n the
six signs from T u l a , that will always be less, and the question cannot arise.

T S have not understood the author here, and say something unconnected and useless. (See their
commentary p.25, and English Translation, pp.34-35).

T h e rules, (for the S u n i n the northern hemisphere) can be derived thus: (see fig. 14.)
N
Z = Zenith
P = N o r t h pole
E = East point
S = Sun
D D ' = D i u r n a l Circle
A S = Altitude o f the S u n
ZS = zenith distance of the Sun.
E P = Unmandalam E
Sin A S = Sin aldtude of the S u n
= Sankuliptds (or Mahd Safiku
or Great gnomon)/120

By the well-known formula o f the spherical triangle.

Sin altitude of the S u n = sin A S = cos ZS
= cos S P. cos Z P -I- sin S P. sin Z P. cos PZ.
S

Here, using the tabular sines, j,.^

sin S P = dyujyd/120 = diameter of the diurnal circle/240,

sin Z P = sin co-latitude = lambajyd/120.

cos S P = sin (90 - SP) = sin dechnation of the Sun = krdntijyd/120.

cos Z P = sin latitude = aksajyd/120.

cos S PZ = sin S P E = sin (D PS - D PE) = sin (degrees of the taken time - degrees o f half-cara)
.-. Sankuliptds (i.e. Great gnomon) = sin declination X sin latitude 120 + day-diameter X sin
co-latitude X sin (degrees o f taken dme - degrees of half-cara) 28,800.
= day-diameter X sin colatitude X {sin (degrees of taken d m e - d e g r e e s of half-cara)-I- sin decli-
nation X sin latitude x 240 (day-diameter X sin colatitude)} 28,800

= day-diameter X sin colat. {sin (degrees o f taken time - degrees o f half-cara) -I- sin half-cara}
4- 28,800

= rule (i) applied to S u n i n the northern hemisphere.

In the same manner, the rule can be proved for the S u n i n the southern hemisphere, but here
the degrees o f half-cara is first to be added (instead o f being subtracted) to the degrees of dme, and
sin half-cara is to be subtracted instead o f being added, because here, S P E = D PS -I- D P E , and
these changes have to be made accordingly.
118 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A

Rule (ii) is derived from the Great gnomon thus: T h e radius itself being the Great hypotenuse,
and the Great gnomon and the Great shadow (this is 120 cos altitude or 120 sin zenith distance) are
the sides o f the right angled triangle, we have:

Great shadow = V 120' Great g n o m o n '

T h e n the shadow o f the 12 digit gnomon is found by the proportion: Great gnomon: Great
shadow:: 12 digit gnomon : shadow, and we get the rule (ii), shadow = 12 X V 14,400 - Great gnomon'
^ Great gnomon.

In this connection, it may be noted that later authors like Bhaskaracarya II give different terms
to different sections o f the work. F o r instance they call sin (degrees o f taken time + degrees of half-
cara) as Sutram. Sutram half-cara is called by them Istantyd. T h e y call Istdntyd x day-diameter -r
240 as Istahrti. T h e n from htahriti the Sartkulipta is obtained by the proportion: 120: sin colat::
Istahriti: Sankuliptd, by the similarity o f the tksdksetras.

' y i 9 i c w ( % ) f f t ( ^ * ) (i^r) R i c T 3 ^ w i ^ ||>JM

T i m e after sunrise

4 5 . S q u a r e the s h a d o w m e a s u r e d i n d i g i t s , a d d 144, a n d get its square root.

M u l t i p l y this by the sine o f c o - l a t i t u d e a n d by this p r o d u c t d i v i d e 1,72,800.
T h e q u o t i e n t is c a l l e d the T i r s t sine'.

46. N o w , m u l t i p l y the sine o f d e c l i n a t i o n o f the S u n by the sine o f latitude

a n d d i v i d e b y the sine o f c o - l a t i t u d e . ( L e t us call this by its actual n a m e , the
E a r t h - s i n e . ) P l a c e this E a r t h - s i n e i n two places. I n one place, subtract this f r o m
o r a d d this to the 'first sine', a c c o r d i n g as the S u n is i n the n o r t h e r n o r south-
ern hemisphere.

47. T h i s result, a n d the E a r t h - s i n e , are e a c h to be m u l t i p l i e d by 2 4 0 a n d

d i v i d e d by the d a y - d i a m e t e r . T h e s e are t w o sines. F i n d the arcs o f e a c h o f
these. W h e n the S u n is i n the n o r t h e r n h e m i s p h e r e a d d the two arcs. O t h e r -
wise subtract o n e f r o m the o t h e r . D i v i d e t h e r e s u l t by 6. T h e r e s u l t is the t i m e
i n nadis after s u n r i s e .
45c. A . ^ a . A . g : f t ^ C.g#^:; D . ^ 47a. A.?lfe#
46a. A.d^i^ltbipil^iw) b. A . al^^^^WMlRil^
c. A . f ^ ^ c. A . f ^ ^
d. A.^MI^HI'I fl^d d. A . i ^ p ^ l ; C . D . ^ f ^ . A.eWI
IV.47 IV. T H R E E PROBLEMS 119

The following are the steps in the work to be done:

(i) T h e Tirst sine' = 1,72,800 ^ (sin coladtude x V144 + shadow'
(ii) T h e Earth-sine (which is to be placed i n two places) = sin ladtude X sin declination 4- sin co-
latitude.
(iii) sine I = (Tirst sine' + Earth-sine) X 240 day-diameter

(iv) sine II = Earth-sine X 240 day-diameter.

(v) Find arc I and arc II of sin I and sin II

The desired dme in nddis = arc 1/6 arc II/6. In (iii) and (v) the upper sign is to be taken for the
Sun in the six signs from Aries, i.e. for the Sun in the northern hemisphere; otherwise the lower
sign is to be taken.

It must be added here, ui accordance witn what was said in the same context i n getdng the
shadow from the time, that i f the Tirst sine' is less than ihe Earth-sine and therefore the Earth-sine
cannot be deducted in (iii), the T i r s t sine' is to be deducted from the Earth-sine, and the result, i.e.
sine I, is to taken as negative. T h e n in (v) the nddis got from this, viz. arc 1/6, are also negative, and
therefore deducted from arc II/6, to get the dme. H e r e too, i f the ladtude o f the place is not too
high, the reverse of the author's method i n the context can be used without any appreciable error,
though this has not been mentioned here by the author. T h i s is the work to be done: Here the
Earth-sine is greater than the T i r s t sine'; omit the Earth-sine and do (iii) and (v) with the Tirst sine'
alone, i.e. muldply the Tirst siue' by 240, divide by the day-diameter, get the arc of this, and divide
by 6 and thus to get the nddis after sunrise.

The following points must be noted here. In the work of computing the nddis from the shadow,
as the exact time is not known, the exact Sun and therefrom the exact declination cannot be known,
and we have to use the declination of the S u n at sunrise or sunset. T h e r e may be a small error o n
account of this. This can be avoided by repeating the work using the declination of the Sun for the
computed time. It has not been specifically mentioned by the author because this can be inferred
by the computer. Secondly, the author has given all this for places i n the northern hemisphere in
the forenoon. For places i n the southern hemisphere and the afternoon, changes have to be made
in the work, which have not been given by the author. It must also be noted that the ancients con-
sidered the computation of the time from the shadow or the shadow from the time as very impor-
tant because this was the best means available to them of knowing the times of births and muhurtas.

Example 17 (a) For a place (in the northern hemisphere) sin lat. is 60', and therefrom sin colat is 103' 55".
On a particular day the sin declination is 34' 30", (the sun being in the 6 signs from Aries) and therefore the
day-diameter is 229' 51". Find the time from sunrise if the shadow of the 12 digit gnomon is 13 ang 50
vyangulus.

(i) T i r s t s i n e ' = 1,72,800 ^ ( 1 0 3 ' 5 5 " X VIS 14/15' -I- 144 = 1,72,800 H - ( 1 0 3 ' 5 5 " x 18.389) =
90' 26".

(ii) Earth-sine = 60' X 34' 30" ^ 103' 55" = 19' 55'

(iii) Sine I = (90' 26" - 19' 55") 240 ^ 229' 51" = 73' 38'
(iv) Sine II = 19' 55" X 240 ^ 229' 51" = 20' 48'
120 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV.47

38 3' 9 59'
(v) A r c I = 38 3'. A r c II = 9 59'. T h e time from sunrise in nddis = g + g = 8 nddis.

(Note that this work is the inverse o f example 15 (a). There, 8 nddis were given, and the
shadow 13 ang- 56 vyafig was computed. H e r e , for the shadow 13 ang 56 vyafig, the nddis amounting
to 8 have been computed).

Example 17 (b) For the same place, on the same day, find the time when the shadow is 137 ang 57 vyang.

(i) T i r s t s i n e ' = 1,72,800 H- (103' 55" X V 144 + 137 57/60' = 12' 1".

(ii) Earth-sine = 60' x 34' 30" - 103' 55" = 19' 55".

(iii) Sine I = (12' 1" - 19' 55") X 240 ^ 229' 51" = - 8' 15"

(iv) Sine II = 19' 55" x 240 ^ 229' 51" = 20' 48".

(v) A r c I = - 3 57', A r c II = 9 59'. T h e time from sunrise = - 3 57'/6 -I- 9 59'/6 = 1 nddi.
(Note that is the inverse o f Example 15 (b). T h e r e the shadow 137 ang 57 vyang was computed for
one nddi from sunrise. Here for the same shadow the time one nddi is computed.)

We shall do the same by the inverse operation o f the work previously given by the author: T h e
T i r s t sine', computed is 12' T ' . T h e Earth-sine computed is 19'55",and greater than the T i r s t sine'.
Therefore taking the T i r s t sine' alone, 12' 1" X 240 229' 51" = 12' 33". T h e arc o f this = 6 2'.
Dividing by 6, the time obtained is one nddi and 1/3 vinddi, and neglecting the negligible 1/3 vinddi,
we see the same time is got. F o r proof o f the rules here given, we shall derive these from the rules
for the shadow given the time, as the operation is practically the inverse o f the operation given
there. In the previous work, rule (ii) gives:

12 X V 14,400 - s i n ' altitude sin altitude = shadow.

.-. 144 X (14,400 - s i n ' alt.) = s i n ' alt. = shadow'.
.-. 144 X 14,400 = s i n ' alt. X shadow' 144 s i n ' alt. = s i n ' alt. (shadow' + 144).
.-. 12 X 120 = s i n a l t . x V s h a d o w ' - I - 12'.
.-. 12 X 1 2 0 ^ V shadow'-H 12' _ _ _ _ _ _
= sin alt. = 12 X 120 X 120 x sin colat. -^ (120 X sin colat. X V shadow' + 12'
= T i r s t sine' X sin colat. -i- 120,
(because, 12 X 120 x 120 4- (sin colat x V shadow''-I- 12==) = 1,71,800 (sincolat x Vshadow^' -I- 12')
= T i r s t sine' as given).
Similarly, i n the previous rule (i),
sin alt. = {sine (degrees of time + degrees of half-cara) sin half-cara} x sin colat. X day-diameter
-;- 28,800,
= T i r s t sine' x sin colat. 120.
.-. Tirst sine' X 240 ^ day-diameter = {sin (degrees o f time + degrees o f half-cara) sin half-
cara}.
.-. Tirst sine' X 240 -r- day-diameter + sin half-caro
= sin (degrees o f time + degrees o f half-cara).
.-. T i r s t sine' x 240 H- day-diameter if Earth-sine x 240 4- day-diameter
= sin (degrees o f time + degrees o f half-cora).
.-. (Tirst sine' + earth-sine) X 240 day-diameter
= sin (degrees o f time + degrees o f half-cara)
= sin (degrees o f time after the S u n has touched the unmaridala)
I V . 48 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 121

From the sin degrees of time, and thence by dividing by 6, the time in nddis after the Sun has
touched the unmandala is obtained. T h e addition or subtraction o f the half-cara to this gives the
time from sunrise, to obtain which sin half-cara is got from the Earth-sine, and then its arc, viz the
degrees of half-cara.

T i m e for sunset

4 8 . O r r o u g h l y , m u l t i p l y the d u r a t i o n o f d a y t i m e i n nddis b y 6, a n d d i v i d e b y
the s h a d o w i n c r e a s e d b y 12 a n d d e c r e a s e d b y the m i d d a y s h a d o w o f date. T h e
t i m e f r o m s u n r i s e is got i n the f o r e n o o n , a n d the t i m e to elapse f o r sunset is
o b t a i n e d i n the a f t e r n o o i i .
T h e shadows mentioned here are those of the twelve-digit gnomon and not the shadows of a
person measured by his foot.

T h e rule is the time in nddis = 6 x daytime i n nddis (shadow -f- 12 mid-day shadow).

Example 18. Given the duration of daytime, nddis 33-20, and mid-day shadow, 2 ang 50 vyang. Find the
time when the gnomonic shadow is 13 ang 56 vyang.
T h e time = 6 X 33 1/3 ^ (13 14/15 -f- 12 - 2 5/6)
= 2 0 0 - ^ 2 3 1/10 = n a & 8-37.

T h e data given in the example are for the place and day i n Example 16 (a), and we must get nddis
8, as the time. But we get nddis 8-37. F r o m this we can have an idea of the roughness of this method.
Evidently V M wants us to use this rule i f we feel that this accuracy is sufficient, for, this is easy to
use, provided the daytime and the midday shadow are tabulated beforehand and kept ready.
T h e rule may be explained i n the manner we explained the similar rule with Vdsistha Siddhdnta.
Let us assume, time = x X day-time -j- (shadow mid-day shadow -I- y), where x and y are two con-
stants to be determined. (The daytime occurs as a multiplier i n the rule because, other things being
equal, the time must vary with the daytime. For the deduction o f the mid-day shadow from the
shadow, see the explanation i n the Vdsistha.) A t noon the shadow is equal to the mid-day shadow
of date, and the time is daytime/2. Therefore we have:
X X day time 4- (mid-day shadow - mid-day shadow + y) = daytime/2.

.-. 2x X daytime = daydme x y.

.-. 2x = y.

Therefore, whatever be the multiplier for the daytime, twice that is the constant additive to the
shadow, as in the author's rule here, 6 and 12, respectively. O n l y so far can we go i n the explanation

48. Quotedby Utpala o n B S 2, p.62

48a. A . q < ^ < c t l C D . ^ H \ ^ c. AI.TSRsn; A2.7ransl
b. A . o ^ f t i T H n t d. A . ^ : . A.lTS^
122 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 49

whether actually the constants are 6 and 12, as here or 5 and 10, or some other number and double
that, depends upon the accuracy of the result we get.

For the matter of that there is another rule, very popular and attributed to our author himself
in the following form:
dme = 5 X daydme (shadow - mid-day shadow +10), given by the popular verse:

chdyd nijestd dinamadhyabhdgacchdyonitd diksahitd taydpte \

dine saraghne gatagamyanddih srlmdn Vardho vadati syayuktyd ||

Here too the shadow is that of the 12 digit gnomon. Note that the muldplier here is 5, and the
additive constant double that, viz. 10. Actually, different constants for different places, and for
different dmes, even i f the place is the same, may have to be used i f sufficient accuracy is to be
secured. So the average for a particular region may be used for that region i n the rough rule.

Let us now compute the constants using the data of Example 16 (a), and examine the degree of
accuracy o f the constants 5 and 10 used i n the above verse. In the example we find that the time is
8 nMis for shadow ang 13-56. T h e daytime for the day is nd. 33-20 and mid-day shadow, ang. 2-50,
as we have already given i n Example 17. U s i n g the assumed form,
X X 33 1/3 - (13 14/15 -f- 2x - 2 5/6) = 8.
X X 33 1/3 = 8 (2 X 11 1/10) = 16 X -t- 88 4/5.
17 I / 3 x = 88 4/5.
X = 88 4/5 ^ 17 1/3 = 444 x 3 - (5 x 52) = 5 8/65.

As 8/65 is small, x, the multiplier, may be taken as 5, and y (i.e. 2x) may be taken as 10, with tolerable
accuracy, as V M himself seems to have done i n the popular verse. Let us examine the accuracy
given by this by working Example 17 using this.

T h e time = 5 x 33 1/3 ^ (13 14/15 + 1 0 - 2 5/6) = 500 x 10 -^ (3 x 211)

=nd. 7-54. Note how near this is to the correct 8 nddis, and contrast with the result o f the rule
given by the text, nd. 8-37.
Let us once again examine the relative accuracy by computing the time sought i n the example
under I V . 41-44, from the shadow caused by the S u n o n the prime vertical, at the place and time
of Example 16 (a). T h e prime vertical shadow was given as ang. 17-4. T h e time got there was nd.
6-53. Using the rule of the text, dme = 6 X 33 1/3 H- (17 1/15 - 2 5/6-1- 12) = nd. 7-37, which is far
from the correct nd. 6-53.

U s i n g the popular verse,

dme = 5 X 33 1/3 (17 1/15 - 2 5 / 6 + 10) = nd. 6-53, agreeing exactly with the correct dme.
What are we to conclude from this?

Shadow from time

4 9 . R o u g h l y a g a i n , the s h a d o w c a n be got t h u s f r o m the t i m e : M u l t i p l y the
d a y t i m e by 6, a n d d i v i d e by the t i m e f o r w h i c h the s h a d o w is s o u g h t . A d d the
IV. 50 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 123

mid-day shadow to the result and deduct 12. T h e shadow of the gnomon,
caused by the Sun, is got.

This means: Shadow at any time =6 X daytime 4- the time taken + midday shadow 12.

Example 19. Given daytime = nd. 33-20, mid-day shadow = ang. 2-50, find the shadow at na. 8-0 from
sunrise.
Shadow = 6 X 33 1/3 ^ 8 -H 2 5/6 - 12
= 25 + 2 5/6 - 12 = ang. 15-50.
(Actually the shadow is ang. 13-56, which can be seen from the previous examples).

But i f the constants i n the popular verse, 5 a n d 10, are used, then the rule becomes.
Shadow = 5 X daytime -r- taken time -I- mid-day shadow 10.

Using this, the shadow = 5 X 33 1/3 8 +2 5/6 - 10 = 20 5/6 + 2 5 / 6 - 10 = ang. 13-40.

See how close this is to the correct, 13-56.

Being the inverse of the operation of finding the time from the shadow, this rule can be derived
from the previous rule, viz, 6 x daytime -r- (shadow mid-day shadow + 12) = time in nddis.

.-. 6 x daytime time = shadow mid-day shadow + 1 2 .

.-. shadow = 6 x daytime -r- time + mid-day shadow 12, which is the present rule.

Moon's shadow
50. T o compute the Moon's shadow at any time in the night, the time after
sunset is to be added to the nddis from moonrise to sunset if the M o o n rises in
the day. If the M o o n rises after sunset, the time of moonrise after sunset is to
be subtracted from the taken time. This is to be used as the time taken for
computation, and work done as in the case of the Sun to get the Moon's
shadow.

The work is to be done thus: U p t o the desired time after sunset, the time after moonrise is to be
found, and this time is to take the place o f the time after sunrise i n the work of finding the shadow
as in I V . 41-44. So, for the desired time the Moon's true declination and day-diameter have to be
found and these are to be used i n the place of the Sun's declination and day-diameter. T h e required
cara etc. are to be found using these. A s the nddis pertain to the solar day, they should be made lunar
and used. T h e two examples given hereunder will make the work clear. T h e author's intention is

49. Quoted by Utpala on iJS 2, p.62 50a. A . C . D . ^ . A.^Pr?!

b. A.^^HfegcT. A l . f ^ # n ; A 2 . f t l ^
49a. A.^=nfef^
c. A . ^ ^
b. A . ^ i ^ . A l . ; ^ ; A2.^^
d. A.SRIT
124 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 50

to convey that the inverse process o f finding the dme from the Moon's shadow is also to be done as
from the Sun's. T h e time o f moonrise required i n this work will be given by the author in V . 8-10.
T h e Moon's true declination has been given already i n I V . 16. T h e proof o f the work is similar to
that o f the Sun's. It must be remembered that i n getting the time from the Moon's shadow, succes-
sive approximation has to be done, as i n the case o f the sun, for the same reason.

T h e following should also be noted. If the desired dme after sunset for which the shadow is
sought is less than the dme of moonrise after sunset, the work need not be done. O r i f the moon
sets i n the night before the desired dme, the work need not be done. Obviously, these should be
examined before commencing the work. M u c h has to be said here, for which the reader is referred
to works like the Siddhdnta Siromani.

Example 20. The sine of latitude of a place is 45' 56", and thence the sine of colatitude 110' 52". There, on
a particular day the daytime is nd. 32-24. The moonrise is at nd. 27-18 after sunrise. At that time the Moon's
true declination is 15 south, (i.e. the Moon is in the southern hemisphere). Since Moon's declination is 31' 4",
and thence the day-diameter 231' 50". The cara-vinddis from these for the day is 132. The lunar day, i.e. the
duration ofmoonrise to moonrise is 62 nddis. Compute the shadow caused by the Moon at nd, 4-8 after sunset

T h e time to be taken for computation = the time from moonrise to the given time

= the time from moonrise to sunset -t-the given time (after sunset)
= nd. 32-24 - nd. 27-18 4-8
= nd. 9-14.
T h e Moon's cara-vinddis = 1 3 2 , given.

Both should be converted to the lunar measure.

For 62 nddis there is one lunar day, i.e. 60 lunar nddis; so for nd. 9-14, there are 9-14 X 60/62 =
8-56 lunar nddis.

Converdng into degrees, we have (8-56) X 6 = 53 36'.

Similarly, the cara-vinddis made lunar = 132 X 60/62 = 128.

Converted into degrees, 128/20 = 6 24'.

Now, using the rules o f verses 40-44,

(i) Sin altitude = {sin (53 36' -t- 6 24') - sin 6 24')} X 231' 50" x 110' 52" - 28,800 (the upper
sign is taken because the M o o n is i n the southern hemisphere).
= (sin 60 - sin 6 24') x 231' 50" x 110' 52" -f- 28,800
= (103' 55" - 13' 23") 231' 50" x 110' 52" 28,800
= 9 0 ' 32" X 231' 50" x 110' 52" 4- 28,800
= 80' 49".

(ii) gnomonic shadow caused by the M o o n = 12 V 14,400 - 8 0 ' 49"' ^ 8 0 ' 49" = ang. 13, vyang
II.

Example 21. For the same place and the same time of Example 20, find the time, given the shadow caused
by the Moon is ang. 13-11, extending the method of verse 45-47 to the Moon.

T h e required elements already given i n Example 20 are: sin lat. 45' 56", sin colat. 110' 52", sin
Moon's declination 3 1 ' 4", sin Moon's day-diameter 231' 50", time o f moonrise nd. 27-18 after sun-
rise, duration o f the day nd. 32-24, a n d the duration o f the lunar day = 62 nddis.
I V . 51 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 125

(i) 'Firstsine'= 1,72,800 ^ ( 1 1 0 ' 5 2 " x V 13 11/60 + 12') = 87' 26".

(ii) Earth-sine = 45' 56" X 3 1 ' 4" - M 1 0 ' 52" = 12' 52"
(iii) Sine I = (87' 26" + 12' 52") x 240 -f- 231' 50" = 103' 55", (since the M o o n is i n the southern
hemisphere).
(iv) Sine II = 12' 52" x 240' ^ 231' 50" = 13' 23".
(v) A r c sine I = 60. A r c sin II = 6 24'. T h e time of shadow after moonrise = (60 - 6 24')/6
= 53 36'/6 = na. 8-56, (Moon being i n the southern hemisphere).
This time pertains to the lunar sdvana day, and converted into ordinary (i.e. solar) sdvana, the
time after moonrise = 8-56 X 62 60 = nd. 9-14.
T h e time from sunrise = nd. 27-18 + nd. 9-14 = nd. 36-32.
T h e time from sunset = nd. 36-32 - nd. 32-24 = nd. 4-8.

T h e result is correct, because in Example 20, we took this same time and got the shadow ang.
13-11, which we have used i n this example.

5 1 . F o r the others, (i.e. for the l u m i n a r i e s o t h e r t h a n the S u n a n d the M o o n ,

viz. the star-planets) also, d e t e r m i n i n g the c o r r e s p o n d i n g o p e r a t i o n s , a n d
u s i n g t h e i r respective latitude a n d d a y - d i a m e t e r , a n d g e t t i n g the cara-nddis
etc. (in terms o f t h e i r respective sdvana days), (not o n l y the w o r k o f finding the
s h a d o w for the g i v e n t i m e a n d t i m e f o r the g i v e n s h a d o w as above, b u t also)
t h e i r daily risings a n d settings a n d r e d u c t i o n to d i f f e r e n t localities s h o u l d be
thought out a n d done.
T h e following is the idea. T h e computation o f the rising and setting o f the Sun has been given
already in this chapter. T h e Moon's rising and setting will be given below, in chapter V . Understanding
the nature of the operation from these and taking the star-planets corrected to the different longi-
tudes and computing their respective sdvana days and cara-vinddis, using their latitudes to get their
true declinations and day-diameters, everything done i n connection with the Sun and the M o o n
should be done i n connection with the star-planets also.
It is from this that we understand that i n the work of computing the Moon's shadow we have to
use the true declination, day-diameter, and time measured i n the Moon's sdvana day, as we have
done already. Therefore this verse may also be taken as an extension of the previous verse.
Here T S and N P have done a lot of emendations that are unnecessary for, without those emen-
dations we get the same idea as they have given, at such pains.

51a. D.^Enpn^[T]g^[f^]ftfRr A . C . D . o m ^ . A . D . I ^ ^ C.l^m^

b. A . ^ q w p w i r ; c.^wm*Mil<; D . ^ ^ q R m q c. C.q^^lsrftT:; D . ^ y ^ c j l ^ l t l :
126 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 54

[ g r a m ; id;ct44iM<H]

&t|cMlcii^j,(uwi (wm:) I I \-R

(^T^^)lot^mlTT(lrr:) g5t(Sn) ' ^ ^ ^ \\

Directions from shadow

5 2 . T w e l v e times the r a d i u s (i.e. 1440) is to be d i v i d e d by the ' S h a d o w -

h y p o t e n u s e ' , i.e. the r o o t o f the s u m o f the squares o f the s h a d o w a n d 12. T h i s
m u l t i p l i e d by sine l a t i t u d e a n d d i v i d e d by sin co-latitude a n d d i v i d e d by sin
c o - l a t i t u d e is c a l l e d Suryagra (otherwise w e l l - k n o w n as Sankvagram o r ian-
kutalam).

5 3 . F r o m this Suryagra, the sine o f the Sun's d e c l i n a t i o n d i v i d e d by the sine

o f co-latitude ( w h i c h is o t h e r w i s e c a l l e d Agra) s h o u l d be d e d u c t e d o r a d d e d ,
a c c o r d i n g as the S u n is i n the six signs b e g i n n i n g w i t h A r i e s , o r the six signs
b e g i n n i n g w i t h L i b r a , (i.e. a c c o r d i n g as the d e c l i n a t i o n is n o r t h o r south). T h e
result is to be m u l t i p l i e d by the ' S h a d o w - h y p o t e n u s e ' a n d d i v i d e d by the
r a d i u s , (i.e. b y 120).

54. W h a t is o b t a i n e d are t e r m e d Koti, (or ' P e r p e n d i c u l a r ' ) , m e a s u r e d i n

digits. T h e r o o t o f the square o f the Koti d e d u c t e d f r o m the square o f the
s h a d o w is c a l l e d Baku (or 'Base'.) a n d the Koti is to be so c o n s t r u c t e d as to be
p e r p e n d i c u l a r to the 'Base', (whose e x t e n s i o n b o t h ways is the p r i m e vertical).
T h u s the d i r e c t i o n s are got.

T h e following are the steps i n the work:

(i) Shadow hypotenuse = V shadow' + 144

(ii) Suryagra 12 X 120 X sin latitude -r- (shadow hypotenuse X sin colat.)
(iii) Agra or A m p l i t u d e = sin max. dec. of Sun x sin Sun's long, -f- sin colat. = sin dec. of Sun X
120 H- sin colat. (The declination is north if the Sun is in the six signs from Aries, and south otherwise)

52a-b. A . C . D . ^ ( C D . ^ T I ^ ) ' ^ i g ^ W * c. A.HI^leIT^

b. D . # I ( P r a i ] t ^ | 54a. A . ^
d. A.-?IfPW)I b. A.clSRI. A.om-J?^^
53a. A.+l^ill4>;C.D.+l8l^dl4. c. A L ^ I ^ H ^ ^ t ; A 2 . ^ ^ l l ? ^
b. A.R<r^d^l d. A.ftld^^lti^^Jj"!. C.D.^OTPff
I V . 54 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 127

(iv) {Suryagra + Agra X shadow hyp. 120 = 'Perpendicular' (of the upper sign is for north
declination, and the lower for south. If the 'Perpendicular' got is positive then it is north, if negative,
south.)
(v) V shadow' - Perpendicular'* = Base

Here, steps (ii), (iii) and (iv) can be simplified and put in the form: 'Perpendicular' = (12 X sine
latitude + shadow hypotenuse x sin dechnation) -^ sin colat, (of + , the upper sign is for north decli-
nation and the lower for south. As already said, the Perpendicular obtained is north i f positive and
south i f negative. If, when the declination is north. Shadow hypotenuse X sin declination > 12 x
sin latitude, then deduct the less from the greater and take it as negative, i.e. take the resulting
Perpendicular as south.)

Base

Fig. IV. 15

Example 22. The latitude of a place is 3(f, whence sin lat = 60', and sin colat = 103' 55". The Sun at the
time of taking the shadow = rdsi 1-15, whence sin Sun's long = 84' 51", sin declination = 48' 48" X 84' 51",
-r 120 == 34' 30", (north, as the Sun is in the first 6 signs). For this place and time if the shadow is 5 digits,
find the direction of the shadow.

(i) shadow hypotenuse = V 5 ' -I- 144 = 13.

(ii) Silrydgrd = 12 X 120 X 60 (13 X 103' 55") = 63' 57".2

(iii) Agra = 48' 48" X 84' 51" ^ 103' 55" = 34' 30" x 120 ^ 103' 55" = 39' 51".4

(iv) 'Perpendicular' = (63' 57" - 39' 51") X 13 - i - 120 = ang. 2-36.6

(The 'Perpendicular' is north, as the result is positive)

(v) T h e 'Base' = V 5 ' - (2 - 36.6)' = ang. 4-16.

Or, using the simplified form, the Shadow-hypotenuse, 13 ang, being known, 'Perpendicular' =
(12 X 60' - 13 X 34' 30") ^ 103' 55" = 271' 30" 103' 55" = ang. 2-36.6. T h e n the 'Base' is calcu-
lated as done above.
Using the 'Base' and the 'Perpendicular', the direction o f the shadow is found thus graphically,
(see Fig. 15).
 128 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 54

Here A B is the 'Base' which, extended on both sides, is the prime verdcal. A C is the 'Perpendicular',
extending northwards from A B that lies east-west. Angle C A B = 90". B C is the shadow, and angle
A B C is the angle made by the shadow with the east-west line. T h e direction o f the sun is the line
C B extended backwards, making the same angle with A B extended.

Example 23. For the same place and the same day, find the Sun's direction, when the shadow is ang. 27-30
(i) Shadow hypotenuse = V 2 7 V F T T 4 4 = ang. 30

(ii) Suryagra = 12 X 120 X 60 (30 X 103' 55") = 27' 42".8

(iii) Agra = 39' 51".4, found in example 22.

(iv) 'Perpendicular' = (27' 42".8 - 39' 51".4) X 30-^120

= ang. - 3-2, i.e. ang. 3-2 southward. (Or, which is the same, deducting 27' 42".8 from 39'
5r'.4, and doing the work with the remainder 12' 8".6, the perpendicular obtained is ang. 3-2,
negative and.-. southward).

(v) 'Base' = V 2 7 V 2 ' - 3 1/30' = ang. 27-20.

O r , by the simplified formula,

'Perpendicular' = (12 x 60' - 30 X 34' 30") ^ 103' 55" = (720' - 1035') ^ 103' 55" =-315' ^
103'55"

= ang. 3-2 southward.

F r o m the 'Perpendicular' the 'Base' is found as already done.

T h e direction o f the shadow is found graphically tltus:

Here, A B is the 'Base', which extended both ways, is the prime vertical. A C is the Perpendicular,
directed southwards. B C is the shadow. Angle A B C is the direction o f shadow. A t an equal angle
to the east-west o n the opposite side is the Sun.

Example 24. Sin lat of place = 72', whence sin colat = 96'. The longitude of the Sun = rdsi. 11-0, from
which sin longitude of the Sun = 60', and thence sin decl = 24' 24", south, since the Sun is within the six sig
from Libra. Find the direction when the shadow is ang. 27-30.

(i) Shadow-hypotenuse = V l 4 4 -I- 27V2' = ang. 30.

(ii) Silrydgrd = 12 X 120 X 72' (96 x 30) = 3 6 ' .

IV. 54 IV. T H R E E PROBLEMS ] 29

(iii) Agra = 48' 48" X 60 ^ 96' = 30' 30".

(iv) T h e Sun being in the six signs from Libra, Terpendicular' = (36' + 30' 30") X 30 120' =
ang. 16-37.5 north.
(v) 'Base' = V271/2' - 16-V8' = ang. 21-54.

O r by the simplified formula,

Perpendicular = (12 x 72' + 30 X 24' 24")/96 = ang. 16-37.5. (+ is taken, as the declination is
south).

From this the 'Base' is calculated to be ang. 21-54 as before.

The direction is graphically represented thus:

Fig. IV. 17

Here too, the angle of shadow is A B C , and the direction of the Sun is opposite to the shadow,
making the same angle.

We shall now prove the steps, taking them one by one:

(i) Shadow-Hypotenuse: In the right angled triangle having the shadow as base and the
twelve digit gnomon as perpendicular, the shadow-hypotenuse is the hypotenuse. Hence by the
well-known formula, base' + perpendicular' = hypotenuse', Vshadow' + g n o m o n ' = shadow-
hypotenuse. As the gnomon is 12 angulas and the shadow too is measured in angulas, the shadow-
hypotenuse measuredmangulas = Vshadow' -I- 12'.
(ii) Suryagra: This is the distance between the linejoining the rising and setting points and the
diurnal circle (see Fig. 18). This is called sankvagra by the earlier Bhaskara I and his followers and
sankutalam by the later Bhaskara II and others.

It has been mentioned that, as seen from places on the earth other than the equator, since the circles
on the stellar sphere are bent southwards (this is from the point of view of people i n the northern
hemisphere) the diurnal circles following these are also bent southwards. Therefore by the intersection
of the arcs on the stellar sphere and the celestial sphere several right angled triangles are formed
by their sine lengths, which triangles are called 'Latitude-caused triangles' {Aksaksetras). F r o m the
similarity of these triangles, when the length elements of one are known the corresponding length
elements of another may be calculated by the rule of proportion. A m o n g these, two similar triangles
answer to our need, in one, which is well-known, sin lat is the base, sin colat is the perpendicular, and
130 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I V . 54

the radius is the hypotenuse; and in the other Suryagra (i.e. sankuialam) is the base, the Great gnomon
is the perpendicular and what is called Taddhrti is the hypotenuse (Vide Sid. Siromani, Gola, Triprasna
49). Therefore, when sin lat, sin colat, and the Great gnomon are known SHrydgrd can be calculated
by the proportion:

Sin colat: sin l a t : : Great gnomon: Surydgrd.

Surydgrd = Great gnomon X sin lat H- sin colat.

T h e Great g n o m o n can be found from the similarity of the two triangles, i n one of which the
shadow is the base, the twelve-digit gnomon is the perpendicular and the shadow-hypotenuse is the
hypotenuse, and i n the other sin zenith distance is the base, the Great gnomon is the perpendicular,
and the radius is the hypotenuse.

Therefore by the proportion: shadow-hypotenuse : 12 :: radius : Great gnomon, the Great gno-
m o n = 12 x I 2 0 ' H- shadow-hypotenuse.

Hence by substituting we get, Surydgrd = 12 X 120' x sin lat -J- (shadow-hypotenuse x sin colat).
Since the celestial sphere is bent southward, Surydgrd is really south, permanently, (from the point
of view o f a m a n i n the northern hemisphere, as we have already said). But here, as we are dealing
not with the Sun but with the shadow, which is opposite to the Sun, we have taken the Suryagra as
always north. W e shall illustrate these things by Fig. 18.

We have mendoned that for observers i n the northern hemisphere the diurnal circles bend
southward, resulting i n the 'southing' o f the celestial bodies, because o f the southward bend of the
stellar sphere. As the shadow moves i n the direction opposite to the Sun, the tip of the shadow
moves i n circles bent northwards, like I, II, III, i n the Fig. Also, it should be remembered, as we are
depicting the shadows i n the Fig, the direction of Agrd and Surydgrd are reversed.

Fig. IV. 18.

I V . 54 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 131

I: T h e circle on which the tip of the shadow moves on a day when the Sun is in the southern
hemisphere.
II: T h e circle on which the tip of the shadow moves on a day when the Sun is on the equator.
I l l : T h e circle on which the dp of the shadow moves on a day when the Sun is in the northern
hemisphere.

A , B = rising and setdng points of the Sun, on the day related to I.

C, D = rising and setting points o f the Sun on the day related to II, and E , F, related to III.
A B , C D , and E F are the lines j o i n i n g the respeaive rising and setdng points and are parallel to
one another.

With reference to I, (i.e. for a day when the Sun is i n the southern hemisphere), G A = H J = Agrd
(directed northward), J K = Surydgrd (directed northward) and H K = Agrd + Surydgrd, from which
it is obvious that the Perpendicular is also directed northward.

With reference to II, (i.e. for a day when the Sun is on the equator), the Sun rises at C itself and
sets at D itself, and therefore the Agrd is zero. L M is the Surydgrd (directed northward) and the T e r -
pendicular' = Surydgrd +Agrd, is also L M .

With reference to III, (i.e. for a day when the Sun is i n the northern hemisphere), Agrd = Q P =
N O (directed southward) and P R or O S is the Surydgrd (directed north). A t a time sufficiently near
sunrise or sunset, for which O S is the Surydgrd, the Perpendicular is N S (directed southward). This
is the case where Agrd is deductive but numerically greater than the Surydgrd. At a time sufficiently
near noon, for which P R is the Surydgrd, the Perpendicular is Q R got by P R - P Q , Q P being
numerically less than PR.

(iii) Agra: This is the amplitude, and forms the distance between the parallel lines constituting
the prime vertical and the linejoining the rising and setdng points. This is also the sine of the angles
of the rising and setting points made from the East or West points, respectively. T h e author has
given the formula for this in V . 39, without mentioning its name Agrd, as also here without men-
doning its name. T h e derivation o f the formula has been given by us there. W h e n the Sun is in the
northern hemisphere, this is north, and when in the southern, it is south. But here, as we are
dealing with the shadow, we have reversed the directions.

One thing must be mentioned in this connection: T S and N P interpret the word Surydgrd as Agrd
or 'Sine of the amplitude of the Sun', evidently assuming the derivation suryasya agrd = Suryagra,
i.e. Agrd itself, because the context is the Sun here. As for Surydgrd itself, they simply call it 'a sine'.
They have failed to nodce that i f taken thus, the formula for getdng them would become wrong.
Even i f somehow, by changing the order of words i n the sentence, we make the formulae agree in
this work, in the next work of getdng the sun from the direcdon of the shadow, it would be impossible
to secure agreement between the words there. But we must mendon here that i n the Mahdbhdskariya,
Agrd is termed Arkdgrd', evidently by the derivation, arkasya agrd arkdgrd. Surydgrd is there called
Sankvagra, as we have already said. (Vide Mahdbhdskariya, III. 53-54). B u t here we have no choice
except to go by the text.

(iv) Perpendicular: F r o m what we have already said, and from the Fig. 18, it can readily be
seen that (Surydgrd + Agrd) is the distance between the Prime vertical and the tip o f the Great
shadow. This is called 'Bhuja' by other authors. T h e Bhuja corresponding to the shadow is got from
this by the proportion.

11
132 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 56

Radius: 'Bhuja':: shadow-hypotenuse : shadow-Mw/a, So we have,

(Surydgrd Agra) X shadow-hypotenuse -r- 120 = shadow Bhuja.

O u r author calls this Koti or 'Perpendicular', as we have already said. B u t this does not matter,
for in a right angled triangle, with the hypotenuse given (as here the shadow), the other two sides
are perpendicular to each other, and any one may be taken as the base, and the other as the perpen-
dicular.

(v) Base: W h e n the 'Perpendicular' is got from the well-known formula of the right angled
triangle. Base' -t- Perpendicular ' = hypotenuse', (the shadow being the hypotenuse here,) we
have,'Base' = Vshadow' - Perpendicular'. Since the Perpendicular is north-south, the 'Base' is
east-west, and is a part of the east-west line, as the foot o f the shadow is on the east-west line. Since
the east-west line is known, we can lay the 'Base' on it, lay the 'Perpendicular', at right angle, and
draw the shadow. Clearly, if initially we have the shadow marked on the ground, we can get the
directions by using this method. T h e angle between the shadow and the base gives the direcdon of
the shadow. Obviously the direcdon of the Sun is given by the equal angle vertically opposite.

What has been said here for the shadow may be said for the sun without reversing the direction
as we have done for the sake of the shadow, and the Sun's direction can be got. F r o m that the direc-
tion of the shadow may be got as being vertically opposite. B u t it is clear that the author says every-
thing here for the shadow, and not for the Sun.

l^fgRT H1!T(^) rTT^^fq ^R^: |m^ |

Sun from Shadow

5 5 . (Explanatory translation): By a process reverse to the previous one, the
longitude of the Sun can be computed from the shadow, thus: Take the dis-
tance of the tip of the shadow in angulas, from the east-west line, multiply it
by 120' , and divide by the angulas of the shadow hypotenuse (mentioned in
the previous work). This is 'the sine'. (It may be seen that this is the Silrydgrd
+ Agra, of the previous work). If the shadow is north of the east-west line then
'the sine' also is north. If the shadow is south, 'the sine' is south. Compute the
surydgrd as given already in the previous work. This is to be taken as always
north (as already mentioned). If'the sine' and SHrydgrd are of different direc-
tions, then 'the sine' plus Silrydgrd is Agrd. (It must be remembered that they
will be of different directions only when the Sun is in the northern hemis-
phere, i.e. within the six signs from Aries). If they are of the same direction,
then the Agrd is one deducted from the other. (If'the sine' is greater, then the
Sun is in the southern hemisphere, i.e. within the six signs from Libra. If
IV. 56 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 133

Surydgrd is greater, t h e n the S u n is i n the n o r t h e r n h e m i s p h e r e , i.e. i n the six

signs f r o m A r i e s ) .

56. T h e Agrd t h u s got m u h i p l i e d by the sine o f c o l a t i t u d e , a n d d i v i d e d by 4 8 '

48". is the sine o f the S u n ' s l o n g i t u d e a n d f r o m that the s u n is o b t a i n e d . ( F r o m
this sine, first the d e g r e e s o f Bhuja, D , is got. I f the S u n is i n the n o r t h e r n
h e m i s p h e r e , t h e n the S u n ' s l o n g i t u d e is D , o r (six signs D ) . I f the S u n is i n
s o u t h e r n h e m i s p h e r e , the S u n ' s l o n g i t u d e is six signs + D , o r (twelve signs
D ) . W h a t e x a c d y it is o f the d i a d m u s t be d e t e r m i n e d by the S u n ' s ayana).
( F o l l o w i n g the m e t h o d f o r the S u n , the o t h e r grahas also c a n be got).

The following are the steps i n the work:-

(i) As already seen, shadow-hypotenuse = Vshadow' + 1 4 4 .

(ii) As already seen, Surydgrd = 12 x 120 X sin lat ^ (shadow-hypotenuse x sin colat).

(iii) ' T h e sine' = the distance in angulas from the east-west line to the tip of the shadow X 120'
-i- shadow-hypotenuse. (If the shadow is north of the east-west hne, 'the sine' is north, if the shadow
is south o f the east-west line, 'the sine' is south).

(iv) (a) If'the sine' is north, and greater than the Surydgrd, Agrd = 'the sine' Suryagrd, and the Sun
is i n the southern hemisphere.

(b) If 'the sine' is north and less than the Surydgrd, Agrd = Suryagra 'the sine', and the Sun
is in the northern hemisphere.

(c) If 'the sine' is south, Agrd = Suryagra + 'the sine', and the S u n is i n the northern hemis-
phere.
(v) Sine longitude of the S u n = Agrd x sin colat 48' 48" = Agrd X sin colat X 5 244.
(vi) From the sine of longitude, the Bhuja degrees D , and using that the longitude of the Sun by
examination, are to be obtained.
As i n the previous work, (iii), (iv) and (v) can be simpUfied thus: Sine sun's longitude = (12 Xsin
lat i sin colat X the distance in angulas between the tip of the shadow and the east-west line) X 150
H- (61 X shadow hypotenuse). In + if the shadow is south of the east-west line then the upper sign
is to be taken, and the Sun then is i n the northern hemisphere. If the shadow is north, the lower
sign is to be taken. In this case, if 12 X sin lat is greater, the Sun is i n the northern hemisphere, and
if sin colat X distance in angulas, is greater, the sun is i n the southern hemisphere.

Example 25. Of a certain place, sin lat = 60', sin colat = 103' 55". There, on a day during Uttardyana,
when the length of the shadow is 5 angulas, the distance of the shadow tipfrom the east-west line is measured to
be ang. 1-36.6, north of the east-west line. Find the longitude of the Sun.

(i) Shadow-hypotenuse = V 5 ' -I- 144 = 13ang.

55a. Al.o^RiclKll; A2.^t<i<ti<i; A.D.'ffl^

D.-^-rlR^iail b. A . W . A.TRt*:; D . l ^ :
d. A . - g ^ . A 2 . ^ c. A2.^-%T
56a. A.<HM<|,ruidl d. A.WSrat
134 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 56

(ii) Suryagra = 12 X 120' X 60' ^ (13 X 103' 55") = 63' 57".2

(iii) ' T h e Sine' = ang. 2-36.6 x 120 - 13 ang- = 24' 6". (This is north as shadow is north).

(iv) A s 'the sine' is north, the lower sign is to be used, i.e. the difference is to be found. There,
as Suryagra is greater, Agrd = 63' 57".2 - 24' 6" = 39' 51" (The Sun is i n the northern hemisphere).

(v) T h e sine of Sun's longitude = 39' 51" X 103' 55" x 5 244 = 84' 51".

(vi) T h e Bhuja degrees D = A r c of 84' 51" = rdsi. 1-15. As the sun is in the northern hemisphere,
the longitude isrdsi 1-15, or rdsi 6-0 rdsi 1-15, i.e. rdsi 4-15. A s the S u n is i n Uttardyana, the longi-
tude of the sun is rdsi 1-15.
Using the simplified method, and taking the lower sign since the distance is north,
sin Sun's long = (12ang-X 60'-ang-2-36.6 X 103'55") x 150-^(61 x 13a?ig.)

= (720' - 271' 30") x 150 (61 x 13)

= 84' 51". (As 12 Xsin lat is greater, the sun is i n the northern hemisphere). T h e rest of the work
is the same.
Example 26. Of a certain place, sin lat = 60', sin colat = 103' 55". On a Daksiridyana day, when the
shadow is ang. 27-30, its tip is found to be ang 3-2.15 south of the east-west line. Find the Sun.

(i) Shadow-hypotenuse = V T 4 4 T 2 7 V ? = ang. 30.

(ii) surydgrd = 12 X 120' x 60' -r- (30 X 103' 55") = 27' 42".8.

(iii) ' T h e sine' = ang. 3-2.15 X 120 ang. 30 = 12' 8".6 (south, as the shadow is south).

(iv) A s the sine is south, the upper sign is to be taken, and the Sun is in the northern hemisphere,
and therefore, Agrd = 27' 42".8 + 12' 8".6 = 39' 51".

(v) Sin longitude of S u n = 39' 51" X 103' 55" X 5 ^ 244' = 84' 51".

(vi) T h e degrees of Bhuja = A r c 84' 51" = rdsi 1-15

As the Sun is in the northern hemisphere, the longitude is rdsi 1-15 or rdsi 4-15. As it is Daksiridyana,
the Sun is roij 4-15.

A p p l y i n g the simplified method for this, as the upper sign is to be taken, since the shadow tip lies
south of the east-west line,

sin long = (12 X 60 + 103' 55" x 3.2) x 150 ^ (61 x 30) = 84' 51", and the Sun must be i n the
northern hemisphere.

T h e rest of the work is the same as done already.

Example 27. Of a certain place sin lat = 72', and sin colat = 96'. There, on a certain day in Uttardyana,
when the shadow is ang. 27-30, the distance of its tip from the east-west line is ang. 16-37.5 north. Find the
Sun.

(i) Shadow hypotenuse = Vl44 -f 27 V 2 ' = 30.

(ii) Silrydgrd = 12 X 120' X 72' H- (30 x 96) = 36'.

(iii) ' T h e sine' = ang. 16-37.5 X 120 ang. 30 = 66' 30", (north, as the distance is north).
I V . 56 IV. T H R E E P R O B L E M S 135

(iv) As 'the sine' is north, the difference is to be taken. A s 'the sine' is greater, Agrd = 66' 30" -
36' = 30' 30", (and the Sun is i n the southern hemisphere).
(v) Sine ladtude of Sun = 30' 30" x 96 x 5 244 = 60'.

(vi) T h e degrees oi Bhuja = rdsi 1 -0. A s the Sun is i n the southern hemisphere, the Sun is rdsi 6-0
-I- rdsi 1-0, i.e. rdsi 7, or rdsi 12-0 rosi 1-0, i.e. rdsi 11. A s it is Uttardyana, the Sun's longitude must
bera.Il.

A p p l y i n g the simpHfled method, since the lower sign is to taken as the distance is north, sin long
= (12 X 72 ~ 96 X 16-37.5) x 150 (61 x 30).

Here since distance x sin colat is greater.

Sin long = (96 X 1 6 - 3 7 . 5 - 12 x 72) x 1 5 0 ( 6 1 x 30) = 60', and the Sun must be i n the south-
ern hemisphere.
T h e rest o f the work is the same.

T h e proof o f the above rules is as follows: I n the previous work, the 'Perpendicular', i.e. the dis-
tance of the tip of the shadow from the east-west line, was calculated, given the Sun and the shadow,
and from that the 'Base' and the direction were calculated. Here, given the distance and the
'Perpendicular', the Sun is computed. Therefore this is the converse o f the previous work, and
can be derived from that. Steps (i) and (ii) are the same as steps (i) and (ii) of the previous work, and
have been derived there. W e shall therefore derive (iii), (iv) and (v) from (iii), (iv) and (v) there.

In the previous work i n (iv), 'Perpendicular' = (Surydgrd + Agra) X shadow hypotenuse 120.
.-. 'The sine = (Surydgrd +Agrd) = Perpendicular X 120 -j- Shadow hypotenuse, as i n (iii) here.

Since, 'the sine' = (Surydgrd + Agrd), when the Sun is in the northern and southern hemispheres,
respectively, Agrd Surydgrd ~ 'the sine'. It has been mentioned that Surydgrd is always north, 'the
sine' is either south or north according to the line to the tip of the shadow from the east-west line,
and Agrd is south i f the Sun is i n the northern hemisphere and vice versa. Therefore, when Agrd is
north, (i.e. when the Sun in the southern hemisphere,) 'sine' is north, and greater than Surydgrd.
Therefore, in using ('the sine' Surydgrd), we get that the Sun is i n the southern hemisphere. If
Agra is south, and therefore to be got negative by the addition of Surydgrd, (i.e. when the Sun is in
the northern hemisphere), and 'the sine' is north, Surydgrd is greater than 'the sine'. Here we have
to use (Surydgrd 'the sine'), and we get that when the Sun is in the northern hemisphere. If Agrd is
south again, (i.e. the Sun is in the northern hemisphere, again), and 'the sine' is also south, then we
have the case, Agrd = Surydgrd + 'the sine', in which case also the Sun is in the northern hemisphere.

From the Agra, the sine o f Sun's longitude is got thus: In step (iii) of the previous work, Agra =
M a x i m u m declination X sine longitude o f the Sun -r- sin colatitude.
.-.sin long, of the Sun = Agra X sine colatitude max. dec.
= Agra sin colat 48' 48", as we get here i n step (v).
T h e explanation of getting the Sun's longitude from its sine has already been given i n connection
with getting the sines for degrees (IV. 1-15).

Another point to be noted i n this connecdon is this: I n what the author gives, there is nothing to
say about the addition of 'the sine' and Surydgrd when they are of different direcdons, and therefore
136 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IV. 56

about the S u n being i n the northern hemisphere. B u t when they are of the same direction, and one
is to be deducted from the other, the author mentions only the case where Surydgrd is to be
deducted from the Sun (thereby assuming 'the sine' to be greater) the case i n which the Sun is taken
to be i n the southern hemisphere.

We have seen that when 'the sme' and Suryagrd are of the same direction, the Sun is to be taken
as i n the northern hemisphere i n the case (iv) i n which Suryagrd is greater, and 'the sine' is deducted
from it. T h e author has omitted to mention this case. Has he forgotten it? We think not. H e hopes
that the reader himself will infer the changes to be made i n this condngency, viz, that 'the sine' is
to be deducted from Suryagrd, and as the result is to be considered negative, and as the Agrd thus got
is negative it is to be taken as south, and as south Agrd is for the Sun i n the northern hemisphere,
the Sun i n the northern hemisphere will be inferred.

As for T S and N P , here too they interpret Surydgrd as Agrd. T h e y are not aware of the error that
would be caused by this i n the situadon of the Sun, the hemispheres being reversed. For the matter
of that they do not refer to the Sun's situation at all, nor to the contingency of the reversal the sub-
tractor and the subtrahend.

Thus ends Chapter Four entitled *Three Problems: Time, Place and
Direction in the Paiicasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira

1. C o l . A.C.D.^^ROIIMgg?:
 Chapter Five

PAULISA-SIDDHANTA MOON'S CUSPS

Introductory

In this chapter the Moon's visibihty after or before hehacal setting, the appearance of its horns
at the time of visibility wfith its geometrical representation, and the daily rising and setting o f the
Moon with its time of reaching the meridian are dealt with. W e can surmise that this chapter is a
part of the Paulisa Siddhdnta because the things required for the computations like the declination
of the Sun and the M o o n with the latitude o f the M o o n , are available to us only from the Paulisa,
the Romaka and the Saura having not been dealt with as yet, and because the methods are too rough
to be attributed to the Saura.

T i m e of Moon's visibility
1. F i n d the d i f f e r e n c e i n l o n g i t u d e o f the S u n a n d the M o o n , as also the
d i f f e r e n c e o f t h e i r decHnations, (the m e a n d e c l i n a t i o n o f the M o o n b e i n g
u s e d f o r this p u r p o s e ) . M u l t i p l y the s u m o f these t w o differences by t h e i r
d i f f e r e n c e ancl find the square r o o t o f the p r o d u c t . B y this 'square r o o t ' d i v i d e
the p r o d u c t o f the M o o n ' s l a t i t u d e a n d the d i f f e r e n c e o f d e c l i n a t i o n a l r e a d y
found.

2. T h e 'result' is to be subtracted f r o m the difference i n l o n g i t u d e , i f visibility

i n the west is i n q u e s t i o n a n d the l a t i t u d e a n d ayana (i.e. c o u r s e n o r t h w a r d o r
s o u t h w a r d ) o f the M o o n are o f the same d i r e c t i o n , o r a d d e d to the difference
i n l o n g i t u d e i f o f o p p o s i t e d i r e c t i o n s . I f visibility i n the east is i n q u e s t i o n ,
reverse the s u b t r a c t i o n a n d a d d i t i o n .

1-3. Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a o n B S 4 . 1 5 .

l a . A.D.31<lldW< 2a. A . liiciRiiM^)

b. A . TraR5^f51S'^li=Ff5R^ b. A l . # s r a ^ ; A 2 . ? 5 f ^ ^ ^
c. A.D.ijclHI^lHfacR c. U . ^ 2 W W I ^
138 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V. 3

3. I n the case o f the visibility p e r t a i n i n g to the west, i f a segment e q u a l to the

c o r r e c t e d d i f f e r e n c e i n l o n g i t u d e takes at least two nddis to rise i n the east as
r e c k o n e d by u s i n g the ascensional d i f f e r e n c e (for the place) o f the seventh rdsi
f r o m the S u n , t h e n the M o o n w i l l be visible, p r o v i d e d the sky is clear. I n the
case o f visibility i n the east, use the ascensional d i f f e r e n c e o f the Sun's rdsi
itself.

The following are the steps in the operation :-

i. F i n d the difference i n the longitude of the Sun and the M o o n .

i i . F i n d the difference of the Sun's declination, and the Moon's mean declination.

iii. T h e square root = V( diff. in long. + diff. in dec.) X (diff. i n long. diff. i n dec.)

iv. Result = diff. in dec. X Moon's lat -4- the square root.

V. Corrected diff. i n long = diff. in long + result. (Of + the upper sign is to be used i f visibility
pertains to the west, and the latitude and the course of the M o o n are of the same direction, or if the
visibility pertains to the east and the latitude and course of the M o o n are o f different directions.
The lower sign is to be used otherwise.

vi. If the visibihty pertains to the west, find the time of rising of an ecliptic segment equal to (v),
by using the ascensional difference (for the place) of the seventh sign from the Sun and M o o n . If
it pertains to the east, use the ascensional difference of the Sun's rdsi itself. If the time so found is
greater than two nddis, the M o o n is visible; otherwise it is not visible.

The time that we find i n (vi) is the time of Moonset after sunset i n the west, and the time of moon-
rise before sunrise in the east. T h e sun. M o o n , declinations and latitude of these times should be
used and the work repeated for greater accuracy. Other siddhdntas mention this, though the author
here has not done so specifically. O r , even before beginning the work, we can know the approximate
times of moonset and moonrise, and do the work using the elements of these times.

Near the time of new moon the M o o n is invisible because the lighted up part is very small, and
the sky itself is bright by the nearness of the Sun below the horizon. It has been fixed by the ancient
authors by observation, that i f the M o o n sets within two nddis after sunset, or i f the sun rises within
two nddis after moonrise, the m o o n is not visible. (In places near the equator this criterion will be
satisfied i f the elongadon o f the M o o n is i n the neighbourhood of twelve degrees.) It is this we are
finding by the computation, and it is obvious that the nearer the time o f the elements used to the
result, the better will be the result itself. Therefore is the need for successive approximation.

If it is only for the sheer beauty o f its appearance i n the sky which has been described by poets
like Kalidasa, the first digit o f the M o o n is fit to be sought. B u t it is necessary for religious purposes

3b. A . ^ l t ^ . c . A . c l f ^
d. A.C.D.U.dl+HWird I
 V. P A U L I S A MOON'S GUSPS 139

also. T h e Baudhayanas have to avoid Isti being performed on the day of the first appearance of the
M o o n , and do it on the previous day, and the offerings to the manes have to be done on the day pre-
vious to the Isti. T h e Dharmasastras describe the seeing of the first digit of the M o o n as meritorious.
The Muslims consider their months ending with the first appearance o f the M o o n , and so this is
important to them for calendrical purposes. T h e observance of the last digit of the M o o n was neces-
sary i n ancient times, for from that they had to determine whether the same day or the next one
would be the new moon day, so necessary for their religious rites. T h e importance can be guessed
from the special names they had for the days at new moon, Sinivdli and Kvhu i n which the streak o f
the M o o n will be visible and invisible, respectively.

Example l.Ata certain place having lat. 30N. examine the visibility of the Moon in the evening, given,
the Sun at sunset = rdsi 1-0, the Moon at sunset = rdsi 1-15, and the Moon's latitude = 240' south.

From the S u n and the M o o n , their respective declinations are 7 0 4 ' N and 1004'N (mean). F r o m
the latitude 30N, and Sun's declination the vinddis of ascension at the place, of Scorpio, the seventh
rdsi from Sun and M o o n , can be calculated to be 355. F r o m these,

i. Diff. i n long = ra. 1-15 - ra. 1-0 = ra. 0-15 = 15.

ii. Diff. i n dec. = 1004' - 704' = 300' = 5

iii. T h e square root = V(15 + 5) X (15 - 5) = 14 8'.4

iv. T h e Result = 5 X 4 14 8'.4 = 85'.

V. Corrected diff. i n long = 15 -t- 85' = 16 25', (the lower sign, because the work pertains to
the west (evening) and the Moon's latitude is south, while its ayana is north),

vi. A s the work pertains to the west, the seventh rdsi measure is to be used, which we have found
to be 355 vinddis. U s i n g this, the time taken for 16 25' to rise is 16 25' X 355 30 = 194
vinddis. This is more than 2 nddis and so the M o o n will be visible. A s the time found is far above the
requirement, we need not repeat the work using the elements of the time of moonset.
Example 2. At a certain place (north of the equator) on a particular day in ttie evening the Sun rd 6-0. The
Moon is rd. 6-15. The Moon's latitude is 4 40'. The equinoctial shadow of the place is 4 digits. Examine for
Moon's visibility.
From the Sun, its declination is 0', and from the M o o n its mean declination is 363' S. F r o m the
equinoctial shadow and the Sun's declination, the measure of the ascension of Aries, (seventh from
Sun and M o o n , since the computation pertains to the west) can be calculated to be 228 vinddis.
Using these,

i. diff. i n long. = ra 6-15 - ra 6-0 = 15 = 900'

i i . diff. i n dec. = 363' - 0' = 363'.

iii. Thesquareroot = V(900' + 363') X (900' - 363') = 823'.5

iv. T h e resuh = 363' X 280' ^ 823.5 = 123'.4

V. T h e corrected diff. i n long. = 900' - 123'.4 = 12 56'.6 (The upper sign because, the
work pertains to the west, and the a^iana and latitude of the M o o n are of the same direction.)

vi. A s the work refers to the west, using the measure o f Aries, the seventh rdsi from Sun and

12
140 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V.3

M o o n , the time for a segment equal to 12 56'.6 to rise is, 228 x 12 56'.6 H- 30 = 99 vinddis. This
is less than 2 nddis and so the M o o n will not be visible that day. A s the time got is far less than the
requirement, repetition of the work is unnecessary.

T h e steps are explained thus:

Here, W D is the celestial equator. S M ' C is the ecliptic and L M ' is the diurnal circle o f the M o o n
projected on the ecliptic. S is the Sun, M is the M o o n and M ' is the same projected o n the echptic.
M M ' is the Moon's latitude.
S M ' is the difference i n longitude which is found i n step (i). W S is the Sun's declination, and D M '
is the Moon's mean declination.

.-. S L is the difference of the declinations, found i n step (ii). Assuming the triangles as plane
triangles, i n the right angled triangle S L M ' ,

L M " = S M " - S L ' = ( S M ' + SL) ( S M ' - SL)

.-. L M ' = V ( S M ' + S L ) ( S M ' - SL), and^
L M ' being the square root, it is equal to V (diff. i n long. 4- diff. i n dec.) (diff. i n long - diff. i n dec.)....
(step iii)
M ' C is the result and it is found thus:

As M M ' is perpendicular to SC, triangle M M ' C is right angled at M ' .

.-. angle S M ' L = angle C M M '

Therefore the two triangles are similar.

.-. M ' C / M M ' = S L / L M .

v.3 V. P A U L I S A M O O N S CUSPS 141

.-. M ' C = S L x M M ' ^ L M ' , i.e. 'the result' = difference i n declination X moon's ladtude H- 'the
square root', (which is step iv).
Now for the additive or subtractive nature of'the result':
If the Moon's ayana is northward, i.e. i f the echptic is inclined northwards (as i n fig. 1), the M o o n
having south latitude, being at the end o f a perpendicular to it, is lifted up. Therefore the M o o n
projected at M ' is projected at C , as it were, and the difference i n longitude which is the distance
between S and M ' , is increased. So, i n this case, 'the result' M ' C is to be added.
Now consider the case, when the ayana does not change, but the latitude also is north, like the
ayana, as i n Fig. 2.

South

Now, clearly the M o o n M at the end of M ' M is bent downwards, with the result that M ' C is deduc-
tive i n this case, as the instruction says.

Let us next consider the case when the Moon's ayana is southward as i n Fig. 3.

Clearly i n this case the M o o n having north ladtude is lifted up, and 'the result', C M ' , is addidve,
and the M o o n having south latitude is depressed, and C M ' is subtractive. T h u s we have, for ayana
and latitude having identical direction, 'the result' is subtractive and having different directions it
is additive. This is for visibility i n the west.
142 PANCASIDDHANTIKA

Now, for the visibility in the east: we are now looking eastward and successive points on the eclipdc
are lower and lower towards the horizon. Therefore i n figs. 1,2 and 3, other things being the same,
the ecliptic alone is to be represented as being directed downwards, as in Fig. 4.

Fig. V. 4

Therefore, i n each case taken up for consideration above, the direction of the ayana being
changed, we see that for the ayana and latitude having different directions, 'the result' is subtrac-
dve, and having the same direction it is additive. T h u s step (v) is explained.
Now for step (vi). W e have already said that the M o o n will be visible i f it does not set within two
nddis after sunset, or i f it rises before 2 nadis before sunrise. (As visibility depends actually on other
factors like the keenness of the eyesight o f the observer, we have only to take the authority of the
Sdstras i n this matter). So i n the evening we have to find the time by which the M o o n will set after
sunset, i.e. the segment constituting the corrected difference i n longitude will set. As the distance
between the rising and setting points i n always i n 6 rdsis, this time is equal to that of the rising of an
equal segment i n the east, which can be calculated by using the vinadis of the ascensional difference
of the rising sign, which being six rdsis away, is the seventh from the Sun (or Moon). I f this dme is
greater than 2 nddis, the M o o n would not have set, and therefore be visible. In the matter of visibility
in the east, the same explanation holds, except that now the time of rising of the segment i n the east
is wanted, using the ascensional difference of the rising sign i n which the Sun (or Moon) itself is
situated, and hence the instruction to use that sign.
This instrucdon to use the ascensional difference of the same sign as the Sun i n the case of visibility
in the east is implied by the use of the word vd, though not explicitly stated, and can also be inferred
from the nature of the explanation. T S - N P do not seem to have noted the difference in the methods
to be pursued i n the operation. A n o t h e r mistake they have made is that they have discarded the
correct reading, ayandnukdlaviksipte (v. 2) and chosen the incorrect readingapamdnukdlaviksipte and
accordingly, have given the condition for additiveness or subtractiveness, " I f the moon's latitude is
v.5 V.-PAULISA MOON'S CUSPS 143

of the same direction as the difference i n declination etc." Declinauon had direcdon, but what
direction can be attributed to the difference in declinadon as given i n the text? O r how can the word
for declination mean difference in declination? Whatever the ladtude, 'the result' is zero at the
junction of the ayanas, which means its sign, i.e. its additiveness or subtractiveness changes there,
and therefore the ayana should be a criterion for additiveness or subtractiveness. T h e very name
of this correction, Ayanadrkkarma (this name is not mentioned here by the author, but it is this) will
suggest that the ayana of the M o o n must form part of the criterion.

Another thing must be mentioned: T h e work given here is very rough, because spherical tri-
angles are taken as plane triangles, and another correction called Aksadrkharma which is to be done
for the sake of the latitude of the observer has been omitted. Therefore the reader should refer to
works like the Mahabhaskariya and Siddhdnta Siromani for greater accuracy.

Diagram of the Moon's cusps

4. M u l t i p l y the l a t i t u d e o f the place i n degrees by t w o a n d d i v i d e by fifteen.
B y the r e s u l t i n g n u m b e r o f angulas o r digits ( m e a s u r e d a l o n g the r i m ) , the
n o r t h e r n t i p o f the h o r n o f the M o o n s h o u l d be r a i s e d u p w a r d s (as c a u s e d by
the latitude at the t i m e o f first visibihty). T h i s r a i s i n g s h o u l d be d i r e c t e d
u p w a r d s l i k e the 'Bhuja' w h i c h we are g o i n g to m e n t i o n . T h e n u m b e r o f digits
o f i l l u m i n a t i o n o f the M o o n ' s o r b , (usually c a l l e d m e r e l y digits), is the twelfth
part o f the d i f f e r e n c e i n l o n g i t u d e i n degrees, last f o u n d , a n d s h o u l d be
d i r e c t e d like ' H y p o t e n u s e ' , w h i c h we are g o i n g to m e n t i o n .

5. T h e d i f f e r e n c e i n d e c h n a t i o n last f o u n d s h o u l d be a d d e d to the M o o n ' s

latitude o r subtracted f r o m it, as the d i r e c t i o n s o f the M o o n ' s ayana and its
l a t i t u d e be the same o r d i f f e r e n t . ( T h i s refers to the visibility i n the west in the
e v e n i n g . W i t h reference to the visibility i n the east i n the m o r n i n g , the addi-
t i o n a n d s u b t r a c t i o n , is d o n e vice versa). T h e result is c a l l e d 'Koti'. T h e differ-
ence i n l o n g i t u d e is c a l l e d 'the H y p o t e n u s e ' . T h e 'Bhuja' is the s q u a r e root o f
the d i f f e r e n c e o f the squares o f the ' H y p o t e n u s e ' a n d the 'Koti'.

5a. A.STITO; C . D . s m P i R . A l . ^ ^ ;
4-7. Quoted by Utpala on 5 4.15. A2.fI^
4a. A.fe^pl^; C.U.f^H'i")^!; D.fggoiT^ b. A l . 2 . ^ ^ ^ ; A 2 . ^ ^ U . ^ g ^
b. A.-5JTg?f^Tjonfrqf%: A.'MldKHdl; C.-^tPrai
d. A.'+ufe^cbiSfl: D.=b"?fet(e<+>ivi: c. A.T%f5rat
144 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V.7

6. T h e 'Koti' is to be drawn on that side of the M o o n towards the Sun, north

or south, which is got in computing it, using the scale, one angula = one
degree of 'Koti'. T h e Bhuja and the Hypotenuse also should be drawn to the
same scale.

7. Thus, first there is the Hypotenuse from the centre of the M o o n to that
of the Sun. F r o m the centre of the Sun the 'Koti' is laid in the direction com-
puted for it. T h e n from its termination the 'Bhuja' is laid towards the Moon's
centre. O n the rim of the M o o n represented by a circle of fifteen angulas, the
raising of the horn in atigulas due to the latitude of the place is to be done. At
the centre of the two ends of the horn the illumination in digits is to be
represented on the diameter. There the arc (forming the upper boundary of
the illumination) is to be drawn (by making the arc pass through the two ends
of the horn and the point in the middle to which the illuminadon extends).

T h o u g h it is plain that these four verses give instructions for the graphical representation of the
M o o n at the times of visibility, (specifically its first visibility i n the evening i n the west), yet on
account of possible incorrect copyings, and because we are not sure of the degree of roughness of
the result intended by the Siddhdnta, we encounter a lot of difficulty i n ordering the words and
interpretting them. T h e author has not given the diameter of the M o o n i n angulas, which is neces-
sary to draw the orb, and represent i n it the illuminadon and the uplifting of the horn. B u t we can
infer the diameter to be fifteen angulas thus: O n Astami, at the middle of either fortnight, when the
hypotenuse is 90, according to the rule for getting the illumination, we have 90/12 = 7^/^ afigulas
of illuminadon. W e know that half the M o o n is illuminated then, and therefore the whole M o o n
should have a diameter o f fifteen angulas, as we have stated.

This agrees also with the 'elevadon of the h o r n ' due to the latitude, which can be shown thus: T h e
line j o i n i n g the tips o f the h o r n seen horizontal by a person o n the equator, is seen verdcal by a
person at the pole, i.e. at 90 latitude, because the celestial equator is inclined by 90 there, so as to
be coincident with the horizon. As the hypotenuse at the dme for which the elevation is required
is small, we can take it that the elevation o f the hord is proportionate to the degrees of latitude.
According to the rule for elevation given by the author, it is for 90 and 9 0 x 2 - ^ 1 5 = 1 2 angulas,
along the r i m of the quadrant, from the horizontal to the vertical. Therefore the whole r i m , i.e. the
circumference, is 4 X 12 = angulas and this shows that the diameter must be 48 X 7/22 = fifteen
angulas very nearly. This agreement i n the diameter, as calculated by the two rules, itself is a criterion
for the correctness o f the rules.

7c. A . o ^ ^ P I : ; C . D . U . " ^ ^
d. D.J^fi<^MqRro
6b. A.5R|3qiqfig#qa^: A . c R ^ ^ ; D.^Rg [^]
v.7 V. PAULISA M O O N S CUSPS 145

Now, we shall show why this elevation is always on the northern limb. As mentioned several dmes
before, when latitude is used i n the rules given, it is always north latitude that the author means.
As seen from north latitudes, the circles o n the stellar sphere are all bent towards the south above
the horizon. Therefore the hypotenuse also is inclined south, the angle of inclination being equal
to the latitude, the hypotenuse being small and taken as a straight line. By this inclination south,
the linejoining the tips of the horns, which is perpendicular to the Hypotenuse is elevated in the
north and depressed i n the south, the angle of elevation being equal to the latitude. T h i s elevation,
measured on the r i m in angulas is, as we have shown, twice the latitude divided by fifteen.

In the matter of the addition or subtraction o f the difference o f declination and the Moon's
latitude, we have said that the author has i n view only the visibility i n the west i n the evening, for
then alone is the statement correct. Perhaps the author thinks that this is enough, because the ele-
vation of the horn at evening appearance alone is observed anxiously by people, as an omen of
good or evil. O r the author thinks that the readers themselves will understand the reversal of addi-
tion and subtraction for the m o r n i n g appearance, by analogy with what was done before i n the case
of visibility. It must also be noted that the object here is only to represent the orb of the M o o n as it
appears, and the Hypotenuse, Bhuja and Koti are given to serve this end. Therefore it would not
matter i f these are represented on a different scale from that on which the M o o n is given, as for
instance an angula per degree here. (On this scale the M o o n will have to be represented by a dia-
meter of a \\a\i-angula.)

There is a view that the elevation of the horns should be observed when the orb of the M o o n is
on the horizon. In that case, the Sun will be below the horizon, and the question of the difference
in scale will not arise at all.

So, these are the steps in the work:-

i. T h e elevation of the horn due to latitude in angulas = latitude in degrees x 2 15.

ii. Illumination or digit of illumination in angulas = the difference in longitude in degrees -^12.

iii. Koti in angulas = d i f f in declination i n degrees latitude in degrees. (For evening i n the west,
if the Moon's latitude and ayana are of like direction, addition, and i f o f different directions, sub-
traction. F o r m o r n i n g i n the east, reverse the addition and subtraction).
iv. Hypotenuse = angulas equal i n number to difference i n longitude.

V. Bhuja in angulas = V Hypotenuse' K o t i ' .

vi. See fig. 5, below. O n the surface on which the phenomenon is to be represented draw a hori-
zontal Hne and mark the north and south sides o n both ends. M a r k the point S on it to represent
the Sun. M a r k a point A on the horizontal line on the side i n which the M o o n is situated, (this is
known when finding the Koti) such that S A = Koti. F r o m A draw a perpendicular upwards equal
to the Bhuja and at the end mark M , the centre o f the M o o n . M S is the Hypotenuse. W i t h M as
centre draw the orb o f the M o o n having a diameter o f 15 angulas. A t M draw a diameter B C perpen-
dicular to the Hypotenuse. F r o m the northern end the diameter, say C , measure the angulas of ele-
vation due to the latitude of the place, along the r i m , and mark the point D . Draw the diameter
D M E . D and E are the tips of the horns. O n the lower semicircle caused by D E , mark its mid-point,
F. Draw the radius F M . O n this mark a point G , such that F G = the angulas of illumination. Draw
the arc D G E by the well-known method o f making a circle pass through 3 points. T h i s is the upper
limit of the illumination. T h e figure o f the M o o n is now as it will be seen i n the sky. T h e horizon is
between the Sun and the M o o n , parallel to the original horizontal line. It must be remembered that
146 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V.7

what the Siddhdnta gives is only approximate, though easy to do, and for greater accuracy, we have
to do a lot o f work like calculating the Great gnomons of the M o o n and the Sun etc.

Example 3. Represent graphically the Moon ofexample 1. There, we are given, latitude ofthe place = 30N,
the Moon's ayana is northward, and its latitude 4S, and we get the difference in longitude = 13, and the
difference in declination = 3.

S A

Fig. V. 5

F r o m the data given above:

i. T h e angulas of elevation due to the latitude of the plane = 30 X 2 15 = 4.

i i . Angulas o f illumination = 15 1 2 = IV4.

iii. Koti = 5 4 = 1, and .-. 1 afig., the Sun being to the south, (because it is evening observa-
tion, and Moon's ayana and lat. are of diff. direction).

iv. Hypotenuse = 15 angulas.

V. Bhuja = V 225-1 nearly 15 angulas.
vi. Representation: Fig. 5: (Scale 1' unit = dafig.)

It should be remembered that the fig. is intended only for the appearance of the M o o n , with the
illumination, and elevation of the horns represented on it, and none else. T h e line D G E F D is the
part illuminated, D and E being the tips of the horns. Actually the Sun is down, on the line M F .
v.9 V. PAULINA M O O N ' S CUSPS 147

Now for the readings: A s the elevation due to the latitude of the place is considerable, it cannot
be neglected and must be represented; therefore we have corrected dviguneche tithyamsa into
dvigune'kse tithyamsa, by changingc/ia intoksa. B u t T S have adopted the readingdvigunecchdtithyamsa
and considering it a combination of dvigunecchd and atithyamsa thinking that the subject matter is
astrological, (which is obviously unlikely).
We have corrected paridhavaksondmnh into paridhdvaksonndmah, for the instruction to apply the
elevation due to the latitude must be given. But T S and N P take the reading as it is, and say that
something on the r i m o f the M o o n is named aksa, which is purposeless. T h e i r readings themselves
in these two cases are from their own edition of Bhattotplala's commentary on the Brhatsarmhitd, and
to say that their (TS's) readings agree with those of the Bhattotpala may be improper, for probably
they have themselves put the readings there.

d^^^lchlc^H i ^ g r ^ ^ y i V I I ^ < 4 ) W3l:

Daily rising and setting of the M o o n

8. Multiply the Moon's latitude in degrees by the equinoctial shadow and
divide by twelve. A d d the resulting degrees to the longitude of the Moon, or
subtract from it, according as the Moon's latitude is south or north, if the
times of daily moonrise is to be computed. If the times of daily moonset is to
be found, reverse the addition and subtraction, i.e. subtract and add, respec-
tively.
9. Subtract the longitude of the Sun from that of the M o o n corrected thus.
Find the time for this segment of the ecliptic to rise, after sunrise. By so much
dme after sunrise, the M o o n will rise. If this segment is less than sixrdsis, then
the moonrise will fall in the day-time, if greater, the moon will rise at night.

9a-b. A.-<
h. C . i s t S ^ : ; D . t % n . A . ^ s f ^ ^
8-10. Quoted by Utpala o n B S 4.15.
c. A.-^^
8b. A.il3^^5qM^ c.fls^cqrai^ B1.2.3. Commence again from
^ f ^ after the big gap which
A.<l^wi!^n:; D.^dg^Rfihrn:; u.#rfw?im: commenced at IV.20.
d. U.ftM^WH^ y<=lJ, I d. A . M . B3.i^li<ll<V4)
148 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V . 10

10. I n the m a n n e r g i v e n ( i n verse 8), correct the M o o n f o r moonset, d e d u c t

the S u n f r o m this c o r r e c t e d M o o n , a n d d e d u c t 6 rdsis f r o m the r e m a i n d e r .
F i n d the t i m e by w h i c h the r e m a i n i n g segment w i l l rise, after sunrise. T h i s is
the t i m e f r o m sunrise w h e n the M o o n w i l l set. A t the t i m e exactly m i d w a y bet-
w e e n m o o n r i s e a n d m o o n s e t , the M o o n w i l l r e a c h the m e r i d i a n , (i.e. w i l l be at
upper culmination).

The following is the work to be done:

i. T h e correction (for latitude) = the Moon's latitude X the equinoctial shadow 12 (This is
known as Aksadrkkarma).

ii. This correction is to be applied to the true Moon. Corrected Moon = True Moon Correction.
(If the dme of moonrise is to be found, then the correction is subtractive if the Moon's latitude is
north, and additive if it is south. If moonset is wanted, if the Moon's ladtude is south, the correction
is subtracdve, i f north it is addidve).

iii. T h e dme of moonrise is found thus: T h e corrected M o o n - T r u e Sun = elongation. T h e dme

of rise of the segment of elongation from sunrise is the time of moonrise. (In other words, the
corrected Moon's position on the ecliptic being known, the time when that point rises is the time
of moonrise). W h e n the elongation is less than 6 rdsis, moonrise is i n the day-dme, otherwise at
night.

iv. T h e dme of moonset is found thus: Corrected M o o n - Sun = elongation. T h e time of rise
of (the segment of elongation 6 rdsis) from sunrise, is the time o f moonset. (In other words, the
time of rising of the point diametrically opposite to corrected M o o n is the dme o f moonset). Here,
if the elongation is less than 6 rdsis, then the moonset is i n the night, and i f greater, it is i n the day-
time.

V. Moonrise to moonset is the moon-day-time. It is obvious that at the middle of its day time it
is on the meridian.

It is obvious that the times o f rising and setting will be correct i f the longitudes and Moon's
ladtude of those times are used. B u t as the computadon as done here is only approximate, we can
guess the approximate dmes of moonrise and moonset for the day from the tithi of the day, and use
the elements o f those dmes, to get tolerably accurate times.

Sample 4. The equinoctial shadowfor a certain place (in the northern hemisphere)is4 angulas. The ascen-
sional differences for the place are for Aries 236 vinddis, Taurus 265, Gemini 309, Cancer 337, Leo 333,

lOa. A.S^; E.Tf^. A . B . ^

b. A . B . C . D . U.5!I*; ( B 2 . 5 # ) ^ f t W l e T d. B 3 . ^ and C . D . t ^ for'?lfiFr
A.B.U.I^'TOI^. D.Re|^6^
c. A . B . T l f W Z l : ; C . m\\ <llRl
V . 10 V. PAULISA M O O N S CUSPS 149

Virgo 320, Libra 320, Scorpio 330, Sagittarius 337, Capricorn 309, Aquarius 265, and Pisces 236. There,
on a certain day, the true longitude of the Moon at sunrise isra, 1-18, the true Sunisrd. 10-3, the Sun's daily
motion is 60', the Moon's daily motion is 840', the latitude of the Moon is 272' S, and its motion per day 8'
S. Find the moonrise, moonset and upper culmination.
T h e distance of the M o o n from the Sun = rd. 1-18 - ra. 10-3 = ra. 3-15, (equal to 8 % From
this the approximate dme of moonrise is, 8 % x 2 = 17 '/2 nddis. Therefore the dme o f moonset is
approximately, 17 '/2 -H 31 = 4 8 V2 nddis. T h e Sun at approx. moonrise is ra. 10-3-18, the moon rd.
1-22-5, and its latitude 274' S. A t approximate moonset, the sun is ra. 10-3-49, the M o o n rd. 1-29-19,
audits latitude 278' S.

Using each set, the computation is as follows:

i. T h e correction for moonrise = 274' X 4 12 = 9 1 ' .
T h e correction for moonset = 2 7 8 ' x 4 - ^ 12 = 93'.

ii. T h e corrected M o o n for moonrise = ra. 1-22-5 -(- 9 1 ' = ra. 1-23-36.
T h e corrected moon for moonset = ra. 1-29-19 - 93' = ra. 1-27-46.

iii. C o m p u t i n g Moonrise:
Elongation = Corrected M o o n - Sun = ra. 1-23-36 - ra. 10-3-18 = ra. 3-20-18.
As this is less than six rdsis, the moonrise is in the day-time.
T h e time for the segment, ra. 3-20-18, to rise after sunrise is found thus: For the rest of Aquarius,
which is the sign occupied by the Sun, to rise, the time taken is 265 x 1602' 1800' = 236 vinddis.
For Pisces to rise, 236, for Aries 236, for the corrected M o o n to rise i n Taurus, 265 X 1416' 1800'
= 208 vinddis. So the total time taken is, 236 -I- 236 -I- 236 + 208 = nddis 15-16. This is the time of
moonrise.
iv. Moonset:
Elongation = Corrected M o o n Sun
= rd. 1-27-46 - rd. 10-3-49 = ra. 3-23-57.

Deducting six rdsis from this, we have rd. 9-23-57.

T h e time for the rise of this much segment is found thus: For the rest of Aquarius to rise, the time
taken is 265 x 1571' 1800' = 231 vinddis. For Pisces 236, Aries 236, Taurus 265, Gemini 309,
Cancer 337, Leo 333, V i r g o 320 and Libra 320. For Scorpio to rise upto the point diametrically
opposite to the corrected M o o n , 333 X 1666' 1800' = 308. A d d i n g up, the time of moonset is
na. 48-15.

This agrees with what we can infer from elongation, for the elongation found is less than 6 rdsis,
and the moonset must be in the night.

v. T h e duration of the lunar day is na. 48-15 nd. 15-16 = nd. 32-59. H a l f this is nd. 16-30.
A d d i n g this to moonrise, mid-moon-day, the time of upper culmination of the M o o n is na. 15-16
-I- nd. 16-30 = na 31-46, after sunrise.

T h e instruction is thus explained: T h e problem is to find the time of rising or setting of the
M o o n , which is i n its orbit, at a distance equal to its latitude from the ecliptic. If it can be projected
150 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V . 10

on the ecliptic in such a way that its projected position rises and sets at the same time as it itself rises
and sets, then the time can be found like lagma, by the method given in Chap. I V for that purpose.

In order to effect the said projection two corrections have to be applied to the M o o n , one for the
inclination of the ecliptic called Ayana-drkkarma (we d i d this for visibility), and the other for the
latitude of the observer called Aksa-drkkarma. T h e Siddhdnta gives the correction for latitude alone
here, which is got by multiplying the latitude of the M o o n by the equinoctial shadow and dividing
by 12.

T h e following is its rationals: T h e latitude is measured on the great circle perpendicular to the
ecliptic and directed towards the pole of the ecliptic. If the latitude is projected on secondaries to
the pole, and we get the true declination of the M o o n by adding this to the mean declination, we
can find its time of rising and setting directly, as we find the rising and setting of the Sun, by com-
puting its cara etc. and getting its own ascensional differences. But if the latitude is small, it can
roughly be taken as the correction for the Moon's mean declination, given by its longitudes. So the
correction to the vinddis of true cara can be found by the latitude taken as part of the declination,
by proportion from the cara-vinddis for the mean declination already used in finding the ascen-
sional differences. Therefore, as in getting the cara-vinddis, here too we have to multiply by the
equinoctial shadow and divide by 12. But the division by the diurnal radius is not done, because
here we are not finding actually the vinddis of cara, but an element of the ecliptic corresponding to
the cara, for the sake of which we have to multiply again by the radius of the diurnal circle, and the
two cancel out. T h u s the correction will permit us to consider the M o o n to be on the ecliptic.
We shall now consider when it is additive, and when subtractive. In the northern hemisphere, the
Unmandala is elevated above the horizon, the elevation increasing towards the north. Therefore if
the Moon is a litde to the south of the ecliptic on account of its south latitude, it rises later. As successive
points on the ecliptic rise later and later, the correction got from the Moon's south latitude is equi-
valent to an increase in the Moon's longitude, and so the correction to the longitude is additive.
From this we can see why the correction is subtractive if the Moon's latitude is north. As for the time
of the setting of the M o o n , the further north a body is, the later it sets, and therefore the correction
is additive i f the latitude is north, from which we see it is subtractive if the latitude is south. T h e
Siddhdnta has in view only observers in the northern hemisphere, as we have already said. We ha\e
already drawn the attention of the reader to the omission of the correction due to the inclination
of the ecliptic (Ayana-drkkarma). It may be that the author expects us to make this correction also,
taking the hint from the computation of the heliacal rising of the M o o n (visibility).

T h e part of the instruction to find the time when the corrected M o o n rises is explained thus: T h e
corrected M o o n minus Sun is the segment of the ecliptic between them, and the time taken for its
rise after sunrise is the time of the rise of the corrected M o o n itself. If this segment is less than six
rdsis, the M o o n must rise in the day-time, because just after the rise of six rdsis from sunrise the sun
sets, but this segment is less. Clearly, i f it is more than six rdsis the Sun has set, and it is night when
the M o o n rises. As for moonset, the point of the corrected Moonplus (or minus) six rdsis rises at that
time. So, the time of its rise, or which is the same, the time taken by the corrected M o o n mimis Sun
six rdsis, after sunrise is the time. O f , the author has chosen minus, because the effect of both
is the same. By analogy with mid-day Sun, the M o o n is on the meridian at the middle of its day-time,
provided its motion and change of declination is tolerably uniform. We must add here that it would
have been sufficient i f the author had said, 'Treat the corrected moon as Lagna, and its time of rise
is the time of moonrise. Treat the corrected Moon plus (or minus) six rd.sis as Lagna, and its time of
rise is the time of moonset'.
V . 10 V. P A U L I S A M O O N S CUSPS 151

Now for the readings: In verse ten if the meaning is taken as it is, then we shall be getting the time
of sunset after moonrise, which serves no purpose and cannot be the intention of the author to get,
and it is incompatible with the tiine of the meridian M o o n sought to be found in the fourth foot.
This is the middle of the Moon's day-time and for this, moonset has to be found. (TS and N P too inter-
pret this verse as giving moonset). Therefore we have corrected vyarkam candram visodhya cakrdrdhdt
into vyarkdt candrdt visodhya cakrdrdham, by interchanging the case endings, and thus got the time
of moonset, required for meridian M o o n . T h e reading mesodayakdla ior sesodayakdla has been dis-
carded as being unconnected with the problem.

T S and N P have given the impossible correction, nisi divase'stam sasi ydti for sasidivasdrdhe
sashnadhya found in the manuscripts. T h e i r aim, viz. to get the time of moonset, is all right, but their
intei pretadon of the stanza to get this is wrong, and also self-contradictory. See the Sanskrit com-
mentary for the said interpretation: 'Deduct the Moonminus Sun from 6 raiw; the time of the rising
of this is the time of moonset, reckoned from sunrise. Here, if the M o o n sets in the day-time then
Moon-minus-Sun must be deducted from 6 rdsis. If in the night, the M o o n itself is to be deducted
from 6 rdsis. This order of procedure should be understood.' If their instruction in the first sen-
tence is followed, the dme of sunset after moonrise will be got, as we have already said, but not the
time of moonset. It is to avoid this that we interchanged the case endings. As for the instruction in
the second sentence, the first part of it disagrees with the second part. We shall illustrate these
defects found in their interpretation, by applying them to two examples.

(a) T h e Sun is rd. 0-15, M o o n is rd. 2-0, the Moon's latitude is zero, i.e. there is no corrections.
In this case, the moonset according to T S is to be found thus: M o o n Sun = rd. 2-0 rd. 0-15 =
rd. 1-15. Deducting this from 6rasw, the remainder is rd. 4-15. T h e y say, the time taken for rd. 4-15
to rise, after sunrise, is the time of moonset after sunrise. T h e absurdity of this can be seen by find-
ing the time of moonrise, which is the time taken by the Moon-Sun to rise, i.e. for rd. 1-15 to rise;
i.e. the interval between moonrise and moonset is the rising time of 3 rdsis. O r , by the instrucdon
in the second sentence, as the M o o n does not set in the day, it sets in the night, and therefore
deducting the M o o n itself from 6 rdsis, we getrd. 4-0, and they say by the time of rise of rd. 4-0 from
sunrise the Moon sets. Does it occur in the night at all?

Perhaps they meant sunset. T h e n , let us take another case.

(b) T h e Sun is rd. 0-15, the M o o n is rd. 8-0, and Moon's latitude is 0, again. T h e n , M o o n Sun
= rd. 7-15. The moonset is in the day-time, clearly. Therefore deducting this from 6 rdsis, we have
rd. 6-0 rd. 7-15 = rd. 10-15. According to them the M o o n sets by theriseof this segment after sun-
rise. Clearly according to this the moonset will fall in the night, and not in the day-time as required.
Assuming sunrise is a mistake for sunset, reckoned from sunset also it will be wrong, for then the
moonset will be rd. 4-15 from sunrise, which is wrong, for it is correctly the time of rising of rd. 1-15
from sunrise. This demonstration shows their interpretadon to be wrong, and at the same time
justifies our interchanging the case-endings, by which alone the dme of moonset can be got correctly.

Thus ends Chapter Five entitled Paulisa-Siddhanta: Moon's Cusps

 Chapter Six

(VASISTHA-) PAULISA-SIDDHANTA: LUNAR ECLIPSE

Introductory
This chapter deals with the lunar eclipse. Nothing is given in the colophon at the end of the chapter
about the Siddhdnta to which this belongs. T h i s cannot belong to the Saura for the lunar eclipse of
the Saura is dealt with in Chapter X . T h e Sun, M o o n and Rahu of the Romaka are given i n Chapter
V I I I , and in the same chapter the solar eclipse according to that Siddhdnta occurs, and its lunar
eclipse cannot be given here, earlier. Also, the method here does not have the refinement of the
Romaka solar ecUpse. So this chapter cannot belong to the Romaka. That it may belong to the
Paitdmaka is out o f question, since only the mean Sun and the M o o n , and that very crudely, being
given by the Paitdmaha, and R a h u is not given. Also, the Siddhdnta occupies a later chapter, the
twelfth. T h i s leaves the Vdsistha and the Paulisa for consideradon. Perhaps it belongs to both com-
bined, as we have observed i n the case o f their M o o n and its daily motion. It cannot belong to the
Vdsistha separately for the Vasistha does not give R a h u , which we have to get from the Paulisa. Also,
it cannot belong to Paulisa separately, for then at least part of the computation, Hke the duration
of the eclipse will become redundant, because the duration of the lunar eclipse with its limits occurs
in chapter V I I also, together with the computation of the solar eclipse, which from the colophon
and from the nature of the method given, must belong to the Paulisa. Also, details usually given i n
connecdon with ecHpses, Hke the direction o f contacts, colour etc. are found only here i n the V I
chapter. Therefore we can conclude that chapters V I and V I I belong both to the Vdsistha and the
Paulisa, and that the solar eclipse i n the V I I chapter belongs to the Paulisa.

Sun and M o o n of equal longitude

1. Minutes of arc equal to the na4is of the full moon-tithi to go, after sunset,
are to be added to the Sun, (which has been computed for sunset). Minutes of
arc equal to the nddis to go from the end of the full moon or new moon-tithi
in the day-time upto sunset are to be so added to the Sun. Thus corrected, the
Sun becomes equal to the M o o n in (degrees and) minutes at the end of the full
or new moon-tithi, (i.e. at full or new moon).

T h e idea is that by thus finding the Sun, we can, without any trouble, get the M o o n , for, i f new
moon, the Sun thus got is the M o o n and, i f full moon, the Sun plus 6 rdsis is the M o o n .
VI. 1 VI. VAS.-PAUL. S I D D H A N T A - L U N A R ECLIPSE 153

T h e following is the rationale of the work: T h e lunar edipse occurs at the end of full moon-tithi.
A t that time, the Sun and the M o o n are separated from each other exactly by 6 rdsis. Therefore the
degrees and minutes or, which is the same, the total minutes left over after finding the rdsis at 1800
minutes a rdsi, are the same for both. Therefore they are called sama-liptas, i.e. 'having equal
minutes'. T h e solar eclipse is at the end of the new moon-tithi, at which time they are the same even
in rdsi, not to speak of the degrees and minutes, and therefore samaliptas. So, if we know the Sun at
these times, we know the M o o n , for, if new moon, they are the same, and i f full moon, different by
6 rdsis.

Now, in the Paulisa the 'days from epoch' are found for sunset, and from them the Sun and the
M o o n are found for sunset first. (We have already drawn the attention of the reader to this, while
commenting on III. 15.) T h e n , the ending moment of the tithi is calculated by using the difference
of their motions. T h e Sun's motion is roughly one minute of arc per nddi. Therefore i f one minute
per nddi of the time from sunset to full moon (we take only the full moon because with new moon
at night there will be no solar eclipse) is added to the sunset Sun, the Sun at full moon is got, and
the Moon is got from it by adding 6 rdsis. Thus the M o o n is easily got, for otherwise we must calculate
the Moon's motion d u r i n g the interval by propordon from its daily motion, add this to the sunset
M o o n , and get the M o o n . In the case when new or full moon-tithi ends i n the day-dme, it is obvious
that the minutes of arc accrued d u r i n g the interval up to sunset should be deducted from the sunset
Sun, to get the M o o n , as a preliminary to computing either the solar eclipse or the lunar eclipse.
T h e Siddhdnta is content with thus getting the Moon roughly, for that will be sufficient considering
the crudeness of its method of computation. If greater accuracy is desired, we must multiply the
difference of the Sun's daily motion from 60 minutes o f arc by the dme to go or dme gone, and,
taking the product as seconds of arc, subtract or add them, respectively, to the M o o n i f the daily
motion is less, and add or subtract respectively if greater. T h e daily motion required for this is given
in III. 17, which we have already seen.

T S have understood that the M o o n at new or full moon is found here, but not the manner in
which it is done so simply, for they interpret the instruction to mean that the M o o n is to be got from
its daily motion by proportion. T o obtain this meaning, they make wild emendations of the words.
But we have kept the words mostly as they are, and we can see that they are sufficient to give the
correct idea. For example, in all the three readings, naisydh, naisndh and vaisndh (snaisndh) there is
'nai' which therefore must have been in the original word. Therefore, by changing 5 to .v, we get
naisydh, meaning 'belonging to the night', which so well agrees with the idea. We have changed can-
dram into cdndra for the sake of syntax and agreement with the idea. Between vi and va, we have
introduced vi, thus reading ravi-vivardt, which is a likely haplographical omission, and get a word
that fits so well with the idea. T a k i n g the meaningless reading, nrvasudbhavdcca, and keeping as far
as possible to the letters there, we have reconstructed the form as divasodbhavdcca, fitting in with the

la. A . B 2 . D . V l I : ; B l . 3 . ^ : ; B 3 . ^ : ;
C . ^ ^ i l ^ A . B . C . D . Hl*il<+;f c. A.^g^P^-?Ttsqi; B.'5S3-^cna6I:-?tlzn:;
b. A . ^ ^ ; B . ^ g ^ ; (B2.a=j^) C . See above; D.WS^gf?Th2ir:
C . ^ ^ d W c ^ d l ^ : ^ ^ ? ! : I D.<^M*I- d. A . dc+MJ^lRflftHyi^ ^\M^^: I

A . ^ % d ^ ; B.-Mi)-^<ftc|<l D.?mlf^:
154 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VI.2

idea. N P insert vi to get the reading ravi-vivardt but leave the other errors untouched or making
unwarranted emendations.

Probability of an eclipse

2. D e d u c t o n e degree a n d thirty-six m i n u t e s f r o m R a h u ' s H e a d o r T a i l

( w h i c h e v e r is n e a r the M o o n ) a n d find the i n t e r v a l i n degrees between that
a n d the M o o n (at f u l l m o o n f o u n d above). I f it is less t h a n t h i r t e e n , a l u n a r
eclipse w i l l o c c u r t h e n . I f it is less t h a n fifteen, ( a n d above thirteen), there w i l l
o n l y be a slight d a r k e n i n g .

The following is the explanation: A t the moment when the distance between the centres of the
M o o n and the Shadow circle is equal to the sum of their semi-diameters there is the first contact or
the last contact of the eclipse, because the rims just touch each other then, see Fig. l a , below.

Fig, VI. l-a

The centre of the Shadow is always six rdsis distant from the Sun. A t full moon (i.e. the end of the
tithi) the M o o n projected on the ecliptic (i.e. the longitude of the Moon) is 6 rdsis distant from the
Sun, as we have already said. Therefore the centre of the Shadow also is there. But the actual M o o n

2a. B . ' e ^ S ^ l ^ (B2.sim, B 3 . ^ )

b. A 2 . f H ^ ( A l . ^ ^ ) ; B.IBmi^ld8i!i!l* d. A.B.<ii(!IH:*lWW ( B . W )
VI.2 VI. V A S . - P A U L . S I D D H A N T A - L U N A R ECLIPSE 155

is on its orbit, at a distance equal to its ladtude. Therefore only when the latitude is equal to the sum
of the semi-diameters, is there at least a grazing of the rims'. (See Fig. lb)

As according to the Paulisa the sum of the semi-diameters is always 55', (this will be shown later),
and as this much latitude can be got only i f M o o n ~ R a h u is 13, and not m o r e ' there can be no
eclipse, i f Moon ~ Rahu is greater than 13.

As for the little darkening from 13 to 15, it is due to the M o o n entering the penumbra alone and
getdng out, instead o f entering the umbra. It is well-known that i f the source o f light is not a point,
there is a region not so dark round the shadow, which is darker and .darker as the shadow is
approached, and becomes sufficient to be seen. T h i s Siddhdnta has taken this region to be about 8',
round the shadow. Therefore, the Moon's orb will touch this region at lull moon i f the ladtude
is 63', and for this its distance from R a h u must be 15', as given here.

As for deducUng r 3 6 ' from Rahu, the author has found this is necessary by observaUon, and we
have to accept it, as agreement with observation is necessary, otherwise people will lose faith in the
Sdstra. O r the Paulisa Siddhdnta itself gives this correction for agreement with observation, for, in
the phenomena intended to be seen, such correction is the practice of the writers of this Sdstra. But
it may be asked how this need for correction arises at all. This implies that either the longitude of
Rahu or that of the M o o n is incorrect. We showed in ch.III that at epoch Rahu-head was 235 59'

1. What we have said here is a little inexact and taken as such by most of the ancient authors. Actually, since the Moon's orbit
is inclined 'o the ecliptic by about 5, the minimum distance between the Moon and the Shadow, given by SM', the perpen-
dicular on the orbit from S, is a little less than SM, and it is only when SM' is equal to the semi-diameters that the grazing
occurs. Therefore even if the latitude at full moon is a little greater, an eclipse can occur, but this has been neglected as being
very small, actually less than a quarter of a minute of arc.

2. As explained by us under III.31, taking 380' as the maximum latitude (i.e. for 90 distance), and taking the latitude as
proportionate to the Bhuja of Moon-Rahu, as given by the siddhdnta there, we gel 380' X 13 90 = 55', for Moon ~ Rahu
equal to 13. This agreement here is the proof of the correctness of what we said above in the explanation that the latitude
is proportionate to the degrees of Bhuja. If we take the maximum latitude to be 280', as given by the reading of the text
there, or to be 270' as TS have taken there without assigning any reason, neither taking the latitude as proportionate to the
degrees of Moon ~ Rahu, nor correctly as proportionate to sin (Moon Rahu) will give 55'. This is the reason why TS them-
selves have, in this section, in verse 5, abandoned both 280' and 270', and taken 240' as the maximum latitude, (vide their
Sanskrit and English explanations under VI.5.).

U
156 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VI.4

according to the Paulisa and this agrees beautifully with its position than according to modern
astronomy, 236, and tolerably well with those of other Siddhdntas. Therefore the incorrectness
must be i n the M o o n , and as much error i n the tithi is unlikely, nor i n the Sun as well. O n examina-
don we find it is indeed so; we find that at the period of the author the Sun and the M o o n of Paulisa
were less by about a degree and a half, than those of other Siddhaiitas. By this error in the M o o n ,
the value of M o o n minus R a h u will be less by about a degree and a half, (1 36') and instead of
correcting the error by adding it to the M o o n , we subtract 1 36' from Rahu, which is the same. We
do not add it to the M o o n , because i f we do, we must add the same quantity to the Sun to keep the
tithi intact, and this will affect the Samkramanas, and thus cause a lot of disturbance. If added to
Rahu nobody will even notice it. It may be asked whether it is not wrong to use the latitude calcu-
lated in III.31 from uncorrected R a h u i n our work here, as we are going to do. Indeed it will be
wrong, and that is why the author gives a correcdon below, in stanze 4, to set it right.'

T S do not understand the nature of this correction, not even its amount and its connecdon with
stanza 4. T h e i r ignorance i n the matter of the computation of Rahu, which we exposed in III. 28-
29, they exhibit here also, (see their Sanskrit C o m m . page 40).

[i<^uife<ldcMH;]

R < m f e c h i w i T m r ^ f ^ ^ s ^ g n ^ : ||>i |

Duration of the eclipse

3. Square the Moon's latitude, subtract it from the square of 55, (i.e. from
3025), and find its square root. Double this, and multiplying by 60, divide by
the difference of the daily motions of the Sun and Moon, in minutes. T h e
approximate time of the duration of the eclipse is got in nddis.

4. If M o o n ~ Sun is less than 13, multiply the degrees by 5. T h e result are

vinddis. A d d these vinddis to the duration if the longitude of Rahu is greater
than that of the Moon, and subtract if the Moon is greater than Rahu. Thus
the time of duration becomes correct.

The following are the steps i n the work:

i. U s i n g III.31, find the Moon's ladtude, (using uncorrected Rahu).

ii. Uncorrected time of duration in nddis = V 3025 (latitude in minutes)' x 1 2 0 d i f f e r e n c e of
daily motions of Sun and M o o n i n minutes.

3a. A.-?F^
c. A.B.f^ 4a. A.B.C.D.'^:
d. A.B.^nelf^ c. A.B.C.D.fw??T
VI.4 VI. V A S . - P A U L . S I D D H A N T A - . L U N A R ECLIPSE 157

iii. Corrected time of duration = uncorrected time 5 X degrees of M o o n ~ Rahu in vinadis

(If Rahu is greater use the upper sign, i f less use the lower sign. M o o n ~ Rahu is what we get in
verse 2, in this section).

Example I. On a day, at sunset, the longitude of the Sun is rd. 10-10-12, longitude of the Moon rd. 4-8-57,
Sun's daily motion 60' and Moon's daily motion 810'. (From these the end of the full moon tithi falls at 6 nddis
after sunset). The Tail of Rdhu at full moon w rd. 4-7-42. Examine whether a lunar eclipse will occur, and if
so, find the duration.
As a preliminary, the M o o n at full moon should be found by verse 1, thus: T h e tirne to elapse
after sunset, for full moon, is 6 nddis. A d d i n g 6' to the Sun at sunset, the Sun at full moon is rd. 10-
10-12 + 6' = rd. 10-10-18. Therefore the M o o n is rd. 4-10-18.
Now, examine whether there will be an eclipse. Rahu at full moon = rd. 4-7-42 (given). Corrected
Rahu = rd. 4-7-42 - 1 36' = rd. 4-6-6. M o o n ~ corrected Rahu = 4 12'. As this is less than 13,
there is eclipse.

Now for the work of getting the duration:

i. T h e Moon's latitude (supposed known already) = 380' X (rd. 4-10-18rd. 4-7-42 in degrees)
^ 9 0 = 11'.

ii. Uncorrected duration in nddis = V 3 0 2 5 - 11' X 120 - (810 - 60) = V 2904 X 120 750 = nd.
8-37.
iii. Corrected duration = nd. 8-37 5 X 4.2 vinddis = nd. 8-16. (subtraction because Rahu is less
than the Moon).
The following is the rationale of the procedure: We have said that, according to the Siddhahta,
when the distance between the centres of the Shadow and the M o o n is 55', the eclipse begins or
ends, because at these times the distances are equal to the sum of the semi-diameters.

Moon's orbit Ml M M2

Ecliptic A S B

Fig. VI.2

See S M , and SM., in Fig 2, where S is the Shadow and M , , M ^ are the M o o n . A t full moon, the
latitude is the distance between the centres, at that time. (SM), because at full moon the centre of
the shadow is at S, because it is always 6 rdsis distant from the Sun. Since the inclination of the orbit
to the ecliptic is siuall, the siddhdnta takes it that the orbit and the eclipdc are practically parallel, and
that the latitudes of the M o o n at first contact ( A M , ) at full moon (SM), and at last contact (BM^) are
158 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A VI.4

equal. As the three lines of latitude are perpendicular to the ecliptic, A M , A S . and A M,^ BS, are
equalandright angled at A and B . Therefore A S = SB = V(sum of semi-diameters)- latitude' =
V ' 5 5 ' lat'-, where A S or S B are the difference of the Moon's longitude at first or last contacts from
its longitude at new moon, and measured in minutes of arc. As the motion of S is the same as that
of the Sun, the time taken by the longitude to move from A to S or from S to B = the minutes of
difference ^ the difference of the motions of the Sun and the M o o n i n minutes = V 5 5 ' lat' X 60 -^
difference of daily motion in minutes, in nddis. Therefore the total time in nddis horn A to B (this
is the uncorrected whole duration) = 2 X 60 x V 5 5 ' lat' H- the difference of daily modons in
minutes.
But actually the latitudes at the first and last contacts differ enough from that of the full moon
to justify the use of their exact value. So each should be used separately, and the half-duration
before full moon, and that after full moon should be found. Using the latitudes of these times
again, if necessary, they should be found again. Certain Karanas (manuals) like the Vdkyakarana
apply a certain coi rection in the place of this repetition of work. This correction depends upon the
M o o n ~ Rahu at full moon, like the correction in stanza 4, given by the author for correcting the
duration, and therefore it is possible that the correction for the difference in latitude has been
included in that correction. But as the correction given is rough, we cannot analyse it and find out
whether the author has done so or not.
Let us now consider the rationale of the correction in stanza 4. We have already hinted that this
is to compensate for using the latitude got in III.31 from uncorrected Rahu, instead of that from
corrected Rahu, which is to be used i n our work here.

In Fig. 3, R is the uncorrected position of Rahu, and R' is its corrected position. T h e distance
between them is 1 36', given in stanza 2. W h e n the M o o n is greater than Riihu, ( M , M ' ) then its
uncorrected latitude is M B , and the corrected latitude is M ' B , greater by M ' M . This is case I. When
the M o o n is less than Rahu ( M , , M , ' ) , then the uncorrected latitude is M , A , and the corrected
latitude is M , ' A , less by M , ' M , . T h i s is case II. In case I, if the uncorrected latitude, which is less, is
used in the work,v55' - lat' will be greater than what it should be, and the duration should be
lessened by a correction. Therefore it is said that the correction is subtractive when the M o o n is
greater than Rahu. In case II, since the uncorrected latitude is greater, V5^5' lat' will be less than
what it should be, and so it is said that the correction is additive i f the M o o n is less than Rahu, i.e.
if Rahu is greater. T h e Fig. is for Rahu-Head. It can be seen that at Rahu-Tail too the same holds.
VI.4 VI. V A S . - P A U L . S I D D H A N T A - L U N A R ECLIPSE 159

We can show this by theoretical considerations as well, thus: R a h u lessened by 1 36', is equiva-
lent to M o o n increased by 1 36', in its effect on M o o n Rahu. T h e latitude is proportionate to the
distance o f the M o o n from R a h u in each quadrant. In the first and third quadrants, the M o o n is
greater than Rahu, and the increase i n the M o o n by the correction increases the latitude. In the
second and fourth quadrants, the M o o n is less than Rahu, and the increase in the M o o n by the
correction lessens its distance from Rahu, with the result that the corrected ladtude is less. T h u s for
M o o n greater than Rahu the correct latitude is greater, and for M o o n less, it is less. T h e rest is as
we have shown already.

Now we shall find the quandty of correcdon: As the angles at R and 7?' are equal, the corrected
and the original orbits are parallel, (see the Fig.) Therefore the differences in the latitudes at any
position Hke M ' , M , , M ' M , and C R are equal. But C R, being the latitude caused by 1 36' of
longitude, is equal to 380' X 1 36' 90 = 6 % minutes of arc. Therefore the difference in any
position is 6 % ' .

We shall first see how much difference this will produce i n the half duration measured i n minutes
of arc. Clearly it is = V 5 5 ' - (lat 6 3 / 4 ) ' - V 5 5 ' - lat'

= V 5 5 ' - l a t ' + 131/2 lat - V 5 5 ' - lat', (if 6 % ' is neglected, being small i n comparison with 55'.)
= V55' - lat' V 1 + 131/2 lat/(55' - lat') - ^ 5 ' - lat'

= V55'-lat'{l +131/2 lat/2(55' - lat')} - V55' - lat' (if higher powers of 131/2 lat/(5.5' - lat')
are neglected.

= T 131/2 laty2 V55' - lat', and the author has neglected lat' and taken this as + 131/2 lat/2 x 55.
Using the difference of the mean daily modons of the Sun and the M o o n , because this will not
matter m the already rough result, and doubling for the whole duradon, the viyiadis of correcdon
are, I3i/^ lat X 2 X 60 X 60 + (2 x 55 x 720)

= 131/2 X lat X 5/55 = 131/2 X {(Moon ~ Rf x 55/13} x 5/55 (since lat = M o o n ~ Rahu) X
55/13,)
= 5 X (Moon ~ Rahu), roughly, as given here.

The greater the ladtude, the greater the roughness, but this wiU be submerged in the roughness
caused by several other things like the incorrect semi-diameters etc., but the method has the advan-
tage of being easy to apply.
We shall consider the readings now. In verse 3, the need for correcting mulah into mulam and
kdlasthiteh into kdlah sthiteh will be clear, as also for sthityd into sthitydm i n verse 4. As for correcting
bhdgaih into bhdgdh, this is justified by what we have shown in the explanation, viz. that it is M o o n
~ Rahu that is to be multiplied by 5 to give the vinddis of correction. If the word bhdgaih, is taken
as it is, the instruction should be taken to mean "five multiplied by the difference of M o o n ~ Rahu
and 13. By this, the correction, instead o f being zero, as it should be for zero ladtude, is the
maximum of 65 vinddis. Instead of being the m a x i m u m for m a x i m u m latitude, the correction
becomes zero. Further, on both sides of zero latitude, where there is a transition from the M o o n
being greater, to R a h u being greater, there is a j u m p from - 65 vinddis to + 65 vinddis, which itself
is an indication that the formula is incorrect. B u t it may be objected that i f our correction into
bhdgdh is accepted the word trayodasondh serves no purpose, for the computation will be begun only
if the difference is less than 13, and therefore this need not be mentioned. T h e answer is this: F r o m
our explanation of the formula for correction it may be seen that it is applicable if the difference is
160 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A VI.5

13, and even a litde more. T h e author instructs that the correction should be applied only if the
difference is less than 13.
But T S (also NP), have taken the word bhdgaih as it is and given the interpretation, because they
do not know the nature or the rationale of the correction. Here, Thibaut alone says (vide page 43
of E n g . Translation): " T o the duration so found stanza 4 directs us to apply a correction whose
rationale we are however unable to assign", and thus accepts ignorance. But S. Dvivedi in his Sanskrit
Commentary says that the Moon's motion varies from time to time, and this correction is to rectify
the error due to the variation. H e is unable to see that the variation of the Moon's motion has
nothing to do with the correction here, and cannot be related to it.

Total obscuration
5. D e d u c t the, difference o f the l o n g i t u d e s between the M o o n a n d R a h u
f r o m five degrees. D e d u c t this f r o m ten degrees, a n d m u l t i p l y the r e m a i n d e r
by this itself a n d by f o u r . F i n d the square root o f the result a n d m u l t i p l y it by
2 1 . T h e m i n u t e s o f arc o f total o b s c u r a t i o n is got. T h i s d i v i d e n d by the daily
m o t i o n gives the t i m e .

T h e rule given is as follows: Minutes of obscuration = 21 x V { 5 - (Moon ~ Rahu)} [10 - {5 -

(Moon ~ Rahu)}] x 4/5.
This can be simplified as: Minutes of obscuration = 2 x 2 1 V 5 ' - (Moon ~ Rahu)'/5.
= 2 X 2 1 X V25 - (Moon ~ Rahu)'/5.
This multiplied by 60 and divided by the daily motion gives the duration of obscuration in
nddikds.
Here, 21 x (Moon ~ Rahu)/5 is the Moon's latitude at full moon. T h e latitude according to the
Paulisa has been shown to be (Moon ~ Rahu) X 380790, where M o o n ~ Rahu is in degrees. As 380/
90 is very nearly equal to 21/5, we can say:
Latitude in minutes = 21 X (Moon ~ Rahu)/5.

It must be noted that we use here the corrected Rahu to get M o o n ~ Rahu. So, the latitude
obtained is the correct latitude. Therefore, no correction is necessary here corresponding to that
of verse 4, above.

Now, the rule is explained thus: In this Siddhdnta, the difference between the semi-diameters of

5a. B.^'aRRI?!?)^: (B3.i%'5cPT^)

b. B l . w f t . B . W ^ o m ^ . A.^^rai:
c. B.omW
d. A . B . W R T l
VI.5 VI. V A S . - P A U L . S I D D H A N T A - L U N A R ECLIPSE 161

the M o o n and the Shadow is 21 minutes of arc. Therefore, when the difference between their
centres is 2 1 ' , the total obscuration begins or ends, as at M , o r i n Fig. 4, below.

Fig. VI. 4

Here M is the M o o n at new-moon, and S is the centre of the Shadow. M , S = MgS = 2 1 ' = the
difference of the semi-diameters, constant according to this Siddhdnta. S M is the latitude at full
moon. Therefore,

Minutes o f obscuration = M , M g = 2 ( M , ^ or MM,,)

= 2 VSM^^="SNP = 2 V2 1' - ladtude^
= 2 V 2 F ^ {21 X (moon ~ Rahu)/5}'
= 2 X 21 V5' - (moon ~ Rahu)'/5
= 2 X 21 X V 25 - (moon ~ Rahu)'', the simplified rule, from which by inverse operation, we get
the original rule, 21 x \^5 - (moon ~ Rahu)} x [10 - {5 - (moon ~ Rahu)}] 4/5.

T h e conversion of the minutes of arc of obscuration into time is, as already given, by the propor-
tion. Minutes of daily motion of (Moon Sun): Minutes of obscuration :: 60 nddikds:nddikds of
obscuradon.

F r o m the simplified rule it will be readily seen that when M o o n ~ R a h u is 5, the minutes of
obscuration, and thence the time, is zero. Therefore only when the difference is less than 5, there
is obscuration, not when greater, i.e. i f the correct latitude at new moon is greater than 2 1 ' , there
is no total ecHpse.

Example 2. The Moon at new moon is rd. 8-13-24. Rdhu (Tail) is rd. 8-12-0. The daily motion of (Moon
Sun) = 750'. Find the minutes of obscuration and the time.

T h e corrected R a h u = rd. 8-12-0 - 1 36' = rd. 8-10-24

M o o n ~ Rahu = rd. 8-13-24 - rd. 8-10-24 = 3.
By the simplified rule, the minutes of obscuration = 2 X V 2 5 - 3 ' X 21/5 = 2 x 4 X 21/5, minutes.

T h e duration of obscuration = 2 x 4 x 21 X 60/(5 X 750) = nd. 2-41.

162 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VI.8

F r o m verse 3, giving the general duration, we see that the sum o f the semi-diameters of Shadow
and M o o n is 55'. Here we see that their difference is 2 1 ' . Hence, (55' + 21') = 76', is the diameter
of the Shadow according to this Siddhdnta, and 55' - 21' = 34', is the diameter of the M o o n , giving
the semi-diameters as 38' and 17' respectively.

By a strange confusion of ideas T S and N P have concluded here that when M o o n ~ Rahu is less
than 10, there must be a total eclipse, (vide the Sanskrit com.p.33, and English translation, p.44,
N P , Pt. II, p.53). We have shown that for a total eclipse to occur the difference must be less than
5. It is easy to see which is correct. If the difference is greater than 5, the number under the radix
becomes negative, and no real root can be obtained. For e.g. if we take 7, as the difference, according
to T S there must be total obscuration. But using it in the formula, we get,
21 X V(5 - 7){10 - (5 - 7)} 4/5 = 21 V'^=^/5 = 21 x 4 \ ^ ^ W 5 ,
which does not give a real value. T h e i r error is due to their confusing in their work, the 21 minutes,
sine of 10, as 21 minutes, latitude to be got for 10 difference.
Further the postulation by T S o f a m a x i m u m latitude of 240' in this context is unwarranted.
T r u e , from the above a latitude of 55' for 13 difference, and 2 1 ' for 5 difference will follow, if the
correct formula, with the sine of (Moon ~ Rahu) is used, instead of the degree of difference. But
nowhere i n H i n d u astronomy is 240' given, and the Vdsistha does not give the latitude at all. So
when the Vdsistha wants the latitude to be used in V . 3, we have got to use only the Paulisa formula,
and the reading gives 280', which T S have translated tacitly as 270'. 280', if taken, will give 63' and
24' for differences 13 and 5, and 270' will give 6 1 ' and 23', in,stead of 55' and 21', both of which
are unsupported by the context. This is the reason why we changed the reading to mean 380',
instead of 280', and, following the instructions strictly, gave the rule, latitude = 380' X difference
in degrees/90, getting 55' and 21' for differences of 13 and 5. This is also in keeping with the practice
of the Paulisa, which usually uses for proportion the degrees i n the place of sines.

Direction of the eclipse

6. During the interval from the time of first contact to the beginning of
totality, Rahu (i.e. darkness), swallows the M o o n completely. T h e direcdons
of the points of first and last contacts are to be calculated from the Moon ~
Rahu of those times.

7. Divide the semi-orb of the M o o n situated opposite to the direction of

ladtude into 13 parts, by straight lines parallel to the east-west diameter, at
VI.8 VI. V A S . - P A U L . S I D D H A N T A - L U N A R ECLIPSE 163

e q u a l distances f r o m o n e a n o t h e r . A t the p a r t o f the r i m e q u a l to the degrees

o f M o o n ~ R a h u , o n the e a s t e r n o r w e s t e r n p a r t o f the o r b , are the p o i n t s o f
first a n d last contacts, f r o m w h i c h the d i r e c t i o n s c a n be r e a d .

8. M u l t i p l y a f o u r t h o f the M o o n ' s r i m , (in w h a t e v e r u n i t t a k e n , as f o r e.g.

m i n u t e s o r digits) by the l a t i t u d e , a n d a g a i n by the degrees o f the M o o n east
or west o f the m e r i d i a n . D i v i d e this by 8 1 0 0 . B y so m a n y u n i t s is the east o r
west p o i n t o f contact b e n t n o r t h w a r d o r away f r o m the n o r t h respectively i f
the M o o n is east o f the m e r i d i a n , a n d b e n t away f r o m the n o r t h a n d n o r t h -
w a r d respectively, i f t h e M o o n is west o f the m e r i d i a n .

The instructions to obtain the directions of the points of contact have been explained by figures
5 a, b, c.

Fig. VI. 5-a.

Ecliptic

6a. A.feR;eT
b. A.fe^t^l^^; B . f ^ ^ ) ^ ^ ; C.f%#f%cW:; c. Al.^Tft^; A2.^*3f>
d. A . J1^>J|IWI^1; B . W ^ " ^ ; D.^T^^imi (c1^)
A . <*d1ildlTlT^ B. H^dHdl-^: ( B 3 . ^ ) ;
8a. A.B.c;ciifstl
c. A . W ^ l ^ ; B I . 3 . W n ^ ; C.D.-sra?itl% b. A.B.^^
7a. C.(^M4WI; D . f t q % : c. B.^^W^
b. c-D.-gOWr d. A.B.e)rHNW^ ( B . ^ ^ ) ; D . ^ ^ ' ^ i s p j I
164 P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A VI.8

In all the three figures, M , M , , M^,, M ' represent the centres of the M o o n , and S, S,, S,^, the centres
of the Shadow. S' is the point of contact. R is Rahu. In fig. 5a, R M., is part of the Moon's orbit, and
RS^ is part of the ecliptic. In position Sg which is the Hmit for the occurrence of an eclipse, MS^ =
1.3, and M.^S.j is the ladtude, equal to 55', = the sum of the semi-diameters, i.e., M.^S' + S'S.,. S', the
point of contact, is seen 90 from the east point, directed towards the north from the ecliptic, i.e.
at the north point of the Shadow, but at the south point with reference to the M o o n . In position S,
the .Moon is at the node, Rahu, and (Moon ~ Rahu) is 0. Clearly, S', the first point of contact, is at
the east point. In position S, between the above two, it is seen that S', the first point of contact,
makes an angle P M , S, with the east point, on the south, with reference to the Vloon.

It may be seen that the sine of the angle is proportionate to PS,, the latitude, which itself is propor-
tionate to (Moon ~ Rahu) as we have shown. T h u s , at any intermediate position, the point of con-
tact makes an angle with the east, whose sine is propordonate to M o o n ~ Rahu. Hence the rule to
divide the Moon's half opposite to the direction of the ladtude into 13 parts by parallel lines at equal
intervals, and take the point o f contact of that Une which corresponds to the degrees. M o o n ~
Rahu. T h i s is shown clearly in fig. 5c. H e r e P' S', the sine of the angle P ' M S ' , which is the direction,
is seen propordonate to PS, the latitude, which is propordonate to M o o n ~ Riihu. T h e figure is for
M o o n ~ Rahu equal to 7.

Fig. 5b is intended to show both the first and last points of contact, and because of the increase
(or decrease) of the ladtude d u r i n g the interval, there is an increase (or decrease) in the angle. In
the figure, the angle of first contact, P'MS', corresponds to the latitude M A and is smaller; the angle
of last contact, P'M'S' corresponds to the greater latitude M ' B , and is greater. It is also to be noted
that the last contact is at the western part of the M o o n , the M o o n now being east of the Shadow.

The directions mentioned above are with reference to the ecliptic, taking it as east-west, (neglecting
the angle of inclination of the Moon's orbit). B u t the directions have to be given as seen by the
observer. For this, two corrections have to be applied, one to convert it with reference to the east-
west of the equator, called Ayana-vaiana, and the other to correct it for the east-west of the place,
depending on the latitude of the place, called the Aksavalana. Both these have been mentioned and
explained in connection with the observation of the first appearance of the moon given in C h a p V .
T h e author here gives the Aksavalana alone following the original Siddhdnta, neglecting the other
one, though that is not negHgible. Even in this, he takes into consideration only the northern hemis-
phere. T h e r e the celestial equator is inclined south. A n observer facing east looking at a body on
the celestial equator sees the east point bent northward, and the west point bent southward. Simi-
larly, an observer facing a body west, sees the east point bent south, and the west point bent north.
VI.10 VI. VAS.-P.\UL. .SIDDHANTA - L U N A R ECLIPSE 165

T h e directions are changed accordingly. (For illustration see fig. 7, below given under example 3). A l l
this has been explained in chap. V . T h e Siddhdnta takes it that the bending is proportionate to the
latitude, being zero at the equator and 90 at the pole. So, in terms of the length of the circumference,
the bending = (ladtude/90) x circumference/4. But this amount of bending is only at the horizon.
O n the meridian there is no bending. In between, the Siddhdnta takes it as proportionate to the
angle of the M o o n from the meridian. Thus,
Bending = (latitude/90) X (circumference/4) x (degrees of the M o o n from the meridian/90)
= quarter circumference X latitude X degrees of the M o o n from the meridian/8100, as given.
As for the M o o n being "devoured", it is a figurative expression, the Shadow being identified with
the demon, Rahu, in the Puranas.

In saying that M o o n ~ Rahu should be done once for finding the point of first contact, and again
for the last contact, the author recognises that the difference may be considerable, and thereby
indicates that it will be good if the times also are computed separately, using the different latitudes.
But T S and N P by their eme.nAation, pragrahamokse, have shut out all this suggestion.

T S do not seem to understand why the division into thirteen parts is instructed to be made, for
Dr. 1 hibaut says, "We do not know the reason for the direcdon, given in stanza 7, to divide each
quarter of the circumference into thirteen parts." (p.45). It is not each quarter, and it is not the
quarter-circumference that is to be equally divided.

We have emended grahandsvdm.se into graharidsdvise, whereby we understand that the point of
contact is at the point where the parallel line corresponding to M o o n ~ Rahu meets the circumference.
T h e emendation grahandsd 'tad' vadet by N P is not warranted. In the matter of the directions of
Aksavalana, Thibaut says the opposite of what Sudhakara Dvivedi says, and neither gives the cor-
rect direction, (vide. C o m . and Translation)

Moment of the eclipse and its colour

8 A-9. T h e m i d d l e o f the eclipse is at the m o m e n t o f new m o o n . T h e times o f
first a n d last contacts are e a r l i e r a n d later t h a n the m i d d l e , by h a l f the t i m e o f
d u r a d o n . W h e n the eclipse is total, the c o l o u r o f the M o o n is r e d o r b r o w n as
it is farthest o r nearest to the e a r t h , respectively, a n d m i x e d , m o r e o r less, i n
between. W h e n the eclipse is n e a r sunset o r sunrise, the M o o n is s m o k y i n
c o l o u r . W h e n the eclipse is p a r t i a l , the M o o n has the c o l o u r o f r a i n c l o u d .
166 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VI.10

10. Subtract the H e a d o f R a h u f r o m 12 rdsis, m u l t i p l y it by 2 2 8 , a n d a d d the

M o o n ' s l o n g i t u d e . I f this is b e t w e e n 6 a n d 12 rdsis, the M o o n is farther, a n d
i f b e t w e e n 0 a n d 6 rdsis, it is nearer. ( T h e i d e a is, that the n e a r e r this s u m is to
9 rdsis, the f a r t h e r is the M o o n a n d its c o l o u r at total eclipse is n e a r e r to r e d .
T h e n e a r e r this s u m is to 3 rdsis the n e a r e r is the M o o n , a n d its c o l o u r is n e a r e r
to b r o w n ) .

Since this Siddhdnta uses the latitude, (or M o o n ~ Rahu) at full moon to find the duration, the
part of the duradon before full moon is equal to that after full moon, and the middle is at full moon.
But other siddhdntas repeat the work, using the latitudes at first and last contacts separately, so that
the two parts are not equal, and the middle does not occur at full moon. Still all siddhdntas techni-
cally call the moment of full moon as the middle, since at that time the eclipse is practically the
maximum.
As for the colour of the M o o n at ecHpse, it is based on observation, and given sHghdy differentiy
by different Siddhdntas. Some take the fraction of the M o o n ecHpsed as the criterion for the colour,
others the time of the ecHpse and its nearness to sunset or sunrise, etc. Here, this Siddhdnta uses, i n
addition, a new criterion, not given by any other Siddhdnta, viz. the distance of the M o o n from the
observer, and there is truth i n what the Siddhdnta says.

Here, it may be asked how at all is it possible for the M o o n to have any colour at eclipse. It is an
opaque body, and what illumination it has comes from the Sun's rays falling o n it. W h e n it is
immersed i n the Sun's umbra, i.e. full shadow, (we consider the M o o n in umbra alone as eclipsed,
and not i n pen-umbra), the Sun's rays cannot fall on it. It cannot be the earth-shine falling on the
M o o n and dimly illuminating it, as i n the crescent M o o n , giving rise to the popular belief of "the
old M o o n i n the arms o f the new". A t times of new moon, when the lunar eclipse occurs, there is
no earth-shine opposite the M o o n to illuminate it. This is the answer: T h o u g h the M o o n is i n the
earth's shadow geometrically speaking, the Sun's rays, refracted by the earth's atmosphere, fall on
the M o o n and illuminate it with a red or brown glow, red light alone being able to reach the M o o n
after passing through the long section o f the earth's atmosphere undispersed, on account of its
greater wave-length. (See fig. 6).

8A.9. Quotedby Utpala o n B S 5.18

8 A . O m both in A and B , but included in this
edition on account of its essentiality i n verses 10-14 as 11-15.
this context and its being quoted as a
verse of V M by Utpala i n continuity c. A . B . 3 ^ q n c F I W ^ ( b . ^ ) ; C.3^^TR^raRT^
with verse 8. d. A.B.C.^^^5#lefn^(B.om^)

While C o m its this verse since it is not lOa. D.g#T3|*

available i n the text mss. D adds it. b. A . B . C . D . B l ^ * / ! ; D.?Tf?I
(as no. 9, and the further verses
numbered as 10 etc.) since Utpala has it.
c. A . B . ^ p r a ^ ? T l ^ a ( B . ^ ) , ( A 2 ^ ) ;
9a. A . M441liy-^<^; C . ^ ^
D . numbers the verse as 10 and the d. D.Uvqi^:. B.TJt*?:; D.->Tt^:
VI.10 VI. VAS.-PAUL. S I D D H A N T A - L U N A R ECLIPSE 167

Eig. V I . 6

In its nature this phenomenon is similar to the Sun apparently rising earlier and setting later, and
appearing red at both times. As for the distinction between red and brown, it can be seen from the
figure that there is great illumination at a greater distance, and, so, when nearer, there is less red,
which gives a brown colour as mentioned by the author. T h e redness may vary by other causes, like
the dust or water vapour in the atmosphere, and it goes to the credit of the ancients that distance
was distinguished as one cause, affecting the redness.

When the M o o n is partially eclipsed, the glare of the illuminated part dims more or less the red-
ness of the eclipsed part, so that it looks almost dark like a rain cloud. Near sunset or sunrise, the
red glow from the M o o n has again to pass a long distance through the atmosphere, and get filtered
out, so that the colour becomes smoky.
Verse 8-A is given only by Bhattotpala, the text manuscripts omitting it. T h e original of V M must
have contained this verse, for it supplies several lacunae. T h e word evam i n verse 9 requires a pre-
vious verse mendoning colour. Omission of this verse has compelled T S to emend sarvagrdsiny evam
into sarvagrdse pitam. T h e rule in verse 10, giving when the M o o n is at ucca and nica has a purpose
only with 8-A which requires the informauon. If T S had verse 8-A before them, they would not have
misunderstood 10, and declared that it is something pertaining to astrology. It also instructs us how
to find the times of the first and last contacts, and when the middle occurs, which instruction we
assumed before, in working the examples. N P rightly include this verse in brackets and give it the
number 9, the further verses being numbered from 10.

We have said that verse 10 gives a rule to find when the M o o n is far and when it is near. We shall
explain how: T h e rule says that when the result got by the rule is nine rdsis, the M o o n is at the
greatest distance, i.e. at ucca, and when the result obtained is three rdsis, it is nearest, i.e. at nica, as
we have explained. Therefore i f the rule gives about nine rdsis for the M o o n at ucca, i.e. when the
M o o n is replaced by ucca, then it must be correct. We shall show that it is so.
The rule is: M o o n - 228 R = ucca - 228 R (where R is the H e a d of Rahu at any full-moon). A t
the full moon just preceding the Epoch, by II.3, taking the reading vasumuninava etc. it can be cal-
culated that according to Vdsistha-Paulisa, the uca is rd. 8-14-21.4. (The Siddhdnta does not give the
ucca direct, but we can find it by the relation. M o o n - Moon's kendra = ucca). Every synodic month
the ucca increases by 3 17'.3 according to this Siddhdnta. Therefore after m synodic months, the
ucca is rd. 8-14-21.4 + m x y 17'.3. T h e corrected Rahu, R, at the full moon before Epoch is rd.
7-26-45.2. It decreases by 1 33'.88 every synodic month. Therefore, after wi synodic months, R =
rd. 7-26-45.2 - w X r 3 3 ' . 8 8
.-. ucca -228R = rd. 8-14-21.4 +TOx 3 17'.3 - 228 X (rd. 7-26-45.2 - m x 1 33'.88)
= rd. 8-14-21.4 - 228 x rd. 7-26-45.2 +TO(3 17'.2 + 228 x 1 33'.88)
= rd. 8-14-21.4 - rd. 11-9-45.6 +TO(3 17'.3 + 356 43'.9)
168 PANCASIDDHANTIK-A VI.13

= ra. 9-4-35.8 + m X 1'.2

= practically nine rdsis, for a long time after or before Epoch.

Nineteen years before Epoch, this would have been exacdy nine rdsis. A small difference in Rahu,
(if it is r . 2 more) would make it nine rdsis even at the taken time. It must be noted that one or even
two rdsis either way will not matter in our context, of redness at one end and brownness at the other,
for the difference between redness and brownness itself is slight. O n l y after two or three thousand
synodic months will there be perceptible difference, and the rule cease to hold good.

From the proof of the rule it will be seen that our emendation oitriyamadvigunam into dhidviyama-
guTiam is necessary, triyamadviguriam had perhaps been wrongly written by some scribe who had the
'saros', (consisting of 223 lunations) in his m i n d . A s antithetical to kriyddikanydntago nicah, we have
emended the meaningless group of letters, epiklesoyam ucca into juketthageyam uccah. Neither T S nor
N P seem to have understood the significance of this verse. T S observes on it: " A stanza of doubtful
import, see the Sanskrit commentary" (1 r., p.45) and the Sanskrit commentary suspects it to be of
astrological import (com., p.34). N P gives an incorrect translation and says " T h e synodic months
in an 18 year eclipse cycle is 223, but the role of this number in the present context remains obscure
to me" (Pt. II, p.55)

Diagrammatic representation
11. Draw three concentric circles with radii 17, 38 + 17 (= .55), and 3 8 - 1 7
(= 21), minutes of arc. These circles relate to the Moon, the duration and the
obscuration, respectively. (Drawing the part of the Moon's orbit forming the
path of the Moon), mark the points (of first and last contacts) and also those
of inversion and emergence if any).
12. Draw the diameter (making an angle equal to the Valana given in verses
7-8), with the ecliptic which, (according to this Siddhdnta), is east-west with
reference to the equator. (This diameter shows the east-west of the place). (As
shown in fig. 5c) draw thirteen equally spaced lines parallel to this east-west
diameter. (The directions of the points of contact etc. are given by this figure).
VI.13 VI. VAS.-PAUL. S I D D H A N T A - L U N A R ECLIPSE 169

13. T h e graphical representation o f the l u n a r eclipse has here been described

b r i e f l y , a n d c a n be u n d e r s t o o d p r o p e r l y o n l y by e x p l a n a t i o n ( f o l l o w e d by
d e m o n s t r a t i o n ) . F r o m this, the total d u r a t i o n , the total o b s c u r a t i o n , the
m a g n i t u d e , etc. c a n be f o u n d by i n s p e c t i o n .
T h e representation given by the author can do duty for all the figures used by us to explain verses
3, 5, 6 and 7, the centre of the concentric circles being the centre of the Shadow i n each. A n impor-
tant difference is that in the previous illustrations, the orbs, of the M o o n and the Shadow were
shown separately, while here they are replaced by one circle for each of duration (radius = 38' -I-
17') and totality, (radius = 38' - 17'), the M o o n being reduced to a point coinciding with its centre.
As the points of contact etc. showing the direction cannot be marked on the point-Moon, another
circle is drawn to represent the M o o n , with the same centre. As the directions of the points on the
two circles are diametrically opposite to the directions of the same points with reference to the
M o o n , the points can be marked on the Moon-circle by the intersection of the diameter on its oppo-
site half. A n examination of fig. 7 will show this, and an example will make everything clear.

Example 3. (Note: This example is intended only as an illustration). The latitude of a place is 20. The
full moon occurs 4 nddis after sunset. The Moon at that time is rd. 5-15-0, and the Sun, rd. 11-15-0. The
uncorrected Rdhu (Head) atfull moon is rd. 5-6-36, from which the latitude is 35'N. Thefull moon is 11 nddis
before mid-night. The daily motion of (Moon Sun) = 780'. Find the times cffirst contact etc., and verify by
a graphical representation.
(i) T h e corrected Rahu = rd. 5-6-36 - 1 36' = rd. 5-5-0. M o o n ~ Rahu = rd. 5-15-0 - rd. 5-5-0 =
10. This is less than 13..-. there is a lunar ecHpse.

(ii) Minutes of duration = V55' - lat' = V55' - 3 5 ' = 42, minutes of arc.
Now, 2 X 42 X 60 780 = nd. 6-28 = Uncorrected duration.

Difference between M o o n and uncorrected Rahu = rd. 5-15-0 ~ rd. 5-6-36 = 8 24.
Correction = 8 24' X 5 = 42 vinddis.

As Rahu is less, deducting from uncorrected duradon, the correct duration = nd. 5-46.
H a l f this is wd. 2-53.

Subtracting from the time of new moon, 4 nddis, the first contact is at nd. 1-7 after sunset.
A d d i n g , the last contact is at nd. 6-53.

(Hi) M o o n ~ cor. R a h u = 10. As this is greater than 5, there is no total phase.

(iv) T h e first contact is nd. 15-0 - nd. 1-7 = nd. 13-53 before midnight, i.e. the M o o n is 83 east
of the meridian,

I l a . A.B.^?II5I 12a. A.MlxtiWi y * d | ; l ; B . ' t o ^ ^ l ^ ^ ( B 2 . D

B1.2.tl?ra??T; B 3 . i [ ^ D.'atrOTlL't] !^l*d*l [^]
b. A.H^H^>I; B.C.D.PHtlH^^"! b. A . B . D . ^ ^ r f ^ S ( A o m T ) ; C . ^ ^ i w n S
C. A.B.J^lRfHH^lMr ( A 2 . ^ ) d. A.'HHWRI:; B.'HHidKI:

D . % J ^ ^ ^ ^_ B I . i i ^ ( B 2 . 3 . ^ )
170 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VI.13

T h e Moon's circumference = 17' x 44/7 = 107'.

T h e bending o f the direction due to ladtude = (I07'/4) X 20 X 83 + 8100

= 5 Vs minutes o f arc.

As M o o n is east o f the meridian, the equatorial east point is bent 5V2' north o f the east point of
the place, i.e. the east point o f the place is situated south by 5 Vs minutes-length.

A t the time o f last contact, the M o o n is 49 east o f the meridian. T h e bending o f the point o f last
contact at the western limb o f the M o o n =(107/4) x 20 X 49/8100 = 3.2', southward, as the M o o n
is east o f the meridian, i.e. the west point of the place is 3 V2 minutes-length north of the equatorial
west point.

(v) W e shall show all these graphically i n F i g . 7. T h e latitude to be used i n the figure is the
corrected latitude = 10 X 380' -=- 90 = 4 2 ' N .

Fig. VI. 7

M , M ' , are the points o f first and last contacts. M M ' = duradon i n minutes o f arc. M M ' = 3".6 by
measurement, = 3.6 X 20' = 72'.

From this, the dme o f duration = 72 X 60 + 780 = nd. 5-32.

V I . 14 VI. V A S . - P A U L . S I D D H A N T A - L U N A R ECLIPSE 171

See how close this is to the time calculated, viz. nd. 5-46.

T h e Moon's orbit does not touch the circle of totality. Therefore there is no total obscuration, as
already found by calculation.

T h e arc i n the figure from the east point of place to the first point of contact gives the direcdon
of the point at the beginning, and the arc from the west-point of place to the point of last contact
gives the direction at the end.

We have amended malena mioyutona, nabahu into Rdhu, ekachanoni into ekasthdndni, ydmasabu into
sasdhka and purvdparayosra into purvdpardydsca as necessitated by the context and proximity of the
lettering.

Lunar and solar eclipses - Differences

14. In the lunar eclipse, the Moon, (moving eastward), contacts the earth's
shadow. Therefore the Tirst contact' (occurs at the eastern limb of the Moon,
and so) does not occur at the Moon's western limb. In the solar eclipse, the
M o o n meets the Sun, and therefore, (the Sun being contacted as its western
limb), the first contact does not occur at the eastern limb of the Sun.

T h e Moon's motion being more than thirteen times that o f the Sun or the Shadow, (whose
motion is the same as that of the Sun), it moves eastwards relative to the Sun or Shadow and con-
tacts them at their western limb, and its own eastern part. As the lunar and solar eclipses are with
reference to the M o o n and the Sun, respectively, the first contacts are at the eastern and western
limbs, respectively. It need not be mentioned that the last contacts are, respectively, on the western
and eastern limbs.

14. Quoted Utpala o n B S . 5.12 C.^?^^lTl^^^at^ |

12a. U . ^ . B1.2.'f?Srat; B3.''PFn. A . B . f t ^ A.^gi^; B . D . W *
b. A B . 3 . ^ : ^ ; B 1 . 2 . ^ 5 ^ : ^ c. A . B l . ^ F T J J l l . A.B.C.D.U.fiT^-.
d. A . T ^

Thus ends Chapter Six entitled '(Vasitha-) Paulisa Siddhanta:

Lunar Eclipse' in the Paiicasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
u 1. A.B.D.-^-s^Jl^u'l ^ 5 q r a : C.?f^^^=5[3^^^5HFT:
 Chapter Seven

(PAULISA-SIDDHANTA) - SOLAR ECLIPSE

Introductory
This chapter deals mainly with the solar eclipse according to the Paulisa. But the last two verses
giving the computation of the solar eclipse gives the lunar eclipse also. It is from this that we have
to conclude that the lunar eclipse of C h a p V I is that of the Vdsistha. T h e method of the Paulisa for
correcting the Moon's latitude for parallax is peculiar. T h e correction is done on Rahu, and thence
carried to the latitude. Also, this is the edirWest. siddhdnta to deal with the solar eclipse, and thus, with
its peculiar method, historically important.

Parallax of longitude

I. F i n d the i n t e r v a l b e t w e e n m i d - d a y a n d the t i m e o f new m o o n , i n nddis.

M u l t i p l y this by 6. D e g r e e s are got. F i n d its sine. D i v i d e it by 3 0 . T h e result is
the p a r a l l a x i n nddis to be d e d u c t e d f r o m the t i m e o f n e w m o o n i f new m o o n
is before m i d - d a y , a n d to be a d d e d to the t i m e o f n e w m o o n , i f after m i d - d a y .
T h e n e w m o o n c o r r e c t e d f o r p a r a l l a x i n l o n g i t u d e is o b t a i n e d .

T h u s : i . nddis of parallax = sine (interval i n nddis between mid-day and new moon X 6) 30.

ii. Parallax corrected new moon = new moon +(i), for forenoon, and/^/wi for afternoon.

T h e rationale of parallax correction is as follows: A lunar or solar eclipse occurs when the M o o n
gets so close to the earth's shadow or the Sun, that it enters the Shadow so as to be darkened by it,
or hides the Sun from the observer's view. N o w , the M o o n being darkened by the Shadow is pracd-
cally independent of the position of the observer on the earth. But the M o o n hiding the Sun
depends upon the observer's position, owing to parallax. So parallax correction has to be done in
the solar eclipse. T h e critical angular distance is the sum of the semi-diameters. T h e angular dis-
tance between the Sun and the M o o n is calculated from the longitudes of both and the ladtude of

la. A.B.C.D.W<iT c. B.|ifiJ|clMl

b. Bi.2.'m=i'v!il A . s r a t m ^ ; B . ^ q ? M ^ i d. A.B.^lRN^liSfl: A.B.#rrrfq; C.fiTt*
VII.1 VII. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A - R E C L I P S E 173

the M o o n . These being given with reference to the centre of the earth, the angular distance calcu-
lated is as seen by an observer at the centre of the earth. B u t we want the distance as seen by an
observer on the surface of the earth, and a correction has got to be made for this. This is correction
for parallax or simply parallax. See Fig. l-a.

Fig. VII. l-a.

{Note: T h e figure is only diagrammatic and does not represent actual distances).
PD = a line drawn parallel to C M .

The observer at C sees the M o o n along C M , and for h i m the Moon's zenith distance (z.d.) is Z C M
(= ZPD). B u t the observer at P sees the M o o n along P M , and its z.d. for h i m is Z P M . This is equal
to Z P D + D P M = Z C M -t- P M C , and P M C is the parallax correcdon to Z C M . It can be seen that the
parallax correction for the Sun is PSC, and less than that for the M o o n . It is actually about 2/27 of
the parallax of the M o o n , according to the H i n d u Siddhdntas, its distance being about 27/2 dmes that
of the M o o n , according to them. (It must be noted that actually the Sun's distance is about 390 times
the Moon's, and accordingly the Sun's parallax is about 9", and pracdcally negligible).

The amount of parallax, P M C can be calculated trigonometrically thus:

Sin P M C / P C = sin C P M / C M
= sin ( P C M -f- P M C ) / C M
= sin P C M / C M (. P M C is small).
Sin P M C = sin C P M X P C / C M .
Arc P M C X 120/57.3 = sin C P M X P C / C M (. P M C is small).
Parallax of M o o n in minutes = sin z.d. X ( P C / C M ) X 60 X 57.3

120
= sin z.d. X 28.65 x Earth's radius/Moon's distance.

Similarly, the Sun's parallax i n minutes = sin z.d. x 28.65 X Earth's distance Sun's distance.
174 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VII.1

At a solar eclipse, z.d. is practically equal for the M o o n and the Sun, and in measuring the angular
distance between the Sun and the M o o n reladve parallax can be applied to the M o o n , the Sun being
supposed unaffected. W e can write:

Relative parallax = Moon's parallax Sun's parallax

= sin z.d. X 28.65 X earth's radius X (1/Moon's dis. - 1/Sun's dis.)

When the Sun or M o o n is at the horizon, sin z.d. is 120, and the relative parallax, (hereafter we
shall call it merely parallax), called horizontal parallax, is a m a x i m u m , and this Siddhdnta takes it as
equal to 49'.

.-. Parallax = 49' sin z.d./I20.

Also, we can see from the fig. l a that the M o o n is depressed, awav from the zenith by parallax,
along the vertical circle, Z M , increasing the z.d. and that is why it is called lambanam, i.e. 'depression',
in Sanskrit.
This general parallax has to be resolved into two parts, correcdon to longitude, (p. long.) and cor-
rection to ladtude (p. lat.). This is shown in fig. l b .

Fig. VII. I-b.

VII.4 VII. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 175

Z M = z.d., and M M ' is the general parallax.

P M ' is the parallax in ladtude, and M P , that in longitude Z Q .
= ladtude of the place, and Z N is the zenith distance of the nonagesimal (z.d.N.).
We shall find an expression for P M ' , the p.lat.
p.lat = P M ' = M M ' Xsin M ' MP/120
= 49' sin Z M x sin Z M N / 1 2 0 '
= 4 9 ' s i n ZN/120
= 49' sin zdN/120, (from rt A M N Z ) .
Similarly for p.long, i.e. M P ,
p.long = M P = M M ' cos M ' MP/120 = 49' sin Z M . cos Z M N / 1 2 0 '
= 49' cos Z N X sin M N / 1 2 0 ' (from rt A M N Z )
= 49' cos z.d.N X cos O M / 1 2 0 ' , O M being (lagnam - Moon).

Clearly, this is positive when the M o o n is east of the nonagesimal, and negative when west.

It is p.long. that we are concerned with i n this verse, and it must be given in terms of the hour-
angle (h, or natdmsa)

cos z.d.N X cos O M = (i) cos w. cos 0. sin h. sec < / [ V b e i n g the Moon's declinauon] + (ii) [sin w
X cos Moon's longitude X {cos 0 x tan ( / X sin {nadis after sunrise or before sunset X 6)/120'} -
sin 0/120].
T h e Siddhdnta omits (ii) which is small in comparison with (i), sin 0/120 being small in India. For
the same reason, and as w and (f cannot exceed 24, it takes cos w. cos 0. sec c/'as 120.
.-. p.long = 4 9 ' s i n h/120.

As said before, this is positive, i.e. it increases the Moon's longitude when h is east, and negative,
i.e. it decreases, when h is west. Therefore the corrected time of new moon is earlier and subtractive
in the forenoon, and later and additive i n the afternoon.

Now, 49' of p-long, converted into time, using the mean relative daily motion of the Sun and the
M o o n , (731'.5), = 49' X 60/731'.5 = 4 nddis nearly.

.-. nddis of parallax = 4 X sin h/120 = sin h/30, as given by the text. If (ii) is not neglected, the
M o o n being east or west o f the nonagesimal will be the criterion for the subtraction and addition
of the nddikds.

4c|fiif SRlJOT 3IT5EITi^ I

176 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VII.4

Parallax i n latitude

2. M u l t i p l y the degrees o f l a t i t u d e by 5 a n d d i v i d e by 27. A d d o r subtract the

r e s u l t i n g degrees, respectively, to R a h u ' s h e a d o r f r o m R a h u ' s tail, w h e r e the
M o o n is situated, (i)

3. A d d t h r e e rdsis to the M o o n , a n d f i n d its d e c l i n a t i o n i n degrees. T h i s

m u l t i p U e d by the nddis o f p a r a l l a x ( g i v e n by verse 1) a n d d i v i d e d by 18, are to
be a d d e d to the H e a d i f it is f o r e n o o n a n d Uttardyana (i.e. the S u n is i n its
n o r t h w a r d course), o r a f t e r n o o n a n d Daksindyana. T h e degrees are to be sub-
tracted f r o m the H e a d i f it is f o r e n o o n a n d Daksindyana o r a f t e r n o o n a n d
Uttardyana. F o r the T a i l , the a d d i t i o n a n d s u b t r a c t i o n s h o u l d be inter-
c h a n g e d , (ii)
4. T a k e nadis f r o m s u n r i s e to n e w m o o n i f f o r e n o o n , the nddis f r o m new
m o o n to sunset i f a f t e r n o o n . M u l t i p l y these by the degrees o f the M o o n ' s
d e c h n a t i o n a n d d i v i d e by 80. T h e r e s u l t i n g degrees are to be a d d e d to the
H e a d i f the M o o n ' s l o n g i t u d e is b e t w e e n 6 a n d 12 rdsis, a n d subtracted i f bet-
w e e n 0 a n d 6 rdsis. F o r the T a i l , i n t e r c h a n g e the a d d i t i o n a n d s u b t r a c t i o n , (iii)

T h e corrections are:

i. 0 X 5 27
ii. 'Degrees' X the nddis of verse 1-^18, where 'Degrees' are to be got from sin 'degrees' = sin w
sin (Moon -I- 90)/120

iii. Degrees of Moon's declination X the time i n nddis from sunrise to (parallax corrected) new
moon, or to sunset from parallax corrected new m o o n + 80. T h e addition or subtraction is as
instructed i n the translation above.
These rules follow from the formula derived already for parallax correction in latitude:
p-lat = 49' sinz.d.N/120.
49' sin z.d. N/120 = sin w. cos 0 sin (AQ)/120^ - cos w. sin 0/120', (from the two rt. A s. Z N A and
ZQA)
= (i) - 49' cos w, sin 0/120' + (ii) - 49' s i n u r cos 0 sin (Moon -I- 90) x sin h. sec cr/120-' -I- (iii)
-I- 49' cos ur.cosO tan c/'-cos h/120^, (h being the hour angle of the M o o n at parallax-corrected new
moon).

2a. A.BI.M:llwfel. D . W 3 T
b. B I . ^ D . [ ^ ] % g ! I . A . ^ : ; B I . 2 . ^ : c. A.^IR
A.B.SFMcIJr|;D.SR'^: d. A . o m % B I . ^ ; B 3 . ^ ^ ; C . D . o m t ^
c. A.B.C.<lR!M<"ll; D.ds^lfi!N<uil; A.^; B . ^
A.B.C.D.o'R^ 4a. B.i^
d. A . B . C . ^ H H " H l d l ( B 1 . 3 . ^ ) . b. A . C . D . ^ ^ ^ ; B . W F W A . ^ ;
A .B.C.D.f|^ B.SRTIRT
B. t f B l . W : ; B2.3.8!raT:
3a. B.SRTfT c. A.B.-?tW. D . ^ f T ^
b. A . 1 ^ ; B.'^m d. B . f ^ ^ . A . B . ^
VII.4 VII. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 177

T o secure correction 49' in latitude, a correction = 90 X 49/380 = 1 T.O, must be applied to

M o o n ~ R a h u which can be done by applying it to R a h u , as the Siddhdnta does. T h e purpose of this
replacement is to extend the method of computing the lunar eclipse using M o o n ~ R a h u to the
solar eclipse also. So 49' has to be replaced by 1 T.b in the rules, (i), (ii) and (iii).

We shall take the rules one by one and derive the Siddhanta rules.
(i) = - l l . 6 c o s sin 0/120'

= - i r . 6 X 109.6 X (degrees of latitude x 120/57.3)/120', (. when latitude is n o t m u c h , its sine

degrees)
= - 5 X degrees of latitude + 27, as given.

As the Siddhdnta has only the north latitudes i n view, this part of p.lat is always negative. There-
fore Moon's north-latitude must become less, and south latitude more, by the correction. T h i s can
be done by increasing R a h u - H e a d , i.e. by adding the correction to the H e a d , and by decreasing
Rahu's T a i l , i.e. by subtracting from the T a i l , as instructed.

(ii) = - 1 l . 6 s i n u r cos. 0 sin (Moon + 90) sin h. sec d" /120' = - I T . O s i n u r ' . sin (Moon + 90)
X nddis of correction to new moon (cos ur X 120 X 4), (. sin h = 120' X nddis of correction X
cos (f -r- (cos A'X cos 0 X 4), in verse I).
= 11.6 X sin declination of point (= M o o n -I- 3 rdsis) X nddis of correction (109.6 x 4)
= 11.6 X {Degrees of dechnation o f point (= M o o n -I- 3 rdsis) X 120/57.3} X nddis of correc-
tion + (109.6 X 4)
= - 'Degrees' ofdeclination of point (= M o o n + 3 rddis) X nddis of correction to new moon 18.

T h e 'Degrees' are north, i.e. positive for Moon's Uttardyana, and negative for Daksindyana. T h e
nddis stand for positive p-long i n the forenoon, and negative p-long i n the afternoon as already
shown. T h u s , for Uttardyana and forenoon, the p-lat is negative, and so the result of (ii) is to be
added to H e a d , and subtracted from T a i l . Clearly, it is the same for Daksindyana and afternoon, as
then also p-lat' is negative. If Uttardyana and afternoon, or Daksindyana and forenoon, p-lat.
becomes positive, and so the correction is subtractive to Head, and additive to T a i l , as instructed.

(iii) = 4- I r . 6 cos uT. cos 0. t a n ^ f - cos h/120'.

= -I- I l . 6 X 109.6 X cos 0 X s i n ^ x cos h + {cos (fx 120')
= -I- I r . 6 X 109.6 X degrees of Moon's declination x c o s h -f- (120 x 57.3), (. s i n / = degrees
of declination x 120 + 57.3, nearly, and taking cos 0/cos (T as equal to unity, c f b e i n g not great,
and 0 being not great in India) =-I- l l . 6 x 109.6 X cT X ndfifis after sunrise or before sunset-j-(120
X 57.3 X 15), . the Siddhdnta, takes cos h as equal to nddis after sunrise or before sunset 15,
being satisfied with approximate values, i.e. 0 not being great, the time from sunrise or sunset to
noon is taken as \5 nddis always. Secondly, the angle is taken as <x to sine, as often done before.

.-. cos h = sin (90 - h) = (90 - h)/90

= (15 nddis nddis to meridian)/15 = nddis after sunrise or before sunset -^15
= + cfx nddis after sunrise or before sunset 80)
^ i s north, i.e. positive for M o o n , 0 to 6 rdsis, and negative for M o o n , 6 rdsis to 12 rdsis. T h e
original of the rmlis cos h, is positive both forenoon and afternoon.

.-. p.lat is positive for M o o n between 0 to 6 rdsis, and so the result is deducted from H e a d and
178 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VII.6

added to T a i l i f M o o n is between 0 and 6 rdsis. F o r M o o n between 6 rdsis and 12 rdsis cf is negative

and p.lat. is negative, and therefore the result is to be added to Head and subtracted from Tail.
Thus, by making the three corrections to Rahu, p.lat. is secured, though approximately.
T S have not translated or explained these three verses, not having understood the exact form of
the rules or their derivation. T h e y merely surmise that it is some work done on Rahu to correct the
latitude for parallax. N P too have not understood these verses correctly for they say i n the notes to
verse 2. "This verse is corrupt" etc., i n the notes to verse 3, "The text as it stands seems to have con-
fused the different cases" and in the notes to verse 4, " T h e VeyXseems to instruct us" etc. (pt. II, p.57).
In accordance with the correct form of the rules, we have i n verse 2, emended dvika into dhrti,
rdsicarandyana into sardsicarandpama and candrdyana into candrdpama.

[ii^U|c>4]

Eclipse computation
5. Deduct 1 36' from Rahu and find M o o n ~ Rahu, in the case of the lunar
ecHpse. Deduct 1 36' from Rahu corrected (by verses 2-4) and find M o o n ~
Rahu, in the case of the solar ecUpse. If the difference is less than 13 there is
a lunar ecUpse. If the difference is less than 8, there is a solar eclipse, (other-
wise not).
6. For the lunar eclipse, deduct the square of the difference from 169, find
its square root and take three fourths of it. This is the total duration in nddis.
For the solar ecHpse, deduct the square of the difference from 64, find its
square root, and take three fourths of it. This is the total duration in nddis.

T h u s , nddis of total duration = V169 - (Moon ~ Rahu)', or 3/4 V64 - (Moon ~ Rahu)',
respectively. H a l f this subtracted or added to the full moon, or parallax corrected new moon, gives
the times of first and last contacts.

5a. A.feelt; B . ^
b. A l . t ^ ^ ; A 2 . t ^ ^ ; B . t ^ U A . B I . 2 . ^ ( B . ^ ) I
d. B.Wnn^: C.D.^^:#T(D.f<T)W^
6a. AB.I.2^*H^-<1 c. A . ^
h. A.B.^^(B.^)^^m^mm'^ d. A . B . ^ a
VII.6 VII. P A U L I S A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 179

T h e formulae here are similar to that of V I . 5 as reduced by us, giving the total duration in the
lunar eclipse, according to Vdsistha. Therefore, the explanadon is similar. A s i n the Vasistha, in the
Paulisa too, the limit of the lunar eclipse is seen to be 13, giving 55' latitude. Therefore, in the
Paulisa too, the sine of the semi-diameters of the Shadow and the M o o n is 55', wherefrom their
respecdve semi-diameters may be taken as the same, i.e. 38' and 17'. T h e limit of the solar eclipse
is seen to be 8, at which the latitude is 8 X 55'/13 = 33'.8. Therefore the sum of the semi-diameters
of the Sun and the M o o n is 33'.8, from which the semi-diameter of the Sun is found to be 16'.8. If
actually the Moon's semi-diameter is a little more or less in the Paulisa, to that extent that of the Sun
must be less or more. But we have no means of knowing it exactly, since the original Paulisa is not
extant, the Paulisa quoted by Bhattotpala i n the Brhat Samhitd being different, as already mentioned.

F r o m the formulae, the minutes ofarc pertaining to duration is, 55' X 2 V169 (Moon ~ Rahu)'/
13 i n the case of the lunar eclipse. T o be correct, the dme must be found from this by dividing by the
true relative motion, which is not done here. If the mean relative motion is used, we get:

{2 X 55 V 169 - 0/13} x 60 + 731.5 = 9, being the na<iM.for the m a x i m u m . But, by the formula,
the maximum is, 3V 169 - 0/4 = 9 % nddis. But this is nearer the correct value. For the solar eclipse
the maximum by the formula is, 3 V 64 - 0/4 = 6 nddis. But actually, i n the solar ecHpse the
maximum differs according to the time of new moon, being about 5 nddis at sunrise or sunset, and
about \Q nddis near moon.

T S , i n their explanation here, take the m a x i m u m lat. to be 270', instead of their taking 240' for
the Vdsistha. But, by this, the respective sums of semi-diameters must be got as 6 1 ' and 38'. B u t they
give 58' and 35', which is quite wrong. T h e y seem to have taken these wrong values deliberately,
with a view to deriving the formulae using the mean reladve modon. N P too have failed to get the
correct meanings and so close their notes on verse 7 with the statement "We cannot explain the
origin of this discrepancy" (pt. II, p.59), the apparent discrepancy being i n the formula for total
duration of the eclipse as calculated by them. We shall illustrate the whole thing with two examples.
Example (a). In chap. VI, example 3, the Moon atfull-moon was given as rd. 5-15-0, and Rdhu at that time
as rd. 5-6-36. Compute the lunar eclipse:-

T h e Rahu corrected for ecHpse = rd. 5-6-36 - 1 36' = rd. 5-5-0

M o o n ~ R a h u = ra. 5-15-0 - ra. 5-5-0 = 10
Total duration = .3V 169 - 10'74 = 3 X 8.307/4 = nd. 6-14.
(Compare this with the nddis got by Vdsistha, nd. 5-46).
Example (b). The latitude ofPudukkottai in S.India is 10 24' N. On a certain day, there, sunrise is nd. 28-
40, after sunset, midday is after nd 44-20, and new moon is after nd. 49-20 The Sun = Moon = rd. 2-0-0,
at new moon and Rdhu (Tail) is rd. 2-1-0, Compute the solar eclipse, if any, at Pudukkottai.

First, Parallax-corrected new moon:-

T i m e of new m o o n ~ time of midday = nd. 49-20 - nd. 44-20
= 5 nddikds, west.
= 5 x 6 = 30, degrees from meridian west.
Correction for new moon = sin 30/30 = 60/30 = 2, nddikds.
Degrees being west, adding to new moon, the parallax corrected new m o o n = nd. 49-20 -i- nd. 2-0
= wfl. 51-20.
180 PANCASIDDHANTIKA

Next, correction to Rdhu:

(i) 5 X 0/27 = 5 X 10.4/27 = 1 56'. As the M o o n is near the T a i l , this is to be subtracted.

. - . T a i l - 1 5 6 ' = r a 2-1-0 - 1 5 6 ' = r d . 1-29-4.
(ii) Correction to new moon = 2 nddis.
(Moon -t- 3 rdsis) = 5 rdsis.
The declination of this point is 11 44'.
T h e correction = 2 X 1 1 4 4 ' / 1 8 = 1 18'.
As new moon is afternoon, Uttardyana, and T a i l , this is addidve. A d d i n g to corrected Tail we get,
rd. 1-29-4 + V 18' = rd. 2-0-22.
(iii) T h e nddis of corrected new moon before sunset = Sunset ~ cor. new moon = 60 nddis nd.
51-20 = na. 8-40.

T h e Moon's dechnadon, from its longitude, is 20 36'.

T h e correction, = 8 2/3 X 20 36' 80 = 2 14'.

As the M o o n is between 0 and 6 rdsis, and it is T a i l , this is additive.

A d d i n g to corrected T a i l , we get, rd. 2-0-22 -I- 2 14' = rd. 2-2-36.

Subtracting 1 36' from the corrected T a i l , we have rd. 2-2-36 - 1 36' = rd. 2-1-0, as corrected
Rahu to be used in the formula:

M o o n ~ Rahu = rd. 2-1-0 - rd. 2-0-0 = 1

As this is less than 8, there is a solar eclipse.
Duradon = 3 X V61 - 174 = 5-57 nddis.
H a l f this isnd. 2-59.
Subtracting and adding this to the corrected new moon, we have:
T i m e of first contact = Tid. 51-20 - nd. 2-59 = nd. 48-21
T i m e of last contact = nd. 51-20 -I- nd. 2-59 = nd. 54-19
We have already said that ...e results will be very rough.

1. C o l . A . B . C . D . ^ ( A . D . omifcf) '^ftf^Rlfe^^f^^IPT^
( A . B . D . o m ^ ) W^SHjpiT:

Thus ends Chapter Seven entitled 'Paulisa-Siddhanta - Solar

Eclipse' in the Paiicasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
 Chapter Eight

ROMAKA-SIDDHANTA SOLAR ECLIPSE

Introductory
In this chapter the Sun, M o o n and R a h u according to the Romaka Siddhdnta are given, as also the
solar eclipse, dependent on these. B u t the lunar eclipse is not dealt with. We have already men-
doned that this Romaka is different from the Romaka extant now.

1. A c c o r d i n g to the Romaka, the m e a n S u n i n r e v o l u t i o n s etc. is o b t a i n e d by

m u l t i p l y i n g the Days f r o m E p o c h by 150, d e d u c t i n g 65 f r o m the p r o d u c t , a n d
d i v i d i n g by 5 4 , 7 8 7 .

2. B o t h the S u n a n d the M o o n are to be m a d e t r u e by intervals o f the e q u a -

tion o f the centre for half-signs o f the respective m e a n a n o m a l i e s g i v e n
for the first three signs. F o r the n e x t t h r e e signs they are to be t a k e n i n the
reverse o r d e r . T h i s is r e p e a t e d for the next six signs. I n the case o f the S u n ,
the a n o m a l y is got by d e d u c t i n g nd. 2-15-0 f r o m the m e a n S u n .

3. T h e minutes o f intervals for the S u n , are 20 + 1 5 , 2 0 + 1 4 , 2 0 + 1 0 , 2 0 + 4,

2 0 - 6 a n d 20 - 14, f r o m w h i c h seconds 18 a n d 5, are to be subtracted, a n d
2, 10, 16 a n d 18 are to be a d d e d , i n the g i v e n o r d e r .

Thus,
(i) Mean Sun = (Days from epoch x 150 - 65) 54,787.

(ii) T h e mean anomaly of Sun = Mean Sun - rdsi 2-15-0.

182 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VIII.3

(iii) T h e intervals of equation of the centre are 34'42", 3 3 ' 5 5 " , 3 0 ' 2 " , 24' 10", 14'16" and
6' 18". These are subtracdve in the given order i n the first quadrant of anomaly, additive in the
reverse order in the second quadrant, additive in the given order in the third quadrant, and
subtracdve in the reverse order in the fourth quadrant.

(iv) T r u e S u n = (i) + (iii)

Example 1. Compute the true Sun, for the moment, 59 days from Epoch.

(i) M e a n S u n = (59 X 150 - 65) ^ 54,787 = rasi 1-27-44.

(ii) M e a n anomaly = rdsi 1-27-44 - rdsi 2-15-0 = rdsi 11-12-44.

(iii) T h e equation of the centre = - 3 4 ' 42" - 3 3 ' 55" - 3 0 ' 2" - 2 4 ' 10" - 1 4 ' 16" - 6 ' 18" -f 6' 18"
-1-14' 16"+24' 10"+30'2"-l-33'55"-l-34'42"-h34'42"-l-33'55"+30' 2"-1-24' 10"-I-14' 16"-f6' 18"
- 6 ' 1 8 " - 1 4 ' 1 6 " - 2 4 ' 1 0 " - 3 0 ' 2 " - 3 3 ' 5 5 " x 12 4 4 ' ^ 15 (= - 2 8 ' 4 7 " ) = +39' 50".

( A n examination o f work (iii) will suggest how to get the total easily).

(iv) A d d i n g to the mean S u n ,

T r u e S u n = rdsi 1-27-44 +40' = rdsi 1-28-24.

It must be noted that this is at mean sunset at Yavanapura.

T h e rule for the mean S u n can be derived from the constants given o r derivable from 1.15. T h e r e
it was shown i n the Notes that i n the Romaka yuga consisting 2850 solar years, there are 10,40,953
civil days. T h u s , as the solar year is the period of revolution of the Sun, the number of revolutions,
say inx days, is = x x 2850 H- 10,40,953 = x X 150 -r 54,787, as given. As for th^ deducdve constant,
65, we infer that according to the Romaka, 65/150 days after epoch the mean S u n was a full revolu-
tion, but we cannot verify this, the original Romaka being lost. B u t it must agree with the relevant
constant i n 1.10, and we have shown i n the Notes there that it indeed does. W e have also shown
there that this mean S u n is tropical, and not sidereal. T h i s is peculiar to the Romaka.

T h e Sun's apogee given as rd. 2-15-0 is what the Romaka must have found by observation and
computation, and we have to take it as it is. Actually, the apogee was at rd. 2-17-19 at epoch.

As for the intervals of the equation o f the centre, the Siddhdnta is right i n giving them in accor-
dance with the anomaly. B u t the values are slightly different from what they will be i f the correct
terms, a sin 0 + b sin 2 0, has been used. Therefore, either the Romaka gives only empirical values
obtained from observation, like the PaulUa, or the Romaka like the Surya Siddhdnta etc., apply an
equation on the epicycle itself. A n y deviation from this may be due to scribal errors. T a k i n g the sum

1. Quoted by U t p a l a o n B S 2 . p . 4 0

la. Al."^;A2.'g^ c. A . B . C . D . ^ 1 ^
b. A.Bl.C.D.fMraig; B 2 . 3 . W ^ . d. A . B . ^ ; C . ^ . B . o ^
A.B.^Rl^mjT 3b. A.B.#1I1|R5(I(CI^THI (B.Rvild^HI)
c. B . o f i ^ H M d ^
d. A . B . ^ (B.^)d!-i<U|HI: || U.^RSPT:^: c. A1.^;A2.^
2a. A.^<*)<"l; B . ^ d c K P I d. B.^fil5
b. A.B.^%=5. B . ' m ^ - ^ o A.B.cWlfeifocll ( B 2 . o ^ ^ )
VIII.6 VIII. R O M A K A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 183

of the intervals as the maximum equation of the centre, and neglecting the correction of the epicycle,
we give hereunder the given and computed values for comparison.

Anomaly 15 30 45 60 75 90
Computed intervals 37'6" 34'36" 29'42" 22'46" 14'20" 4'53"
Given intervals 34'42" 33'55" 30'2" 24'10" 14'16" 6'18"

T h e sum forming the m a x i m u m is 143' 23", and very near that of the Paulisa, and very much
more than the actual. T h i s excessive roughness itself is an indication that the Siddhdnta is not
indigenous. T h e author has not clearly mentioned where the intervals are to be taken in the given
order and where in the reverse order, as also where they are additive and where subtracdve. O r ,
adopting the reading mithunadalat, we can understand that the equation of the centre is subtractive
in the six signs of the mean Sun beginning from the middle o f G e m i n i , and therefore additive in
the other six. F r o m the corrected reading, vyutkramasasca, we understand that after taking the inter-
vals i n the given order, we take them i n the reverse order. F r o m these everything else is inferred.

True Moon
4. T h e m e a n M o o n i n r e v o l u t i o n s etc. is got by m u l t i p l y i n g the 'day' by
3 8 1 0 0 , s u b t r a c t i n g 10,984, a n d d i v i d i n g by 10,40,953.
5. T h e m e a n a n o m a l y i n r e v o l u t i o n s etc. is o b t a i n e d b y m u l t i p l y i n g the days
by 110, a d d i n g 6 0 9 , a n d d i v i d i n g b y 3 0 3 1 , the result b e i n g for sunset at
Ujjain.
6. F o r the half-signs o f a n o m a l y the intervals o f e q u a t i o n o f the c e n t r e are:
1 + 14' + 25", I + 1 1 ' + 48", r + 2 ' - 9 " , 4 8 ' - 15", 4 8 ' - 18" - 0", a n d 4 8 '
- 18' - 2 0 ' - 1" (i.e. (1) r 14' 25", (2) 1 IV 48", (3) 1 1' 51", (4) 4 7 ' 45", (5)
3 0 ' 0", (6) 9 ' 59").
4a. B . ^ ^ ^ ? ^ . A.B.^nrs??!^ b. C.D.#^A2.^A.B.C.D.^
b. A . B . a K T I E A . B . C . D . ^ T ^ A . ^ l l % ^ B . ^ f i % A.B.*If^^; C.D.^^frm
c. A . B . ^ I ^ ^ ^ ; . D.^^iq^^afcW c. A.3f5i?rA.B.TeW^(B.^); D . ^ ^ .
d. D . ' ^ W ^ . A.B.#lRTl:
5a. A.B.<*5FR^ d. A.B.'^Pii^ (A2.-wlclB<l) C . ^ * E ^ ^ ;
b. B.W^ D.^iglr#t [ t ] ?r A . ^ ^ ; B . ^ ; C.^^F^I
d. A . < * i q ^ B l . q 5 | ^ B 2 . 3 . q q ^
6a. A . B . ^ ? l i c ^
184 PANCASIDDHANTIKA VIII.6

T h e true M o o n is got thus:-

(i) mean M o o n in revolutions = (days X 38,100 - 10,984) ^ 10,40,953.

(ii) mean anomaly in revolutions etc. = (days X 110 + 609) 3031.

T h i s is for sunset at Ujjain. If required for sunset at Yavanapura, 622'/2 should be used in the
place o f 609, we shall explain how, later.

(iii) T h e intervals o f equation o f the centre for the 6 half-signs in a quadrant are, 1 14' 25",
1 11' 48", r 1' 51", 47' 45", 30' 0" and 9' 59". In the first quadrant these are to be deducted in the
given order, in the second they are to be added in the reverse order, in the third they are to be
added in the given order, and in the fourth they are to be subtracted in the reverse order.
(iv) T r u e M o o n = (i) + (iii).

Example 2. For days 59, (from sunset at Yavanapura), compute the true Moon.

(i) T h e mean M o o n = (59 X 38,100 - 10,984) ^ 10,40,953

= Rev. 2-1-23-36-30 = rd. 1-23-36-30.
(ii) M e a n anomaly = (59 X 110 -I- 622 V2) H- 3031 = rd. 4-4-46.
(iii) T h e equation o f the centre = - 1 14'25" - 1 1 1 ' 4 8 " - 1 1'51" - 4 7 ' 4 5 " - 3 0 ' 0 " - 9 ' 5 9 "
-I- 9' 59" + 30' 0" + 4 46' X 47' 45" H- 15 = - 4 0' 39".
(iv) T r u e M o o n = (i) -I- (iii) = rd. 1-23-36-30 - 4 0' 39" = rd. 1-19-36. (Note: This is for sunset at
Yavanapura).

T h e rules are explained as in the case o f the Sun thus: In 1.15, it has been mentioned that in the
Romaka yuga o f 2850 solar years, there are 1050 intercalary months and 16,547 supprec^'^d tithis
Therefrom it has been shown, that i n the yuga there are 2850 x 12 = 34,200 solar months, 34,200
+ 1050 = 35,250 synodic months, 35,250 + 2850 = 38,100 lunar revolutions, and 35,250 x 30 -
16,547 = 10,40,953 mean solar or civil days. So, from the proportion: If there are 38,100 lunar
revolutions in 10,40,953 days, how many are there in the days from epoch, we have, the number
of revolutions = days X 38,100 10,40,953.

T h e mean M o o n at epoch should be added to the mean M o o n or the time by which the M o o n
completes the current revolution should be omitted from the days. According to the Romaka, by
10,984 38,100 days after epoch, the mean M o o n is a full revolution, though we cannot verify this,
as the original Romaka is lost. Therefore, we have to deduct from the product o f days from epoch,
(10,984 38,100) X 38,100 = 10,984, as instructed. W i t h the given deductive constant we get that
the inornate mean M o o n in revolutions at epoch = (0 X 38,100 - 10,984) ^ 38,100 =ra. 11-26-12.
See how close this is to the actual, rd. 11-24-48, to the Saura, rd. 11-25-6, and the Siddhdnta $iro-
mani's rd. 11-25-49. T h i s is why we corrected the reading, krtdstanavakaikd (1984) int
krtdstanavakhaika (10,984). If the reading is taken as it is as done by T S and N P then the mean M o o n
at epoch would become rd. 11-29-19, which is improbable, being too far from the actual. We have
also shown under I. 8-10 that the mean M o o n o f the corrected reading alone would agree with the
constants there.

In the Romaka, as in the Vdsistha-Paulisa there are 110 anomalistic revolutions of the Moon in 303
days. Therefore multiplying the days by 110 and dividing by 3031, the mean anomaly of the M o o n
in revolutions etc. is got. A s , according to the Romaka 609/110 days before sunset at Ujjain, it was
a full revolution, we have the addidve constant 609. W e cannot understand why the anomaly alone
is given for sunset at Ujjain, while it could also be given for Epoch, i.e. for sunset at Yavanapura by
VIII.7 VIII. R O M A K A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 185

making the additive constant 622 V2. That is why i n our rules for computation we have given this
constant. Perhaps the author wanted to avoid the fraction i n the constant. T h e anomaly computed
for Epoch i n revolution etc. = (0 X 110 -1- 622 V2) ^ 3031 = rd. 9-12-16. Compare this with the
actual, rd. 9-9-34, Saura's rd. 9-9-47, and Siddhdnta ^iromarii's rd. 9-11-23.
The intervals of the equation of the centre are given in minutes and seconds as in the case of the
Sun, with the special mention of degrees where there are full degrees. B u t the text here is so
corrupt that we are not certain about the numbers, since the original Siddhdnta is lost. So we have
to depend much on guessing. A d d i n g the intervals we understand that in this Siddhdnta the Moon's
maximum equation of the centre is 4 55' 48". Using this, and not doing the correction to the epicycle,
since it is not known, we have computed the intervals and given them hereunder, for comparison
with the given values:
Anomaly 15 30 45 60 75 90
Computed Values ri6'34" Til'20" 11'15" 47'1" 29'33" 10'5"
Given Values ri4'25" Til'48" ri'51" 47'45" 30'0" 9'59"
In the matter o f order o f taking the intervals and o f adding or subtracting them our remarks
under the sun hold here too.
r

Daily motion of the Sun and the Moon

7. T h e daily m o t i o n o f the m e a n M o o n is 7 9 0 ' , a n d that o f the m e a n anomaly,
7 8 4 ' . F o r w o r k r e l a t i n g to the d a y - t i m e t h e true d a i l y m o t i o n is the d i f f e r e n c e
between the t r u e M o o n s o f t h e t a k e n d a y a n d t h e p r e v i o u s day. F o r w o r k
r e l a t i n g to the n i g h t - t i m e the t r u e d a i l y m o t i o n is t h e difference b e t w e e n t h e
true M o o n ' s o f the t a k e n d a y a n d the next day.

T h e true daily motion, given in the second half, pertains both to the Sun and the M o o n . T h e daily
mean motions of the M o o n and its anomaly alone is given because in the case o f the Sun both are
the same, practically, equal to 59' 8", and well known. It would have been better if the Moon's mean
daily motion had been given as 791'. T h u s , the following is intended:

(i) T o get the true daily motion o f the Sun, take the last interval used i n obtaining the true Sun,
divide it by 15, and apply it to 59' 8" as the quantity got from the last interval has been applied to
the mean Sun. This can be taken as true daily motion for both the day-time and the night-time as
there is not much difference.

(ii) T o get the true daily motion of the M o o n :

(a) for the day-time work, find from the intervals the equation o f the centre for the last 784'
of the anomaly, and apply it to 790' as the last part of the interval itself is applied.
7a. A l . B l . W I T c. B . ^ : ^ ; CD.<4ldl ^ 1
b. A.a>cl^ B.craW". B . m ^ i ^ d. A.B1.2.^H^snTTlpT
186 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V111.8

(b) for the night-time work, find from the intervals the equation of the centre for the 784'
following, i n the anomaly, and apply it to 790' as that itself would be applied.

Example 3. The daysfrom epoch is 59, (given in the previous two examples). Find the Sun's and
true daily motion, for the day gone and the day to come.

(i) I n example 1, the last interval used is - 3 3 ' 55". T h e 15th part of this is - 2 ' 16". A p p l y i n g
this to 59' 8", the Sun's true daily motion for both days is 59' 8" - 2' 16" = 57' (in full minutes).

(ii) In example 2, the Moon's mean anomaly used is rd. 4-4-46.

(a) For the day previous, the last 784' o f this begins from ra. 3-21-42. T h e equation of the centre
pertaining to this part o f the anomaly = +30' X 8 1 8 ' 1 5 - f - 4 7 ' 4 5 " X 4 4 6 ' - 15 = + 16'36"
+ 15' 10"= + 3 r 4 6 " , (say-I- 32'). A p p l y i n g to the mean motion, 790', the true motion for the pre-
vious day = 790 + 32 = 822'.

(b) For the next day, we have to find the equation o f the centre for anomaly from rd. 4-4-46
to rd. 4-17-50. T h i s is equal to, + 47' 45" X 10 14' ^ 15 + 1 1' 51" X 2 50' ^ 15 = + 32' 35"
-f U ' 41" = -I- 44' 16". A p p l y i n g to the mean motion, the daily motion for the day following = 791'
-I- 44" = 835'.

T h e instruction is easy to understand, for, clearly the difference in the longitudes of two consecutive
days is the motion for the day. As, i n the Romaka, the day begins at sunset for which the longitude
is computed, the day-time before sunset falls i n the day previous, and the night following sunset
falls i n the day next. Hence for work i n each, respectively, the motion for the previous day and the
next day has to be taken. T o avoid computing the longitudes of both days, we have given an easy
method, which should have been intended by the author also, for, otherwise, he need not have
given the mean motions of the M o o n and its anomaly.

Rahu
8. M u l t i p l y the days f r o m e p o c h b y 24, a d d 5 6 , 2 6 6 a n d d i v i d e by 1,63, 111.
S u b t r a c t the r e v o l u t i o n s etc. o b t a i n e d , f r o m the e n d o f Pisces, (i.e. f r o m any
w h o l e n u m b e r o f r e v o l u t i o n ) . T h e H e a d o f R a h u is o b t a i n e d .

T h e following is instructed to be done:

(i) Revolutions etc = (days X 24 -I- 56,266) 1,63,111
(ii) H e a d of R a h u = rd. 12-0-0 Revolutions etc, omitting the full revolutions.

8a. B.'^KIlI"!^ d. A.shHI^yTllotltl; B.^HI^^sli-dl-^j^

b. A . ^ : (B2.aiqig^); C.*Hlcj,^t<HViill^c|^Jj^
c. Ai.?;qFPjfg D.a5qig^?mg;#5qc
V I I I . 11 VIII. R O M A K A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 187

Example 4. Compute Rahu for the moment, 59 days from epoch.

(i) Revolution etc. = (59 x 24 -I- 56,266) 1,63,111 = rd. 0-4-7-19.
(ii) Head of R a h u = rd. 12-0-0 - rd. 4-7-19 - rd. 7-22-41.
From this the tail = rd. 7-22-41 -I- rd. 6-0-0 = rd. 1-22-41.

We have said that the Moon's node is called Rahu, on account of the connection between the two.
O f the two nodes, the first is the H e a d and the second, situated six signs away, is the T a i l of R a h u .
According to the Romaka, there are 24 revolutions of the Moon's nodes i n 1,63,111 days. There-
fore, multiplying the days by 24 and dividing by 1,63,111 the revolutions are got. A s the motion is
retrograde, what is obtained has got to be treated as negative, and therefore to be subtracted from
12 signs or full revolutions. A t the moment 56,266/24 days before Epoch, the H e a d oiRdhu was a
full revolution, and i n order to reckon from that time 56,266 is added to the days multiplied by 24.

As for the correctness of the numbers, we cannot verify them since the original is lost. B u t we can
see how nearly correct the Romaka R a h u here given is, by comparison with that of other systems.
A t Epoch the H e a d or R a h u according to the Homa/ta = ra. 1 2 - 0 - 0 - (0 X 24 -t- 56,266) -^1,63,111
= rd. 7-25-49. Actually it is rd. 7-26-0. According to the Paulisa it is rd. 7-25-59, and according to
the Saura, rd. 7-26-6. T h e time for one tropical revolutions is 1,63,111 24 = 6796-17-30 days. T h e
correct time is 6798-21 -48. T h e difference of 2-4-18 days is caused by the wrong constant of precession
adopted by the Romaka, of 34" instead of the correct 50". T h u s , since the Romaka precession is less
by five minutes i n the time taken by one revolution, its period of revolution must be about two days
less as it is found to be, and the disagreement is small indeed.

(^mimn^MiMi ^ng?it mfechi otidldi -m

Parallax in longitude
9. ( T h i s is the same as VII. 1. a n d e x p l a i n e d c o m p l e t e l y t h e r e . T h e r e is n o
d i f f e r e n c e i n m e a n i n g b e t w e e n the r e a d i n g s t h e r e a n d h e r e , dinamadhyama-
samprdpyd a n d dinamadhyamasamprdptd).

9. Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a o n 5 S 5 . 1 8 c. B.t|i'j|u|dl 4l<ll
9a. B.^T^j^HH UMI d. A.B.fflfFlfiT; C . f i r ? ! *
b. B.^qp;?n. A.cqtRnirti^ii

IB
188 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V111.12

Declination of the Nonagesimai

10. A t any t i m e (for w h i c h the z e n i t h distance o f the n o n a g e s i m a i , Z D N , is
desired,) f i n d the o r i e n t ecHptic p o i n t , O E P . A d d n i n e signs to it. ( T h i s p o i n t
is c a l l e d the n o n a g e s i m a i ) . F i n d its d e c l i n a t i o n .

11. S u b t r a c t the H e a d o f R a h u f r o m the n o n a g e s i m a i , f i n d its sine, d o u b l e

it, a n d a d d a s i x t h o f the q u a n t i t y got by d o u b U n g , (i.e. f i n d the latitude o f the
M o o n , s u p p o s i n g it to be situated at the n o n a g e s i m a i ) . A d d this to the d e c l i n a -
t i o n f o u n d above i f b o t h are o f the same d i r e c t i o n , a n d subtract it f r o m the
d e c l i n a t i o n i f they are o f d i f f e r e n t d i r e c t i o n s . ( T h u s the d e c l i n a t i o n o f the
n o n a g e s i m a i is c o r r e c t e d ) .

12. T h e n o r t h d e c l i n a t i o n , b e i n g less a n d t h e r e f o r e d e d u c t e d f r o m the

l a t i t u d e o f the place, the r e m a i n d e r ( w h i c h is the Z D N ) is s o u t h . T h e s o u t h
d e c l i n a t i o n m u s t be a d d e d to the l a t i t u d e , a n d the s u m ( f o r m i n g the Z D N ) is
n o r t h . T h e p a r t o f the n o r t h d e c l i n a t i o n g r e a t e r t h a n the l a t i t u d e , (i.e. the
r e m a i n d e r after d e d u c t i n g the l a t i t u d e f r o m the n o r t h d e c l i n a t i o n , w h i c h
f o r m s the Z D N ) , is n o r t h .

Lagnatryaguvivara actually means the difference between the O E P and the H e a d o f Rahu, plus
three signs. Clearly this is equal to the difference between the nonagesimai and the Head of Rahu,
as translated above. Therefore, i f the reading, lagndsuravivara is adopted, the word lagna must be
taken to mean tribhonalagna o r nonagesimai. If the nonagesimai is greater than the H e a d and less
than the T a i l , the latitude obtained is north, otherwise south. W h y this is so has been explained in
connection with finding the Moon's latitude according to the Paulisa. T h o u g h , i n a general way, the
nonagesimai latitude is asked to be deducted from the declination if of different directions (instruc-
tion contained i n verse 11), i n the case where the declination is less, the declination is to be deducted
from the latitude, the direction o f the corrected declination being the direction o f the latitude. T h e
instructions contained i n verse 12 envisages only places north of the equator, as usual.

10-12, Quoted by Utpala o n BS 5.18 b. A 1 . C . ^ 1 ^ ^ ; B 1 . 2 . W ^ ;

B2.^?(roaT; D.WyMIHMsti^lJiill^ |
10a. A.^for^
Ai.'H^dHmi-j; I B . % i w r o ^
b. B.^:^:MI<?mHH*)c#T:
c. A.B.^I^^'^^R'IRft
c. A.Bl.HolH^dl
d. A . B . f ^
d. A . C . D . W ; B.oTimi^
12a. B.^^nf^i
A.B.fsrfqg^ (B2.c^); C . D . I W g W :
b. B.^for^
11a. A . c W I ^ i ' ^ ; B.C.^CTg (B3.cBTO)^^R(qr; C.U.f^^
c. B.3TPT^
VIII.13 Vlll. ROMAKA-SIDDHANTA SOLAR ECLIPSE 189

Thus, the following has got to be done:

(i) T h e O E P for the ume for which the parallax corrected latitude is required, is found, by
using the local ascensional differences.
(ii) Nonagesimai = O E P -I- 9 signs.

(iii) Find the declination of the nonagesimai, marking its direction north or south.
(iv) Sine (nonagesimai H e a d of Rahu) x 7/3 = latitude pertaining to nonagesimai. T h i s is
north i f (nonagesimai H e a d of Rahu) is within 6 signs, south otherwise.
(v) Corrected declination = declination +, latitude, found i n (iv), (the upper sign of same direc-
tion, otherwise lower, the direction of the result being that of the greater.
(vi) Z D N = Latitude of the place + corrected declinations, the upper sign i f the corrected declina-
tion is south, lower sign otherwise. In the latter case, if the latitude is greater, the direction of Z D N
is south, if the declination is greater it is north).

T h e work is thus explained: In computing the solar eclipse it has been mentioned under V I I . 1,
that i n the place of the Moon's latitude, the same corrected for parallax has got to be used. T o get
the correction the sine of the Z D N is required. F o r ease o f computation, the Romaka takes the
difference between the latitude o f the place and the declination o f the nonagesimai (the directions
being taken into consideration,) as the Z D N , the error being small as can be seen from the figure
under V I I . 1. T h i s is given by verse 12 above.
Further, the parallax correction for latitude depending on sine Z D N is o n the supposition that
the M o o n moves on the ecliptic, which is only approximately true. Actually the M o o n moves i n its
orbit, and a small correction has got to be made for this, and the work of verse 11 above is intended
for this. Practically, all astronomers before the famous Bhaskaracarya II have given this rule, on the
surmise that taking a point on the Moon's orbit, corresponding to the nonagesimai, things will be
all right. But the mistake i n this has eluded all these ancient astronomers, including the astute
Brahmagupta. It was Bhaskaracarya who detected their mistake, showed, by means of an example,
how the rule was wrong, and gave the correct rule. (Vide the Vdsdnd-Bhdsya at the end of Surya-
grahariddhikdra, Ganitddhydya, Siddhdnta ^iromani).
From the rule given by verse 11, it can be inferred that according to this Siddhdnta the obliquity
of the Moon's orbit, giving the m a x i m u m latitude of the M o o n , is 280 minutes, (got from: 120 x 2
(1 -f- 1/6) = 120 x 7/3 = 280). We shall see that this agrees with the rule given by verse 14, giving
the Moon's latitude. But T S have adopted the incorrect reading, kharasdmsasamrnitdm and dividing
the doubled sine by sixty, got the latitude, which they are constrained to consider to be in degrees.
N P too, accept the same sense as T S with an emended reading kharasdptdm apakramdmsdt. B y this
the m a x i m u m latitude according to the Romaka would be 4. It is very strange that they do not see
this is too far from the correct value, highly improbable i n the Romaka which they themelves praise
inordinately, and disagrees with their own (TS's) commentary under verse 14.
190 PANCASIDDHANTIKA Vlll.14

Parallax correction and orbital diameter

13. M u l t i p l y the t r u e d a i l y m o t i o n o f the M o o n by the sin o f Z D N , thus
f o u n d , a n d d i v i d e by 1800. T h i s is the "parallax c o r r e c t i o n for latitude. T h e
m e a n a n g u l a r d i a m e t e r o f the S u n is 30 m i n u t e s , a n d that o f the M o o n , 34
M i n u t e s ( a c c o r d i n g to the R o m a k a ) .

Thus:

(i) Parallax i n latitude = sine corrected Z D N x true daily motion of the M o o n 1800 (Its direc-
tion is that of the Z D N ) .
(ii) Mean angular diameter of the Sun = 30-
(iii) Mean angular diameter of the M o o n = 34'.
(Using (ii) and (iii) the respective true angular diameters are to be found).

U n d e r V I I . 1, it was explained that the parallax correction for latitude, to be used i n the solar
eclipse, is obtained by multiplying the horizontal parallax of the M o o n relative to the Sun, by the
sine o f the Z D N and dividing by 120, (the max. sine). It was also shown there that the horizontal
parallax itself varies inversely as the distance of the M o o n from the earth, being greatest when the
M o o n is nearest. H i n d u astronomers take it that the distance is inversely proportionate to the true
daily motion, though this is only approximately correct. Therefore it is taken here that the relative
parallax is proportionate to the modon, the Sun's parallax being very small compared to that of the
M o o n . Here, the parallax correction i.e. relative horizontal parallax X sin (corrected) Z D N 120
= Moon's daily motion X sin (corrected) Z D N H- 1800. F r o m this it can be seen that according to
this Siddhdnta, the relative horizontal parallax is the daily motion divided by 15. Therefore the
mean relative horizontal parallax = 790'.5 15 = 52.7 minutes, as mentioned already. As for the
mean angular diameters that is what the Siddhdnta has found them to be, by observation or analysis
of eclipses.

14. T w e n t y o n e , m u l t i p l i e d b y the sine o f ( S u n o r M o o n at n e w m o o n ~

R a h u ) a n d d i v i d e d by n i n e is the latitude. T h i s , w i t h the p a r a l l a x c o r r e c t i o n
a d d e d is the p a r a l l a x - c o r r e c t e d l a t i t u d e , w h e n b o t h are o f the same d i r e c t i o n .
W h e n o f d i f f e r e n t d i r e c t i o n s , t h e i r d i f f e r e n c e is the c o r r e c t e d latitude.

14. Quoted by Utpala o n f i S 5.18

14a. A . f W < n ^ n ^ ; B.idfk1dlilfte;
13. Quotedby Utpala on B 5 5.18
C D . U.(d'<IRIgl^<=K
13a. A.cfsqraf; Bl.ri^qrat; B2.3.^r5qrat b. A . B 1 . 2 . ^ W . D.fcIT^
b. B.?1^:. A.B1.2.'MjdHll^:; D . ^ W P d : c. A . 3 f 1 ^ ; B.arsFM
c-d. B . % ? F ^ : B . f ^
d. A.1Wi?r; B l . 3 . i W 3 ; d. B . 1 W S ; D . U . f ^ ^ . A l . B l . ^ ; A 2 . ^
VIII.15 VIII. R O M A K A - S I D D H A N T A " S O L A R E C L I P S E 191

It is stated here that,

(i) T h e Moon's latitude at new moon = sin (Moon ~ Rahu) X 7 H- 3.

(ii) Parallax-corrected latitude = Moon's latitude i p a r a l l a x correction given in verse 13. (The
upper sign is to be taken if both are of the same direction, and the lower sign, if of different direc-
tions, the resulting direction being that of the greater).
r h e latitude at new moon is the distance of the M o o n north or south of the Sun, as seen by an
observer at the centre of the earth. For an observer on the surface, there is a difference in this, equal
to the parallax in latitude. Therefore they have to be combined, taking the directions into consi-
deration, to find the actual distance as observed, i.e. if of the same direction they have to be added,
and i f of different directions the differences is to be taken, the direction being that of the greater.
T h o u g h the author wants this to be done at new moon, as the use of the word sama-lipta indicates
perhaps following the instructions of the original Siddhdnta it will be better if it is done at new
moon corrected for parallax in longitude, that being generally nearer the circumstances.
It is given that the sine of (Moon ~ Rahu) multiplied by 21 and divided by 9, (it will be easier to
multiply by 7, and divide by 3), is the latitude. F r o m this, the m a x i m u m latitude according to this
Siddhdnta = the m a x i m u m sine X 7 3 = 120' x 7 ^ 3 = 280'. This agrees with verse 11 above,
as already said. But T S say here that the m a x i m u m is 270', contradicUng their statement under
verse 11, that it is 4, i.e. 240'. Without any reason, they assume here that the m a x i m u m is 270', and
since the maximum sine multiplied by 21 and divided by 9 does not give 270', they say that the
multiplier and the divisor given are approximate!! T h e same applies also to N P , vide their derivation
(pt.II, p.63) of the result " i = 4 .... (3c)" and " i = 4:30 ... (10), i n contrast to (3c)" ( p t . l l . p.64).
Further, TS's statement, that the parallax due to the Sun has been omitted by the author on account
of its smallness, is wrong, for the intention of the author is only to give the relative parallax. The
correct statement would be, ' T h e Sun's parallax has not been separately computed and deducted
from the Moon's, as the difference in effect would be negligible".

True diameter of the orbs

1.5. T h e m e a n a n g u l a r d i a m e t e r s o f the S u n a n d the M o o n , respectively,
m u l t i p l i e d by t h e i r t r u e d a i l y m o t i o n s a n d d i v i d e d by t h e i r m e a n daily
m o t i o n s , gives the t r u e a n g u l a r d i a m e t e r s at the t i m e o f eclipse.

Thus:

(i) T h e angular diameter of the Sun = 30' x Sun's true daily motion ^ 59.
192 PANCASIDDHANTIKA Vlll.17

It is a matter of experience that an object looks bigger, the nearer it is, smaller the farther away
it is, i.e. the angle formed by the object at the eye is inversely proportionate to the distance. We have
already mentioned that approximately the daily true motion of the Sun and the M o o n is inversely
proportionate to the distance. Therefore, the angle at the eye is proportionate to the daily true
motion, approximately. Hence, from the proportion, Mean motion: T r u e motion:: Mean angular
diameter; T r u e angular diameter, we have,

T r u e angular diameter = Mean angular diameter x true modon mean motion,

which is the rule given.

[i<^U|chlH:]

Moment of the eclipse

16. S u b t r a c t the s q u a r e o f the p a r a l l a x - c o r r e c t e d l a t i t u d e f r o m the square o f
the s u m o f the s e m i - d i a m e t e r s . T h e s q u a r e r o o t o f the r e m a i n d e r , m u l t i -
p l i e d by two, is the n u m b e r o f m i n u t e s o f arc g i v i n g the d u r a t i o n . T h e s e
m i n u t e s , m u l t i p l i e d by 6 0 a n d d i v i d e d by the m i n u t e s o f relative t r u e daily
m o t i o n gives the t i m e o f d u r a t i o n i n nadikds.
T h e following is to be done:

(i) Minutes of arc of duration = 2 V (sum of the semi-diameters)^ - (parallax corrected latitude)^.

(ii) T i m e duration in nadis minutes of arc of duration x 60 ^ daily relative true motion in
minutes of arc. (Half this, subtracted from, and added to the dme of new moon corrected for parallax
gives the first and last contacts respecUvely).

T h e rationale of the work has been shown in connection with the Paulisa (chap. V I I ) . We must
add the following: If the latitude as corrected for parallax is found separately, each for the time of
first contact and the time of last contact, and used in the work, then each will be more correct. Thus,
the corrected ladtude and the time a^e interdependent, each requiring the other for its computa-
tion, and therefore the method of successive approximation is indicated here. This is not mentioned
by the work, as being easily understood, or the author does not give it because it is not found in the
original.

[iljUIMr<<^<a:]

16. Quoted by Utpala on 5 S 5.18 b. A . ^ r f ^ . B.<dc|llRl

16a. A 1 . B 1 . 2 . ^ : A 2 . ^ c. A . ^ ^ . B . t O ^
VIII.18 VIII. R O M A K A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 193

Eclipse diagram
17. Subtract the parallax-corrected latitude for the time o f parallax-corrected
new m o o n , f r o m the s u m o f semi-diameters. T h e r e m a i n d e r i n m i n u t e s are
the digits o f o b s c u r a t i o n o f the S u n by the M o o n .

18. T o r e p r e s e n t the a m o u n t o f o b s c u r a t i o n g r a p h i c a l l y , d r a w a circle o f

r a d i u s e q u a l to the s e m i - d i a m e t e r o f the S u n , m e a s u r e the p a r a l l a x - c o r r e c t e d
latitude n o r t h o r s o u t h a c c o r d i n g as w h e r e the M o o n is situated, a n d w i t h the
p o i n t m a r k i n g its e n d as c e n t r e d r a w a circle o f r a d i u s e q u a l to the M o o n ' s
s e m i - d i a m e t e r , to r e p r e s e n t the M o o n . ( T h e p a r t c o m m o n to b o t h the circles
is the part o b s c u r e d , a n d its m e a s u r e i n digits is its w i d t h i n m i n u t e s o f arc.)

Obscuration in digits = S u m of the semi-diameters, in minutes parallax-corrected latitude, in

minutes. (This for the time of parallax-corrected new moon).
T h e Fig. to illustrate this is given at the end of Example 5, as part thereof. It can be seen from there
that the amount of obscuration, A B = SB - Sy\ = SB - (SM - M A )

= SB -I- M A - SM

= radius of the Sun + radius of the M o o n corrected latitude

= sum of the semidiameters corrected latitude.

T h e author has taken it that one minute of arc appears to the eye as one digit, though actually
the apparent size varies, ('apparent' because this is an illusion), the heavenly bodies appearing to
be bigger the nearer they are to the horizon.

Example 5. After 59 days has passed from, epoch, on the 60th day, there is a solar eclipse. Comput
for Pudukkottai (in S. India) (lat. 10 23'; longitude 48 east of Yavanapura, represented by 8 nddis o
time).
The first things to he found are: T h e S i m and M o o n at new moon, the daily motion etc. In Example
1, we have found that the true Sun for 59 days from epoch is ra. 1-28-24. In Example 2, the true
M o o n is found to be r. 1-19-36. In Example 3, the Sun's true daily motion for the 60th day is found
to be 57', and the Moon's, 835'. In Example 4, the H e a d of Rahu is found to be ra. 7-22-41. (All the
three longitudes are for mean sunset at Yavanapura, that being the time o f day of epoch.) S i m
M o o n = rd. 1-28-24 ra. 1-19-36 = 8 48'. T h e Sun being greater, the new moon is to come.

T h e relative daily motion = the difference of the true motions

= 835' - 57' = 778'.

18a. B.3ISHl(dte!lTf%
17a. B1.2.?;#lf^. A.isif% b. B . 1 . 2 . ^ . A . B l . 2 . ^
c. A . C . D . U . ^ ? n ^ c. A.*aK;B.^a^
d. A.n%^5nPr. A l . W P M ; A2.^9R?qc?T9T d. B.ftfe#HM^
194 PANCASIDDHANTIKA V l l l . 18

The nddis of new moon from mean sunset at Yavanapura, = 60 x 8 48' H- 778' = na.40-43.

T h e time of new moon from mean sunset at Pudukkottai =na.40-43 + wa.8-0 = na.48-43.
i.e. on the 60th day, after mean sunrise at Pudukkottai, the new moon is at na.48-43 na.30-0
= na. 18-43. Given the half-cara for the day, 39 vinddis, the new moon is at na. 18-43 -I- vi.39 =
nd. 19.22. (No correction is made for equation of time since the Siddhanta does not give it.)

At new moon, the Sun = the M o o n =rd. 1-28-24 -I- 48' = ra. 1-29-12.
Head of Rahu at new moon = ra.7-22-41 - 2' = ra.7-22-39.
Correction of new moon for parallax (by verse 9.):

Halfday-dme is na. 15-0 + OT.39 = na. 15-39.

T h e dme elapsed after noon = nd. 19-22 - na. 15-39 = na.3-43.
Corresponding to this, there are 22 18'.
Sine 22 1 8 ' = 45'32".
T h e parallax bending of the new moon, (later) = 45' 32"/30 = wa. 1-31.
Parallax-corrected new moon = nd. 19-22 + na. 1-31 = na. 20-53.

The OEP at new moon: T h e required ascensional difference for every Drekkdria for Pudukkottai
in vmadw are 90, 94, 98 for Taurus; 102, 105. 108 for G e m i n i ; 109, 110, 109 for Cancer; 108, 105,
103 for Leo; 101, 101, 99 for Virgo. T h e new moon is 1162 vinddis from sunrise. 8 vinddis after
sunrise Taurus ends, 315 from this G e m i n i ends, 328 from this Cancer ends, and 316 from this Leo
ends. For the remaining 195 in Virgo, the part risen is 10 + 9 18' = 19 18'.

. . 0 P = ra. 5-19-18.
Nonagesimai = O E P -l-ra. 9-0-0 = ra. 2-19-18.

.nn declination of nonagesimai = 48' 48" X sine (ra.2-19-18) ^ 120' = 47' 58".
Declination = 23 33', N o r t h .
Corrected declination of the Nonagesimai (verses 10-11) Nonagesimai ~ Head of Rahu = ra. 2-19-18 ~
ra.7-22-39 = ra. 6-26-39.
Sine of this = sin ra.0-26-39 = 53' 49".
53' 49" X 2 (1 + 1/6) = 126', south, (since the Nonagesimai is more than 6 rdsis distant from Head
of Rahu).
Being of different directions, 23 33' - 126' = 21 27', N o r t h is the corrected declination.
ZDN {hy verse 12) : corrected declination - ladtude = 23 27' - 10 23'
= 11 4', north (being north declination and greater than latitude).
Parallax in latitude (by verse 13) = Sin Z D N X Moon's true daily modon in minutes ^ 1800 =
22' 50" X 835 1800 = 10'.6, north, (same direction as Z D N ) .
The uncorrected latitude at new moon = (verse 14):

M o o n - H e a d of Rahu = ra. 1-29-12 - ra. 7-22-.S9

VIII.18 VIII. ROMAKA-SIDDHANTA SOLAR ECLIPSE 195

= ra. 6-6-33.
Sine ra.6-6-33 = Sin 6 3 3 ' = 13'41".
T h e latitude = 13'41" x 7/3
= 3 r . 9 , south, (the M o o n being more than 6 rdsis distant from H e a d of Rahu).

Parallax-corrected latitude = (by verse 14), 31'.9 - 10'.6 = 21'.3, south.

Sum of true semi-diameters (by verse 15) :

T r u e diameter o f Sun = 30' x 5 7 59 = 29'.

T r u e diameter of M o o n = 34' X 835 ^ 791 = 35'.9.

Sum of semi-diameters = (29' -I- 35'.9)/2 = 32'.4.

Duration (by verse 16):
Minutes of arc of duration = 2 x V 3 2 . 4 ^ - 2 1 . 3 - = 2 x 24'.4 = 48'.8.

T i m e of duration = 48'.8 x 60 ^ 778' = na.3-46.

H a l f duration = nd. 1-53.

Subtracting this from parallax-corrected new moon,

Sun's orb
first contact is, no.20-53 - nd. 19-0, after sunrise.

A d d i n g to parallax-corrected new moon, last contact is,

na.20-53 -I- na. 1-53 = na.22-46, after sunrise.
Part obscured in digits (by verse 17): sum of semi-diameters
- parallax-corrected ladtude = 32.4 - 21.3 = 11.1.
Graphical representation of obscuration

S = centre of the Sun

M = centre of the M o o n

S M = parallax-corrected latitude
Moon's orb
A B = the measure of the obscuration = l " . l l = 11.1 digits

Fig. VIII. 1

In this work, 1.8-10 give the 'days from epoch' according to the Romaka; 1.15, gives the elements
concerning the Sun and Moon in the Rormka-yuga; V I I I . 1-8 give the true Sun, M o o n and Rahu; and
V I I L 9 - 1 8 give the solar eclipse according to the Romaka. It is the 'days of epoch' of Romaka that is
intended to be used everywhere in the work; since it is the distance between two points of time and
therefore the same by v/hatever siddhdnta it is computed. T h e difference caused by the time of the
day like 'Sunset of Ujyain', ' N o o n at Ujjain' etc. will, of course, be there, and must be taken into
account. T h e agreement between 1.8-10, 1.15, and VIII.1-7, each to each, has been shov/n in the
proper places. We have also shown that the Sun, M o o n and R a h u of the Romaka are tropical,
though the author has not mentioned this specifically. T h e work being a manual, intended to be
used not for a long period, the difference caused by precession is neglected, no reference being
made to it. T h e periods being tropical, itself indicates that this Siddhdnta is foreign. T h e Sun's
196 PANCASIDDHANTIKA

maximum equation of the centre, given as 143', also in an indicator, agreeing as it does with
Ptolemy's. T h o u g h the Moon's maximum equation of the centre given is 296', and Ptolemy's is 301',
and thus there appears to be a difference, we are not sure that the given quantity is 296', on account
of the extremely corrupt nature of the text in the concerned part. T h e r e are also lacunae in the
computations intended by the author, which are to be supplied from the siddhdntas dealt with
already or known otherwise. T h e method of computing the true Sun and M o o n given here is an
improvement on the Paulisa.

Only the solar eclipse is dealt with here. T h e lunar eclipse is omitted probably because it is not
different from that of either the Paulisa and Vdsistha given, or the Sura to be gix>en. In contrast w
primitive method of the Paulisa, the Romaka method of computation of the solar eclipse is far
advanced, and almost the same as that of the later siddhdntas like the Aryabhatiya or the Saura. F
instance, the parallax in latitude is correctly sought to be computed by using sine Z D N , though the
Z D N itself is approximate, being got by combining the latitude of the place and the declination of
the nonagesimai. Only the method given for correcting the declination for the nonagesimai to
compensate for the M o o n being situated on its own orbit instead of the ecliptic, is wrong, as
commonly seen i n works of authors prior to Bhaskaracarya II. M a k i n g the parallax in latitude and
the Moon's true angular diameter depend on the Moon's true motion, and the Sun's true angular
diameter on the Sun's true motion, is in accordance with the later siddhdntas, though giving the
respective mean diameters as 34' and 30' is very rough. T h e first contact, middle, and last contact,
as also the directions of the points of contact, are intended to be taken from the Vdsistha-Paulisa, not
being given here. T h e omission of tfie total or annular phases does not matter, since they cannot
be got correctly by the rougfi methods given. Further, let us not m i n d the omission of the successive
approximation to be done in the computation of the circumstances, though necessary as shown.
(This may be because it is not found in the original or easily understood to be necessary). But it will
certainly be better to use in the computation the parallax-corrected latitude of the new moon
corrected for parallax, insteadof thatof the uncorrected new moon as given by the text, the former
being generally nearer the time of the thing computed. We do not know why the author has not said
so. Inspiteof all this, the Romaka is interesdng as being comparatively more ancient, and forming a link
between the earlier and the later Siddhdntas.

1. C o l . A . T t i F F i w ^ s ^ m w i O T g ' i ^ : ;

B.C.D.lf^-

Thus ends Chapter Eight entitled 'Romaka-Siddhanta:

Solar Eclipse' in the Paiicasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
 Chapter Nine

SAURA-SIDDHANTA SOLAR ECLIPSE

Introductory
In the first portion of this chapter the Sun, M o o n and Rahu according to the Saura Siddhdnta are
given, and in the latter portion, the computation of the solar eclipse according to the same. In
agreement with the author's statement in his Introducdon to the PS, that the tithi got by the Saura
is very accurate, we see that not only the tithi but most other constants as well are wonderfully accu-
rate, and approximate closely to the modern values. A m o n g the five Siddhdntas this is the only one
that uses epicycles to compute the Equation o f the centre of the Sun and the M o o n , and later i n
chapter X V I I , the Equation of the centre and equation of conjunction of the 'star-planets', followed
later by astronomers like Aryabhata. T h e Ardhardtrika-paksa of Aryabhata, expounded by
Brahmagupta in his Khandnkhddyaka, follows this Saura-Siddhdnta i n its constants. T h o u g h the
computation o f Days from Epoch ('days') has not been specially given for the Saura, (the rule given
in 1.13 not being clear whether it is related to the Saura or not), yet from the Fw^a-elements of the
Saura in 1.14, it is possible to formulate rules for 'Days from Epoch', following the Saura, as has been
shown by us in our Notes under 1.14. We have also explained how the 'days from Epoch' obtained
from the Romaka or Paulisa rules can be used for the Saura also, provided we bear in mind the
variation in time of commencement of the Epoch, as for instance, that the epoch for the mean Sun
and M o o n , their apogees, and the Moon's node is for mid-day at Ujjain, and for the star-planets it
is mid-night.

Now, the author, intending to deal with eclipses, gives first the Sun, M o o n and R a h u on which
eclipses depend, beginning with the mean Sun.

Mean Sun
I. A c c o r d i n g to the Saura-Siddhdnta, to get the m e a n S u n i n r e v o l u t i o n s etc.,
m u l t i p l y the days f r o m E p o c h by 8 0 0 , d e d u c t 4 4 2 , a n d d i v i d e by 2,92,207.
T h i s is f o r U j j a i n m e a n n o o n .

I. Paraphrased by Utpala or BS 2, p.65. c. A . B 1.2. ^rflfR^9; C .

la. A . B l . ^ . A2.?ra^ d. A . ^ ; B l , 2 . ^ . A 2 . f ^ . A l . ^ ; B . o ^
198 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.4

That is, take the days from E p o c h got by the Romaka or Paulisa rule.
T h e mean Sun at Ujjain mean noon, just preceding the Epoch, (i.e. sunset at Yavanapura
beginning Monday),
= (days X 800 - 442) ^ 2,92,207, in revolutions etc.
Example 1 (a). Find the mean Sun, given days from epoch, 5,28,931. (This is midday, Ujjain, 21-
A.D.). (b) Get the mean Sun for Ujjain mean noon, just preceding the Epoch, i.e. for zero day. What
Epoch, i.e. sunset at Yavanapura?

(a) Mean Sun = (5,28,931 x 800 - 442) 2,92,207 = revol. 1448-1-5-15.7 = rd 1-5-15.7.

(b) M e a n Sun at Ujjain mean noon preceding Epoch = (0 X 800 - 442) 2,92,207 = - 32'.7 =
ra 11-29-27-3.

Since mean sunset at Yavanapura is nd. 7-20 later than that at Ujjain, the mean motion for nd
22-20, about 22', has to be added, and the required mean Sun at Epoch is rd. 11-29-49.3. (According to
modern astronomy it is 11-29-37.2, assuming that at that period the vernal equinox coincided
with the First point of Mesa. See how accurate the value is.)

The rule is explained thus: We showed under 1.14 that i n the Saura yuga of 1,80,000 years, i.e
1,80,000 mean solar revolutions, there are 6,57,46,575 days. Therefore, the revolutions for the
given days = days X 1,80,000 H- 6,57,46,575 = days X 800 ^ 2,92,207, reducing the numerator and
denominator by the factor 225. N o w , according to the Saura, the revolution of the mean Sun was
completed 442/800 days after Ujjain mean-noon prior to Epoch. Therefore 442 eight hundredth
parts have to be subtracted from the total number o f eight-hundredths, and hence the deduction
of 442. T h o u g h the original Saura is not obtainable now, yet from the Ardhardtrika system of
Aryabhata, and the Khandakhddyaka following it, we can see that 442/800 day after the said Ujjain-
mean noon the mean Sun's revolution was completed. T h e Epoch was near the end of ^aha 427, i.e. 427 +
3179 = 3606, Kali years gone. Kali began with Friday, Ujjain mean mid-night. For 3606 revolutions, the
days (from the beginning o f Kali) = 3606 X 2,92,207 H- 800 = 13,17,123 42/800. Dividing out by
7, we have the remainder 3 42/800, i.e. 42/800 days after midnight ending Sunday, the revolutions
was complete. Since Sunday mid-day is half a day or 400/800 day earlier than midnight, it is 42/800
-f- 400/800 = 442/800 day earlier, than the time o f full revolution, as we have taken and used.
Incidentally, we also got that it is Sunday mean noon, agreeing with the fact that the Epoch is at
sunset at Yavanapura on that day. Further, we get that according to this Siddhdnta the length of the
year is 2,92,207 ^ 800, days = 3 6 5 - 1 5 - 3 1 . 5 days.
IX.4 IX. . S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 199

Mean Moon
2. M u l t i p l y the D a y s by 9 , 0 0 , 0 0 0 , d e d u c t 6,70,217, a n d d i v i d e by
2,45,89,506. T h e a p p r o x i m a t e m e a n M o o n i n r e v o l u t i o n s etc. is got.
3. M u l t i p l y the D a y s by 9 0 0 , a d d 2 2 , 6 0 , 3 5 6 , a n d d i v i d e by 2 9 , 0 8 , 7 8 9 . T h e
a p p r o x i m a t e M o o n ' s a p o g e e i n r e v o l u t i o n s etc. is o b t a i n e d .
4. M u l t i p l y the r e v o l u t i o n s o f m e a n M o o n by 5 1 , a n d d i v i d e by 3 1 2 1 . T h e
r e s u l t i n g seconds o f arc are to be subtracted to get the exact m e a n M o o n .
M u l t i p l y the r e v o l u t i o n s o f a p o g e e by 10 a n d d i v i d e by 2 9 7 . T h e r e s u l t i n g
seconds are to be a d d e d to get the exact a p o g e e .

The following are the formulae:

(i) Mean Moon in revs, etc = (Days x 9,00,000 - 6,70,217) 2,45,89,506 - number of revolutions
X 5 1 " - 3121.
(ii) Moon's apogee in revs. etc. = (Days x 900 + 22,60,356) ^ 29,08,789 + number of revolutions
got X 10" 297.
Example 2. (a) Days from Epoch = 5,28,931: Eind the mean Moon, (b) Find the mean Moon for Ujjain
mean noon, immediately prior to Epoch, and for Epoch.
(a) By formula (i), the approximate mean M o o n = (5,28,931 x 9,00,000 - 6,70,217) ^
2,45,89,506

= revs.f 19,359 - 4-11-31.

= T h e subtractive seconds = 19,359 X 51 ^ 3,121 = 316.
.-. Exact Mean M o o n = ra.4-11-31 - 316" = ra.4-11-25-7.

(b) By formula (i), for the said Ujjain mean noon the approx. mean M o o n = (0 X 9,00,000
6,70,217) - 2,45,89,506

= - ra.0-9-48.8 = ra. 11-20-11.2

A d d i n g the mean modon of apogee for 22 1/3 nadikds, 4 54'.3, the mean M o o n at epoch = rd.
11-25-5.5.
(Note: T h e actual apogee got by modern constants is rd. 11-24-47.6, and we see the difference is
only 18 minutes.)

2b. A . ^ ^
A.m^; B 1.2.^0^: B 3 . W ^
4a. B 1 . 2 . 1 ^ 9 1 ; B 3 . ^ ^ ^
c. B 3 . t | ^ ^ i | ; B1.3.^f?Af%\q; D.^<<4l*^Ps^'M
b. D.<f^
3a. A . B 2 . 1 I N c. A . ^ . A.t^;B1.2.C.D.^Sraffjf;
b. A.'juil=l<i B . ^ ^ B 2 . i ^
c. A.kliei< d. A . B . ^ 5 ^ ^ ^ ^ R ^ (B.'iPRt'ft);
d. A.^T^lfe^'?!
200 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.4

Example 3. (a) Days 5,28,931. Find the Moon's apogee, (b) Find the Moon's apogee for Ujjain me
prior to Epoch, and for Epoch.

(a) By (ii) the approx apogee in revs. = (5,28,531 X 900 + 22,60,356) ^ 29,08,789
= Revs. 164-5-5-33.1

T h e additive seconds = 164 X 10 -4- 297 = 6.

A d d i n g , the exact apogee = rd. 5-5-33.2.

(b) For the said Ujjain mean noon, the apogee = (0 X 900 + 22,60,356) ^ 29,08,789 = rd. 9-9-45.
A d d i n g 2'.5, the mean motion of apogee in 22 1/3 nddikds, the apogee at Epoch = rd. 9-9-47.5.
(Note: The actimlposition was rd. 9-9-34. See how close this is.)

The explanation for the formula relating to the mean Moon is as follows: It was shown under 1.14 t
in the Saurayuga consisdng of 6,57,46,575 days there are 24,06,389 revolutions of the M o o n . For
the sake o f convenience, the author has first assumed that in whole numbers there are 9,00,000
revolutions in 2,45,89,506 days, intending to give a correction as a second step. Therefore we get
that i n 6,57,46,575 days there are 6,57,46,575 x 9,00,000 H- 2,45,89,506 revolutions = rev.
24,06,389-0-10-55-27.

T h u s we get 10 55' 2 7 " more than what we should get, and this has to be deducted, proportion-
ately to the revolutions got. For one revolution the deduction is, 10 55' 2 7 " /24,06,389 = 39,327"/
24,06,389. In the place of this fraction the author gives the approximate but simpler fraction 5 1 " /
3121, since the error caused will be only plus 4 " in the yuga.

T h e manuscript reading, kharkdgni if read as khdrkdgni as done by T S and N P , ( = 51 "/3120) will

cause an error of minus 8", which also is negligible but unlikely, since the author then would have
given the reduced form, 17"/1040. That is why we have read it as kvarkdgni, 3121.
The deduction of 6,70,217 is explained in the manner of the Sun's deduction: We have seen that a
end of Saka 427, the end of 3,606 solar years from the beginning of Kali fell 42/800 days, i.e. nd. 3-9,
after Ujjain mean midnight after Epoch. U n d e r 1.14 it was shown that according to the Saura there
are 24,06,389 revolutions of the M o o n in 180,000 years. Therefore, i n 3,606 years the revolutions
gone are 48,207.992966. A t the beginning of Kali, the M o o n , like the Sun, began a revolution,
according to the Saura. So, .007033 revoludon remains to be completed now. We have seen that for
2,45,89,506 fractional parts there is one revolution. So, for .007033 revolution, the parts to go are
2,45,89,506 x .007033 = 1,72,946. These must go after the completion of the solar year to complete
the revolution. But the year ends nd. 3-9 -f nd. 30 = nd. 33-9 from mean noon. In one day, there
are 9,00,000 parts, and forna. 33-9, the parts to go are 9,00,000 X 33.15 60 = 4,97,250. There-
fore at mean noon the parts to go for completing the revolution are 1,72,946 -I- 4,97,250 =
6,70,196. Since these have to go, this number is deducted from the total parts got by multiplying
the days by 9,00,000. Here, the author gives 6,70,217 arrived at by using approximate work in the
place o f 6,70,196, for the difference is small, the error caused being only minus one second in the
yuga.

Now for the explanation of the rule to get the longitude of apogee: We do this using the element giv
in Aryabhata's Ardhardtrika system, or which is the same, in the Khandakhddyaka, since this is not
given in 1.14, and the original Saura is not available. F r o m them we learn that in the Mahayuga of
IX.6 IX. SAURA-SIDDHANTA SOLAR ECLIPSE 201

1,57.79,17,800 days there are 4,88,219 revolutions of the Moon's apogee. If the approximate rule
given as the first part is used, we get that there are, 900 X 1,57,79,17,800 H- 29,08,789 revolutions
= rev. 4,88,218-11-25-26-48 for the Mahayuga. But this is 4 33' 12" less than the correct value, and
this latter has got to be added, per Mahayuga, i.e. for 4,88,219 revolutions. Therefore the addition
for the revolutions gone is, revolutions gone x 16,392" 4,88,219. In the place o f this fraction the
author gives 10"/297, as the difference is very small, for by using this the error will be only plus 2"
in the Saurayuga of 1,80,000 years, which is negligible, especially i n the apogee.

If, instead of our (as also NP's) emendation, svararandhrayama, we make another emendation
vasurandhrayama giving the fraction as 10"/298, then it will be very correct. As for our reading
randhra i n the place of the author's t ^ i r a , it is necessary since otherwise there will be an error of plus
one degree and a half in the Mahayuga. T h a t is why T S have given the emendation svaranandayama
meaning the same as our reading, but randhrafitsthe letters better than nanda.
The correctness of the ksepa is shown hereunder: 3606 years of Kali ended nd. 3-9 after Ujjain mid-
night next to Epoch. T h e revolutions o f apogee for 3606 years = 4,88,219 X 3606 ^ 43,20,000 =
407.527248611. A t the beginning of K a l i the longitude of apogee was 0.25 revolutions. Therefore
at nd. 3-9 after the said Ujjain midnight, the longitude is 0.25 -(- 0.527248611 = 0.777248611 rev.
The fractional parts (af 900 per day), for 0.77248611 rev. = 29,08,789 x 0.777248611 =
22,60,852. This is the ksepa to be added at the end o f the year. B u t Ujjain mean moon, for which
we want the apogee, is nd. 33-9 earlier, and the parts for this interval = 900 X 33.15 60 = 497
has to be deducted..-. the ksepa is 22,60,355. T h e author gives 22,60,356, which differs by only one unit
and causes practically no difference.

'(^)^^^c^^^r^|u?c^-T|(TlT)q^?T''q(%>) M ^ T I ^ T I ^ :

( ^ ) ( d f a c < ^ # P r t T l g [ ^ : W ( M ) ? T f ^ || ^

Rahu: Maximum latitude

5. M u l t i p l y the days f r o m E p o c h by 2 7 0 0 , a d d 6 3 , 1 3 , 2 1 9 a n d d i v i d e by
1,83,45,827. R e v o l u t i o n s etc. are o b t a i n e d , to be u s e d i n g e t t i n g R a h u .

6. T h i s d e d u c t e d f r o m twelve rdsis is the R a h u - h e a d (i.e. a s c e n d i n g n o d e o f

the M o o n . ) R a h u - h e a d p l u s soLtdsis is the R a h u - t a i l (i.e. d e s c e n d i n g n o d e ) . A t
the ( m a x i m u m ) distance o f 9 0 f r o m R a h u (the n o d e ) , the M o o n ' s l a t i t u d e is
2 7 0 m i n u t e s (i.e., this is the m a x i m u m latitude.)

5a. A l . B 1 . 2 . f e W ^ ( B 1 . 2 . ? l ^ ) C . ^ . B . ^ C. ^Iflf^: D . s ^ :
b. A.?S?II^:; B.<^H!fKI:; C.^S?1sej:|; D . c ^ ^ - ABl2 ^
B.3,%^ (B2.3.o%:) ^ K ^ ^ ^ D . ^ fori
c. A . ^ ; B . ^ ; C . o m ^ ; D . ^ ^ A . ^ ; B l . 3 ^ ; B2.3.T??f!T
A.^^3I^ C . ^ ; D.fdPR
d. A.(iiRl^Tt>HKH5l:; ( A 2 . w r : ) B.l]pw d. A . B 1 . 2 . W c n ^ W ^
202 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.(

T h e H e a d of R a h u i n revolutions etc. = - (Days X 2700 + 63,13,219) 1,83,45,827.

T h e tail of R a h u = the above + 6 rdsis.

As for Moon's ladtude, for a m a x i m u m moon Rahu, equal to 90, there is the maximum
latitude, 270'. For other differences, lat = 270' sin (Moon ~ Rahu) 120, as given i n verse 25,
which reduces to, lat = 9 sin (Moon ~ Rahu)/4. T h i s is given by the Saura, and followed by all later
Siddhdntas.
Example 4. Compute Rahu (a) for Ujjain mean noon prim to Epoch, and (b) for Epoch.

(a) In this case, days from Epoch is zero.

.-. Head ofRahu i n revs. = - (0 x 2700 + 63,13,219) 1,83,45,827 = - ra.4-3-53-3 = ra.7-26-6-57

(b) Since the Epoch is nd. 22-20 later, the motion for this interval, rev. 67/180 X 2,700 ^ 1,83,45,827
= r I I " has to be deducted.
Rahu-head according to the Saura for the time of Epoch, viz. mean sunset at Yavanapura, is rd.
7-26-5-46. Actually it is rd. 7-26-0, and the difference is within 6'. T h e calculation of the latitude
explained in the context of the computation of eclipses.
The rule of Rahu: Like that for the apogee, this rule must be derived from the constants given in th
two works that follow Saura since the original Saura is lost. In the Mahayuga consisting of 1,57,79,17,8
days, there are 2,32,226 revolutions o f R a h u , (i.e. Moon's nodes). U s i n g the rule for Rahu here, we
get, 2700 X 1,57,79,17,800 H- 1,83,45,827 = rev. 2,32,226-0-0-46-2 o f R a h u peryuga. This is 46' 2'
more than what we should get, but neglected by author as being small especially i n a karana
intended to be used for a comparatively short period, considering the fact that even in 10,000 years
the error is only 6", which will not affect the result. That is why the second step of correction is not
given, unlike i n the case of the mean M o o n and apogee. If a correction is wanted here also, multiply
the revolutions by 10, divide by 848, and add the resulting seconds to Rahu. O r , instead of using
1,83,45,827 as divisor use 1,83,45,827.2 i.e., i n the rule, take the multiplier to be 27,000, ksepa
6,31,32,190, and the divisor 18,34,58,272.

A t the end of 427 Saka or K a l i years 3606, the revolutions to get R a h u = the longitude at the
commencement + the revolutions i n 3606 years.

= 1/2 + 3606 X 2,32,226 + 43,20,000

= 1 9 4 + 1,23,913/3,60,000.

Omitting the full revolutions, the parts for the fraction remaining are the ksepa, for the end o
3606 years Kali.
Since there are 1,83,45,827 parts for a revolution, the parts of ksepa =1,83,45,827 X 1,23,913
3,60,000
= 63,14,684.

Since we want the ksepa for Ujjain mean noon, nd. 33-9 earlier, we have to subtract the parts fo
this time.

Since there are 2700 parts i n a day, forna. 33-9 we have nd. 33-9 X 2700 ^ na. 60 = 1492 parts.

.-. the ibepa for mean noon is 63,14,684 - 1492 = 63,13,192.

IX.9 IX. SAURA-SIDDHANTA SOLAR ECLIPSE 203

The author gives 63,13,219, the difference, 27 parts, giving a difference o f 2" i n longitude being
vary small; for by neglecting a small fraction equal 1/7 i n the divisor to make it a whole number, can
give this difference.

The readings here are extremely corrupt: O u r explanation itself will show that the emendations
we have made are necessary. We have read dvighanagaja as trighanasala while T S give the correction
trighanadasa. T h e textual reading, carayamavasubhutdrnavaguvMhrtibhakta is corrected by us as
svarayamavasubhutdrnavagunadhrti-bhakte. B u t T S give the correction yamavasubhutdrnavagu-
nadhrtibhih. Here it is improper o n their part to omit two letters cara though they require this omis-
sion since in trighanagaja they have given dasaiorgaja, instead of sata given by us. N o t h i n g is gained
by reading dasa instead ofsata for gaja. Further, by omitting cara which is a corruption iorsvara, the
number 7 in the unit's place is omitted by them, with the result that i n theyuga an error of plus 30
and more is caused in R a h u , while it is actually 46' 2" according to our correction. N P make the cor-
rect emendation trighanaiataghne but emend cara to kara.

We have corrected dahanasabdah as daharuarasa which fits the rule as shown. But T S content themselves
with remarking that here the numbers o f the ksepa cannot be determined owing to the extreme
corruption o f the text. N P have made the emendation dahanasat here, which too will serve the
purpose.

That the H e a d o f Rahu obtained by deducting what is got from 12 rdsis has been explained i n
dealing with the Paulisa. We read sahati in the text as navati, since the difference o f 90 between
moon and Rahu gives the m a x i m u m ladtude, which is 270' according to the Saura, as also i n all later
H i n d u Siddhantas like the Aryabhatiya. O r we may read it as mahati, since the greatest difference,
viz. 90 will give the greatest latitude, viz. 270'. B u t T S read it as sahita, and give something
farfetched and unacceptable. N P emend sahati as timira, which neither accords with the lettering
of the manuscript nor give the sense 90 required here. T h a t the latitude is proportionate to the
sine o f (Moon ~ Rahu) has already been explained in the context o f the Romaka, and will also be
shown below, in verse 25 o f this chapter.

3 r 8 i ^ T:I*WIVJ II6 II

(True Sun and Moon)

7. T h e m e a n l o n g i t u d e o f the S u n minus 8 0 is c a l l e d the S u n ' s (mean)
a n o m a l y . T h e m e a n M o o n minus its a p o g e e is its (mean) a n o m a l y . M u l t i p l y
the sine o f the a n o m a l y o f the S u n b y 14, a n d that o f the M o o n b y 3 1 .

8. D i v i d e e a c h b y 3 6 0 , a n d find t h e i r arcs. P u t the S u n ' s arc i n t w o places, f o r

s u b s e q u e n t use. T h e arc o f e a c h is to be d e d u c t e d f r o m its m e a n l o n g i t u d e i f
204 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.9

its a n o m a l y is less t h a n sixrasis, a n d a d d e d i f m o r e t h a n sixrasis. ( T h e true S u n

a n d M o o n at U j j a i n m e a n n o o n is got.)

9. M u l t i p l y the Sun's arc, k e p t aside i n o n e place, by the Sun's true daily

m o t i o n , (in m i n u t e s ) , a n d that k e p t i n the o t h e r place by the M o o n ' s true d a i l y
m o t i o n (in m i n u t e s ) . D i v i d e each by 2 1 , 6 0 0 . A d d o r subtract the r e s u l t i n g
m i n u t e s i n the respective t r u e l o n g i t u d e f o u n d , a c c o r d i n g as the Sun's arc was
first a d d e d o r subtracted. ( T h e t r u e S u n a n d M o o n at U j j a i n true n o o n is
obtained.)

The following are the formulae:

(a) To get the true Sun:
(i) Mean Sun 80 = Sun's anomaly.
(ii) Sine Sun's anomaly x 14 360 = sin Sun's equation of the centre. Its arc is the equation of
the centre. (Eq.C).
(iii) M e a n Sun + Sun's equation of the centre = true Sun at Ujjain mean noon. (The upper sign,
if the anomaly is less than 6 rdsis, lower i f more.)
(iv) iii + Sun's equation of the centre X Sun's daily motion i n minutes -^ 21,600 = T r u e Sun at
true mean noon. (Addition or subtraction as in iii.)

(b) To get true Moon:

(i) Mean M o o n Moon's apogee = Moon's anomaly.
(ii) Sine Moon's anomaly X 31 360 = sine Moon's equation of the centre. Its arc is the equation
of the centre.
(iii) M e a n M o o n + Moon's equation of the centre = true moon, at Ujjain mean noon. (The
upper sign, i f the Moon's anomaly is less than 6 rdsis, lower i f more.)
(iv) i i i + Sun's equation of the centre X Moon's true daily motion i n minutes 21,600 = T r u e
M o o n at true noon. (Addition or subtraction as in (a) iii).

Example 5. Days = 5,28,931. Eind the true Sun at true noon, Ujjain.
From example I (a) the mean Sun = rd. I-5-I5.7. T h e longitude of Sun's apogee is 80. From these
two:
(a) (i) T h e Sun's mean anomaly = ra. 1-5-15.7 80 = ra. 10-15-15.7.
(ii) Since anomaly = sine rd. 10-15-15.7 = Sin rd. 1-14-44.3 = 84' 27", .-. Sine equation of the
centre = 84' 2 7 " x 14 ^ 360 = 3' 17".
.-. Equation of the centre = arc 3' 1 7 ' = r 3 4 ' . l .
(iii) T r u e Sun at mean noon = rd. 1-5-15.7 -I- 1 34'. 1 = rd. 1-6-49.8, (addition because the
anomaly is greater than 6 rdsis).
(iv) T r u e Sun at true noon = ra. 1-6-49.8-1-1 34'. I X 57.4 ^- 21,600 = ra. 1-6-49.8-1-0'.3 = ra.
1-6-50.1. (That the daily motion of the Sun is 57'.4 will be given under verse 13, below.)

8a. B.TJ?R?f A.cTS^C.fefelW; B . f S J ^

A.B.C.TRT^^; D.^Wlf^
b. A . B1.2.^?5^: A l . ^ ; A 2 . ^ ^ ; B.'gfee c. B.omWt
c. A.Bl.c1^3qi^ 9b. B.'Ti^iW. A.B.^Q^gifa?
d. A l . ^ Q t a ; A2.1ipraT d. A 2 . ^
IX.9 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 205

Example 6. Find the true Moon at true noon at Ujjain, the Days being 5,28,931.
From example 2 (a), the mean M o o n for 5,28,931 days gone is rd. 4-11-25.7. From ex. 3 (a) the
Moon's apogee for the given days gone is, rd. 5-5-33.2. From these,
(b) (i) T h e Moon's anomaly = rd. 4-11-25.7 - rd. 5-5-33.2 = rd. 11-5-52.5.
(ii) Sine anomaly = sine rd. 11-5-52.5 = sine rd. 0-24-7.5 = 49' 2".
Sine equation of the centre = 49' 2" X 31 - 360 = 4' 13".3.
Equation of the centre = arc 49' 2" = 2 1'.
(iii) T r u e M o o n at mean noon = rd. 4-11-25.7 + 2 V = rd. 4-13-26.7.
(iv) T r u e M o o n at true noon = ra. 4-13-26.7 + l.34'.l x 729.1 ^ 21,600
= ra.4-13-26.7 -I- 3'.2 = ra.4-13-29.9 (That the Moon's daily motion is 729'. 1 will be seen from
example under verse 13 below. T h e addition is as the Sun's Eq.C.)
It should be noted here that the apogee of the Sun, given as 80 is too far from the correct apogee
for the time of the work viz. 77 19'. T h e r e is no doubt about the reading here, since the Ardhardtrika
and the Khandakhddyaka too give 80. So much error is unbelievable in the Saura, and must be
explained thus: A t first the practice might have been to get the mean longitude of the Sun for the
days from the commencement of the true solar year and 80 deducted to get the anomaly, for this
would be equivalent to deducting about 77 50', (since the E q . C at this time is about 2 10'), from
the correct mean Sun, not much different from the correct 77 19' to be deducted. Later, by some
mistake, the deduction of 80 was instructed to be done from the correct mean Sun itself. T h e
apogee for the time computed by the Modern Surya Siddhdnta is 77 15'.

From the instruction to muldply the sine of the Sun and Moon's anomalies by 14 and 31, respec-
tively, and divide by 360, to get the sine of the respective equation of the centre, we see that this
Siddhanta actually uses epicycles like the Aryabhatiya etc, though not mentioning the word, and we
can say that epicycles appear in the H i n d u Siddhantas for the first time in the Saura, and the others
following using epicycles and excentries. T h e Modern Surya Siddhdnta gives the same degrees of
epicycle for the Sun, but 32 for the M o o n instead of 31. Further, in the Saura, the epicycle is
uniform, while in many Siddhantas like the Aryabhatiya there is difference between the degrees at
the ends of odd and even quadrants. For instance, the degree of epicycle mentioned above for the
Sun and the M o o n i n the Surya Siddhdnta is for odd quadrants, being less by 20 minutes at even
quadrants.

T h e computations mentioned above can be simplified, since the multiplier and the divisor are
constants and small arcs are proportionate to the sines. T h u s , we can get the Sun's E q . C . i n minutes
by multiplying its sine anomaly by 1.114. In the example, multiplying 84' 27" by 1.114 we get 94'
6", the equation of the centre. We can get the Moon's E q . C . by multiplying its sine anomaly by
2.467, and i f the result is i n excess of 225 minutes, adding 1/235 of the excess to the result. In the
example, multiplying 4 9 ' 2" by 2.467, we get the equation o f the centre, 121' 3". In the same way,
we find the Sun's m a x i m u m equation of the centre to be , 120' X 1.114 = 133'.7. T h e correct
maximum for the period of our author is 119'.5. T h e large difference is due to the Moon's A n n u a l
Equation being wrongly applied to the Sun with its sign changed, in H i n d u astronomy, as already
alluded to, since by doing so the tithi is not affected, the constants having been derived by the
analysis o f the syzygies, which are, in essence, ends o f particular tithis. A d d i n g the m a x i m u m
A n n u a l equation to the correct equation of the centre of the period, we have 131 '.5. See how close
this is to the value, 133.7 of the Saura, and how far from the 140' o f the Paulisa, and the 143' of the
Romaka and of Ptolemy.
206 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.9

In the same way, the m a x i m u m of the Moon's equation of the centre is 120' X 2.467 + (120'
X 2.467 - 250) ^ 235 = 296' + .3' = 296' .3. This too was determined by analysis of syzygies at the
occurrence of eclipses. According to modern astronomy, the mean of the maximum equation of
the centre of the M o o n at true syzygies is 297'.3, a difference of only one minute! (At mean syzygies
it is303'.5).

Epicyclic theory
We shall now proceed to explain the epicyclic theory of planetary motion, used by this Siddhdnta,
and show how it works, by relating it to the modern theory, which latter is as follows: T h e earth and
the other planets like Mercury etc. move r o u n d the Sun in eclipses, with the Sun at one of the two
foci. T h e point nearest to the Sun on the ellipse is the perihelion, and the most distant, aphelion,
which, from the point of view of the earth, are called the perigee and apogee, respectively. In the
same manner, the M o o n moves in an ecHpse r o u n d the earth at one focus. T h i s fact relating to the
planets was first discovered by the European astronomer Kepler and is called Kepler's First Law of
planetary modon. T h e line j o i n i n g the Sun and the planet (or the earth and the Moon), called the
radius vector, sweeps equal areas i n equal time. This is Kepler's Second Law of planetary motion.
F r o m this it can be readily inferred that the motion of the planet is swiftest at perihelion (or perigee
for the Moon) and lowest at aphelion. Kepler's Third Law, that the square of the periodic dme of the
planets round the Sun is proportionate to the cube o f the distance, is not wanted for our purpose
here. T h e celebrated astronomer, Newton, showed that all the three laws follow from his Theory of
Universal Gravitation, that all bodies attract one another with a force proportionate to their masses,
and inversely proportionate to the square of the distance between them.

But ancient Indian astronomers held the view that the earth is the centre r o u n d which the M o o n ,
Sun and planets move. A l l the motion is i n circles, and uniform. T o explain the non-uniformity of
the apparent motion caused by the equation o f the centre, it was assumed that these bodies moved
in circles called epicycles, (manda-vrttas), the centres o f which moved i n circles r o u n d the earth as
centre. I n the case o f the star-planets, another set o f epicycles called epicycles of conjunction or
sighra-vrttas were assumed, the effect of which is to convert helio-centric positions into geocentric.
As the observers are on the earth, it is geocentric positions that are wanted, and therefore given,
whether by H i n d u astronomy or by modern western astronomy. T h e inaccuracy in the positions
given by the former is due to unawareness of the elliptic motion and the inability to observe accu-
rately for want of adequate instruments, with the result that small errors i n the constants accumu-
lated in course or time, to give large errors.

It has been said that whether the heliocentric theory is adopted or the geocentric theory, the
result in so far as this goes, is the same. T h e n , it may be asked, is it not better to adopt the geocentric
theory which agrees with our perception? N o . T h e r e is a clinching proof for the motion of the earth
r o u n d the Sun, i n the phenomenon of aberration which makes the Sun and star planets appear to
be a litde i n advance o f their real positions, the quantity being so small that very accurate measure-
ment is required to find it, capable only by modern instruments. T h e heliocentric theory is also
simpler, and satisfies the requirement of least assumption.

A d h e r i n g to only circular motion, so satisfying to their minds, the ancients had to get the equa-
tion of the centre, caused by the motion on the ellipse. T h e y sought to achieve it in two ways, by
using epicycles, as indicated already, or excentric circles, or both. H o w the ex-centric is used for the
purpose is explained as follows:
IX.9 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R ECl IPSE 207

Fig. IX. 1-a.

T h e earth E , is the centre of the Orbit-circle, of'radius' equal to the sine of T h r e e raiw (120' in
this work). O indicates the first point of Mesa, in the direction E O . E A is the direction of apogee. A ,
O E A being the longitude of apogee (P is the perigee). X is the centre of the ex-centric circle on
which the Sun, M o o n or star-planets move uniformly according to the mean motion. X is on E A ,
at a distance, towards A , equal to the sine of the maxi-minimum Eq. C . S is the position of the body,
angle S X O ' being the mean longitude of the body. X O ' also is directed to the first point of Mesha.
E O and X O being practically parallel. A S X = mean longitude - longitude of apogee = mean ano-
maly.

S E O is the true longitude, which has got to be found. Since X O ' and E O are parallel, S E O =
S X O ' - X S E , where X S E is the E q . C . Since X S E changes sign on the right hand side of P A , S E O
= S X O ' -l-XSE on that side. T h u s we have that in the first case, when the body is from apogee to
perigee, i.e. when the anomaly is less than six rdsis, the equation of the centre is subtractive. In the
second case, where the mean anomaly is more than six rdsis, is it additive.

Next, for the equation of the centre. If the m a x i m u m E q . C , represented by E X , is small, as in

general, then taking S E and SX to be practically equal, sine E q . C = sine X S E = X E . sine S X E SE
= X E . sine S X A ^ S X
= max Eq.C X sine mean anomaly -J- 120' (120' being the radius).

In this computation, the astronomers belonging to the school of Aryabhala find the E q . C using
the actual radius vector, S E , in accordance with the geometric representation. But Bhaskaracarya
in his Siddhdnta Siromarii does not use i i , and gives reasons for not using it. Now, if degrees of epicycle
are given, as in this Siddhdnta, instead of sine maximum Eq. C , these degrees are multiplied by 120'
and divided by 360 to gel sine maximum E q . C. (i.e. E X ) . Therefore, sine E q . C = (degrees of epi-
cycle X 120' H- 360) X sine anomaly 120'

17
208 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I^-^

= degrees of epicycle X sine anomaly H- 360, as i n the text.

We shall now see how the use of the epicycle gives the E q . C .

Fig. IX. 1-b.

Here too, E , the centre of the earth is the centre of the orbit circle of radius 120'. O n the orbit
circle, the centre C of the epicycle on which the body S is situated, moves according to the mean
motion o f the body. T h e radius of the epicycle is the degrees of epicycle given in the text X 120'
360, which is the m a x i m u m E q . C , as already seen. A t the two points of intersection of the epicycle
with the line of apogee, E A , arc A the apogee, and P the perigee. The body moves on the circumference
of the epicycle, with its mean motion in the direction opposite to the motion of C . Angle A C S is the
anomaly.
Now, draw E A ' parallel to C S . T h e n angle A E A ' also is the anomaly. Since C E O is the mean
body, A ' E O is equal to the longitude of apogee. Since S E O is the true longitude and C E O is the
mean longitude, angle C E S is the E q . C . Therefore, mean longitude minus E q . C . = true long, (the
anomaly being less than 6 rdsis in the figure. If the anomaly is more than 6 rdsis, S is greater than P,
and the E q . C . becomes additive). T h e E q . C . is got in the same way as in the excentric method.

We have now to show that i n either of the methods, the E q . C . is the same, i.e. angle X S E in
fig l a = angle C E S in fig 1 b. In the two triangles X S E and C E S in the respecdve figures, it has been
IX.IO IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 209

said that E X is equal to CS. X S is equal to C E , both being equal to 120'. Angles S X E and S C E are
also equal, since they are 180 miniis the equal mean anomalies, S X A and S C A . Therefore, the two
triangles are congruent, and so angles X S E and C E S are equal, as required to be shown. In the
matter o f the correctness of the degrees of epicycle we have to take the authority of the work. That
it agrees with the Original Saura can be seen, the same being found also in the Ardhardtrika system
and Khandakhddyaka.

Bhujantara correction
We shall now show why the correction called Bhujantara is done. T h e Days used i n the formulae are
mean solar days. (That is why the mean longitudes are taken to be proportional to them.) There-
fore the true longitudes got are for mean noon. But we want the longitudes for true noon. So we
have to apply a correction which is the motion d u r i n g the interval between mean and true noons.
If the Sun's Eq.C. is positive it is east of its mean position, and reaches the meridian later than mean
noon by a certain number of prdrias (prdria = 4 seconds of time, one sixth of a vinddi) equal to the
number of minutes of arc. Being later, the Sun and Moon's motion d u r i n g the interval has to be
added. If the Eq.C. is negative, then the true Sun is west of its mean position and true moon is earlier.
Therefore the motion is to be subtracted. T h e motion in the interval is found by the proportion:
(Since there are 21600 pranas i n a day) 21600: daily motion :: Minutes of Sun's equation of the
centre: motion d u r i n g the interval. F r o m this it can be seen that this correction has got to be done
not only to the Sun, but also to the M o o n and the star-planets as well.

Udayantara correction
We must add that this correction for equation o f the centre is not sufficient. Another correction
has got to be made for what is called Udaydntara or reduction to the equator, i.e. reducing the
motion on the ecliptic to motion on the celestial equator which is the circle on which time has to be
measured. Both these corrections form the equation o f time, being the interval between true and
mean noons. But H i n d u astronomers prior Sripati were unaware o f this correction.

DeSantara correction
10. O n e nddi f o r every 53 1/3 yojanas has to be d e d u c t e d o r a d d e d (to U j j a i n
n o o n ) by p e o p l e i n places east a n d west, respectively, o f the U j j a i n m e r i d i a n ,
(to get t h e i r o w n n o o n . )

Ujjain was the Greenwich of the H i n d u s , and the line of longitude passing through Lanka, Ujjain
and the N o r t h pole was taken as the prime longitude. It is well-known that noon occurs earlier and
earlier as the longitude of a place is more and more east, and vice versa. T h e author says that for
every 53 1/3 yojanas of distance east or west, there is one nddi earlier or later. T h e idea is that there-
fore the daily motion of the body should be multiplied by the nd4is got, divided by 60, and the
resulting minutes of arc should be subtracted or added to the true longitude, according as the place
is east or, west, to get the longitude for local noon.

10a. A. mmu
210 PANCASIDDHANTIKA I X . 11

Example 7. Days, 52931. Benaras is east of Ujjain longitude by 68 yojanas. Find the true Moon
that place.
From example 6, the true M o o n at Ujjain noon is ra.4-13-29.9. T h e difference i n time for
Benaras = nddikds (68 53 1/3), earlier. F r o m this, the correction for local noon = 729'. 1 X 68 -r-
(53 1/3 X 60) = 15'.5, subtracdve. (The Moon's daily modon for the day will be shown to be 729'. 1
under verse 13.)
.-. T h e true M o o n required = ra.4-13-29.9 - 15'.5 = ra.4-13-14.4.

T h e instrucdon is explained thus: T h e author takes it that for the region of Ujjain the length of
the latitude circle is 3200 yojanas. T h e Sun, in its apparent diurnal motion westward goes once
r o u n d the circle i n 60 nddikds, crossing all the meridians on the earth. There are thus 3200 -H 60 =
53 1/3 yojanas for one nddi, and a place east by this distance has its meridian crossed by the Sun, i.e.
its noon earlier by one nddi, and west, later. The modon for this time is calculated by the proportion, 60
nddis: daily motion :: the nddis got: the motion for the same. That the motion is deductive if the noon is
earlier, and vice versa is plain. (This is for direct motion, the Sun and the Moon alone being considered
here. If the daily motion is retrograde, as is possible i n the case of the star-planets, it is obvious that
the subtraction and addition have to be reversed.)

But it is to be noted that in the Ardhardtrika of Aryabhata and in the Khandakhddyaka, the diameter
of the earth is given as 1600yo;ana5 from which the equatorial circumference got is 5027 yojanas.
Therefore the Original Saura must have given the same values. T h e Modem Sdrya Siddhdnta, and th
Siddhdntas that follow it also give the same. F r o m this the latitude circle at or near Ujjain should be
given according to them as 5027 cos 24 = 4600 yojanas. According to the Aryabhatiya, which uses a
yojana measure one and a half times that of Saura etc., the equatorial circumference would be 3300
yojanas. F r o m this, it is 14 latitude circle that would be 3200yojanas, and not Ujjain latitude circle.
Why should the author use the yojana measure of the Aryabhatiya instead of that of the Saura, and
in that why should he use the yojanas o f the 14 latitude circle instead of the Ujjain (24) latitude
circle seems inexplicable.

[Tfe9#nWzr^:]

Mean motion of the Sun and the Moon

11. T h e m e a n d a i l y m o t i o n o f the M o o n is 7 9 0 ' 34", a n d that o f the S u n is 5 9 '
8".

These can be derived from the mean motions o f the Sun and the M o o n given in the first and
second verses. In the former it is said that in 2,92,207 days there are 800 revolutions of the Sun.
.-. 800 revolutions 2,92,207 = 59' 8", the motion for one day. In the latter, we have that there are
9,00,000 revolutions of the M o o n i n 2,45,89,506 days. .-. the motion per day = 9,00,000 revolu-
tions -r- 2,45,89,506 = 790' 3 4 " . T h e correction in verse 4 is too small per day to consider.

11a. A . B . ^ ( A . ^ ) ^kl^dT<l:
b. B.fti^lfefaikl'hl^^: d. B.^m^^Hlvi):
I X . 14 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 211

Motion of Moon's anomaly

12. T h e d a i l y m o t i o n o f the M o o n ' s a p o g e e is 6 2/3 m i n u t e s . T h e M o o n ' s
m e a n daily m o t i o n less the m o t i o n o f the a p o g e e is the d a i l y m o t i o n o f the
M o o n ' s (mean) a n o m a l y . T h e t r u e daily m o t i o n is to be f o u n d u s i n g this
motion of anomaly.
We get that the daily modon of the Moon's anomaly is 790' .34" - 6'. 40" = 783'.54". T h e Sun's
mean daily motion itself is the motion of its anomaly, since its apogee has no motion according to
this Saura, as we have already said. Even i f motion is taken into account, it is so small that it is prac-
tically nothing per day.

T h e rule to get the daily motion of Moon's anomaly is explained thus: F r o m verse 3 above, we
see that there are 900 revolutions of Moon's apogee i n 29,08,789 days..-. i n one day, the motion is
900 revolutions -r- 29,08,789 = 6' 41". T h e correction per day is practically nothing and so left out.
T h e author gives it as 6' 40", for convenience of expression, since the 1' left out will not affect the
result materially. Since anomaly is mean longitude minus longitude o f apogee, the motion of
anomaly is mean motion minus motion of apogee, for it is the daily motions that add up to form the
longitude.

True motion of Sun and Moon

13. T h e d a i l y m o t i o n o f a n o m a l y s h o u l d be m u l t i p l i e d by the c u r r e n t sine-
i n t e r v a l a n d d i v i d e d by 2 2 5 . T h i s s h o u l d be r e d u c e d to the e p i c y c l e , i.e.
m u l t i p l i e d by the degrees o f epicycle a n d d i v i d e d by 3 6 0 . T h e c h a n g e i n sine
E q . C , is got. Its arc s h o u l d be subtracted f r o m the m e a n d a i l y m o t i o n , i f the
a n o m a l y falls w i t h i n rdsis 9 to 3, a n d a d d e d i f it falls w i t h i n rdsis 3 to 9.

14. T h i s is the t r u e m o t i o n p e r day, for the m o m e n t (for w h i c h the a n o m a l y

is taken.) T h e t r u e d a i l y m o t i o n i n the case o f the M o o n is got by s u b t r a c t i n g
12a. B.RlRj^iilll 13a. C.^-i;^H<'j("ldl:; D.^l|iluidl
b. A.^ST%n b. B . ^ 3 o i t ^ A.qIWRT:; B . C . D . * i I F ! T
d. B . ' ^ J S ^ a r ^ ^ ; A . s m ^ d. Bl.3.'^'
212 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.14

the p r e v i o u s day's t r u e M o o n f r o m the g i v e n day's t r u e m o o n . T h e d a i l y m e a n

m o t i o n , m u l t i p l i e d by 120' a n d d i v i d e d by the m o m e n t a r y m o t i o n p e r day is
the r a d i u s vector at the m o m e n t .

The following is given here:-

(A) (i) T h e daily change i n sine E q . C . for short interval = the interval i n the tabular sine of
anomaly current X daily motion of mean anomaly x degrees of epicycle ^ (225 X 360).

(ii) T h e daily change i n E q . C . i n minutes of arc = (i) X 3438 120. (since the sine is small and
there is n o difference between sine and arc).
It should be noted here that it is possible to simplify the above work, because the daily anomaly
and the degrees of epicycle are fixed for each body, and the rest are constants. Only the interval
in the tabular sine of anomaly current varies. F o r instance, the Moon's daily motion of anomaly is
783'.9, and epicycle 31. Therefore, the daily change i n E q . C . i n minutes o f arc

= the interval i n the tabular sine of anomaly current X 783.9 X 31 X 3438 ^ (225 X 360 X 120)
= described interval X 8.6.

For the S u n it is, interval i n the tabular sine of anomaly current x 59.1 x 14 x 3438 (225 X
360 X 120) = interval etc X .29.

(ii) T h e daily rate of true motion for the moment = mean daily motion (ii) (additive if anomaly
is from rasis 3 to 9 and subtractive i f from 9 to 3.)

(B) T h e true daily motion = the given day's true longitude the previous day's true longitude.
(C) T h e radius vector at the moment = 120 X mean daily m o d o n the daily rate of true motion
for the moment.

The sine interval of anomaly used in computing the true M o o n or Sun for noon can easily be
used to find the daily rate for the noon i n question. It is this that should b^ used for finding the
motion during the interval between mean and true noons, as we have done already, and in correcting
for longitude. In eclipses also this true daily rate with radius vector, for the moment of syzygies
should be used, because this will give the circumstances accurately. T h i s seems to be the author's
idea i n giving these here. As for the Sun, there is no distinction either i n the rate or radius vector
between those for the day or for the moment. This is indicated by making the distinction i n the case
of the M o o n alone, using the expression sasivisesdt.

Example 8. For the Ujjain true noon of examples 5 and 6,findthe true motion (a) for the Moon (b)
Sun.

(a) In example 6, the Bhuja, i.e. sin of Moon's anomaly got is ra.0-24-7.5. Sines being given for
every 3 3/4 degrees, the current sine interval is the seventh, equal to 7' 9".
.-. B y (A ii), the daily change i n E q . C . = 7' 9" X 8.6 = 61 '.5

By (A iii), the true motion for the said noon = 790'.6 - 61'.5 = 729'. 1, (subtraction since
anomaly is between rd. 9 to 3).

14a-b. A . B . C . D . ? ! ^
b. A . B 2 . ' ^ ; B l . 2 . * ^ ; C . D . T l I M d. B1.2.lfTf) A . B 1 . 2 f ^ : ; B3.l5rII:
IX.15 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 213

(b) T h e Bhuja or Sun's anomaly in example 5 is rd. 1-14-44.3. T h e current interval, 12th. is 5' 44".

.-. by (A ii), the daily change i n E q . C . = .5' 44" X .29 = 1' .7. B y (A iii), the true motion = 59'. 1 -
1 '.7 = 57'.4, (subtraction since anomaly is between rd. 9 and 3).

Example 9. For the noon of example 8, find the Moon's radius vector.

By (C), the radius vector required = 120' x 790'.6-f- 729'.1 = 130'.1.

T h e following is the explanation of the rules: T h e true modon d u r i n g any interval between two
moments is the difference between the true longitudes of the moments. T h e shorter this interval,
the more accurate is the motion. In the rule, all factors excepting the sine of anomaly are constants.
Therefore the accuracy of the motion depends on the sine of anomaly only. In the case of the
M o o n , the motion of the anomaly being rapid, there is significant difference i n the sine from time
to time even within the day, for four or even five sine intervals pass i n a day, with the result that the
motion is got differently for different times. So the motion has got to be found for shorter periods
like theydma i n the day, and this is the motion for the time being. For every 225' of anomaly there
is one sine interval. So, d u r i n g the time for which the anomaly interval is current, the change i n sine
Eq.C. is caused by the corresponding sine interval current. Therefore, the change in sine E q . C . is
got by multiplying the current sine interval by the degrees of epicycle, and dividing by 360, for the
period covered by the corresponding anomaly interval of 225'. F r o m the change i n sine E q . C . the
change in Eq.C. is got in minutes (by multiplying by 3438 and dividing by 120, as we have done).
This change is for the time to which the current 225' interval of anomaly corresponds. It is
converted into the change per day by multiplying by the daily motion of anomaly i n minutes and
dividing by 225. This is applied to the mean daily motion to get the daily rate.

Now, we know that the E q . C . is zero when the anomaly is zero, that it is negative and increases
numerically in the first quadrant of anomaly, i.e. upto 3 rdsis, then decreases numerically, still being
negative, to the end of the second quadrant, i.e. upto 6 rdsis where the value becomes zero again,
then in the third quadrant it is positive and increases to a m a x i m u m at 9 rdsis and then decreases
i n the fourth quadrant to zero at the end o f 12 rdsis or zero. F r o m this it can be seen that the E q . C .
goes o n decreasing as the anomaly passes from 9 rdsit to 3 rdsis i.e. the change is negative or subtrac-
tive, and goes on increasing as the anomaly passes from 3 rdsis to 9 rdsis, i.e. the change is positive
or additive, as instructed by the text. N o harm will ensue from the instruction to multiply and divide
the sine interval first and then reduce it to the epicycle, since the sine is small. It is to be noted well
that the motion per day found is not actually the motion i n the day, but only the rate d u r i n g the
short interval or moment taken i n the day. T h a t is why the motion for the day is given by a separate
rule, for the M o o n . In the case of the Sun there is no distinction between the two, since the daily
motion of the anomaly is small. T h e rule for the radius vector has been explained already when
dealing with the Romaka.
214 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.15

Kak$a of the Sun and the Moon

15. T h e Sun's r a d i u s vector m u l t i p H e d by 5 3 4 7 a n d d i v i d e d by 4 0 is called its
kaksd. T h e M o o n ' s r a d i u s v e c t o r m u l t i p l i e d b y 10 is its kaksd.

It is to be noted that the kaksa obtained here, depending as it does on the radius vector is also for
the moment taken and its neighbourhood. W e can also derive it directly from the daily rate of
motion obtained from verses 3-14, above. T h u s :
(a) The Sun's kaksd = Sun'si radius vector x 5347/40 = (120 x 59.13 ^ Sun's daily rate of motion)
X 5347/40 = 9,48,558 Sun's daily rate of modon.

(b) T h e Moon's kaksd = Moon's radius vector x 10 = (120 x 790.56 Moon's daily rate of
motion) X 10 = 9,48,680 H- Moon's daily rate of motion.

Example 10. Pudukkottai (Lat.10 24'), on a particular day, new moon falls at nd.20-40 after sunris
that moment, the longitude of the sun the longitude of the Moon = rd.2-0-0. The Rdhu-head, at tha
rd. 7-29-24. The Sun's rate of motion for the time is 57' per day and the Moon's 810'. The daytime is nd
20. Compute the solar eclipse occurring.

For this, the kaksd is found first:

(a) T h e Sun's Kaksd for the time = 9,48,558 H- 57 = 16,641
(b) T h e Moon's for the time = 9,48,680 H- 810 = 1171.2

T h e author does not use the word kaksd here i n its usual sense of orbit, but for the actual distance
reduced by some factor, for the orbit is constant, while what we get here is a quantity varying with
the rate of motion. Since only the proportion o f the distances of the Sun and the M o o n from the
earth is significant, the reduction will not cause any error. T h a t is why, the wordyo;aa giving the
measure o f distance, is not used here.

Now, the mean kaksd, derived trom the mean radius vector, 120', is for the Sun, 120 X 5347 H- 40 =
16,041. For the M o o n it is 120 X 10 = 1200. These obviously are the respective reduced mean dis-
tances from the earth. I n the Original Saura the Sun's orbit is given as 6,89,358 yojanas, and the
Moon's 51,566 yojanas, as we learn from the Ardhardtrika system etc. Since the mean distances are
proportionate to the orbits etc, i f the Moon's orbit, 51,566, is reduced to 1200 as here, the Sun's
orbit, by the same factor, must be reduced to, 6,89,358 X 1200 -f- 51566 = 16,042. T h i s agrees very
closely with 16,041 got above. T h e difference of one may be due to giving the multiplier correct to
the nearest whole number, as 5347. Further, the orbits, which is the same for our present purpose
as saying distances, are inversely proportionate to the yuga cycles given i n the ^astras. Therefore,
from the Saura cycles of Sun and M o o n i n 1.14, by the proportion 1,80,000:24,06,389:: 1200:x, we
get 16,042 for X , the Sun's reduced mean distance, when the Moon's is 1200.

This agreement is the justificadon for our correcting the reading drighna into digghna. B u t T S
correct it into gnighna. Also, they correct khar into khdrkn though there is the alternate reading
khakrta fitting correcdy i n the rule and adopted by us. B y their corrections the Sun's mean kaksd
will be 5347 and the Moon's 360. T h u s the Sun's kaksd becomes, 5347/360 ( = 14.85) times the

15a. A . ^ b. A . IslJlj'Hll^d); C.M^n^IcTt

B 3 . Has an unnecessary gap after c. B . ^ ^ . A.^OTt; B . ^
B 1.2. do not have it. d. A.B.fSJT:; C . t W :
IX.16 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 215

Moon's, against the fact that it is only 13.37 times from the Sastras, and what they give is equal to
saying that there are 14.85 revolutions of the M o o n in the year for the kaksds vary directly as the
periods of revolution, i.e. inversely as the number of cycles i n a given period. We shall also see what
havoc their wrong corrections play i n the angular diameters following.

Measure of the orbs

16. D i v i d e 5,14,787 by the Sun's kaksd, a n d 3 8 , 6 4 0 by the M o o n ' s to get the
respective a n g u l a r d i a m e t e r s i n m i n u t e s at the t i m e .

It is to be noted that the angular diameters (of the orbs of the Sun and Moon) are always given
in minutes by our Sastras. Thus,

(a) T h e Sun's angular diameter in minutes = 5,14,787/Sun's kaksd.

(b) T h e Moon's angular diameter in minutes = 38,640/Moon's kaksd.
Example 11. To continue the problem of example 10, find the angular diameters of the Sun and Moon fo
the time given.
(a) T h e Sim's angular diameter = 5,14,787' - 16,641 = 3 r . O .
(b) T h e Moon's angular diameter = 38,640' -f- 1171.2 = 33'.0.
T h e derivation of the rules for the angular diameters is as explained below. T h e angle formed
at the eye by the diameter of the orbs of the Sun and the M o o n is their angular diameter and given
in minutes. We all know from experience that the nearer the orbs, i.e. the lesser the radius vector
(given myojanas), the greater is the angle, and the farther away is the orb, i.e. the greater the radius
vector, the lesser is the angle. T h u s the angle and the radius vector are in inverse ratio, as also the
kaksd which is directly proportionate to the radius vector. So we have:

Sine angle at the eye = 120 X diameter i n yojanas the radius vector in yojanas.
T h e angular diameter in minutes = 3438 X 120 X diameter in yq/awas (radius vector inyq;anas
X 120.)
Here, the author has reduced the diameter i n yojanas by the same factor used i n verse 15 to
reduce the radius vector i n yojanas to the kaksd, and multiplying by 3438, as explained already, to
convert the sine into minutes, he has given 5,14,787 for the Sun, and 38,640 for the M o o n . T h e
mean kaksd of the Sun derived by us i n the explanations is 16,042. D i v i d i n g 5,14,787 by 16,042, we
have the Sun's mean angular diameter, 32'. 1, and the Moon's is 38,640 ^ 1200 = 32'.2.

16a. A.B1.2.^Q^!M15; C.D.^aapgjig^;

(D.^) c. B 2 . d ^ l l c l * ; B1.2.
b. B . ^ a ^ ; A.B.C.om^f; C.1!7FII: B 2 . Unnecessary gap after of?lf?H:
216 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.18

T h e angular diameters derived from the Original Saura (and the modern SUrya
Siddhdnta) are 32'.3 and 32'.0, respecdvely. T h o u g h the difference is small, we must investigate
why there is a difference at all. T h e error is about 160th part of itself in each case. Either the author
has taken values slightly different from those of the Original to derive the numbers here, or there
are some errors i n the readings here.
N o w for the readings. T h e first foot o f the verse is i n excess by one mdtrd. There are eight digits
in the number, khakhavasu-khamumndravisaydh, though there should be only six digits. So we ha
corrected khakhavasukha into svaravasu following the form of the letters also. T S correct it
khavasukha etc., giving seven places i n the number, as 5147080. By this, the dividend has become
ten times what it actually is. Since they give the divisor, viz. the Sun's kaksd, as one third of the actual,
(as seen already), they have made the angular diameter in minutes, thirty times the actual. Unaware
of the mistakes they have made they wonder why the angular diameter comes thirty times the
actual, and make the following curious comment: T h e correct angular diameters can be got only
by dividing what we get here by 30. B u t the author does not say anything about dividing by thirty.
Perhaps i n his days there was the well-known understanding that what is got is to be divided by 30
to get the angular diameter. T h a t is why, we surmise, the author has not instructed the division by
30 !! (vide page 50 of the Sanskrit commentary.) A l l this is the result of the errors i n their correction
of the readings. N P too have sensed the error here and emend the expressions as khavasukha
munlnduvisaydh (5,17,080), with the result that "the radius of the Sun is about four times the radius
of the earth, the radius o f the M o o n about one third" (pt. 11, p.73).

In the same way, there is one mdtrd less i n the second foot. Therefore, supplying the lost letter
we have read khakrtartusugandh as khakrtartuvasuguridh. N P too, do the same. B y this we get the
places required i n the dividend. B u t T S read it as khakrtartusuraguridh, thus making the dividen
nine times what it is. T h e y have already made the divisor, the moon's kaksa, three tenths of what the
author has said it is. B y this the angular diameter o f the M o o n also has been made thirty times the
real value, by them, again rousing their wonder in the manner mentioned before.

Sin Zenith Distance of Meridian pt.

17. F i n d the i n t e r v a l b e t w e e n m i d d a y a n d the m o m e n t o f new m o o n . I f the
S u n is east o f the m e r i d i a n (i.e. i f n e w m o o n falls i n the f o r e n o o n ) , find the
degrees o f r i g h t a s c e n s i o n c o r r e s p o n d i n g to this t i m e u s i n g the ascensional
differences o f z e r o l a t i t u d e , (lankodayamdna.), b a c k w a r d s f r o m the S u n .
S u b t r a c t these degrees f r o m the S u n ( = M o o n ) o f the m o m e n t o f n e w m o o n .
I f the S u n is west o f the m e r i d i a n , (i.e. i f n e w m o o n is i n the afternoon), find
the degrees c o r r e s p o n d i n g to the i n t e r v a l c o u n t i n g f o r w a r d f r o m the S u n ,
a n d a d d to S u n ( = M o o n ) .
IX.18 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 217

18. T h e m e r i d i a n p o i n t o f the e c l i p t i c (madhyalagnam) is got. F i n d its d e c l i n a -

t i o n , n o r t h o r s o u t h . I f n o r t h , find the d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n the d e c l i n a t i o n a n d
the latitude o f the place. I f s o u t h , a d d t h e m . T h e sine o f the result is c a l l e d
madhyajyd, i.e. s i n z e n i t h distance o f the p o i n t .

T h e madhyajyd is got thus:

(i) Interval between noon and new moon = time of noon ~ time of new moon.

(ii) T h e degrees of rise of the ecliptic, backward or forward from the Sun, using the corresponding
ascensional differences of zero latitude, for the interval in (i) in the forenoon or afternoon respectively
is to be found.
(iii) (Longitude of) meridian ecliptic point = T h e Sun (or Moon) at new moon qp (ii), ( for fore-
noon, + for afternoon).

(iv) T h e declination north or south o f (iii) is to be found.

(v) Sine zenith distance o f m.e.p. i n (iii) = sine (declination found i n (iv) + latitude), (-I- i f the
declination is south, and the sine found is directed south, ~ i f the declination is north, and the sine
is directed north or south according as the declination or the latitude is greater.)

Example 12. To continue example 10 using the times given there.

(i) Interval between noon and new m o o n = na.20-40 - na. 15-40 = 5 na., afternoon.

(ii) Given, Sun = M o o n = rd. 2-0-0, at new moon. Forward counting is to be done (because after-
noon) from the first point of Gemini where the Sun is. F o r successive 10 of rise, the times taken are,
in vinddis, 105.4, 107.6, 108.8, 108.8. F o r the interval, of 300 vinddis = 105.4 4- 107.6 -I- 87, there
are 10 4- 10 -I- 8 ( = 10 x 87 -f- 108.8) = 28.
(iii) A d d i n g , the meridian ecliptic point = ra.2-0-0 -I- 28 = m.2-28-0.

(iv) T h e declination o f m.e.p. is 23 5 8 ' N .

(v) Sine zenith distance o f m.e.p. = sine (23 58' - 10 24') = sine 13 34' = 28' 9", north (-.
declination is greater).
It has been stated by us, above, i n the context of the computation o f the solar eclipse according
to the Paulina, that i n order to get the parallaxes i n longitude and latitude, the nonagesimai and the
sine and cosine of its zenith distance, (i.e. drgjyd and Sanku), are to be found. In the Saura, a diffe-
rent method is given to get the sine o f the zenith distance of the nonagesimai (z.d.n.) for which the
m.e.p. and the sine o f its zenith distance are necessary, and given here.

It has been said that the m.e.p. is the point o f intersection o f the meridian (NZS i n the fig.) and
the ecliptic ( O r O ' i n fig.) as M i n fig. 5 is the position of the Sun at new moon, (occurring i n the

17a. D.TWI^dlMd. B . dlMddl?

b. A.'Vm^; B1.2.T?RRH; B S . " ! ? ^ ^ ; 18b. B 1 . 3 . c W r a
c. B 1 . 3 . % T
D.T=TTroTRg. B.ilTdmVII: d. A.'^n^l+ld'HSJlpT"; Bi.2.'r^^T#r<>;
d. B3.^^'?ra]f*T<';
218 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.19

afternoon in the example given to illustrate which the figure is drawn). H Q is the right ascension
corresponding to the segment o f the ecliptic s M , which is found from the time lo or from noon, by
using the ascensional differences at the equator. (In the figure the time is afternoon.) sr is the
longitude of the Sun at new moon. M r the longitude of m.e.p. = sr s M , as stated for afternoon.
Clearly, for forenoon, s being east of M , M r = sr + Ms, as instructed.

M Q i s the declinadon of M , (north in the fig.) Z Q i s the latitude. M Z is the zenith distance. M Z
= M Q Z Q (in the fig.), i.e. when north declination is greater than the latitude, the latitude is
subtracted from it, and the zenith distance is north. If M had been between Z and Q , then the north
declination would be less than the latitude, and M Z would be equal to Z Q M Q , and south. In the
case when M is south of Q?.^. when the declination of M is south, it is clear that the zenith distance,
M Z = M Q + Q Z , and it is south, as stated.

It is to bring in all the above three cases that we interpreted aksnviyuta in two ways, 'subtracting
the ladtude', and 'subtracdng from the ladtude'. But T S and N P take only the latter case, with the
result that the former case is shut off. In verse 17, N P has corrected madhydrka as madhydhna, which
is not essendal. T h e defect in the second quarter of verse 17 has been rectified here by the addition
of the letter ksa as ranak(sa)rdsyudgamaih, anaksa meaning niraksa or zero latitude, to give the sen
required here. T S emends it as niraksa i n the same sense and N P as rantarardsyudgamaih.
IX.2() IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 219

D|-k$epa of the Sun

19. F i n d the sine o f the l o n g i t u d e o f the O r i e n t E c l i p t i c P o i n t (o.e.p.) at n e w
m o o n , m u l t i p l y by the sine o f m a x i m u m d e c l i n a t i o n (of the S u n , 4 8 ' 48") a n d
d i v i d e by the sine o f the c o l a u t u d e . ( T h i s is sine a m p l i t u d e o f o.e.p., c a l l e d
Udayajyd.) M u l t i p l y this b y the sine o f the z e n i t h distance (z.d.) o f m . e . p .
already f o u n d , a n d d i v i d e b y 1 2 0 ' . S q u a r e the result, a n d subtract f r o m the
s q u a r e o f the sine z . d . o f the m . e . p .

2 0 . Set the r e m a i n d e r i n two places. I n o n e place, find its s q u a r e root. T h i s

is the sine o f the z e n i t h distance o f the n o n a g e s i m a i (z.d. o f n.) c a l l e d the Sun's
drk-ksepa. Keep this safe aside for future work.

T h e following is to be done:

(i) Using the vinddis of ascensional differences of the place, the o.e.p. at new moon is to be
found.

(ii) Sine amplitude of o.e.p. = sine z.d. of m.e.p. X 48' 48" -r-sine colatitude.

(iii) Sine (m.e.p. ~ nonagesimai) = sin z.d. of m.e.p. (ii) 120.

(iv) Square o f sine (z.d. o f n) = (sine z.d. o f m.e.p.)^ (iii)^.
(v) Sine z.d. of n = V (iv).
Example 13. Continue example 10, given already lat = 10 24' and new moon is at na. 20-40.

(i) Let us take it that using the ascensional differences of the place (given by chap.IV), the o.e.p.
found isra.5-27-56.

(ii) Sine amplitude of o.e.p. = sine ra. 5-27-56 X 48' 48" H- sin (90 - 10 24')
= sin 2 4" X 48' 4 8 " ^ sin 79 36'

= 4' 20" X 48' 48" ^ 118'.0 = 1' 48".

(iii) Sine (m.e.p. ~ n) = 28' 9" X 1' 48" 120 = 25".

(iv) Sin^ (z.d. of n) = (28' 9")^ - (25" f = 792'.25.

(v) Sin (z.d. of n) = V 792.25 = 28' 9".

19a. A.B.ft<riJll*ll b. B . M ; C.D.fW. A.B.D.W^^n; C . ^ s f q .

b. A . T O M ; B 3 . ^ T O A.B.oT)^
c. B.'TKTi^sqi?}^ c. A.^^<TR^; B . i ^ q F ^
20a. BL^crfcT"; B2.3.c#. D . M d. B 2 . i T S 1 ^ ^ i |
 220 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.21

T h e following is the explanation of the rule: See fig. 2. There, n is the nonagesimai, i.e. o.e.p.
. minus three rdsis. Z is the zenith, n.z is the zenith distance of n, and sine nz, called the 'Sun's drk-ksepa
is wanted here, to get the Moon's parallax i n latitude. T h i s Siddhdnta takes the spherical triangle Z
n M , right angled at n, to be approximately equal to a plane right-angled triangle, with the sines of
the arcs as straight lines and fmds the drk-kssepa hy, (sinezn)^ = (sine MZ)" - (sinenM)- = sin^z.d. of
m.e.p. - sin^ (m.e.p. ~ n ) . (The correct method has already been expounded by us i n C h a p . V I ,
when dealing with the solar eclipse according to the Paulisa.) Sin (z.d. of M.e.p.) has been got
already. T h e other quandty required, viz. sin (M.e.p. ~ n), is got by the well-known formulae relating
to spherical right angled triangles, (already given by us), sin (M.e.p. ~ n) = sin (z.d. o f M.e.p.) Xsin
M Z n -r- 120'. But, M Z n = O ' Z W = O Z E , which is the amplitude of the o.e.p. Its sine, Udayd, given
here = the declination of the o.e.p. X 120' + sine colatitude = sin longitude o f o.e.p. X 48' 48"
sin colatitude, as given i n chap.IV.

Gnomon
2 1 . S u b t r a c t f r o m 14,400, the square o f sin z . d . o f n , (kept u n u s e d i n the
o t h e r place i n the p r e v i o u s w o r k ) , a n d f i n d its square-root. M u l t i p l y this by
the sine o f the distance b e t w e e n the S u n a n d the o.e.p., a n d d i v i d e by 120'.
T h e result, w h i c h is the sine o f the S u n ' s a l t i t u d e , is c a l l e d ^afiku, i.e. the Sun's
^anku.
.-.^anku = V 14,400 - sin'' (z.d. of n) X sin (o.e.p. ~ sun) 120'. [sin^ (z.d. of n) has already been
got, and kept apart]
Example 14. To complete example 10.
F r o m Ex.13, by (i), o.e.p. = rd. 5-27-56, and by (iii), sin^ (z.d. of n) = 792.25, from Ex.10, Sun =
rd. 2-0-0.

^anku = V 14,400 - 792.25 X sin {rd. 5-27-26 - rd. 2-0-0) ^ 120'

= 116' 39" X sin {rd. 3-27-26) H- 120'
= 116' 39" X 106' 7" -r 120' = 103' 10".

T h e rule is derived as follows: F r o m fig. 2 it can be seen that the Sun's altitude is 90 Zs.

.-. ^annku = Sine Sun's altitude = Cos Zs = Cos Z W x Cos ns 120' (by the well-known formula,
already given) = V radius'' sin^ Ln x sin Os -r- 120', (. ns is os - 90). sin Zn is sine z.d. of n
already found, and its square has already been got and kept apart for use here.

.-. ^afiku = V 14,400 - sin^ z.d. of n X sin (o.e. P ~ sun) 120' as given by the author.

21a. A . ^ ^ ; B . ^ ^ . B . f f c T A . ^ c. B . ^
b. A.<:IMfsldl^. A.oW^; B.o^f^ d. B . ^ . A . & > ^ X # . B.Bfsqls^cI
1X.23 iX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R ECLIPSE 221

[rifiaRmNT:]

Parallax-corrected New Moon

2 2 - 2 3 . Subtract the square o f the Sun's sanku got above f r o m 14,400. F r o m
the r e m a i n d e r subtract the square o f the S u n ' s drk-ksepa kept apart i n the
previous work and find its square root, (technically called Drggati). M u l d p l y this by
18 and divide by each of the kaksds of the Sun and the M o o n . Find the respective arcs
(in minutes) and get their difference. Treat this as the minutes of tithi and find the
tithi-nddikds for this. Subtract the nddikds from the time of new moon if forenoon, and
add, if afternoon. T h e parallax-corrected new moon (p.c.n.) is got. Repeat the oper-
ation of finding the p.c.n., dll there is no difference (in dme) i n two successive opera-
tions. This is the p.c.n. (to be used i n the subsequent work).

T h o u g h there is no doubt about the idea here, it is difficult to get the idea from the words used,
on account of several corrupt readings. In verse 22, a word is broken at the end o f the third foot,
and there are 18 mdtrds i n the fourth, sinning against the A r y a metre. In the same verse, i n the sec-
ond foot N P has emended viUesdt into visesitdt against the manuscript readings, an emendation that
is not needed. In the 23rd verse, evam mrgyah kdlah is a repetition. T S have succumbed to this diffi-
culty and give the wrong interpretadon that the difference between 14,400 and the square of the
sanku, should be subtracted from the square of the drk-ksepa, unaware that this is impossible since
the latter would always be less than the former. We shall show this i n the explanadon. A s for calling
the Sun's sanku as 'digits oi sanku' we have seen it being technically called so i n chap. I V .

The method enunciated here is as follows:

(i) Drggati = Vl4,400 = sanku^ drk-ksepa-.

(ii) (a) Sin Sun's parallax i n long. = 18 x (i) ^ Sun's kaksd
(b) Sin Moon's parallax in long. = 18 X (i) Moon's kaksd.

From the two sines, the arcs should be obtained i n minutes. T h e Moon's minus the Sun's parallax
is the (effective) parallax i n longitude.

22a. B.^1%?# Al.^W^lt

b. A.i^ldf !^llHd>l; B.!^ldd!<llHTl>l ( B 2 . T ^ ; 23a. A.ft?W%irf; B.C.tg^tqiMI
B3.ci^) b. A.f!T82T#TiRT:; D.f?r^^fdWH:;
D.1^[cT]l^ C.f?r^-dWWd:; D . ^ a q ^ S ^ : ^ :
c. A.BI.2.tMcI d. A.^^?1^; B.-a?;#
d. A l . B . ^ ^ ^ f e ' H M B.-illcKci^bi:
222 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.23

(iii) Nadis of parallax = the parallax in longitude found in (ii) X 60 ^ the motion of the tithi per
day. Subtracting the nddis from new moon in the forenoon, and adding in the afternoon, the p.c.n.
is got. F i n d i n g the m.e.p. etc. of the p.c.n., the work should be repeated upto getdng the nddis in
(iii). These nddis are to be subtracted or added to the original new noon. A better p.c.n. is got. Using
this dme the work may be further repeated for a sdll better approximation.

Example 15. To continue Ex. 10

In the last example the saiiku got is 103' 10". In E x . 10, the modon per day of the Sun and the
M o o n found are 5 7 ' a n d 810", the Sun's fajfoa found is 16,641 and the Moon's 1171.2. T h e square
of the drk-ksepa kept apart, is 792.25. F r o m these:
(i) Drggati = V 14,400 - (103 1/6)^' - 792:25 = 54' 27".

(ii) (a) Sine Sun's par. i n long. = 18 X 54' 27" H- 16,641 = 3".6.

(b) Sine Moon's par. i n long. = 18 x 54' 27" 1171.2 = 50".2.

T h e Sun's parallax is arc of 3".6 = 1 '.7.

T h e Moon's parallax is arc of 50".2 = 24'.0.

T h e parallax i n longitude = 24'.0 - 1'.7 = 22'.3.

(iii) Nddis of pur. = 22'.3 x 60 (810' - 57') = 1-47.

Since new moon is afternoon, adding to the time of new moon, the p.c.n. = nd. 20-40 -I- na. 1-47
= na. 22-27.

We shall repeat the operation for a better approximation. (The motions of the Sun and M o o n
per day, and their kaksds need not be done again.)

T h e nddis of the p.c.n. after midday = 22-27 15-40 = 6-47 = 407 vinddis. T h e right ascension
corresponding to the interval of 407 vinddis, using the ascensional differences of zero latitude = 10
-I- 10 + 10 -I- 10 x 85.2 108.8 (for vinddis 105.4 + 107.6 -t- 108.8 -I- 85.2) = 37 50', after
the Sun ( = ra. 2-0-2, 2' more for the 2 nddis later)..-. T h e m.e.p. = rd. 2-0-2 + rd. 1-7-50 = ra. 3-7-52.
T h e declination of m.e.p. = 23 46' north. T h e zenith distance of the point = 23 46' - 10 24' =
13 22', north. Sine z.d. o f m.e.p. = 27' 44" . T h e o.e.p. at p.c.n. = ra.6-8-48 (using as before the
ascensional differences of 10 24'). Since amplitude of the point = 7' 34". Sine (m.e.p. ~ n) = 27' 44"
X 7'34"-^ 120 = 1'45". Sine ^ (z.d. ofn) = (27'44")^ - ( 1 ' 4 5 " )^ = 765.89.

Sine (z.d. ofn) = 27'40".

^anku = V 14,400 - 765.89 X sine (ra.4-8-46) ^ 120' = 9 1 ' 1".

Drggati = V 1 4 , 4 0 0 - ( 9 1 ' 1")=^ - 765.89 = 73' 9".

Sine Sun's par. i n long. = 18 x 73' 9" - 16,641 = 4".8. Parallax = 2'.2.
Sine Moon's par. i n long = 18 X 73' 9" H- 1171.2 = 1' 7".5. Parallax = 32'.2.
Relative parallax = 30'.0.
Nddis of parallax = 30' X 60 753' = nd.2-23.

A d d i n g to time of new moon, the closer p.c.n. = na.20-40 -I- wa.2-23 = nd.2S-S.
IX.24 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 223

Repeating the work, the p.c.n. got will be about na. 23-20.

T h e rule is thus explained: It has been shown i n the context o f the Paulisa solar eclipse that the
relative total parallax is obtained by multiplying the relative horizontal parallax (sr) by sine zenith
distance of the Sun (drgjyd) and dividing by the radius. In this Siddhdnta, the horizontal parallaxes
of the Sun and the M o o n are got separately by dividing by their distances for the sake of exactness.
But the Sun's drgjya is used for the M o o n too, since the difference is very small i n the neighbour-
hood of new moon, with the solar eclipse occurring. In fig. 2, drgjya = sin Zs, and the relative
parallax = ss'. Its projection on the ecliptic, si, is the relative parallax i n longitude, by which (Moon
Sun) has got to be increased or decreased to get their apparent difference i n longitude. In the
figure, since s is west of n, it is subtractive, and p.c.n. is later, and therefore the nddis of parallax are
additive. (When the Sun is east of n and parallax is additive, clearly the nddis are subtractive.) Since
(Moon Sun) is tithi element, the relative parallax is treated like tithi, and multiplied by 60 and
divided by the daily motion to get the nddis o f parallax.

Now, si is found thus i n this Siddhdnta: sl^ = ss'^ - s'F. (. the triangle ss'l is right-angled at 1, and
so small that it may be considered plane.)

= ss'^ - s s ' l s i n ' 1 ss'

= ss'^ - ss'^.sin'Zn s i n ' Zs (. triangle Zns is right angled at n)
drgjya^ -irr^ s i n ' (z.d. of n) (. ss' =irr X drgjya = sin zs, and Z n is the z.d. o f n )

= 11^ (radius' $anku^ s i n ' z.d. of n). (drgjya^ = radius' - iahku^)

..sl'= BTV 120' - sanku' - sm' z.d. o f n

=i7r X drggati, as given

B u t . m = the Moon's horizontal parallax - the Sun's horizontal parallax. .-. the drggati is
multiplied by each and then subtracted.

It has been said already, i n previous two solar eclipse contexts, that the sine of the horizontal
parallax is obtained by dividing the earth's radius by the respective distance. Since the author uses
as the divisor not the actual distance but the respective distance divided by 43, the earth's radius also
has to be taken divided by 43. T h e author takes 788yojanas as the earth's radius, adopting the value
of the Aryabhatiya and multiplying it by 3/2 to express it i n the yojana measure of the Ardhardtrika etc.
systems. (These systems give the earth's radius as 800yojanas.) Dividing it by 43 we get 18.3, and
the author gives it as 18, corrected to the nearest unit's place.

Further, since Z n is perpendicular to the ecliptic, Zs, the zenith distance of the Sun at any position
on the ecliptic, is always greater than Z n , and, accordingly, their sines also, since the arcs are all less
than 90, i.e. (radius' - sartku') is always greater than sin' z.d. o f n . Therefore, the interpretation
of T S that the former is to be subtracted from the latter is wrong, as mentioned already. T h e need
for successive approximation by repetition o f work is plain.

3il^vlMi< ( f ^ ) ^ ' g ^ * ^ ^^nn^

u
224 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.25

Parallax in latitude
2 4 . T a k e the sine z . d . o f n last got i n the successive a p p r o x i m a t i o n , m u l t i p l y
by 18, a n d d i v i d e by the respective kaksds. T h e respective sine p a r a l l a x i n
latitude is got. T h e arc o f t h e i r difference is the relative p a r a l l a x i n latitude
a n d its d i r e c t i o n is that o f sine z . d . o f m . e . p . (i.e. o f M f r o m Z.)

Since the sines are very small, it is immaterial whether the arcs are found first and their difference
is taken, or whether the arc of the difference of the sines is taken, both being the same practically.
But the latter will entail less work.
a) Sine parallax lat. of the Sun = 18 x sin z.d. o f n H- Sun's kaksd.
b) Sin parallax i n lat. o f the M o o n = 18 X sin z.d. o f n H- Moon's kaksd.
(b) - (a) is the sine of the relative parallax i n lat. whose arc is to be found, and its direction is that
of M from Z.
Example 16. To continue example 10.

T h e sine z.d. o f n , last got i n the successive approximation in the last example is 27' 26" say.
(a) Sun's sine par. in lat. = 18 X 27' 26" 16,641 =1".8.

(b) Moon's par. i n lat. = 18 X 27' 26" ^ 1171.2 =25".3.

Sin relative par. i n lat. = 25".3. - 1".8 = 23".5.
Rel. par. in lat. = arc of 23".5 = 11'.2, north, since M is north.
T h e rule is thus derived: T h e zenith distance of the nonagesimai, Z n , is the Sun's drkksepa. In
the context of the solar eclipse, according to the Paulisa, it was shown how the parallax i n latitude
(p.c.lat) is to be got by multiplying this drk-ksepa by the relative horizontal parallax and using it as
a correction to the Moon's latitude to obtain the corrected latitude. Here, the parallax is derived
separately for each of the Sun and the M o o n , for the sake of greater accuracy. Now, the direction
of the nonagesimai and the sine of its zenith distance is the same as that of sine z.d. of M , and the
direction o f the apparent shifting o f the S u n and the M o o n by parallax, as resolved on the line of
latitude, is the same as that o f sine z.d. of n , (as Is' i n fig. 2). Therefore, the direction of the parallax
correction is the direction of sine z.d. of M , as mentioned by the author. (In the fig. it is north.) Thus
everything is explained.

W[T] 3RT^: ^ 4 n W f e R t ^ g ^ || |
2 5 . T h e M o o n ' s l a t i t u d e at the t i m e t a k e n is to be got by u s i n g the sine (of
M o o n ~ R a h u ) , a n d this is to be a d d e d to o r subtracted f r o m the p a r a l l a x
c o r r e c t i o n i n latitude ( a c c o r d i n g to t h e i r d i r e c t i o n ) . T h i s is the p a r a l l a x -
c o r r e c t e d latitude (p.c. lat.). T h i s is to be got separately for each o f the times
separately a n d f r o m t h e m the times o f total o b s c u r a t i o n a n d total d u r a t i o n are
to be got.
24a. A . ^ ; B . ^ 25a. B . f ^ ^ d. A . ^ M s W ; B.^^^^^lnfiT
b. B . ^ ^ ^ ^ ( B 2 . 3 . < ' ^ ) d. B . ^ s q i ^ b. A.3nT c. A . B . ? T S ^ D.t9#
1X.26 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 225

T h e m a x i m u m latitude is given i n verse 6 to be 270'. T h e use of sine (Moon - Rahu) has been
already indicated in the context of the Romaka, and therefore only indicated here. In correcting,
like directions are additive, and unlike directions subtractive, the resulting direction being that of
the greater. T h e parallax-corrected latitude is to be got for each of the time of first contact, last con-
tact, and middle, the last serving for immersion and emergence too, as these times are near enough
to the middle. T h e separate computation of the corrected latitude suggests that the nddis of parallax
also are to be computed separately for the different times. T h u s , the following is to be done:

(i) T h e uncorrected latitude = 270' X sine (Moon - Rahu) H- 120 = sine (Moon - Rahu) X 9
4. (If M o o n Rahu) is less than 6 rdsis, the latitude is north, otherwise south. R a h u here means the
Head o f R a h u ) .

(ii) Parallax-corrected latitude = latitude +^ relative parallax i n latitude (-1- i f of the same direc-
tion, and ~ if of different directions, the resulting direction being that of the greater).

Example 17. (To continue Ex. 10,) find the parallax-corrected latitude at thefinalparallax corrected ne
moon, i.e. at nddi 23-20.

This time is 7iddis 2-40 later than new moon. So, from the data given in Ex. 10, Rahu-head = rd.
7-29-24, and M o o n = rd. 2-0-0 -h 810' x 2 2/3 - 60 = rd. 2-0-36. M o o n - R a h u = rd. 6-I-I2. F r o m
this.
Moon's latitude = 9 X sine (rd. 6-I-I2) 4 = 5'.7, south. (-. M o o n - Rahu-head) > rd. 6-0-0.)

(ii) Parallax corrected lat. = 5'.7 ~ i r . 2 = 5'.5, north (. of different directions, north being
greater.)

These rules have been explained before.

Duration of the eclipse

26. S u b t r a c t the square o f the p a r a l l a x - c o r r e c t e d l a t i t u d e f r o m the square o f
the s u m o f the s e m i - d i a m e t e r s o f the S u n a n d the M o o n a n d find the square
r o o t . D o u b l e this, a n d find the t i m e f o r it, t r e a t i n g it as the m o t i o n o f tithi.
( T h e d u r a t i o n o f the eclipse it got.)

This verse has already occurred as verse 16 of chap. V I I I and fully explained there. T h e only
difference is two mis-readings here.

Example 18. To continue Ex. 10.

In Ex.11, the angular diameter of the Sun has been found to be 3 1 ' , and of the M o o n , 33' and
the daily motion of the tithi 753'. T h e parallax-corrected lat. has been found to be 5'.5. F r o m these.

Duration inna6/f)^as = 2 X 60 x V(31 -I- 33)/2 - 5.5' ^ 753 = 2 X 60 X 31.52 - 753 = na.5-1.

26b. B 3 . ^ : . B.MRMRHI"l'c;d ( B 3 . % 1 ^ ) c. A . B . ^ i p r l d. A.B1.2.fMf^. B.<=l<l(<^^ld

226 PANCASIDDHANTIKA IX.27

It has already been mentioned that half the duration subtracted from the final parallax-corrected
new moon is the beginning and added to it is the end of the eclipse. Further, i f the difference of the
semi-diameters is used in the work, instead of the sum, the duration of total eclipse is got. Here, if
the Moon's is greater, there is actual total obscuration. If the Sun's is greater, there is annular
eclipse. T h e author expects us to be conversant with these things.

27. F i n d the nddis o f p a r a l l a x f o r t h e t i m e o f the b e g i n n i n g . I f the time o f

b e g i n n i n g a n d t h e n e w m o o n are b o t h i n t h e f o r e n o o n o r b o t h i n t h e after-
n o o n , find the difference o f the nMis o f parallax a n d a d d it to the h a l f d u r a t i o n
to get the c o r r e c t h a l f d u r a t i o n to be subtracted f r o m the t i m e o f the c o r r e c t e d
n e w m o o n . I f o n e is before n o o n a n d the o t h e r a f t e r n o o n , a d d the nadis o f
p a r a l l a x , a n d a d d it to the h a l f - d u r a t i o n to get the correct h a l f - d u r a t i o n (to be
subtracted f r o m t h e t i m e o f p a r a l l a x - c o r r e c t e d n e w m o o n ) . D o the same f o r
the t i m e o f the e n d o f the eclipse, (to find the c o r r e c t h a l f d u r a t i o n to be a d d e d
to t h e p a r a l l a x - c o r r e c t e d n e w m o o n , to get t h e c o r r e c t last contact).

T h e following example will make the meaning clear.

Example 19. To continue Ex. 10.

We have already obtained, par.c. new moon = wa. 23-20, parallax-correction for new moon =
na.2-40, and the total duradon na.b-\. A p p l y i n g the half duration o n both sides of p.c.n, the
approx. time o f first contact = na. 20-50, last contact - na. 25-51. T h e parallax correction in time
for first contact using verses (22-23) is na. 1-50. A s both the new moon and time of first contact are
in the same part of the day, i.e. afternoon, the difference between their parallax correction = na.2-40
nd. 1-50 = na. 0-50. This is to be added to the half duration to get the first half duration. Adding,
na.2-30 + na.0-50 = na. 3-20. Subtracting this from the parallax-corrected new moon, the correct
time o f first contact = nd. 23-20 - nd. 3-20 = nd. 20-0, after sunrise.

Next, the parallax-correction for time of approx. last contact is na. 3-30. As both new moon and
last contact are i n the afternoon, subtracting the corrections, for both from each other, we have
na.3-30 - na.2-40 = na.0-50. A d d i n g this to the half-duration we have, na.2-31 -I- nd.0-50 = nd.3-21,
for the correct second half duration. A d d i n g this to the p.c.n, the correct time of last contact =
nd.23-20 -I- nd.3-21 = nd.26-41 after sunrise.

T h e following is the explanation of the rules for the correction given here and the justification for
our interpretation. A t first the duration is given neglecting the effect of parallax on the time. If the
parallax is taken into account, the duration will always be longer than otherwise, as we have said.
This can be seen from the following consideration. Let us take the case when the end of new moon

27a. A . B . ^
b. A.B.C.D.f^-^1%. A.B.f^?#RT; c. B . ^ ^
C.D.f^?^:
d. A.^RWTt A . B . H a p l . o m o f 4
IX.27 IX. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A S O L A R E C L I P S E 227

is before noon. T h e first contact being earlier still, its interval from noon is greater, and therefore
its nddis o f parallax too is greater than those o f the new moon. Since both are subtractive, the first
half duration is lengthened, the first contact happening earlier. Therefore the difference is to be
added to the duration. In the case taken, the last contact may happen before noon or after noon.
If before noon, the interval from noon upto the last contact is less than that upto new moon. There-
fore the nddis o f parallax of the last contact is less than those of the new moon, and both are sub-
tracdve. Therefore the second half duration also is lengthened, the last contact happening later.
So the difference is, here too, additive to the duradon.

If the last contact is afternoon, the nadis o f parallax are clearly addidve to the dme o f last
contact, and the last contact happens later. B u t the parallax-corrected new m o o n occurs earlier,
and so the second half-duration is lengthened both ways, and so the sum o f the parallaxes is added
to the duradon. T h u s i n all three possibilities o f the first case, there is only additive correction.

Let us now take the second case, viz. that the new moon occurs after noon. Clearly what is said
for the first contact i n the first case applies to the last contact i n the second case, and vice versa, but
the additiveness and subtracdveness alone have to be interchanged. Therefore, here too, in all
three possibilities the differences or sums, have to be added to the duration, as we have said i n
giving the meaning o f the verse. N o t understanding the above, T S have interpreted the verse in
such a way that the instruction will result i n lessening the duradon, which is contrary to facts.

Now, for the readings. In the second foot o f the verse three mdtrds are missing, and to restore
them we have read vislesita as vislesitoyutah i n accordance with the meaning. T h e emendation, by T S
and N P , of the manuscript reading vislesitasthitydm into vislesitahsthityd does not express the
intended idea fully. In the fourth foot two mdtrds are missing, and to restore them we have read the
meaningless ndmoksi as ndma mauksi.

T o conclude: In the introduction to this chapter we said that the S u n , M o o n , and R a h u , together
with the methods of computing them are better i n the Saura than i n the Romaka. N o w , we have seen
that i n the computation o f the solar eclipse also, the Saura excels. F o r instance, the mean angular
diameters of the Sun and the M o o n are 30' and 34' according to the Romakas, while they are 32'
and 32' according to the Saura, very near the correct 32' and 3 1 ' , respectively. C o m p u t i n g true
diameters and the parallax using the distance o f the instant o f eclipse, and using the true m o d o n
of the time o f eclipse for getting the duradon etc. are commendable i n the Saura. Getting the sine
z.d.n. by using the sine o f the zenith distance o f m.e.p. is a better method than that used by the
Romaka, as also the method o f successive approximation for various things like parallax i n time o f
new moon etc. T h e abandoning o f the Romaka's faulty correction o f the Moon's position i n its own
orbit, is itself praiseworthy. W i t h such good features, the Saura is easily the best ofthefive Siddhdntas.

1. C o l . A . B . D . ^ T ( B . om?fe)^q^te[I%*H^
( B . W ? ) ^raqtsjR: I
C . ^Id ^4RI^I'T) y4jJ^'J'l HIH H=(HlSziPT: |

Thus ends Chapter Nine entitled ^Saura-Siddhanta: Solar Eclipse'

in the Paiicasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
 Chapter Ten

SAURA-SIDDHANTA LUNAR ECLIPSE

Introduction
In this chapter the method of computing the lunar eclipse according to the Saura Siddhdnta is
given. Since the true Sun and the M o o n and R a h u , the true distances of the Sun and the M o o n , and
the Moon's angular diameter and ladtude, have already been given in chap. IX, the angular diameter
of the Shadow alone is given here, as also the computation of the times of contacts etc. T h e last
three stanzas give the amount of eclipse at a desired time, as also the beginning and end of total
phase of the eclipses, both o f the Sun and the M o o n .

Diameter of the Shadow

l - 2 a . M u l t i p l y the M o o n ' s t r u e distances i n its o r b i t by 36, a n d d i v i d e by the
S u n ' s t r u e distance m u l t i p l i e d by 9 0 a n d d i v i d e d by 2 8 6 . S u b t r a c t this result
f r o m 36, m u l t i p l y by 120, d i v i d e by the M o o n ' s t r u e distance a n d get the arc
o f the r e s u l t i n g sine. T h i s is the a n g u l a r d i a m e t e r o f the S h a d o w .

T h e following is asked to be done:

(i) 'Result' = 36 X Moon's true dist. ^ (90 X Sun's true dist. 286)

= 36 X Moon's true dist. X 286 -f- (90 X Sun's true distance).

(ii) Sine angular diameter o f Shadow = (36 - 'result') 120 Moon's true distance.

O r , simplifying, this is equal to;

{36/Moon's true distance - (36/Sun's true distance) X 286/90} x 120

= 4320/Moon's true distance 13,728/Sun's true distance,

l a . A . ^ C T . B.Hddl'Juil
b. A . ^ . A . B 1 . 3 . ^ W n : C . W 2a. B1.3.Rl-M<4i]"1
C. B1.3.i?feHPn b. A.B.^^qraT; C . D . ^ ^ . A.^T^M??:;
d. A.eraHt; B1.3.el#TRT B1.3.d4ltim:
x.2 X. . S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A L U N A R E C L I P S E 229

Or, (since the arc is small, multiplying this by 3438 and dividing by 120), the angular diameter
of the Shadow in minutes = 1,23,768 H- Moon's true distance - 3,93,307 Sun's true distance.
Example l.Ona certain day at the time offull moon (T) the true Sun is rd. 10-0-0, the true Moon is rd.4
Rdhu Head is rd.3-25-0, the Sun's motion per day for the time is 60', and the Moon's 780'. Compute the
lunar eclipse.

The Sun s true dist. = 9,48,558 ^ 60 = 15,809 (by IX.15).

The Moon's true disu = 9,48,680 - 780 = 1216.3 (by IX.15).
The Moon's angular dia. = 38,640 H- 1216.3 = 31'.77 (by 1X.16).
The Moon's lat. at T = 9 X sine (ra.4-0-0 - ra.3-25-0) ^ 4 = 23'.5, north.

From the true distances got above, the angular diameter of the Shadow = 1,23,768 1216.3 -
3,93,307 - 15,809
= 101'.76 - 24'.88 = 76'.9.

T h e following is the explanadon of the method for finding the Moon's angular diameter: T h e
actual diameter of the Shadow is the diameter of the circular section of the Shadow-cone (formed
by the earth intercepdng the Sun's light,) at the Moon's orbit, at the dme of full moon. This is
represented in fig. 1, below by U ' U " .
Moon's

T h e angle subtended by this at the centre o f the earth, E , is the angular diameter desired to be
computed here. In the figure, S is the centre o f the Sun, E , that o f the Earth, and U that of the
Shadow secdon. SS' is the Sun's radius, E E ' is the Earth's, and U U ' is that of the Shadow. SE is the
true distance of the earth from the Sun, and E U , that o f the M o o n from the earth. S ' E ' U ' is the
direct common tangent to the orbs o f the Sun and the M o o n . As the distance are very great when
compared with the radii, E E ' , SS', and U U ' are practically parallel. Draw E S " parallel to E ' S ' , and
U ' E " parallel to U ' E ' . T h e triangles, ES"S and U E " E , are similar. Therefore,
E " E / E U = S"S/SE.
230 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X.4

.-. E"E = S"S X E U / S E = E U X (S'S - S' S")/SE

= E U X (S'S - E ' E ) / S E .

In order to get the angular diameter of the Shadow, we require the radius of the Shadow, U U ' ,

= E E ' - E E " = E E ' - { E U (SS' - EE')/SE}

= 18 Moon's true dist. x (Sun's radius 18) Sun's true dist.

= 18 - Moon's true dist. X {18 x 5,14,787 - (2 x 18 X 3438) - 18} ^ Sun's true dist. (Here,
18 is the number obtained by reducing the earth's radius by 43, and given by the author in giving
the parallax, see 1X.23.)

18 X 5,14,787 (2 X 18 X 3438) is the Sun's radius, since, of two orbs, the parallax as viewed
from one is the angular semi-diameter as viewed from the other. Therefore:
Sun's minutes of parallax: Sun's angular semi-diameter in minutes :: 18: Sun's reduced radius.

But the Sun's minutes of parallax = 18 X 3438 the Sun's true distance, and the Sun's semi-
diameter i n minutes = 5,14,787 (2 x t h e Sun's true distance) = 18 Moon's true distance X 18
X 284.4 ^ (90 X Sun's true dist.)

Since, sine angular diameter o f the Shadow is got by multiplying the radius by 2, and the max.
tabular sine and dividing by the Moon's true distance, sine angular diameter of Shadow = {36 -
Moon's true dist. x 36 (90 x Sun's true dist. 284.4)} X 120 ^ M o o n ' s true distance, almost the
same as the author has given, but with 284.4 instead of 286.

If the number had been 17.9 instead of 18 taken as a whole number for convenience, then we
shall get 286 itself, as given by the author. W e have already shown that the formula can be
simplified. T h e author must have given it in the involved form for indicating the geometrical
construction by way of proof.

W h e n the numbers occurring are seen to be correct i n the way shown by us, it is quite improper
for T S to read sadastadasra (278) as sadasvadasra (276) and to agree with this, making the Sun's
reduced diameter as 146, i n their prpof, instead of the correct 149.73, got by dividing 5,14,787 by
3438.

[I^Ht^chlH:]

T ^ ^ ^ : f ^ ( 1 ^ ) ^ : ^ ^ 5 r r a r i ; | | ^ { |

Duration of the Eclipse

2b-3. A d d the a n g u l a r d i a m e t e r s o f the M o o n a n d the S h a d o w , divideJ^y two,
a n d s q u a r e it. S u b t r a c t the s q u a r e o f the M o o n ' s l a t i t u d e f r o m this, a n d find
x.4 X. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A L U N A R E C L I P S E 231

the square root. M u l t i p l y this by 120 a n d d i v i d e by the d i f f e r e n c e o f the

m o t i o n s p e r day o f the S u n a n d the M o o n p e r t a i n i n g to the t i m e o f eclipse.
T h e d u r a t i o n o f the eclipse is got i n nadikds.
4. F i n d the M o o n ' s l a t i t u d e at first contact a n d u s i n g this find a m o r e correct
d u r a t i o n . R e p e a t this till there is n o d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n the p r e v i o u s a n d the
next d u r a t i o n s .
Note: T h o u g h the total duration alone is given here, we are expected to know how to find the
first and last contacts from this, from previous contexts. In the successive approximation, what is
said for the first contact must be taken for the last contact also. Therefore the following is asked to
be done:
(i) Rough duration = 120 V (half-sum of angular diameters)' lat.' difference of instantane-
ous daily motions.
(ii) T half (i), are the rough first and last contacts.

(iii) Using the latitude of the rough first contact and repeating (i) gives successively better first
contacts.
(iv) Using the latitude of the rough last contact, and repeating (i), gives successively better last
contacts. (It should be noted that the shorter the duration the greater are the number of repetitions
required.)

Example 2. Continue Ex.1.

(i) Rough duration in nddlw 120 V { (76.9 + 31.77)/2 }' - 23.5' ^ (780 - 60)

= 120 V 54.34- - 23.5' -^ 720 = 120 x 49 720 - nddis 8-10.

(ii) R o u g h times first and last contacts = T nd.4-5: T + nd.4-5.
(iii) T h e M o o n at rough first contact = rd. 3-29-6.9,
Rahu then = rd.3-25-0.2.
M o o n - Rahu = 4" 6'.7.
From this the Moon's latitude is 19'.35, north.
Using this, a more correct duration for first contact = V 54.34' - 19.35' X 120 + 720 = nd.8-28.

Subtracting half this from the time of full moon, the first contact is at T - nd.4-14. There is no
need to repeat, since the duration is long.
(iv) T h e M o o n at rough last contact is rd.4-0-53.1, and Rahu then, rd.3-24-59.8. F r o m this the
Moon's lat. is 27'.65, north. Using this, a more correct duration for last contact = V 54.34' - 27.65'
X 120 ^ 720 = nd. 7-48. A d d i n g half this to full moon time, the last contact is at T -f- nd. 3-54. There
is no need to repeat.
T h e method has been explained several times before, which need not be repeated here. As for
understanding that the successive approximation is for getdng the last contact also, though men-
2c. A . B . # : . B 1.3.1^; B 3 . ? ^ 4a. A.B.C.JH^pJ^:
3b. A . B . f ^ q ^ b. A . B . o m . i l . A . B . ^ :
d. A.B.J^. A . B . C . D . t F l ^ f o r f ^ ; A.eia^T d. A . B . f t s R q ^ :
232 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X.6

tioned only for the first contact, the two common statements anayd sthitir bhavati and sthityavisesa
krtoydvat, indicate this.

Obscuration at any desired moment

5-6 T a k e the nddis before o r after f u l l o r n e w m o o n u p t o the times for w h i c h
the a m o u n t e c l i p s e d is w a n t e d . M u l t i p l y this by the difference o f the Sun's
a n d M o o n ' s d a i l y m o t i o n s , ( m e n t i o n e d above), a n d d i v i d e by 6 0 . T h e 'corres-
p o n d i n g m i n u t e s o f arc' are got. S q u a r e this, square the M o o n ' s latitude for
the m o m e n t , a d d t h e m , a n d get the s q u a r e root. Subtract this f r o m the half-
s u m o f the d i a m e t e r s o f the e c H p s i n g a n d the e c l i p s e d bodies. T h e r e m a i n d e r
is the m i n u t e s o f arc e c l i p s e d , at the m o m e n t t a k e n , o f the M o o n i n the case
o f the l u n a r ecJipse, a n d o f the S u n i n the case o f the solar eclipse.

It is clear that by 'corresponding minutes of arc' is meant here, the distance in minutes between
the M o o n and the shadow, measured along the eclipdc. F r o m the instrucdon it is clear that the nddis
taken is the interval between full or new moon and the moment for which the amount of eclipse is
wanted. It is clear from the context that the Shadow is meant by the word Rahu. T h o u g h from the
mention o f the Shadow, and the Moon's ladtude without any mention o f parallax, this seems to be
given for the lunar eclipse only, the expression arkendvoh at the end shows that this is meant for the
solar eclipse also. T h e author thinks that the reader has acquired sufficient knowledge, by now, to
make the necessary changes when applying the rule to the solar eclipse. Therefore, i n the caseof
the solar eclipse, the amount eclipsed is got by using i n the rule, the parallax-corrected ladtude for
latitude, the Sun's and the Moon's angular diameters for those of the M o o n and the Shadow, and
the parallax-corrected difference o f daily modons for the mere difference of daily motions. Thus,
the following is instructed to be done:

A. Tofindthe amount eclipsed in the case of the Moon

(i) "Corresponding minutes of arc" = difference o f instantaneous daily motions of Sun and
M o o n X interval i n nddis from full moon 60.

b, B.'?lflra^ (B2.B.3;f) A.C.D.<=MIHH;

B.+dNMIui
c. A I . ^ ; A 2 - ^
d. B I . 3 . q % ^ :
x.6 X. S A U R A - S I D D H A N T A L U N A R E C L I P S E 233

(ii) Distance in minutes between the centres of the M o o n and Shadow

= V(i)' + (the Moon's latitude at the given time)'.
(iii) T h e amount eclipsed in minutes = half-sum of angular diameters o f the M o o n and
Shadow (ii)

B. Tofindthe amount eclipsed in the case of the Sun.

(i) "Corresponding minutes of arc" = T h e minutes obtained as by A (i) x the half duration not
corrected for parallax -v- the half duration corrected for parallax. (This will be a little approximate,
but has been given for case of computation, since the two times are known.)

(ii) Distance in minutes between the centres of the Sun and the M o o n
= V(i)' -I- (Parallax-corrected lat. of time)'.

(iii) T h e amount eclipsed in minutes = half sum of angular diameters o f the Sun and the M o o n
- (ii)-
Example 3. Continuing Ex. 2, find the amount of the moon eclipsed 3 nddis after T.
A. (i) Corresponding minutes o f arc = (780' - 60') X 3/60 = 36'

(ii) Distance between centres = V 3 6 ' + 26.6' = 44'.76 (having found that the Moon's lat. at the
moment is 26'.6).

(iii) A m o u n t eclipsed = 54'.34 - 44.76 = 9'.6.

Example 4. At a certain solar eclipse the difference of Sun and Moon's motions is found to be 720', the
parallax-corrected latitude, 2 nddis before the parallax-corrected new moon, is found to be 15', the sum of the
semi-diamters is 31' .9, the un-corrected half duration is nd. 2-30, and the corrected half duration is nd. 3. Find
the amount of the Sun eclipsed, at 2 nddis before the parallax corrected new moon.

(i) Corresponding minutes o f arc = (720 X 2 4- 60) X nd.2 1/2 + nd.3 = 24 X 5 H- 6 =20'
(nearly).
(ii) Distance between centres = V 2 0 ' -I- 15' = 25'.

(iii) T h e amount eclipsed = 31'.9 - 25' = 6'.9.

T h e following is the explanation of the method: Let us first take the case o f the lunar eclipse. A t
full moon, the M o o n anci the Shadow are i n conjunction, i.e. they have the same true longitude.
Since the Shadow has the same motion as the Sun, the interval between them for any interval of
time before or after full m o o n is the same as the interval i n tithi proportionate to the time interval.
Therefore there is the proportion, i f for 60 nddis there is the difference of the daily modon, how
much for the interval i n time. So the difference i n motion is muldplied by the given time and
divided by 60. Since the motions are measured along the ecliptic, the interval i n minutes along the
ecliptic is got, corresponding to the time interval. T h e distance between the centres is got thus:

In fig.2, S is the centre o f the Shadow and M is that o f the M o o n . S M ' is the 'corresponding
minutes' got for the interval i n time. M M ' is the Moon's ladtude at the given moment. Since M M '
is directed towards the pole of the ecliptic, the triangle S M ' M is right-angled at M ' . Since the
triangle, being small, can be treated as a plane triangle, we have, by the Pythagoras Theorem, the
distance between the centres, S M = V S M " 4 - M M " = Vcorres. minutes' + ladtude', as given. T h e
amount echpsed i n minutes = R r = S R Sr = SR ( S M M r ) = SR + M r S M = sum of semi-
diameters of the Shadow and the M o o n , minus the distance between their centres.
234 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X.6

Moon's orbit

Ecliptic

Fig, X.2

What has been proved for the lunar eclipse can be taken for the solar eclipse also, with the neces-
sary changes. T h e difference i n modons should be here corrected for parallax and used. That this
corrected difference is always less than the uncorrected will be clear, when we consider that always
the parallax-corrected half duradon is always greater than the uncorrected, which we have already
proved. Therefore it is clear that by multiplying the "corresponding minutes" by the uncorrected
half duradon, and dividing by the parallax-corrected half duradon, will give the parallax-corrected
"corresponding minutes". It is also clear that in the case of the solar eclipse we must use in the proof
the parallax-corrected ladtude in the place of the uncorrected ladtude, the Sun for the M o o n , and
the M o o n for the Shadow. W h e n this is done, the proof is exacdy similar to that for the lunar
eclipse.

Another thing is to be noted. T h e H i n d u astronomers took the amount of eclipse at full moon
or corrected new moon as the maximum and called it the magnitude, igrasa-pramana), though actually
this is only very nearly the m a x i m u m and the actual m a x i m u m occurs a little earlier or later. If we
take this full or new moon itself for doing the present work, since the time interval is zero, and
thereby the 'corresponding minutes' are also zero, the latitude itself becomes the distance between
the centres. Therefore we got that the amount eclipsed in this case (i.e. the magnitude) is to be got
by subtracdng the ladtude of full or corrected new moon, from the half sum of the angular diameters,
as already given.

Now for the readings: vdncchitanddi ('desired time') is meant here the interval in time from the
full or new moon, either before or after. B u t T S have taken the expression to mean 'the desired
point o f time', and in order to get the meaning o f 'interval' that is wanted for use, have emended
the already correct sthitiliptastdbhyas tat into tatsthitiliptdvivardt, which is unnecessary. Anot
thing must be said here. If the reading had been tithiliptdh instead of sthitiliptdh given by the
manuscripts and accepted by us, it would have been better; for this would mean the minutes of tithi,
as indeed these are, being part oi a tithi by nature.
x.7 X. S A U R A S I D D H A N T A L U N A R E C L I P S E 235

[4u!i<i44ehid:]

Time of total obscuration

7. T a k e the d i f f e r e n c e o f the a n g u l a r semi-diameters, instead o f t h e i r s u m .
S q u a r e it, subtract the square o f the p a r a l l a x - c o r r e c t e d latitude (in the case o f
the solar eclipse) o r o f the l a t i t u d e (in the case o f the l u n a r , ) find the square
root, d o u b l e it, a n d treat it as tithi, (i.e. m u l t i p l y by 6 0 , a n d d i v i d e by the
difference o f the p a r a l l a x - c o r r e c t e d daily m o t i o n s for the solar eclipse, o r o f
the m e r e daily m o t i o n s i n the case o f the l u n a r ) . T h e t i m e o f total o b s c u r a t i o n
is got.

In short, everything done for the duradon, using the difference of the semi-diameters instead of
the sum, is to be done for this. Halving this time and subtracting from or adding to the corrected
new moon or full moon gives the first approximate times of immersion and emergence. In the case
of the lunar eclipse, successive approximation should be done. In the solar eclipse this is not necessary,
because the times of immersion and emergence are very close to the corrected new moon. T h e
parallax-correction for the motion alone need be taken into accoimt and that once for all.
Another point to be noted is that, in the solar eclipse, if the Sun's angular diameter is greater than
the Moon's, instead of a total eclipse there will be an annular (ring-like) eclipse, since the M o o n will
not be big enough to hide the Sun. T h e times got, in this case, give the beginning and end of the
annular phase. Also, the given examples cannot be condnued to illustrate this section, because
under the conditions got there will be no total phase, since the latitudes are greater than the differ-
ence of the semi-diameters. T h e proof of the rules given here has already been given i n connecdon
with the eclipses according to the Vdsistha and Paulisa with graphical illustrations.

Now for the text, and readings: T h e text does not instruct that the difference of the semi-diameters
should be squared before adding to the square of the ladtude. But mathematical principles indicate
it, since the addition of an unsquared quantity with a squared one is unwarranted. We have
corrected visesdvavanati into visesddavanati while T S have corrected it into visesdddalanati and N P
into visesdrdhabhapati. It is clear that they have taken more liberty with the text than necessary, and
it is also purposeless.

1. Col. A.D.^g=5Wn^;?mt5Tra:; B.WI^-^^M: C.?f^-<4-5^il^"l Hl^ <*!l4l5S?PT:

Thus ends Chapter Ten entitled 'Saura-Siddhanta: Lunar Eclipse'

in the Pancasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira

b. B].3.Rl^<M< c. B l . f ^ d. B . ^ H c i t ^
 Chapter Eleven

ECLIPSE DIAGRAM

Introduction
Since the distinction among echpse-types, and various ideas mentioned therein, will not be clear
without graphical representation, the author 'follows up' the chapters on eclipses with one solely
devoted to this subject.

Marking the ecliptic etc.

1. U s i n g the s t i c k - i n s t r u m e n t w i t h n o t c h - m a r k s o f digits, d r a w the circle
c a l l e d the ' s u m - c i r c l e ' , h a v i n g f o r its r a d i u s the h a l f s u m o f the d i a m e t e r s c o n -
v e r t e d i n t o d i g i t s . M a r k the east-west a n d n o r t h - s o u t h lines. ( E - W , a n d N - S ,
i n f i g . 1). S i m i l a r l y , u s i n g the s e m i - d i a m e t e r o f the e c l i p s e d b o d y , c o n v e r t e d
i n t o digits as r a d i u s , d r a w the ' e c l i p s e d b o d y circle', c o n c e n t r i c w i t h the
s u m - c i r c l e . (See fig.)

2. F i n d the versine o f the hour-angle (of the M o o n at mid-eclipse) a n d multiply

this by the t a b u l a r sine o f the l a t i t u d e o f the o b s e r v e r a n d d i v i d e by 120. F i n d
the arc o f degrees o f the r e s u l t i n g sine. I f the h o u r - a n g l e is east, lay the
degrees n o r t h o f the east-point, i f west, s o u t h o f the east-point. T h e east-point
w i t h r e f e r e n c e to the e q u a t o r is thus got. ( E ' , i n the f i g u r e . E ' W ' is the cor-
r e s p o n d i n g east-west.)

l a . B . W I T A . B . M ' q ^ ' ] ^ : ; C.D.f^sq^erai

b. Al.frT; B 1 . 3 . ^ B 3 . ^ ; C . D . f ^ :
c-d C.D.<<^<^HI4WH<
d. A . ^ J l ^ ; B 1 . 3 . - ^ B 2 . ^ g r q ^
2a. A . ^ ^ T O T R M ; B.^^lT^Mdiii^l); D . ^ R ^
b. B. d*il>^lTr3qt A.B.f^T?^ B . % r a t
c. A.mfiilll^^'NI; B . ^ ( B l . 3 . ^ )
d. A . ^ H ^ l ^ ^ ' ^ M M d l : (A2. g a p f o r ^ g ^ ) ;
B.^PTt^^lF^;
D.'Wi|lTl<''MIldl
XI.3 XI. E C L I P S E D I A G R A M 237

3. A d d three rdsis to the M o o n ' s l o n g i t u d e a n d find the degrees o f d e c l i n a -

t i o n o f this p o i n t . I f the d e c l i t t a t i o n is n o r t h , lay the degrees n o r t h o f E ' , i f
s o u t h , s o u t h o f E ' . T h i s is the east-point w i t h respect to the ecliptic ( E " i n the
figure.) D r a w the straight l i n e t h r o u g h the centre, E " O W " . E " - W " is the
ecliptic east-west. B y means o f circles, (i.e. by d r a w i n g the p e r p e n d i c u l a r
bisector), get the ecUptic n o r t h - s o u t h , viz. N " S".

For illustration, we shall represent in the figure the lunar eclipse worked out in the examples of
chap. X . T h e angular diameters of the M o o n and the Shadow got there are 31'.8 and 76'.9. T h e
Moon's lat. at first and last contacts are, respectively, 19'.35 and 27'.65, both north. T h e first and
second half durations are nd. 4-14 and nd. 3-54, respectively. Let us assume that at T , the hour
angle, is lOnddis, i.e. 60, west and the latitudeof the observer is 10 24' (N). T h e Moon's longitude
has already been given as rd.4-0-0.

(i) T h e half sum of the angular diameters = 108'. 7 ^ 2 = 54'.35. T h i s is to be converted into
digits using the formula of verse 6, below, and used as the radius of the sum-circle. It is, 54.35
(3 - 10/15) = 23.3 digits. According to the scale in the figure, 1 unit = 10 digits, this is 2".33.

3b. B.qt?lI^g?T
c. A . M ^ M
d. A . B . ^ r a ^ A.'MI'^M"^; B.'MIilTl<D.|^[^]
238 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XI.5

(ii) The semi-diameter of the ecUpsed body, (here the Moon), is 31'.8 H - 2 = 15'.9= 1 5 ^ ( 3 - 10/15)
in digits, = 6.8. According to the scale used, this is represented as, "0.7, radius of eclipsed circle.
(iii) For the hour angle of 60, the tabular versine = 60', and tabular sine latitude of observer is
21'40". F r o m these, the tabular sineof the angle of deflection caused by lat. = 60' x 21'40"-^ 120'
= 10' 50". T h e angle of deflection = 5 11',south of the east point, since the hour angle is west. This
is angle, E O E ' , and E ' - W is the equatorial east-west.

(iv) Longitude of M o o n + rd. 3-0-0 = rd. 7-0-0. T h e declination of this point is 11 44', south,
which is the southward defection from E ' , represented as angle E ' O E". E" - W" drawn is therefore
the east-west o f the ecliptic.

(v) T h e perpendicular bisector of this, N " S", is the north-south direction with respect to the
ecliptic.

T h e explanation that may be required here has all been given in the context of the Vdsistha lunar
eclipse (chap. V I ) , in connection with the graphical representation there. It has also been shown
that the methods for the deflections are rough, and that using the versine for ladtudinal deflection,
as done by the early astronomers instead of the sine, is incorrect. It is also to be noted that the way
of giving the representation by our author here is different from those o f others, as also very
limited in its scope.

T h e readings: We have emended certain readings according to the idea intended to be conveyed.
In the first stanza, the reading disam, is all right, and emending it into disah by T S and N P i
unnecessary, since the singular form can give the meaning of the intended plural number, according
to the sdstra. A g a i n , in verse 3, it is enough if vakdt is read as 'cakrdt,' and there is no need to eme
it into matsydt, as T S have done. N P emend it as bakdt, give it the meaning Tish' (!) and add a sylla
'ca' at the end of the line to make up the metre. T h e intended meaning, viz. 'perpendicular bisector',
can be got from cakrdt, following the ms lettering and meaning 'by means of circles', for it is by the
intersection o f circles that the fish-figure itself is got.

Marking of points of contact etc.

4. I n the case o f the l u n a r eclipse, m a r k o n the ' e c l i p s e d b o d y c i r c l e ' the direc-
t i o n p o i n t s i n reverse o f the p o i n t s o n the s u m - c i r c l e i n the fig. s e n w for N
W S E . O n the N " - S" line, m a r k the M o o n ' s l a t i t u d e at first contact (con-
v e r t e d i n t o digits,) a c c o r d i n g to its d i r e c t i o n , ( p o i n t L i n the figure,) a n d take
it (westward) to the sum-circle, (to f i n the fig.) J o i n this p o i n t o n the semi-circle
a n d the centre w i t h a straight l i n e .
XI.5 XI. E C L I P S E D I A G R A M 239

5. W h e r e this Hne cuts the e c h p s e d c i r c l e (f i n the fig.) is the p o i n t o f first

contact. T o get the p o i n t o f last contact also, s i m i l a r w o r k s h o u l d be d o n e ,
u s i n g he M o o n ' s l a t i t u d e at the t i m e o f last contact, m a r k i n g it o n N " - S" l i n e ,
a n d d r a w i n g the l i n e to the s u m - c i r c l e i n the o p p o s i t e d i r e c t i o n , (i.e. not west
w a r d b u t earst-ward). ( T h e p o i n t o f last contact got is 1 i n the fig.)

Note: Since the directions are asked to be marked reversed in the case of the M o o n eclipsed, we
understand that they have to be marked as they are when the S u n is the eclipsed body. T h e first part
of the instructions can be understood to be intended for first contact, since the second part is
expressly stated to be for last contact. Since the Moon's ladtude of the moment of last contact is
asked to be used to find that point, we infer that the latitude of the moment of first contact is to be
used to find the first point. T h e drawing of lines to the westward r i m and eastward r i m of the sum-
circle can be inferred from the known directions o f first and last contacts, keeping i n m i n d that they
are marked reversed on the Moon-circle.

Thus, the following is the work to be done:

(i) In the case of the lunar eclipse alone, mark the directions reversed, on its r i m . Take the
Moon's latitude at the time of that particular contact whose point is to be found. Measure it along
N " S" according to its own direction, and mark the point. (In the solar eclipse the latitude is to be
parallax-corrected.) (In the fig. these points are L , A , for first and last contacts, respectively.)

(ii) From this point, draw a line parallel to E" W", westward or eastward, respectively, for first
or last contact, to meet the rim of the sum-circle, (as i n fig, L f or Al'.)

(iii) Draw f ' O or 1 ' O to intersect the r i m of the eclipsed at f or 1. These are the points of first and
last contacts.

For example, in the fig, we shall find these:

(i) T h e points of contat for the lunar eclipse is wanted. Therefore N W S E are reversed as s e n w.
T h e latitudes are 19'.35 N , and 27'.65 N , Converted into digits, these are 8.3 and 11.9. According
to scale, i n the fig., these are 0".8 and 1".2. Measuring along O N " , the points marked are L , and A ,
respectively.

(ii) T h e westward parallel for first contact drawn is L f ' , and the eastward parallel for last contact
drawn is A l ' .

(iii) J o i n i n g f and 1' with O , the point of first contact got is f, and the point of last contact got is
1. Thus, we find from the figure that the first contact is very near the southeast point of the Moon's
rim, and the last contact is a little to the south of its west point.

4b. A . B . ^ ^ l q R I ^ C . i ^ ^ ^ D.I^^ITO^
A.C.D.I^^RI*; B . f ^ ^
c. A . B . - ^ ; C . ^ ? ^ D.^jq?)^
C . ^ 3 t ^ ^ ; D.flsfW^
d. A.<-Mi^-*l'"i II B.<-MT:^-*lt^W^MI<t | | V II
Really cT^W^ belongs to verse 5.
C . ^ - ? g # q a i q ; D . ^ [tT]#'Tn^
5b. A . ^ ^ B.I^M4<1VI1*^:
c. A . - ^ f W ; B. wt^jzjr D.-?sif?n
d. A . B . ^ e a ^ i ^ ; C.^tledc^fiif; D . ^ ^ n f ^
A2.R)tlldoi|l
240 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XI.6

T h e explanation of all this has already been given. T h e author does not go beyond this i n his
graphical representation. T h e corrections of the text to agree with the ideas intended to be
conveyed, are easily understood.

Conversion of minutes into angles

6. So diat the graphical representation may appear as the eclipse is seen actually,
the m i n u t e s o f arc are to be c o n v e r t e d i n t o digits, at 2 ' p e r d i g i t w h e n the
M o o n is n e a r the h o r i z o n , a n d at 3 ' p e r d i g i t w h e n it is o n the t e n t h s i g n , i.e.
meridian, and proportionately i n between.

T h e proportion is as follows: In the fifteen nddikds (roughly) when the M o o n rises from the
horizon to the meridian, or falls from the meridian to the horizon, there is an increase of one
minute of arc from 2' to 3', or decrease of one minute of arc from 3' to 2'; what is it at a given time?
T h e number of minutes thus obtained is to be represented by one digit in the graphical represen-
tation. A t this rate the minutes of latitude etc. are to be converted into digits. In the example, for
the hour angle o f tenliddis, we have the rate per digit, (3 - 10/15) = 2 1/3 minutes, i.e. three digits
per seven minutes.
T h e following is the explanation of the conversion formula: T h e Sun and the M o o n appear to
be larger at the horizon, and to become smaller and smaller as they proceed to the meridian and
near the zenith. T h i s is an optical illusion, and really the size is practically the same, as can be
proved by measurement, taking photographs etc. W e shall not explain the phenomenon here as it
is outside the pale of astronomy proper. But we must mention that the explanation given in some
works like the SiddhdntaAekhara in wrong.
O u r author has taken that the magnification at the horizon is one and a half times that at the
zenith, (practically the meridian i n our latitudes) and the increase i n size is proportionate to the
hour angle, though this may not be strictly true. H e also thinks that the orbs, which are nearly 32',
appear to be about 11 digits near the zenith, and about 16 digits at the horizon. Hence his rule, two
minutes per digit at the horizon, and three on the meridian. W i t h the possibility of different people
giving the actual estimate of size differendy, what the author says must be taken as only approxi-
mate. Therefore no harm will ensue by taking the meridian for the zenith, or by taking the mean
value of the m a x i m u m hour angle, viz.j 15 nddikas, in finding the proportion, especially in our
latitudes.

6b. A . % ^ 1. Col.A.B.3qcrD^:TR^gn^#Hjm

Thus ends Chapter Eleven entitled 'Eclipse Diagram'

in the Paiicasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
 Chapter Twelve

PAITAMAHA SIDDHANTA

Introduction
In this chapter Vardhamihira deals with the Paitdmaha siddhdnta, the other four having already
been dealt with. As an astronomical work the Paitdmaha is of very little value, as the author has
remarked in his Introduction, "the tithis of the other two, (meaning the Vdsistha and the Paitdmaha),
are far from correct." Since this siddhdnta gives only the mean Sun and M o o n , and therefrom the
mean tithis, it cannot satisfy the requirements of the Dharmasdstras. B u t it is historically important
as a system that immediately followed the Veddhga Jyotisa. W e shall explain at the end of the chapter
how this could have subserved religious purposes i n ancient times, and what merits it possesses as
the basis of a civil calendar.

Vl^^cblH VlMctqfuim^

Days from Epoch

1. T h e Siddhdnta o f Paitdmaha teaches that the l u n i - s o l a r ywg'a is five years.
A f t e r e v e r y t h i r t y s y n o d i c m o n t h s t h e r e is a n i n t e r c a l a r y m o n t h , a n d t h e r e is
a n o m i t t e d day f o r every 62 l u n a r days o r tithis.

2. Subtract two f r o m the years o f the e l a p s e d S a k a era, a n d d i v i d e o u t the

r e m a i n i n g year by five. T h e 'days f r o m e p o c h ' are to be c a l c u l a t e d f o r the
r e m a i n i n g years etc., the first d a y b e i n g the suklapratipad o f the m o n t h o f
M a g h a . T h e naksastras o f the S u n a n d the M o o n , c a l c u l a t e d b y u s i n g the days,
are f o r sunrise.

1-2 Quoted by Utpala o n B S 8.22

2a. A . B . ^ ; U . ^
Ic. D.-RW: b. A.1ftli^<^; B.Ma(^'J,^c<l Al.srafq
d. A.HI^<'=IHrIM^I'^ I; B.HlR^<<=IMfel'^y^l4 c. A.B.'HI^jRldl^
(B2.3.^iq3q^) d. A.B.C.D.fqil(B.^C.D.^^7M
A.C.D.d<i^-^i||^ B.^R^Sqig; U . - a ^ f ^ ^ D ^
242 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XII.2

T h e period after which the Sun, M o o n , and the planets all meet again at the first point of the
zodiac is commonly called theyuga, meaning "the period of union." Here this is meant for the Sun
and Moon alone, and this Siddhdnta takes it to be five years, approximately, with a view to convenience.
In the same way, the statements that there is an intercalary month after every thirty months, and
an omitted day for every 62 lunar days, are approximate, and rounded off for convenience. T h e
first tithi of the light fortnight of M a g h a begiris theyuga, and the year and the day begins with sun-
rise.

T h e author has not mentioned the number of intercalary months or days in theyuga, nor has he
given how to get the 'days from epoch', expecting the readers to be experienced enough, by now,
to know it for themselves. H e has indicated it in 1.16, and we have explained it under 1.14-17. T h e
only thing that is necessary is to know the years of the beginnings of the yuga, and this has been
given here as two years after the saka epoch, and every five years thereafter.

We shall first compute the number of the intercalary months etc in the Yuga. T h e number of
years in theyuga is 5, given. T h e solar months are 5 x 1 2 = 60. T h e intercalary months are, 60/30
= 2. T h e lunar or synodic months are, 60 -t- 2 = 62. T h e lunar days or tithis are 62 X 30 = 1860.
T h e omitted lunar days are, 1860 ^ 62 = 30. T h e (civil) days are, 1860 - 30 = 1830. T h e Moon's
revolutions are, the Sun's revolutions -I- the synodic months = 5 -i- 62 = 67. T h e Vyatipdtas are, solar
revolutions -I- lunar revolutions = 5 -f- 67 = 72. T h e number of days in the solar year is, 1830 ^ 5
= 366. T h e days perayana are 366 2 = 183. T h i s is enough for our purpose.

T o get the 'days':-

(i) (Elapsed saka years 2) 5. Take the remainder alone.
(ii) T h e solar months gone = (i) X 12-1- elapsed months from Magha.
(iii) The intercalary months = (ii) 30. Take the quotient alone.

(iv) T h e lunar months gone = (ii) -I- (iii).

(v) T h e lunar days gone = (iv) X 30 -I- tithis gone i n current month.
(vi) Omitted days = (v) ^ 62. Take the quotient alone.
(vii) T h e days from epoch are, (v) (vi).

T h e tithis gone, used in (v) are actual elapsed tithis, and not those increased by one (according to
verse 4. of this chapter,) for calendrical purposes. If the latter is used, subtract the calendrical
elapsed tithi from the remainder got in (vi). If this is greater than 46, lessen the days from epoch
by one to get the correct days. T h e reason for this will be explained while dealing with verse 4,
following. Further, since there can be no fraction of intercalary month or avama at the beginning
of ayuga carried over from a previousyug-a, there is no ksepa for these, in the computation rules. As
for the explanation of these rules it has already been given in chap.I, when dealing with the rules
for days from epoch according to the Romaka. T h e names of the five years, (not given in the text,)
are: Samvatsara, Parivatsara, Iddvatsara, Anuvatsara, and Idvatsara. In certain Ved^csdkhds, t
a slight variadon in some names.

As for the reading of the text, we have corrected dyunam, into dvyunam, since the former is
meaningless in the context.
XII.3 XII. P A I T A M A H A S I D D H A N T A 243

Example 1. Compute the 'days from epoch' according in the Paitdmaha, for the sunrise of calendrical da
eleventh of the light fortnight of Kdrttika, in the elapsed Saka year 426.

(i) (426 2) 5 = 424 -H 5. Here the remainder is 4, the years gone, i n the currentyw^a. T h e
fifth, Idvatsara is current.
(ii) C o u n t i n g from Magha, 9 months have elapsed before {Kdrttika), in the current year. .-. the
solar months gone = 4 X 12 4- 9 = 57.
(iii) Intercalary months = 57/30, = 1 27/30 (quotient = 1)
(iv) L u n a r months gone = 57 4- 1 = 58.
(v) ThecalendricaUMtjgoneinthemontbare 10..-.thetotalftttwgone = 58 X 30 + 10= 1750.
(vi) Omitted tithis = 1750 ^ 62 = 28 14/62. (The quotient, 28 are the omitted tithis). Since the
remainder, 14, minus 10, leaves 4, which is not greater than 46, the calendrical tithi itself is the tithi.
(vii) Days from epoch = 1750 - 28 = 1722.

*i?JW'n^: fudl^^-i ? T f W M P I ^ I ^ H II ^
Tithi, Nakatra etc.
3. A d d to the 'days' a sixty-first part o f itself. T h e total tithis are got, ( w h i c h ,
d i v i d e d o u t by thirty, leaves the tithis i n the m o n t h ) . M u l t i p l y the 'days' by 9,
a n d d i v i d e by 122. T h e total naksatras are got, ( w h i c h , d i v i d e d o u t by 27, gives
its actual naksatra, r e c k o n e d f r o m Sravisthd). M u l t i p l y the 'days' by 7 a n d
d i v i d e by 610. S u b t r a c t this f r o m the 'days'. T h e r e m a i n d e r are the total
naksatras o f the M o o n , ( w h i c h , d i v i d e d o u t Iby 27 a n d the r e m a i n d e r c o u n t e d
f r o m Sravisthd, is the M o o n ' s naksatra).

T h e following is to be done:-
(i) Tithi = 'days' + 'days' H- 61. (This, divided out by 30, and the remainder counted homsukla-
pratipad, is the tithi proper).
(ii) Sun's naksatra = 'days' X 9 -f- 122. (This, divided out by 27 and the remainder counted from
Sravisthd, is the Sun's naksatra).
(iii) Moon's naksatra = 'days' 'days' X 7 -H 610. (This, divided out by 27 and the remainder
counted from Sravisthd, is the Moon's naksatra).

Example 2. For the date of Ex. l,find the tithi etc.

T h e 'days' got there are 1722.

(i) Tithi = 1722 4- 1722 ^ 61 = 1722 + 28 14/61 = 1750 14/61. Divided out by 30, the remainder
is 10 14/61..-. the 10th Ti^/ii of the light fortnight is gone, and 14/61 o f Ekadasi has gone at sunrise.

3. Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a o n 5 S 8 . 2 2 . ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ g ^ ^ ^ .

3a. A . B . ^ ^ ^ 5 5 T O ^ ( B . ^ ) % M ; U.^1^
C.'S*Ng'M^^J|iJl; D.'S+^-^^^JIul; c. A . B . f ? ^ ; D . ^ :
u.^te?t d. A . ^ A . s i P r m ; B2.Rtm^
244 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XII.4

(ii) Sunsnaksatra = 1722 X 9 1 2 2 = 127 4/122. Dividing out by 27, the remainder is 194/122.
C o u n d n g from Dhanisthd, Citra is gone, and the Sun is at 4/122 of Svati.
(iii) Moon's naksatra = 1722 - 1722 X 7 - 610 = 1722 - 19464/610 = 1702 146/610. Divided
out by 27, the remainder is 1 146/610. Sravistha is gone, and the M o o n is at 146/610 of Satabhisaj.
It is to be noted, that two of these being known, the third can be counted from them.
T h e following is the explanation of the rules: U n d e r verses 1 2, the number of days in xheyuga
etc. have been got. Using them, the total tithis are got by the proportion, 1830: 'days':: 1860: Tithis.
.-. Tithis = 1860 X 'days' ^ 1830 = 'days' X 62 ^ 61 = 'days' (1 + 1/61) = 'days' + 'days' ^ 6 1 .
Next, since there are five solar years i n theyuga, there are 5 x 27 = 135 solar naksatras. We have
the proportion, 1830: 'days' :: 135: total Sun's naksatra. .-. Sun's naksatra = 135 X 'days' 1830
= 'days' X 9 122.

Next, since there are 67 revolutions of the M o o n in theyuga, there are 67 x 27 = \ 809 naksatras.
So, we have the proportion, 1830: 'days' :: 1809: Moon's naksatras. .-. Total Moon's naksatras.
1809 x 'days' ^ 1830 = 'days' x 603 610 = days (1 - 7/610) = 'days' - 'days' x 7 610.
While the mss. readings tryamsatvarhce etc. are corrupt, Bhattotpala's reading saikatrimse itself
wrong, since it contradicts facts, and we have emended it into saikartvamse. T S have corrected is as
saikasastyarnse garie which is not proper since the correction does not follow the letters of the tex
N P emends it as saikasadarnse for the number 61 that is required, but generally the said number is
not found to be formed thus.

Vyatipata
4. I f the m o m e n t o f f u l l o r n e w m o o n falls before n o o n , the s e c o n d o f the
two Cithis c o n n e c t e d w i t h the day is the (civil) tithi for the day, otherwise the
first. M u l t i p l y the 'days' by 12 a n d d i v i d e by 3 0 5 . T h e Vyatipdtas are got.
T h e tithi of this Siddhdnta is mean tithi. Since this is less than the day, each day has parts of two
tithis connected with it, and we have to fix one of them as the date of the particular day. It is this that
is done by the first half o f the stanza, it seems. If others like the Srdddha-tithi are meant to be fixed
here, they would be mentioned by name. T h e mere word tithi without an attribute must mean only
the date. Agreeing that the date is meant to be fixed here, is it the date of the full or new M o o n alone
that is fixed here, or that of any day? F r o m the -word parva used, one may think it is only the former
that is sought to be fixed. But this cannot be, since fixing the date of one particular day among so
many is practically useless. I f it is argued that the fixing of the day as parva or pratipad is useful to

4b. A c R l ^ R R l ^ ; B 1 . 3 . ' a ^ ^ # ^ ; B 2 . c i ^ ^

c. AB.sqrfqqrai; D.oHrdMldl
d. A.m^
A.^rara^v.T^:; B.M^aiHi^cli^l: ( B 2 . ^ ' 9 t : )
X1I.4 XII. P A I T A M A H A S I D D H A N T A 245

determine whether the anvddhdna or the isti is to be performed on that day, then the general term,
tithi, need not have been used, and it would have been easier to mention the thing. Further this is
a matter for the Dharmasastras to deal with, not for an astronomical work. Therefore, by fixing the
date of the parva, the author means to fix all the subsequent dates following, upto the next parva,
and make them convenient for civil use. If the dates are consecutive, one for each day, it will be con-
venient for civil reckoning. If there is ajump, omitting one date i n the middle {tithiksaya), it is plainly
inconvenient. T h e instrucdon i n the verse secures that the dates follow without omission in the
middle of the fortnight. For, if the moment of full or new moon is after noon, there will be no omitted
tithi in the fortnight following, and the corresponding dates will follow one after another each day,
beginning from prathamd, next day. But, i f the moment of full or new moon is before noon, then
there will be an omitted tithi in the fortnight following, since the remainder i n getdng the omitted
days will be greater than 46, increasing by one each day. Therefore, i f now the day of full or new
moon itself is reckoned as the first date of the fortnight, then the reckoning can be continued to the
end of the fortnight without omission. It is bearing i n m i n d this idea implied by the text, that we
made a distinction between the astronomical and the civil date, i n giving the computation of the
'days from epoch'. T h e Siddhdnta is only repeating here the idea of the Veddnga Jyotisa i n :

dyu heyam parva cet pdde pddas trirnsattu saikikd \

the term pdde (meaning 'quarter day') corresponding to the term ardhe in our text. T h e thirty-one
parts mentioned form the measure of the pdda, i n units of 1/124 parts of a day.

We have explained the vyatipdta in detail, in our commentary on III.20. W e must remember here
two things that we said there:

(1) Vyatipdta occurs when the Sun and the M o o n have the same declination, (both north or both
south), and when one is moving northward while the other is moving southward.

(2) If the Sun, M o o n , and declination are all mean, as here, and i f the first point is at the solstice,
as here, mid-vyatipdta-yoga must fall when the Sun + M o o n equals 12 rdsis. In theyuga, (of 1830
days) there are 5 -I- 67 = 72 such yogas, i.e., vyatipdtas. Therefore, for given 'days', there are, 72 x
'days' 1830 = 12 x 'days' 305, vyatipdtas, as given here. T h e quotient obtained are the wyaft/xJto
gone. But this knowledge is practically useless, and we must take it that the Siddhdnta intends here to
give when the vyatipdta occurs, a time extremely propitious for g\hs,iapa, homa, etc. T h i s can be
found easily from the remainder. Divide this by 12. T h e result is days etc. gone from the last vyatipdta.
Subtracting the remainder from 305 and dividing by 12, we get the days to the middle o f the next
vyatipdta. If the remainder is zero or nearly so, it is clear that the vyatipdta is on.

Example 3(a). Given the 'days' 1697, what is the tithi for that day, and the subsequent days, upto the en
the fortnight?

T h e tithis gone = 1697 1697 61 = 1697 + 27 50/61 = 1724 50/61. Dividing out by 30, the
remainder is 14 50/61, i.e. 50/61 part ofpurnimd has gone, and 11/61 part remains. Since the tithi
is equal to 61/62 day, 11/61 tithi equals, 11/61 X 61/62 = 11/62 day. T h e full M o o n ends at 11/62
day, i.e. before noon. Therefore that day itself is Prathamd, (not Purnimd). (The same conclusion
follows from the remainder of the omitted day, 51, i n this case, (minus zero, for the civil day gone,)
being greater than 46. After this, for ten days, the tithis are from the second to the eleventh, for civil
purposes, though at sunrise the tithis are from the first to the tenth, the eleventh being the omitted
tithi. O n the next day the tithi at sunrise is the twelfth, as also the civil tithi, and so on.
246 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X1I.5

Example 3(b). Given the 'days' 1722, find when the vyatipata falls.
1722 X 12 305 = 67 229/305, i.e. 67 vyatipdtas have gone, from the beginning oixheyuga. T h e
remainder is 229. Dividing by 12, we get 19-5, days etc. gone from last vyatipdta. Subtracdng from
305, and dividing by 12, we get days etc. 6-20, to go for the middle of the next vyatipdta, i.e, it will
be falling at 20 nddis on Kdrttika Krsria-dvitiyd.

T h e correction of the reading here is easy to understand. O f T S , the latter says some farfetched
thing as the meaning of the first part of this verse, which seems meaningless to me, and the former
without saying anything himself, refers us to the Sanskrit commentary, evidently not understanding
it himself. In explaining the Vyatipdta, their use of the one forming the seventeenth of the series
Viskambha etc., can serve no purpose i n the present case. T h e same confusion is seen also in N P
(see Pt Il.p.82). We have already shown that the series itself did not exist at the period of Varahamihira.

Duration of a day
5. T a k e the days g o n e i n the Uttardyaria, i.e. the n o r t h w a r d c o u r s e o f the
S u n , a n d the days to g o i n the Daksiridyana, i.e. the s o u t h w a r d c o u r s e . M u l t i p l y
by t w o , d i v i d e by 6 1 , a n d a d d 12. T h e d u r a t i o n o f the d a y t i m e (in muhurtas)
is got.

T h o u g h the text is very corrupt here, since we know that the duration of daytime is given here,
and that as mentioned i n the VeddhgaJyotisa, many words occurring i n that work being recognisable
here, we have succeeded i n reconstructing the verse using the letters found i n the text, though not
to o u r entire satisfaction. B u t there is no doubt about the idea intended to be conveyed, viz. that of
VJ (verse 22 o f the Rgveda version and verse 40 of the Yajurveda version). B u t T S and N P , i n order
to retain the expression dvddasahlnam, read into the text many impossible things and make several
emendations not caring even for the metre.

T h e rule given is thus explained: A c c o r d i n g to this Siddhdnta the shortest day is 12 muhurtas, at
the end of the southward course and the beginning of the northward at Winter solstice, and the
longest is 18 muhurtas at the end of the northward course and the beginning of the southward, at
Summer solstice. Each course has 183 days, and the increase or decrease o f daytime is considered
uniform. Therefore, since there is an increase o f 6 muhurtas from 12 i n the 183 days of the north-
ward course, the increase for a desired number of days (counted from the beginning) is: days gone
X 6-T- 183 = days gone x 2 61. So, theduration is 12 -I- days gone x 2 -H 61. T a k i n g the south-
ward course, it is 12 muhurtas at the end, proportionately greater, the earlier is the day, the increase
being 6 i n 183 days, at the beginning of the course. Therefore, d u r i n g the southward course, the
duration is 12 + the days to go i n the course X 2 H- 61. It is to be noted that the author has not said

5a. A.B.i^fcl<H^I^Tl<4l ( B 1 . 3 . c ! # ) ; C.MlHd*^'^ RHHIM ^l^imH^

C . ^ # ) ^ : ; D. [ ^ ] ^ [g] W ) D.c^ra^^^?P=!|^
b. A.WjaTcf?lJ#r^^!TP?m; c. A . t S ; B.fl3T B . - R *
B . ^ ( B 3 . ^ ) fT'ld^Wft^^ilFn^; d. A . B . C . D . U ^ ^
XII.5 XII. PAITAMAHA SIDDHANTA 247

when the northward course begins, and when the southward one. (Perhaps he has said that i n this
verse, and the corruption of the text has masked it.) W h e n the Sun enters Sravistha its northward
course begins, and when it is at the middle o f Aslesa, its southward course begins, o r the first half
of the year is the northward course, and the second half, the southward one. It can also be inferred
from the rule for vyatipdta.

Example 4. Given the 'days' 1722, find the daytime for the day following.

1722 H- 366 = 4 258/366. Four years have gone, and 258 days in the fifth. T h e 183 days of the
northward course have gone, and 75 days have elapsed i n the southward course. T h e days to go =
1 8 3 - 7 5 = 108. T h e duradon of daytime in wM/jMrto= 1 2 + 1 0 8 x 2 - ^ 6 1 = 12 + 333/61 = 1533/61.
T o conclude, it has been said i n the introducdon to this chapter that the Sun, M o o n etc. of this
Siddhdnta are only mean, not true. Some think it is even worse than this, which we must investigate
now. We have seen that, according to this Siddhdnta, there are 366 days i n the year, 5 years or 1830
days constitute theyuga, and there are 62 synodic months i n it. B u t actually there are about 365
days i n the year, and also 62 synodic months take 1830.8965 days. Therefore, instead o f being at
the zero point of Sravistha at the beginning of each yuga, the Sun will be advancing by about three
degrees per yuga. T h e synodic month being not completed, it will be really only Caturdasi then, and
at the end of e\ery yuga, the tithi will be preceding by about one per yuga. T h i s is common to both
this Siddhdnta and the Veddhga Jyotisa. B u t accumulation of this error is prevented by tying the
Yuga to the correct Saka year, by the instruction to use the Saka year for finding the year of theyuga.
(This is of the same nature as tying the lunar year to the solar.) It may be said, i n passing, that at
the period when the VJ was followed, actual observation was used to find out when a correction was
wanted and the same made by simply omitting an intercalation, for which, it is possible, they could
even have discovered a formula i n the long r u n . W e have made this clear in our Notes to the VJ,
(Indian National Se. A e . , New Delhi, 1985) and the d u r i n g the Seminar on Indian Calendar held
by the Institute of Traditional Cultures, University of Madras. (Bulletin of the Institute of Traditional
Cultures, Madras, 1968, Part I, page 60.) W h e n thus the accumulation of error is taken care of,
giving 366 days to the year is extremely convenient for civil, calendrical, and even religious
purposes, since it makes calculations easy i n the same way as we, even now, take the year to have
365 days, and the months 31 etc. days. W e get 183 days for each ayana, 122 days for each cdtarmdsya,
and61 dzysiorezchrtu,allinwholenumbers. T h e r e are 6 lidt^ana months i n the ywga. Eventhejawra
month has 30 days and a half, a fraction easy to work with. Further, the fortnight or paksa was the
unit used then i n the place of the modern week. W e have shown, i n our Notes o n verses 2 and 4
above, how it was secured that the dates follow consecutively i n the paksa, a factor so essential for
a civil calendar. T h e approximateness of the tithis etc. being mean, is of course there, but this is only
an advantage i n civil reckoning. A s for religious purposes, the true tithis etc. required for rites like
darsa-purna-mdsa were guessed from earlier observations, as we have said, and there are several
indications i n the Vedas that such was the case. T h e abhyudayesti, enjoined to be performed i f the
M o o n is observable i n the east between the anvddhdna o n the previous day and the isti on the next
day, is one such indication, for, i f the visibility had been properly calculated from the true S u n and
M o o n , using drkkarma etc. there would be no need for abhyudayesti at all.

Thus ends Chapter Twelve entitled Taitamaha Siddhanta'

in the Paiicasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
C o l . A.D.^ ( A o m ^ ) ^dlMtjfa^lTl aKVilmMtB.^rMdltHjfa^l-^ aKVil^mi^lrC^^dWC^^I-dlm^KVll^'mH:
 Chapter Thirteen

SITUATION OF THE EARTH: COSMOGONY

t 4 H c ( H i 3?^TniTt r T ^ 5 r :

Situation of the earth

1. T h e s p h e r i c a l e a r t h w h i c h is c o n s t i t u t e d o f the five elements, stands
p o i s e d i n the r e g i o n o f space, m a r k e d by the host o f stars f o r m i n g a cage as it
were.

Note: T h e earth is called so because of the five elements constituting it, it is predominantly
earthy.

2. T h e w h o l e earth-surface is spotted by trees, m o u n t a i n s , cities, rivers,

oceans, etc. T h e M e r u m o u n t a i n , ( f o r m i n g the N o r t h pole), is the abode o f
D e v a s . T h e A s u r a s , ( D e m o n s ) , are d o w n b e l o w (i.e. at the S o u t h pole.)

1-4. Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a o n B S 2 . 5 5 ; b y it; C.D.^

Suryadeva and Nilakantha on ABh. d. A l . ^ :
Gola. 6; 2-3 by Prthiidaka on BrSS 2a. A2.'dgRTT. Al.HJK-WMi^R^ B.H'KHHWi^R^
21.3; 3 by Suryadeva on A B / i . Gola 12. b. 32.^^^:
la. A . ^ c. A.lfi*rai
XIII.6 XIIl. SITUATION OF T H E EARTH 249

3. J u s t as the r e f l e c t i o n o f the objects o n the b u n d o f a water course is

u p s i d e - d o w n , so the A s u r a s are, (with respect to the Devas). T h e A s u r a s too
c o n s i d e r the Devas to be u p s i d e - d o w n .

4. J u s t as the flame o f the fire, o b s e r v e d by m e n here, flares u p w a r d s , a n d

a n y t h i n g t h r o w n u p falls d o w n towards the e a r t h , the same u p w a r d flaring o f
the flame, a n d the d o w n - w a r d f a l l i n g o f a heavy object is e x p e r i e n c e d by the
A s u r a s , (at the a n t i - p o d a l r e g i o n ) .

l a R J R ^ ^ oJ^*4femt ^ ( S ^ S ) ^ :

Rotation of the earth

5. T h e axis o f the e a r t h extends r i g h t u p a n d r i g h t d o w n to the stellar
sphere. T h e stellar s p h e r e , b o u n d by the axis to the e a r t h , rotates by the w i n d
system c a l l e d Pravaha.
Note: Seven wind systems are spoken of by H i n d u astronomers. T h e uppermost, blowing
permanently westward in the region of the planets and stars, is the cause of their westward rotation
once a day.

6. O t h e r s say that the e a r t h rotates o n its axis, l i k e a n object p l a c e d at the

h u b o f a w h e e l , a n d not the stars. I f so, birds l i k e the eagle flying u p i n t o the
sky, c a n n o t reach t h e i r nests back.

Note. This is what is meant: D u r i n g the time they are away from the nest, they would have been
carried far away by the rotating earth, from the spot o f origin o f their flight and the birds cannot
reach the nest. But they do reach, and so this theory is false.

3a. A.B.dolWdHI ( B 3 . ^ ^ ) ; Cdd^^-dHI Utpala on 2,pp.56-57, and 6 c-d quoted by

b. B1.3.^?II^ P r t h u d a k a o n B r 5 5 21.4.
c. Al.cTSnfrl; A 2 . < T ^ ^ ; B . c l i : ^ . B . ^ l ^
A . H a p l . o m . ^ [... 5a. B . ^ e g q f ^ ^ ; U . ^ e ^ M . A . ^ a j i t
(in verse 4) ^- U.^qlfefk^ A . B . ^ P T :
d. B 1 . 2 . f ^ n ^ A.^^A.iig^;B1.3.^;B2.^
4a-b. B.%3lf^?^#^; D . f W [ f e ^ ] d. B . 5 I ? ^ ; C . D . U . - S I ^
c. B.'^ISi^ 6a. A.?FTB.lF?^'g; U.t?8jfclfi3
5. Q u o t e d by U t p a l a o n fiS 2 , p . 5 6 b. A . ? I ^ B I . % q :
a n d by Prthiidaka on BrSS 21.4: 6-8 quoted by c. B . ^ t ^ A . ^ t a ; B.fl^
250 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIII.13

V9

7. F u r t h e r , o n account o f the great speed o f the rotation o f the earth, banners,

flags, etc. w i l l always be f l o w n westwards, (just as the c l o t h o f a m a n r u n n i n g
eastwards i n still a i r , is b l o w n westwards). If, to obviate this objection, a very
slow r o t a t i o n is p o s t u l a t e d , h o w does the r o t a t i o n (once a day), take place at
all (i.e. o n e r o t a t i o n c a n n o t be c o m p l e t e d i n o n e day).

8. A r h a t , (the p r o p o u n d e r o f the J a i n r e l i g i o n ) has w r i t t e n that there are

two S u n s a n d two M o o n s , e a c h r i s i n g alternately. I f so, h o w does the l i n e j o i n -
i n g the S u n a n d the celestial p o l e goes r o u n d exactly o n c e i n a day r o u n d the
pole?

Note. This observation shows that the celestial sphere movers once rouAd in a day and carries
with it all heavenly bodies. So the same Sun appears each day after one rotation. Therefore, the
postulation o f a second Sun is purposeless. T h e same for the M o o n .

di^l^UHIHI W ! ^ r f ^ W ^ II I

^(^) r^%WA\ A W I H I ^ T O ? ^ : II

8a. A . % 5 ; B.^ _
7a. A.Tfl^ b. A.B.C.D.U.^*W<I<4 Rb<rl^ (A-^)
b. A . B . W % a i l I ; D . W ? ^ c. B.M"i'W^1%
c. B.WI*il<u| d. B.H^i^;U.g5|^
d. B.H(M'II A.WIW; B.^Rc^ltr^
XIII.13 XIIl. SITUATION OF T H E EARTH 251

Situation of the Gods and Asuras

9. T h e S u n , situated at the beginning o f the sign Mesa, moves along the h o r i z o n
i n the clockwise d i r e c t i o n , as seen by the D e v a s , at the N o r t h p o l e . A s seen at
the equator, it moves u p w a r d s ( a l o n g the p r i m e vertical). F o r the A s u r a s at
the S o u t h p o l e it moves a l o n g the h o r i z o n , i n the a n t i - c l o c k w i s e d i r e c t i o n .

10. T h e S u n at the e n d o f the s i g n G e m i n i is seen m o v i n g (by the Devas)

r o u n d at a n a l t i t u d e o f 24. O n that day, it is seen c r o s s i n g the z e n i t h at U j j a i n .

{Note. V M considers that the m a x i m u m declination of the Sun is 24, and the latitude o f Ujjain
is 24, which is only approximately correct.)
11. T h u s , o n that day, at m i d - d a y , t h e r e is n o s h a d o w cast b y the g n o m o n at
U j j a i n . N o r t h o f U j j a i n the m i d - d a y s h a d o w is d i r e c t e d n o r t h , a n d f o r p e o p l e
s o u t h o f U j j a i n the s h a d o w is d i r e c t e d s o u t h .

12. S o m e say, " w h e n the S u n is situated i n the t h r e e signs M e s a , Rsabha and

Mithuna, it is day-time for the Devas, but when i n the signs Karkataka, Simha and
Kanya, it is night-dme. I salute them, (and wish to be r i d of them since they are quite
wrong.)

Note. T h e authors of the Dharmasastras, followed by the generality of people, consider that the
uttardyana, i.e. the northward course o f the Sun from the beginning o f Makara to the end o f
Mithuna is day-time for Devas. Its southward course from the beginning of Karka^a to the end of
Dhanus is considered their night-dme. It is their ignorance that is referred to here.

13. M o v i n g i n the same n o r t h latitudes w h e n i n K a r k a t a , S i r n h a a n d K a n y a ,

as w h e n i n M i t h u n a , R s a b h a a n d M e s a , h o w c a n the S u n be seen a n d n o t seen
by the D e v a s , so that it is d a y - t i m e (in the first three m o n t h s , ) a n d n i g h t - t i m e
(in the n e x t three m o n t h s ) .

Note. T h e mistake o f these people lies i n thinking that uttardyaria is the day-dme o f the Devas,
and daksiridyana is night-time. It is only when the Sun is north of the equator while i n the 6 signs
Mesa to Kanya, it can be seen by the Devas, forming their day-time, and i n the 6 other signs, it can-
not be seen, and it is night-dme.
9-13 Quoted by Utpala on 5 S 2. pp. c. A.<l^f^mi^; C D . c i ^ ^
57-58,9 quoted by Prthudaka on BrSS 21.6; B . H a p l . om. -.mm^ (1 lb) [
12quotedby ParamesvaraonAW. Gola 14. 12d] Scribe oblivious of the omission and
^ ^^^^1^ numbers the extant verses consecutively
b^ A . W W l l f ^ : ; B . ^ P t ^ : ( B 3 . ^ : ) andbreaksthelinmostmthemeti^
c B ^ W ^ m Wo) ' 12a. A . t ^ ^ U . ^ f ^ ^ ^ ; Pa.t^^;
d. B.^mmm Pr.^5%
10a. B . o % ^ A . B . f ^ A.CDU.to^ ^
b. A l . ^ * l W ^ , A 2 . ^ - m - % ; Pa-^n^^^^Mfiro%TP^^: | ^
B.<=^N#Vird^lMl^:; ^^a. A . C J ) . U B . ^ ^ - ^ ^
d. A . ^ R t e T O T j B . ^ T t T O ^ ^- A . ^ 5 P r ( A 2 . ^ ^ ^ ) ; B . ^ ^ l l ^ l ^
lla-b. A . O T l ^ ^ W ^ ; B . S r a l ^ ^ 3 c 3 ^ c . B 1 . 2 . ^ B . ^ f r ^ a
252 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X1II.16

-^F^S^ ^ciMci %TPt>^af 4)vi^ijnrl I

^TO^f^uii-d^mii 5 R q ^ # 3 g T q tmj^ II

T?^ ^ wcictiijiiKi ^ ( F ) ^ 4 l v i n v w i P j

Signs and Yojanas

14. F o r t h e D e v a s , i.e. at t h e N o r t h p o l e , w h e r e t h e z e n i t h is the n o r t h celes-
tial p o l e , a n y visible semi-great-circle p a s s i n g t h r o u g h the z e n i t h is a m e r i d i a n
o n the e a r t h . It is 3 signs distance, i.e. 9 0 , f r o m the z e n i t h to the h o r i z o n . T h i s
is to be d i v i d e d i n t o 9 0 parts, so that e a c h d i v i s i o n is a d e g r e e .

Note. These semi-circles are actually the meridians o f places having the respective meridians of
longitude o n the earth. Conventionally, Ujjain longitude is the zero longitude, like Greenwich in
modern astronomy.

15. T h e s e d e g r e e - d i v i s i o n s i n t h e sky a r e the zeniths o f c o r r e s p o n d i n g

degrees o f latitudes o n the e a r t h a l o n g a n y m e r i d i a n , a n d t h e distance
b e t w e e n e a c h d e g r e e o f l a t i t u d e is 8 8/9 yojanas.

Note. Since the degrees of latitude are zero at the equator and 90 at the N.pole, and the same to
the S.pole, i n the visible half of the meridian circle, the circumference of the earth is 360 equal to
360 X 8 8/9 yojanas = 3200yojanas. Aryabhata'sy^yana-measure is very nearly V M ' s .

16. T h u s f o r 9 0 , t h e r e a r e 800yojanas, c a l c u l a t e d . W h e n a n o b s e r v e r o n a n y
m e r i d i a n sees the S u n r i s i n g , it is m i d d a y o n t h e m e r i d i a n 800yojanas (east) o f
him.

Note. T h e mean sunrise is meant here since the actual sunrise is affected with cara:

14-17 Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a o n B S 2 , p . 5 8 .
c. A.'?TO^'jllTi<|4|>J|; B.'?1RC^8(1"|1T1<I4"I;
14a. B.^a5^^ U.^^^
A.'^nairaM; B . d. A . B . D . 3 I c ^ ^ ; C . U . - S I ^ ^ : A.^Wf;
b. A.B.ilVW^^II:; C.D.<|!^W*^i^ll: B . K>^; C.U.#2W; D . * ^ :
c. A . W U l ^ ; B 1 . 3 . ^ ^ t T # ; B 2 . ^ ^ s l 5 ^ A.D.ynt^i^
d. B.<i<;'HiTi^ 16a. A.B.^H=it^c<liv1
15a. B.'J.^'hlVJl; U.'J.^'t.Wl) b. B . ^ K I <;KIR <4l^
A.Bl.2.^: c. C D . om^H
b. A . ^ ; C . D . U . % 3 i ^ ^ C . cTgW^lT^; D . d^MHI"II^Vl. B . ^
XIIl.21 Xlll. S n U A l l O N OF THE EARTH 253

<i^M c^lfPTT: ^ ( v l f ^ d l ^ T t r l ^ ^ m ^

Position of Lanka and Ujjayini

17. T h e m i d - d a y o f L a n k a is the same as that at U j j a i n , w h i c h is n o r t h o f
L a r t k a o n the same l o n g i t u d e . B u t t h e i r d a y - t i m e d u r a t i o n s are d i f f e r e n t ,
except w h e n the S u n is o n the e q u a t o r .

Measures of the earth etc.

18. T h e c i r c u m f e r e n c e o f the e a r t h is 3 2 0 0 yojanas. W h e n situated o n the
e q u a t o r , the S u n is visible f r o m p o l e to p o l e at a l l latitudes, ( m a k i n g the day
a n d n i g h t equal).

19. T h e m i d d l e o f the e a r t h , (the N o r t h p o l e is m e a n t here), is n o r t h o f U j j a i n

by 5 8 6 2/3 yojanas. It is n o r t h o f L a r t k a by 8 0 0 yojanas.

Note: T h e distance in ladtude from L a i i k a to Ujjain is 24, and from Ujjain to the N o r t h Pole is
66. T h u s 6 6 x \ ' 8 W = 586 2/3, and 90 x 8 8/9 = 800.

17a. A.B2.3f5pRl; B 1 . 3 . 3 * # A . B 1.2.#FRr^;

18-19 Q u o t e d b y U t p a l a o n B S 2 . p . 5 8 .
B3.-?ifr^
18c. A . c i r a ^ ; C.cl^vn# A.-^^FTSI^
b. B . Hid l^dl-Mltl>l |; B 3 . yHW:!)
d. A . B . ^ ^ R ^ t # A . B . C . f ^ l ^ ; D . W l ^
c. A . B . I I W I
19a. A . o ^ q ^ B.W?lf%
d. A . B . f 5 3 ^ ( B 2 . 3 . - ^ )
b. B . % R . U .
Al.l^^cidl-q:; A2.f5r....5ra)^:; B 2 . 3 . ^ ^ : ;
d. A . B 1 . 3 . - O T T . B . ^ :
Bl.^^:
254 PANCASIDDHANTI KA XIII.23

Visibility of the Sun

20. A t a n y latitude, the e q u a t o r i a l S u n is b e n t so m a n y degrees south at m i d -
day, as the n o r t h p o l e is raised u p f r o m the n o r t h p o i n t o f the h o r i z o n .
21. G o i n g n o r t h f r o m U j j a i n , 373 1/3 yojanas, t h e stellar sphere, ( m a r k e d by
the 27 asterisms o f the e c l i p t i c r i s i n g i n a n o r d e r ) becomes d i s c o n t i n u o u s , (i.e.
the o r d e r i n the r i s i n g is d i s r u p t e d ) .

Note. A t 66 N o r t h latitude, which is 42, (i.e. 66 - 24), north o f Ujjain, peculiarities occur in
the rising of the signs of the eclipdc, duradon of day-time etc. 42 = 37.3 1/3 yojanas.

22. A t that latitude, the S u n c a n be visible e v e n t h r o u g h o u t a day. N o r t h a n d

n o r t h o f this place, t h e S u n m a y n o t set m o r e a n d m o r e t h a n o n e day, u n t i l at
the n o r t h - p o l e it w i l l n o t set f o r six m o n t h s at a stretch.

23. A t a distance greater t h a n 403 5/9 yojanas n o r t h o f U j j a i n , the signs

D h a n u s a n d M a k a r a c a n n e v e r be visible.
Note. T h e Dhanus and Makara segments of the ecliptic have a south declination greater than 20
36'. In the north latitudes 90 - 20 36' (= 69 24') and beyond, the zenith distance of these signs
becomes greater than 90, and so they are not visible in those latitudes. 69 24' is 45 24' north of
Ujjain, i.e. 45 24' x 8 8/9 = 403 myojanas north.

20-29. Quoted by Utpala on 22a. A . ^ ^ ; B.^^(B3.'RIlt)

2,p.58-59. C . D . ^ ^ :
20a. B.f^^I^^ b. B1.3.^fl5f^; B 2 . ^ R ^
b. A . ^R'Ml^rai B . f^R'MI ?*HI c. A.Bl."^f|cR
B2.^'2ni 23a. B . % r r a A.^^mil:; U . ^ m i l ^
c. B.i<HTt5<i[MTiqf% b. A . c . ^ p ! # m ; B.^^;qfw; D.^^qf^i^Fi^
A l . f ^ ^ ^ i ^ ^ ; B . f t ^ (B2.1t5pfiT) A.B.D.^: (AI.^:; A2.^:)
d. A.^u|d*HN c m B3.ti<J'Nc^l:
c. B . W T A . ^ g t ^ ; B 2 . ? 5 f ^
2Ia. Al.l5Wf!f; A 2 . i ^ ; B . f 5 r a f c T . A 2 . ^ H ^ ^
d. Bl.^?^^^:
b. A . C . D . ^ f M f ^ ; B.^frat^
A2.'%^^. A . 1 ^ ^ ^
c. A.B.C.D.ftwfcT
d. A . B 1 . 2 . C . D . i T ^ s q . B.WlTTtaf:
XIII.28 Xlll. S l T L A l ION OF IHF, EARTH 255

M^Vlifd M ^ V l d l ^sjt^ ^ ^ Ticf |

24. A t latitudes n o r t h o f U j j a i n greater t h a n 4 8 2 yojanas a n d a fraction

Vrscika, Dhanus, Makara and K u m b h a signs will never be visible.

Note. These four signs have a declination greater than 11 44' south. Therefore latitudes 90
I r 44' = 78 16' North and more cannot see these signs, since their zenith distance is greater than
90. 78 16' is 54 16' north or Ujjain = 54 16' X 8 8/9 = 482 10/27yo7ms.

25. 5 8 6 2/3 yojanas n o r t h o f U j j a i n , i.e. at the N o r t h p o l e , the s e c o n d h a l f o f

the ecliptic, i.e. the signs T u l a to M i n a , c a n n o t be seen.

Nole. Being situated south of the celestial equator, the zenith distance of these signs from the
North pole is greater than 90, and therefore they are not visible at the North pole. T h e distance
of the North pole from Ujjain is 90 - 24 = 66 = 586 213 yojanas.

26. P e o p l e o n the e q u a t o r see the N o r t h p o l a r star o n t h e h o r i z o n . A t the

N o r t h p o l e , p e o p l e observe it at the z e n i t h . I n between, p e o p l e observe it at
attitudes 0 to 9 0 .

Note. As the north latitude increases, so the latitude of the Pole star increases cfjually. This fact
is mentioned elsewhere also.

24a. A.^'lRTB.?J?ftfll c. Al.'H^TST; B 1 . 3 . ' T ^ ; B 2 . W ? t

b. A."?ra!wr; B1.3."?mtc?FTTi^ B 3 . ? I ^ ^ B.^^a^
D.Vldfc!4I'il d. A.^Ttcqra^'TRq^; B . % r ^ (B2.cqT'?) ^
c. A.^^'jq^'ltcqfQ^o; B . % q g ( B 2 . 1 )
26a. A . B .
b. B.'-ffiRTl A . W f i s T ; B . W % (B2.''f) ^
d. B 1 . 3 . ^ ? ^ U . o m 3 # f A.B.^^?T|^
25a. A . ^ 5 ? M ; B 1 . 3 . ^ l 5 ? M a n d d. B l . c T ? ^ ; B3.-a^^^A.B1.2.\qTTcn:;
B2.^S?T# in place o f ^ ^ ^ B3.\qTM
256 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIII.32

27. F o r the p e o p l e o n M e r u , i.e. at t h e N o r t h P o l e , the S u n is visible at a

stretch, w h e n it is i n the six signs M e s a to K a n y a . W h e n it is i n the next six
signs, it is visible to the d e m o n s at the S o u t h p o l e , at a stretch.

Note. M o v i n g i n the first six signs, the Sun's zenith distance is less than 90 at the North pole and
it is visible to the Devas there. Being greater than 90 at the South pole it is invisible to the Asuras
at the South pole. It is vice versa in the next six signs. T h u s the Devas and the Asuras have their day
and night alternately, each for six months at a stretch.
28. F o r t h e m , the first p o i n t o f M e s a is t h e Lagna o r O r i e n t ecHptic p o i n t ,
p e r m a n e n t l y , M a r s is the L o r d o f the Drekkdna, Navdrhsa, Dvadasdrhsa a n d
Trimsdrhsa lagnas p e r m a n e n t l y .

Note. T h e first point of Mesa moves r o u n d and round there o n the horizon, and no other point
rises o r sets. T h e lordships are as prescribed i n the Hordsdstra. There the L o r d o f Mesa is not only
the master the Rdsi-lagna, but also of Drekkdna, Navdrhsa etc. lagnas.

29. L a i i k a is b e n e a t h the celestial e q u a t o r , i.e. the celestial e q u a t o r itself is the

p r i m e vertical at L a f i k a . T h e r e t h e stellar s p h e r e is e q u a l l y d i v i d e d (into the
n o r t h e r n h a l f w i t h the N . P . at its centre, a n d t h e s o u t h e r n h a l f w i t h the S.P.
at its centre). T h e r e the day a n d n i g h t are always 3 0 nddis each.

Note. T h i s is because all diurnal circles o f the Sun are divided into two equal halves by the
equatorial horizon. Note also that what is said o f Laiika applies to all places o n the equator.

[^qSRFIT:]

trf?T^ raf?T ^ <rl<-cbWi 3 ; s ^

27a. B1.3.yTb^r<d:; B2.'Hd^f<d: 29a. B . t ^ ^ ^ (B2.Qrr)^QfRdI3l ( B 2 . ^ ) f f

b. B . ^ a ^ c. B.Bi!^HI*J1 A.B.^cRT
c-d. B.M"^l<-MWl (B2.'^=?TCTt) d. A . B . C . D . U . R V H W i ^ ^ ( A . ^ )
28a. A . ^ ; B . c F I I c ^ a (B1.2.'?Rr; U . f ^ )
b. B.^:W^
d. B . c R ^
XIII.33 XIII. SITUATION OF THE EARTH 257
Astronomical observation
30-32 Place a p l a n k i n a r a i s e d p o s i t i o n , w i t h its surface p l a n e , as e x a m i n e d by
d r o p p i n g water o n it. Set it so as t o have its surface f i o r i z o n t a l a n d level w i t h
the eye, a n d its p a r a l l e l sides n o r t h - s o u t h a n d east-west. A t the s o u t h e r n edge,
i n the m i d d l e , h i n g e a s i g h t i n g tube (sanku) e q u a l i n l e n g t h to the n o r t h - s o u t h
l e n g t h o f the p l a n k . W i t h t h e eye at the h o l e o f the r i g i d s i g h t i n g i n s t r u m e n t ,
at the h i n g e , l o w e r the i n s t r u m e n t so m u c h , that t h e N o r t h - p o l e - s t a r is
s i g h t e d t h r o u g h t h e h o l e o f t h e i n s t r u m e n t . W h e n l o w e r e d c o m p l e t e l y , (the
observation) w i l l be t o w a r d s L a r t k a : w h e n v e r t i c a l it w i l l be towards M e r u ; a n d
l o w e r e d a p p r o p r i a t e l y , it w i l l b e e q u a l to t h e (local) l a t i t u d e (as read) f r o m t h e
plank.
Note. F r o m the next verse we can understand that V . M . implies here that the north-south length
of the plank is 120 units, so that the length of the sighting instrument also is 120units = R. So taken,
the perpendicular dropped on to the plank from the end o f the instrument will be equal to R sine
raised angle, and the base from the foot of the perpendicular to the hinge will be R cos. raised angle.

33. W h e n so s i g h t i n g the pole-star, the p e r p e n d i c u l a r , d r o p p e d o n to the

p l a n k f r o m t h e e n d o f the sight is the R . s i n e o f the l a t i t u d e o f the place. T h e
base so f o r m e d is the R cosine o f the latitude o f the place. T h e R cosine Hne,
i.e. the base, c o i n c i d e s w i t h the n o r t h s o u t h - d i r e c t i o n l i n e .

Note. V M uses a table o f R sines, taking R = 120 units. Hence the rule.

Fig. XIII. 1
RSin 0

Hinge J ,

30-34. Quoted by Utpala on B S 2 . p . 5 9 32a. A 2 . ^

b. B . ^ I W ( T A . B . ^ ( B . ^ ) T t q ( B . ^ ) l
30a. B.'^T^TtficlI^;
b. B . ' i i ^ . c . D . u . ^ q s n c. A . W i l d ; B . ^ W i l d l ; C.D.^^RR!^

c. A . ^ ; B.^1T. A.'^Iff; B1.2."?T?Tf d. A.#aT^ngjIW^; B . ^ l ^ ^ ^ ^ : ( B 2 . ^ 0 ;

d. Al.-SfcR; A2.'5lt^; B.3lf?m

31a. B.^^l^nf ( B 3 . o m f ) A . i g ^ ; B . ^ 33a. A . c T ^ ^ ; B . c T ^ ' ^

b. B . ^ ; A.C.D.^^nq^. A 2 . " ? f ^ b. A.B.^Bl^;
c. B.5(m^<=(il B.!^|^ftc(<qt (B3.'^)
d. A.B.C.D.^RTO^ c. A1.^^;B.?I5^
258 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIII.37

34. L e a r n e d m e n , o b s e r v i n g t h i n g s f o r themselves thus, d e t e r m i n e the

N o r t h p o l e , the d i m e n s i o n s o f the w h o l e e a r t h , etc. as o n e w o u l d d e t e r m i n e
the salty taste o f the w h o l e q u a n t i t y o f the s o l u t i o n by tasting a small q u a n t i t y
o f it.

Note. What is meant here is that observadon made at a small place on the earth can give us know-
ledge of the whole earth, by suitable reasoning.

Moon's luminosity
3 5 . T h e S u n lights u p o n e h a l f o f t h e M o o n situated b e l o w it always, (at any
p o s i t i o n r o u n d the earth), a n d t h e o t h e r h a l f is d a r k b y its o w n shadow, (i.e.
the M o o n o b s t r u c t i n g the s u n - l i g h t b y its o w n b o d y ) j u s t l i k e a p o t p l a c e d i n
sun-light.
Note. This is because the M o o n gets its light from the Sun, and is not self-luminous.

36. T h e Sun's rays, r e f l e c t e d i n t h e watery M o o n dispels the darkness o n the

e a r t h , j u s t as t h e rays o f the s u n f a l l i n g o n a m i r r o r i n the i n t e r i o r o f a house,
does.

Note. It is the belief of the ancients that the Sun is fiery, the M o o n watery and the earth mainly
earthy.
3 7 . A c c o r d i n g to the p o s i t i o n o f t h e M o o n u n d e r n e a t h the S u n , every day,
the l i g h t e d u p part increases ( f r o m t h e t i m e o f n e w m o o n , as seen f r o m the
earth), as the l i g h t e d p o r t i o n increases o n the pot, o n the western side, i n the
afternoon.

Note. Instead of the expression, after-noon a better one would be, 'as the day-time elapses,
beginning from sunrise.'
34c. B l . 3 . ^
d. A . B . D . T # T W l P s r a t S e ^ ; ( B . T ^ ; D.T^TPT^)
XIII.41 Xlll. SITUATION OF T H E EARTH 259

38. A n y w h e r e o n the M o o n , its d e n i z e n s , (the Pitrs, in this case) see the Sun for
half the time d u r i n g each fortnight, (on the whole, not seeing the Sun for a fortnight's
time, and seeing it for a fortnight's time), because the visible part of the sky extends
only upto 90 from the zenith.

q ^ iJt^ ^^JsmogcWT:^:

The Planets and their situation

39. B e y o n d t h e m o o n are o r b i t i n g h i g h e r a n d h i g h e r . M e r c u r y , V e n u s , the
S u n , M a r s , J u p i t e r a n d S a t u r n , a n d b e y o n d that t h e r e are fixed stars. A l l t h e
planets ( f r o m M e r c u r y to S a t u r n ) m o v e i n t h e i r o w n i n d i v i d u a l orbits at a c o n -
stant speed.

Note. A l l this is H i n d u theory.

4 0 . J u s t as the spokes o f the oil-press w h e e l are thick, (close to o n e a n o t h e r ) ,
n e a r the n a v e l , a n d t h e space b e t w e e n o n e a n o t h e r increases as t h e r i m is
a p p r o a c h e d , so the l i n e a r e x t e n s i o n o f t h e rdsi increases as t h e orbits are
situated h i g h e r a n d h i g h e r .

35a. Q u o t e d by Prthudaka on BrSS d. B.fT^^RwW:

21.8 end, 36 quoted by Siirydeva on 37a. A.C.D.^
Abh. Gola. 5, and Makkibhatta on b. B . U^M 7^2? A . qM??:
Sid. Sekhara 1.1. d. B . W l ^

35a. A2.1wmf A . ^ : ; D .
A. B . 1 ^ # : 38a. B.3TJ#R!lft?^g
c. A.W^WWfHrl b. B.#eR%
36a. B.^?#leM. A.-if^"?Tf?lRl. A.f^iqt ( A 2 . ^ ) ; c. A."^'!?!^; D.^iqT5*r
B. -sra^ d. A . ^ R ^ : ; B . C . ^ M ( C . r I : ) ;
c. A . B . m q f %
260 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIII.42

4 1 . S i t u a t e d near-most, t h e M o o n goes r o u n d i n t h e shortest time, its o r b i t

b e i n g the shortest. B u t S a t u r n situated farther-most, i n its longest orbit,
c a n n o t m o v e so fast, i.e. moves slowest.

[TfRT-i^FT-g^rfflltTT:]

3 ^ s h A u i l ^ q m g w n ^ f ^ : Cm) \\^^
Lords of the Months, Days and Year
4 2 . T h e successive L o r d s o f t h e M o n t h are the successive f a r t h e r planets,
b e g i n n i n g f r o m the M o o n . T h e L o r d s o f the H o r a s are t h e successive nearer
a n d n e a r e r planets, b e g i n n i n g f r o m S a t u r n . T h e successive fifth i n the
a s c e n d i n g o r d e r o f its distance is the successive L o r d o f the D a y . T h e sixth i n
its a s c e n d i n g distance o r d e r is successively t h e L o r d o f the year.

Note. T h e month meant here is the sdvana month of 30 days, and the year, the sdvana year of 360
days. W e get the lords of the hords; Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Sun, Venus, Mercury, M o o n , Saturn etc.
the lords o f the day, Sunday, Monday, etc., the lords o f the months. M o o n , Mercury, Venus, Sun,
Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, M o o n etc., and the lords o f the year. M o o n , Jupiter, Sun, Mercury, Saturn,
Mars, Venus, M o o n etc.

M^R4<4lPd*>NI*ic|<l^(i^(^<(^<(^dl'Mi

Thus ends Chapter Thirteen entitled 'Situation of the Earth:

Cosmogony' in the Paiicasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
39-41. Quoted by Utpala on BS, 2, 41a. B.Tlf^rotsR^ ( B 2 . 3 . ' ? M H )
pp. 42-43 b. B.iTST???:
c. A.SJ'i^t^cn-Jiql
39a. A . ^Fsa^;%lftl^(A2.1f);
B1.2.^-5^l^'Mfed; B3.^5F5I^p^ d. B.i^^
A.B.omWIT; C . D . o m ^ ;
c. B . -SIMOT(B3.-SIM)
A . ^icM^cll; B.-FR5(T
d. A.3lT:^. B1.3.^RiWrf:
40a. B 1 . 3 . ^ e l ^ 42a. A.B.^RraiM^#l! ( B . - ^ : )
b. B.1%cR. B . ^ l n b. W?i
c. B . i p ^ W c. A . 3 ^ ; A . f ^ ^ ; B.t^M^
c-d. U.^*^i H^^<^ yfeldllH d. A . B . W T M I : A . B . C . D . W :
d. B.^dR^dlR. A . ^ ; B . ^

l.col. A.5cii=W*H^:<<Hlc;^'il*^l'M: B . C . D . l ^ ( B . o m ffcl) t (Bl.2.^) c 1 1 + 4 ^ ^ 5|4l<Vll52M:

 Chapter Fourteen

GRAPHICAL METHODS AND ASTRONOMICAL

INSTRUMENTS*

Introductory
In chapter I, vss. 5-7, Varahamihira enumerated yantra and chedyaka among the topics to be dealt
with i n the present work. T h e present chapter deals with these two topics.
T h e compound word chedyakayantrdni is equivalent to the compound word yantracchedydni of I.
7. T h e word chedyaka means graphics or graphical methods and the wordyanZra, in the present con-
text, means astronomical instruments.
Dvivedi interpreted the word chedyakayantrdni as follows: "That which cuts or removes doubts is
chedynka; the instruments which serve as chedyaka are chedyakayantrdni." If it were so, there would be no
difference betweenyarifra and chedyakayantra. Chedyaka and Yantra, in fact, are two distinct topics of
Indian astronomical works called Gola or Spherics. Lalla, Vatesvara and Bhaskara II, for example,
have earmarked two separate chapters for their treatment i n their works on spherics. Pingree, on
the other hand, translates chedyakayantrdni as "the Magical Diagrams of the (Graphical) Construc-
dons." But the diagrams or astronomical instruments discussed i n the present chapter bear no
magical significance.

[^:]

GRAPHICAL METHODS
Ascensional differences of the zodiacal signs.
In III, 10-12, Varahamihira stated an approximate practical method for finding the ascensional
differences of the signs for places living between the Indian Ocean and the Himalayas and prom-
* This chapter was left untranslated by T.S. Kuppanna Sastri. The translation given here was supplied by K.S. Shukla.
 262 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIV.4

ised to give a method for other places in a subsequent chapter devoted to chedyaka. T h e following
rule is in fulfilment of that promise.

1. C o n s t r u c t o n the g r o u n d a level circle w i t h d i a m e t e r e q u a l to 180 digits.

O n its c i r c u m f e r e n c e p u t d o w n , at e q u a l distances, m a r k s s h o w i n g signs a n d
degrees (etc.). A l s o p u t d o w n m a r k s s h o w i n g the d e c l i n a t i o n s (of the e n d -
points o f the signs A r i e s , T a u r u s a n d G e m i n i ) . ( T h r o u g h the centre o f the
circle d r a w the n o r t h - s o u t h l i n e a n d at r i g h t angles to it d r a w three c h o r d s
t h r o u g h the m a r k s s h o w i n g the d e c l i n a t i o n s for the ends-points o f the signs
Aries, Taurus and Gemini).
2. F r o m the centre, d r a w three circles w i t h d i a m e t e r s e q u a l to the three
c h o r d s w h i c h have been d r a w n t h r o u g h the d e c l i n a t i o n m a r k s at r i g h t angles
to the n o r t h - s o u t h l i n e , a n d g r a d u a t e t h e m w i t h m a r k s (of signs a n d degrees)
like the first circle.
3. T h e n ( f r o m the same centre) d r a w a l i n e towards the latitude (i.e. towards
that p o i n t o f the first circle w h i c h m a r k s the latitude o f the place) a n d e x t e n d
it u p t o the m a r k ( i n d i c a t i n g the latitude o f the place) o n the c i r c u m f e r e n c e o f
the first circle. ( T h i s is the latitude-line). O n the c h o r d c o r r e s p o n d i n g to the
d e s i r e d d e c h n a t i o n {i.e. d e c l i n a t i o n o f the e n d - p o i n t o f the d e s i r e d sign), m e a -
sure the p o r t i o n l y i n g between the latitude-line a n d the n o r t h l i n e (i.e. the l i n e
d r a w n f r o m the centre to the n o r t h p o i n t ) .
4. L a y o f f the d o u b l e o f that (like a c h o r d ) o n the c o r r e s p o n d i n g circle. T e n
m u l t i p l i e d by o n e - h a l f o f the degrees i n the arc s u b t e n d e d by that c h o r d are
to be k n o w n as the vinddis o f ascensional d i f f e r e n c e i n the case o f the first s i g n .
I n the case o f the o t h e r two signs, they are the vinddis o f the m i x e d ascen-
sional difference (i.e., the m i x e d ascensional difference o f A r i e s a n d T a u r u s
a n d the m i x e d ascensional difference o f A r i e s , T a u r u s a n d G e m i n i ) .

Consider F"ig. 1. E N W S is the level circle of diameter 180 digits drawn on the ground, E, W , N
and S being the east, west, north and south cardinal points, respectively. E W is the east-west line
and N S the north-south line. T h e arcs E d , , Edgand Ed^ are equal to the declinations ff^, J ^ a n d c/!,
of the end-points, of the signs Aries, Taurus and Gemini respectively. W d ' = E d , . W d " = E d -
and Wd" = E d , , d.d', d.^d" and d.,d"' are the three chords corresponding to the declinations (f^, j - ^
and cT,,, respecdvely. These are at right angles to the north-south line.

Ic. A . T R ^ a 5 ^ C . 9 q f c . B.3T^
d. A . ^ T I ^ ; B.^mWT: d. A . B . Vl1-^*lKW ( B 2 . ? t e )
2b. B.^for^B2.3.?FW
4a. B.f|[55B1.3.W^; B 2 . ' 5 r R ! r f B . ^
c. AB.<=(<;=t)i(^; ( B . g a p f o r ^ )
b. A . B . o m f ^ B.H-^imi^l+KdW (B1.!) W :
d. A 2 . ^ ; B . ^ T l ^
c. A . ^ ^ ; B . f ^
3b. A . om'Jf A . ^ i q i ^ d. B2.%?T: B3.ftW
B . f^rf^JOTOiq^tn^ (B1.2. ^vqf#;o)
XIV.4 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 263

Fig. XIV. 1

T h e arc N L is equal to the latitude 0 of the place, L being the point marking the ladtude of the
place. O L is the latitude4ine drawn from 0 to meet the point L . O N is the north line.
enws is the circle drawn with centre 0 and diameter d, d'. (The other two circles drawn with
diameters d.^ d" and d,, d'" are not shown i n the figure), dl is the portion of the chord d, d ' lying bet-
ween O L and O N . In the triangle O d l ,
Od = Rsin (/,

dl = O d . t a n 0
= Rsin cfi.tan 0 , (1)

R denoting the radius o f the circle E N W S .

264 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIV.6

T h e chord D M D ' of the circle enws, with its middle point at M , is equal to 2dl. Let 2c, be the angle
subtended by D D ' at 0 (or, wdhat is the same thing, the arc D W D ' subtended by D D ' ) . 'I hen
1/2 D D ' = D M = O D sin c, = R c o s ^ , . sin c,.
1/2 D D ' = dl = Rsin,J',. tan 0 , from, (1).

.-.Rcos J*, sin c, = Rsin ei-tan0.

.-.sine, = tan j - , . tan 0 (2).

This c, is the ascensional difference of the end point of the sign Aries, or the ascensional differ-
ence for the sign Aries. See supra, I V . 26. See also I V . 34.
Since c, is equal to the number of degrees lying i n half rhe arc D w D ' , therefore the degrees in half
the arc D w D ' give the ascensional difference of the sign Aries. These degrees muldplied by 10 give
the corresponding vinddis.
Similarly, in the case of Taurus and Gemini. But in these cases if c, and c,, be the ascensional
differences for the end-points of Taurus and Gemini respectively, then
ascensional difference for Taurus = c, - c,
and ascensional difference for Gemini = c,, - c,^.

Rsine of the Sun's zenith distance for the given time, (and vice versa).
5. T h e nadis (elapsed since stinrise i n the f o r e n o o n o r to elapse before sunset
i n the afternoon) m u l t i p l i e d by 6 are degrees; the (versed) R s i n e o f that sub-
tracted f r o m the r a d i u s (R) a n d t h e n i n c r e a s e d by the R s i n e o f the Sun's z e n i t h
distance for m i d d a y gives the R s i n e o f the Sun's z e n i t h distance (for that
d m e ) . I n o r d e r to find the nadis ( f r o m the g i v e n R s i n e o f the S u n ' s z e n i t h dis-
tance) the (given) R s i n e o f the Sun's z e n i t h distance s h o u l d be d i m i n i s h e d by
the R s i n e o f the Sun's z e n i t h distance for m i d d a y .

6. W h a t e v e r is the s i x t h p a r t o f the degrees o f the arc c o r r e s p o n d i n g to the

(versed) R s i n e e q u a l to the d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n the g i v e n R s i n e o f the Sun's
z e n i t h distance (as d i m i n i s h e d by the R s i n e o f the Sun's z e n i t h distance f o r
m i d d a y ) a n d the r a d i u s {chdydharijdbhyantara), gives the nddis e l a p s e d since
sunrise i n the f o r e n o o n o r to elapse before sunset i n the a f t e r n o o n .
Let n be the nddis elapsed since sunrise i n the forenoon or to elapse before sunset i n the after-
noon, and the Sun's zenith distance at midday. T h e n , according to the rule stated in verse 5
above, the Rsine of the Sun's zenith distance for that time (which we shall denote by Rsinz) is given by

Rsinz = R - Rvers (6n) + Rsin z, (3)

where R stands for the radius.
XIV.6 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 265

This relation is approximately correct for a place on the equator, and is accurate at an equinox.
For any other place it is incorrect, for Rsin z really depends upon 0 , the latitude of the place, and
the Sun's declination on the day in question, besides the time of the day elapsed since sunrise i n
the forenoon or to elapse before sunset in the afternoon. A n y such formula must therefore involve
these elements.

Formula (3) stated above does not occur in any other work on Indian astronomy. B u t analogous
formulae do occur. O f these mention may be made of the following.

(i) Vasistha'sformula.

Let denote the gnomonic shadow at midday and .s the gnomonic shadow at any other time.
1 hen, in the forenoon:

(iag7i(i Sun) in mins.

and in the afternoon

s = i3 r - 12+,s see above 11.12-13)

10800 - (lagna - Sun) in mms. " '
(ii) I'aii/isa's/ormii/a

s = 6 X day-length _ + s,, gnomon = V2. Sec IV. 49.

day elapsed "

This formula was later restated by Mahavira in the form:

,s = i gnomon _ ] 2 + (gnomon = Vl.See Ganita-sara-safip-rahaAX. 18).

2 day elapsed / day-length > /

(iii) Sridhara'sformuhi
'/2gnomon day elapsed or to elapse
V= ^ =gnomon, where d =
d day-length
See Trisatikd (ed. Sudhakara Dvivedi), Rule 65.

This may be derived from Paulisa formula by assuming .v,^ = 0.

5^ridhara's formula was restated by Narayana Paiidita in the form:

5 = { -= day-length - 1} X gnomon
day elapsed or to elpase
See Gariita-kaumudi, Rule 13, p. 207.

5a. A.q^ilT^imi; B . ^ (B2.af) ^?fWFTT 6a. V>2.W^ d. A . B . ^ a i # ^ A . ^ n C . ^

(B2.WTT) ab. B . ^ ^ T T T W ^ A.-Jiraf; B.WT; C . [^]

b. A . ^ b. A . ^ ; B I . 2 . ^ ; B3.TO
c. A.^K^faRt B . ^ 0 ^ C. A.'SIP^:; B . 3 i r ^
266 PANCASlDDHANilKA

Formula (3) may also be stated in the form:

Rvers (6ra) = R - (Rsin z - Rsin 2^), so that
71 = one-sixth of the degrees in the arc corresponding to the versed Rsine equal to R - (Rsin 2 -
Rsin z ). Hence the rule stated in vs. 6.

V9

Right ascensions of the signs (defined by means of the armillary sphere)

7. T h e degrees i n the arcs o f the e q u a t o r vv^hich lies o r t h o g o n a l l y {tiryak) bet-
w e e n the n o r t h - s o u t h d e c l i n a t i o n arcs for the ends o f the signs, m u l t i p J i e d by
10, are the vinddis o f the r i g h t ascensions o f the signs ( A r i e s , T a u r u s a n d
G e m i n i ) i n t h e i r respective o r d e r .

Fig. X1V.2

In Fig. 2,S'R is the equator a n d ^ C the ecliptic. A P , B Q a n d C R are the declinations for the end-
points of the signs Aries, Taurus and Gemini, respectively. T h e n

' T P is the right ascension of Aries,

P Q i s the right ascension of Taurus,
and Q R is the right ascension of G e m i n i .

7a. C.\9raiT c. A . ^ : ; B . ^ T R ^
b. A . <|c|*HI!i'l; B . <N*H|!^II A . B . W ? r : d. A.f^^nfe^^" A . 3 ^ : , B . a w n

i. Chdydharijdbhyantara literally means the distance between the chdyd (i.e. Rsine of the .Sun's zenith distance) and
zon. This is equal to the difference between the Rsine of the Sun's zenith distance and the radius, for the former being
diminished by the Rsine of the Sun's zenith distance for midday as instructed in verse 5.
X I V . 10 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 267

T h e degrees of the equator multiplied by 10 are obviously vinddis.

T h e vinddis o f the right ascensions of the signs could also have been defined with the help of Fig.
1. Let the arc W P (in Fig. 1) be equal to 30 (i.e., the tropical longitude of the end-point of the final
sign Aries), O Q , the perpendicular dropped from P on O W intersecting the circle drawn with
radious Rcos ^ a t R, and O R T , the line drawn from O through R. T h e n the number of degrees
in the arc W T , multiplied by 10, are the vinddis of the right ascension of the first sign Aries. T h e
vinddi-s of the right ascensions of the second and third signs may also be defined similarly.

ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS
Gnomon

The Sun's declination defined by means of the moving gnomon and the armillary sphere.
8. W h a t e v e r be the p o s i t i o n o f the ( m o v i n g ) g n o m o n i n the p a t h d e s c r i b e d
by it (lit. i n the shadow), w h e t h e r at m i d d a y , o r w h e n towards the east o r
elsewhere, the a n g u l a r distance b e t w e e n the e q u a t o r (visuvat) a n d the t h r e a d
that proceeds f r o m the c e n t r e a n d passes t h r o u g h the vertex o f the g n o m o n
is c a l l e d the (Sun's) d e c l i n a t i o n .

8a. A.TnrmtlsncT[r; B . ^ 2 r t WIT; c. A.'Mld^^^l; B . ' M l d ^ l : C . [ W T R T ^ ]

C . [ i T ^ 1 g ^ ] cTII d. A . B . t ^ ^ R R ^ W ; C.ft^Ptrwt?raSI3feTT:
b. A . B . ^ P R ( B . ^ ) tit; C . ^ S ^ A . ^ R t ^ ^ : ; B . ^ : f e T T : ( B2. anf^i^:)

A.B.1^cIcI:-?TB.?T^; D . ? I f ^
268 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X I V . 11

Ijocal latitude (jrom the equinoctial midday shadow and vice versa)
9-10 (a-b). L a y o f f the (equinoctial m i d d a y ) s h a d o w towards the n o r t h , a n d
let a g n o m o n be caused to fall to the west (or east) f r o m the tip o f the shadow.
T h e n stretch a t h r e a d f r o m the centre a l o n g the h y p o t e n u s e (of the g n o m o n
triangle) u p to the c i r c u m f e r e n c e (of the circle d r a w n o n the g r o t u i d ) . T h e
(angular) distance between the p o i n t thus r e a c h e d a n d the e q u i n o c t i a l p o i n t
(i.e. the west o r east p o i n t , w h i c h e v e r is nearer) is the latitude o f the place.
S i m i l a r l y , f r o m the latitude o n e may f i n d the ( e q u i n o c t i a l m i d d a y ) shadow.
w ^
In Fig. 3, let E N W S be the circle drawn an level ground, E, N , W,
and S being the east, north, west and south cardinal points. O A is
the equinoctial midday shadow of the gnomon, A B the gnomon
which is caused to fall to the west fiom the tip of A of the equinoctial
midday shadow. O B P is the thread stretched along the
hypotenuse O B up the point P on the circumference of the circle.
T h e n , the angle P O N or the arc P N is equal to the alutude of the
equinoctial midday Sun, i.e., the colatitude of the place, a n d the
complementary angle P O W or arc P W is equal to the zenith dis-
tance of the equinoctial midday Sun, i.f., the latitude of the place.

Fig. XIV.3

Sun's longitude
10 (c-d)- I I . O n the d e s i r e d day find the S u n ' s d e c l i n a t i o n , n o m a t t e r w h e t h e r
it is g r e a t e r o r less t h a n the latitude. F i n d the R s i n e o f that a n d insert it bet-
w e e n the e c l i p t i c a n d the e q u a t o r (at r i g h t angles to the latter, i n its o w n
q u a d r a n t ) . T h e arc o f the e c l i p t i c m e a s u r e d eastwards f r o m the first p o i n t o f
A r i e s u p to the p o i n t w h e r e the R s i n e touches the e c l i p t i c , s h o u l d be k n o w n
as (the l o n g i t u d e of) the S u n .

9a. A . ^ ^ ^ ; B . f t 2 O T l ( B 2 . l 5 R ) 10c. A.5Z[T^; B.^S2FR^; D.5'^:^Pn

B . ^ f o r ^ B.^rai and hapl. om of one d. Al.TT?Rf%?*
1 l a . Al.cfHiT; A2.cFqT
b. A . ^ : ; B . W : a-b. B.Haplom.3t-:gif^
d. A . ^ ^ B 2 . ' ^ ' ? t ; B1.3.T3jT'^ c. B1.2.^gmT
10a. A.?lti?R; B.^TflScit d. B.'HH B.Wt^
b. A . ^ i ^ . B . ^
XIV.14 x i v . .Asi R ( ) N ( ) M K : A I . I N S ' I R L ' M E N I S 269

V-Shaped Yati
True tithi

12. O n e - t w e l f t h of the degrees i n t e r v e n i n g between the S u n a n d M o o n

o b s e r v e d by m e a n s of a ( V - s h a p e d ) Y a s t i o f l e n g t h e q u a l to the s e m i - d i a m e t e r
o f the level circle (with o n e a r m p o i n t e d towards the S u n a n d the o t h e r
towards the M o o n ) is to be k n o w n as the t r u e tithi w h i c h b e i n g d e s t r o y e d is to
be k n o w n . F r o m that (true tithi) o n e m a y d e r i v e a n o t h e r .
Similar rules are found to ocxur in Lalla's Gola (VIII 42-43) and Sripati's Siddhdnta-sehhara ( X I X
26).

Moons longitude
13. W h e n the Sun's l o n g i t u d e , obtained graphically, (vide above, vv, 10 c-d-11)
is a d d e d to those degrees ( i n t e r v e n i n g between the M o o n a n d the S u n ) , the
result is the M o o n ' s l o n g i t u d e for that time. T h i s is h o w the M o o n ' s l o n g i t u d e
is o b t a i n e d g r a p h i c a l l y .

13a. A . <=%5; B l .2. read: ^ ^ ^ ^ ( B 2 . 3Tt?T%5)

12a. A . ^ ? } ; B.t?!?!; C.%=51^ B3.^^^

c. A.frrfT^ c. . A ^ B L ^ T ^ f l c r f F l ^
d. A2.^EIF^ d. A . ^ f e ^ ; B . ^ ^ ( B 2 . 3 . I ) % ^
270 PANCASIODHA.Nl IKA XIV.18

(#nT) l ^ ' ^ c b ? l i ^ i ^ w v f ^ A ^ T^m^ m,^^

Cardinal directions (by means of three shadows of a gnomon)

14-16. M a r k t h r e e times (at intervals) the t i p o f the s h a d o w o f a g n o m o n set
u p at the c e n t r e o f the circle ( d r a w n o n level g r o u n d ) . W i t h the h e l p o f those
(three points) c o n s t r u c t two fishes. T a k i n g the p o i n t o f intersection o f the two
strings p a s s i n g t h r o u g h the h e a d a n d tail o f those fishes as c e n t r e a n d a t h r e a d
so l o n g as to t o u c h the t h r e e p o i n t s as r a d i u s , c o n s t r u c t a circle (passing
t h r o u g h the t h r e e points). T h e t i p o f the shadow o f the g n o m o n that day-
moves o n that circle w i t h o u t s w e r v i n g f r o m it.

16. T h e c e n t r e o f that circle hes to the n o r t h o r s o u t h o f the g n o m o n . Bet-

w e e n that a n d the g n o m o n is the m i d d a y s h a d o w l y i n g to the n o r t h (or south)
o f the g n o m o n .

T h e midday shadow falls towards the north or south according as the Sun's northern declination
cTis less or greater than the ladtude 0 of the place. W h e n the Sun's declination is south, the shadow
always falls towards the north.

[TsnttH:]

^ R v j i f i l f d ^MH*4cn1 ilflTl>fMc< ^ i l t ^ V ^ ^ i - ^ t ^

The Celestial Sphere

17. ( T h e circle) w h e r e the sky a p p e a r s to meet the earth at t h e i r skirts is called
the h o r i z o n (harija). T h e (vertical) circle w h i c h r u n s f r o m east to west is called

14a. A.B.^^TWRHW (62.^^^) ^

16a. A . W ; B.iTKjm; l).iT?2ITg^
b. Bi.TTO^ ( B 2 . ^ ^ - ^ r g a t )
b. A.%5f: a BS.'Sf^. B.^'^^wmt
c. B.q^-fq^ct^l^
c. A . c T ^ ; B.dsJ-^qlqcK
d. A . B . C . D . g ? ^
d. B.^Tlfel^a
L5a. A . ^ ; B . W ^
c. Bl.fcRfor^
XIV.20 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 271

the p r i m e vertical (samamandala). S i m i l a r l y , t h e (vertical) circle w h i c h r u n s

n o r t h to south is c a l l e d the m e r i d i a n (daksinottara)

18. T h e (arcual) distance b e t w e e n the n o r t h p o l e a n d the h o r i z o n is c a l l e d the

latitude ( o f the place). T h e d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n 9 0 a n d the latitude is c a l l e d
the c o l a t i t u d e . T h e c o l a t i t u d e is the d e p r e s s i o n ( o f the n o r t h pole) f r o m the
z e n i t h . T h e d a y - d i a m e t e r is the d i a m e t e r o f the so c a l l e d d i u r n a l circle
(astodaydkhya).

^Tf%FpT#?Rt ^ r f ^ ^ ^ r ^

H e m i s p h e r i c a l B o w l and its use

19. C o n s t r u c t a h e m i s p h e r i c a l b o w l o f t h e r a d i u s c h o s e n f o r o u r construc-
tions w i t h a g n o m o n fitted at its centre. G r a d u a t e its circvdar r i m w i t h m a r k s
o f c a r d i n a l d i r e c t i o n s a n d c i r c u l a r divisions (signs a n d degrees etc.). Place it i n
a s m o o t h ( h e m i s p h e r i c a l ) cavity i n the g r o u n d w i t h the g n o m o n i n c l i n e d to
the h o r i z o n at a n a n g l e e q u a l l o the latitude o f the place ( a n d p o i n t i n g to the
n o r t h pole).

20. R e a d the degrees t r a v e r s e d since sunrise by t h e s h a d o w (of t h e g n o m o n )

w h i c h passes t h r o u g h the intersection o f the two lines {viz., east-west a n d
n o r t h - s o u t h j , a n d a d d t h e m to the Sun's l o n g i t u d e . T h e s u m thus o b t a i n e d is
the l o n g i t u d e o f the r i s i n g p o i n t o f t h e ecliptic. T h e degrees crossed o v e r by
the s h a d o w d i v i d e d by six are the nddis o f the d a y (elapsed since sunrise).

17a. A.B.^fwiilRi B.'lHc)Mcn1 d. A . ^ ! ^ | | ; B . - ^ I I ;

b. A l . - S l ^ ^ Bl.-slf^?^Rl3 ( B 3 . % )
c.d. A . ' ^ ^ ^ ^ ; B . T O t ^ T f f T ^ ^ ; C . 1 I ^ T # 19a. B.^D.<=lc;w5+Mld
b. B.^(B3.^)1^[B2.1]H^^^f^
d. B i . 3 . W R T ; B2.TRCT; D.TR "n?rr c. B . g ( B 3 . ^ ) ^ M 5 ( B 3 . ? ) f ^ ^ ( B 3 . ^ )

18a. B . t ? ^
d. A . B . f q f f ^ : ( B 1 . 2 . ^ B 3 . ^ )
A-B.f^^^:
A.B.^a^Tn^(B.f)
h.
2()a. B2.^l3im; D.^OTrai
B.fPTffrf:
b. A.B.^g^TJTW; C.D.^tfii^ra
c. A.B.D.erat(B.^)^Tftrf!T
c. B.<lR!lR4l*lW
A . B , W Z T ; D.Wm
d. A . B . C . D . ^ ^ T l ^ S m W : ( B . ^ : )
 272 I'ANCASIUDHAN riKA XIV.23

Wll^l4)*4<|jisi 3 t t y : T ^ ^ MRfM[^c<>U|

Hoop and it use

2 1 . C o n s t r u c t a c i r c u l a r h o o p w i t h d i a m e t e r e q u a l to o n e c u b i t (= 24 digits)
a n d r i m h a l f a d i g i t b r o a d . G r a d u a t e its (inner) r i m e v e n l y w i t h the m a r k s o f
signs a n d degrees (etc). A t o n e place i n the m i d d l e o f its b r o a d r i m , pierce a
fine h o l e at r i g h t angles to the r i m .

22. W h e n it is n o o n , let a ray o f the S u n pass t h r o u g h the fine h o l e i n the r i m

(and fall o n the d i a m e t r i c a l l y o p p o s i t e p o i n t o f the r i m ) . T h e degrees that lie
b e t w e e n the t h r e a d h a n g i n g vertically t h r o u g h the centre a n d that (ray o f
light) i n d i c a t e the Sun's m e r i d i a n z e n i t h distance.

T h e word khdksa is a technical term used in Indian astronomy in the sense of "meridian zenith
distance". Also see supra, I V . 21, where the same term has been used in the same sense.

Armillary Sphere
23. C o n s t r u c t a perfecdy r o u n d l i g h t ( A r m i l l a r y ) S p h e r e by means o f
w o o d e n strips (or metallic spokes). O n the surface construct two circles, one
r e p r e s e n t i n g the e q u a t o r (kdla-rekhd) a n d the o t h e r the ecliptic (bhoga-rekhd)
b e i n g m a r k s w h e r e the S u n stops (i.e. at the two solstices).

21a. . \ . w n ^ ; B . W l i ^ 22a. B.T?2TI^ ( B 2 . f l ) ^ 23a. A.TJOTH; B . ^ ( B 2 . ^ ) i T R

B.^for^ A.^;B.TRJ^ b. B.-?I^^(B3.^^)3raitr
b. B1.3.TPI^':pra^cTt b. B . ^ ^ ; D . [fspER^] B . C . D . W W ; A2.nfT^
A . ^ B . l ^ c-d. A.(45|id(rlld<i^l; B.^g^IWtHRRT" c. A.lsiPmi#;i1%RT; B . l
c-d. B.feS C.'y5lld,ddW<l?T; D.-^^lldvilTKisdo D.J
d. A.B.fefe d. A . ^ ^ : ; B . ^ R ^ ^ C . D . c l ^ ^ :
XIV.26 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 273

24. O n e i t h e r side o f the j u n c t i o n o f Pisces a n d A r i e s , i n the n o r t h - s o u t h

( h o u r ) circles at p o i n t s d e n o t i n g the degrees o f the (Sun's) d e c l i n a t i o n , fasten,
by m e a n s o f o b s e r v a t i o n , l i g h t p o i n t s w h i c h m a y i l l u m i n e the (Sun's) o b l i q u e
d i u r n a l circles.

25. M o u n t the ( A r m i l l a r y ) S p h e r e i n s u c h a way that it is e l e v a t e d towards the

n o r t h by a n a m o u n t e q u a l to the local l a t i t u d e . T h e n the nddts that lie ( o n the
S u n ' s d i u r n a l circle) b e t w e e n the l i g h t p o i n t o n the (Sun's) o b l i q u e d i u r n a l
circle a n d the h o r i z o n d e n o t e the nddis that h a v e e l a p s e d (since s u n r i s e i n the
f o r e n o o n ) , e a c h nddi b e i n g m a d e u p o f six degrees.

Sun's northward and southward journeys

26. I n the cycle o f t i m e , as l o n g as the S u n is i n the six signs b e g i n n i n g w i t h
C a p r i c o r n , it is U t t r a y a r i a (i.e. the p e r i o d o f the S u n ' s n o r t h w a r d j o u r n e y ) a n d
t h e r e is increase o f day; i n the c o n t r a r y case (i.e., w h e n the S u n is i n the six
signs b e g i n n i n g w i t h C a n c e r ) , there is decrease o f d a y . W h a t r e m a i n s to be
said (here) is to be u n d e r s t o o d f r o m w h a t has a l r e a d y b e e n stated.

24a-b. B.\^n'^a<<^N^'JI*nTOt unknowingly three lines :'n

b. A2.^B1.3.%PJ;C.^ to"yi] ^ r t ^ , 27a.
c. A . B . D . 3 p m r d. A.B.-#FraT:
B.^l?qT (A2.^); 26a. A.C.D.-q^aiqfil
d. B.fd4'^aM; b. A.^rmif^^o; B.-^Tf^o; C.lHllR*
A 2 . ^ i ^ B.^JRI^ A . B . C . g ^ ; D.^[-T^]

25a-b. A.3T#8sr<I">; B.Sl^^f'JBqt^

c. A.^TSllrsin; B.dlR<=ill
(B3.'iftH>l*l+-^l<<!(>)
d. A 1 . M T O ; A2.ftrfct-'^''; B . o m i P ^
b. B.^siRSH:
c. A.'MWI*!:; B 3 . Scribe omits
274 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIV.30

[cMH4W?>l("l]

Instruments for measuring time

27. T h e bijas (i.e. seeds o r basic necessities) o f all i n s t r u m e n t s (for m e a s u r i n g
time) are f u r n i s h e d by s t r i n g , water a n d s a n d ' . B y m e a n s o f t h e m o n e m a y
c o n s t r u c t i n s t r u m e n t s r e s e m b l i n g a tortoise, a m a n , o r a n y o t h e r d e s i r e d
shape, a n d m o u n t t h e m o n a w o o d e n b o a r d .

28. T h e teacher s h o u l d i m p a r t (this knowledge) only to a devoted (lit. steadfast)

p u p i l , a n d the p u p i l too, after h a v i n g learnt it, s h o u l d a p p l y the bfjas (string,
water a n d sand) to his i n s t r u m e n t s , k e e p i n g the secret u n k n o w n to his son
even.
Varahamihira has not described these instruments here only to keep their mystery a secret. But
these instruments have been described in some of the later works. For example, see the chapter on
astronomical instruments in the works o f Lalla and Sripati. B u t there too the description is not very
explicit.

^9,

Local longitude in terms of time

29. B y m e a n s o f o b s e r v a t i o n at the d e s i r e d place i n a g i v e n l a t i t u d e , p e r f o r m
the Moon spurnimdntakarma (i.e. f i n d o u t h o w m u c h t i m e after o r before local
sunset the M o o n rises at the local place). T h e degrees o f the ecliptic w h i c h rise
d u r i n g that t i m e s h o u l d be s u b t r a c t e d f r o m o r a d d e d to the M o o n ' s l o n g i t u d e
a c c o r d i n g as the M o o n rises later o r e a r l i e r t h a n sunset.

28a-b. A.^MMW; B.'Jite^Md ( B 2 . ^ )

27a.
b. A.^^W^B.^I-^idlP ^ Al.^zi5lR
c. B 1 . 3 . ^ ; B 2 . f ^ A . ^
A2.=W1* B.^NI^-^II
I. When ii heavier substance than sand was required, Mercury was used.
X1V.32 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 275

30. D i v i d i n g as i n the case o f tithi, f i n d the local t i m e i n terms o f ghatis for the
e n d o f full m o o n tithi (as r e c k o n e d f r o m local sunset). Increase o r d i m i n i s h the
ghatis o b t a i n e d by the t i m e c o r r e s p o n d i n g to the Sun's ascensional difference,
a c c o r d i n g as the S u n is the six signs b e g i n n i n g w i t h A r i e s o r i n the six signs
b e g i n n i n g w i t h L i b r a . T h e result is the local t i m e f o r the e n d o f the full m o o n
tithi.at the local e q u a t o r i a l place. ( T h e difference o f this a n d the local t i m e for
the e n d o f the full m o o n tithi at Lartka) is the t r u e l o n g i t u d e for the local place.

The rule is obvious, because: (a) Local time for the end of the full moon tithi at the local place (as
measured since sunset at the local place) time corresponding to the Sun's ascensional differ-
ence = local dme for the end of the full moon tithi at the local place (as measured since sunset at
the local equatorial place),
-I sign are to be taken according as the Sun is in the six signs beginning with Aries or in the six
signs beginning with Libra.
(b) Also, local dme for the end of the full moon tithi at the local equatorial place ~ local dme foi
the end of the full moon tithi at Lanka = local longitude in terms of time.

The local time for the end of the full moon tithi at the local place has to be obtained by the process
of successive approximations, but the whole process has not been described in the text.

(^) fmq}

f n s n r f 3 F R rrm ^ ^ %5

8. The N a 4 i or Ghafi

3 1 . O n e - s i x t i e t h o f the t i m e t a k e n b y water to flow o u t t h r o u g h a d e s i r e d h o l e

d u r i n g a n y c h t h e m e r o n is d e f i n e d as the d u r a t i o n o f a nddi. O r , it is the t i m e
o f 180 breaths o f a m a n .

29a-b. B.^^RfSfW^RTT^^Ccrafeqf; d. A . C . D . ^ ^ I ^ ; B . f ^ ^ ( B 2 . t % ' 5 c r ) ^ ^

30a. B.tMTsrfmM D.1rfK^
c. B . ^ b. A.-^<^MiR;-iiPqci; B.-c|ohM<HlP<:jti
c-d. A . B . M l f i + V ^ i ^ ^ ^ M ^ ; (B.^g??IF?^); c. A.B.-^<+)l(<^Mfd ^l-i
C. '-lli*W<iyiHRj'+,|crM^; d. B . 1 ^ 3 ^
276 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIV.35

32. C o n s t r u c t a c o p p e r vessel r e s e m b l i n g o n e - h a l f o f a s p h e r i c a l pot a n d

p i e r c e a h o l e at its b o t t o m . P u t it i n p u r e water i n a b a s i n . T h e t i m e i n w h i c h
the vessel is filled u p is t h e d u r a t i o n o f a nddi. T h e h o l e at the b o t t o m o f the
vessel s h o u l d be so s m a l l that o n a c c o u n t o f its s m a l l size, the vessel m a y s i n k
i n t o w a t e r exactly sixty times d u r i n g n y c h t h e m e r o n . O r , it is the t i m e i n w h i c h
o n e m a y recite 6 0 times a verse c o m p o s e d o f 6 0 l o n g syllables (as vs. 32 is).

Conjunction of the Moon with a Star

3 3 . H a v i n g ascertained the M o o n ' s celestial latitude a n d observed the distance
o f the M o o n f r o m a star a n d h a v i n g m a d e the requisite c a l c u l a t i o n s , o n e
s h o u l d p r e d i c t the t i m e o f c o n j u n c t i o n o f (the M o o n w i t h ) the star w h i c h is to
take place i n the f u t u r e .

3 T ^ ^ I g ^ II ^ ^ II

31a. B . # f ? I . A.t^l^ng^; B.fsiPraRT 33. Quoted by Utpala o n 24.5-6.

b. A.B.dl'!^ RaR*j(U!
a. U . f ) ^
c. B1.3.Wrat; B2.Wrat; D . ^ i a ^
B . After^;*^ occurs the passage
d. A.B.'WWIiilild^H. B . l ^ :
f?f% (of X V . 8) to^: I I ( o f X V . 23),
32a. B1.3.fwnfl3nt; B 2 . f 1 T ^ B . ^ being transferred here, apparently due
B1.3.M
to the misplacement of a folio i n the
b. A . ^ ; B . " ? 5 ! ^ ^
common archetype of the B mss.,
B.?ft^
B 1,2 and 3.
B.'J^'llil
c. D.i<r)l Mlcll<^ B.Tif^lf^^
A . B . ^ i f s # ^ n w (B.?a) b. B.^=WRT^nf^
d. A.B.^sifS^: c. A . W ^ ^ I ^ : ; B . W ^ ^ r s i : ;
A l . W C T ^ ; A2.'J^?^
XIV.38 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 277

Positions of Certain Junction-Stars

34. ( T h e j u n c t i o n - s t a r of) K r t t i k a is at the e n d o f the sixth d e g r e e ( f r o m the
i n i t i a l p o i n t o f that naksatra) a n d 3 Vs cubits to the n o r t h o f the ecliptic. ( T h e
j u n c t i o n - s t a r of) R o h i n i is at the e n d o f the e i g h t h d e g r e e (of that naksatra)
a n d 5 V2 (cubits) to the s o u t h .
35. T h e s o u t h e r n a n d n o r t h e r n (junction-) stars o f P u n a r v a s u are at the e n d
of the eighth degree (of the naksatra) a n d 8 (cubits) south a n d n o r t h (respectively).
T h e (juncdon-)star o f P u s y a is at the e n d o f the f o u r t h d e g r e e (of that
naksatra) a n d 3 V2 cubits to the n o r t h .

36. T h e s o u t h e r n (junction-) star o f A s l e s a is at the e n d o f the first d e g r e e (of

that naksatra) a n d o n e c u b i t (to the south); so also is the n o r t h e r n ( j u n c t i o n -
star). T h e c o n j u n c t i o n (of the M o o n ) (with the j u n c t i o n - s t a r of) M a g h a occurs
i n its o w n field at the e n d o f the s i x t h d e g r e e (of that naksatra).
37. ( T h e junction-star of) C i t r a is at the e n d o f 7 V2 degrees (of that naksatra)
a n d 3 cubits to the s o u t h . T h e digits are c o u n t e d f r o m the centre o f the M o o n
w h e r e the m i n u t e s o f the l a t i t u d e e n d .

f^^[<i^'^iHMH ^ R ^ ^ > l ( d c | > U | II -^6 I

Digits between the Moon and a Star in Conjunction

And Time of Conjunction

38. H a v i n g subtracted 17 f r o m the l a t i t u d e (of the star w i t h respect to the

M o o n ) m u l t i p l y by 15 a n d take a t h i r t y - f o u r t h o f that; this is to be k n o w n as
the n u m b e r o f digits (between the M o o n a n d the star).

34a. B . ^ W ; D . ^ : 35a. B . ^ ^ S S ^ d. A . B . ^ A . ^ j B . ^
A.TO?TI%; B . T O ^ ; B2.fm b. A . B . D . ^ # F ^ ? f ^ 37a. A.^r^qf^PTOFt
b. A . W T I ^ ; B . W T t ^ : c. A 2 . eft f o r ^ B . f ^ ^ b. B . ^ f ? ^ :
c. A . ^ d. A . ^ P T l ^ A . ^ s ^ c. A.+dWK'J; B.<=bdldl^'J.
d. A . B . ^ W S i a A . ^ s f ; B . W ^ ; 36a. A . W ^ M ^ ^ t r R r a R I d. A . ^ T ^ J W ; B . i ^ s n g i : ? ! ^
 278 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIV.41

T h e t i m e (of c o n j u n c t i o n ) is to be k n o w n f r o m the distance between the star

a n d the M o o n a n d the daily m o t i o n o f the M o o n .
According to Varahamihira, the measure of the Moon's diameter is 34 i n terms of minutes and
15 i n terms of digits. Hence the above rule.

Polar longitudes and latitudes of the Junction-stars

Junction-star of Polar longitude Polar latitude

Krtdka 3240' 3.5 cubits or 3 10' 2 4 ' N

Rohini 48 5.5 cubits or 4 59' 12"S
Punarvasu (southern) 88 8 cubits or 7 15' 12"S
Punarvasu (northern) 88 8 cubits or 7 15 12" N
Pusya 97 20' 3.5cubitsor310'24"N
Aslesa (southern) 10740' 1 cubit or 54' 24" S
Aslesa (northern) 10740' 1 cubit or 54'24" N
Magha 126 0
Citra 18050' 3 cubits or 2 43' 12"S

^|U||vilc(Pdlii^[^V^n[dHehl *iP{<4|d^: \\>io

^<sl^fdiT^H^1^gT^n^^?n^||^^

Heliacal Rising of Canopus

39. M u l t i p l y t h e square o f 5(i.e. 25) by h a l f the e q u i n o c t i a l m i d d a y shadow;
(treating it as the R s i n e o f a n arc) find t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g arc (in terms o f
degrees) a n d a d d 15 (degrees) to that. M u l t i p l y that b y 10 a n d a d d 21 times
the e q u i n o c t i a l m i d d a y s h a d o w . T h e s e are vinddis.

39-40 Quoted by Utpala on J55 12.21

38a. B . W R k 39a. A . f ^ ^ l ^ B . f l ^ ^
b. A.^HTfTTfcn b. A.B.Q-d*clWc*dlWc1; D . 4 ^ * R l W ^ d l cR:
c. A.oqM c. A.^I-MH^k1<; B.t$MMk14> A l
A.B.^>c(>l ( B . f ^ ) ; d. A . B . ^ I ^
XIV.41 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 279

4 0 - 4 1 . A s s u m i n g these vinddis as the t i m e e l a p s e d since sunrise a n d t a k i n g

the S u n at the first p o i n t o f C a n c e r , calculate the l o n g i t u d e o f the r i s i n g p o i n t
o f the ecliptic. W h e n (the l o n g i t u d e of) the S u n h a p p e n s to be e q u a l to that,
t h e n , by v i r t u e o f the g r a p h i c a l m e t h o d s a n d i n s t r u m e n t s available to the
science o f m a t h e m a t i c a l a s t r o n o m y , the sage A g a s t y a {i.e. the star C a n o p u s )
that looks like the special r e d t i l a k a - m a r k o n the f o r e h e a d o f the l a d y - l i k e
s o u t h e r n d i r e c t i o n shines f o r t h a n d delights the m i n d s o f m e n . S u c h is the
d i v i n e k n o w l e d g e based o n t i m e .

Consider Fig. 4. It represents the celesdal sphere for a place in ladtude 0. S E N is the horizon and
Z the z e n i t h ; V R E T is the equator and P and Q are its north and south poles;VGSD is the eclipdc.

40a. Al.B.*\iim'A (33.^^) D.Ml^lldl <^Pldl 41a-b. B . ( B 2 . ^ )

b. B l . c ! ^ ; B 2 . T 1 ^ ; B 3 . c l ^ B.-H^WWll d. A . ^ ; B . ^ B . W d r + l b. B . W W I | B. W
c. A.B.'!4IJIWI ( B . ^ ) A.gf^IWT: c. B.^sl^^Mfd
280 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XIV.41

A is Canopus at the time of its heliacal rising and S the Sun at that time. P G A Q i s the hour circle of
Canopus, and G the point where it intersects the ecliptic.
Assuming that the celestial longitude of Canopus is 90 and the celestial latitude 75 20' S', we
have Y G = 90, A G = 75 20' and A A ' = 75 20' - 24 = 51 20'. Therefore
Rsin A ' E = Rsin (asc. diff. of Canopus A ) = Rtan eT^^^ ' ^i^e formula (2),

where J"is the declination A A ' of Canopus and 0 the ladtude of the place,

_ sin ^ . sin 0 ^ R
cos 0 cos tf
_ s i n 5 1 2 0 ' palahha ^ 120

12 cos5120'

because, according to Varahamihira, R = 120'

_ ^^palabhd
= 25 X'^ , approx.
2

.-. A ' E = arc (in terms of degrees) corresponding to Rsine equal to

palahha
25 x '- , approx.
2
E G " = asc. diff. of G , approx.
= 21 X palahha, vinddis, approx.

because for unit pdlahhd, the ascensional difference for G (the first point of Cancer) is 21 vinddis.
Also, assuming 15 to be the time-degrees for the visibility of Canopus,
G'S = G"S' approx.

= 15 degrees, approx.
.-. A ' S ' = A ' E + E G " -f G"S' degrees
= [10 ( A ' E + 15) -t- 2\palnhhd] vinddis,
where A ' E -I- 15 is in degrees and palahhd in digits. Degrees muldplied by 10 are vinddis.

Now G S is the arc of the ecliptic which rises above the horizon (of Laiika) in the time given by the
arc A ' S ' of the equator. Hence it is obvious that Canopus A will rise heliacally when the Sun is at
S, i.e., when
Sun's longitude = longitude of G -I- arc G S
= longitude of G {i.e., 90) 4- arc of the eclipdc which rises (at Lahka)
in the time given by the arc A ' S ' of the equator.

1. Actually, the longitude of Canopus is 854' and the latitude of Canopus is 7550'S.
XIV.41 XIV. ASTRONOMICAL INSTRUMENTS 281

Hence the rule.

Obviously, the rule is very crude. It was discarded by the later astronomers who replaced it by better
rules.

Thus ends Chapter Fourteen entitled 'Graphical Methods and

Astronomical Instruments' in the Pancasiddhantika composed by
Varahamihira

1. A . ^g[^#5gTFT: 1
 Chapter Fifteen

SECRETS OF ASTRONOMY

TI^(TIT) ^ W T f ^ ^ t ^ ^ d ^ ^ II ^

Eclipses
1. I declare the f o l l o w i n g to those w h o possess pre-knowledge o f the relative
positions o f the S u n , the M o o n , the zodiac with the p r i n c i p a l stars, a n d the
e a r t h . T h e r e is always an eclipse o f the S u n visible s o m e w h e r e i n space,
a c c o r d i n g to the p o s i t i o n o f the place.

This is what is meant: If a solar eclipse is defined as being caused by the Moon hiding the Sun,
it is obvious that at any moment some place in space will have the Siui hidden behind the Moon.

2. F o r those w h o d o not k n o w the relative positions o f the above m e n t i o n e d ,

e v e n k n o w l e d g e w i l l b e c o m e s i m i l a r to the m i l k i n the c o n t a i n e r with c o n c h i n
it b e c o m i n g capable o f d e s t r o y i n g the teeth.

This is the meaning:- Milk and (kjnch are by themselves beneficial things, espedall) conch
which can strengthen the teeth on riccount of its calcium content. But milk with conch soaked in it
becomes positively harmful to the teeth on account of their incompatibility. So also, even know-
ledge can become harmful unless the knowledge as to when, where and how to use it is also known.

T S have amended the correct diuinydm into dhdriyam, not realising that the word intended in the
context is ddhdni, meaning the vessel for holding the milk, and also not uncletstanding what is
meant by the verse. For similar reasons, N P have emended the word as dhydndi, and gives a meaning
opposite to what is intended by V M .

la. A.WITB.*^' 2a. B1.3.31T3lfgfe^ A.^-^HT^T; B . W R H i

c. A . W T T b. B.'^^Itfi; B3.cira%
d. B.fsr^lTO
A.'^^lf^; B.^^fep^ ( B 3 . ^ ) c. A . - ^ ; B1.3.^?TTO; B 2 . ^ t ^
XV.4 XV. SECRETS OF ASTRONOMY 283

3. F o r these to w h o m the S u n is h i d d e n by the M o o n , a c c o r d i n g to the

straight Une f r o m t h e m t h r o u g h the M o o n t o u c h i n g the S u n , f o r t h e m there
is a solar eclipse. A n d every m o m e n t (ht. every day) there is s u c h a place
somewhere.

4. T h e pitrs (Manes) o n the M o o n see the S u n ecHpsed for o n e w h o l e

f o r t n i g h t , a n d not e c l i p s e d d u r i n g the o t h e r f o r t n i g h t . T h e m i d - e c l i p s e is at
full m o o n .

Fig. XV. 1. (diagrammatic, not

to scale)
P: The PitrS On the
moon
M , : Position of moon
at middle of dark
fortnight.
M,^: New moon position
M ^ : Position at middle
light fortnight
M ^ : Posidon at full
moon
O n the side facing
the sun, the M o o n
has sunlight. O n
the other side it is
darkness.

Fig. XV. 1

3a. A 2 . ^ ^ A.B.^q^Ior?Tf?R ( B . ^ ) ;
4a. B.^^f^TW
b. A . B . f ^ ; C.fSR^; D.cfl4^ b. B3.ft?Kr:
c. B . H a p l . om of M c. A . 3 P T F I B . ^ ^
d. A.^^^: d. B.WTTSZTFA.TR^
284 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XV.7

At M , position P (Pitrs) just begin to get sunlight. It is sunrise to them. A t it is midday, with
Sun abovehead. A t daylight ends and darkness begins. A t M ^ , it is midnight for the Pitrs. O n the
earth, M.^ is new moon, mid-light fortnight, is full moon, and M,mid-dark fortnight. Thus,
full moon on earth is midnight for the Pitrs, the whole night being the eclipsed time.

Note that the Pitrs are supposed to dwell in the region opposite, along the line of sight of the
M o o n . Note also that the synodic month forms the whole day for the Pitrs, full moon being mid-
night and new moon being mid-day. Note again that the explanation above can hold good only if
the M o o n shows the same face to the Sun, as it really does. T h e H i n d u astronomers held the same
view, without any conception of it, for they held this view in the case of every planet. T S are
confused, not keeping in m i n d clearly that the month for us is the day for the Pitrs. Here, graha
means eclipse, and really there is no difficulty, which they seem to feel.

5. P e o p l e at the N o r t h - p o l a r r e g i o n n e v e r see a solar eclipse o c c u r r i n g ,

because o f the S u n a n d the M o o n n e v e r b e i n g h i g h e n o u g h i n the sky.

6. T h e S u n a n d the M o o n c a n n e v e r be i n a straight line w i t h the eye for

people i n the N o r t h - p o l a r r e g i o n . B e i n g o n the side (as viewed f r o m the region
o f l o w latitudes) they always view a gap b e t w e e n the S u n a n d the M o o n .

V . M . is wrong here. Every general partial eclipse, and some total or annular eclipses also, are visible
even at the pole. T h o u g h the Moon's parallax will be near m a x i m u m , with a high enough celestial
latitude, the Moon can be projected on the Sun to form an eclipse. If V M had worked out an example,
he would have discovered his mistake. H e seems to have been misled by the fact that eclipses visible
in low latitudes like India, would not be visible in the polar region. T S too say V M is wrong.

Prosody requires some additional mdtrds in (6), and I have added nam and bliavati in the second
foot. TS's emendations which are adopted also by N P , do too much violence to the text.

5b. B.y(siit|<+)SI
d. B.aga^nsf^Fli^: (A.B.^tW; A.^?g)
6a. C . f g ^ ; D.^i|%n c. C.D.%
b. A.B.C.D.%^:-<lR<rMt|TiCT: I d. B . ^ ^ :
XV.9 XV. SECRETS OF ASTRONOMY 285

7. T h o u g h the S u n is l o w near the h o r i z o n , n e a r sunrise o r sunset, the

M o o n , b e i n g h i g h e r u p , can h i d e the S u n like a c l o u d .

V M here answers an objector to his stand (5-6). H e is unaware that the case in (7) is similar to that
(5-6).

TS's emendations/;r/Jrtworm, which means 'standing high up in the sky', will make an eclipse itseli'
impossible. NP's emendation candroparasamavastha does not give the sense of 'being under the
M o o n ' given by them for the expression.

8. F o r p e o p l e w h o have sunset a n d for p e o p l e w h o have m i d - d a y , w h e n we

have sunrise, for a l l o f us, the solar eclipse does not o c c u r at the same t i m e .

9. T h r o u g h o t i t the t i m e w h e n t h e r e is eclipse f o r the m i d - d a y p e o p l e , it is

past f o r the sunrise p e o p l e by f o u r nddikds, a n d w i l l be yet to o c c u r f o r the s u n -
set p e o p l e by f o u r nddikds.

The context is the solar eclipse and the M o o n is near the Sun, So for the sunrise people the apparent
longitude of the M o o n has increased by parallax, and the circumstances of the eclipse are advanced
by more than four ruulis. T h e opposite happens for the sunset people, and the circumstances are
delayed by four nddis. T h e duration itself is shortened by a slow rate of change of parallax for both.
Therefore when the mid-day people's eclipse begins, the morning people's eclipse has ended, and
when it ends, the evening people's eclipse has not begun. So there is no overlapping of them. T h e
explanation given by me is general, and several other circumstances will have to be taken into
account. But VM's statement is conect in a general way. Hindu astronomers give the maximum parallax
converted into time as four nddis.

We must contrast this with the lunar eclipse, which begins and ends at the same moments, wherever
the M o o n is visible on the earth.

8a. B . H a p l . o m o f o n e ^
7a. A . B . ^ ( B . ^ ) ^ ; C.Tim^ b. B . 1 ^ T :
b. A.B.f=rERs}) A . Jt?jqi^75ri?T d. B.clNii^fAnyiimd
C. A . B . ^ g ^ W T ^ ; C . ^ : W f r 5 ^ ; 9a. B . c m d g ^ W I T
b. A.B.^tM<W<l(^HIH,(B3.^)
d. A l . ' q ^ T ^ : ; A2.^?rWTr:; c. A . ^
B.g^(B3.-En)# d. B. WRcI^f^lH; B . gap for,'=T ||3
In B 2 , there is transposition of folios here. (of next verse)
286 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X V . 16

il^UlWI i l B l d l T i TT|lf^f|Rrat: II

10. T h i s m a t t e r o f eclipses has been expatiated u p o n by m e at t h e b e g i n n i n g

o f the c h a p t e r o n R a h u ' s (the N o d e ' s ) m o t i o n (in the Brhalsamhitd, 5. 8-11).
A l s o the causes for the eclipse o f the S u n a n d the M o o n w i t h o u t the consider-
a t i o n o f R a h u has been d i l a t e d u p o n .

V M indicates both the nodes as Rahu (the dragon of mythology), one as the 'head' and the other
as the 'tail'. Here, V M takes the correct astronomical posidon in the matter of the eclipses. In this
chapter as also as in his Brhajjdtaka, V M refers to without inhibition, the incorrect views of the
authors of the early astronomical samhitds.

dPwvlciiiWMil 1 % T i r a ^ r^tr^ ||

d-iJWH<(^)Ru|HH<|: q?^f%qt(S^)TT(rf:)

Situation at the Poles

11. T h e r e is no d i s d n c t i o n o f direction at the N o r t h pole, because East cannot
be d e t e r m i n e d there u s i n g the S u n (rising a n d setting a n d c u l m i n a t i n g ) , for,
as l o n g as the S u n stays r i s e n , it goes r o u n d a n d r o u n d the sky like a beautiful
damsel.
T h e idea is that there is no daily rising and setting of the Sun to determine east and west. In fact,
at the N o r t h pole all directions are south.

10a. A l . 3 * ^ ; A 2 . 3 * ^ ; B . 11a. Bi.2.fe;fWit

b. B . W I T O W T ^ H
c. Al.^^^lft?!; B.^qftPra c. B . ^ T ^
d. A . B . t ^ l ^ ( B . ^ ) d. Al.^rralM; A2.^irat^;
B.fCRfqffRta
X V . 16 XV. SECRETS OF ASTRONOMY 287

12. I f it is a r g u e d that f r o m the p o i n t w h e r e the S u n j u s t a p p e a r s above the

h o r i z o n east is d e t e r m i n e d , as the S u n sets at the same p o i n t after h a l f a year,
c a n this east b e c o m e west also?

What V M says in these two verses is essentially true. But his statement that it sets at the same
point after half a year is not correct. It is not exactly half a year, and the S u n will disappear at any
point proportionate to the fraction remaining over the full sidereal days gone between rising and
setting.

13. F o r the gods at the N o r t h Pole, the day is d e t e r m i n e d by the S u n ' s d e c l i -

n a t i o n , ( n o r t h d e c l i n a t i o n b e i n g d a y - t i m e , a n d s o u t h d e c l i n a t i o n n i g h t ) , not
like o u r s , d e p e n d i n g o n the d a i l y r o t a t i o n . It is 60 nddikds f o r us, a n d o n e year
for the gods.

14. E v e r y year the day a n d the n i g h t o f the gods a n d o f the asuras (demons,
at the S o u t h Pole) is o p p o s i t e , (i.e. w h e n it is d a y - t i m e f o r the gods it is n i g h t -
t i m e f o r the asuras, a n d vice versa); f o r the pitrs (on the M o o n ) , the d a y - n i g h t
is o n e s y n o d i c m o n t h ; a n d for m e n , it is sixty nddikds.

15. T o the extent the S u n rises above the h o r i z o n t a l by two m u h i i r t a s , (i.e.

24 above the h o r i z o n ) to that extent the gods at the p o l e see the S u n r i s i n g
above the h o r i z o n , a n d not m o r e t h a n that.

T h e Sun spirals round and r o u n d after rising, with its altitude increasing with its north declina-
tion. As the m a x i m u m declination is 24 (according to H i n d u astronomy, and fairly correct at V M ' s
dme), the aldtude never exceeds 24. After that is spirals down.

16. T h e series o f the L o r d s o f the H o r a s a n d L o r d s o f the days d o not fit there

as it does f o r us, because the sixty-nadz'Aa-day-night does not o b t a i n there.

This statement fits not only the pole, but also all places in the arctic zone, when the Sun seen
above the horizon exceeds 24 hours. T h e hord is one hour's time, and the Lords of the hords are
successively Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Sun, Venus, Mercury and M o o n , and again Saturn etc. T h e lord
of the first hord after sunrise is the lord of the day. It can be see that the lord o f the 25th hord is the
lord of the day next in the day series. So, if the day is more than 24 hours, the two series cannot fit.

12a AB Quotedby Utpala on BS'17.4-5.

b. A . B . ^ # M 3 ( A 2 . f i M ^ B . f t ^ ) ^^a. B l . ^ ; B 2 . ^ q ^ ;
c. B . ^ l f t ^ M BS.Wmfor^J^,
d. B . ^ n f ^ ^ ^ b. A.C.D.U.OTS^;
B . ^ T w r ^ M r ^ (B3. ^ )
13a. A.^tTOWT; B . ^ ( B 1 . 2 . o m ^ )
' A.B^(B.omBT)

c.
A.^^f:; B.^WT:
d. B 3 . g a p a f t e r ^ ( B 1 . 2 . n o g a p ) ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

14a. B.^cl^-^fn^'l a-b. C.WTOc1^^'TTrFII^ |

c. B . ^ ^ A . B . f * T f i n D.wqn^wg^wn^
d. B.T^^pqtB.Hlfe+Mfg: c. A.^rfFRI?); B . Ca-lM^Pw^lgl

u
288 PANCASIDUHANllKA XV.21

Weekday
17. T h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f the weekday is not the same e v e r y w h e r e . A s no
reason is g i v e n i n this m a t t e r too, e v e n astrologers disagree a m o n g there-
selves.

T h e commencement of the day is fixed arbitrarily, as a matter of convention, like midnight, sun-
rise, sunset, etc, following the custom of different peoples.
18. T h e w e e k d a y is o b t a i n e d f r o m the total days c o m m e n c i n g f r o m a stated
p o i n t o f t i m e , o f a p a r t i c u l a r day at a p a r t i c u l a r place. A c a r y a L a t a d e v a has
said that the day begins at the exact (mean) sunset at Y a v a n a p u r a .
This convention is that of the Romaka and the Paulisa Siddhdntas. mendoned by V M in PS I 8-1
Latadeva is said to have redacted these two siddhdntas. Yavanapma is Alexandria in Egypt, as can
be fixed from the longitude correction for Ujjain in AS 111. 13. see also I. 8 and note on p. 10 above.

^Vil'd<f^ij^l^^ <t>rd[ ^ W fTf?H: I

17-20. Quoted by Makkibhatta on 18-29. Quoted by Utpala on BS 2, pp.

Si. Sekhara,2.\0. 31-32
17a. A.^Rsifeq^^; B . ^ r o r a f i r * ^ 18a. B.ii'l"llRH
b. M.^FR^^fifT^ B1.2.r^feU"lllM; ( B 3 . M | )
c. A . B . C . D . M . ^ b. A l . ^ n ; A 2 . ^ a ^ ; B . D . M . U . W ^ :
c. A.B1.2.elMWl5
d. A . B . ' ^ ( B . ^ ) ^ ; M.^^lWt
XV.27 XV. SECRETS OF ASTRONOMY 289

rT?TT3fqqTS6tdc<|cHlq (^) chlfac^^l^Rd || 9^

Day-reckoning

19. S i r i i h a c a r y a has d e c l a r e d that r e c k o n i n g >.*ay-total c o m m e n c e s at a s u n -

rise i n L a i i k a . T h e p r e c e p t o r o f the Y a v a n a s has said that the day c o m m e n c e s
for the Y a v a n a s ten muhurtas, o r twenty nddikds, i n the n i g h t , (i.e. after sun-
set).
H i n d u siddhantas suppose Laiika to be on the equator, at the junction of the Ujjain meridian.
Sirnhacarya's view is that of many later siddhantas. T h e preceptor of the Yavanas mentioned is
probably the Yavanacarya of the Ydvanajdlaka, the well-known astrological work. There is a section
devoted to astronomy also in that work. If the people in Greece are meant by Yavanas here,
Yavanacarya perhaps tries to fit a Greek astronomical work into serviceability in Ujjain, for 20 nddts
after sun-set in Greece is the moment of sun-rise at Ujjain, assuming a rough longitude correction
10 nddis.
20. A r y a b h a l a has said that the day c o m m e n c e s at m i d - n i g h t at L a i i k a . H e
h i m s e l f a g a i n has said, the day c o m m e n c e s f r o m sunrise at L a i i k a .
Aryabhata has written two works. One is the wellknown Aryabhatiya. H e has written another
work, not extant now. It is referred to by others as the Midnight School and commences the day at
midnight. Bhaskara I has given its system in chap V I I of his Kannanibandha, better known as
Ma/idbhdskariya. The system given in this is the same as that of the Saurasiddhdnta of the PS.
Brahmagupta professes to follow this in his Khandakhdyaka.

20a. J y , N . W T I ^
19c. B.^cUHPirHRdP^M^^- 20. Quoted by M l a k a n t h a in his b. B1 .S.-Jigfef-^; B2.M<^^ft:^'IK
A.D.U.?r9TtVf^; Jyolirrmmdnisd. p.8,asa!soon Bl.S.^^^J^:
M.^ra^Mf^" AB/j. Kala. 16. c. M,N,U.^fe^
290 PANCASIDDHANTI KA XV.27

2 1 . I f it is a r g u e d that the d i f f e r e n t times f o r c o m m e n c i n g the day c a n be

a c c o u n t e d for by c o r r e c t i o n f o r l o n g i t u d e , it does n o t a g r e e w i t h what they
themselves have said i n this matter, a c c o r d i n g to the sdstras, (which is as follows).
22. ' T h e s u n r i s i n g i n B h a r a t a - v a r s a , makes at that very m o m e n t , m i d - d a y i n
Bhadrasva-varsa, sun-set in Uttara-kuru-varsa, and mid-night in the
Ketumala-varsa.
2 3 . W h a t is sun-rise at L a r t k a , that same m o m e n t is sun-set at S i d d h a p u r a ,
n o o n at Y a m a k o t i , a n d m i d - n i g h t i n the R o m a k a - p u r a .

In the above two verses the early siddhantic conception of a world geography is given briefly. T h e
equator is the Jambudvipa, with the N o r t h Pole at its centre. L a n k a is the point where the Ujjain
meridian cuts the equator. T h e point 90 east of L a n k a is Yamakoti, also called Yavakoti. Here
seems to be a vague concept of Java, called Yavadvipa, whose exact distance was not realised. Ninety
degrees west of L a n k a is Romaka-pura, answering to Rome, whose exact position was not realised.
T h e antipode point of Lanka is called Siddhapura. A vague notion of the Mayan and Aztec civilisa-
tion brought in by early exporters sailing the seas might have given rise to the idea. T h e astronomical
idea of sun-rise, moon etc. is correct according to the conception. T h e four varsas mentioned,
Bharata, Bhadrasva, K u r u , and Ketumala are supposed to be situated round the N o r t h Pole, at its
south, east, beyond the pole and west, from our stand point, i n Bharatavarsa. T h e Puranas give
seven divisions o f the Jambudvipa, and these are the principal four. T h e puranic concept is that o f
an earlier period of a flat earth, with the mountain M e r u at the centre with J a m b i i d v i p a arranged
all round, transmitted by tradition. T h e Siddhantas tried to fit whatever is possible of the Puranic
geography, into the conception o f the spherical earth, refuting the rest outright or explaining
them away.

24. A t the b e g i n n i n g o f the y u g a , the i n t e r c a l a r y m o n t h s , the o m i t t e d days,

the p l a n e t a r y days, the l u n a r days, the first p o i n t o f M e s a , the M o o n , the S u n ,
half-years, rtus, a n d the s i d e r e a l days, b e g i n t o g e t h e r (and c a n be r e c k o n e d
anew).

2 5 . T h e l o n g i t u d e c o r r e c t i o n r e c k o n e d f r o m the R o m a k a r e g i o n is different
f r o m that f r o m Y a v a n a p u r a . R e c k o n i n g t i m e f r o m m i d - n i g h t at L a r t k a is
d i f f e r e n t f r o m that f r o m sun-rise.

21a-b. B . f ^ T r a ^ ( B 3 . ^ ) 23a. A . H a p . o m o f o n e ^ ;
c. B . ^ W I ^ ^ M ( B 3 . W q t ) B.^^cTfFlt
d. A . ^ ^ c. A . B l . ^ q q ^ U . Mc(*l*ji TTE^lt
B 1.2.3. gap indicated for^Tmi^ d. B.%J#(^U.^^
and part ofthe next line up t o ^ ^ , , ^
^ K 3 ^ 24a. B . 3T'lost. B.Tlf3ra?
22a. A.^IstW; C . D . U . ^ ^ I W T ^ b. B . f ^ ^ ^ I ^ A . ^ l ^
b. A.C.D.U.omBrftg and read c. A . 3 m - ^ ; B . S T O ^ ^ ; D.SPR^^FlfcT

c. A.g?WxT 25b. B.f^fCRl^

d. B2.^'IM<4>: d. A.-^FJ^iR.'^-'^
XV.29 XV. SECRETS OF ASTRONOMY 291

26. I f we d e t e r m i n e the D a y - l o r d f r o m the half-setting o f the S u n every day,

t h e r e is n e i t h e r t r a d i t i o n a l a u t h o r i t y n o r r e a s o n i n g to s u p p o r t this.

27. E v e n i n q u i t e adjacent places, i n o n e place t h e r e is sun-rise o r sun-set,

a n d not i n the o t h e r , d a y - t i m e i n o n e place a n d n i g h t i n the o t h e r , a n d vice
versa. T h u s , t h e r e is c o n f u s i o n a m o n g p e o p l e i n the m a t t e r o f the L o r d o f the
day.

^<|c|Mf(x^)^ ^ I ^ l t T T (<HlfMM^I^I

28. T h e m a t t e r o f d e t e r m i n i n g the H o r a - l o r d also is i n the same mess. W h e n

the D a y - l o r d is not d e t e r m i n e d , h o w c a n the H o r a - l o r d be d e t e r m i n e d ?

29. W i t h o u t g i v i n g a t h o u g h t to a l l these difficulties, p e o p l e g e n e r a l l y use the

n a m e o f the D a y - l o r d i n t h e i r daily r o u t i n e , ( a n d get o n w i t h t h e i r w o r k ) .
L e a r n e d a u t h o r i t i e s say that the best t h i n g w o u l d be to use the t r u e tithi,
( l u n a r day) a n d its parts f o r daily i n t e r c o u r s e (as f o r f i x i n g a d e f i n i t e p o i n t o f
t i m e etc.)

What is meant is as follows:- Sun-rise etc. may vary from place to place, according to the local
time. But the lunar day is the same for every place on the earth. So this can fix a point of dme without
any ambiguity. We learn that the ancient Babylonians used the lunar day as the unit of dme, just
as we use the solar day.

In the above verses V M indulges in a lot of discussion about Hora-lord, Day-lord, etc. B u t these
are only matters of convention, and astrologers and governments can agree upon some convention
to avoid difficulties, e.g. do we not have tfie standard mean time for our daily dealings.

26a. B.J5mr^ 27b. A . B . f ^ t ^ ^ T ^ : 28a. A . ^ ^ ; B.^grTI^ ( B 3 . ^ )

b. B . t ^ ^ B . f ^ n ^ A2.1H: A2.Rfa4 ^- B.Tmm!\:
c. B . ^ s t m t c. A . B . ^ c. A . f ^ ; B . f % ^
d. A . ^ 1 ^ : ; B . C . D . ^ ^ ^ : d. D.Hlj.d^cj 29a. U . ^ r t ^ l t ^
B.^^:;U.^^ b. A . ^ ; B l . 2 . ^ ; B 3 . ^ :
c. B.^f#fT A . B 1 . 3 . f ^
d. B l . W i r f :
q^fan^lPHchl^i c)<|^fi4[^<f^<R:ldNi v.4^[dMlMfHt<?l[H q^^SSqT^T: ||]^
Thus ends Chapter Fifteen on 'Secrets of Astronomy'
in the Pancasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira
f.Cof.: A . B . D . ^ ( A l . ^ ) t?T^tqft^tilR#
( B . ^ )
 Chapter Sixteen

SAURA SIDDHANTA : MEAN PLANETS

Introductory
Chapter X V I of the Pahcasiddhdntikd deals with the computation of the mean star-planets.
Mars etc.. according to the Saitra Siddhdnta. and chapter X V I I of their true motions, with their
heliacal risings and ladtudes. T h e mean planets are made true by employing the method of epicycles,
as in the case of the Sun and the M o o n , in chapters X I and X . O f the xiddhdntas condensed by
Varahamihira the Saura alone uses epicycles, and there is no evidence of its use in any other.
So, in the originals also, only the Saura must have used epicycles, since V M follows the originals as
far as necessary. T h u s the Saura is the most mature, and may be considered to begin the highest
developed stage of H i n d u astronomy, represented by the Aryabhatiya, the Brdhma-sphuta-siddhdnta,
the Ijiler Surya Siddhdnta etc.

T h o u g h V M ' s Saura, being a karana, does not useyi/^^n-cycles for the planets, the original must
have had them and they can be reconstructed from the epoch-constants given, as we have done in
the case of the Sun, M o o n , Moon's apogee and nodes. These can be seen to agree with the corres-
ponding parameters of the PaitUsa quoted by Bhattotpala in his commentary on the BrhatMimhild,
and with ihe Ardhardtrika-paksa of Aryabhata, a work now lost, but reconstructible from its descrip-
tion given in the Mohdhhdskariya, chapt.VII, 21 -35, and from the Khandakhddyaka of Brahmagupta,
which latter expressly follows the Ardhardlrika-paksa. Not only the yMgc'-cycles, but also the yuga
days, and epicycles and apogee positions and nodes agree in these. Strangely enough, the 'New'
Surya Siddhdnta does not agree with the 'Old' in many things. In the matter of computing the
ladtudes of the star-planets, the Saura gives the same method as the Ardhardtrika-paksa combining
two types of latitudes, but the Khandakhddyaka follows the Aryabhatiya itself exactly as propounded
in the Mahdbhdskariya, V I . 52-55.

As lor agreement of VM's Saura with the other siddhdntas of the period, a perusal of the table
given undct X V I I . 11 will show this. B u t it must be noted that the agreement in mere number of
cycles is not real agreement, because, theywg^a days being different, there will fje difference in the
calculated mean values. But at the period we are considering, viz. (-.500 A . D . , the mean posidons
fairly agree with one another, and also with what would be got by modern astronomy, showing
thi'i the accuracN' of their observations. For example, for FS's epoch, all except the later Siii-ya
Siddhdnta give nearly 236 for Rahu, including the moderns. T h i s is seen only in the Rahu of the
iMler Siina Siddhdnta. (P^vidently, there is error of reading here. In 1.33 of the iMter Sur. Sid., the
original should have been vasvasviyamdsvinkhidasrakdh instead of vasvagni etc. T h i s mis-reading
must have occurred before the commentator Rai'iganatha, for he gives astardrndkrtirdmadvimitdh.
If what I suggest is correct, 3 will be added to the 232 29' got according to the wrong reading making
Rahu = 235 29', giving fair agreement). There is agreement in the degrees for heliacal rising and
setung and the method of computing the star-planets between the Sa\ira ol the PS and the l/iler
Sdrya Siddhdnta, though the epicycles differ in many ways.
XVI. 1 XVI. SAURA : MI.AN PI.ANF/l S 293

Another important matter should be mendoned. In X V I . 10-11, and X V I I . 10-1 l a , V M gives

corrections, which are his own, to secure agreement with observation to make the Saura fit for
correct almanac-making, which naturally will be demanded by the literate. Thus, in X V I . 10-11,
certain bijas are given to correct the means of Mars, Jupiter and Saturn and the sighra of Mercury
and Venus. T h e correcdons amount, in terms of yt/^a-cycles, to: Mars, -f .57; Mercury. -I- 400; Jupiter,
33 '/2; Venus, 150; and Saturn, + 25. These corrections are similar and approximately equal to
the famous Vdghhdvona correction on the Aryabhatiya. propounded by his successors i n his school,
to correct his cycles to agree with their observation. I do not suggest that V M was aware of the
Vdgbhdva correction in that form, but the tendency to correct the earlier results with bijas based on
observations is found everywhere, whether north or south, a healthy sign of the growth of the
science. One might refer also to XVII.10-1 l a , where V M attempts to conect Mercury and Venus
to secure agreement with observation.

Another thing is to be noted. In (1) the Aryabhatiya. in (2) the Ardhardtrika-paksa (which means
ipso facto the Khandnkhddyaka), V M ' s Saura and Bhattotpala-quoted PaulKa, and in (3) the iMicr
Suryasiddhdnta, theyuga cycles are such that the mean planets are all zero at the beginning of Kali,
the Moon's apogee is 90, and the Moon's node 180. Now the Aryabhatiya had equal yuga-jjddas,
Krta, Treld, Dvdpara and Kali, i.e., they are equal in length. T h e oxher siddhdntas have unequaly?^,ij'a
divisions, Krta being 4 parts, Treld 3 parts, Dvdpara 2 parts and Kali 1 part. If the other siddhdntas
also postulate, like the Aryabkitiya, that the planets were created and began to move from the beginning
of the Kalpa from a zero position, then the cycles should be divisible by 20. But they are not so divisible
in all. This necessity is avoided by postuladng a dme later than the beginning of the Kalpa called
'the time ot creation of planets' by the Ijiter Surya-Siddhdnta, as started in the verse,

graharksadevadaityddi srjato'sya cardcaram

krtdhdhivedd divydbddh .iataghnd vedhaso gatdh \ \ 1.24 \ \

and by having both the number of cycles andyMg-a-cycles divisible by four. In the case of the Moon's
apogee, the cycles should be odd, and in the case o f R a h u the cycles should be even, but not divisible
by 4. These necessary conditions are indeed found in the Later Surya Siddhdnta and its kind. Thus,
if there is any observed difference in the mean planets. Moon's apogee and nodes, they must be due
to the 3600 years elapsed after Kali, for the perif)d r.499 A . D . But the observed differences should
be only small, and due to error of observation. T h e cycles must have been, and have been,
constructed with an eye to this also. In fact, the number of cycles have been determined by observa-
tion, and by using the Diophandne equation (kuttaka). T h e difference of just 300 days in the length
of theyuga, (it does not matter much i f it is 328 days, as in the Later Sdrya Siddhdnta) to secure equal-
ity at c.499 A . D . , between the Ardhardlrika-paksa and the Aryabhatiya, which is called, for the sake of
distinction, the Audayika-paksa, meaning the type beginning the day from mean sunrise at Ujjain,
provided the number of cycles are the same. (See tables under X V I I . 11). There is a difference of
just a quarter of a day accumulated from zero Kali to c.499 A . D . and the difference is made zero at
this point of time.
294 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X V I . 11

Mean positions of the star-planets

I. T h e f o l l o w i n g is the d e t e r m i n e d p o s i t i o n o f the star-planets at m i d n i g h t
at U j j a i n a c c o r d i n g to the Saura Siddhdnta. F o r t h e i r c o m p u t a t i o n , the m e a n
S u n s h o u l d be t a k e n as the m e a n M e r c u r y a n d V e n u s .

Note: I follow TS's emendations.

Example: Find the mean Venus at 1,20,553 days after Epoch for the star-planets, viz. 427 saka
midnight at Ujjain.
This is the mean Sun at 1,20,553..5 days from midday of the Saura epoch, (yide expl. under I X .
1). Therefore the mean Venus = the mean Sun = 1,20,553.5 X 800 - 442) 2,92,207 = 17 18'
27".

3 T ^ n ( T I T ) % ( t r ! T ) ' (sJyT)^:' ' ^ ( q ^ ) ' RlfdMI^

ar^cbldVI ^ l^lHrkicbl ^^lum^ifuidl: \\6 \\

^m: '^g^'l^cbHI: 3rf?Tcr(it) w r R f ^ ( # )

X V I . 11 XVI. SAURA : MEAN PLANETS 295

2-9 To get mean Jupiter, m u l t i p l y the days f r o m e p o c h by 100, a n d d i v i d e by

4,33,2.S2. R e v o l u t i o n s etc. are got. D e d u c t 10"' p e r r e v o l u t i o n . A d d 8 6' 20",
the m e a n at e p o c h ( T h i s is c a l l e d ksepa.) ( A hija c o r r e c t i o n is g i v e n by V M , to
this, for w h i c h see verses 10-11, below.)

T0 get Mean Mars, d i v i d e the days by 6 8 7 . R e v o l u t i o n s etc. are got. A d d 14"'

p e r r e v o l u t i o n . A d d 2' 15 3 5 ' 0", the m e a n at e p o c h . (See verses 10-11, b e l o w ,
for bija c o r r e c t i o n . )

To get mean Saturn, m u l t i p l y the days by 1000 a n d d i v i d e by 1,07,66,066.

R e v o l u t i o n s etc. are got. D e d u c t 5"' p e r r e v o l u t i o n . A d d 4 ' 2 2 8 ' 49", the
m e a n at e p o c h . (See verses 10-11, below, f o r bija c o r r e c t i o n ) .

To get the Sighra of Mercury, m u l t i p l y the days by 100 a n d d i v i d e by 8 7 9 7 .

R e v o l u t i o n s etc. are got. A d d 41/2'" p e r r e v o l u t i o n . A d d 4" 2 8 17' 0", the
Sighra at e p o c h . (See verses 10-11, b e l o w , f o r hija c o r r e c t i o n . )

To get the Sighra of Venus, m u l t i p l y the days by 10 a n d d i v i d e by 2 2 4 7 . R e v o l u -

tions etc. are got. A d d IOV2" p e r r e v o l u t i o n . A d d 8' 2 7 3 0 ' 39", the sighra at
e p o c h . (See verses, 10-11, b e l o w , f o r bija c o r r e c t i o n ) .

l a A.'-^el'Sli; B.^SR^
b. A.P|'J|1'5iRH'#; B.'l^u|<+ifl)<JI'rl c. B . ^ : A.^5rqf?[ff; B.^wfclfcTfT
c. A.H^l^l4u|; B . H w ^ i ^ I ^ d. B.R^I^
2a. B . f e ^ B 2 . ! ^ l d l V | | y 7a.
b. Ai.c.'4iiirijR^i'r^^S'q%; c. B.*ra4!cf (B3.Wy.
B.1^^H d. A . ? ^ : ; B . ^ O T I ; C . D .
d. Al.f3Al.lg^ 8a. B.'iuilcl
3a. B . repeats words from previous verse: b. A .
c. A 1.3^^4)1; A 2 . " 3 l i ^
a-b. d. A.ftfdkll
b. A.<^<+1^-^|; B . ^ B . ^ : 9a. A.ra^W; B.RH^<^

d. B1.2.D.'?1^^BqT b. A.y\-^"i; B . ^ ^ S ^ R ^ I k l * !
4a. B1.3.<!'l)VI W l a n d o n e W t c. A.i^llf^d^; B3.!^ll[tidW B.f^+dl
om by haplography d. A.B.WTpnci^HI: (A.cUO
b. B.^IWWI: 10a. A.B.%^B.R(=b<rll
C. B . H ^ c ) : - ^ ^ ^ b. A . B . g ^ q r s q T T A . B . W r ^
d. B 1 . 3 . ? A S J B 3 . ^ S T A . ^ B . ^ : 11a. A . B 1.2 4^^41; B 3 . I ^ :
5a. B.At b. A . B . 1 ^ B.-^T(^TW:

b. B3.?lf?I^C.D.^ c. A . B . f t * l f d * l :
C. B.^f^: d. A . B . C . D . o m ' g : B . ^ ^Um
d. A . ^ H W R ^ ; B.?Fr^TOc%^ ( B 3 . ^ . A.B.C.D.JTsqrg
6a. A . ^ T M f ^ ; B.i7Fn:f?RT In D.ch. X V I I of the Mss. and of C is
b. A . C . D . ^ : ; B.m-; condnued as part of c h . X V I I . with
A . ^ ^ (A2.^); B.M:?t^^^; verse numbers duly altered.
296 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X V I . 11

Note 1. 1 follow TS's emendations, except in verse 6, where 1 have read khamaksau as khapaksau
instead of their khamakso, makso being meaningless. But their meaning, 20, is all right. In 7, the word
ksepa can stand, and need not be emended as done by them.

Note 2. T h e word madhya with reference to Mars, Jupiter and Saturn is mean planet in modern
parlance, and sighra with reference to Mercury and Venus, is mean planet according to modern
terminology.

Note 3. H o w to get the days from epoch has already been explained, and it should only to be
brought to the mid-night following to be used here.

Example 1. Find the mean Mars at 1,20,553 days from the midnightfollowing the Romaka epoch
the epoch given for star-planets.

1 , 2 0 , 5 . 5 3 6 8 7 = 175 revolutions and = 5^ 21 52' 40"

T h e revoludon correction = 1 7 5 x 1 4 " ' = 4-41"
Ksepa or mean at epoch = 2 ' 15 35' 0"

Mean Mars at required date = 8' 7 28' 21"

Example 2. Find the Sighra Venus at 1,20,553 days for epoch.

1,20,553 X 10-^ 2247 = 536 revolutions and 6' 2 19' 23"

R e v o l u t i o n C o r r e c t i o n : 5 3 6 x IOV2" = + 1 3 3 ' 48"
at epoch = 8"^ 27 3 0 ' 39"

% W o f V e n u s a t 1,20,553 days = 3^ 1 2 3 ' 5(;"

Note 4. T h e rules give to find the mean planets etc. depend on the fact that there are approxi-
mately 100 revoludons of Jupiter i n 4,33,232 days, one revoludon o f Mars i n 687 days, 1000
revolutions o f Saturn i n 1,07,66,066 days, 100 sighra (truly mean) revolutions of Mercury in 8,797
days a n d 10 o f Venus i n 2247 days. T h e revolution correcdons make these exact. T h e epoch
constants are the means at epoch.

Note 5. F r o m the rules given we can reconstruct theyuga cycles of the original Saurasiddhdnta of
which the Saura o f the PS is a Karana, and from these the epoch constants. These we shall do now.
T h e y u g a days o f the original Saura are 1,57,79,17,800, as computed from the short Saurayuga
given i n 1.14, from which it can be computed that i n 1,80,000 years there are 6,57,46,575 days,
since theyMgo is 43,20,000 years, being 24 times the shortywga.

We might now verify by calculadon, the yuga revolutions (yuga-paryaya) and epoch constants
(ksepa) of the several planets.
Jupiter: Yuga revolutions

1,57,79,17,800 X 100-^4,33,232 = 3,64,220, rev. 0^ 17 2 5 ' 1"

Revolutioncorrection = 3,64,220 X 1 0 " ' = - 1 6 5 1 ' 43"

.-.The number of rev. etc. i n the ywga = 3,64,220 rev., 0^ 0 3 1 ' 18"
X V I . 11 XVI. SAURA : MEAN PLANETS 297

T h e error i n the karana method is 3 1 ' 18" in 43,20,000 years, which is negligible when we consider
that the rule is given i n a kararia, which is not intended to be used for such a long period. Theyuga
revolutions 3,64,220, is indeed that given in the original, as seen from the Ardhardtrika-paksa and
Bhattotpala's Paulisa and Khandakhddyaka.

Epoch Constant (ksepa) for Jupiter

The epoch is 427 Saka i.e. 427 + 3179 = 3606 years from zero K a l i , i.e. midnight, - 3 nddh, 9

vinddis. For 3606 years, the modon is 3,64,220 x ( +

1200 1200 X 600
304 rev., (y 8 6' 36"
Subtracting the motion for 3 nddis. 9 vinddis, 16"

Jupiter's epoch constant got = 0' 8 6' 20"

This is exactly what is given above in verse 6.

Saturn: Yuga revolutions

1,57,79,17,800 X 1 0 0 0 - M , 0 7 , 6 6 , 0 6 6 =1,46,564 rev., 0^ 3 26' 12"
T h e c y c l e c o r r e c t i o n = 1,46.564x5'" = -3" 23' 34"

.-. T h e Fwg-a cycles got = 1,46,564 rev., 0^ 0 2' 38"

This is indeed the yuga cycles given i n the Ardhardtrika-paksa etc. neglecting the small error of 2'
38" accumuladng in 43,20,000 years, due to the kararia roughness.

Epoch constant for Saturn

1,46,564C+ ^
1200 600 X 1 2 0 0 122rev., A' 2 28' 5"
Deducting for 3 nddis, 9 vinddis 6"

T h e epoch constant got = 4' 2 28' 49"

Mars: Yuga revolutions

1,57,79,17,800-687= 22,96,823 rev. 6^ 29 4' 59"
Rev. Correction = 22,96,823 X 14'" = +4^ 28 52' 5"
..Yuga-cycles= 22,96,823 rev. IT 27 57' 4"

= 22,96,824, i n round numbers, being short only by 2 3', negligible i n the long
period. We see agreement with the original.

Epoch constant for Mars

The epoch constant is

22,96,824 (!+ 1 ) = 1917 rev., 2^ 15 36' 43".2

1200 600 X 1200
298 PANCASIDDHANTIKA X V I . 11

Deduction for 3 nddis, 9 vinddis 1' 39.5"

Less 1917'" ^ 5 " -6"

T h e epoch constant = 2' 15 34' 58"

There is agreement.

Mercury: Yuga revolutions

1,57,79,17,800 X 100 ^ 8997 = 1,79,36,998 rev. IV 21 4 1 ' 33"

Rev.Correction = 1,79,36,99 X 4'/2'" = +V 13 4 1 ' 15"

T h e FMg-fl cycles = 1,79,37,000 Rev. 0^ 5 22' 48"

There is fair agreement with the Ardhardtrika-paksa etc. with an excess of 5 22' 48" in theyuga,
which need not be considered great in a kararia rule. 4 7/16 instead of 4'/2'" would have taken this
difference also into account.
Epoch comtant for Mercury

1,79,37,000 (-i + ^ )=
1200 600 x 1200 14,972 rev.. A" 28 30' 0 "
Subtracting for the excess 3 nddis, 9 vinddis 2 3 ' 53"
For 1/16 repeat the correction + 16"

Epoch constant = 4' 28 17' 23"

Here the constant seems to have been given to nearest minute.

Venus: Yuga revolutions

1,57,79,17,800 X 10-T-2247 70,22,331 rev. 1' 8 55 5 4 "

Revolutioncorrection = 70,22,331 X 101/2= 56Rev. 10^ 21 4 7 ' 5 2 "

Kwgacycles = 70,22,388 0'^ 0 4 3 ' 4 6 "

T h e r e is a small error o f 43' 4 6 " , negligible in the long period of yuga, owing to the kararia rule.
10 85/178 would have been very correct.
Epoch constant for Venus

Epoch constant, 70,22,388 {-^ + ^ ) = 5861 rev.

1200 600 X 1200 8^ 27 3 5 ' 38".4
'Less iov 3 nddis, 9 vinddis - 5' 2 "
Extra in the correction + 2' 4 "

Epoch correction (in full agreement) = 8' 27 30' 3 9 "

In the Sun, M o o n , Rahu, and Moon's apogee too we see much exact agreement with Ardhardt-
rika-paksa, Kharidakhddyaka and Bhattotpala-quoted Paulisa, from which we can conclude that
source of V M ' s .Saura is the Old Saurasiddhdnta.
X V I . 11 XVI. SAURA : MEAN PLANETS 299

VM's Bija corrections

10-11. A d d 17" p e r year to m e a n M a r s . D e d u c t 10" p e r year f r o m m e a n J u p -
iter. A d d 7 ' / 2 " p e r year to m e a n S a t u r n . A d d 1 2 0 " p e r year to the sighra
('mean' a c c o r d i n g to m o d e r n parlance) o f M e r c u r y . Subtract 4 5 " p e r year
f r o m the sighra ( m o d e r n 'mean') V e n u s . I n a d d i t i o n , subtract 1400" o r 2 3 '
20", constant f r o m J u p i t e r ' s m e a n .

Note.l I follow TS's corrections.

Note 2. These corrections are obviously V M ' s own, to secure agreement with observation,
because V M sees the Saura used widely for almanac making, (besides himself being its follower) and
uses these bija corrections to the Saura. Being V M ' s own, we cannot verify the numbers used, but
we can compare these corrections with those given by the followers of the Aryabhatiya belonging
nearly to his time. Note how close they are, and commend the tendency to observe and correct,
instead of blindly following the masters.

T h e Kerala school following the Aryabhatiya gives the well-known vdgbhdva correction:
vdgbhdvondc chakdbddd dhanasatalayahdn mandavailaksyardgaih
prdptdbhir liptikdbhir virahitatanavas candratattungapdtdh |
sobhdnirudhasarnvidgariakanarahatdn mdgardptdh kujddydh
sarnyukytd jddrasaurdh suragurubhrgujau vajitau bhdnuvarjam \\

(Katapayddi notation is used here.) According to this the corrections per annum are for Mars
+ 11.5", for Mercury -I- 105", for Jupiter - 12", for Venus - 39", and for Saturn H- 5". See that these
compare well with V M ' s .

Example: Give the bija corrections for Mars and Venus at 1,20,553 days from epoch.

This is 330 years. T h e correction for Mars = 330 X 17" (positive) = -I- 1 33' 3 0 " .

T h e correcdon for Venus = 330 x 45 (negative) = - 4 7' 30".

T h u s &f/a-corrected mean Mars of date is 8' 9 1' 51", and ^)ya-corrected Venus, 2' 27 16' 20".

Thus ends Chapter Sixteen entitled 'Saura-Siddhanta - Mean Planets' in

the Pancasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira

l . C o l . : A.B.D.^fSfW^^2Tqf^-(B.^lf^forTTfir)
(D. gives this as a section colophon).
C. ifil ^4R1<^I'T1 fT2Flf!RflT ^l#2TR:
 Chapter Seventeen

SAURA-SIDDHANTA TRUE PLANETS

As stated earlier, the computation of the Saura star-planets is contiiuied in ch. X V I I , the topics
treated being, the T r u e planets, their heliacal risings and their latitudes.

iftm^S cFfs?^ ^ q f i g p r t fl^jtrTT:

tr^R^' ( ? 5 c n [ q ^ w : ) ' 'is^' w ^ v j i i ^ l w i H II ^ II

Epicycles of the planets
1. F o r the o t h e r planets (i.e. o t h e r t h a n M e r c u r y a n d V e n u s , viz., for M a r s ,
J u p i t e r a n d S a t u r n ) , the S u n is t h e i r Sighra. T h e epicycles o f e q u a t i o n o f the
apsis o f M a r s etc. are twice, 3 5 , 14, 16, 7, a n d 3 0 , (i.e., o f M a r s 7 0 , o f
M e r c u r y 2 8 , o f J u p i t e r 3 2 , o f V e n u s 14 a n d o f S a t u r n 60.)
Note 1. 1 follow TS's emendation mpahcatrimsanrnanavah. B u t I read,SMraA assvardh and not.9'a
like T S because svardh is nearer the given reading surdh, and also 14 is the epicycle given in the
Ardhardtrika-paksa etc. Five mdtrds are wanting i n the last foot, and it must be supplied with som
such words as bhdgdh, as all numbers are already given. But T S make it sadyutds-tnrrisdh a
strangely enough, translate it as 24, confusing the addition mentioned by themselves for subtrac-
tion. (However, on page X X I I I of the Introduction Thibaut gives the correct 30 x 2 = 60.)

Note 2. T h e first foot is to be read with verses 7 and 8 of chap. X V I where the sighra of Mercury
and Venus have already been given. Properly speaking, the matter i n the foot should have been
given i n chap. X V I .

( ? ) WTT: ^ ^ ! , M U ^ s * ( ^ ) i n J n i 3 ; || ^ |

2. 6, 11, 8, 4, 12 m u l d p l i e d by 2 0 , M a r s ' s b e i n g less by 10, (i.e. 110, 2 2 0 ,

160, 8 0 , a n d 2 4 0 ) are the a p o g e e positions o f M a r s , M e r c u r y , J u p i t e r ,
Venus and Saturn.

la. B . # d. A . ^ O f ^ : I B.F!T:^gcrfW?n II; C.W:

b. ^ 5 ^ ; D . g [TR] [^:] | TRf; q f ^ d l l W : ||;
C. D . f l y n : ^ A.Bi^ldlH'JI D.-CT:^iSffWr[J] II
XVI.6 XVII. SAURA ; TRUE PLANETS 301

Note 1.1 follow TS's emendations. Mandagatinamabhdgdh does not make any sense. But the meaning
is obvious, it must mean apogee positions. Some drastic emendadon of the word can be made to
give this meaning, but I am against such as emendation.
Note 2. These positions agree with those given i n the Ardhardtrika-pahsa etc., as also in the
Aryabhatiya. T h e correct positions according to modern astronomy are 128, 234, 170, 290, and
244, respectively.

Note 3. T h e apogee 80 for Venus and the epicycle 14 are the same as given for Sun. T h e apogee
position 80 given is near the perigee position of modern astronomy, so faraway. We shall explain
this under verses 10-1 l a , below.

3. T h e degrees o f epicycles o f c o n j u n c t i o n o f M a r s is 2 3 4 , o f M e r c u r y 132,

of J u p i t e r 72, o f V e n u s 260, a n d o f Saturn 40.

Note 1. 1 have generally adopted TS's corrections. B u t the text is corrupt in the third foot, and
TS's correction itself wants one mdtrd. I would read the third and fourth feet thus:
paksasvards ca kham sadyamdh khakrtds ca kujddindm.
This would follow the original work.

Note 2. T h e values agree with the Ardhardtrika-paksa, Khandakhddyaka, and Bhattotpala-quoled-

Paulisa group, as to be expected.

2a. B.WW^^^<^l<tf (B2.TH^) 3a. B.^^TO

b. B.-fm A.-^W^-; B.<^I<+^>J|'J|I: b. B . ^ r a ^ A . B . C . D . W t l . B 1 . 2 . ^
(B2.WTT:; B 2 . W n : ) c. B . om^^RW: A . ^ S S 5 S ^ 3 ^ B.lm
c. D."n#lt*PII: B . ^ e n r ^ 1 1 ^ d. A . B . ' R T ^ ( B 3 . ^ : ^ ) C . D . f c I I : ^ : ^ ^
d. A.-?pR#!Flt
302 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVII.7

T r u e planets
Thefirststep

4. D e d u c t the m e a n f r o m the sighra. I f the r e m a i n d e r (called sighra-kendra)

is w i t h i n 9 0 , s i n . sighra-kendra is c a l l e d bhuja, a n d sin ( 9 0 - sighra-kendra) is
c a l l e d koti.

I f sighra-kendra is m o r e t h a n 9 0 a n d less t h a n 1 8 0 , subtract it f r o m 180.

( T a k i n g this as the sighra-kendra, s i n . sighra-kendra is bhuja a n d sin ( 1 8 0
sighra-kendra) is koti. li sighra-kendra is m o r e t h a n 1 8 0 a n d less t h a n 2 7 0 ,
d e d u c t 1 8 0 f r o m it a n d take this as sighra-kendra. S i n . sighra-kendra is bhuja
a n d sin (90 - sighra-kendra) is koti. I f s i g h r a - k e n d r a is f r o m 2 7 0 to 360, deduct
it f r o m 3 6 0 a n d take its sine as the bhuja a n d sin 9 0 - sighra-kendra is the koti.
( T h e bhuja oi manda-kendra is to be f o u n d i n the same way using manda-kendra
i n the place of sighra-kendra)^

5-6. T h e bhuja a n d koti m u s t be m u l t i p l i e d by the planet's epicycle o f conjunc-

t i o n a n d d i v i d e d by 3 6 0 . T h u s t r a n s f o r m e d , they are c a l l e d bhuja-result a n d
koti-result p e r t a i n i n g to the e q u a t i o n o f c o n j u n c t i o n . I f the sighra-madhya is
f r o m 2 7 0 to 9 0 , the koti-result is to be a d d e d to 120 (the R . o f the PS). I f
sighra-madhya is f r o m 9 0 to 2 7 0 , the koti-result is to be subtracted f r o m 120.
S q u a r e this a n d a d d it to the square o f the bhuja-result. F i n d its square root,
a n d by this d i v i d e 120 X bhuja-result. F i n d arc-sine o f this. Subtract h a l f this
f r o m the l o n g i t u d e o f apsis i f the sighra-kendra is f r o m 0 to 180. A d d i f f r o m
180 to 3 6 0 .

MRuIIUI Chi jchUS? d H j ^ ^ c t II

Second step
7. H a l f r e c t i f y i n g the a p o g e e p o s i t i o n thus, d e d u c t it f r o m the m e a n . T h e
result is to be u s e d as the a n o m a l y o f the apsis i n the s e c o n d step. A s we find
the bhuja o f the a n o m a l y o f c o n j u n c t i o n (sighra-kendra) so find the bhuja o f the
a n o m a l y o f apsis. M u l t i p l y the bhuja by the manda e p i c y c l e a n d d i v i d e by 360.
a n d get the t r a n s f o r m e d bhuja-result o f the apsis. ( T h i s is sine e q u a t i o n o f the

4.5. QuotedbyUtpalaonBS,2.pp.44-45 d. A l . ^ P ^ : ; B . C . D . U . ^ : A . B . ^

4a. V.wm^ -^b- ^ - ^ r : , ^ - ^ ^ ^ ^

b. A ^ ^ A B . ^ ( B 2 . 3 . ^ ) C.ir^m^^(D.^^^^)
A . B . ^ ^ ; U.^?Fqi
c. B.'SFtfe

' In modern usage, for all the above we can siniplv say sin. sighra-kendra is the bhuja and cos. sighra-
is the koti, without taking into account the sign + or .)
XVI1.9 XVII. SAURA: TRUE PLANETS 303

centre). F i n d its arc-sine. A d d h a l f this arc to the h a l f rectified l o n g i t u d e o f

a p o g e e i f the a n o m a l y o f apsis is f r o m 0 to 1 8 0 a n d subtract i f 180 to 3 6 0 .
T h u s the a p o g e e is r e c t i f i e d c o m p l e t e l y .

Third sU'j)
8. Substract this rectified a p o g e e f r o m the m e a n a n d thus get the a n o m a l y
o f apsis. F i n d its bhuja a n d m u l t i p l y it by the e p i c y c l e o f the apsis a n d d i v i d e
by 3 6 0 . T h e bhuja-result, (this is the equation o f the centre), is got. F i n d the arc-
sine o f this, a n d subtract the w h o l e o f this arc f r o m the m e a n i f the a n o m a l y
o f apsis is f r o m 0 to 180, a n d a d d it f r o m 180 to 3 6 0 . T h e result is rectified
mean.

Fourth step

9. D e d u c t the rectified m e a n f r o m the sighra. T h e a n o m a l y o f c o n j u n c t i o n

is got. F i n d the bhuja a n d koti o f this i n the same m a n n e r as we d i d i n the first
step. M u l t i p l y the bhuja by the e p i c y c l e o f c o n j u n c t i o n a n d d i v i d e by 3 6 0 . S i n e
a n o m a l y o f conj. is got. M u l t i p l y the koti, i.e., cos. a n o m a l y o f c o n j u n c t i o n , by
the e p i c y c l e o f conj. a n d d i v i d e by 3 6 0 . T h e r e l a t e d cosine is got. A d d this to
120 i f the a n o m a l y is f r o m 2 7 0 to 9 0 a n d subtract f r o m 120 i f f r o m 9 0 to
2 7 0 . S q u a r e this, a d d the square o f the bhuja (i.e. eqttation o f c o n j u n c t i o n )
a n d find the square root. D i v i d e the e q u a t i o n o f conj. X 120 by this square
root. T h e arc sine o f this is the result. A d d this result to the rectified m e a n i f
the a n o m a l y o f conj. is f r o m 0 to 1 8 0 . S u b t r a c t o t h e r w i s e . T h e g e o c e n t r i c
t r u e p l a n e t is got.

6a. A 1 . ? I ^ ; B.cT^ratTJ d. B.^Rfri^:; C D .

b. A.^w<^5n^( A2.'5) B l . 2 . 3 . repeat the verse twice and
B. t r 3 [ ^ ^ ^ ; C. f ^ W ^ ^s^^^t ^ J3- give them two consecutive verse
D. ^ i r a ^ t R i t ^ ^ numbers.
B . ^ q * ^ : (B2.W;) 8a. B.HSTIl^ A . ^ t ^ S T ; C.D.^f##KT:
c. A . B . W N I ( B . ^ ) ^ b. A . B . C . D . c T F n ^ ^ ^
d. b . " ? M b . ^ w ^ 9a.-d.-^^^^im;c.-Rmmi
7a. B . ^ g 3 f ^ ( B l . f q , B 3 . ^ ) ^ ^ b. D . ^ ^ r
b. C t ^ ^ T t P ^ ; D . f ^ T ^ c. A.B.D.3Hlf<=)<|kl B . ^
c. B2.^TftaimB3.'5Rig^5 d. A . B . ' q ! m ^ ( B . ^ ) ^^WlWf; ( B . ' q w ^ : )

23
304 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVII.9

Note 1. In verse 4,1 follow TS's reading, except that I have emended sadhhydh into sadbhih, inste
TS's sadbhyah, because my reading allows us subtraction or addition, as is wanted. In verse 5, I
follow TS's except i n the second foot, where I give the Brihatsamhitd reading. Either reading gives
the same sense. In verse 6,1 follow TS's except i n the second foot, where I have given bhdjyam for
vibhajet, as being more likely. But the meaning is the same. In verse 7, the text required no emending,
and TS's dhanabdni is unnecessary. In verse 8, like T S I have corrected ^ r o into punah but I have
also corrected bdhum into bdhur which is required by grammar. In verse 9, I have corrected
rmdhydkhydm mto rnadhydkhyam, which is the reading of some of the manuscripts. Otherwise I follo
IS.

Note 2. V M , here, as elsewhere i n the PS, uses his tabular sine where R is 120', as given in chap IV.
So we must use his tabular values to get the R sines and R cosines. O f course, we may use the modem
table, or the Siddhantic table with R = 3438. But then the R, 1 for the modern tables, and 3438 for
the Siddhantic tables is to be used instead o f 120' which is instructed here. ( V M uses bhuja to mean
sine, and koti to mean cosine, instead using the v/ord jyd).
Note 3. T h e method is the same as what is found in the Later Surya Siddhdnta, with some change
for convenience. But i n the matter of the number or order of the steps, the Aryabhatiya and the
Siddhdnta-Siromani differ. T h i s is because, correctly speaking, the first two steps are useless, and the
last two steps alone are necessary. In essence, the third serves to get the true heliocentric position,
and the fourth to convert the heliocentric position into geocentric. T h e earlier steps are i n the fond
hope of getting correct positions agreeing with observation, while the real trouble is i n the inexact
parameters followed by the Siddhdntas.

Note 4. T h e second and third steps are merely akin to finding the equation of the centre and
applying to the mean. T h e first and fourth steps are conversion o f heliocentric to geocentric posi-
tions, neglecting the latitude, which is small and does not affect the result much. T h e work can be
illustrated thus:

Epicycle of Conjunction

Chapter XVII. Fig. 1

XVII.9 XVII. SAURA: TRUE PLANETS 305

T h e fig, is for Mercury and Venus, having the Sun as the mean planet. For Mars, Jupiter and
Saturn, interchange the planet and the Sun. T h e geocentric position in both cases is mean planet
plus Q . If Q i s formed below the horizontal line, it is so much negative and must be subtracted from
the mean.

Example 1. Find the true, i.e. geocentric, Mars at 1,20,553 days from epoch.
Given:

Mean Mars, already found with bija corr. 8' 9 2'

Sighra Mars = mean Sun of date = 17 18'
A p h e l i o n (apogee) of Mars assumed, y 20 (for 120 given)
Epicycle o f apsis = 70, Apsis o f conj. = 234.
First step. Anomaly of conj. = Sighra - mean
= 17 18' - 8' 9 2'
= 128 16'.
This is more than 90 and less than 180.
So, subtracting from 180, bhujdfhsa is 51 44', Kotiamsa = 38 16'
Bhuja = 94' 2". Koti = 74' 17"
Bhuja-result = 94' 2" X 234 ^ 360 = 6 1 ' 14"
Koti-result = 74' 17" X 234 ^ 360 = 48' 17"
As anomaly of conj. is between 90 and 270, this is subtractive from 120'.
120' - 48' 17" = 71' 43'^
120' X bhuja-result 4- V 71' 43"' + bhuja-result^ = 120' x 6 1 ' 14"

V 7 1 ' 4 3 " ' + 61' 14"^

= 77' 55".
A r c for 7 7 ' 5 5 " = 40 30'
i/^arc = 20 15'
Subtracting from aphelion (since anomaly of conj. is from 0 to 180), 110 - 20 15' = 89 5',
which is the half-corrected aphelion.
Second step

Anomaly of apsis = 249 2' - 89 45' = 150 17'

This is more than 90 and less than 180.
So, Bhuja degrees = 20 43'. Bhujd = 42' 24". Bhuja-resuU (i.e. eq. of the centre) = 42' 24" x 70/360
= 8' 15"
Arc for this = 3 56'; Vs arc = 1 58'
This is addidve because A n . of apsis is between 0 and 180.
H a l f recdfied aphelion -h 1 58' = 91 43' = full recdfied aphelion.
Third step

T h e corrected anomaly of apsis = 249 2' - 91 43' = 157 19'. T h e bhuja degrees = 22 4 1 ' .
Bhuja = 46' 17". T h e Bhuja-result = 46' 17" x 70/360 = 9' 0". A r c of 9' 0" = 4 18', deductive
because an. of apsis is between 0 and 180.

Mean - arc = 249 2' - 4 IS' = 244 44' = mean corrected (for eq. centre).
306 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVII.9

Fourth step

A n . conj = 17 18' - 244 44' = 132 34'. Bhujamsa = 180 - 132 44' = 47 26', Kotiamsa = 42
34'. Bhuja = 88' 20". Koti = 81' 8". Bhuja-result = 88' 20" X 234 ^ 360 = 57 25". Koti-result = 8 1 '
8" X 234 -r- 360 = 52' 44".

As an. of conj. is in 270 to 90, this is deductive from 120'. So, 120' - 52' 44" = 67' 16". 120' X
bhuja-result 4- y/bhuja-result' + 67' 16"' = 77' 32".

A r c of this taken as sine = 46 16', additive because an. conj. is from 0 to 180.
So, corrected mean arc = 244 44' + 40 16' = 285 0' = geocentric true Mars.

Example 2. Find the geocentric Venus at 1,20,553 days from epoch.

Given:
The sighra of Venus = 2' 27 16' 20" = 87 16'
Mean Venus = Mean Sun = 17 18'
A p h e l i o n o f Venus = 2' 20 = 80.
Epicycle of Conj. of Venus = 260.
Epicycles of the apsis = 14.
First step
A n . Conj = 87 16' - 17 18' = 69 58'.
T h e Bhuja degrees = 69 58'. Koti degrees = 20 2'.
Bhuja = 1 1 2 ' 42". Koti = 4 1 ' 5". '
Bhuja-result = 1 1 2 ' 42" x 260 - 360 = 8 1 ' 24".
Koti-result = 4 1 ' 5" X 260 h- 360 = 29' 40".
A n . Conj. is between 270 and 90. So the Koti-result is additive to 120'.
So, 120' + 29' 40" = 149' 40"
Bhuja-result X 120' V 8 1 ' 2 4 " ' + 149'40'"' = 57' 20".
A r c 57' 20" = 28 33'. H a l f arc = 14 17', subtractive to aphelion (as A n . conj. is from 0 to 180
80 - 14 17' = 65 43' = H a l f corrected aphelion.

Second step

A n . o f apsis = mean - half cor. aphelion = 17 18' - 65 4 3 ' = 311 35'.

T h e Bhuja degrees are 48 25'.
Bhuja = 89' 44".
Bhuja-result = 89' 44" x 14 ^ 360 = 3' 29".
A r c . 3' 29" = 1 40'. H a l f arc = 50', subtractive, as an. conj. is from 180 to 360.
Corrected aphelion = Half-corrected aphelion - 50' = 65 4 3 ' - 50' = 64 53'.
Third step

A n . of apsis = mean-corrected aphelion

= 1 7 1 8 ' - 6 4 5 3 ' = 31225'
Bhuja degrees = 47 35'. Bhuja = 88' 33".
Bhuja-result = 88' 33" X 14 -r 360 = 3' 27".
A r c sine 3' 27" = 1 39' , additive as an. of apsis is 180 to 360.
So, mean Venus + arc = 17 18' -I- 1 39' = 18 57', is the eq. cent, corrected mean.
X V I I . 10 XVII. SAURA: TRUE PLANETS 307

Fourth step

A n . conj. = .^fg-Ara-corrected mean

= 87 16' - 18 57' = 68 19'.
MM>a degrees = 68 19'. A:o<2 degrees = 2 1 4 1 '
Bhuja = 1 1 1 ' 29". Koti = 44' 19".
Bhuja-resuh = 1 1 1 ' 29" X 260 ^ 360 = 80 31'
Koti-result = 44' 19" x 260 360 = 32' 0".
As an. conj is from 270 to 90, additive to 120. So, 32' 0" + 120' = 152' 0".

Bhuja-result X 120 4- ^Bhuja-result' + 152"' = 62' 12".

A r c sine = 62' 12". H a l f arc = 3 1 14', addidve as an. conj is 0 to 180.
Geocentric true Venus = 18 57' + 31 14' = 50 11'.

In verse 11 below, V M requires us to subtract 67' or 1 7' constant, as blja-correction, after all
work is over. So, geocentric T r u e Venus = 50 11' - 1 7' = 49 4 1 ' .

Special work for M e r c u r y and Venus

10. A l l star-planets are (geocentrically) m a d e t r u e i n the above m a n n e r . B u t

i n the case o f M e r c u r y , this a d d i t i o n a l w o r k is to be d o n e : S u b t r a c t its a p o g e e
f r o m the sighra a n d , u s i n g the S u n ' s e p i c y c l e , find the bhuja-result a n d a p p l y
it to the m e a n M e r c u r y ( w h i c h , o f course, is the same as the Sun's), w i t h the
a d d i t i o n o r subtraction d o n e , as the Sun's Mw^a-result is additive o r subtractive.
11 a-b. F r o m V e n u s , subtract 6 7 ' , constant, after a l l the e a r l i e r sphuta w o r k
i n s t r u c t e d has b e e n d o n e .
Note 1. T h e reading ksayadhane is better as it is, and T S need not have corrected it into
ksayadhanam. T h e reading budhavat is deficient by two syllables, Lalla's reading budherkavat supplies
these and makes the meaning more clear. So I have adopted it. TS's emendation budhaphalavat,
with phala added for the two mdtrds wanting, is not different i n meaning from budhavat. B e i n g an
arbitrary rule, we cannot decide which gives the original meaning, budherkavat or budhavat. But
since Lalla's reading is not defective, at least as far as the mdtrds are concerned, I have adopted it.

10a. B . o m ^ : B . ^ > f t ^ 1 la. A . ^ : ; B . ^

b. A2.WH?ff; B . ^ H ? ! ^ ; D-^l^"?Tt b. A.B.?il1T A ^ ^ j f e f c l ^ ; B.^^gfeR^
c. A 2 . ^ B . ^ (B2.3.^cR^)
d. A . B . ^ s m ; C . 1 ? T O ^ D . ^ ( ^ ) ^(t)
308 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVII.11

Also, it is clear that it is not a substitute for any of the four steps because, i f so the separate epicycle
for Mercury will be useless.

Note 2. It is clear that the rules given here are V M ' s own, to secure, i n his opinion, better agree-
ment with observation, because they are not given in the Ardhardtrika-paksa etc. and the original
four steps are all in line with them, as also the modern Surya-Siddhdnta and the Siddhdnta Siromani.

Note-3. T h e whole work of finding the true positions, especially of the star-planets is defective i n
H i n d u astronomy, i n that the equation of the centre of H i n d u astronomy neglects the second,
third, etc. terms, which is considerable in the case of the M o o n , Mars, Saturn and Mercury, in which
last case the second term is as large as 3. In the case of Mercury and Venus it is applicable to the
Sun, instead of their Sighra which is really their mean. In the equation of conjunction, the Sun's
true distance from the earth and true longitude should be used, instead of the mean distance and
mean longitude, as is done in H i n d u astronomy. O n account of these defects, computation does
not agree with observation, and all sorts o f hotch-potch rules are given in different astronomical
works. T h e disagreement among themselves would itself show that they are beside the mark. When
these defects are remedied, the third and fourth steps alone would be necessary, the third step giving
the heliocentric true planet; and the fourth step converting the heliocentric position to the geocentric.

Note 4. In the case of Venus, there is another kind of defect. Its m a x i m u m eq. of cent, being small,
it is confused with the Sun's, and the Sun's epicycle and apogee are given to Venus also. While its
aphelion position is 290, according to modern astronomy, its apogee is given as 80, the same as
the Sun's.

Table of Heliocentric Star-planets at epoch. (For mutual comparison)

7 2 3 4 5 6
Planets Modern Sidd. Siromani Later Surya Earlier Vdsistha Interpolation
astronomy Siddhdnta S. Siddhdnta Paulisa of PS in P S X V I I I
oiPS

Mercury 151 1481/2 166* 148 161 1/2

Venus 269 2681/2 264 267 2691/2 2691/2
Mars 75 761/2 78 751/2 831/2 831/2
Jupiter 9 9 1/2 9 8 12 9
Saturn 122 122 1231/2 1221/2 120 118

For values in column (5) see their derivation in the Notes to ch. X V I I I . A l l values have been com-
puted by me.
* This needs explanation: Perhaps the reading is sdnydsvi in Sdrya Siddhdnta 1.31, which will reduc
the degrees by 12. But the commentator Raiiganatha takes it as sunyartuh.
X V I I . 12 XVII. SAURA: TRUE PLANETS 309

Table of Synodic periods of the Star-planets

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Planets Mod. Astr. Sid. Sir. Later Su. PS-Su. PS-Vas.- Interpolated Ptolemy
Siddh. Siddh. Paulisa PS XVIII

Mer. 115. 87747766 8784290 8780110 8785195 8791307 8750556 .879

Venus .583. 92136655 8968279 9001782 8975750 9092440 9060301 584.000
Mars. 779. 93610175 9222494 9242712 9211734 9553326 9787326 .943
J u p . 398. 88404760 8894794 8891768 8891698 8891358 8852917 .886
Sat. 378. 09190150 0859936 0863874 0860183 0997090 1100185 .093

A l l values except those in column (7) have been computed by me. In column (6), the solar 'days'
given have been converted into ordinary days.

Retrograde motion

] 1 c-d. T h e times f r o m the b e g i n n i n g o f the r e t r o g r a d e m o t i o n to its e n d a n d

the follow u p p e r i o d c a n be f o u n d by the d a i l y m o t i o n ( b e i n g negative, d u r i n g
this p e r i o d , a n d the c o n v e n t i o n r e g a r d i n g these).

Note: T h e terms vakra (retrograde) and anuvakra (follow-up at the end of retrograde) are technical.
They are eight in number according to the Surya Siddhdnta, given by the verse:

vakrdtivakra kutild manda mandatard samdl

tathd sighratard sighrd grahdndm astadlid gatihil

T h e generally given reading vakrd-anuvakrd is wrong in my opinion and I have read it asvakrd-
atix/akrd, and atixjakrd has taken the place of anuvakrd in the verse. T h e expression yd vakrd sd'mwakragd
in the next verse makes it clear.

Generally the near ones are subsumed into one another. B u t in the case of Mars, V M gives all
these eight and their degrees and periods. See below under X V I I I . 33-34.

[i)^<i4ehH^|J|l:]

l l c - d . A.^rFng. B . ^ ? H ? R :
310 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVII.13

H e l i a c a l rising o f t h e p l a n e t s

12. T h e h e l i a c a l r i s i n g a n d setting o f the M o o n , M a r s , M e r c u r y , J u p i t e r ,

V e n u s a n d S a t u r n are w h e n t h e i r e l o n g a t i o n ( f r o m the t r u e S u n ) are 12, 17,
13, 11, 9, a n d 15.

Note 1. I generally adopt TS's readings. B u t Sasi is extra, and evidently a mistake which has crept
into the reading. T o make up for this they have removed rudra which is necessary, and this emen-
dation has spoiled the correct agreement with other siddhdntas.

Note 2. These are time-degrees, i.e. time expressed in degrees (kdlabhdga) and are arbitrary in
essence, and depend on the keennees of the observer's eyesight, as also the atmospheric conditions.
T h e later Surya-Siddhdnta gives 10 and 8 for Venus at superior and inferior conjunctions, and 14
and 12 for Mercury, respectively, while the Surya-Siddhdnta here and some others give the mean
of each. (The Mahdbhaskariya gives even 4 or 41/2 for Venus at inferior conj. and 8 at superior
conj.)

Latitudes o f planets

13. A d d o n e e i g h t h o f itself to the R (120') sine o f ( m e a n p l a n e t - apogee),

i n the case o f S a t u r n , J u p i t e r a n d V e n u s . F o r , the two others, (i.e.. M e r c u r y
a n d M a r s ) , subtract o n e f o u r t h o f itself. ( T h i s is o n e p a r t o f latitude). T h e r e is
a n o t h e r p a r t o f l a t i t u d e u s i n g the A n o m a l y o f c o n j u n c t i o n .

14. F r o m the R sine a n o m a l y o f c o n j u n c t i o n o f J u p i t e r , M a r s a n d V e n u s sub-

tract o n e f o u r t h o f itself. F r o m that o f the rest, (viz., M e r c u r y a n d S a t u r n ) a d d
a n e i g h t h . A d d b o t h a l g e b r a i c a l l y a n d n o t e the d i r e c t i o n , n o r t h o r south.
M u l t i p l y this by R (i.e. 120') a n d d i v i d e by the h y p o t e n u s e got i n the last step.
T h e l a t i t u d e is got, its d i r e c t i o n b e i n g that o f the n o t e d d i r e c t i o n .
12a. A . ^d l<H*<id<id<i^ll:; c. B . w W - ^ l : ;
B.-^<(<Hcb<ld<id<IVIh D.fiiwJKAil: A . ^ ; B l . 2 . ^

b. A . ^ ^ ^ ^ : ; B.^^^^: d. A.f^^qt^a
14a. B.'J<?'*^dd'Ml
c. A . B . 1 ^ ^ ( B . ? ; ) ^
b. B.^#Tr A . ;fl'MH^-Ml<^i^liaiVII:; B .
d. A . B . C . ^ 7 l M ? T f e A . ^ 5 ^ : ; B . ^ 6 ^ : ;
C. B.W^ A.Pl-^l'l-si^Wf^^:;
13a. B.H^Idi^^l ( B 2 . ^ R ^ , B 3 . < T ^ )
b. B . M S t ? r ^ % ^ ; D . ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ! { l * i u i l ' i
X V I I . 14 XVII. SAURA: T R U E PLANETS 311

Note 1. This is a peculiar primitive way of finding the latitude of the star-planets. It is not found in
the allied Khandakhddyaka and the quoted part o f the Bhattotpala-quoted Paulisa. It is found in
Aryabhata's Ardhardtrika-paksa given i n the Mahdbhdskariya (VII. 28-33). B u t there are some differ-
ences between the two, and we cannot decide which follows the original Saura here, and which has
slighdy modified the original. T h e y both menuon two kinds of latitudes for each star-planet which
are to be added algebraically. But there is a difference in the maximum latitudes, and in the ascending
nodes to be subtracted from the mean longitudes or sighras. V M ' s Saura implies the max. latitude
90', 90', 135', 135', and 135', for Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus and Saturn, respectively, to be
multiplied by sine anomaly of conjunction, and 90', 135', 90', 90', and 135' to be multiplied by sine
anomaly of conjunction, no separate node being given, which means that the apogee itself is the
node for one kind of latitude, and the mean planet itself for the other. B u t the Ardhardtrika gives
only one set of m a x i m u m latitudes for both, viz., 90', 120', 60', 120', 120. It gives the nodes, 20,
40, 70, 260, and 150 for the former and 20, nil, 7 0 , 260 and 150 for the latter, Goxdndasvdmi's
Bhdsya on the Mahdbhdskariya, being meagre, does not help us.

Note 2. By implication, we had better take the arguments o f the eq. cent, used i n the third step
for the former, and the anomaly of conj. used and hypotenuse obtained i n the fourth step for the
latter.

Example: Find the latitude of Mars at 1,20,553 days from epoch.

In the third step of the earlier example, the sine of the argument of eq. conj. is 42' 24". As it is
Mars, deducting quarter of itself, the latitude is 3 1 ' 48", north, as this argument is between 0 and
180. In the fourth step, the sine of the argument of conj. is 88' 20". F o r Mars one fourth is to be
subtracted. So, the latitude due to this is 66' 15", again north, since the argument is from 0 to 180.
A d d i n g , 31' 48" + 66' 15" = 98' 3", north.

The hypotenuse obtained there, i n the fourth step, is 88' 52".

98' 3" X 120 88' 52" = 132" north, is the true latitude o f Mars for the day.
(As it is, this is far from the latitude obtained from using the later Siddhdntas,)

Note 3. T h e treatment of Saura is taken up by V M i n X V I I I . 57-60, where the latitude found here
is used to correct the mean elongation given i n verse 12, for the heliacal setting and rising. T h e
exposition of these verses is given i n X V I I I .

Thus ends Chapter Seventeen entitled 'Saura-Siddhanta - True

Planets' in the Pancasiddhantika composed by Varahamihira

C o l . : A.B.D.dKIH^^ilcti^ui bi).^!^|l5S!IFI:;
 C h a p t e r E i g h t e e n

(VASI3THA-) PAULI^A-SIDDHANTA RISING AND

SETTING OF PLANETS

Introductory
Chapter X V I I I of PS (NP's ch. X V I I ) deals primarily with the star-planets according to the
Vdsistha and Paulisa siddhdntas. T h e true motion of the planets is traced from one heliacal rising to
the next. T h e method of getting the true anomaly of the equation o f the centre is similar to that of
the M o o n given by the Vdsistha i n ch. II and based on the same theory of the rate of motion, forming
a linear zigzag. Ev.en the same technical term pada is used here. A l l these are reminiscent of the
Babylonian astronomy of the Selucid period. T h e text as available too is not very pure and this too
has made the interpretation of this chapter difficult for T S . In my paper on 'Some misinterpretations
and omissions of Thibaut and Sudhakara Dvivedi in the PS of V M ' (VfJ.. 11 (1973) 107-18) I have
indicated the errors occurring in the said publication. N P have improved upon TS's interpretation
in some places, but have committed worse mistakes i n other places. T S and N P have also failed to
understand how the equation of the centre has been computed and applied to the equation of con-
junction of Jupiter and Saturn. Since they had to interpret, in someway or other, the related verses,
they have altered the verses, i n all sorts of ways, to yield what they thought the meaning might be.
Even i n the case of Venus, where computation has been made simpler by neglecting the small
equation of the centre, they have committed several errors which have been pointed out in the
exposition o f these verses given below.

Motion of Venus

1. S u b t r a c t i n g 174 f r o m the days f r o m e p o c h , the q u o t i e n t got by d i v i d i n g

the r e m a i n d e r by 584 are the h e l i a c a l risings o f V e n u s . Its m o t i o n s d u r i n g the
p e r i o d s is 7-^ 5 3 0 ' 2 0 " each.

2. H a v i n g g o n e to 2 6 o f V i r g o , i.e. at, 5" 2 6 , V e n u s rises i n the west (for the

first t i m e after e p o c h ) . A d d i n g a n e l e v e n t h o f the q u o t i e n t (given i n verse 1)
to the r e m a i n i n g days, the m o t i o n s (are to be t a k e n f r o m the T a b l e g i v e n i n
verses 3-5).
XVIII.3 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U U S A - R I S I N G A N D SETTING 313

174 days after epoch, Venus rises heliacally i n the west. We have emended munijala dsjalamuni
because 147 will not agree with the longitude of Venus at rising given as 5' 26. If Venus is 5' 26,
the sun must be 5' 18, to satisfy the 8 given for Venus's heliacal risng in verse 58. But since at
epoch the. sun is in the neighbourhood of 358, it can be only near 4' 25 after 147 days, i.e., 38
from Venus. After 174 days from epoch, the Sun would be near 169 according to the Vdsistha-
Paulisa. (Vide my p a p e r ' T h e epoch of the Romaka etc', Indian Journal of History of Science, 13 (1978)
ii. 155-58). T h i s gives the elongadon as 7 instead of the required 8. But this small discrepancy can
be put to an accumulated error in computing from the original. T S have not felt the need for this
emendation because they have emended kanydmsdn into kdldrrisdn and omitted the necessary ksepa
viz. the constant equal to 5' 26, for beginning the motion. T h e y have not understood the meaning
of the word kdldmsdn which they have brought i n . It is the same as the 8 mendoned above, for
Venus. N P have interpreted kanydmsdn correctly. But since they have kept 147 days to be deducted
intact, they find a serious discrepancy expressed by them on page 124 of Part II. However, they
derive satisfacdon from the fact that the September 10th position of the sun would agree with the
dme of Venus's rising and their longitudes. This at least must have shown them that the rising takes
place only more than 20 days later. T h e y have made all sorts of unnecessary emendations, but they
have failed to do this necessary one.

We can infer from the instrucdon to add an eleventh of the quodent, that one synodic revolution
takes 583 10/11 days. In this period the sun has moved 1 revolution 7' 5 30' 20" and Venus, 2
revolutions 7' 5 30' 20". F r o m this we can infer that the sun takes 365-15-25 days for a sidereal
revolution. F r o m the methods given for the other planets also we can see that the sidereal period
of the sun used is c. 365-15-30, which is an evidence for the system given here being connected with
the Paulisa also, as in the case of the M o o n .
T S have unnecessarily emended hhogdh into bhdgdh and taYmg sdrdhdh to mean 'together with',
instead of 'with half, have given a modon of 7' 5 20' per synodic period. T h e y are unaware that
this would make the sidereal year c. 365-22 days, so wrong. T h e error of 10' 20" i n Venus would
accumulate by 1 every nine years.
N P interpret sdrdhdh correctly, but take gundptaih to mean 'with 1/3 degree' and given 7' 5 50',
which would make the sun's sidereal year c. 365-3-0, so very wrong. By this the error in Venus
would accumulate by 1 in every 5 years.

Next the days for segments of m o d o n in the synodic cycle are given by verses 3-5.

1. A . B . C . D . ^ ^ l ^ ( B . ^ ) . A . B . ^ 2a. A.D.^FTO:; B . ' ^ ^ : ^ : ; . C^^ROT:

b. B . A 2 . ^ corrected tol^; B . ^
C. A . ' ? ^ ^ . C^nt^:; D.^rjTO: h. A l . ' J W ; ^ ; A 2 . ^ 1 I ^
d. A . ^ ; B . ^ c. B . 3 ^ . C . D . ^
B1.3.TTsrt^; B2.MirdHl. C.WV:; d. A.C.^^raW:;. D.^ra?^:
314 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.5

N^'MiVIM^iy'dldfiltclliMidl

Days for segments o f m o t i o n i n the s y n o d i c cycle

3. I n t h r e e p e r i o d s o f 6 0 days V e n u s m o v e s 74, 7 3 , 7 2 , respectively. I n 4 0
days it m o v e s 3 2 a n d i n 17 days, 5 V4

4. F r o m h e r e r e t r o g r a d e m o t i o n (begins). I n 15 days these are 2 ; i n 5 days

the same, i.e., 2. T h e n , setting i n the west, it rises i n the east after ten days.
V e n u s is i n f o l l o w - u p r e t r o g r a d e f o r 2 0 days, m o v i n g 4 .

5. T h e n c o n t i n u i n g the (direct) m o t i o n r o u n d , i n the o r d e r o f days a n d

m o t i o n s r e v e r s e d , V e n u s sets i n the east. T h e n m o v i n g 7 5 i n 6 0 days, it
b e c o m e s visible i n the west.

T h e argument to be used i n the above table o f motions'are the days left over, together with the
eleventh o f the quotient, as mentioned. It can be seen that i n my emendations o f some o f these I
have done very little violence to the text. I have been guided i n these by the actual motion that must
have been observed, putting it to observational or other error, where the numbers are clear, but
deviate from the actual. T h e ratio o f Venus's distance from the sun to the earth is c. 0.72 given by
all H i n d u and modern astronomy, and this I have used to compute the segments o f actual motion
for comparison. (See Table on next page)
Another guide is that the days and motions from the superior to the inferior conjunction must
add up to half o f the whole, i.e., 292 days, and 2 8 7 % , since the equation of the centre has been
dispensed with.

72 motion for the third 60 days is about 4 i n excess. F o r the next 40 days the motion has to be
36, and I could have filled up the lacuna by (khaissat) instead o f (khairdvd) to get this. B u t t
Siddhdnta seems to have compensated the earlier 4 excess by the 4 defect here, which of course is
an error. F r o m this we can see that the emendation o f 'dvimsat' into 'trirhsat' is necessary lest
motion be reduced to 26, which is too small.

3a. A . B . C . D . * 5 P | n i 4a. B.d^dfelldfa

B . ^ d. B . W r l ^ a
B . T W < T \%; B . W ^ ^ A.feTTTlM; B . ^ C T T W ;
c. A l . s n i f e ^ f e i l f l ( A l . o m | ? T ) ; D.fe^forfer
B. 3T%jfe^HR5;idi (B2.f%f^) 5. B . verse missing
C . srafe^^W; D . s n f e ^ l ^ 5a. C . ^ t I ^ : f o r T # M
d. A.B.Mi%lff:^WT; b. Al..*l^^cJbji; A 2 . ^ ^ ^ c ^ ;
C.W<1cq?lifelpT:^^ C.<=tt/R'MMHWi^c4^^Hj;
XVIII.5 XVIII. VASISTHA-PAULISA - RISING A N D SETTING 315

TABLE I

M o t i o n on the synodic circle (computed)

Superior conjunction Retrograde begins Retrograde ends

30 days 371/2 9d. -21/4 243 d. 258

Rising West 5d. -21/2 Setting East
60 d. 74 Setting West 30 d. 371/2
60 d. 73 5d. -21/2 Superior conjunction
60 d. 681/4 Inferior conjunction Total 514 d. 5751/2
271/2 d. 261/4 5d. -3
12i/2d. 91/4 Rising East
I7d. 7 5d. -21/2
6d. 1/4 9d. -21/4

Next, 11/4 for 23 days is too too small to be correct. Further, the correct total of days and degrees
clearly given by the numbers will be spoiled by this. So I have given the meaning as 5 '/4 in 17 days,
which fairly agrees with the actuality, by introducing a (vi) for the defect of two rmtrds and emending
sapdddmsam into sapdddrdhdn.

Since the motion only 15' for the 6 days near the stationary point as seen in the actual, the siddhdnta is
justified in combining this with the - 2 13' for the next 9 days and giving - 2 for 15 days. But, for the
next 5 days, the motion is almost 21/2 and not 2, and this is an observational error. For the 5 days
forming die half period of invisibility till the inferior conjunction, the actual motion is about 3 but we are
constrained to make it - 2 for agreement with the other numbers, especially when it is left to be under-
stood, no motion being given by the text. A glance at tHe comparative table will make everything clear.
T S have made the serious mistake o f thinking that the segments given begin with the
superior conjunction instead of the rising on the west (vide the scheme given i n the Sanskrit
Commentary, p. 98). By the total of 610 days, they have given that the rising takes place 26
days after superior conjunction, passing 221/2, which is absurd because it should be 371/2 i n 30
days, i.e. half the time and degrees given for the time from setting to rising. T h e y do not realise that
this is the period o f the quickest motion. W i t h i n the scheme they get the 77 for 85 days, by making
a drastic change in the wording of the text. Further, for 85 days i n that part, the motion would be
more than 91. Giving 11/4 for 3 days near the stationary point is wrong since it should be practi-
cally zero. - 4 for 5 days in retrograde is too great. B u t they have given the same - 4 for the 10
days i n the ativakra region where the rate should be the greatest.
As for N P , they have correcdy interpreted that in the three 60-day periods after rising, the
motions are 74, 73 and 72, that from setting i n the east and rising i n the west there are 75 for
60 days, half before the superior conjunction and half after, and that near the inferior conjunction
there are 50 days of retrogression and - 1 2 , half o f each falling on each side of the point, as given
by the text. A d d i n g these we can account for 2501/2 i n 235 days. Since we should get 2 8 7 % for
the 292 days from the superior to the inferior conjunction, we have still to account for 371/4 in 57
days. This we must seek i n the second half of verse 3. B y some likely emendations we can secure
this, as I have done. But N P have drastically changed the text as
arthdstakavimsatyd vimsatyarn(sahd)stribhis sa paddmsam,
316 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.7

also sinning against prosody, and given only 28 for the 27 V2 days, after the third sixty-day
period, and 11/2 for the next 3 days, thus, not accounting for 16 and 30'/2 days.
ardhdstakavimsatyd cannot mean 27 V2, besides being an un-Sanskritic formation. Further, for the
27 V2 days in that part o f the synodic circle the motion should be more than 26 and for the rwext 3
days, more than 2 V4 as can be seen by examining the actual. T h i s error o f 16 and 301/2 days is
doubled for the whole cycle, and the weight of this error of 32 and 61 days has been carried by
them to the 60-day period of invisibility and drawn the remark o n page 121, Part II: "a rather
implausible conclusion. A t any event, the descripuon of the motion of Venus as given in our text
seems incomplete." T h e footnote here is uncalled for.

Jupiter and Saturn

T h e computation of Jupiter and Saturn follows next to Venus. T h i s is because their treatment is
next simple, o n account of their small mean motion and equation of conjunction, owing to their
great distance. Both T S and N P have expressed inability to understand the part of the computation
where the equation o f the centre is obtained and applied, before the application of the eq. of
conjunction. Still, they have attempted to interpret the concerned verses, changing the wordings,
drastically, to yield their fancied ideas. I n getting the eq. of conj., too, they have made several
mistakes.
As in the case of Venus, here too, the true modon is traced from one heliacal rising to the next.
T h e method of getting the true anomaly of the eq. cent, is similar to that o f the moon given by the
Vdsistha in chap. II, and based on the same theory of the uniform increase and decrease of the rate
of motion, forming a linear zigzag. Even the same technical term, pada, is used here. A l l these are
reminiscent of the Babylonian astronomy of the Selucid period, as I have stated above. As between
Jupiter and Saturn, their treatment is exactly similar, so that explaining one would suffice for both.
Verses 6-13, deal with Jupiter and 14-23 with Saturn. M y main aim here is to state and explain the
procedure i n the computation, a thing not understood by investigators. T h e verification of the
epoch constants depend mainly on comparison with other systems and modern astronomy. So this
will be done separately.

35[2T=rat(?t) ^ tl4cJ4F^JH?|^(^:)

Risings of Jupiter

6. T h e days o f J u p i t e r f r o m e p o c h m i n u s 34 days, 34 nddikds d i v i d e d by 3 9 9 ,

give t h e n u m b e r o f risings. T h e r e m a i n i n g a r e days (after rising).
7. A d d to these days a n i n t h o f the n u m b e r o f risings. M u l t i p l y the n u m b e r
o f r i s i n g s by 3 6 , a d d 18, a n d d i v i d e by 3 9 1 . T h e r e m a i n d e r h e r e me padas.
We can conclude the following from these two verses:
(i). A t 34 d. 34 n. from epoch, the first period from rising to rising begins.
XVIII.8 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U L I S A - R I S I N G A N D SETTING 317

(ii) T h e interval between the risings, i.e., the synodic period is 399 - 1/9 = 398 8/9 days.
(iii) 391 padas make one full sidereal revolution of Jupiter, i.e., 360 o f mean motion. In one
synodic period, Jupiter moves 36padas. Onepada = 55' 15". 36padas = 36 9'. A t epochal days 34 d,
34 n, Jupiter's longitude is \8padas (= 16 35'). But N P have taken the 18 given here as degrees. This
is wrong. T h e difference o f 1 25' is too small to show itself i n their verification. Table 32, Part II.
But for Saturn this pada constant is 89, and for Mars, 85. T a k i n g these as degrees have resulted i n
big differences which have puzzled them. See part II, page 124.
(iv) In 391 syn. revoludons there are 391 + 36 = 427 solar sidereal revolutions = 36 Jupiter's
sid. revolutions..-. one sid. rev. of Jupiter takes 4332-22-48 days, and one sid. rev. of the sun = 365-
15-32 days. T h e latter being very near Paulisa's 365-15-30, we conclude that, there too, as i n the
M o o n , it is mixed up with the Vasistha's.
T S and N P give the same interpretation, though making more than necessary emendations. In
their verification, T S use the rough syn. period of 399 days instead of the correct 398 8/9, making
the sid. period = 4333-35-0.

C'fmm) ^ ( ^ ) s ^ m f r f ^ : 116 I
8. O n e after a n o t h e r , m e a n a n d t r u e segments are to be a r r a n g e d . T a k i n g
t h e i r difference, i f the t r u e is less t h a n the m e a n , the d i f f e r e n c e is to be a d d e d
to the g r o u p o f J u p i t e r ' s days (left o v e r i n the s y n o d i c cycle as the r e m a i n i n g
days). O t h e r w i s e , (i.e., i f the t r u e is m o r e ) , the d i f f e r e n c e is to be subtracted.
'True' here means 'true as corrected for the eq. of the cent'. H o w to get these true positions is
given i n verses 9-11, and the segments are to be got using these. So, this verse seems to have strayed
here from after verse 11. T h e mean positions are to be got by using the remaining/>ada5, extending
the work done i n verse 7.

Karyau is introduced to make up for the syllables wanting. Saure would mean 'pertaining to either
Sun or Saturn'. But we are dealing with Jupiter Surih here. Saurya alone would mean, 'pertaining
to Jupiter'. Some mss. have no dvi.

C o m p u t i n g and arranging the mean and true segments against each other is to facilitate inter-
polation to any required day. It will also be useful to prepare an ephemeride. T h e example worked
will make things clear.

6a. A l . t ^ A 2 . f ^ C . D . i r ^ . A.B.tsipr
b. A . B . C . D . ^ i m t f ^ . A B . ^ : d. A.^^;B.MT:.BI.3.^RI5^
c. B 2 . 3 . U n i n d i c a t e d o m . o f 8a. A.B.IISvTOT; C . t : ^ ^ ; D.fl;[fl?T:]a5rR]l
^[^....iT)^;Mlin7d. A . H<=qta?<i
d. A l . - g ? ^ ; A 2 . 3 ^ ; B . o m . l i n e . A . f i T i ^ : b. A . B . C . ^ g l ^ a ( A . ^ a )
7a. A . B O T T T ; B.a-c. missing. D.<sl"^w4laf^^
C.D.3?H^ c. A . B . C . D . ^ ^ g g ? T 4 B 2 . ^
b. C . D . ' g o t ^ . A . ^ : d. A . c r 2 R # = ^ ; B . c R # ^ m ;
c. A . C . D . f e ^ C.^TIg^4!;5^^T; D.rr['q]sqWii5=!T?I
318 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIlI.ll

T S have expressed doubts about their translation, since they have not understood verses 9-11.
They have retained hi, not supplied the wanting mdtrds, and not noticed the grammatical error in
Saure. N P have made three drastic emendations, quite unrelated to the lettenng of the text, mhitah:,
maridalah: and tanmadhya-kharide, though generally following T S .

^ 1 3 T s r f : ch'^iVII: ^rST^^atil [ ^ d l ' M ^ u ^ (^:)

9. J u p i t e r b e i n g i n the d i m i n i s h i n g - m o t i o n - s e c t o r u p t o 180 padas, there is

the constant 1456 (to w o r k w i t h , i n o r d e r to get the eq. cent-corrected-Jupiter).
B e i n g i n the i n c r e a s i n g - m o t i o n - s e c t o r i n the n e x t 195 padas (i.e. 181 to 375),
t h e r e is the constant 1165.

10. J u p i t e r b e i n g i n the d i m i n i s h i n g - m o t i o n - s e c t o r (again) i n the next 16

padas, t h e r e is the c o n s t a n t 1486. ( A f t e r s u b t r a c t i n g o r a d d i n g the padas for
w h i c h we w a n t c o m p u t a t i o n f r o m these n u m b e r s , i n the respective sectors),
m u l t i p l y i n g t h e m by the padas a n d d i v i d i n g by 24, m i n u t e s of arc are got, (as
the eq. cent, c o r r e c t e d total m o t i o n i n the respective sector) at the r i s i n g i n the
east ( a n d also thereafter i f w a n t e d ) .

11. T h e total o f s u c h m o t i o n o f J u p i t e r i n the first sector is 5'^ 9 3 0 ' . I n the

s e c o n d sector, it is 6 ' 4 1 0 ' .

Briefly expressed as formulae, the eq. cent, corrected Jupiter is given by:
i. li padas are from 0 to 180, (1456 -padas) x padas' h- 24.
ii. li padas are in the next increasing sector, i.e. from 181 to 375, (1165 -h padas) X padas' ^24+
9 30', where the padas used are those given i n that sector.

9a. B.m
b. B.Hapl.om:W^[^JcR:....^] d. A . B . C . D . ^ : . A . B . I . 2 .
^(lOb)
lib. A . B 2 . 3 . ^ ^ :
c. A.T^; C.D.T^ c-d. B l . 2 . 3 . missing.
d. A . M<^H<=lId c. A . w ! ^ T ] i T O ; c w ^ ^ T j i r m : ;
10b. B.-?te?I%
c. A.B.C.WjfnT?f; D . w f ^ F j l ^ d. A . ^ ? T ^ ; ( ' . . W [ ^ ; D . c ^ ^ ^ T ^
XVIlI.ll XVIII. VASISTHA-PAULISA - RISING A N D SETTING 319

iii. If the padas are in the next following sector, i.e. 376 to 391, (1486 - padas X padas' 24 + 5'
9 30' + 6' 4 10', where the padas used are those gone in that sector.
T h o u g h the instructions are laconic, comparison with the Moon's computation makes things
clear. T h e increasing-motion sector is obviously the 180 from apogee to perigee, where the rate
of motion is supposed by this siddhdnta to increase uniformly from a m i n i m u m to a maximum. T h e
apogee is at 180padas (= 166) and the perigee at 576padasi= 345). T h e last IGpadas, condnued
by the first 180 padas form the diminishing half circle where the rate of motion diminishes
uniformly from the perigee to the apogee. Differendadng the formula, (constant + pada) pada'/24,
the increase or decrease i n the rate o f motion is found to be 2'/24 = r / 1 2 per pada. T h e r e may be
a small hiatus at the junction, apogee and perigee, owing to the unequal division o f 391 into 196
and 195, to avoid halfpada. B u t the average of the rates at apogee and perigee, (1165' and 1486')/
24 = 55'V4, agrees with the mean motion forming one/?a(ia. (Incidentally, thisjustifies our amend-
ment of visayarasond into visayarasesdh. T h e r e are other justificauons also, as we shall show later).
Further, the first sector being a condnuity of the third, the rate d u r i n g the iirstpada i n the first sec-
tor must follow next to the rate d u r i n g the \&th pada o f the third sector. Since 1486'/24 is taken as
the motion of the firstpada, the motion of the 16th is (1486-30)/24 = 1456'/24. T h i s must be the
commencement o f the third sector, and this is what is given. We can also see that the fastest rate,
(at perigee), is 1486'/24 = 62', and the slowest, 1165'/24 = 48' 1/2, (at apogee), giving the mean
value 551/4, of the pada, already found. B u t the rate for the \96th pada, ending which there is the
apogee, is, (1486 - 195 X 2)'/24 = 1096'/24. B u t the m i n i m u m motion falling at apogee is given
as 1165'/24. This hiatus'must also be due to the fact that the 2'/24 increase i n the rate per pada is
only approximate, and the actual is a little less than 2'/24. B u t the formulae are so given that the
total of the first sector is (1456 - 180) 180'/24 = 5' 9 30', as given. T h e total o f the second sector
is, (1165 + 195) 195 '/24 = 6^ 4 10'. T h e total of the third sector is, (1486 - 16) 16 '/24 = 16 20'.
These add up to 12 rdsis, exactly, as they should. Incidentally, this justifies my emendation of
gundrnsdh into yugamsdh, pdncaguriite into padagunite, and giving the meaning o f tryastaka as 3 X 8
= 24. T h e justification for correcting vidhrtayah into khadhrtayah to get 180, and rasond into rasesd
to get 1165, are also reinforced by this perfect agreement found here.

T S and N P also give khadhrtayah:, seeing the reason for that. TS emend rasondh into rasend (= 1265),
which will give the total 6' 17 4 3 ' , far from the correct 6' 4 10'. T h e text itself gives 6"^ 3 10', one
degree off. T S give 6 rdsis exactly, not knowing the peculiarity of this Siddhdnta. Using cakrdrdhe
thus, they are left with gundsah dasa ca kuldh. T h i s they interpret as 13 (wrongly, for it can mean
only 30 or 103). E m e n d i n g dasa ca kaldh into parasakale, they say that this 13 is the total motion of
the third sector. T h e y do not realise that the 16 padas of the third sector is near perigee, and the
total motion must be greater than the mean motion, 14 44'. N o t knowing the nature of the method
here, they think that the total of the diird sector also should be given. It has no use, and Varahamihira
has not given it.
About pdncaguriite tryastakabhdjite, I have emended pdnca into pada, to delete the one mdtrd in
excess, and to give the agreement already seen, tryastaka is 24, as already said. T S retain thepafica,
but emend tryastaka into astaha, making it 5/8, leading nowhere.
As for N P , they generally follow TS's emendations. But, for the divisor 8 they suggest the alter-
native 83 {tryastaka). Unlike T S , they realise that the three sectors must add upto \ 2rdsis and make
their own emendation of the last part of verse 11, as dvigundrnsd dasa sadald, interpreting it as 20
30'. N P have given the gist of verse correctly, but making a lot o f unnecessary emendations. They
have wondered i n Part II, why such small units, as padas, have been taken. This is because, they

24
320 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.13

em to think, that the three sectors are each taken wholly to get intermediate values by interpola-
tion. A n examination of the total of each sector would show how wrong it would be. T h e true eq.
cent, corrected Jupiter is given for the end of any pada we want. W e are expected to use these to get
the true motion through any segmentation o f the total padas, for correct interpolation, and the
ends of the segments may fall anywhere, hom pada 0 to pada 390. Therefore the smaW pada seg-
ments are used. I shall work out an example at the end to make everything clear.

I shall explain the rationale of the instruction i n verse 8, of adding or subtracdng the difference.
T h e eq. cent-corrected Jupiter is subtracted from the Sun to get the anomaly of conjuncuon. So,
a positive eq. cent, means less anomaly o f conjunction. T h e days left over represent the anomaly
of conj. with the 399 days of the synodic period, corresponding to 360 o f anomaly. So the day is
taken as roughly equal to the degree of anomaly, and th e difference in degree subtracted. Vice versa
for the eq. cent, corrected Jupiter, it being less then the mean. Varahamihira is too astute to confuse
day and degree, as N P think. (In verses 64-81 too, there is no confusion i n the author's mind, as N P
seem to think. T h e r e he has deliberately chosen the time taken by the Sun to move one degree as
the unit o f time, and call it 'day', for convenience. T h i s is patent on the face of the synodic periods
given, though T S have not even seen it, and are perplexed. We have reason to think that verses 64-
81 are by somebody else).

I 5^wfd : I

12. B y 6 0 days, ( J u p i t e r moves) 12, b y 4 0 days 4 a n d by 24 days 2 . B e c o m -

i n g r e t r o g r a d e , by 56 days he moves 6 (i.e. - 6 ) a n d b y 60 days, 6 (i.e. - 6 ) .
13. F o l l o w i n g after r e t r o g r a d e , he m o v e s 12 i n 80 days, a n d 9 i n 48 days.
T h e n setting, s t a y i n g so for a m o n t h p l u s o n e day, he c l e a r l y rises m o v i n g 6
8'. E n d s J u p i t e r .

T h e Scheme given
Days Rising east 60 40 24 56 60 80 48 Setting wast 31 Rising east = 3 9 9
Degrees 12 4 2 -6 -6 12 9 68' = 338'

12a. A . B . ^ ^ ^ ; C.D.^t^^im 13b. A.B.c|*1vil^+?(B.?Rf)^

b. A.B.C.D.^: b. A . B . f ^ ' ^ ; C . ' ^ ' ^ r ^ ; D.f^'^m^
c. B.'^yiiKi^'i D . ^ [^] crat
d. A . B . q ^ ^ : . B . ^ ^ c. B . f e ^ . D . f ^
B . combines with the next verse. d. A.B.^?53l^WrR(B.crR)
X V I I I . 13 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U U S A - RISING A N D SETTING 321

These values agree well with actualities, considering that whole days and whole degrees are
given, excepting the last 6 8', given to complete the value for the synodic cycle. 6 12' would be
better at that region and for the whole number, 399 days. 56 days for 6, and 60 days for the same
- 6 must be explained by the intention to give whole degrees and segmentation.

Vargdk is an obvious mistake for bhdgdn, and so corrected. T S have interpreted saptdsiakena to
mean 15, which such an expression never means. It can mean either 56 or 87. T h e y understand
another 60 days by the word ca used. A l l this, to make u p the wrong scheme used by them, based
on the mistaken idea that the statement of motions here begins with conjunction and ends with the
rising i n the east after the next conjunction. T h e following is their scheme:

Days Conjunction 60 40 24 15 60 60 80 45 Setdngwest 30 Rising east =414

Degrees 12 4 2 0 -6 -6 12 9 " (15) =42'

ddinardhamatena is emended by T S into dhyundrdhasatena but how can this word mean their 45? As
for the last part, sthitvd saikam mdsarn, they have taken it to mean 30 days instead of the correct 31
days. Let that be. T h e y have not given any motion for it i n their interpretation. It cannot be left to
be guessed and completed by an ordinary computer. T h e y , who can be expected to know, have
guessed, quite wrongly, 15 motion for 30 days, not realising that it can be only 6 and a few minutes
more. For the 414 days from conj. to the rising after the conjunction, the total can only be about,
33 9' + 3 = 36 9', and not the 42 given by them.

As for N P , they have emended ddinardhamatena into dindrdhasatena to mean 50 days. Since they
take 30 days for the setting i.e. one day less, they make the total o f days, 400. They give 7 m o d o n
for the 30 days (which they make even 29 days in the last part). T h e y have changed the wording to
some ununderstandable form here, dyavantye mdsasya. Further, the 7 is far too much for 30 days.
But there is no 7 in the text. T h e y have corrected the text saikam into svam, thinking that asvam
in bhutasarikhyd means 7.

Incidentally, one other matter may be considered here, viz., the degrees of heliacal rising, for
Jupiter. D u r i n g the set-period of 31 days, the sun moves about 30 V2 degrees, and Jupiter, about
6 8', and the relative motion is 3 0 2 6 8' = about 24, from setting to rising. This gives about
12, for the heliacal rising of Jupiter, which is fairly accurate, especially for very high latitudes.
(Classical H i n d u astronomy gives 11). Verse X V I I I . 58 gives the Vasistha-Paulisa's degrees o f
heliacal rising as 12^ 14, 12, 15, 8, 15 from M o o n onwards, by candrddindm
dvddasamanuravitithyastaiithisamkhyaih:. 15 for Jupiter given here is too much, and 14 for Mars is
too low. (Classical H i n d u astronomy gives 17 for Mars). So, the scribe seems to have made a small
change i n the order, and the correct order is "candrddindm dvddaiatithimanuravyastatithisafikhyaih:",
12, 15, 14, 12, 8, 15, with only one change of place.

Example: Find the True Jupiter at 2415 days from epoch.

(i) T h e beginning of the first cycle after rising next to the epoch is 34-34 days later.
The days after this, required to find the number o f cycles gone = 2415 - 34-34 = 2380-26.
Dividing by 399, cycles gone = 2380 - 26/399 = 5, with 385-26 remainder.
A d d i n g 5 X 1/9 days, (= 0-33), we have 385-59 days left over after 5 cycles gone.

(ii) T h e padas at 5 cycles gone = 18 -I- 5 X 36 = 198.

Mean Jupiter = 198 padas = 198 X 360/391 = 6'^ 2 18'.
True Jupiter:-
F o r t h e 198 padas, 180/>adas forming the first sector has gone and 18/?a<iaj are left over i n the
second sector.
322 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.15

. - . T r u e j u p i t e r = 5'^930' + (1165 + 18) 18724 = 5^ 9 30' + 14 47' = 5^24 17'.

E q . cent. = T r u e - Mean = 5-^4 17' - 6'^ 2 18' = - 8 1'.
(iii) T h e padas at 399 days i n the cycle, i.e., the beginning of 6 cycles gone = 198 + 36 = 234 =
180 + 54.
Mean Jupiter = 234 X 360 - 391 = 7'-5 27',
T r u e Jupiter = 5^ 9 30' + (1165 + 54) 54'/24 = 6' 25 13'
T r u e - mean = E q . cent. = 10 14'.
Eq. cent, at 0 day o f 6th cycle = - 8 1'
Eq. cent, at 399 days of 6th cycle = - 8 1'
E q . cent, at remaining days (385-59) =
= (385-59) X - 2 13' -r 399 -f - 8 1' = - 1 0 10'.

(iv) Trwejup. is less than Mean J u p . by 10 10'..-. days of Anomaly of Conj. = 385-59-I- 10-10
= 396-9.

(v) T r u e an. of conj. =

for 60 days + 12
for 40 days + 4
for 24 days -1- 2

for 56 days - 6
for 60 days - 6
for, 80 days + 12
for 48 days -f- 9
Total 368 days + 27 28-9
for 28-9 days 5 32' = J j ^ x 6 8 ' = 5 32'
396-9 32 32'
(vi) T r u e J u p . = Mean J u p . at 0 day o f A n . of conj. -I- eq. cent. -I- true ano. of conj.
= 6^ 2 18' - 10 10' + 32 32' = 6'^ 24 40'.

Note 1: T h e need for interpolating the eq. cent, to the remaining days in the cycle can be seen by
working for 399 days o f the 6th cycle and 0 day of the 7th cycle and comparing. T h e y must be the
same.

Note 2: T h e eq. cent, is computed for 0 day of each cycle, i.e., for intervals of 36 padas = 33 9'.
Interpolation using these, as we have done, can be only rough. T o get better interpolations, we can
divide the 36 padas into desired segments, find the eq. cent, of each, and use. We can form an
ephemeride, giving the values at the ends o f the day segments given, 60, 40, 24, etc. and use for
interpolation. A l l these logically follow from the instructions, though not specifically stated.

[VllH-dK:]
X V I I I . 18 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U L I S A - R I S I N G A N D SETTING 323

M o t i o n o f Saturn

As already has been said, the treatment o f Saturn is similar to that of Jupiter. So there will be little
need for fresh explanations.

14. R e g a r d i n g S a t u r n , 150-20 days are to be s u b t r a c t e d f r o m the days f r o m

e p o c h . T h e s e b e i n g d i v i d e d by 3 7 8 , the r e m a i n d e r are the days f r o m the
r i s i n g g o n e , the q u o t i e n t b e i n g the n u m b e r o f risings g o n e .

15. O n e t e n t h o f the r i s i n g s , (i.e., the q u o t i e n t ) , i n days, is to be s u b t r a c t e d

f r o m the r e m a i n d e r . T h e n u m b e r o f r i s i n g s got is to be m u h i p l i e d by 9, a n d
d i v i d e d o u t by 2 5 6 . T h e r e m a i n d e r / ? Z i 89padas f o r m (the padas r e q u i r e d f o r
u s i n g i n the c o m p u t a t i o n ) . ( T h e i d e a is that 8 9 is to be a d d e d to ( q u o t i e n t X
9), a n d t h e n d i v i d e d by 2 5 6 , to find the padas f o r use).

In (15), I have emended safigunad and rudayat into safigundn and rudaydn to agree with bhajet
requiring accusatives; so also N P . B u t T S have kept them. In NP's emendation dinddydptam, dptam
does not agree with the w o r d sthitd and, the meaning also is redundant. Both T S and N P have
emendedpadaih intopade, thinking that navdsitih is degrees. Even this they doubt, as seen in the trans-
lation, because as mentioned by them i n Part II, page 124, it had led to disagreement. Padaih, as it
is, clearly, says that the 89 is padas. So is the 18 of Jupiter and the 85 of Mars.

We understand from the instructions that the synodic revolution o f Saturn takes 378710 days,
that in one synodic revolution Saturn moves 9padas, that 2.b6padas make nine sidereal revolutions
of Saturn, that there are 256 -I- 9 = 265 sidereal revolutions o f the sun i n 256 synodic periods of
Saturn, and that at 150-20 days from epoch, Saturn's mean longitude is 89padas. ( N P give i n their
translation, "89?", as mentioned already. Therefore, one sidereal revolution of Saturn takes 3787
10 x 256 9 = 10754.84 days. O n e sid. revolution o f the sun = 378710 x 256 + 265 = 365-15-32.

A g a i n , the Sun's sid. period got is Paulisa's.

Onepada = 3607256 = 84' 22".5. T h e motion i n one synodic revolution = 9 X 84' 22".5 = 12
39' 22".5.
Mean Saturn at 150-20 days after epoch = 89 x 8 4 ' 22".5 = 125 9'.4.

^ ( ^ ) % o m ^ 2 F ^ : ? T ( ^ ) ^ : || \\

^ t e y r ^ t w ^ q r m ^<i^(c^Mlel^;fdl: 3 W T r e r ( T ^ ) |

14a. A . ' ^ M ; o m . the two letters. 15a. A.B.^31111^. B . ^

b. B."mMH<J^4 b. B . ^ . A . B . C R ^ ^ ^ ^
c. A.B.JJuil*^*^^?: d. C . D . ^ ^ . A . ^ R f s i R t a ; B.iRlclRftcqi
d. A.B.D.ftm. A.B.^^TOTO; D.RhIJM
324 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.18

16. R e g a r d i n g S a t u r n , there is a n increase (of the rate o f m o d o n ) f o r t h i r t y

padas, f r o m 2 4 1 6 . T h e n , t h e r e is a decrease f o r 127 padas f r o m 2 5 1 9 .

17. N e x t t h e r e is a n increase ior 99 padai f r o m 2 0 3 7 . T h e a m o u n t o f decrease

a n d increase are by the padas m u l t i p l i e d by 2. T h e d i v i s o r o f the total m i n u t e s
is 2 7 , its m u l t i p l i e r b e i n g o n e .

18. T h e total o f the first sector is T 15 5 1 ' a n d the total o f the m i d d l e sector
is 5^ 2 7 3 4 ' .

Note: T h e multiplication by one is unnecessary, but given to clear the doubt that may arise by the
instruction to multiply the padas by two for subtraction and additions coming before.

T h e meaning is clear, and no material change has been needed. I shall give what is given in the
form of formulae:

The total motion upto any pada i n the first sector, viz., (1-30) = (2416 -I- 2 X padas) padas -r- 27,
in minutes.
That in the second sector, viz., (31-157) = (2519 - 2 X padas)padas 4- 27, in minutes.

That in the third sector, viz., (158-256) = (2037 -I- 2 x padas) padas -^ 27, in minutes.

T h e total of the whole of first sector given. T 15 5 1 ' can be verified thus:
(2416 + 2 X 30) 30 - 27 = 2751' = r 15 5 1 ' given.
T h e t o t a l o f the whole second sector = (2519 - 2 X 127) 127 + 27 = 10654' = 5^ 27 34', given.

Being unnecessary, the total of the third sector is not given. B u t we can calculate it and use it to
see i f all those add up to 12 rasis, as necessary, and this will verify every instrucdon given.

The total o f the third sector = (2037 -I- 2 X 99) X 99' -h 27 = 8195' = 4^ 16 35'. N o w , V 15 5 1 '
+ 5'^ 27 34' 16 35' = 12^

E x a m i n i n g the constants, we find that the m a x i m u m motion per pada is 2519' 4- 27 = 93'.3, T h e
m i n i m u m rate is 2037' 4- 27 = 75'.4. T h e mean rate is = 84' .35 as already found, as the mean
motion equal to the pada. Differentiating as before, the increase or decrease i n the rate is 4'/27.
Actually it is slightly less than this, the mukiplier being slightly less than 2, given. (2037 -I- 4 X 98)
= 2416 shows this. T h e perigee falls at end oiZQpadas, i.e., V 14, and the apogee, 127padas later,
at 7'1.3.

T h e instruction how to use the result o f these verses has not been given, because it is the same as
that given in verse 8 for Jupiter. Indeed, the un-emended reading 50t^re there means, "with reference
to Saturn".

c. A.^;C.D.f^:
16a. B . ^ ^ . A.D.^W c-d. C D . fejjui^d*^*'ju|y:
c. A . C . D . W f l ; B-m^ d. A . B . " ? ! ^ ^ :
d. A . B . C . D . ^ T ^ : 18a. B . ^ W
17a. A.B.C.D.-smi b. A.^?3^:; B.Tsm
b. A.WRRlfeER; B.HciHcidfelNH c. A.B.C.D.151^:. A . B . t ^ T :
XVIII.20 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U U S A - RISING A N D SETTING 325

As in the case o f Jupiter, here too T S and N P have not understood what exactly is given in these
verses, how it is got by applying the three formulae, how the eq. cent, is got, and why the instrucdon
to apply this to the days remaining is given, i n the manner said.

So, their emendations o f the readings, done without knowing the subject matter, need not be
taken seriously. T S have emended the correct dvigwnapadaih: into dvigunahrtah, meaning "divided
by 32", applied to the risings and not to the number got i n the formulae. N P have kept the reading,
but given the translation as, "There is a subtraction or addition o f 12 degrees and minutes, (i.e., 12
12'). Multiply by 31 and divide (the product) by 32 (or by 32padas). (The result is) Saturn's rising."
Where is 12 12' mentioned? T h e y take the 32, not as a number, but as a segment o f longitude
equal to 32 padas, i.e., 45. A g a i n , how can this give the risings? A n d the risings have already been
given i n verse 14. A l l these show that they do not understand what is said.

19. S a t u r n (moves) 3 i n 36 days, 3 5 ' i n 7 days, 8 0 ' i n 16 days, a n d 2 2 4 ' i n 5 6

days.

20. T h e n b e c o m i n g r e t r o g r a d e , h e m o v e s 3 i n 55 days, a n d 4 i n 6 0 days.

T h e n , f o l l o w i n g u p direct, h e m o v e s 8 i n 112 days, a n d setting, h e m o v e s 3
i n 3 6 days i n t h e set p e r i o d , (i.e., rises i n t h e east after that). Ends Saturn.

This is the scheme given

Days Rising east 36 7 16 56 Retrograde 55 60 Direct 112 Setting west 36 Rising east =378
Degrees 3 35' r20'344' -3-4 8 3 = 1239'

I shall now discuss the values given, justifying the three emendations. 1 have made. T h e corrupt
sadhratdstrirmrnsdn has to be emended as 3 for 36 days, considering the position, and the fact that
it must practically be equal to the rate between setting and rising, 3 for 36 days. T h e days must add
upto 378 days from rising to rising, also as from conjunction to conjunction. A l l the numbers for

20a. B . ^ p
19a. A.B.^e?cn:; C.^a'iSR^. D.qR#n: a-b. C^aiKI^^I^Ndid:
b. A.B.^#iiwrj; c.f^^Rn. D . A.I?R?IPi; B.f|:T?n^-Ai.fcng;ilk:;
c. A . B . D . f ^ T ^ H a g ^ : B1.3.fK5Rk:
c. A . B . a i * ; c . a w n i H c. A . - ? ! ^ ; B l . - ? I c ( i # ( B 2 . ^ ) ;
d. A . B . C . D . N^<lirS'J,"N^(A. D.-?T^
B 1.2. W . B.7I written a f t e r W ) d. A1.2.'t^||B1.2.^?^^ref%^i
326 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.20

days are clear. Therefore, the days for the second segment must be 7. So I have emended raanM into
muni. T h e modon given there, 28', gives the rate 2', too absurd for that position, i f the original 14
days are accepted, and it cannot be that the Siddhdnta does not know the absurdity. Even for the
emended 7 days, it is too low, being only 4' rate, while the rate on both sides is 5', and also consis-
tent with facts. Therefore, scaturgund is emended into scesugund. N o w , these three segments can be
combined into 4 55' for 59 days, without affecting the result. I do not know why the Siddhdnta has
broken it into such bits.

Next, the total for the 378 days must be the mean motion for the period, i.e., 9padas, equal to 12
39'.4, roughly taken by the Siddhdnta as 12 39'. Therefore the motion for the fourth segment, 56
days, must be 224'. So I have emended dviguna into vedayama.
In the case of Saturn, too, as i n the case of Jupiter, T S and N P have thought that the unnecessary
total motion for the third sector has been given. F i n d i n g no wording answering to that, they have
changed drastically the first half of verse 19, and obliterated the first two segments of days and
motion. T h e y have emended the half verse into khandentye simhasdmunayo liptdscaturgundssapt
if they are writing their own book. This means, in the last sector the total is 4' 7 28'. But even diis
does not help to get 12 rdsis, the total coming to only IV 20 53'.

W i t h the other half and the next verse, they make up the whole scheme as:-

days 16 56 55 68 60 105 36 =396

motion 4-3 -H232' +4 -3 -4 +8 +3 = 15
changing astii into arrmgnin; not giving any word for the motion of 4 in 55 days, but simply
putting the motion there; trinamsdn into astarasaistrin, newly introducing 68 days, and giving it the
retrograde motion 3; and arkasatena into arthasatena to mean 105 days. As i n the case of Jupiter,
they trace the motion from conjunction to the rising after the next conjunction, taking 396 days.
But the total motions must then be, 12 39' -I- 1 30' = 14 9' and not 15 given. T h e y must know
that 3.for 16 days, giving the rate 11V4' per day is very much wrong, when the rate is only 5' for
the nearer segment got from the motion 3 for 36 days.

As for N P , they emended the first half of verse 19, asparihindh strikhdrnsd manubhirliptdscesugun
sapta meaning "Zero degree of V i r g o diminished by 14, plus 35' ", i.e., 4' 16 35'. T h e y are here
better than T S because they have seen that the aim should be to get the total o f 12 rdsis for the three
sectors combined. T h e y have also kept closer to the lettering o f the text, though the manner in
which they have got their total for the third sector is far-fetched. After this, they follow the text
without changing it. O n l y at the end they interpret that the motion o f 3 for 36 days comes before
the setting, and leave the period set without any days or motion given. T h u s , their scheme is:

days Rising east 16 Retro- 56 55 60 Direct 112 36 Setting ? Rising Total 378
motion 80 grade 232' - 3 - 4 8 3 west ?east Total 1239'

T o make u p the totals, a motion of 3 27' for 43 days has to be given. B u t it must be at least 3
35'. For the 43 days of the set period, the sun's motion is 42 20'. Therefore, the degrees o f Saturn
for heliacal rising comes to (42 20' - 3 27') + 2 = 1 9 26'. T h i s is far greater than the 15 given
in verse 58, and also in all Siddhdntas. Further, the opposition must occur at the middle of the period
from rising to setting and also the middle o f the retrograde period. T h e one falls 160 days after
rising, and the other 130 days after, as great as 30 days off. I am sure N P have noted all these dis-
crepancies, but have given them as they understood the wording, just to mark time.
XVIII.20 XVIII, V A S I S T H A - P A U L I S A - R I S I N G A N D SETTING 327

I shall now give an example, to make the method clear.

Example: Find true Saturn at 5000 days gone from epoch.

i. Days 5000
T o be subtracted 150-20

Divided by 378 4849-40 (12 = full cycles gone)

313-40 = (Remaining days)

Days to be deducted : 1-12

12

312-28 (corrected remainder)

89 -f 1 2 x 9
ii. Padas at 0 day o f the 13th cycle: = 197 remainder
Mean longitude = 197 padas = 9' 7 2'
197 = 30-1-127 + 40 (in the third sector)
Eq. cent, corrected mean longitude:-
= V 15 5 1 ' + 5"" 27 34' + (2037 + 2 x 4 0 ) 4 0 ' 27
= r 1 5 5 1 ' + 5'^27 34' + r 2 2 16' = 9 ' 5 4 1 '
Eq.cent. = 9^ 5 4 1 ' - 9"^ 7 2' = - 1 2 1 '

iii. Padas at 378 days gone in the cycle = 197 + 9 = 206

Mean longitude = 2()Q padas = 9' 19 41'

206 padas = 3 0 + 127 + 49 (in the third sector)

E q . cent, corrected mean longitude = V 15 5 1 ' + 5^ 27 34' + (2037 +2 X 47) 47'/27 = 9"^ 18 0'
Eq. cent. = 9 M 8 0' - 9 M 9 4 1 ' = - 1 4 1 '
Interpolated for days 312-28, the eq. cent = - 1 = 2 1 ' - 0 17' = - 1 3 8 ' .

iv. Correcung the remaining days 312-28 by this, 312-28 + 1-38 = 314-6 days, to be used to find
anomaly of conjunction.

V. 36 days +3
7 ... +035' M e a n Sat. at 0 day 9-^ 7 2'
16 ... + r20' Eq.cent - r38'
56 ... +342' An.ofconj. +740'
55 ... -3
60 ... -4 T r u e Saturn = 9 ^ 3 4'
Remaining 84-6 +61'

314-6 + 740' As per Ephemeris: 9' 11 .7 (sdyana)

Mars
As indicated earlier. Mars, like Mercury, needed elaborate treatment owing to certain
peculiarities about it, and so had been reserved by V M to the end of PS. T h e synodic period of
328 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.24

Mars, on which the equation of conjunction depends, is 780 days, d u r i n g which there are more
than two revolutions of the Sun, and one revolution of Mars, so that one full anomalistic period of
Mars is contained within this period. This, with the large equation of the centre, and the large
equation of conjunction causes large variations i n its motion from sign to sign, and even in the same
sign, according to the different types of motion governed by the anomaly of conjunction, like, fast,
slow, retrograde etc. Hence is the need for detailed treatment.

Further we have reason to think that the various motions given are all empirical, based on long
observation, synodic period after synodic period. T h e separation into the equation of the centre,
and the equation of conjunction is yet to come, it seems, unlike the cases of Jupiter and Saturn,
where it is easy, and done. T h i s would explain discrepancies found i n the values given.

Regarding the constants given, some can be verified by mutual comparison, and corrected where
necessary, when there is a doubt about the reading itself. But some, like the epoch constants, which
are peculiar to the Siddhdnta itself, cannot be so verified and corrected when there is a doubt. Only
in such cases, where we can argue that no Siddhdnta is likely to give such wrong values, and when
these values are so far from the real, that we can make some plausible corrections.

TS and N P have not understood the nature of the motion of Mars, Jul . as they have not under-
stood Jupiter and Saturn. While T S have not even attempted translating some verses, wrongly
interpreting those attempted, N P have attempted translating all, but many wrongly. I shall point
out these after my own translation and discussion o f the verses, step by step.

< l ( V I ^ * 4 I U | d i S ( ^ ) , ^ ( W i g ) W T ^ ^ II I

Motion of Mars

21. S u b t r a c t i n g 256-40-0 days f r o m the days f r o m E p o c h , a n d d i v i d i n g by

780, the s y n o d i c r i s i n g s o f M a r s i n the East are got.

22-23. (157 plus 4) vinddis, m u l t i p l i e d by the risings got, are to be a d d e d to the

r e m a i n i n g days. M u l t i p l y the risings got by 18, a n d a d d i n g 8 5 , d i v i d e by 133.
T h e r e m a i n d e r , c o n v e r t e d i n t o rdsis is M a r s at r i s i n g . A c c o r d i n g to the w h o l e
or p o r t i o n s oi rdsis, the t r u e m o t i o n s are to be t a k e n o n e after a n o t h e r , a n d
p i e c e d together.
XVIII.24 XVIII, V A , S I S T H A - P A U L I S A - R I S I N G A N D SETTING 329

24. T h e difference b e t w e e n the m e a n a n d t r u e degrees s h o u l d be a d d e d (to

the r e m a i n i n g days got i n 21), i f the m e a n is greater. I f the m e a n is less, the
difference s h o u l d be subtracted f r o m the r e m a i n i n g days. T h i s d o n e , I s h a l l
give the t r u e m o t i o n s , a c c o r d i n g to each type o f m o t i o n :
We learn from the verses the following:
1. 256-40-0 days from Epoch, Mars rises in the East, after which the counting of risings begin.
2. One synodic revolution takes 780 days 161 vinadis, (i.e. 779-57-19 days). T h e addition of
vinadis multiplied by revolutions, is for taking the synodic period as 780 days approximately.
3. Forthisperiodof779-57-19days,weget 1 -I- 18/133siderealrevolutionofMars,and2+.,18/133
sidereal revolutions of the Sun. So, i n one synodic period. Mars moves 408 43'.3
4. In 133 syn. periods = 1,03,734-3-7 days, there are 151 sid. rev. of Mars, and 284 sid, rev, of the
Sur, From this, the Sun's sid. period got is 365-15-38 days and Mars's 686-58-50 days. T h e Sun's
period is 38 vinadis more than that given for it by the Vdsistha, and near the 365-15-30 of the
Paulisa. Therefore, like the M o o n , Venus, Jupiter and Saturn, Mars also is common toPaulisa.
5. A t the first rising when calculation commences, mean Mars = 85/133 rev. = 7' 20 4'.5
6. T h e addidon or subtraction of the difference from the remaining days has been already
explained with reference to Jupiter and Saturn. But, here, no method is given to find the equa-
tion of the centre. Now the true motion is affected by both the eq. of the centre and eq. of con-
junction. T h e segments of motion given in verses 25-26, below, are as affected by the eq, of con-
junction alone. B y making the days given for true motion i n verses 27-35 conform to the seg-
ments, we can get the degrees, and through that the days affected by the eq. centre alone. This
can be of use only for the remainder of days. But the eq. of centre at the beginning of each cycle
is necessary. It has not been given by any rule. Since its period is about 687 days and it has its
own rise and fall of about 11 from perigee to apogee and back, it cannot be associated with the
synodic period of 780 days. So this is an omission.

I have corrected the corrupt tdstraydmridubhih into tdim tryagnimlubhih to mean 133, T h i s is
necessary for agreement with the actuals, and the effect of my emendation is seen in my discussion
(3) above, T S have made it hdnendubhih. H o w can bdna, with such different lettering, come in here?
Further, this will give 18/15 rev. = 432 as the mean motion of Mars in one syn. period, about 23
wrong per period. They have made paficdsiti krtvd into pancdmsonam krtvd and thus shut out the
position constant of Mars on the first day where reckoning begins, viz. the point of time 256-40-0
days from epoch, (It will be remembered that in the cases of M o o n , Venus, Jupiter and Saturn also,
they have made this mistake). By this emendadon they reduce the motion by 86 24', and make the

21a. C.D.^nnn^ b. C,D,-5ltTOl?r;

A , B . ^ ^ W 1 ( B 3 , ^ ) . D.^el5^F^ B . i P ^ : . A.B.aiim
b. B.^^nfe^ c. A.B.yH|u|dl'?r
d. B . m d. A , B . C , ^ ' 3 m ^ ; D , ^ 5 5 f e n ^
22b. A . ' l t s t n f ^ ; B.'WVlPcldl: B.a^f^lfg; D . ^ [ l ^ ] 5^=1?^
c. A . B . # R n w f ( B . # ) ^ ; C . D . ^ l f & I c I I ^ 24a. A.B.f^^qt
^T^l^ b. A . ? T ^ f ^ B . C . D . T I ^ f ^
d. A 2 . ? ^ ; A , B , f e r a t ^ W : ; c, A . B . C . D .
C.D.f^ScTtSW^ d. A . " f T M I M ^ ; B,7TfcmtW5rRilfT=;
23a. A . B . W * ; C D . C . T | f ^ 5 # W T f i l ; D.^lR)<1l6uiNKi<r^o
330 PANCASIDDHANTIKA xvni.26

mean motion of Mars 345 36' per syn. period of 780 days! T h e y have also wrongly emended
pratirdsya to pratirdsyam.

As for N P , they have made the correct emendation tryagnindubhih, giving correctly 151 revolu-
tions of mean Mars i n 133 syn. periods, and identified it with that given by the Babylonian
astronomy of the Selucid period.
But N P have not seen that pancdsitim meaning 85, is correct as it is, and give the constant 7" 20
4' .5 at 256-40-0 days from epoch (see item 5 of discussion). T h e y think it is the constant i n degrees,
though no word meaning degrees is found here. (This kind of mistake they have made i n the case
of Jupiter and Saturn also, as we have shown). B u t 85 would not do, so they have substituted
satrirdsim for pratirdsya and made it 175. B u t even this would not do, and therefore they hav
changed the days from E p o c h itself into 216-40-0, by emendingjatkam vayamdn into satkaikayamd
But this has led to other troubles, leading to their remark, " F o r Mars this would mean a longitude
of 175 (instead o f 194 derived on the basis of ao in table 32). T h i s longitude would correspond to
September 27, and a solar position at 186, hence to an elongation of 11" (p. 124, Part II). 11 for
the first visibility of Mars is given by nobody. It is i n the range o f 14 to 17.

3 T g M ^ ? e ? M [ W d ) ^ w ( M d ) ^ ^ T ^ ] II I

<K^H*^^l(d M [ d r ( | < ( < ( ^ ) ^ ^ ; 1 1 ^ ^ II

25-26. A f t e r r i s i n g i n the East, M a r s m o v e s 1 4 6 ( i n q u i c k m o t i o n ) a n d t h e n
18 e a c h o f (slow m o t i o n ) , r e t r o g r a d e a n d " f o l l o w u p after" r e t r o g r a d e
(anuvakra), a n d after that 150 o f q u i c k (sighra) m o t i o n . T h e n setting, it
reaches c o n j u n c t i o n (nirarnsagatah) i n 60 days m o v i n g 13 p l u s 30 (= 43)
degrees. T h e n it rises, ( m o v i n g the same d e g r e e i n the same n u m b e r o f days).
B e g i n n i n g f r o m h e r e , I s h a l l m e n t i o n the series o f m o t i o n s w i t h t h e i r days.

T h e scheme is
Rises East
Moves 146 I type of motion (slghmgati)
18 II (Mandagati)
-18 III & I V (Vakaragati)
(Ativakragati)
18 V (Anuvakragati)
150 VI (Sighragati)

Sets i n the West

43 V I I in 60 days
(Atisighragati)
Conjunction
43 V I I I in 60 days ( " )
Rises i n the East

Total 400'
XVIII.26 XVIII. VASISTHA-PAULISA - RISING A N D SETTING 331

T h e numbers 1 have given i n the scheme are practically what are found i n the text, without
emendation excepting three. In verse 25,1 have emended captasteka into catvdryeka to get 146 the
most plausible value. N P have made Itsastdstaika to get 186 which is too large. See discussion below,
150 is given by adhyardham ca satam where tatah is emended into satam. This is necessary to make up the
total 410 motion i n 780 days. Secondly, 43 motion for 60 days given from setting to conjunction
is required to agree with the 17 usually given for heliacal rising. T h i s is made u p by emending
vimsatam into trimsatam with the 13 given by dasatriyutam added. I shall now show that the motion
of Mars is near 43 in 60 days, in the region o f the conjunction. For its distance, nearly 1.53 that of
the Sun, given by modern astronomy and also as computed from H i n d u astronomy, the equation
of conjunction at this region is 11' per day, (as can be verified) w h i c h , t h e daily mean motion
of 31'.4 gives 42'.4 per day, making 42.4 i n 60 days, roughly 43. This also agrees with the angle
for heliacal rising of Mars, nearly 17, given by H i n d u astronomy. (In 60 days the Sun moves 59.1.
So, the elongation is 59.1 - 42.4 = 16.7, nearly 17). If vimsatim is taken as it is, we get 20 + 13
= 33, which is 9.4 short of the actual 42.4 and which also gives the angle for heliacal rising as great
as 26, so far from the 14-17 given by all.

In the mean, the motion from setting to conjunction must be equal to the motion from conj. to
rising. That is why it is not given by the text separately. That the motion segments given i n the two
verses is mean is also clear, since no position of Mars from its apogee is taken into account. So the
total motion must be equal to 409. B u t the total got by adding the segments is 400. This must be
due to the defective method o f the original or the empirical nature of the motions, and rounding
off to whole degrees, as seen from 43 being given for 42.4. T h e opposition must fall at the mid-
point of the retrograde motion, - 18, and divide it into - 9 , - 9 . T h e total motion from conj. to
opposition must be equal to that from opposition to conj. B u t what we actually get is 43 -(- 146 -t-
18 - 9 = 198, and - 9 -I- 18 -1- 150 + 43 = 202. It may be that the angle segments given are
empirical and also there are errors i n the apparently correct numbers giving the segments, needing
emendation. It is only i n the case of Mars, does V M give these eight types of motion. In II. 12-13
of the Later Surya Siddhdnta, a set of 8 types o f motion is given. B u t they cannot be equated to these
each to each. So we have only to guess when i n doubt. T h e days on the synodic cycles to pass each
type of motion must be nearly equal to the average o f the days given i n verses 27-35 for that type
of motion. This has been used to check the degrees of each type. But the synodic period, as also the
mean motion o f 1 -I- 18/133 revolution in that period are very nearly correct and they must have
been got by analysis o f the observed motions. So the Siddhdnta must have known that the motions
and times are half and half on both sides of the opposition.

Beginning from rising type I is sighra (quick) motion. II is manda (slow) motion. T h e distinction
seems to be faster or slower than the mean motion. So, the dividing point must be where the tan-
gent from the earth touches the synodic circle. Since the mean distance of Mars is 1.53 times that
of earth from Sun, this point falls about 189.5 from conjunction. Subtracting 43.5 motion from

d. A . B . C . ^ ( B . M ) HI#Wdlw(Hd:;
25a. A.M<^k)l*; B.^I^^'^I^"; D.tlsrat&crats^clft^:
D.t|<'l^'; C . M^^m* 26a. A.B.C.%cTT; D.Bl^cIT^
b. A . B . "(iVWWIWd^ C . HKW!ifmm'IWdl; b. A.B.C.Pi<^ici1 R^ita (B.^?lfcT)

B.^jD.-sra;: c. B.3^i|gqq#
c. A . B . C . 3 ? ^ ^ M : - ? f t ? n ^ . D.^4'gcra:?Ttwg, d. A . B . C . ^ ( B . W ) HmfeWdlwftd:;
332 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.27

conjunction to rising (given as type VIII), 146 is left for type I. T h i s segment extends upto the
point where retrogression begins. As the planet is stationary, here a small error of observation can
make this lesser or greater than the actuals. T h e text seems to give it as 18. Types III and I V form
the retrograde motion. I l l is called vakra (retrograde) and IV ativakra (faster retrograde). T h e text
is defective here, and we cannot fix the exact extent o f the two segments separately. B u t III and I V
seem to be divided i n the ratio 5:7 of the total. V is anuvakra (follow up after iia^ra). In the detailed
motions given this is the suiii of III and I V but direct motion. This anuvakra must be the counter-
part of II. T y p e V I is sighra and so the counterpart o f I. Its extent is given as 150. T y p e V I I is the
very quick motion from setting to conjunction and given as 43 i n 60 days. T y p e V I I I is the counter-
part of V I I from conjunction to rising. These divisions are mostly based on convention. But as these
are given only i n the case o f Mars and classical astronomy does not give them, we have only to guess
regarding them. T o add to the difficulty the text is corrupt i n the places giving the numbers.

T S have expressed inability to understand verse 25. Still, they have made some emendations
which do not give any cogent meaning. N o translation is given. T h e r e is only a question mark. In
verse 26, they give 20 motion from conjunction to rising. T h i s can give only 26 days, as against the
60 days given by the text. By this the elongation for heliacal rising would be 7 V 2 , so absurdly low.

As for N P , i n both verses, they have needlessly emended correct forms, wrongly emended the
corrupt ones, some i n faulty Sanskrit and given an untenable scheme. T h e following is their
scheme: Rising east / 186 motion / 18 retrograde motion / 180 motion / setting / 30 motion /
Conj. / 30 motion / rising east. T h e y have made the emendations and substitutions with their eye
on the total motion o f 4 0 9 i n the synodic period. T h e y make the total 408, nearly correct. B u t they
do not identify the vestiges of the different types of motion found i n these verses. Further, 30
motion from setting to conj. and then from conj. to rising, is short by 12 V 2 from the actual 421/^. T h e
time required to move 30 is 42.2 days and the S u n would move 41.5 d u r i n g this time, giving an
elongation of 11.5 for heliacal rising, far short o f the actual, especially for such high latitudes as
the Vdsistha-Paulisa envisages.

27. I n the I t y p e m o t i o n , t h e r e are 4 0 -f- 1 (= 41), 4 0 + 7 (= 47), 4 0 + 7 (=

47), 4 0 -H 8 (= 48), 4 0 + 2 (= 42), 4 0 - 2 (= 38), days p e r m o r i o n o f 3 0 each
respectively i n e a c h m o n t h o f the d i a d o f rdsis b e g i n n i n g f r o m M i n a , (i.e.
Pisces).

The above means, that for 30 o f motion, the time taken is 41 days in the rdsis M l n a (Pisces) and
Mesa (Aries), 47 days i n Rsabha (Taurus) and Mithuna (Gemini), 47 days i n Kataka (Cancer) and
Sirnha (Leo), 48 days i n Kanya (Virgo) and T u l a (Libra), 42 days i n Vrscika (Scorpio) and Dhanus
(Saggittarius) and 38 days i n Makara (Capricorn) and K u m b h a (Aquarius).

27a-b. A.B.C.^^lfolfilH (B.g) (B.om.sq) ^ C.D.'SIlH'Id1^<4^Ro|yi; ( D . 1 ^ ^ )

d. D . ^
XVIII.28 XVIII. VASISTHA-PAULISA - RISING A N D SETTING 333

A n examination of the rate shows that the perigee is situated at the end of the Makara (Capricorn)
and the apogee at the end of Kataka (Cancer), which both fairly agree with the actual.
T S say that they do not understand this verse, and no translation is given; its place being taken
by a question mark. N P translate thus: "In the first gad 240 plus 28 minus V2 (= 267 V2) (days). O n e
should calculate days for every two signs from Pisces." It is clear that they do not see that this verse
gives the detailed rate of motion of the T y p e I gati i n the diads of rdsis from Pisces, as affected by
the equation of the centre. T h e y think that the first motion given i n verse 25, which 186 according
to them, takes 267 V2 days, as given by them here. If so, what use is the instruction to calculate for
"every two signs from Pisces"?

28. T h e I I type m o t i o n , i n the same o r d e r , (i.e. f o r each m o n t h o f the diads,

P i s c e s - A r i e s , etc.) f o r the 18 take 5 x 1 0 + 7 , 6 x 1 0 + 1 , 7 x 1 0 + 2 , 6 x 1 0
+ 6, 6 X 10 + 1, a n d 5 X 10 + 1 days.

This gives 57 days each to move i n the signs Pisces-Aries, 61 days for each of Taurus-Gemini,
75 days for each of Cancer-Leo, 66 days for each o f V i r g o - L i b r a , 61 days for each of Scorpio-Sagit-
tarius, and 51 days for each of Capricorn-Aquarius. F r o m the days given, it can be seen that there
is a slight tilt i n the apogee towards Leo, and i n the perigee towards Aquarius. T h i s small difference
from the findings i n verse 27 shows that the values are empirical.

As for the readings, rasa has been inserted because we want six numbers for the six diads, and one
is wanting. Symmetry requires that it must be rasa (= 6) there. Also two mdtrds are wanting, sapta is
emended into rasa because, 76 for V i r g o - L i b r a , with 72 o n one side, and 61 on the other side, will
take the apogee to the end of Virgo, 60 off from its place.
The average for II type motion is 18 for 81 days which is about the average of the mean rate and
0 (stationary). T h u s I type motion is faster than the mean, and the II type slower, as we have sur-
mised.

T S have expressed inability to interpret this verse also, and not translated it. Yet they have made
an emendation which need not be taken seriously, since it has been done without understanding.

N P have interpreted the verse as giving 57, 71, 72, 66,61 and 51 by inserting rfw as the fourth.
But symmetry shows that the second number 71 is wrong, and it must be 61, to avoid the j u m p from
57 to 72. A t any rate, read with their interpretation of verse 27, we can see that they do not under-
stand the use of this series of numbers. T h e y do not even say these are days.

28a. A.B.C.D.&WW'H'<l4(D.-^)
b. A.B.M-^'hK'^llf llfe|i|<11 (B.feqTT#)
C.Ml+l<^l'J,"ll-^fe<=i'l<l; D . ' q g ^
<!JMJll-lt|[#]W
c. A . B . ^ ; C . D . ^ : ;
334 PANCASIDDHANTI KA XVIII.32

^i^P^i^d1fc^c*>-^l(^Ti^f^l^A: ^ ) t t ' ^ w 3 :

( ^ ) ^ ; ' - ^ ^ ^ ^ (9ra[|)rTr?T(^)' ( ^ )

29. I n t h e signs, Pisces, S c o r p i o , A r i e s a n d Sagittarius, M a r s m o v e s 7 i n 4 2

days w h e n r e t r o g r a d e (vakra) a n d 9 i n 4 2 days w h e n e x t r a - r e t r o g r a d e
(ativakra). I n t h e f o l l o w - u p after r e t r o g r a d e (anuvakra) M a r s m o v e s 16 i n 6 0
days.

3 0 . I n t h e signs T a u r u s , G e m i n i , L i b r a a n d V i r g o , M a r s m o v e s 7 i n 4 3 days
r e t r o g r a d e , 10 i n 4 3 days e x t r a - r e t r o g r a d e , a n d 17 i n 6 3 days i n t h e follow-
u p after r e t r o g r a d e .

3 1 . I n C a n c e r a n d L e o , M a r s m o v e s 7 i n 4 4 days, 11 i n 4 6 days, a n d 18 i n
6 6 days, respectively, i n t h e t h r e e types r e t r o g r a d e etc.

3 2 . I n C a p r i c o r n a n d A q u a r i u s , M a r s m o v e s 6 i n 37 days, 9 i n 3 9 days, a n d
15 i n 57 days, respectively, i n the t h r e e types o f m o t i o n .

29a. B . ^ . A . ^ ; B . ^ 31a. C.fe^:

b. A . B . ^ C . D . ^ ^ . B . W ^ b. A.B.'Hkiykiyi ( B . ^ ) i ^ ^ R c i y i - l ;
A^TSienOT; B . W C T ; D.^t|PlR[
c. A . B . l=l<Ji<iH RH' lid <*hl; C.I*+^H'II'^<*^; c. A . B . C . D . a d d ^ at the end.
D.fe<^R'lldo|^ d. A . 3 5 R I f ^ ; B . a ^ I R f ^ . B . ^ a ^ H ^
d. B3.^1li:
32a. A.B.C.D.o^fR^:
b. A . B . ^ ( B . f ) <^'ldl i^l^ci of (w. ^ ) ;
30a. B . ^ H ^ C.D.H=l^d|!!)Aa^ I
b. A . B . o g ; ^ : W m i F i ; C.^^srfara^: c. B . ^
d. A . B . c J S ^ "
c. A . B . ^ ; C . D . ^ A . B . f 5 i q g t
d. A.o^HclsblVII ||;B.*^T^sb|<^||;
XVIII.33 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U L I S A - R I S I N G A N D SETTING 335

Types III, I V and V , called, respectively, retrograde (vakra), extra-retrograde (ativakra) and
follow-up after retrograde (anuvakra) are given i n these verses. T h e first two are actual retrograde
motion, and the third is the slow direct m o d o n following. T h e y are shown hereunder i n a tabular
form.

Signs Pis-Ari Tau-Gem Can-Leo Vir-Lib Scor-Sag Cap-Aq

T y p e III -7742 d -7743 d -7744d -7743 d -7742d -6737d

Type I V -9742d -10743 d -11746d -10743 d -9742d -9739d

TypeV -M6760d -Hi 7763 d + 18766d -1-17763 d + 16760d + 15757d

The division into the three types is arbitrary, based o n some convention. B y examining the table
we can see two things note-worthy. T h e total of arcs o f III and I V is equal to V , though V is positive.
The days for III and I V are the same?, except for Cancer-Leo, and Capri-Aquarius. T h e r e is sym-
metry o n both sides of these sets. G u i d e d by the above, I have emended certain numbers which
glaringly go against these points. In verse 29, nava for vakra is corrected into naga since it must be
less than the 9 given for ativakra, and both equal to 16, clearly given for anuvakra. In verse 30, the
corrupt stara is changed into svara to make up the total 17. T h e corrupt nuvdsanaih is amended into
agnisdgaraih, guided by symmetry. Khakrteh is emended into trikrteh since the number should be
greater than 42, by symmetry. In ver. 31 the corrupt sapta khdrnavaisca divasdn: is corrected into
rasdmavaih sivdn arnsdn because 11 required to make u p the total 18 for anuvakra. sapta is a repe-
tidon, khdrnavaisca divasdn = 40 days, does not fit, since the m a x i m u m number o f days is required
there, and 46 fits eminently. In verse 32, yama is corrected into naga sinceyatnadahanaih (= 32) is
too short a period, and far from the 42 days on both sides, and the number should also be a little
less than 39. reva ca, corrupt, is emended into nava ca, which will make u p the total 15 oianuvakra.

As for verse 33, the words i n it are all perfect, without any corruption. B u t they do not make any
sense. It seems that some rules are given here for the division into the three types with their days,
and the proportion is roughly 5:7:12, of the degrees of all three combined. A t any rate, this instruc-
tion does not seem to serve any purpose.

Ativakra represents the faster retrograde motion near opposition/)/ias the slower vakra motion o n
the other side. That is why it is greater and faster. B u t why exactly the same number of days? T h i s
seems to be a convention. B u t this is against logic. For, only i n Cancer-Leo, and Capricorn-

33b. A . ^ ^
D.^1S|P?I^^o B . m ^ : ; c. Al.3^fira%;B.3?fil^B2.1
D. M ^ ^ : d. B.<=I^H:iM^'^Vi; D.*lfil<Ns+.+i5^Vl

25
336 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.34

Aquarius, there is a small excess of days for ativakra, but even this is far too small. T h e sum of vakra
and ativakra is 18 and a m a x i m u m at Cancer-Leo, and m i n i m u m 15, at Capricorn-Aquarius, and
fairly evenly distributed i n between. B u t actually, at Capricorn-Aquarius, the sum is near 9, as a
comparison with the motion o f Mars given i n the Vdkyakarana will show (vide A p p . I l l , Kujavakra,
where retrograde occurs i n the signs Capricorn-Aquarius).

T S have translated verses 29-32, omitting verse 33 as obscure. B u t they think that all three types
are retrograde motion, (while actually only III and I V are retrograde, and V is direct motion). This
would make the range o f the retrograde motion from 36 i n Cancer-Leo to 30 in Capricorn-
Aquarius, while the range given is 18 to 15, actually the latter is even as small as 9. Also, they do
not see that the I V type should be greater than the III. So they give the numbers as they got from
the words, instead o f emending them appropriately. So, i n verse 29, navabhdgam as emended by
them should be navabhagdn. nagdn vakri should be navdtivakri. In verse 30, their emendation
abdhisamudraih should be agnisdgaraih Khakrtaih should be trikrtaih. In verse 31, their khdrn
divasaih giving no degrees at all for the days, and defective in mdtrds should have been emended into
rasdrnavaih sivdnarnsdn. In verse 32, symmetry requires our emendation of yamadahanaih in
nagadahanaih, while T S have kept it.

As for N P , they have understood that type III gives retrograde and type I V , extreme retrograde,
though the numbers they give for degrees and days are untenable i n many cases. Seeing that the
degrees o f V are the sums o f those o f III and I V , they think that V is the total of the retrograde
motions, while actually V is direct motion. T h e y do not see that i f the degrees o f V are the total o f
III and I V , the days too must be the sum o f the days, and therefore V is not the total retrograde.
T h e y have translated verse 33, but this does not give any sense.

34. I n the q u i c k m o t i o n follow^ing sighragati (= t y p e V I ) , t h e r e are the days,

4 0 4- 1 , 4 0 + 5 , 4 0 + 8 , 4 0 + 1 1 , 4 0 + 1 4 , 4 0 + 1 4 , 4 0 + 1 1 , 4 0 + 9 , 4 0 + 5,
4 0 - 1, 4 0 - 4 a n d 4 0 - 4 f o r every 3 0 degrees.

Obviously, these days are given for each one o f the signs beginning from Pisces. T h e numbers
are almost perfectly symmetrical o n both sides o f the inter-secdon o f Cancer-Leo, and Capricorn-
Aquarius, re-inforcing the conclusion that the former intersection i n apogee, and the latter
perigee.

manu for Leo is a glaring omission and is inserted. Symmetry requires 45 for Scorpio, and sopaksa
is emended intopanca. T h e number-words forming a 'dvandva' compound, trivargam is wrong fo
trivarga, and so has been emended. -<m is removed being an extra matrd and purposeless. T h i s verse
is o f the same kind as verses 27, 28 combined, giving types I and II.

T S have not understood what is given here, and its purpose, as they have not understood the
corresponding verses 27-28. B u t they have translated this verse as the words go, and wrongly too,
the numbers given by them forming a mere jumble, without any instruction, 2 + 1,2 + 5,2 + 8,2
+ 14, 2 + 11, 2 + 9, 40 1, 40 4, 40 4. N o wonder, they appendthis with a question mark.

34a. A . B . C . D . H a p l o m . of o n e ^ A.B.C.^^wg^ D . W ^
b. A . B . C . D . ' q ^ ( B . o m ^ ) T ^ ( B 2 . ^ ) c. D . ^ i #
l(A2.B1.2.f D . g ^ d. A . o t J T ^ B I . S . c T t T ^ : ; B2.cT?|5lt
XVIII.35 XVIII. VASISIHA-PAULISA-RISINC; AND S E I l l N G 337

N P have emended the already correct pancdstakam, meaning 40, into pancasastm which they think
would mean 5 X 60 = 300. pancasastim would mean only 65. T o mean 5 + 60, the form should be
parwasastayah (nominauve) or pancasastih (accusative). T h e trouble is that they have not understood
that the days given are for every 30, everywhere except in types III, I V and V . T h a t is why they
make such un-authoiised corrections and give wrong translations.

35. I n the V I I type, (i.e. atisighra), f o r every 3 0 o f the diads Pisces-Aries,

T a u r u s - G e m i n i , etc. there are the days, 36 + 3, 36 + 9, 36 + 12, 36 + 9, 36 +
3, 36 -I- 0. T h e m o t i o n as g i v e n f o r the V I I type is f o r the V I I I type too.

Here too the symmetry on both sides of the apogee, and perigee is necessary, and the corrupt
dvikaldhvdrkd is corrected into hyanaldnkdrka, corresponding to trivargaguna. This forms the motion
from setting to conjunction. As the V I I I type, forming the motion from conjunction to rising is
exactly the counterpart of the V I I in the synodic cycle, it follows that type V I I I is the same.

T S have emended dvikaldhvdrkd into dvyanaldnkdrka, resulting in 7 quantities of days, while only
6 are wanted for the diads of signs. N P , here too, as i n verse 34, have made an unauthorised correc-
tion under the same mis-apprehension. T h e y have substituted sadbhis ca for the correct sat-trimsat.
They do not see the coniradiction this leads to. From setting to conj. or from conj. to rising the
days they give are not less than 60, 66, on the average. For this, the average motion would be about
46 in this region of the synodic cycle. But they have interpreted that it is 30, in verse 26. T h e y have
not seen the contradiction.

As 1 have done l o r Jupiter and Saturn, here too, I shall work out an example, to make my expla-
nations clear.

Before closing, I wish to say something about Mercury. T h e case of Mercury is as involved as that
of Mars, but in a different way. In one sidereal year Mercury traverses three full synodic cycles and
more. But it moves in the zodiacal circle together with the Sun i n the mean and its equation o f the
centre depends on its position i n the 12 signs. So the motion types vary from synodic cycle to
synodic cycle in the same year, needing a large number of day-groups, and these are given by V M .
But it is these numbers that are spoiled by scribes most and the reconstruction is a tedious job. (The
methods, though sometimes peculiar, can be guessed and explained). I have neither the leisure nor
the equanimity of m i n d to undertake this work at present, and hope someone else would do it.

35a. A.B.t^iR^IW^*!; A.B.^^I^J^-^:

D. [^fef^S]^%W d. A . ' ^ ^ ; B . ^ ^ ( B 2 . ' ^ )
b. A . B . f l 3 ; ( B . ^ ) W ( B . f r ) - ^ ; A.^igF=!)[t
338 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.35

Example: Find true Mars at 800 days from Epoch.

Days from Epoch 800- 0-0
Subtract days at first rising 256 - 40 - 0
543 - 20 - 0
, . 543-20
No. of revolutions gone i^^O = 0

Remainder 543 - 20 - 0
Correction for revolutions gone 0- 0-0
Days after rising 543 - 20 - 0

Mars at rising = ^33^ revoludons = 230, i.e. 20 i n Scorpio.

Starting from this point, i.e. 20 i n Scorpio at rising, true Mars moves i n 543-20 days, as per the
scheme given i n verses 24-35, to 29 47' i n Cancer as per details given below:
T y p e I: 146 Total days = 543-20

Balance 10 i n Scorpio 14 days x 42)

30 i n Sagittarius 42 "
30 i n Capricorn 38 "
30 in Aquarius 38 "
30 in Pisces 41 "
16in Aries 21 + 52 x 41)

Total 194^ + 52

Balance N o . of days 348.28

II: 18
14 i n Aries 44-20 (i|x57)
18
4_
4 in Taurus 13-33 (x6])
18

57-53

Balance N o . of days 290-35

III: 7 (Retrograde)
- 4 in Taurus 24-34 (^x43)

- 3 i n Aries 18-00 {~x42)

42-34
Balance N o . of days 248-1
XVIII.36 XVIll. V A S I S T H A - P A U U S A - RISING A N D SETTING 339

I V : 9 (Fast Retrograde)
- 9 i n Aries 42-00

Balance N o . of days 206-1

16
V : 16 12 i n Aries 45-00 ( J | X 60)
4inTaurus 14-49 (^ X 63)

59-49

V I : 85 4 7 ' 26 i n T a u r u s 41-36 (|X48)

30 i n G e m i n i 51-00
53-36
29 4 7 ' i n Cancer 53-36 ( ~ 5 4 ~ X 30)

146-12

Therefore, T r u e motion i n 543-20 days from 20 to 29 4 7 ' Cancer = 249 47

Mean motion i n 543-20 days: 408 - 43 X 543 1/3 /780 = 284 42'

Therefore days to be added = 34-55

T r u e motion for 34-55 to be added

In Cancer 0-13' for 0-23, and for the balance 34-32 days.
In Leo 30 X = 19 I T

Therefore T r u e Mars: 19 11' i n L e o .

Motion of Mercury'
As in the case of other planets, the epoch date is so selected that Mercury rises heliacally i n the
west on that date. Since, for Mercury, the elongation required for heliacal rising is given as twelve
degrees, on the epoch day its longitude is 12 degrees ahead o f the S u n . T h e n , the number of days
elapsed from the epoch is obtained and divided by the sidereal period o f Mercury, so that the
resulting quodent represents the number o f risings that had taken place since the epoch, and the
remainder the number of days elapsed i n the current sidereal cycle.

T h e movement of Mercury i n one synodic period being known, (given by the text), the total
longitude moved d u r i n g the elapsed number o f risings is also known and adding to this the epoch
constant, that is, the position o f Mercury on the epoch day, its longitude on the day o f the current
rising is obtained. However, these figures are on the assumpuon that the motion o f Mercury is
uniform, which is not the case. So, what we have got is only the mean position of Mercury and not
its true position. Here, as also in the text, 'mean position' does not mean the mean heliocentric
position as we now understand, but the mean geocentric position on the assumption of uniform
modon. T h e true position varies from the mean by quite a few degrees. T h e date o f rising also is
only a mean date and the true date may be several dates behind or ahead.
1. Mercury : Translation and Notes by S. Hariharan, Bangalore.
340 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.37

T h e text then gives a table from which for a given mean longitude the true position on the true date can
be obtained. Since the Sun's position has to be 12 degrees behind the true position of Mercury, the
same correction applied to Mercury has to be applied to the Sun. T h a t means, keeping i n mind that
the Sun moves one degree i n one day approximately, the true date is ahead of the mean date by as
many days as the number of degrees in the correction, i f the correction is positive, and vice versa.
Consequently, the number of days elapsed since the (true) rising is also modified by the same
number of days, reduced, if the correction is positive, and vice versa.

H a v i n g got the true Mercury as on the true date of rising and the number of days elapsed since
rising, we have now to get the degrees moved by Mercury d u r i n g these remaining days i n the
synodic cycle. For this purpose the synodic period is divided into several sections just as in the case
of other planets. In the case of Mercury the division is made into four sections or gati-s. T h e first is
from rising to starting of retrogression, the second is the period of retrogression, the third is from
end of retrogression or anuvakra to setting, while the fourth is from setting in the east to rising in
the west. T h e number of days for each section and the movement are not constant but vary
depending upon the position of Mercury in the zodiac. Accordingly, tables giving these values for
each of the twelve signs are given in the text. W i t h the help o f these tables we can trace the move-
ment of Mercury d u r i n g the remaining days and finally arrive at its position.

What is new in the case of Mercury is the method of interpolation within these tables. For other
planets no specific method of interpolation is suggested, with the result we assume linear interpo-
lation. But here a second degree interpolation is suggested for certain sections.
T S and N P do not appear to have understood the procedure nor the radonale expounded by
these verses, as could be gauged from the emendadons they make and explanations they give to the
verses.

Mean Mercury

36-.38a A d d to the ahargaria seven d m e s f o u r , i.e., 28, a n d a t h i r d . M u l t i p l y by

eight a n d d i v i d e by 9 2 7 . T h e q u o t i e n t is the risings o f M e r c u r y . T a k e the
e i g h t h part o f the r e m a i n d e r a n d d e d u c t t h e r e f r o m , i n nddikds, o n e f o u r t h o f
the risings, a n d the result is the ( r e m a i n i n g ) days o f M e r c u r y . M u l t i p l y the ris-
36a. A.?gTB.'HMil-j, D.RHISIill:
b. B . ? m t A . ^ : ; B.>W 37a. A . B . f c ^
B.iymFT: D . ' ^ : b. A.'gKTPf; B.^SR^T
c. A . ' ^ c. A.B.BKi^I'MHWI-i; D . [ 3 T t 5 ^ ? m ] w n ^
d. A.B.Ttl^RW: C . T t f l ^ ; D.TtfeiT:-g: B . ^
A . ^ ; B.im; D.-^art d. B . W I ^ g f ^ a i ^ D . W S ^ r a f ^ f e : ^
xvm.37 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U L I S A - R I S I N G A N D SETTING 341

ings by 2 6 3 , d e d u c t 43 a n d d i v i d e by 829 a n d the result is the m e a n M e r c u r y

(in revohttinns).
These will lead to the following:

i. 28 1/3 diivs before the epoch, Mercury rises in the west, after which the countings of the risings
begin.

ii. One synodic revolution takes (927/8 + 1/240) days. T h e deduction of V4th nMls or l/240th
dav per rising is for taking the synodic period as approximately 927/8 davs. T h e balance remaining
after division by 927 is the number of eighth parts of a day elapsed since the last rising. So. dividing
this by eight, the niunber r>f full days are obtained. D u r i n g a synodic period the motion of mean
Mercury is equal to 263/829 revolutions (which is the same for Sun). Hence for one full revolution
Sun will take,

(927/8 + 1/240) X 829/263 days, or, 365.261708 days, i.e., 365-15-42.

iii. At the epoch date, that is 28 1/3 days before 20-3-505 A D . , Sun's longitude is 357-37 mmus 27-55
or 329-12.
iv. O n this date. Mercury's longitude is given by:
(No. of risings (zero) X 263 - 43)/829 or - 43/829 revolutions. This reduces to - (18-40), or .341-
20, which is ahead of Siui by 11-38 as against 12 needed, and therefore acceptable.
In verse, 36c, we, also others, have emended the ms. reading muniva.nanaca as muniyamanava to
get the coiTect figure 927. In 37a krtvd has been made as hrtvd.
The meaning and rationale of these verses is clear. But N P have made medhd i n 36d assodhyo and
have translated it as "Subtract an eighth part of a day (for every synodic period)" etc. and comment,
"We find in X V I I , 36 a subtraction of 1/8 of a day and a division of the number of risings by 4. We
cannot explain these steps which seem in excess of the normal procedure."

It is rather surprising that N P mi.ssed the elementary step of dividing the remainder by 8 to get
the number of days, particularly when T S have correctly interpreted it. Without the correct
number of days (elapsed since the last rising) the further processing does not make sense. Hence
we feel that N P have not understood the process at all.

In the next step of finding the longitude of Mercury at the time of the last rising, the figures in
the verses have been badly corrupted. In 37b tridasayama has been emended as tridivasapa by T S ,
and in 38a navavnsmamu as nn.vavasnrdma. so as to give them a multiplier of 123 and divisor of 389.
But this would give the Sun's period as 366.479641 days which cannot be.
N P have made tridasayama as adridasayama; rdmdrnava as pdndava and navavasuydma as
navavasurasa. They have also changed the meaning so as to subtract/^an^/ava (5) from the divisor
689 rather than to make the deduction from the product. A l l these they have done just to make
these constants agree with those of Babylonian and then claim that "Table 24 reveals exact numeri-
cal agreement for the outer planets and Mercury" (!). T h e y forgot that in this process they have
obliterated the initial epoch constant of the longitude of Mercury and comment "For Mercury we
have no epoch constant giving us direcdy a longitude."

We have emended tridasayama as trirasayama, and navavasuyama as navayamavasu. As shown

above, these numbers give the sidereal period of Sun as 365-15-42, which is within limits. O f
342 PA5JCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.40

course, the constants as emended by N P also will give the correct sidereal period, namely, 365-15-
35, as it should be, but the emendments made are too violent.

t^^RVlt*!! ^ a ^ c h l Rviid*^^ ||>Jo

True Mercury

3 8 c - 4 0 . F o r the r i s i n g d e g r e e s i n o r d e r , we h a v e
for 3 0 + 5 35 degrees 30 degrees
9+ 60 69 60
8 + 80 88 1 0 0 - 12 88
3+ 30 33 30+ 7 37
4 + 100 104 1 0 0 + 12 112
5+ 26 31 3 + 30 33

Total 360 360

T h u s true Mercury.

We have made some minor emendations like navakrtyd sastim to navasastyd sastih, ca tiksndms
to vittksnamsuh, trimsadbhufikte for trimsadbhakta, to get the total as 360 for both sides as they shou
be. W i t h this table corresponding to the mean mercury obtained as per the previous verse the true
mercury can be got. T h i s is for the true date of rising. Now, the true date has lo be obtained or, what
is the same as getting the true remaining days passed after the true rising date. T h i s is dealt with
in the next verse.

38a. A . B . ^ 1 5 r a i ! m G ? ( B . r e p . W ? G T ) ^ : 39a. A . B . ' W f ? ' ? ! ^ ^ : ; C.D.4<!<[>c'ir<^#

b. A . B . ^ a W f t c q i . A.B.'?I^^#fr?il:;
b. A.^sCTi32^; B.VI*MH! c . D . V M wdla^ni^
D. [^5St?TPja>RR?^a] c. c.D.'sn^. A.Tgfti^
38c. B 3 . H a p l . o m . ' # [I^^Tlfe]^-' d. A . B . f t ? i ^ n ^ c.D.1?m^sii5ni^
d. A.B.I5lVlifttt>*iKiH5!ll<
40a. Al.'gg^f*!^. A . B . C . D . T I c R f t f ^
c. A.B.C.D.5lfWi
d. A.B.C.D.1?SvifclJ|ai
XVIII.40 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U U S A - RISING A N D SETTING 343

These verses actually give the true longitudes at the dme of rising corresponding to mean lon-
gitudes. T h e mean longitude is obtained as per the previous verse.

T S and N P think that, i n verses 38b-40, the true m o d o n of Mercury is given, for certain days cer-
tain degrees, and so on. They have made some emendments of their own and both of them get the
total degrees moved as 360 but as for the number of days T S get 389 while N P get 388. T h e 389 of
T S is the same as the divisor of the previous verse and so they think that corresponding to the
remaining days which will be upto 389 these verses give the true sighra-sphuta. B u t their idea is
vague and they are not able to expand it properly.

N P think that what is given is an eightfold division of the ecliptic but they are not able to explain
anything further. T h e y comment, " T h e text calls n l 'days' which, i n any case, is meaningless". In
fact there seems to be no reference to days at all in these verses.

41. D e d u c t f r o m the days the degrees o f d i f f e r e n c e o f these two, (i.e., o f the

m e a n a n d t r u e places o f M e r c u r y ) , i n case the t r u e place is i n excess o f the
m e a n place, a n d a d d i f the m e a n is i n excess o f the t r u e . T h e n the c o u r s e o f
true M e r c u r y is as follows.

T S and N P have not been able to appreciate the rationale for this operation. T S have not given
any rationale. N P think that the correction applied to the days is a mistake and it should beapplied
to the longitude; and the correction to the days should be applied by dividing the correction (in
degrees) by the synodic motion per day. T h i s however is not the correct position.

Since this relates to the rising position of Mercury on the true date the Sun will be 12 degrees less
than the true Mercury. So the Sun also will have to be corrected by the difference between the true
and mean positions of Mercury. Since the motion of the Sun can be taken as one degree per day
for small durations, to that extent o f the difference the rising date will shift. If the true Sun is in
excess, the date will get advanced, and, consequently, the remaining days will get reduced, and vice
versa. Obviously the number of days will be equal to the number o f degrees.

Note on Verses 42-53

These verses give the gati-s of Mercury relating to the twelve signs, Aries to Pisces. I n each verse,
the first quarter gives the degrees (days) o f motion from the rising of the planet to the commence-
ment of retrogression, the second quarter for the period of retrogression, the third for the period
from the end of retrogression to the setting o f the planet and the fourth from setting to its rising.
In order to check the accuracy o f the figures, they have been calculated by m o d e m methods. T h e

variants, asi'Sig^felJW^IrRf^l^ and

41a. A.B.o^ Tm\r<M.
b. A."?!)*!^^. C.ft!%'^. c. A.B.^lHj^W
c. A . B . repeat after b, verse 40, with a few d. A.B.<;aWK ( B I . 2 . ^ : )
344 PANCASIDDHAN'I IKA XVIII.43

textual figures might be seen to agree with the calculated figures in several cases with minor differ-
ences, of course on account of the constants used in Paulisa and Vdsistha, and due to observational
errors. Where they differed widely, it has been examined whether there could be due to defective
readings and suitable emendadons have been suggested in consonance with the reading of the manus-
cripts, as far as possible. Neither T S nor N P appear to have understood the purport of these verses
and have suggested all sorts of emendations. T S do not translated at all verse 54.

M e r c u r y ' s gatis for A r i e s

4 2 . T h e ^^a/Knn A r i e s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

1. Rise to R e t r o . 3 6 - 11 = 25 25 25 25 23 26
2. Retro. 3 6 - 11=25 3 X 4=12 25 12 24 11
3. R e t r o , to Set. 36- 0=36 6 X 7=42 36 42 39 44
4. Set. to Rise 3 6 - 14 = 22 3^X5=45 22 45 22 45

[^:] ]

4 3 . I n T a u r u s , the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

I. Rise to R e t r o . 4 X 8-h0=32 4 4 - 11=33 32 33 31 34

2. Retro. 2 X 8 + 8 = 24 44-33=11 24 11 24 9
3. R e t r o , to Set. 4 X 8 + 3 = 35 4 4 - 7 = 37 35 37 33 36
4. Set. to Rise 2 X 8 + 3=19 4 4 - 1=43 19 43 20 43

42a. A.B.2.3.fcqt; B l . ' s r s ^ 43a. A . ^ ; B.^. A l . ^ ; A2-^.

b. A.B.-9TO; C . D . ^ a ^ ( D . T m ) W . A . f ^ ; B.lMt;
A.B.(FT:; C D . C.D.^d.-MHfe"*^:
c. A.B.f^ff^; C f e f e ; b. A . B . t l ^ : ; C D . t ^ : .

A.B.C.D.Bl^kl*. A . B . ^ W ^ (B.^ie^) c. A.B.?TcTT*R#; C D . w J i l i f t :

7]f&ra(B.Tlf&RT); C.M<i*rMt^J][Q!d*i; d. A.B.W^ST; C . ^ ? T ; D . ^ ^ .
C. H'<li^^Tw4^; D . ' ? F c # ^ t ^ |
XVIII.46 XVin. VASISTHA-PAULISA-RISING AND SETTING 345

44. I n G e m i n i , the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

1. Rise to R e t r o . 20 + 2 5 = 4 5 50 - 7 = 4 3 45 43 38 42
2. Retro. 2 0 + 3 = 23 3 23 3 23 8
3. R e t r o , to Set. 20+ 6=26 3^ =27 26 27 27 29
4. Set. to R i s e 2 0 + 3 = 23 45 23 45 21 45

[^:]

C % ^ ) ' ^ 1 ^ ^ ' ( ' # ^ ' ) 'M^cbc<4|fpc(dl'^^||>{<A

4 5 . I n C a n c e r , the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

o /

1. Rise to R e t r o . 8 X 4+8=40 40+ 7=47 40 47 42 48

2. Retro. 8 x 2 + 8=24 24 X 1/2=12 24 12 24 10
3. R e t r o , to Set. 8 x 3 + 0=24 24+ 1=25 24 25 22 24
4. Set. to Rise 8 X 2+6=22 22 + 2 5 = 4 7 22 47 23 47

44b. A . B . C . D . WWHlPdd A . B . ^ ^ ^
c. B.?m; C . D . m A . B . ^ ; C . D . ^
d. A . m^S; B. f w m g and indicated
omission iipto^Kiig of verse 47c below;
45a. A . g ^ f ^ . A . B . 1 ^ :
b. A.C.D.td^lPvi'Jui^^: -Hfechia^J^-^^^:
c. A . C . D . ^ ^ . A . #
d. A . c . D . W R S R f f ^ g m r i ;
346 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.48

46. I n L e o , the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

o /

1. Rise to R e t r o . 5 X 8+4=44 44+ 7 = 51 44 51 44 51

2. Retro. 3 x 8 + 1 = 25 25x1/^= 1 2 2 5 12V2 25 12
3. R e t r o , to Set. 2x8+2=18 18+ 4=22 18 22 19 22
4. Set. to R i s e 3x8+5=29 29 + 2 5 = 5 4 29 54 28 52

]
ch-MwiH''^i^(^^')-'?ugeF'-

'15ra^[1?T]'-

4 7 . I n V i r g o , the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

L R i s e to R e t r o . 46 33 X 2 = 54 46 54 44 52
2. R e t r o . 24 9 x 5=45 24 45 23 14
3. R e t r o , to Set. 20 3 x 8=24 20 24 19 23
4. Set. to R i s e 35 50 + 9 = 5 9 35 59 35 59

46a. A.C.D.Jj"l-^<im'4-iir<J|^: (D.^^S^I^:) 47a, A.(:.D.<-^WI'Jd:j^l

b. A . C D . ' f f l F i B r ^ . A.JsiTO: b. A.KHVWill d<4R^:; C . 8l3(lcll d<ll d<<|5| ' J l : ;
c. A.C.D.^(A.B.^)
at the commencement of the line. c. B1.2.3. commerce again withk1l84)
a.(;.d.?t'<tMW ?I?n4, after the indicated gap.
d. A . C . D . - ? ? ^ ' ' (A.^?1^) A.B.'H"<1ll!=b<Vlii!ldlif^<ft*iTt)H,
C.D.1TOIS^7rai4 (D.8*^S!5(ldl4)
<R<<J*11 for'+'^IK* etc.
XVIII.50 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U L I S A - RISING A N D SETTING 347

4 8 . I n L i b r a , the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

I. Rise to R e t i o . (21 - 0)x2=42 42+ 3=45 42 45 39 47

2. R e t r o . (21 - 10)x2=22 22- 8=14 22 14 21 15
3. R e t r o , to Set. (21 - 8)x2=26 26+ 1 = 27 26 27 24 27
4. Set. to Rise. (21 - 0)x2=42 42 + 2 3 = 6 5 43 5 42 5

3#1^ W : [ ^ ] - W - ( ' W S ' ) -'fKlT:' ( W " ) "xifgr'-( )

49. I n Scorpio, the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

1. Rise to Retro. 10x3+ 6=36 36+ 2=38 36 38 35 39

2. Retro. 1 0 x 1 + 11=21 21- 7=14 21 14 21 16
3. Retro, to Set. 10x3+ 4=34 34+ 3=37 34 37 33 38
4. Set. to Rise 1 0 x 4 + 2=42 42 + 2 6 = 6 8 43 8 43 6

49a. A.^?ml; B . ^ W
b. A . B . C . D . ^ir^l+d (B.om.cf, D.^lRflfefcl)
fort^RUf^T. A . B . ^ : q f O T o k ? g c 1 T : ;
48a. A . B . > ^ C.^g^^-Woks^:; D . ^ :
b. A.B.aqqgraif?rfrt5H^9sr; c.#Tr
c. A.%?II; B 1 . 3 . M A.B.D.^JW5ll#1T;
C.^WfTf^
d. A . B . C . D . ? ! ^ ( A . - S t ^ ) t t ? I ^ | g d. A.B.^^(B.^)
348 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.52

5 0 . I n Sagittarius, the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

1. Rise to R e t r o . 2x10+ 8=28 28+ 5=23 28 33 28 32

2. Retro. 20=20 2 0 - 5=15 20 15 20 16
3. R e t r o , to Set. 6x 7 =42 42+ 7=49 42 49 42 50
4. Set. to Rise 6x 7 - 4=38 38 + 3 0 = 6 8 39 8 39 3

[ W : ]

(3t^ ' u f g ' - ^ f ^ ) ( ' # r T ' ) - * g t c ^ ' ^ s [ ij

51. I n C a p r i c o r n , the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

1. Rise to R e t r o . 20+ 3=23 23 + 4 = 2 7 23 27 23 28

2. Retro. 20+ 0=20 20-4=16 20 16 20 16
3. R e t r o , to Set. 2 0 + 7 + 1 8 = 4 5 45 + 7 = 5 2 45 52 46 54
4. Set. to Rise 20+12=32 32 +26=58 32 58 33 56

^lf^Vlfd<VII W ( ^ ? n - 5 8 l f e ) T ) II

50a. A.lP^; B.RPr. A . B . f ^ ^ ! I ^ ( B . ^ ) ; 51a. A.B.^.

b. A . B . C . # # 7 ; D . [ ^ J ^ ]
b. A.B.C.D.^fe?! (A.^IS^) f o r f ^ c. A.B.C.D.^^^^TOTftl:
A . B . C . D . ^ . A . ^ for^ d. A . B . C . D . ^ ^ ^ s f e f i T
c. A l . % ^ : ; A 2 . B . % ^ : . A . B . C . D .
(A.B.4)
d. A.B.C.D.^^^(A.^)?i^.
XVni.53 XVII!. v . 4 s i s t h . v p . ' \ l ' l 1 ! 5 a - r i s i n c ; and setting 349

52. In Aquariu.s, the gati-s are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

1. Rise to R e t r o . = 20 22 20 22 20 22
2. Retro. 20+ 1 = 21 15 21 15 21 15
3. R e t r o , to Set. =43 55 43 55 46 55
4. Set. to Rise. 2 X 12 = 24 60 25 00 27 51

*7ErggFT: ' f j f w ' C W '?mTf' ^ ' c h l d M V I I :

53. I n Pisces, the are:

Degrees Minutes Textual Calculated

O ' O f

1. Rise to R e t r o . 18+ 1 = 19 20 19 20 19 19
2. Retro. 18+ 5=23 13 23 13 23 14
3. R e t r o , to Set. 43=43 50 43 50 43 52
4. Set. to Rise 3X 8=24 49 24 49 24 47

(3^)d^i'd<ivign^1g;g^ai^[^] i

52a. A . f % . Al.f5rwn; D.f^fcqi 53b. A . B . C . D . ^ =^a=HM^i

b. A.B.^^fk^<r<HHI^:; CD.fe^c^ b. forWRSBT;, A l . W ; Bl.'?T?te,
(D.f^) 1^^: B2."?irafW; B3."?r?fft; CD.^tgtOT
d. A . B . C . W ^ 1 # W F ^ : (C.TtqlfegR): c. A.B.C.D.:^a=h'+Rlfii;ic^l (D.ft?T?Tr:;)
D. 4^=1'1 d. B2.?Hl4. A.B.TTgT^:
350 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.56

SpeciHcations o f the gati-s o f M e r c u r y

54. F r o m setting t o r i s i n g t h e degrees a n d days a r e g i v e n by t h e f o u r t h gati.
F r o m r i s i n g to vakra ( b e g i n n i n g ) is (given by) t h e first gati. T h e t h i r d gati is
(from) anuvakra (i.e., e n d o f r e t r o g r e s s i o n ) to setting.

It will be seen that this verse explains what the (our gati-s indicate a fact which has not been men-
tioned earlier. Actually, there is no direct reference to the second gati. B u t it can be inferred that
this gives the retrogression period and the degrees.

T S have made some emendations but have not translated them but say that they are not able to
comprehend the meaning of these verses. N P have adopted the emendations of T S and have just
translated them as they are and that does not make any sense. T h e y comment: "We cannot connect
any rational procedure with the verses X V I I , 54-56".

5 5 . B y t h e square o f the d i f f e r e n c e i n gati-s (days) m u l t i p l y t h e degrees a n d

d i v i d e b y t h e square o f t h e gati-s. T h e result is to be subtracted f r o m the
degrees a n d that gives the degrees g o n e i n the first g-ai? a n d i n the s e c o n d h a l f
o f vakra-gati.

56. I n t h e first h a l f o f vakra-gati a n d i n t h e t h i r d gati m u l t i p l y t h e square (of

the days passed) b y t h e degrees a n d d i v i d e by t h e square o f the gati-s (days).
F o r t h e f o u r t h gati t h e r e s u l t is o b t a i n e d b y (direct) p r o p o r t i o n [since the
m o t i o n i n this section is p r a c t i c a l l y u n i f o r m . ]

54a. A.aiSt; D.arait. A . B . C . t R O T J , 55a. B.ttT?T

b. A.B.C.D.fs^HagsS^Tcm occurs as c. T h e y
have as b , ^ W ^ r a m (A.B.'+MiS!!)
WiifeFRp^(A.B.TRflig, D.^Tcft^)
d. A . B . C . D . 3 ? ^ l 3 W 5 I # T % ( ^ ( A . % a ? ^
B . % ^ ) .
c. B . ^
d. A.TTT^. A.^SiqaiSJ; B.^sCTSM;.
56a. A.=l'lf*J|d1; B.-M*J|d1
b. A.C.Tlc^fl^; D . w g
A.-^^; B.cT^. C.-^pmi D. [^Id<j.ld jfuicl:]
c. A.B.^Tf?1ff?T(B.a#). B l . ' q ^ ; B 2 . 3 . ^
d. D . ^ 9 ^ . A.B.?WHt ( B 2 . 3 . ^ )
XVIII.58 XVIII. V A S I S T H A - P A U U S A - RISING A N D SETTING 351

Correction for mean elongation i n heliacal rising

5 7 . F i n d the R sine o f the latitude o f the b o d y . M u l t i p l y the ( m a x i m u m ) half-

cara (i.e. the h a l f d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n the h a l f d a y - t i m e o r n i g h t - d m e f r o m 15
(nddis.) i n vinddis, by this R sine, a n d d i v i d e by 4 8 0 . A d d this o r subtract this
(to o r f r o m the M o o n o r star-planet) i f the latitude is n o r t h o r south, a c c o r d i n g
to the p r o p e r d i r e c t i o n , (i.e. a c c o r d i n g as the p h e n o m e n o n o f setting o r rising,
takes place i n the west o r east, respectively).

58a-b. W h e n "this is d o n e , t h e i r setting o r r i s i n g h a p p e n s a c c o r d i n g to the

i n t e r v a l i n degrees (between the S u n , a n d the p l a n e t g i v e n i n X V I I . 12, o r the
Moon).

Note 1. There is a lot of lacunae i n verse 57. T h e \i-d\i-cara-vina4is meant is the m a x i m u m for the
place, yathdkaksam is meaningless here and is corrected intoyathdkdstham, i.e. according to the direc-
tion, but the direcdon is not mentioned. If north latitude, the addition is for the M o o n or planet in
the west. Also i f north latitude, the subtraction from the M o o n or star planet is to be done for the
east. If south latitude, the subtracdon is for the west, and the addition for the east. These things can
be got by a little reflection.

Note 2. T h e amount of degrees to be applied can simply be got by multiplying the degrees o f
latitude of the body by the tangent of the latitude of the place. (The equinoctial mid-day shadow
of the 12" gnomon 12, is tan. latitude o f a place). T h e amount got is very rough.

T h e degrees wanted = Sin. half cara (i.e., tan latitude o f place x tan. declination o f the Sun) X
sin (90 - angle for heliacal rising), nearly. T h e last term is neglected here, tan declination is
roughly taken as 4 8 ' , half-cara is converted into degrees by division by 10, and the conversion into
sine-function is applied to the latitude of the planet instead of the half-cara, as roughly equal.

Note 3. This application is what is technically called Aksa-drkkarma. T h e Ayana-drkkarma is

neglected.

Note 4. T h e heliacal rising of the M o o n , and of Venus and Mercury when retrograde, takfes place
in the west. T h e heliacal setting o f the M o o n and retrograde Venus and retrograde Mercury takes
place i n the east. Otherwise, all star-planets set i n the west and rise i n the east. (This Siddhdnta does
not envisage the setting or rising of Venus and Mercury when retrograde, no separate degree for
-hat being given).

57a. B1.3.^iqi1^lfarfKr d. A . t R ; B.^m". C . ^ . D . [ ^ ^ ]

b. A B . ^ ^ A . ^ ; B . ^ A.B.C.D.l^WI#^:
(B2.^fiMf^)mi^ B.tqo
c. A.^imif^. A . ^

m
352 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.60

58c-d. T h e setting a n d r i s i n g ( m e n t i o n e d above i n verse 58a) is by 12, 14,

12, 15, 8 a n d 15 f o r the M o o n etc.
Note 1. This has to be taken with verse 58a. T h e degrees given here separately are according to
the Vdsistha-Paulisa, which do not instruct the correction due to the latitude of the planet or for
even the latitude of place (dksa-valana). T h e result will therefore be very rough.

Note 2. These degrees are necessarily arbitrary as mentioned already, and the correctness of the
numbers cannot be verified i n the absence of the ovi^naX siddhdntas which are now lost. B u t we can
guess the probable values as we are sure of the relative luminosities of the planets. T h e numbers
seem to have been misplaced. T h e y should he dvddasa, tithi, manu, ravi, asta, tithi (12, 15, 14
8, 15 for M o o n etc.) A l l siddhantas give 17 for Mars instead of 15. T h e rest are nearly correctly
given, according to one siddhdnta or other.

d c s y i v i * M m u i i ^ < i i l 5 ^ ^ g r a n ? ; || w< \
Conversion of time-degrees into distance-degrees
59. M u l t i p l y the degrees by 3 0 0 a n d d i v i d e by the vinddis o f o b l i q u e ascen-
s i o n a l d i f f e r e n c e o f the sign, r i s i n g at that m o m e n t , (near sunset o r sunrise,
as the case m a y be), a n d get the respective degrees. W h e n the distance bet-
w e e n the s u n a n d p l a n e t is that m u c h , the respective setting o r r i s i n g takes
place.

Note 1. This work is what is known as the conversion o f time-degrees {kdlabhdga) into degrees o
distance on the ecliptic (ksetrabhdga). Since the rule has to apply commonly to Saura on the one han
and the Vdsistha-Paulisa on the other, it has been placed last.

Note 2. Since the positions of the Sun, M o o n and planets are given only on the ecliptic, this con-
version is necessary to measure distances.

^TTc^i^^MKI^VimMId II I

6 0 . ( T h e r i s i n g takes place i n the east w h e n ) M e r c u r y , V e n u s , M a r s , J u p i t e r

a n d S a t u r n are less i n l o n g i t u d e t h a n the S u n , a n d the S u n is less t h a n the
M o o n i n the opposite d i r e c t i o n , (i.e., west). M a k i n g the c o m p u t a t i o n a c c o r d i n g
to the i n s t r u c t i o n g i v e n above u s i n g the l a t i t u d e etc, the p h e n o m e n o n s h o u l d
be p r e d i c t e d .

60a, A,B,C,MlchTHI:
59a, A , t W ; B , ^ ^ . B . f e l ^ b. A.B.a^l'^llHI; C.^amT^; D . [ W T U ]
b. A, *=I<^HI^1; B , ac;:|His1' B.WFRT^
XVIII.63 XVIII. VASISTHA-PAL'LI.'^A-RISING AND SF.ITING 3.53

Note. T h e verse is very corrupt. But knowing what it is aboiit we can give tlic meaning, making
possible corrections. T h e rising is mentioned here as it is more important for application lodhnnua-
sdstra etc. But rising also envisages setting with the word 'less' taken for'more', and inorc' I'or'less'.

Example 1. The latitude of the moon is 3 45' N. The maximum half-cara of the place is 150 vinddis. The
oblique ascensional difference of the rising sign is 280 vinddis near sunset. Find the ecliptic distance betw
the Sun and Moon, for the heliacal rising of the Moon.

T h e time-degrees for the moon is 12. T h e heliacal rising of the M o o n lakes place in the evening.
R sin 3 4 5 ' x 150-^480 = 7 38/60 X 150 ^ 480 = 2 23''.

This is additive since the Moon's latitude is north, and the phenomena pertains to the west.
Therefore, the corrected time-degrees = 14.

14 X 300 -i- 280 = 15 is the distance on the ecliptic between the Sun and the M o o n , required.

Example 2. For the same place, (i.e., max. half-cara 150 vinddis) find the ecliptic distance required fo
heliacal rising, given: the latitude of Mars 1 15' N, and the oblique ascensional difference near sunrise at th
time is 330 vinddis.
T h e latitude correction to the time degrees (17 for Mars) = R sin 1 15' X 150 ^ 480 = 2' 33 "
X 150 480 taken as degrees = 48'.

As the latitude is north, and the phenomenon pertains to the east, (since it is the rising o f Mars
that is considered), it is subtractive.

.-. 1 7 - 4 8 ' = 16 12'is the corrected time-degrees. 16 12' X 300-^-330= 14 44', is the distance
on the ecliptic required.

M^y"ii(Mdd^ ^ ( % ) (^srf^)vJiimR<f>t^
^ ( w r a t ) [ c ? n ? : ] ^ d f M < n r r T r ^ II

1 1 ^ ^ II
6 1 . F o r the g o o d o f his disciples, V a r a h a m i h i r a , Joelonging to the A v a n t i
c o u n t r y (Ujjain region), wrote this section d e a l i n g w i t h the star-planets, briefly
but w i t h the constants a g r e e i n g w i t h the o r i g i n a l {siddhdntas).
62. A l e a r n e r , d i s c o u r a g e d b y the c o m p u t a t i o n o f M a r s by the a s t r o n o m e r
P r a d y u m n a , the c o m p u t a t i o n o f J u p i t e r a c c o r d i n g to the Saura siddhanta, a n d
354 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.63

the c o m p u l a t i o n o f M e r c u r y by V i j a y a n a n d i , c a n have recourse to this section

o f the m a n u a l .
63. B y V a r a h a m i h i r a has been seen, (i.e., written) (this karana) easy to u n d e r -
stand,

Note 1. Verses 61 and 62 clearly close the section dealing with the star-planets. Since V M says that
he has improved on the earlier authors, he must be referring to Chapter X V I and X V I I , dealing
with the Saura. His reference to his improvement on the Saura itself in the case of Jupiter must
refer to the btja correction made by h i m in X V I . Indeed, his dissatisfaction with the Jupiter of the
Saura is reflected i n his formula for computing Jupiter to give the years of the sixty-year Jovian
cycle, given i n his Brhatsarnhitd, i n the chapter dealing with the motion of Brhaspati (Jupiter). As
for chap. X V I I I , he could not have meant the Vdsistha-Paulisa star-planets there as an improve-
ment, they being crude.

Note 2. Verse 63 evidently closes the Pdncasiddhdntikd, as indicated by the Vasantatilakd metre o
the verse instead of the regular dryd metre. B u t unfortunately the last three feet are missing.
Perhaps it is a purposely done 'black-out' by a later astronomer-scribe, to add his spurious verses
64-81 i n condnuation (see below) and, unfortunately, only his manuscript has survived as the
archetype of the few extant manuscripts.

d. C . M ^ e f i l i o m . ^ . A . B . W ;
61a. B.3Tra^:^aJTWr:
D. drops the word.
b. A.fecq^o. B . M s ^ H " ; B 2 . 3 . f e ^ 1 ?
63a. A.B.C.ft?toT. B.^rat^n
A.B.sldH^'l^; C . ^ [TO]
b-d. A . B . C . gap indicated for the three
D.J [f^q^TRgst?!^]
quarters of the verse.
c. A.B.fe
D. Ignores the expression y<sinJl^
62a. A.3I?ra. B.gpT in this verse and constitutes a new
b. A.B.^(B3.4t%) half verse for the previous verse,
a s : ^ *TJf: ^ f H < 'T5if!r?;5
A . ^l^c||cfNijC; B . ^ ^ J p f ^ c(<l^ftR>l II In consequence, the
numbering of verses than in A is one
c-d. A . ^ ^ ^ T O R f S ; B . f ^ ^ ^ T O R J J ; D . ^ R T : less in D, hereforward.

Thus ends Chapter Eighteen entitled '(Vasistha-) Paulisa-Siddhanta

- Rising and Setting of Planets', in the Pancasiddhantika composed
by Varahamihira
 Chapter Eighteen 64-81 (A Spurious Supplement)
Computation of the Star-Planets in brief

Spuriousness of this Section

That verses 64-81 of Pdnrosiddhdntikd form only an appendage to a manuscript of the work and
not a composition of Varahamihira, is evident from its occurring after the work has closed in the
customary way with a concluding colophonic verse, with its metre changed to Vasantatilakd from
the dryd metre in which all the previous verses of the chapter had been couched, and with the author
speaking about himself in this concluding verse. It is also to be noted that the set of verse 64 to 81
begin with a new salutation. H a d these verses really belonged to the PS. the customary colophonic
verse must have come at their end, and significantly there is no such colophonic verses at the end.
Further, in verse 6.5 it is said that the author considers this as a superior set containing a previous
method or matter and thathe was giving it out, with a liberal mind, to the generality of astronomers
without hiding it from them. But actually it is inferior stuff, and can give only very rough results
since the equation of the centre is dispensed with, only the equadon of conjuncdon being given,
which makes it valueless. T h e author boasts here that he has made things easy, and takes credit for
this which only a novice could have done. Fancy V M speaking thus, when in verse 62 he is so intent
on accuracy that he says. "Let people who have been dissatisfied with the inaccuracy of astronomers
like Pradyumna, Vijayanandi etc., have recourse to his treatment of the Saura." Further, there are
mistakes in the computation of Venus and Mercury, unpardonable in any astronomer. (See below,
Note 2 under verses 70-72). T h e above-mentioned aspects of verses 64-8) have escaped the nonce
both of T S and N P , who both take them as genuine compositions of V M . Moreover, N P obliterate
verse 63, the concluding genuine verse oiPS. by not including it in their text, though a few words
thereof are present in all the manuscripts of the work and in some of the manuscripts it bears a
serial number; thus, verses 64 to 81 are numbered in N P as 63 to 80.

These spurious verses are dealt with below for the sake of completeness of the text as found in
the parent manuscript of the PS from which all its manuscripts available now have been derived.

Salutation
64. S a l u t a t i o n to the g o o d p e o p l e , ever interested i n the welfare o f others,
w h o e v e n w h e n k n o w i n g the faults o f others, a n d e v e n w h e n t h e r e is a n
o p p o r t u n i t y , d o not m e n t i o n t h e i r faults, b u t p r o c l a i m t h e i r g o o d qualities.
356 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.66

6 5 . In e i g h t e e n arya verses, V a r a h a m i h i r a , w i t h o u t feeUng any j e a l o u s y ,

gives this i n a n u a l to the w o r l d , e n d i n g w i t h the t r e a t m e n t o f the planets,
t h i n k i n g that it is g o o d .

Note 1. T h e emendations are TS's also.

Note 2. Verse 64 is a paranomasia and means also, "Salutation to the good science of astronomy
called technically parahita-ganita (prevalent i n Kerala i n South India), which at the beginning deals
only with mean motions, though knowing its defective nature as not being true motions, and which
furpisjies tabular values o f equations going by the means, mandajyd (R sine table of the equation of
the centre), karkijyd (R sine table of the equation of conjunction for the anomaly 90 to 270) and
makarajyd (R sine table of the equation of conjunction for the anomaly 270 to 90)."

T h i s meaning being not obvious to the ordinary reader, I give the phrase by phrase meaning:

prastdve (granthdrambhe), paroksasya (asphutagrahasya) dosdn (asphuiatvddi-dosdn) jdnann a

pakti (jdnann api na vadati, madhyagater eva prakrtatvdt) gundn (mandajyd, karkijyd, makarajy
gunasabda-vdcyd jydh) prathayati (prakatikaroti, gariayitvd likhatitt ydvat), tasmai sujandya
sobhanajanmane) parahitdya (parahitaganitdya) namah (namo 'stu).

Note 3. These two verses also form part of the 18 verses mentioned. So, actually there are only 16
verses (66 to 81), giving the computation.

'Sun's day' (Sauradina)

6 6 . F r o m the e p o c h , to t h e time o f c o m p u t a t i o n o f the p l a n e t , find the Sun's

degrees passed. T h e s e are to be t e c h n i c a l l y c a l l e d 'days', ( a n d u s e d i n the c o m -
p u t a t i o n ) . F i n d the r e m a i n d e r after d i v i d i n g by the cycle n u m b e r g i v e n f o r
the respective star-planet. T a k e the 'days' o f m o t i o n c o r r e s p o n d i n g to the set
o f m o t i o n s g i v e n to the respective p l a n e t . T h e s e are degrees o f plarietary
m o t i o n . A d d this to the S u n ' s l o n g i t u d e . T h e t r u e p l a n e t is got.

Note 1. T h e days' mentioned here is only what is called sauradina ('Sun's day') as distinguished
from the sdvana or civil day, and are actually degrees. (This is like the word 'light-year', which is
used as a unit of distance), T h i s instruction is given with respect to all planets.

64a. A . B . ^ : c. A.^Tr#T?^Tr?ftt|% (A2.ftf?r?^);

h. A . - ^ H t I I P j ^ ; B.-^HHIPm ( B . ^ ) .
A.^a^ d. B.fro^R:
c. B.^Wlf?T. A.TiynacR^; B.'iUIIW^
66b. A.f53^a<iifi*i;B.Rt|yia!^l<+)l
tl. A.^gSRWTO; B . ^ g ^ T O . B.MRr^cii^i
B.atrof
65a. A . ^ ; B.^rf c. A . B. ^ 5 I ^
b. B.^raif^: d. A.B.g35iq
XVIII.69 XVIII. SI AR-PLANF.TS

Note 2. T h e cycle given for each planet is only the period of the planet's synodic revolution con-
verted into the solar days, i.e., it is the synodic period X 360 365-15-30, nearly. W h e n so con-
verted, we have:

Mercury Venus Mars Jup- Saturn

The regular synodic days: 115-52-45 583-55 779-57 398-53 378-6
Converted into solar days: 114 6/29 5751/2 768-45 393 1/7 372 2/3

The second set is given for the respective planet, saying that the synodic period is so many 'days'.
Not knowing this T S have remarked that they do not understand why there is so much difference
in the periods from the regular days generally known. Also, they say they carmot dismiss them as
wrong, since the numbers given are checked in the computation itself. (See pages Ixm-lx/t' of Intro-
duction in TS's edition).

N P have understood that the cycles are i n solar 'days'. But, they have remarked that ' V M ' has con-
fused the days and degrees, not realising that there is a purpose in giving the cycles i n the solar day
units. These units have been used because, now, the 'days' and the 'degrees' will have the same
meaning, and they can be combined without, at every point, instructing it. T h u s , ultimately, the
combined value is the degrees of the true planet.
Example 1. Days from epoch 1,20,553. Find the 'days', and assuming the Sun at epoch as zero, find the Su
at the end of 1,20,553 days.

1,20,.553 X 360 ^ 365-15-30= 1,18,187.5'days'.

This plus zero, and divided out by 360 = 17.5, Sun's longitude.

[ITSI^:]

Motion of Mars

67. S u b t r a c t 6 3 2 9 f r o m the 'days'. M u l t i p l y the r e m a i n d e r by 4 a n d d i v i d e out

jby
b
6
(i.e.,
56
u8
enh
-c3
'days'
6it09
nithe
7.o
d5nA
by
. (i.e.,
lags
T
fhta6
ekrl0iea56
15
the
,cthe
6a'days'
0lbasetting
ern
, eh9om
i0m
nit
aad,ilgoes
5ny
a0dends).
noed,fr 7
bgoes
conj.)
a0enhdi,Innrespectively.
didnifv188,
to
the
oirdceM
o
Sbn
au
108,
yrjnsu4.
.by
n cT73,
T
t 15,
iho
henes6.ena8nare
,itd220,
sets
becomes
theheliacally,
'days'
'days'observable,
M
after
a rasncdlags
on
i n-
358 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIIL69

Note 1. I generally agree with TS's emendations. B u t i n verse 68,1 give sadvisayaih for sadtrinLsat
savaih. which latter is both meaningless and has one-mdtrd extra. TS'ssadvargaih does not agree with
the last saptdsiakena, for the numbers should agree or at least nearly agree, saptatyd dvyadhikayd h
been emended by me into saptatyd tradhikayd, and khdbdhi into khdsvi. These will not only make t
total correct, but also bring about agreement with the Siddhdntas, which all generally agree with the
actual as given by modern astronomy.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Total

Degrees - 15 - 60 - 60 - 90 - 50 - 70 - 15 - 360
moving asta.. vakra asta.
behind
'Days' given 56 188 108 73 68 220 56 769
Actual 'days' 54 188 106 72 75 220 54 769

T h e great difference i n 'days' between the 68 given and 75 actual must be explained by their
following next to the retrograde period, where even a large number of days can produce a very
small difference in degrees. So, correction to whole degrees can produce this difference in days.

Note 2. Verse 67 means that 6329 'days' after epoch, there is conjunction, which repeats after
each synodic cycle. T h e cycle for Mars is 7 6 8 % 'days'. So instead of dividing by 7 6 8 % , we are asked
to multiply by 4 and divide by 3075. T o get back the true remainder, the remainder here is divided
by 4.

Note 3. T h e following points deserve to be noted;

(a) I n the case of all star-planets the total 'days' should be equal to the days o f the respective
cycle.

(b) In the case of the superior planets, viz. Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, the degrees are all negative
and add upto 360. W h e n the given degrees is numerically greater than the corresponding
'days', (for e.g., - 90 for 73 'days' here) the planet is retrograde.

(c) T h e heliacal setting and rising are at the beginning and end of the cycle for all. But, for the
two inferior planets, viz. Mercury and Venus, there is another setting and rising at inferior conjunc-
tion when the two are retrograde.

67a. A . ! P ^ ; B.<mq-yil^
d. A.B.'^Mrycb|A||
b. A . f ^ ; B.fcflf^. B . f s ^ .
B.^ki^rfl 69a. A.^?3te; B . ^
c. A . B . ' J T l ? ^ . B . ' ^ f ^ a-b. A.'HcT^; B.'HWci
d. A . M ^ ; B . M h 1 ^ ; . B 3 . H ^ 1 ^ ^ I b. A . B . C . D . ^ i a r f s ^ : (B.-f^l^:)
68a. A.%B(<^^RdJ^; B.M^Iel^Rdaiq^; A.B1.2.Wirc;yi:; C . D . ^ f ^ :
CI-^cI'lRd*^; D.N4R!^lRdT?TI c. B3.3?Mft(Tl
b. B . 5 ? l . A . B . ' j f ^ i O T J T ^ : (B."^^:) c-d. B . W ^
C. A . ^ T ^ T ^ ^ : d. A.B.fwmfH:; C . D . M ? n # :
XVIII.72 XVIII. STAR-PLANETS 359

(d) T h e rising and setting are given by observation at different regions and different conditions
of the atmosphere, and therefore vary among the siddhdntas.

(e) In the case of the inferior planets the degrees should add upto zero. W h e n the degrees are
positive and greater than the days, the planet is gaining upon the Sun, and the total gain is its elon-
gation. W h e n the degrees are less than the 'days', the planet is lagging behind. W h e n the degrees
are negative and numerically greater than the 'days', the planet is retrograde and comes at the
middle o f the cycle, i f the cycle begins and ends at superior conjunction.

Example 2. Compute Mars at 1,20,553 days from epoch.

T h e solar days are, 1,20,553 X 360 -r- 365-15-30 = 1,18,817.5, and the Sun is 17.5, taking the
sun at epoch as zero, which it nearly is as already shown.

1,18,817.5 - 6329 = 1,12,488.5

1,12,488.5 x 4 3075 leaves the remainder 1004.
1004-r 4 = 251, real remainder of'days'.
D u r i n g this period we get the movement: - 15 in 56 'days', - 60 i n 188 'days', and - 4 for the
7 'days' remaining, total - 79.

A d d i n g - 79 to the Sun, 17.5, T r u e Mars = 298.5.

jpichK^^ HcJMI'^^iP Vndiii>|4,?(^ ||V9o I

Motion of Mercury
70. S u b t r a c t 14,681 f r o m the 'days'. M u l t i p l y the r e m a i n d e r by 29, a n d d i v i d e
o u t b y 3 3 1 2 . T a k e the r e m a i n d e r a n d d i v i d e by 2 9 . T h e 'days' f o r M e r c u r y i n
the cycle is got.

70a. A.ft^lftr. A . B . 7 % ; D . 71a. A.cJ?lf^. A . B . # n :

b. A.B.1.2.HclHctJjiJ|^. A.S.1.2.TPfm% b. A.^nPlPTFWaRTT:; B.T^=Tmte=raat?TT:;
c. A.B.^ CR^Cf^^l^^aWT:]; D . ^ [f^T^WaWTI:]
c-d. B1.2.^TPT-gap-c)RJ; c. A . T R ^ ; B . f ^ : - g a p - ^ ; D . [f^T*#]
B3. ^i;if?I- gap^cii^ d. A . ^ . A . B . W r a : (B.W:);
C. [ ^ f : ] ; D . [ ^ W T I : ]
360 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.72

71. I n 10 'days' M e r c u r y falls back b y 12, a n d rises i n the east. I n 14 'days'

m o r e it lags by 9 . T h e n i n 18 'days' it gains 9 . T h e n it sets, a n d i n 30 'days'
gains 2 5 a n d rises heliacally.

72. T h e n i n 18 'days' it gains 9. I n 16 'days' it lags 12, a n d sets i n the west.

T h e n i n 8 'days' i t lags 9 , a n d gets i n t o c o n j u n c t i o n .

Note 1. I n verses 71 and 72 my corrections are based on the need to conform as nearly a possible
to reality, and they are also, as far as possible, kept close to the text, sardsvih, 25, may also hejaldsvih,
24. T h e values are:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Total

Given degrees - 12 - 9 + 9 + 25 + 9 - 12 - 9 0
(? + 24)
vakrasta vakra asta vakra vakrasta
Given 'days' 10 14 18 30 18 16 8 114
Correct 'days' 8 16 18 30(?28) 18 18 6(?8) 114

In columns 6 and 7 it should be - 9 and - 12, or adeast - 10 - 11 though the text letters are
unmistakable.
Note 2. T h e constant for subtracdon, 14,681 shows that the planet is i n superior conjunction,
since the epoch position of the planet must agree with that given by modern astronomy and other
siddhantas, atleast within a few degrees. (See table appended). If so, the Table of cycle motions given
should begin and close with superior conjunction. B u t i n the Table given, the cycle begins and
closes with the inferior conj. as can be seen from the retrograde motion with which the Table begins
and ends, and the most rapid motion (aticdra) coming at the middle.

T h e astronomer o f very inferior calibre who has made this interpolation, has been misled by the
two sets o f heliacal rising and setting i n the case of the inferior planets. Mercury and Venus. H e has
wanted to begin the motions with the rising i n the east and setting i n the west, to fall i n line with
others, not realising that this occurs d u r i n g its retrograde motion which falls at inferior conjunction
coming i n the middle. T h i s is another proof that V M cannot be the author of this set of dealing with
the star-planets. (This author has committed the same mistake i n the similar case of Venus, where
the jnistake can be seen glaringly when the true Venus got is compared with that o f the other
siddhdntas or modern astronomy). I f he does want to begin with rising in the east and end with set-
ting i n the west, he must begin and end his cycle table with the inferior conj. and to this he must
add to the days to be subtracted half the cycle days, equal to 57 3/29 days. (The cycle days = 3312-
- 29 = 114 6/29).

72a. A.315[Rf^:^; B.315TS:?Tfil:q^:;

b. A.B.C.D.^te^lf^aiS^i^
d. A.ITOT; B.1TOT. A.C.D.1#T^
XVIII.75 W i l l . STAR-PLANKIS

Motion of Jupiter

73. D e d u c t 16,552 f r o m the 'days'. M u l t i p l y the r e m a i n d e r by 7 a n d d i v i d e by

2 7 5 2 . D i v i d e t h e r e m a i n d e r h e r e by 7. T h e 'days' f r o m c o n j u n c t i o n a r e got.
74-75. A H degrees g i v e n are to be s u b t r a c t e d f r o m t h e s u n . I n 16 'days' it
moves 12 a n d rises i n t h e east. T h e n i n 54, 70, 4 9 , 88, 4 0 days it moves 4 4 ,
64, 120, 7 6 , 3 2 . T h e n it sets i n the west, moves 12 i n 16 days a n d joins the
Sun.

Note 1. T h e first foot of verse 73 is faulty containing 3 mdtrds extra, and corrupt. So it has been
corrected. T h e rest o f verses 73 and 74 are TS's emendations. I n 75, all emendations are TS's,
excepting those for grammar.

Note 2. T h e cycle is 2752 ^ 7 = 393 1/7 days. T h e days and degrees are:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Total

Degrees - ]'2 - 44 - 64 - 120 - 76 - 32 - 12 - 360

asta vakra asta
Given days 16 54 70 109 88 40 16 393
Near correct'days" 16 54 70 109 88 40 16 393

73a. A.B.C.Tf?%5gf|; D . T ^ ^ o c. B . Hapl.om.of+dftt^^:

A.B.C.D."?RlfEfT: d. C . D . ' ^ l M ^ ^ :
b. A . m B . f | ^ A . ^ ^ ^ ( A 2 . a ) 75a. B . ^ t ^ :
Tif^f ( A i . ^ ) B.fsmgnft?^ a-b. A.B.C.D.^J'?rafeRteT(B.*gI'=)
c. A . B . ' g ^ b. A.B.C.Wrarf^:; D . W # F :
d. A.R)<WM1I:; B.fttWTTr; C . [ftt?tT:] c. A.B.ff?tlf
D. [fWTFT] d. A . B . ^ ( A 2 . 3 ; B l . 2 . ^ )
A.wn ( B l . 2 . ^ B3.?n)
74a. A.^51%ig; B . ^ H i ^
A.?TP^T^ifg; B.?nf^1^;
b. A.5n^
c.D.^*r^
362 P A N C A S I D U H A N 1 IKA XVIII.78

'c<^^^r *f?f(8Z[jT:)' '<^dira[^:'^(M^cblR?ivlrt) ||V9V9

^6

Motion of Venus

76. D e d u c t 1,18,122 f r o m the 'days'. M u l d p l y by 2 a n d d i v i d e by 1151. T a k e

the r e m a i n d e r a n d d i v i d e by 2. W e have the 'days' f r o m the c o n j u n c t i o n o f
Venus.

77-78. I n 5 'days' V e n u s lags by 9, a n d rises i n the east. I n 15 days it lags 21 .

I n 64 days it lags 15. I n 164 days it gains by 3.5. T h e n it sets i n the east. T h e n
i n 4 0 days it gains 10, a n d j o i n s the S i m . T h e n , m o v i n g i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
the r e v e r s e d o r d e r o f the days for cycles g i v e n , it rises, after the days given
f r o m setting to c o n j u n c t i o n (i.e., 4 0 days), i n the west, a n d moves till it reaches
the setting i n r e t r o g r a d e ( a n d g e t t i n g i n t o the i n f e r i o r c o n j u n c t i o n ) section.

Nnte 1. I have correctedTOU!"nf/uinto dhrtfndu for agreement with the Sun in superior conjunction
which alone fits. TS's correction (also NP's) mahindu does not bring agreement with the Sun either
at superior conj. or inferior conj. There can be another possible correction matindu (mati is 8). In
the 64 days, flanking the retrograde, the days may be a little more or less, since a small error of
observation can produce a difference of a large number of days. T h e lacunae is filled by me with
sapancakmtrirmat, meaning 35, to fit the number of degrees wanted to make up the total zero, and
fitdng the number of days given. TS's emendation, krtdstabhih will be far from fitting the total.

76a. A.B.^ftf!t^; C . D . ^ ^ ^ R f ^ 78a. A.B.C.^(B.^)B5^^B^(B.^);

b. A.B.^^;^:^^(B2.r)%
C. A I . ^ T : . Al.<Mx1<fdd; B.-^+I^Rid b. A.RWdldl; B.P)<^ldld"1
d. B.^^: c. A.H^^fctfs^ftt?]^^;
B.H^'ifMfelf^TTW^
77a. B3.^:ig^
c-d. C.3?^!%f=R?mcH,^;
b. A.B.1%f8^3m ( B . ^ ) #T;
c. A.f?rs^
d. A . B . ^ (B.raf?T) W
d. A . B . f|[f^:^, rest of verse missing:
A . B . f ^ n # : ; D. [1^=7nTT]"fTf?T:
D . ^ : f ^ (t] M ^ : ^
C.f^: [^g,<W'ld:]; D.f^: [^aWWT:]
XVIII.79 XVIII. STAR-PLANETS 363

Moreover, their filling the lacuna by sesuh, meaning 5 is quite inadequate to make up zero. I have
emended sastdslakena into pancdstakena, meaning 5 x 8 = 40, which will fit the number ot days.
Also, 10 synodic motion there requires 40 days and it is also the period from setting to going into
superior conjunction, sasta is patently wrong spelling, and sastdslakena is meaningless. But T S and
N P keep it, which is wrong. That this is the segment of heliacal setting to conj. can be inferred from
vdayati given for the next segment, and 10 for heliacal setting and rising at superior conj. is given
by many siddhdntas. T h e other minor emendations are TS's.

Note 2. 1,18,122 seems to be a very large subtractive constant, equal to more than 300 years, while
all others are very near V M ' s time. But I cannot think of any other number to fit.
Note 3. T h e maximum elongadon is seen to be 45, correcdy. (Cf. Table).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 lota!

Degrees passed - 9 - 21 - 15 + 35 -1- 10 + 10 -1- 35 - 15 - 21 - 9 0

vakrasta vakra asta asta asta vakrasta
Given days 5 15 64 164 40 40 164 64 15 5 576
Correct days 5 15 64 164 40 40 164 64 15 5 576

Note 4. T h e remark about Mercury, that the cycles begin and end with the superior conjuncdon
according to the subtractive constant given, but the motions in the cycles begin and end with the
inferior conjunction, holds in the case of Venus also, showing thereby that the author is an ignorant
imposter, and cannot be V M . T o correct the fault, 2 8 7 % 'days' should be added or subtracted from
the subtractive constant.

Example 3. Compute Venus at 1,20,553 days from epoch.

If the subtracdve constant given i n t h e text is used, 1,18,817.5 (already found in the example in
M a r s ) - 1,18,122 = 695.5.

This X 2 1151 leaves the remainder 240.

This divided by 2 gives 120 'days' gone i n the cycle. W e have for the first 5 days 9, and the next
I S d a y s - 21 and the next 64 days - 15 and the remaining 36 days, 36 X 35 ^ 164 = 7 40', totally
37 20'. A d d i n g the Sun 17.5 already found i n the example for Mars, the true longitude of
Venus is - 20, i.e. 340. (The example i n the Saurasiddhdnta for the same date has given 46.)

T h e error in Venus, in using this method here, is 66. O n the other hand, let us use the cycle
order re-arranged to begin from superior conjunction. It is 10 for 40 days, 35 for 164 days etc. We
have 10 for 40 days, and for the remaining 80 days, 80 x 35 164 = 17, total 27. A d d i n g the Sun,
17.5, we have, true Venus, 44.5. T h i s is close to the correct 46. T h i s exposes the ignorance of the
imposter.

[VlPl^d:]
364 PANCASIDDHANTIKA XVIII.81

Motion of Saturn
79. S u b t r a c t 16,518 f r o m the 'days', m u l d p l y by 3 a n d d i v i d e by 1118. T a k e
the r e m a i n d e r h e r e a n d d i v i d e by 3. T h e days left o v e r i n the cycle are got. I n
18 days S a t u r n lags b e h i n d by 16 V2, a n d rises i n the east.

8 0 - 8 1 . I n 9 8 , 14, 113, 98, a n d 13 'days', it falls b e h i n d 9 0 V 2 , 13, 120, 9 1 ,

a n d 12V2, respectively. T h e n S a t u r n sets i n the west, a n d j o i n s the S u n
p a s s i n g 16 V2 i n 19 days.
Note 1. In verse 79, satkavarka is patently extra, forming syllables not required for the foot, and
has been deleted by me as also by T S . astdbhih is corrected into astih by me, as also by T S , to conform
to grammar and facts. In the rest of the m i n o r corrections there is no difference between our
corrections.

In verse 80, I have retained the dvi i n dvyunena, while T S have made it dyu, meaning one day,
which is not necessary, and which leads into trouble later, needing further correction. T h e minor
correcdons are common to both. In 81, I have filled up the lacuna by {tyd sdrdha), while T S have
made it {tibhirardhd). T h e word is atijagati, and not atijagatih, which alone can justify TS's tib
Also, only sdrdhdrka can mean 12 V 2 , but their ardhdrka can mean only 6.1 have corrected navati int
navaku keeping the nava. But T S have corrected it into atidhrti, making unnecessary changes in the
lettering, though both of us mean the same. The rest of the corrections are minor, and are acceptable.

79a. A . B . C . T m H ^ ^ ( B . ^ ) ? R T I ^ 81a. Al.WT^

b. B.^Hl^dlPJI (B3.1w) a-b. A.1.3.^feT(B.^)^?Wt(B3.^);
c. A.^^lkFt. A . B . t ^ f w i f ^ (B1.2.fr:) C.<44HWi^c^dl; D . [ ^ W # r e T ^ ]
d. A . C . ^ # ; B.^arej%; D . W l f ^ b. Al.B.Hc|fd(^l^i!^'l;
80a. A . l ^ i f ^ ^ o ; C.D.^T^rfri^: C.5f!Tp%TJ?; D . ^ [ ^ ] M % F I

b. A l . B . C . D . 1 ^ : c. A l . ' f f l ^ i y k ; B.^araJ^k
c. B2.^?J=iRif d. A1.T%:

d. C D . [ ^ ] ; Ms. A 2 . breaks off here.

Al.TTlf?!
XVIII.81 X V l l l . SIAR-HIANETS 365

Note 2. T h e ioUowiiig is ihe table of motions:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Total

Degrees passed - 16'/2 - 90 ' / 2 - 13 - 120 - 91 - 12'/2 - 161/2 - 360

(ista. vakra asta
Given days 18 98 14 113 98 13 19 373
Correct days 18 98 14 113 98 13 1/2 181/2 373

Note 3. T h e supplementary verses end abruptly without the usual verses giving details about the
author, his parentage, date o f writing etc.

Note 4. T h e colophon is simply "The star-planets of the Paulisa siddhdnta ends." B u t after this is
found details about the scribe, his lineage, his time o f writing, viz. 1673 Vikrama Sam vat, and 1538
Saka, equal to 1616 A D , and the purpose of his copying the work, ('for his own reading and helping
others', i.e., other astronomers).

C o l . A I . B . D . # 7 ? l f e ^ ( B 3 ^ ) -mm- ( B addsiJ^^ j

Post-C^olophonic statements:

qfecT ^ I 4fed'llft-<: I dWIcH^^H t'ikM ^^^^^^^^ Wm I

B1.2.3. ^^Wl4c|<l^fH [f?]Tfdrqt

( B 3 . o m . ^ ) M^fe-^llrlchl mm I

(dRsldl 11 SHH^MK-PlcflfH-ll
s|-M^fctij_w4iidRsld II ?fl II
C . IRt c|<|^rHR<Hi4+dl 4aryi^lpTl4>l mM\ I
D. 4c4Ml4c|<|^iMr^{4)dl 4-^f^^lPd*l ^Hlkll ||

Thus ends Chapter XVIII 61-81: A Spurious Supplement entitled

'Computation of the Star Planets in Brief, to the Pancasiddhantika
of Varahamihira
 APPENDIX I
INDEX OF VERSES
3mmteiT9.7 3<tHih*i<;<( 15.8 ^ F J i r a r ^ ^ 18.47
3 T ^ f ? ^ # s n 14.3 31l*<U||(j^Tfe 18.66 ^?5marnj?5fKT i s . 4 7
3T^tfe((yiwi<;q> 14.25 3TRRH^: 18.61 *Hcii<tficiX^^ii 1.24
3{UjMN<Vt-l 15.12 3{IV(rlMl^ki'l<V3.21 *4.<i*|(^^^2.9
3rt?rim?n 1 8 . 8 I cbAdRj^-ti) 18.31

3rfmra%5i.i3 $8thlf^-^m 4.39 chftlui ^ n t : 18.45

3Tfijm*lH 15.24 ?gi?lfSTjOTtq 4.5 * M l i l ^ 3.36
3Tzrsf?TH 18.14 ?gr ^4.50 ^ng?Pn*4.53
3Tqqt1^?^qt9lH, 18.41 ^sfftt^^Esn 14.10c fa-rc>T<(i!^l^1^: 6.5
3i^etl* ^ft "Hc^ 18.5 jai^{<ilc4m 4.32 IpBTOiHBR rlTlR 14.32
ST^g^S^ft^n 18.13 Ip^Sflt 18.52

3 i ^ l t l 4 i l : 10.7 StFST ^^^\H\ 15.10 *HUUHjrl2.1

S P r a r q ^ ^ : 13.7 <j-jijfj41 ci^iMi: 13.17 <JidRIil^u) 4.38

aFOSrteF 15.25 *d<'ftc^i<i 4.35 ^drratTq^ 10.6

fK^T Til^iyK^I'd^ 18.37 fn.
3{HMH<(cl^ 5.5 *rt<M^lT^<>a8.12
amRTOT^rPt 5.1 <i<WM M * i K I 3.25 ^ r a ^ 5.10
W^JH^dlJ? 4.22 g ^ T T ^ T j ^ M 7.3 ^ x ^ M i ^ l 9.13
31M<iMlMiHI 4.24 ^l^-MliRlldl 18.22 gW#TTZT: 18.8
3=lfPCra^^ 14.29 3^?T:Rrmi8.7 ^551^16.10
ar^^^lfg 15.6 g?^n^5njf?r^ 8.10
aii-^-yi* 10.5 3 ? q t # d ^ W i 15.23 lreR5WSpT 8.4
343>'^4lW^ 3.20 IslRrtHW) 4.34
sR^ (ciVfiaVWl 3.16 4cHi(|:7Tf?r8.7
13.31
arif-iild^^ 8.18 <sll*ffy* I ^ 3 . 6
^4^^ 13.8
3?f?^cRT5rr: 18.49 3.2 'I'UH^fd 13.4
3T5Rf?ra48.16 ; 9.26 Ti^if^?ra^ 18.34 MfuidfiH"UlM(rlar 14.41
3?f5En^ 15.29 ^^vcfifs^lt 13.15 MrlMiWI^idl 12.5
34(cl^t1WW 15.2 ^ f ^ " n ? r a 18.58 'lldl^V'^Htld 18.55
3lRlVl*tl<i.?5^ 9.24 Ti|5^<gTF''RL4.43 TRIT^ 2.5
^ H U ' J I f^WilVli 3.28 XrggHeit<Jv1: 13.16 nfefgfrn8.43
18.80 o!RBfe5Sr 5.9 T f ^ ^ ^ 18.43 fn.
3<gl<Vlf*r: 18.65, 72 m/KflHcJcf)! 4.10
3Tg^ r F n 1 l ^ 16.6 'Q;^ftr9n^ 16.1 TJorf^lfePJtnrfTl 3.17

3<feflin,l*<<ilH, 13.38 Tjawfertqi^ 14.27

18.54 h'*<iVIK^18.2 *i*."*id4<4l 17.14

27
368
^llfa^Wd^fa^ 18.30
VTi^Pif: 10.4
m q l ^ i ^ l ^ d 2.3
18.40
t<<c<|Rvm(V1 18.27
y^lRVIs^lMI 4.9
^FgB^6.13
t4.j;,rM>Mm 10.20
g ^ S T ^ s t ^ 13.39
rB5n5RPHT11.2
R^(3i^^t9T 4.27
^T3!cT5BM 4.31
nl<4liT*M 4.51
I^RTFsrfgWFt 14.37
I<4I&I<VI 4.45
ttl<4lct,c|44><ll 4.52
tJiyiebir msH*(: 4.49
grar^w^'sn 4.55
STan?fenPr^ 14.6
dra2;iil*MlcHI 14.19
# a t k f g 14.12
WT^18-15
vsftciw^rai 16.2
^jftdlSEIsf 4.16
^PHdl^v^l 18.60
t:anl5rfRTf^^9.25
^ssrrfgfsri^^ 18.57
?l^l^%gfn 18.29
flsgvsan Ri4il<sll 14.11
ffjjlviill fejtTRI 4.42
d><^IHl ?lf?T 8.13
d<*M^<W4lil 4.41
PANC.ASIDDHAN IIKA
dteHlcH^frh^m 9.14
d^irlP:J4l 4.44
d^l<l5fTOrr 4.4
dsHeJHM*) 13.33
dWUii^ TpT^if 11.5
flqRin^1^ 4.47
d<d1dlH^<<^IRi 15.9
rl^^ppBtfrf 4.46
d4^f>(d 17.6
HIfJ1tn##: 7.6
Tlfg^cnrR 14.10
H'HUi(4M'ai^14.16 (<4i4W!Ami*l 7.4
HHMtiili^Hy 9.18
r l W ' H ' K I 13.2
dWI^ol lOT^TTr^ 13.24
rlftjR.l2R^4.33
Htft MM9(Wf^dl 1.18
HTfiT: chAdehl^l 14.40
t?rfR[?tW 1.12
1?rfiH^I5f^ 3.32
1?fftTO^9I8.3
frfsrafS*'^ 14.30
^aERfferRT 9.19
%8ZRT^^3.27
%8ZF^U?tfS!i 6.9A
feasra^ 9.27
ffl4A<sll W( 14.7
^ f t ^ T ^ t W H 4.28
??TT Jai<4>Vft 4.40
^MimJ**<clVII<15.13
^ I H * > t : < * ^ 13.40
R V W t ^ W??T: 1.19
|5l<j>idyi< ^ 3 ^ 3 . 1 4
BlVUVM^ 9.5
BlVldfamj) 18.59
Bl!|lldf (sUHldld 13.21
?Machtiiui^ 8.8
c^UIHKI 14.36
<<clivr^t|[^ 14.13
^ISTR^Wg^SFTi; 18.36
c5!Ft rnTll 16.4
2!!?lf*rsi^ 18.71
dlVIM^cbia* 3.3
l^e^rwidR4Mti 1.6
f<'J.VMI:Tn? 1.11
(^ioq<y44 11.4
i<H<f>rMM 5.3
f^^T^TssTRHafrar 8.9
IsFmsgiTOsrnzfT 7.i
Rl4c)KJ|(di(Rl 15.17
l<4H<i*ii!i'IK 18.12
^g^M<J>id ^j1(SJIId,9.21
^ 9 ^ t : ) * W I ^ 13.14
f g ^ T l ? 18.63
^^IW<!iiCi 15.21
^<|U||f<4 15.18
^Tilf ^ftqTlfl% 1.23
^[TOtSeFfsg 9.1
^ n t i t ^ ? q i r 18.21
^(4Vl(<Pl:^ 14.31
?J3;9Tfr: flT^I^: 2.11
(ft'^UI Mfl4 ^ 14.4
l 5 ^ ^ f ? r 8 Z m : 5.4
H S ^ ^ f l W 18.44
^jsq^ S^I^-AehH 12.2
qlNf^RcJffl 18.50 fn.
q f ^ f ^ ^ I T 18.50
jfd<j,U|j(rl 4.11
SjeigR^Jlfqcti 14.18
^ > < | R ( m 15.5
fslMfy 3.7
^TRT* 18.76
q ^ q q ^ 3.33
Ht|<f,^|isrfg 18.39 fn.
 AI'P.I: INDEX O F VERSES 369

Hc(<J}c*JI Vifg: 1 8 . 3 9 3.19 ^raqrRrriTT3.i3

Hc|(dlfe|4idl 4 . 1 8 a f ^ q g i ^ r r r f 14.34 4q<R4i 11.1
^yfnWidVWl 9.11 14.33 ^mzM^grat 14.24
4clRfi?: 18.75 A H w i l ^ P e J ^ 5.8
^ r a w j o i 18.67 ^IFRfg^qXTIgt 3.31 i(llV<^+{M^5ll 14.2
qeJiJMel^fir: 18.38 <!i<Wlm^(Mu4l.16
9iri?T %l(MRy^ci 13.6
^ c j c i ^ l l ^ l l a j 18.38 f n . ^^<i^ 13.13
He(VM^|,rui<i 9 . 3 ^*<I<tTIOT2.8 Mlvj<4MJa4c)ivli 13.23
9.2 ^IWEtT^ifiT 9 . 2 0 ^frsR^mrPf 13.18
qciwsrf: 18.11 qsqrmRT 8.15
ifef>?^q3rfHio.i
4KTrfW|ti)<^ 13.11 RSncig^T^ 17.8
Tfeytf^Ht: W12.1
qr^: WIT 14.5 TTSSir^ic#aRT 9.17
Tfg^rf^Fit: ^ 8.2
q T n : ^ifBp^rm 14.14 qsan^iq5rari5.22
<(^VIIVIMH 8.17
feqt[TW 13.35 i W l ^ ^ l i l M 2.10
^oga;^ cT^eRrai 15.19
VlTferf8I6.1
TeT[OPT%552.2
^Rsarrl! sjTsp rTsn i 4 . 8
TR^rarafQ 17.2
y^yid, Istw-ii 7.2 T^TaRm8.6
TOfe^CT^ 18.9
MI^(3VI<'^K<*i 4 . 2 5
H^(^M<lRlf8T4.15 18.73
M^MjSI'ijcT 13.1
Ttp^H^RTRn 17.13 illVWcyg^J 16.5
M^ldUii) 16.11 <l(VMtM*M'^l 4.29
tnnfe;^3.34
M^IVWI ^rf*r: 9.10 "n^g?3l^raj 6.10
MWlRpTT Tr8TtS# 13.42
t|^T9ftfH^<^ 1 8 . 2 3 n ^ : W f ^ d r f 6 . 2 ; 7.5
MI'Hi'fjrl M^i^ 1.9
i4^ltJ^H 18.78 WWR51.IO
ftg^g 13.10
m;*lehl4 trgfi 3.5 (iMeh^J^W^^^g): 1.15
Tft^:iia*M^i 1 8 . 5 3 f n .
q ^ T l ^ 13.41 itnaB^s.i
Ul^iai^VIM^i 18.53
i p f g n f q ^ i t 1.2 <in<t)M:^4ui 3.35
M^4lvi) oqehl'^ 4 . 1 2
1.4
iif4<J.d'J,ul[^4< 9.15 HTBSn^^ 8.11
t f t f a v i i l M * 1.3
T5(^rawri|i.i7 cHl^imw 1 5 . 2 0
5Rra: ^^^nrfir 18.17
f^f^'^'MIM: 15.11 9IfRSnP^ 13.26
5rfei^rsr% 13.32
t^ilWUHUR 13.5 FfSa ^KVIifi'^ 2.13
Mldi^clwAel 13.37
fg^ 3.23 ^ l a j (c4(^c(jin<4l 4.21
s r i n f e s r a g ^ 13.20
TN^^qfiT^ 13.12 d l ^ ^ l f H g^tfe 4 . 5 4
5 f ^ i r ^ 18.62
(4<4 13.28 HM^^iluWI 4.56
5R?n^sfq^ 1 8 . 6 4
i)<ll<^<TgT3.11 [HMlfti^4 11.6
Wl^q^ 12.4
(^Ht^^jjicMi 18.42 i H M I V I d * 4.17
5IPJ3^^18.25
S t r f i l ? ! ? ! ^ 6.12 g ^ S n ^ R F S ^ 3.30

iJl^s^tet 13.9 ^JTf?q?T?W 1.5 ct*'MRdfy 18.4

' l l ^ o B I F T ^ 14.26 oraBti^Tj^ 18.56
^Oji^^ 15.7 ctthlidchehlH^ 1 7 . 1 1 b

tBcHft^5.2 ^='^^33^15.15 craft %ijdqii<iUI 1 8 . 2 0

370 PANCASIDDHANTIKA

f^Hl5)*4lA: 1 8 . 3 3 Vl(Vl(l<*IWI 9 . 4 f<Jnifa^<J 6 . 9

g^ffsnrggsjf 1.21 ^Sgrfn^^ 18.74

gisri^q^1.14 ^ftsmftsn 1 7 . 3 ^Tg>ZI:-^ 17.10

oliSoT 4*IUIHehl'^4.37 ?fllinSJt5^17.1 ^fHHddl 13.3

Vflyi-MSZHT 1 7 . 4 hRhHMA) ?rf?Tf^ 13.36

g t j g ^ ^ P l ^ 15.14 \ijfhi H'<i<4l8J 17.11 13.30

cJ^iJJ4H^ 4.30 8.5 TRfeHT^: !iHVIIt'^5.6

raVlfdlfe: W^3.10 ^H^l: -m 4 . 6 WI'Kf^MplR 3.12

raV((d>^H<idl 18.48 7t^1|^4.3 Wtfiran^^ 14.1

ft^Mchcni<jfn 6.3 1^T?W^16.9

M<i^c*4l snHVII"! 1 8 . 1 9
l^^^q^^lni 10.3 l ^ ^ p l ' ^ 18.46 f n .
M<^4l<!^Ul4l 4 . 8
t^^fc<M<4f^| 6.7 iiui^un 18.46
^[^f^^raffcRT 1 8 . 3 5
14.38 fadsl4H4l: 3.18
y^VHIdiilsi 3 . 2 4
fa-c)tlfeiVI 18.6 ffldclviHcdi^: 3.18 fn.
M^Siiflfd M^IVIdl 1 3 . 1 9 , 2 5
1grq%9ITOT 18.79 fadVlly 16.8
^^5Sr ^ 4.48
(y^dH^il^c^A 3.9 ^jpl^^^mid 14.20
H^^LI^d 1 8 . 1 6
[^He<lttq^3.4 ^|>IUT faj^ehsiy 14.15
M4e<^M4ci) 1 8 . 1 0
14.9 ^jfwraff 15.26
H^t^H^: 1 8 . 6 8
R4M<1dl4H 3 . 2 2 ^j^^^wn 15.1
^ f g y T ^ 3 . 2 6
f g ^ l ^ ^ v r p t 10.2 ^cbRvl ^nnt 12.3
yrgiilui^18.3
[^VlPyic)^ 18.70 '4^IVId.4.7
Nra4f^^rw-i 13.22
f^^SJrRt 2.4 Tt?^ 16.3

18.28 ^ w f e r 9.9
q^pafI%^3.8
f g q ^ 18.77 fe(rt<;M(c(H4 6.6
Ht^-feHaU^-iJI 1 8 . 6 9
far^^PHsfrjon 14.39 ^d^lPuidl^R^ 3.37
^fe?Tf^^ 18.18
^d^Hchi 17.12

(^t^df^W^M 4 . 2 0 ^^ItR^ 15.3 ^55>3tTzm 18.24

fl<^^(c;d: 1 3 . 2 7 ?g>efe^ 17.7

^fsra?TF?) 3.29 {{ffiici 7^ 1 5 . 4 WMRfyJ^fflld 17.5

^HTrf?n<rf: 2.12 iTBni?^ 11.3 WyHJilH 13.34

oErm5RTp?rRn#4.26 ^FRZnafel^ 1 5 . 2 7 WJo)^y^H)-^9.16

osmrrsfw^: 4.2 f H d H I (^:4VH 9.12 w^sfir 3.1

oiJehL|<^fi4f^<4y 2.6 ^M<VliaBiVld.6.11

oUlM^^HH 9 . 8 Tn<nfy^<i4<2ti 1 . 8
^M>4^ 1 g ^ : 1.20 ? ^ ^ l ^ B * 5 c ^ 18.37

VI^-^TJrt,HwA 4 . 1 9 f l M d l ^ (^iiiiBi 1 8 . 2 6 ^l^g^^ftfj 1.25

VI<-eh<-UHH3i4 9 . 2 2 ^%I<|U|ivieb 1 4 . 2 1 ^feTftrfH^m 14.77

Vld'^fuifi ^Sf 16.7 flMMU^H 1.7 ?FtS^5g^59t 14.35

VirviidPH'l 6 . 4 W n i S ^ ^ 4 . 3 6 >j!(Hiil4 18.1

!i'lfVIMR(y(iHI<6.8 flMlH'dM^8.14 ^0(yM(d 15.16

^ifynraiTfl^in^ 5.7 f4M<j-H48MM 1 4 . 2 3 ^^{|c|ldfu>cj 15.28

 APPENDIX II
INDEX O F P A N C A S I D D H A N T I K A VERSES
Q U O T E D BY L A T E R ASTRONOMERS

1. Makkibhatta's C o m . on the Siddhdntasehhara of Sripati : PS X1II.36; X V . 17-20 (5 verses)

2. Nilakaritha Somayaji in his Jyotirmimamsd : PS 1.3, 4; X V . 2 0 (3 verses)

3. Nilakaritha Somayaji in \\K Bhdsya on the Aryabhatiya : PS 111.21; X l l l . l , 10; X V . 2 0 (4 verses)

NTlakantha quotes two more verses from the Pancasiddhdntika, which, however are not to be
found in the present edition of the work :

See Nilakaritha on ABh IV.IO :

WIT g ^ l^i^jjil^^gi ^oik^Ihi "^if^ m^m-. I

Again, cljTt>
i)ldPl<^Ri<+)Md: '^M^S -M^tXH. |

4. Paramesvara's C o m . on the Aryabhatiya :

PS X l l l . 12(1 verse)

5. Prthudakasvamin's C o m . on the Khandakhddyaka of Brahmagupta :

PS. X l l I . 2 - 3 , 5-6, 9, 12, 27, 35 (8 verses)

6. Suryadevayajvan's C o m . on the Aryabhatiya : X I I I . 1, 3, 36.

7. Utpala's C o m . on the Brhatsarnhitd of Varahamihira :

PS. I . l , 8-10, 16-22; 11.13; III.I, 10, 21, 25; IV.20-23, 27-28. 30-33, 35-36, 38, 41-44; 48-49;
V . l - I O ; VI.9-10, 15; V I I I . l , 9-18; I X . l ; X I I . 1 - 3 ; XIII.1-34, 39-42; X I V . 3 3 , 39-40; X V . 1 5 ,
18-29; X V I I . 4 - 5 (117 verses)
 APPENDIX III
B H t J T A S A N K H Y A (OBJECT NUMERALS)
Used in the Paiicasiddhantika

aksa 5 carana 4 randhra 9

aksi 2 Jala 4 ravi 12
agni 3 jaladhi 4 rasa 6
anka 9 jina 24 rama 3
atijagati 13 tanu 8 rudra 11
adri 7 Uthi 15 rupa 1
anala 3 tiksnaiiisu 12 lavanoda 4
abdhi 4 darsa 2 vasu 8
amara 33 dahana 3 vahni 3
ambara 0 dik 10 viyat 0
arka 12 dinanatha 12 visva 13
arnava 4 divapa 12 visaya 5
artha 5 divakara 12 veda 4
asva 7 dhrti 18 vyoman 0
asvi 2 nakha 20 sara 5
akasa 0 nayana 2 sasaiika 1
asa 10 naraka 40 sasi 1
ina 12 naga 7 sikhin 3
indu 1 paksa 2 siva 11
indriya 5 bana 5 sitakara 1
Isvara 11 bindu 0 sitarasmi I
utkrd 26 bhava 11 sitamsu I
rtu 6 bhaskara 12 sunya 0
kara 2 bhu 1 samudra 4
ku 1 mandala 12 sagara 4
krta 4 manu 14 svara 7
krti 20 mahi 1 svargesa 11
kha 0 muni 7 himarhsu 1
gagana 0 murcchana 21 hutabhuj 3
guna 3 yama 2 hutasa 3
ghana 4 yamala 2 hutasana 3
candra 1 yuga 4 hotr 3
 APPENDIX IV
INDEX O F PLACES, PERSONS A N D TEXTS
Cited in Pancasiddhantika

Arkasiddhanta : See Saurasiddhanta Bharatavarsa, X V . 2 2

Arhat, XIII.8 M e r u , XIII..5, 12, 18, 21, 27; X V . 5 , 6, 11
Avand, X V I I I . 6 1 Yamakoti, X V . 2 3
Aryabhata, X V . 2 0 Yavana, 111.13; X V . 19
Avantyaka : See Varahamihira Yavanapura, 1.8; III. 13; X V . 18, 25
U j j a y i n i . X I I I . l ? , 21 Romaka, X V . 2 3 , 25,
Kukaranakara, III..37 Romakavisaya, X V . 2 3 , 25
Kuru, XV.22 Romaka-.siddhanta, 1.3, 4, 10, 15; III.35; VIII.l
Ketumala, X V . 2 2 Latika,XIII.9,17,19.26,29,32; X V . 19,20,23,25
Jayanandi, X V I I I . 6 2 Latadeva, Latacarya, 1.3; X V . 8
Padaditya, III.3.S, (34), Varahamihira, Avantyaka, X V I I I . 6 1 , 63, 65
PQrvacarya-s, 1.2, Varanasi. III. 13
Paitamaha-siddhanta, 1.3; X I I . 1 Saka, Sakendra, 1.8; X I I . 2
Paulisa-siddhanta, 1.3, 4, 10, 11 Savitra : see Saurasiddhanta
Pradyumna, X V I I I . 6 2 Siddhapura, X V . 2 3
Saura-siddhanta. Arkasiddhanta, Savitra.
(Brhat)Samhita,XV.10
1.3,4, 14; I X . l ; X V I . I
Bhadravisnu, III.32
H i m a d r i . III. 12
Bhadrasva, IV.22 Horatantra, 1.22
 APPENDIX V
BIBLIOGRAPHY

Aryabha^, C. Nilakanjlia Somayaji

The Aryabhatiya of Aryabhatacarya with the Bhasya of Gargya-Kerala-Nilakaritha Somasutvan,
T r i v a n d r u m , 3 vols., 1930, 1931, 1957. (Triv.Skt.Ser. Nos. 101, 110, 185)
Aryabha^, C. Paramesvara

Aryabhatiya with the com. Bhatadlpika o f Paramadisvara, ed. by H . K e r n , Leiden, 1874

Aryabha^, C. Suryadeva Yajvan

Aryabhatiya of Aryabhata with the com. of Siiryadeva Yajvan, E d . by K . V . Sarma, New Delhi,
I N S A , 1976

Brahmagupta, C. Amaraja

Khandakhadyakam by Brahmagupta, with the commentary called Vasanabhasya by

Amaraja, E d . by Babua Misra, Calcutta, Univ. o f Calcutta, 1925

Fleet. J.F.

T h e Topographical list o f the Brihat Sariihita, E d . (with notes) by Kalyan K u m a r Dasgupta,

Calcutta, Pub. Semushi, 1973

Nilakap^ha Somayaji
Jyotirmimamsa (Investigations o n astronomical theories) by NTlakantha Somayaji, E d . K . V .
Sarma, Hosliiarpur, V V B I S I S , 1977

Prthuyasas, C. Utpala
Prthuyasas' Satparicasika with Bhattotpala's commentary, Bombay, 1864

Shastri, Ajay Mitra

India as seen in the Brhatsaiiihita o f Varahamihira, D e l h i , M L B D , 1969

( Varahamihira and his times, Kusumanjali Prakashan, J o d h p u r , 1991
Sastry, T.S. Kuppanna

Collected Papers on Jyodsha, T i r u p a t i , Kendriya Vidyapeetha, 1989

^ripati, C. Makki Bhatfa

T h e Siddhantasekhara ... E d . with the com. o f Makkibhatta ....

by Babuaji Misra, Calcutta, Univ. o f Calcutta, 2 vols., 1932, 1947
Vakyakaraijia with the com. Laghuprakasika by Sundararaja,

E d . T . S . K . Sastry and K . V . Sarma, Madras, K . S . R . Institute, 1962

 BIBLIOGRAPHY 375

Varahamihira
T h e Pancasiddhantika, the astronomical work of Varahamihira. T h e text ed. with an original
com. in Skt. and an E n g . trans, by T . G . Thibaut and M M Sudhakara Dvivedi, Rep. C h . Skt.
Series Office, Varanasi, 1968
T h e Pancasiddhantika, o f Varahamihira, E d . and T r . by O . Neugebauer and D . Pingree,
Kobenhavn, Munksgaard, 1970, 2 vols.,

Samasasarhhita known through quotations.

Tikanika-yatra of Varahamihira, ed. by V . K . Pandit, J / . of the Bombay Univ., 20 (Arts 26) (1951)
40-63

Vatakanika known through quotations

Vivahapatala, Mss. Nos. 35161,35162, Des. Catal. of Skt. Mss. Vol. IX, Sanskrit University, Varanasi.

Die Yogayatra des Varahamihira [Ed. and T r . by H . Kern] Indische Studien 10 (1868) 161-212;
14(1876)312-58; 15(1878) 167-84 [Text in Roman characters and Tr.]
Yogayatra ... E d . ... by Jagadish L a i Shastri, Lahore, 1944

Varahamihira, C. Rudra
(Brhajjatakam) Horasastram, with the com. Horavivarana by Rudra, E d . S. Kunjan Pillai,
2nd edn., T r i v a n d r u m , 1958 (Triv. Skt. Ser., N o . 91)

Varahamihira, C. Utpala
Brhadyatra of Varahamihira, ed. (with a fragment of Utpala's com.) by David Pingree,
Madras, Govt. O r . Mss. Library, 1972
Varahamihira, C. Utpala
Varahamihira's Brhajjataka with Bhattotpala's com. Jagaccandrika, Bombay, 1874

Varahamihira, C. Utpala
Brhat Sariihita by Varahamihira, with the com. of Bhattotpala, E d . by Avadha V i h a r i
Tripathi, Varanasi, 1968, Varanaseya Skt. Vishvavidyalaya, 2 vols.
Varahamihira, C. Utpala
Laghujatakam, with com. of Utpala and a Bengali T r . by Rajanikanta Acharya, Calcutta, 1910

Abhra, 24
Adar, 24
Adhikamasa, 17
Adityadasa, xxviii
Agastya, xxix
Agastyodaya, xxix, 278-81
Agni, 24
Agra, 113-14, 126, 131,
133,135,136
Ahargana, xxvii, 241, 243
Aharmana, xxvii, 34-35,
51-52, 246-47
Ahurmazd, 24
Aja, 24
Afcjadrkkarma, 143, 148,
150,351
Akfak^etras, 129
Akamsa, 267-68
Ak^avalana, 184, 185
Alexandria, 10, 288
Almagest, 10
Amordad, 24
Amplitude, 114, 126, 131
Anala, 24
Aneran, 24
Artgiras, 4
Anna, 24
Anuvakra, 334, 335
Anuvarnana, 240
Anuvatsara, 242
Apamandala, 236-38
Ardhakapalayantra, 271
Ardharatrika (ratra)-pak$a,
4, 17, 197, 200. 209, 210,
289, 293, 294,311
Ardibahesht, 24
Arhat, 250
Arkagra, 131
Armillary sphere, 272-73
Aruna, 4
Aryabhata, xxvii, 17, 92,
196, 197, 198, 200, 210,
252,289,311
APPENDIX VI
SUBJECT INDEX
Aryabhajiya, xxvii, xxviii,
3, 5, 10, 26, 42, 44, 59,
60, 61, 62, 196, 198, 205,
210,223,289,292,
299,371
Aryabhatiya-bha$ya, xviii
Ascending node, 67
Ascensional differences,
261-62
Ashisvang, 24
Ashtad, 24
Asman, 24
Astronomer, bad, 74;
qualiRcations of, 112
Astronomical observation,
257-58
Asura, 248, 249, 251
Ativakra, 334, 335 Bija correction of VM for
Atri, 4
Audayika-pak$a, 293
Avan, 24
Avanti, xxi, 353. See also
Ujjain
Ayana-drkkarma, 143,
150,351
Ayanamsa, 68, 73
Ayana-valana, 164
Babylonian astronomy, 316
Babylonians, 291
'Bahu', 126
Baladeva, 24
Balava, 57
Banaras, 51, 52, 53
See also Varanasi
'Base', 126, 132, 135
Baudhayana, 139
Bava, 57
Behram, 24
Bhadrasva-var^a, 290
Bhadravisnu, 71
Bhadra (vi^ji), 57
Bhagola, 85-87
Bharata-var$a, 290
Bhaskara I, 4, 62, 129
Bhaskara II, 118,129,207
261
Bhattotpala, 4, 10, 179,
187, 244, 292, 293,
301,310. 5ee also Utpala
Bhau Daji, 10
Bhava, 24
Bhoga-rekha, 272
Bhrgu, 4
Bhubhramana, 249-50
'Bhuja', 131, 132, 133,
143,144, 145, 146
Bhujantara, 54, 209
Bhumi, 24
BhiUasaAkhya, 372
planets, 299
Bimbamana, 189-90, 215-16
Brahma, 4, 5, 24
Brahmagupta, xxvii, xxviii,
4, 5, 196, 197, 289
Brahman, 24
Brahmasiddhanta, 5
Brahmasphutasiddhanta,
xxvii, xxviii. 3, 5, 60, 70,
293
Bfhadyatra, xxix
Bfhadyogayatra, xxix
Brhajjataka, xxviii, xxix,
286
Brhatsamhita, xxviii,
xxix, 3, 4, 10, 17, 22,62
68, 179, 293, 354, 371
Budhacara, 340
Budhasphuta, 342-60
Burgess, J., xix
Caitra-pak^a, 44
Cakrayantra, 272
Calendar reform, 73
Candracchaya, 123-25

Candragrahana, xxvii
5ee also Eclipse, Lunar
eclipse
Candramsa, 269
Candrasphuta, xxviii, 27
Candrasrrtgonnati,
137-51
Canopus, 278-81
Cara, 48-49, 57,98 ff., 261
Cara-karana, 57
Carakhanda, 48, 49
Cara-vinadi, 49, 50,
100,105
Cardinal directions,
269-70
Catui^pada, 57
Celestial equator, 86
Celestial sphere, 270-71
Chaya, 284
Chedyaka, 267-81
Chedyakayantrani, 267-81
Christian Calendar, 73
Comet, 69
Conjunction of the Moon
with a Star, 276-78
Correction for the
Equation of the centre, 54
Cosmogony, 248-61
Cyavana, 4
Daily motion of the Sun
and the Moon, 185
Dak^inayana, 60, 176,
177,248
Dakinottara, 271
Day, duration of, 246-47
Day, lord of, 21-23,
287,291
Day-diameter, 96-98
Day-reckoning, 289
Days from Epoch, 5, 8,10,
11,25, 26, 197, 241-43
Day-time, 34-35, 51-52
Declination, 85-90
Declination of the Moon
87-90
I'ANCASinnHANTlKA
Declination of the Sun,
87-90
Demons, 248, 249
Depadar, 24
Depdin, 24
Depmohr, 24
Desantara, 51-53, 209,
274
Desantara-nadi, 51
Descending Node, 67, 69
Devas, 248, 249
Dhana, 78
Dhanada, 24
Dharma-sastra, 10, 69, 74,
139,251
Dhatri, 24
Dhruva, 286-87
Dhruvakarani, 77
Dhiimaketu, 68
Dig-jya, 113-15
Dikshit, S.B., xix, 10
Din,24
Dinaganana, 288-91
Dina-vyasa, 96-98
Diophantine equation,
293
Directions from shadow,
126-32
Directions, problems of,
76-130
Dragon's head, 67
Dragon's tail, 67
Drekkana, 258
Drk?epa, 187-89
Dj-kepa of the Sun,
219-20
Druma, 24
Duration of a day, 246-47
Duration of the Eclipse,
230-35
Duryavana, 4
Dvadasamsa, 258
Dvapara, 293
Dvivedi, See also 5, 19, 20;
Sudhakara Dvivedi, TS
Dyauh, 24
Dyugana, 7
.'577
Earth, 248
Earth, measures of, 253
Earth, situation of, 248
Earth's shadow, 228-30
Earth-sine, 118-21
Eclipse diagram, 236-40
Eclipse, duration of,
225-27
Eclipses, 195-96, 232-86
Ecliptic, xxvi, 236-38
Egypt 10, 288
Epicycles of the planets,
300-1
Epicyclic theory, 206-9
Epoch, 7, 30, 59
Epoch constant (k^epa)
for Jupiter, 297
Epoch constant for Mars,
297
Epoch constant for
Mercury, 298
Epoch constant for
Saturn, 297
Epoch constant for Venus,
298
Equation of the centre,
47-48
Farwardin, 24
First point of Aries, 73
First sine, 118-21
Five Schools of Astronomy,
4
Five siddhantas, compara-
tive study, xxvi-vii
Ganitakaumudi, 265
Garga, 4
Gargya, 4
Gati, 27, 312 passim.
Gavam-ayana-satra, 60
Ghana, 13, 27, 28, 30, 31
Ghati-yantra, 275-76
Gnomon, 91-220 ff., 267-68
Gnomonic shadow, 35 ff.
90-136, 113
Go, 24
God,250
378 S U B J E C T INDEX

Gola, 261 I$a, 65 Khandakhadyaka, 4, 17,

Golabandha, 272-73 Istakalacchaya, 115-23 197, 198, 200, 205, 209,
Gosh, 24 Itakalagrasa, 232-34 210,289, 293, 310
Govad, 24 Istantya, 118 Kharega, M.P., xix
Govindasvami, 61, 91, 311 Khurdad, 24
Jain religion, 250
Grahanaparilekha, 195-96 Khurshed, 24
Jambudvipa, 290
Grahastodaya, xxvii Kimstughna, 57
Jataka texts, xxviii
Graha-vik^epa, 310 'Koti', 126, 143, 144,
Grahodaya, 309-10 Jews, 10
145,146
Graphical mediods, 261-67 Junction-Stars, 277-79
Kranti, 85-90
Grasa-pramana, 234 Jupiter, xxi, 316-22;
-ksepa of, 297;-mean, Krantivrtta, 86
Great gnomon, 110-12,130 Krta, 293
Greece, 289 294-99;-motion of, 361;-
rising of, 316-22;-yuga Kepa, 8, 15, 30
Greek, 17 Kuhu, 139
Greenwich, 209 revolutions, 296
Jyautiopaniat, 282-91 Kujacara, 328-39
Gri^ma, 65 Kujasphu^a, 357-59
Guha, 24 Jyotirmimamsa, xviii, 3, 4,
5, 289, 371 Kuttaka, 293
Gurucara, 316-22
Gurusphuta, 361 Laghubhaskariya, 61
Kaka, 214-I5;-ofthe Laghujataka, xxix
Hali, 24
Moon, 214-15;-ofthe Laghusaitihita, xxix
Kara, 24
Sun, 214-15 Lagna, 150, 256;-from
Head of Rahu, 68
Heliacal rising of the Kala, 24 shadow, 37-39
planets, 310 Kalabhaga, 309-10, 352-53 Lalla, 261
Hemanta, 65 Kalalokaprakasa, 59 Lambajya, 96-98
Hemispherical Bowl, 271 Kalamanayantra, 274 Lambana 172-75, 187
Herodotus, 17 Kala-rekha, 272 Lambitaparvanta, 221-23
Hoop, 272 Kali, 293 Laftka, 253, 289
Hora, xxviii, 144 Kali year, 9 LatU(odayamana, 216
Hora, lord of, 20-23, 291 Kalidasa, 138 LaAkodaya-rasimana, 102-4
Hora, lords of, 287, 291 KamalodbhaVa, 24 Lafadeva, (Latacarya)
Horasastra, xxix Kapitthaka, xxviii 4, 5, 288
Hora-Tantra, 22 Karana, xxvi, 5, 40, 57-58 Later : See also Modem
Horoscopy, xxviii Karana-grantha, xxvii 'Later' Surya-Siddhanta,
'Hypotenuse', 6, 143, Karanavatara, 3 4,293,294, 331
Karani, 77-80 Latitude,-from cara,
144,145, 146
Karmanibandha, 289 100-101 ;-from shadow,
I^avatsara, 242, 243 Ka^tha, 63 91-92; of planets, 310
Idvatsara, 242, 243 Kasyapa, 4 Latitude-caused triangles,
India as seen by Kaulava, 57 129
Varahamihira, xxviii Kendra, 40 Local, latitude, 268;-
Indra, 24 Kepler, 206 longitude, 274
Instruments, 267-81 Ketu, 68, 69 Lord, of the day, 20,21;-
Instruments for measiuing Ketumala-var^a, 290 of the degree, 23;-of the
rime, 274 Kha, 24 month, 19-23
Intercalary month, 8, 17, Khagola, 92-94, 270-71 Lords,-of the day, 297;-
241-42, 290 Khagolardha, 271 of the horas, 287; - of the
 PANCASIDDHANTIKA 379

months, 260;-of the week- Meru, 248, 290 Navamsa, 256

days, 21-22; of the year, Mid-day shadow 251 Naa-ratnas, xxviii
18, 19,22 Minutes into angles, 240 Naugebauer, xiv, xx, 3, 5
Lunar, 228-35;-days, 290; Modern : 5ee also Later 5ee also NP
-eclipse, 152, 228-33 Modem Surya-Siddhanta, Newton, Isac, 206
4,5, 16,210,216, 293 Nilakantha Somayaji, xviii,
Madhava, 65
Month, lord of,,20-23 3, 4, 248, 289, 371
Madhu, 65
Moon, daily motion, Niraya, 24
Madhyajya, 216-18
185-86;-daily rising and Nirayana, 104
Madhyalagna, 217
setting, 147-51;- true Niyati,24
Magadhadvija, xxviii
motion, 45-47. 5ee atso Node, 67-71
Magan calendar, 23
Mean Moon, True Moon Nonagesimal, 188-89
Magas, 23
Moon-day time, 148, 149, North-polar region, 284
Mah, 24
151 North pole, 251,255, 256,
Mahabhaskariya, 17, 26,
Moonrise, 138 ff., 148, 257,258
49, 52, 54, 60, 91, 131,
149,150,151 NP, xiv, X V , xxii, xxvii,
143,293,310,311
Moons, two, 250 5,6,10,11,15,19,20,21,
Mahabhaskariya-bhaya, 23, 33, 41, 54, 63, 67,
Moon's,-anamoly, 211;-
59 101, 110, 125, 142, 147,
ayana, 141 ff.,-cusps,
Mahado^ah, 60 151, 154, 156, 160, 162,
137-51 ;-declination,
Mahalayapak^a, 64 165, 167, 168, 178, 179,
87-90;-kak5a, 214-15;-
Mahavyatipata, 60, 61, 62 189, 191, 200, 216, 261,
latitude, 69-71;-longi-
Mahayatra, xxix 282, 285, 312, 313, 315,
tude, 269;-luminosity,
Mahayuga, 201 316,317,318,319, 320,
258-59;-nak?atra, 243;-
Makkibhatta, xxviii, 321, 323, 325, 326, 328,
orb, 191-93;-shadow,
259, 288, 371 123-25;-visibility, 137-45 330,331,332,333,336,
Manda-Vrtta, 206 337, 340, 341, 343, 350,
Moonset, 138 ff., 148,149,
Manes, 64, 283-84 355, 357, 362, 363
150
Manu, 4
Marespand, 24 Muhurta, 33
Oblique ascension, 48-49
Marici, 4 Mula-dhruva, 30
Obscuration of Moon,
Muslim, 10, 139
Mars, 309;-mean, 294-99; 232,34
-motion of, 328-29, Nabha, 65 Omitted days, 290
357-59; - yuga Nabhasya, 65 Orbs, 215, 16
revolutions, 297 Na^iyantra, 275-76 Orient Ecliptic Point, 37
Masadhipa, 20 Naga, 57 Original Saura, 210, 216.
Mean, Moon, 198-201; Nak$atra, xxvi, 5, 33-34, 5ee also Saura
-planets, 293;-Sun, 26, 40, 55, 245-46;-Compu-
197-98 tation, 54-55 'Pada', 27, 28, 30, 46
Meher, 24 Nak^atranayana, 54-55 Padaditya, 71
Mercury, xxi, 307-9;- Nakatrasthana, 277-79 Paitamaha, (Siddhanta), xiii,
kepa of, 298; Nak^atra-tithi, xxvii 4, 5, 25, 34, 61,152;
-motion of, 337, 339-50, Narada, 4 241,47; - Content analysis,
359-60;-Sighra of, Naraka-caturdasi, 64 xxvi
294-99;-True, 342-60; Nati, 175 ff., 189-90, Paiicasiddhantika,
yuga revolution, 298 223-25 Content analysis,
Meridian, 271 Natural astrology, xxviii xxii-xxv
380
Panca-siddhantas, 4
5ee also Five schools,
Five Siddhantas
Panchanga, 73
Parahita, 355-65
Parah puru^ah, 24
Parallax, 172, 190
Parallax-corrected New
Moon, 221-23
Parallax correction and
orbital diameter, 189-90
Parallax in latitude, 176,
223-25
Parallax of longitude,
172-75, 187
Paramesvara, xviii, 3,
91,251,371
Parasara, 4
Parasara-Siddhanta, 4
Parivatsara, 242
Paulisa Siddhanta, xiii,
xxi, 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 26, 42, 66, 68, 70, 76
137-51, 152, 172-80,
196, 197, 205, 217, 224,
235, 265, 288, 292, 293,
310, 312-53;-content
analysis, xxv
Paulisa-k^epa, 11
Paulisa-moon, 14
Paulisa-yuga, 16, 17, 18
Paurukutsa, 4
'Perpendicular', 126, 131,
133
Pi, 76-77
Pingree, D., xiv, xvii, xviii,
xxi, xxvii-3, 5, 261
See also NP
Pitamaha,-Siddhanta, 4, 5,
See Paitamaha-Siddhanta
Pitr, 24
Place, problems of, 76-130
Planetary days, 290
Planets,-epicycles of,
300-l;-their situation,
259-60
Poles, 286-87
subjec:t index
Prabhakara, 60
Pradyumna, xxi, 353, 355
Prajesa, 24
Pravaha, 249
Precession of the
equinoxes, 65
Prime vertical, 106, 113,
271
Pfthudaka, xviii, 3, 60,
248, 249, 251, 259, 371
Prthuyasas, xxviii
Ptolemy II, 17, 196, 205
Rahu, 40, 67-71, 152,
186-87, 201-3, 286, 293
Rahu's head, 67
Raivata Pak^a, 44
Ram, 24
Rama, 72
Ramayaiia, 72
Ranganatha, 293, 308
Rashna, 24
R Sines, 86-87
R sine of the Sun's Zenith
distance, 264,66
Rashtriya Panchang, 73
Rasi division, 252
Rasyudaya, 104-6, 266
Ravi, 24 See also Sun
Ravidrkepa, 218-20
Ravigrahana, xxvii
Ravisphufa, xxvii
Reduction to the
equator, 54
Rekhamsa, 268
Retrograde motion, 309
Rgveda, 69, 246
Right ascensional
difference, 102-4
Right ascensions of the
signs, 266-67
Rising and setting of
Planets, 312-53
Rising signs, 104-6
Romaka (Siddhanta), xiii,
xix, 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, II, 14,
26,31,32,42,43,44, 66,
70, 73, 74, 152, 181-197,
205,213, 225, 288,313;-
Content analysis xxv
Romaka-k;epa, 11
Romaka-pura, 290
Romaka-Yuga, 8, 16, 17,
18, 184, 195
Romasa, 4
Rome, 290
Rotation of the Earth,
249-50
l^a^asitimukha, 64
^a^asiti-punyakala, 64-65
Sahas, 65
Sahasya, 65
iSaka era, 9
Sakayear, 8, 11
:akuni, 57
Samakala, Samalipta, 152 IF.
Samaman^ala, 113, 271
Samasasaiphita, xxix
Sama-saAku, 106, 110-12
Samhita, xxviii
Samirana, 24
Samvatsara, 242
l^anaiscara, 69
Sanicara, 322-28
l^anisphu^a, 363-65
l^afikaranarayana, 61
SaAkasya, xxviii
Sankramapa, 66
SaAkrantikala, 65-66
Sartku, 220 ff., 267-68
l^aAkucchaya, 35,
90-136, 113
Sankulipta, 118
:ankutala, 126, 129, 130
^aAkvagra, 126, 129, 131
arad, 65
Sarosh, 24
Sarpamastaka, 59
^asi, 24
l^asitarayoga, 276
Sastra, 24
Sastry, T.S.K., xix, 25,261
$atpaiicasika, xxviii

Saturn, xxi, 316;-k$epa of,
297;-mean, 294-99;-
motion of 322-28,
363-65;-yuga revolu-
tions, 297
^aunaka, 4
Saura (Siddhanta), xiii,
xix, 4, 10, 11, 12, 16,
197-235, 17, 31, 32, 40,
44, 66, 76, 152, 198,
228,235, 289, 293,
296, 300,311,353,354;
Content analysis, xxvi
Sauradina, 356-57
Saura-Saitihita, xiii, xix
Saura-yuga, 198, 201
Savitr, 24
Sayana, 65, 104, 105
Seasons, 65
Secrets of Astronomy,
282-91
Shadow, 3, 8, 115;-at
desired time, 115-23;-
diameter of, 228-30;-
from time, 122-23;-
gnomonic, 35ff.; 90-136
See also Gnomonic
shadow
Shadow-hypotenuse, 126,
129, 130, 135
Shahrivar, 24
Shastri, Ajay Mitra,
xxviii, xxix
Shukla, K.S., xix, 3, 20, 23,
25, 75, 261
Siddhantasekhara, xviii,
3, 240, 371
Siddhanta I^iromani, 32,
43, 44, 49, 63,124,130,
143, 185, 189, 207, 304,
308
Siddhapura, 290
l^ighra-kendra, 302
Sighra-vrtta, 206
Sign, 252
Siihhacarya, 289
Sine amplitude, 113-15
pancasiddhAn FIKA
Sine Co-latitude, 96-98
Sine Zenith distance of
meridian pt., 95, 216-18
Sinivali, 139
l^iiijini, 78
lisira, 65
Sky-sphere, 92-94
Solar-day, 64;-eclipse,
152, 172-227
Solstices, 65
Soma, 4
South pole, 251
Spandarmad, 24
Spheric, 261
Sphujagraha, 301
Sphu^akarma, 300-1
Sphutatithi, 269
Spurious Supplement,
355-65
^raddha-tithi, 244
Sri, 24
l^ridhara, 265
iSrIpati, xviii, 3, 60, 371
Star-planets, Computa-
tion of, 355-65
Stellar sphere, 85-87
Sthira-karana, 57
Suci, 65
Sudhakara Dwivedi, xiii,
xvii, xviii, xx, xxvi, 68,
312. 5ee a/so TS.
Sukla-Yajurveda, 65
Sukra, 65
:ukracara, 312-16
Sukrasphuja, 362
Suk^majataka, xxix
Summer Solstice, 65
Sun, daily motion, 56,
185-86;-declination of,
87-90;-drk?epa of,
219-20; from shadow,
132-36; kaka of, 214-
15;-longitude of, 268;
northward and
southward journey, 273;
orb of, 191-92;-visibility
of, 253-56. See also Mean
381
Sun, True Sun, Solar
Suns, two, 250
Sunset, 121-22
Surya, 4
Siiryadeva Yajvan, xviii,
248, 259, 371
Suryagra, 129, 130, 131,
133,135,136
Suryaprajiiapti, 59
Suryasiddhanta, 4, 10, 16,
17,41,43,44, 52, 53, 54,
60, 61, 64, 182, 205, 308,
309,310
'Siitram', 118
Svalpajataka, xxix
Svalpavivahapa^la, xxix
Svalpayatra, xxix
Svarga, 24
Synodic Cycle, 314-16
Taddhrti,130
Taitila, 57
Tamobimbamana, 228-30
Tantra, xxviii
Tapas, 65
Tapasya, 65
Taru, 24
Thibaut, xiii, xvii, xviii,
xix, X X , xxvi, 3, 5, 80,
165, 300, 312; 5ee a/so
TS
Three problems-Time,
Place, and Direction,
76-130
Tikanikayatra, xxix
Time, after sunrise, 118-
21;-for sunset, 121-22;-
measuring, 274-75;-
problems of, 76-130
Tir, 24
Tithi, xxvi, 5, 14, 32, 33-
34, 40, 55, 245-46
Tithi-nadika, 221
Total obscuration, 235
Treta, 293
Tribhonalagna, 187-89
Tridinasprg-yoga, 66-67
382
Trijya, 78
Triipsaijisa, 256
Trisatika, 265
True, Moon, 27-33,183-85,
203-6;-niotion of Moon,
211;-motion of Sun, 212-
13;-planets, 300, 302;-
Sun, 25-27, 203-6;-tithi,
269
TS, xiii, xiv, xv, xvi, xx,
xxii, 5, 6, 10, 15, 19, 20,
21, 25, 28, 32, 33, 34, 39,
41,44, 47,54, 59, 63, 67,
68, 70, 71, 80, 91, 101,
110, 117, 125, 136,142,
147,151, 153,156,160,
162, 165, 167, 168,178,
179, 189, 191, 200, 201,
214,216,218, 221,223,
230, 234, 235, 244, 246,
282,284,285,294, 296,
299, 300, 301, 304, 307,
310,312,313,315,316,
317,318,319, 320, 321,
323, 325, 328, 329, 332,
333, 336, 337, 340, 341,
343, 350, 355, 356, 357,
358, 361, 362, 363, 364.
See also Dvivedi;
Sudhakara Dvivedi;
Thibaut
Udayantara, 54, 209
Ujjain, 10, 26, 32, 33, 36,
51, 52, 53, 184, 195,196,
197, 198, 200, 209, 210,
212, 251, 252, 253, 254,
255,288,289,294, 353.
Unma^dala, 93, 99, 105,
106,108,150
tjrja, 85
Utpala, xviii, xxviii, xxix,
3, 16, 19,20,21,22,41,
48, 62, 65, 92, 102, 111,
115, 121, 137, 147, 166,
191, 197, 241, 243, 248,
249, 251, 252, 254, 255,
S U B J E C T INDEX
257, 260, 276, 288, 371.
5ee also Bha^otpala
Uttara-kuru-vara, 290 Vimardakala, 225-27,
Uttarayana, 60, 61, 65,
176,177,180, 246
Vagbhava correction, 299
Vaidhrti, 40, 58-63
Vak, 24
Vakra, 309, 334
Vakyakaraiia, 26, 31, 49,
52, 54,77
Vanijya (Vanija), 57
Vara, xxvi, 5
Varahamihira, Life
and works, xxvii-xxix
Varajnana, 288
Varanasi, 51
Vara, 65 Yaksyesvamedhika-yatr
Varadhipa, 18, 19
Varu^a, 24
Vasa, 24
Vasanta, 65
Vasistha, 4, 265
Vasistha, Siddhanta,
4, 5, 10, 13, 15,30,31,
32, 39, 40, 152, 179, 184,
196, 235, 312-53, Contents
analysis, xxvi
Vasistha-moon, 14, 32
Vasistha-Paulisa, 184
Vasistha-samasa-
Siddhanta, 39-
Vasisth^'S^hita, xiii,
xix, xxi
Vatakanika, xxix
Vatesvara, 60, 91, 261
Vatesvara-Siddhanta, 23,
52, 70
Vayu, 24
Veda, 24
Vedaftga-Jyotia, 34, 59,
62, 65, 74, 246, 247
Venus, xxi, 307-9, 310
Venus, ksepa of, 298;
motion of 312-16, 362-63;-
sighra of, 294-99
Vijayanandi, xxi, 354, 3
Vikrama, xxviii
230-35
Viskambha, 59, 246
Visnu, 4
Visnudharmottara, 5
Visti (Bhadra) 57
Vivahapatala, xxviii
Vyatipata, 40, 58-63,
244146
Vyatipata-vaidhj-ti, xxv
Weekday, 287
Winter, solstice, 65
Yajurveda, 246
Yajusa-Jyotisa, 65
xxix
Yama, 24
Yamakoti, 290
Yantras, 267-81
Yasti, 269-70
Yavana, 4, 289
Yavanajataka, 289
Yavanapura, 7, 9, 10, 26
32,33,51,52,53,54,18-
198,288
Yoga, xxvi, 5
Yojana, 252
Yojana-measure, 252
Yogayatra, xxviii, xxix
Yuan Chwang, xxviii
Yuga, 8, 16, 290
Yuga of five years, 241-4
Yuga-cycles, 293
Yuga-pada, 293
Zamvad, 2^
Zodiac, 55